JP2023126354A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can reduce work processes in which to dispose a fixing member in a back surface member.SOLUTION: An engaging member 310 disposed on the front surface of a back surface case 300 can be operated from the back surface side of the back surface case 300 via a second opening 301d formed in the back surface case 300. Thus, the engaging member 310 can be operated from the back surface side of the back surface case 300 to engage a fixing member 320 with an engaging member 310. In the fixing member 320, an engaging part with the engaging member 310 is arranged on the front surface side of the back surface case 300 (a bottom wall part 301) via a first opening 301c, so that it is possible to suppress that the engaging part is operated from the back surface case 300 back surface side and fraudulence is practiced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines are known that include a gaming board, a back member disposed on the back side of the gaming board, and a fixing member disposed on the back side of the back member. (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-33603

However, the gaming machine described above has a problem in that it requires a large number of work steps to arrange the fixing member on the back surface member.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the work process of disposing the fixing member on the back member.

To achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 includes: a game board; a back member disposed on the back side of the game board; a fixing member disposed on the back side of the back member; , which is disposed between the opposing sides from the game board to the back surface member, and is operable from the outside of the opposing space between the game board and the back surface member on the back side of the game board. The fixing member includes a protrusion that is at least partially disposed on the front side of the back member and that engages with the displacement member, and the protrusion and the displacement member engage with each other. , the fixing member is disposed on the back member.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a first member disposed between the gaming board and the back member facing each other, and the displacement on the back side of the first member. A member is arranged.

According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to a surface facing the back member and the game board.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the number of work steps for disposing the fixing member on the back member can be reduced.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the fixing member can be disposed on the back member without being obstructed by the first member.

According to the game machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine according to claim 1 or 2, it is possible to secure a space between the facing displacement member and the game board.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of an operation unit and a game board. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. (a) is a front view of the general winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the general winning opening unit taken along the line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 12(a). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XIII-XIII in FIG. 2. FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in range XIV of FIG. 13. FIG. It is a back view of the general winning a prize unit. 14 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in range XIV of FIG. 13. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame. (a) is a front view of the first unit, (b) is a side view of the first unit, and (c) is a rear view of the first unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit. FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXI-XXI in FIG. 18(b). 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit shown in FIG. 21. FIG. FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. 18(b). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 21, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 21 is a sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVc-XXIVc of No. 21. FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in range XXVa in FIG. 21, and (b) is a sectional view of the first unit along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 25(a). (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in range XXVa in FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 26(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 25(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 25(a). 25(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXVIIc-XXVIIc in FIG. 25(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXVb-XXVb in FIG. 25(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb in FIG. 25(a). be. (a) is a front view of the second unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second unit. 30 is a sectional view of the second unit taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 29. FIG. (a) is a front view of the center frame, and (b) is a side view of the center frame. (a) is a perspective front view of the center frame, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame. 34 is a sectional view of the center frame taken along the line XXXVI-XXXVI in FIG. 33. FIG. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board, and (b) is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the back case, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the back case. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a perspective rear view of the rear case and the board box, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case and the board box. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in a retracted state. FIG. 6 is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the first extended state. FIG. 7 is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in a retracted state. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the first extended state. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. (a) is a rear view of the first link member and the cam member in the retracted state, (b) in the first extended state, and (c) in the second extended state. 50 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 50, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 51. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LVa-LVa in FIG. 50, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 52 is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the LVc-LVc line of No. 52. (a) is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LVIa-LVIa in FIG. 52, and (b) is a front view of the first link member and cam member of the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member. (a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. FIG. 6 is a front view of the lower displacement member in the first position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the lower displacement member in the second position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position. (a) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in range LXIXa of FIG. 68(b), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in range LXIXb of FIG. 68(a). (a) is a top view of the distribution unit, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit. 70(a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 70(a). FIG. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in range LXXIV in FIG. 73. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. It is a front view of a distribution unit and a lower displacement unit. It is a top view of a distribution unit and a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a sectional view of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a sectional view of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a sectional view of a distribution unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit. It is a front view of a decoration unit. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit as seen in the direction of arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit as seen in the direction of arrow XCIIb in FIG. 91. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit. 89 is a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa, and (b) is a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVb in FIG. 89. 89 is a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa, and (b) is a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVb in FIG. 89. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit and the right transmission member in a closed state, (b) in an intermediate state, and (c) in an open state, respectively. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit and the right transmission member in an open state, (b) in an intermediate state, and (c) in a closed state, respectively. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit in a closed state, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit in an open state. (a) is a front view of the rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body as seen in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100(a), and (c) is a side view of the rotating body as seen in the direction of arrow Cc in FIG. FIG. 3 is a side view of the rotating body when viewed from a direction. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body. (a) is a side view of the rotating body with the opening/closing member in the closed state, and (b) is a side view of the rotating body with the opening/closing member in the open state. (a) and (b) are side views of the decoration unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CVI in FIG. 105. FIG. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. (a) is a top view of the ball holder, (b) is a front view of the ball holder, and (c) is a sectional view of the ball holder taken along the line CVIIIc-CVIIIc in FIG. 108(a). It is. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball holder. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a ball holder. (a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotation unit taken along the line CXI-CXI in FIG. 87. It is a front view of an upper displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the upper displacement unit. FIG. 7 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is disposed at an intermediate position. FIG. 3 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is disposed at the extended position. (a) is a front view of the variable part, and (b) is a rear view of the variable part. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in the second embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position. (a) is a front view of a lower displacement member in a third embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member. (a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the first position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the second position. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the third position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the second position. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. (a) is a top view of a distribution unit in a fifth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit. 131(a) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV in FIG. 131(a). FIG. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in range CXXXV in FIG. 134. It is a front view of the rotation unit in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit. (a) to (c) are side views of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. (a) to (c) are side views of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the displacement unit in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the displacement unit. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the displacement unit when a game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the displacement unit when a game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation operation unit. 145 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXLVII-CXLVII in FIG. 145. FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective front view of the 1st link member in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a lower displacement unit. It is a sectional view of the game board in a 10th embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in an 11th embodiment. (a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the line CLIIIb-CLIIIb of FIG. 153(a), and (c) is a front view of the lower displacement member of FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line of FIG. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of a ball receiver in a twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the ball receiver. (a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the CLVc-CLVc line in FIG. 155(b). (a) is a front view of the special winning device in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device, and (c) is a front view of the special winning device in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a sectional view of a special prize winning device. It is an exploded perspective front view of a special prize winning device. (a) is a top view of the special winning device, and (b) is a sectional view of the special winning device along the line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb in FIG. 158(a). (a) is a rear view of the rear case in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along the line CLIXb-CLIXb in FIG. 159(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a back case in a fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a back case in a sixteenth embodiment. (a) is a rear view of the rear case in the seventeenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the rear case taken along the line CLXIb-CLXIb in FIG. 161(a). (a) is a front view of the back case in an 18th embodiment, and (b) is a back view of the back case. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a schematic top view of the game board, and (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of an engagement member in a nineteenth embodiment. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a one-way sectional view taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. 165. It is an exploded perspective view of a back case and a rotation unit in a 20th embodiment. (a) is a front view of the engagement member, and (b) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engagement member. (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case and rotation unit in the twenty-first embodiment. (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engagement member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotation unit taken along the line CLXXIb-CLXXIb in FIG. 171(a). (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a schematic sectional view of the rear case and the rotation unit. (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a schematic sectional view of the rear case and the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective front view of an engaging member and a fixing member. (a) and (b) are front views of the back case. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case taken along the line CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa in FIG. 175(b). 177(b) is a front view of the back case in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177(b) is a sectional view of the back case taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177(a). 177(b) is a sectional view of the rear case taken along the line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII of FIG. 177(b). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board in the twenty-fifth embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board in the twenty-sixth embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board in the twenty-seventh embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the twenty-ninth embodiment. (a) is a sectional view of a general winning a prize mouth unit in a 30th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of a general winning a prize mouth unit in a 31st embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the special prize winning device in a 32nd embodiment. (a) is a front view of the special winning device, (b) is a top view of the special winning device, and (c) is a sectional view of the special winning device along the line CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc in FIG. 185(a). It is. (a) is a sectional view of the special winning device, and (b) is a sectional view of the special winning device along the line CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb in FIG. 186(a). (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member in the 33rd embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the special prize winning device. (a) is a front view of the game board in the 34th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb in FIG. 188(a). It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. 189 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXC-CXC in FIG. 188. (a) is a front view of the game board in the 35th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the CXCIb-CXCIb line in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of a special prize winning device. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 taken along the line CXCIII-CXCIII in FIG. 191(b). (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board in a 36th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board. (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board in a thirty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member in a thirty-eighth embodiment. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb line of FIG. 197(a), and (c) is a front view of the lower displacement member of FIG. 197(a). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the line CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement member in a thirty-ninth embodiment. 199(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and FIGS. 199(b) and 199(c) are sectional views of the lower displacement member. 200(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the fortieth embodiment, and FIG. 200(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line CCb-CCb in FIG. 200(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the forty-first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit along the CCIb-CCIb line in FIG. 201(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the CCIIa-CCIIa line in FIG. 201(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the CCIIb-CCIIb line in FIG. 201(a). be. It is an exploded perspective front view of the back case in a 42nd embodiment. (a) is a front view of the back case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case taken along the line CCIVb-CCIVb in FIG. 204(a). (a) is a front view of the back case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case taken along the CCVb-CCVb line in FIG. 205(a). (a) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the CCVIb-CCVIb line in FIG. 206(a). It is an exploded perspective front view of the back case in a 43rd embodiment. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a sectional view of the back case taken along the CCIXa-CCIXa line in FIG. 208(b), and (b) is a sectional view of the back case taken along the CCIXb-CCIXb line in FIG. 209(a). (a) and (b) are sectional views of the back case. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the back case. It is an exploded perspective front view of the back case in a 44th embodiment. (a) is a front view of the back case, and (b) is a sectional view of the back case taken along the line CCXIIIb-CCXIIIb in FIG. 213(a). (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the back case. It is an exploded perspective front view of the back case in a 45th embodiment. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 111, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 4. A frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front door serves as the opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 5c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top and protruding forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, at the upper left side of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 5c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize winning machine. It is constructed by assembling the opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed in the through holes of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws, etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and at the inside position of the outer rail 77, a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is installed. An arcuate inner rail 76 formed of The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (top left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol increases and the second prize opening 640 is reached. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change or time saving period, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened is changed, and it is longer than during the normal period. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), compared to when the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state), the access to the second prize opening 640 is The ball is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, one winning The first electric accessory 640a may be opened more often than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened and the first electric accessory At least one of the number of times 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is released and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened in one win are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased compared to the normal one.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays a third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that displays symbols in a variable manner, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the first through gate 66 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately displays an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more opportunities to have the first electric accessory 640a of the second prize opening 640 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, the second winning hole can be opened during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a per win, etc. If the state is such that it is easy for the ball to enter 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot onto the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main control device 110 ( A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 may be five.

Further, on the left side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a third winning hole 82 is provided in which a ball can be won. When a ball is won, the third winning hole 82 can throw the winning ball to the first opening 521 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, via the ball throwing unit 600. That is, the third winning a prize opening 82 is arranged in a state in which it communicates with a first opening 521, which will be described later.

A third electric accessory 82a is attached to the third prize opening 82. This third electric accessory 82a is configured to be able to open and close by rotationally displacing with respect to the game board 13, and normally the third electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) and the ball wins the third prize. The situation is such that it is difficult to win the prize at the mouth 82. On the other hand, if there is a determination of a jackpot triggered by a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, the third electric accessory 82a will be opened for a predetermined time (expanded) before, after, or during the jackpot. state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the third winning hole 82. Further, on the downstream side of the third winning opening 82, a sensor device SE1 that detects the passing ball is mounted.

In addition, the timing of opening the third electric accessory 82a does not have to be triggered by the winning of the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 5640, and the opening timing of the third electric accessory 82a does not have to be triggered by the winning of the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 5640. As a result of the fluctuating display of the second symbol that is triggered by this, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, it may be released.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640. There is. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a It becomes an open state (enlarged state) and becomes a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change or time saving, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change or time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a as in the second winning hole 640, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640, so it is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is likely to be in the open state, and the second prize opening 640 can be won. Since the ball is in a comfortable state, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R jackpot by opening the first electric accessory 640a and winning the second prize opening 640.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows players to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 so as to represent the symbol. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning hole 64, for example, It may also be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

A pasting space K1 for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. pasted in the pasting space K1 can be attached to a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 82 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Ru. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operating unit 200 and the game board 13. Moreover, FIGS. 7 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward. In FIG. 8, the upper displacement member 940 is rotated downward from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 9, the displaced state shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is extended from the state shown in FIG. 7 to a first extended position, which will be described later, and in FIG. The respective figures show a state in which they are displaced to a second extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and an upper displacement unit 900, a lower displacement unit 400, a rotation unit 700, and an inner space of the rear case 300. A sorting unit 5a00 and a ball throwing unit 600 attached to the back side of the game board 13 are accommodated.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands up from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

The upper displacement unit 900 is slidably disposed on a base member 910 that is rectangular and elongated in front view and is disposed above the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. The upper displacement member 940 is formed so as to be able to perform an effect of rotating and displacing the upper displacement member 940 while sliding it on the front side of the opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device 81). Note that a detailed explanation of the upper displacement unit 900 will be given later.

The lower displacement unit 400 is slidably disposed on a base member 410 that is rectangular and oblong in front view and is disposed below the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. The lower displacement member 440 is formed so as to be able to perform an effect of rotating and displacing the lower displacement member 440 while sliding it on the front side of the opening 301a of the back case (that is, the third symbol display device 81). Note that a detailed explanation of the lower displacement unit 400 will be given later.

The rotation unit 700 includes a rear base 720 that is substantially rectangular in front view and is disposed on the right side (arrow) of the opening 301a of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300, and a rear base 720 that is substantially rectangular in front view. A rotating body 800 disposed in the game board 13 is provided, and the effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player through a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. Note that a detailed explanation of the rotation unit 700 will be given later.

The ball throwing unit 600 is attached to the back side of the game board 13, and sends game balls thrown from the third prize opening 82 of the game board 13 to the back side of the game board 13 to the first opening 511 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later. A path is formed for the ball to be thrown.

The sorting unit 500 includes a path forming member 510 attached to the back side of the game board 13, a base plate 520 disposed opposite to the path forming member 510 with a predetermined gap formed therebetween, and the base plate. 520 and distributes the game balls flowing down between the opposing path forming member 510 and the base plate 520 to each ball throwing route (second ball throwing route KR2 or third ball throwing route KR3). The game balls sorted by the sorting member 540 are thrown to the lower displacement unit 400. Note that a detailed explanation of the distribution unit 500 will be given later.

<The first decorative body and the second decorative body are arranged at adjacent positions in the front-rear direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16, the general winning a prize opening unit 150 disposed on the game board 13 will be explained.

First, the general winning a prize unit 150 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13, FIG. 12(a) is a front view of the general winning slot unit 150, and FIG. 12(b) is a line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12(a). It is a sectional view of the general winning a prize mouth unit 150 in .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. and a general winning opening unit 150.

The base plate 60 includes a first opening 60a that opens at the center when viewed from the front, and a second opening 60b that opens at the lower side in the direction of gravity of the game area formed by the rail members 76 and 77. . A center frame 86 is disposed in the first opening 60a, and a general winning a prize unit 150 is disposed in the second opening 60b. Further, a sticker with decorations (patterns, designs, etc.) formed on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) is attached to the base plate 60, so that the decoration can be visually recognized by the player. Note that the decoration on the front side of the base plate 60 is not limited to a sticker, and decoration may be printed (painted) on the front side of the base plate 60.

The general prize winning opening unit 150 is arranged in the game area of the game board 13 (the front of the base board 60), and is capable of changing the path of the game ball flowing down the game area. In addition, the general winning a prize opening unit 150 has an end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B) with respect to the gaming area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. It is placed along the section. Note that in FIGS. 13 to 16, the seal provided on the base plate 60 is shown with the reference numeral 60c as a decorative member. Further, in this embodiment, a character (person) is drawn on the decorative member 60c.

The general winning a prize opening unit 150 includes a main body part 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front, and a first standing part 152 that stands from the end of the main body part 151 to the front side (in the direction of arrow F). A second upright portion 153 extends from the upper end in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction side) of the first upright portion 152 toward the center of the gaming area, and a second upright portion 153 is provided on the back side of the main body portion 151. It mainly includes a decorative member 154 and a plurality (three in this embodiment) of general winning openings 63 formed on the front side of the main body part 151.

The main body portion 151 is set to have an outer shape slightly larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b that is opened in the thickness direction of the base plate 60, and is covered with the second opening 60b. is placed on the front side. In addition, the second opening 60b allows the game ball flowing into the general prize opening 63 provided in the main body part 151 to be sent to the back side of the game board 13 (base board 60). Furthermore, the main body part 151 has an inclined surface 151a that is inclined toward the base plate 60 as it goes from the inner part to the outer end in a front view, and a recess provided in the back surface on the base plate 60 side (arrow B direction side). 151b, and a back surface portion 151d forming the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recessed portion 151b.

The inclined surface 151a is formed to be inclined at approximately 30 degrees with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be brought into contact with the slope 151a and flowed down along the slope of the slope 151a, and can be moved to the front side of the main body part 151.

Here, if the inclined surface 151a is not formed at the end of the main body part 151 and the side surface of the main body part 151 is formed perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60, the playing area of the game board 13 may be There is a possibility that the game ball that hits (collides with) the side surface of the main body part 151 from a direction perpendicular to the main body part 151, and that the game ball that hits it rebounds in the opposite direction to the flowing direction.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inclined surface 151a allows the game ball that contacts the side surface of the main body part 151 to be moved to the front side of the main body part, so that the game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily prevented from flowing down. stagnation can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body part 151 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150.

The back surface portion 151d is the back surface of the main body portion 151 as described above, and is formed with a constant width around the recessed portion 151b when viewed from the back. In addition, the back surface portion 151d is disposed in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) in a state in which the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60.

The recessed portion 151b is recessed toward the front side (arrow F direction side). Further, the recessed portion 151b has a recessed bottom surface 151b2 serving as a bottom surface in the recessed direction, and an inner surface 151b3 that stands up from the outer edge of the recessed bottom surface 151b2 toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B).

The recessed bottom surface 151b2 is an adhesive surface for a decorative member 154, which will be described later, and is formed as a plane parallel to the front surface of the main body portion 151. Thereby, when the decoration of the decorative member 154 is visually recognized through the main body portion 151, the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be uniformly recognized.

The inner surface 151b3 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) when viewed from the front. Further, the shape of the inner surface 151b3 when viewed from the front is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154, which will be described later. Thereby, when the decorative member 154 is disposed in the recessed portion 151b, it is possible to suppress the decorative member 154 from protruding to the outside of the recessed portion 151b. Therefore, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the back side part 151d and the base plate 60, so that the back side part 151d of the main body part 151 and the base plate 60 are separated. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the main body portion 151 from protruding toward the front side with respect to the base plate 60 compared to the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body part 151 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150.

The recess 151b is a recess that accommodates a decorative member 154, which will be described later, in its recessed space, and the recess depth (recess distance toward the front side (direction of arrow F)) is greater than the thickness of the decorative member 154. It is set large. Further, the recess 151b is recessed along the shape of the end of the main body 151 at a position spaced a certain distance inside the main body 151 from the end of the main body 151 when viewed from the front.

Therefore, when the decorative member 154 is disposed inside the recessed portion 151b, the back surface of the decorative member 154 can be prevented from protruding further to the back side than the main body portion 151. Therefore, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the concave bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60, so that the back surface 151d of the main body part 151 and the base plate 60 are separated. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the main body portion 151 from protruding toward the front side relative to the base plate 60 compared to the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from above the main body part 151 in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow U) to the front of the main body part 151 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150.

The first standing portion 152 is erected from the end of the main body portion 151 on the end side of the gaming area (on the inner rail 76 side) to the front side (on the arrow F direction side). The first erected portion 152 has an erected dimension set to be approximately the same as the width dimension in the erected direction of the inner rail 76 erected in front of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Further, the distance between the first upright portion 152 and the glass unit 16 of the front door 5 that covers the front side of the game board 13 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body part 151 can be caused to collide with the first upright part 152 at the lower end of the game area in the direction of gravity. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body part 151 can be prevented from colliding with the inner rail 76, and the inner rail 76 can be prevented from colliding with the game ball and being bent.

Here, the space between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 is a space for guiding the game ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. Space for arranging reinforcement etc. between the opposing rails 77 is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to provide reinforcement for the purpose of preventing the inner rail 76 from bending, and there is a risk that the game balls flowing down the gaming area will collide with the inner rail 76, causing the inner rail 76 to bend.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball flowing down the game area to collide with the inner rail 76 by the general winning a prize unit 150 (first standing part 152) arranged in the game area. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distance between the opposing inner rails 76 and outer rails 77 from changing due to bending of the inner rails 76. As a result, the game ball can be stably launched into the game area.

The second upright portion 153 extends from the upper end of the first upright portion 152 in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction side) in a downwardly inclined manner toward the center of the gaming area (first prize opening 64). (see Figure 2). As a result, the game ball flowing down between the opposing inner rail 76 and the center frame 83 (see FIG. 2) hits the upper surface (the surface in the direction of arrow U) of the downwardly inclined extending portion of the second upright portion 153. When the ball is thrown, the game ball can be rolled along the downward slope of the second upright portion 153 and thrown toward the center of the game area. As a result, the game ball flowing down the gaming area between the opposing sides of the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 (arrow L direction side) enters the first prize opening 64 arranged in the center of the gaming area (inflow). You can easily do it.

The decorative member 154 is formed into a plate shape and is adhered to the back side of the main body portion 151. Further, the decorative member 154 has a decoration formed on the front side of the main body portion 151 that is continuous with the decoration formed on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 in a front view. Thereby, the decoration formed on the base plate 60 can be visually recognized as one decoration together with the decoration on the decorative member 154. In this embodiment, a part of the character (person) is drawn on the decorative member 154, and the character of the decorative member 60c and the character of the decorative member 154 can be visually recognized as one character.

Moreover, the decorative member 154 is formed from a light-transmitting material. As a result, the light that has passed through the second opening 60b from the back side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of arrow B) enters the back side of the decorative member 154, and is emitted from the front side of the decorative member 154 (the side in the direction of arrow F). can be done. Therefore, the decoration formed on the front side of the decorative member 154 can be brightened and made visible to the player, and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be easily seen by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the base plate 60 and the general winning a prize opening unit 150 will be explained. FIG. 13 is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line XIII-XIII in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 is formed to have a larger outer shape than the opening shape of the second opening 60b of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. As a result, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the end of the decorative member 154 is located between the recessed bottom surface 151b2 of the recessed part 151b of the main body part 151 and the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). will be placed in Therefore, when the adhesion between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 154 comes off due to deterioration over time, the decorative member 154 can be prevented from falling off the game board 13.

Further, the decorative member 154 has a width that overlaps with the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow FB), which is a circular shape of the base plate 60 into which a protrusion 155 protruding from the back surface of the main body portion 151, which will be described later, is inserted. The diameter of the opening 60g (see FIG. 11) is set larger than that of the opening 60g (see FIG. 11). As a result, a gap is formed between the decorations of the decoration member 154 and the decoration member 60c when viewed from the front due to a misalignment of the arrangement of the decoration member 154 with respect to the main body 151 or a misalignment of the position where the decoration member 60c is formed. can be suppressed. As a result, the player can easily recognize the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

In addition, the three general winning holes 63 provided in the main body 151 are connected to openings 514 to 516 of the distribution unit 500 (see FIG. 71) provided on the back side of the game board 13, and are connected to the openings 514 to 516 of the distribution unit 500 (see FIG. The game ball that has won in the winning hole 63 is thrown to the fourth ball throwing route KR4 of the distribution unit 500. Note that a detailed explanation of the distribution unit 500 will be given later.

Further, in the distribution unit 500, a substrate (not shown) equipped with a light source capable of emitting light to the front side is disposed on a base plate 520 (see FIG. 71), and the light emitted from the substrate is transmitted to the base plate. The light passes through the second opening 60b of 60 and is irradiated onto the back surface of the general winning a prize opening unit 150.

Therefore, the second opening 60b is used as a space for irradiating light onto the path of the game ball that wins from the general winning hole 63 of the general winning hole unit 150 and the back surface of the general winning hole unit 150. This eliminates the need to form two separate openings, one for throwing the game ball and one for passing light, so light can be irradiated across the entire back surface of the general winning a prize opening unit 150. In addition, the general winning hole 63 can be arranged in the entire area of the main body part 151 of the general winning hole unit 150. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the general winning hole unit 150, and also to emit light from the entire area of the general winning hole unit 150 to display the decoration (decorative member 154) of the general winning hole unit 150 to the player. It can be easily recognized.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the decorative decorative member 154 connected to the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is a main body part disposed along the front surface of the base plate 60. 151, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be placed adjacent to each other (close to each other) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). As a result, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are viewed from an angle oblique to the front view of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the direction of gravity of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)). 154, it is possible to suppress the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 from being visually recognized as misaligned compared to the case where the decoration of the general winning hole unit is arranged in front of the general winning hole unit. As a result, the connection between the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be seen by the player in the same positional relationship regardless of the player's viewpoint, improving the design of the game board 13. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the connection of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 will be described in detail. FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 in range XIV of FIG. Note that in FIG. 14, the path of light that is visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As described above, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 are visually recognized by the player as one decoration. Therefore, in order for the player to visually recognize the decorative member 60c of the base board 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration (pattern), it is necessary to suppress the displacement of the two decorations. However, when forming the decoration on the base plate 60 or when arranging the decoration member 154 on the main body part 151, it is difficult to arrange the decoration at an accurate position (same position every time). Therefore, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is arranged on the base board 60, the position of the decoration of the decorative member 154 with respect to the decorative member 60c of the base board 60 is shifted, so that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 There is a problem in that it becomes difficult for players to visually recognize the decorations as a single decoration.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the end portion of the decorative member 154 is arranged on the back side of the inclined surface 151a. This makes it difficult for the player to accurately recognize the connecting portion between the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base board 60 (the connected portion is blurred and visually recognized by the player). Therefore, the player can recognize the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

To explain in detail, as shown in FIG. 14, the connecting portion between the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P1" (see FIG. 14)) is connected to the inclined surface 151a of the main body part 151. It is located on the back side of. Therefore, the light emitted toward the player's viewpoint from the boundary P1 and the connecting part between the front surface of the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P2" (see FIG. 14)) The light emitted toward the player's viewpoint can be reflected at different positions on the decorative member 60c or the decorative member 154 (that is, on the path of the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint). (This can prevent the boundary P2 from being formed.)

Therefore, at the boundary P1, a misalignment of the decorative member 60c with respect to the decorative member 154 is easily recognized by the player as a misalignment of the decoration, and at the boundary P2, a misalignment of the decoration due to a difference in the direction of refraction of light is easily recognized by the player. However, since the decorations that are visible to the player from the respective positions of the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 can be placed in different positions, the positional deviation of the decorations at the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 can be easily recognized at the same position. It is possible to prevent players from seeing the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation of the decoration at the boundary P1 and the positional deviation of the decoration at the boundary P2 from being combined, and the amount of positional deviation of the decoration from increasing and being recognized by the player. As a result, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Furthermore, by arranging the boundary P1 on the back side of the inclined surface 151a, from the player's perspective, the connection part between the decorative member 60c and the main body part 151 (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P3" (see FIG. 14)), A boundary P1 can be placed between the boundary P2 and the boundary P2. Therefore, the boundary P1 can be placed between the misaligned positions (boundaries P2, P3) of the decoration caused by the light being refracted when the light is emitted from the main body portion 151. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the recognized area from being extended due to the position of the decoration being shifted. In other words, the area where the decoration is visually recognized due to a shift in position can be limited to the front of the game board 13. As a result, the misalignment area of the decoration can be reduced with respect to the game area of the game board 13, making it easier for the player to recognize the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

In addition, in this embodiment, the face of the character is decorated on the decorative member 60c of the base board 60, and the body of the character decorated on the decorative member 60c is decorated on the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150. That is, the outline of the decoration is located at the connecting portion of the decoration between the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize the positional deviation of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as the outline of the decoration. As a result, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the face of the character up to the neck is decorated on the decorative member 60c of the base board 60, and the clothing worn by the body of the character decorated on the decorative member 60c is placed on the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150. The character's face (neck) and clothes are decorated with different colors (in this example, the face is skin-colored and the clothes are black). This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are separated by making the positional deviation of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 different in color. Can be done. As a result, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

As described above, the main body portion 151 has a recessed portion 151b on the back side, and a decorative member 154 is disposed inside the recessed portion 151b. Further, the shape of the inner side surface (inner surface 151b3) of the recessed portion 151b is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 when viewed from the front. Thereby, when disposing the decorative member 154 on the main body portion 151, the inner surface 151b3 of the recessed portion 151b can be used as a guide (positioning). As a result, when attaching the decorative member 154 to the main body part 151, it is possible to suppress the arrangement of the decorative member 154 from being misaligned with respect to the main body part 151.

Further, on the back side of the main body portion 151, cylindrical protrusions 155 (see FIG. 15) are formed at a plurality of locations (in this embodiment, three locations (see FIG. 15)). The protrusion 155 is a positioning protrusion that positions the general winning a prize opening unit 150 with the base plate 60 when it is disposed on the base plate 60, and is inserted into the recess 60d provided in the base plate 60. Further, at least one protrusion 155 (one location in this embodiment) protrudes from the concave bottom surface 151b2 of the concave portion 151b, and is inserted into an opening formed in the decorative member 154. Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used for positioning when the decorative member 154 is disposed on the main body portion 151.

Therefore, the protrusion 155 allows positioning when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, and also enables positioning when disposing the decorative member 154 on the main body part 151. Therefore, since the positioning portion for arranging the decorative member 154 on the front side of the decorative member 60c can be the same portion, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 from being misaligned. It can be suppressed. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Furthermore, the protrusion 155 protruding from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 is formed in a region E1 (see FIG. 15) (the region to which the adhesive tape 154a is applied), which will be described later. As a result, when disposing the decorative member 154 in the main body portion 151, with the protrusion 155 inserted into the opening of the decorative member 154, one part of the edge of the decorative member 154 is positioned on the inner surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. By arranging them together, the decorative member 154 can be positioned at two locations with respect to the main body portion 151. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to arrange the decorative member 154 on the main body 151 by aligning the edges of the decorative member 154 at two locations on the inner surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. As a result, the work of disposing the decorative member 154 on the main body portion 151 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the adhesion between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 154 will be described. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the general winning a prize unit 150, and FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 in range XIV of FIG. 13. In addition, in FIG. 15, the range of the adhesive tape 154a attached to the decorative member 154 is indicated by the symbol E1 and illustrated by a two-dot chain line. Further, in FIG. 14, the path of light that is visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line. Note that in this embodiment, the adhesive tape 154a is formed from a light-transmissive double-sided tape and is attached to the area E1.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the adhesive tape 154a that adheres the decorative member 154 and the main body portion 151 is pasted along the edge of the decorative member 154 with a constant width. As a result, in the area to which the adhesive tape 154a is not attached (parts other than the range E1), the thickness of the adhesive tape 154a is increased between the main body part 151 (recessed bottom surface 151b2) and the decorative member 154 (the front surface of the decorative member). A gap (space) with a predetermined width is formed between them.

Further, the adhesive tape 154a is bonded to an area extending from the end of the decorative member 154, passing through the boundary P3 and extending beyond the virtual line PK1 (see FIG. 14) that is orthogonal to the inclined surface 151a. As a result, the light passing through the main body 151 and emitted from the inclined surface 151a is transmitted to the area E1 (decorative member 154 end). As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the general winning a prize opening unit 150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Here, if the player views the game board 13 from a higher position than usual (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity), As shown, the light L exiting from the inclined surface 151a toward the player's line of sight is repeatedly reflected from the front and back surfaces of the main body 151 and passes through the interior of the main body 151. In this case, if the entire front surface of the decorative member 154 is in contact with the main body 151 via the adhesive tape 154a, the wavelength of the light will be changed by the decoration of the decorative member 154 every time it is reflected on the decorative member 154 side. Ru. Therefore, the light that passes through the interior of the main body portion 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a cannot be reflected due to only a wavelength change due to the decoration at the end of the decorative member 154. Therefore, since the decorations recognized by the player from the inclined surface 151a are different from the wavelengths of the decorations visually recognized by the player from the front of the main body 151, the decorations are no longer continuous between the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the adhesive part of the decorative member 154 to the main body part 151 is limited to the range E1, so that the light L that is reflected and passes through the interior of the main body part 151 is It can be made so that it is not affected (the wavelength of light is not changed). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16, the light passing through the main body 151 and emitted from the inclined surface 151a connects the adhesive tape 154a to a portion of the decorative member 154 that is affected by the decoration (a portion where the wavelength is changed). The pasted area E1 (the end of the decorative member 154) can be set as the pasted area E1 (the end of the decorative member 154), and the decoration on the slope 151a that is visually recognized by the player can be easily recognized by the player as being continuous with the adjacent decoration. As a result, the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, the special prize winning device 550 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 17 to 36. First, with reference to FIG. 17, a method of arranging the special prize winning device 550 will be described. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIG. 17, the center frame 86 includes a base frame 86a formed in a substantially circular frame shape surrounding the central opening of the base plate 60, and a protruding portion that protrudes radially outward of the base frame 86a. 86b.

The base frame 86a has a shape that follows the central opening of the base plate 60, and a part of the base frame 86a is inserted inside the central opening, and a portion other than the part of the base frame 86a is shaped like the base plate 60. It is disposed on the base plate 60 in a state of protruding toward the front side.

The protruding portion 86b is protruded from the gaming area of the game board 13 to the right side (in the direction of arrow R) when viewed from the front. As a result, the special winning device 550 disposed on the protruding portion 86b can be disposed on the right side (arrow R direction side) when viewed from the front with respect to the gaming area, and when the special gaming state is entered, when hitting right A part of the throwing path of the game ball can be configured by the special winning device 550.

The protruding portion 86b includes an opening 86b1 that opens in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow FB), and is located above the opening 86b1 (in the direction of arrow U) toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B). It mainly includes a recessed portion 86b2.

A part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 86b1. Thereby, the first unit 551 can be connected to the second unit 552 of the special prize winning device 550 disposed on the back side of the protrusion 86b via the opening 86b1.

The recessed portion 86b2 is capable of accommodating a part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later. Further, a detection device 86b3 capable of detecting passage of a game ball is disposed in the recess 86b2. Thereby, the game ball passing through the portion accommodated inside the recessed portion 86b2 of the first unit 551 can be detected.

The special winning device 550 includes a first unit 551 disposed on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the protrusion 86b of the center frame 86, and a first unit 551 disposed on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the protrusion 86b. The second unit 552 is configured mainly to include a second unit 552.

The first unit 551 has a space (path) through which a game ball can flow down, and a part of the first unit 551 is disposed in the game area of the game board 13. Further, the first unit 551 is arranged on the center frame 86 by a screw inserted through the second unit 552. Note that a detailed explanation of how to arrange the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 will be given later.

Next, the configuration of the first unit 551 of the special prize winning device 550 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. 18(a) is a front view of the first unit 551, FIG. 18(b) is a side view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18(c) is a rear view of the first unit 551. . FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit 551.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the first unit 551 includes a first path member 560 disposed on the front side and a second path member 570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 560. , and a third path member 580 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570.

The first path member 560 includes a front plate 564 formed in a plate shape along the front side of the game area of the game board 13, and a substantially U-shaped cross section with an open upper side (the side in the direction of arrow U). A first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562, and a third receiving portion 563 protruding from the upper end of the face plate 564 toward the back side, and the first receiving portion 561, second receiving portion 562, and third receiving portion thereof. A first wall portion 565 that is formed continuously on the lower side of the portion 563 (in the direction of arrow D) and extends along a part of the edge of the front plate 564; It mainly includes two sets of a second wall part 566 and a third wall part 567, which are formed in a shape and protrude from two places spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance.

The front plate 564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of the game ball formed between the opposite sides of a second path member 570 or a third path member 580, which will be described later, and is formed from a light-transmitting member. Ru. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 via (through) the front plate 564.

The front plate 564 also includes a guide portion 564a that protrudes toward the second path member 570 side (back side (arrow B direction side)).

The guide portion 564a is a wall portion that prevents the entire wall surface of the front plate 564 from becoming dirty due to game balls flowing down inside the first unit 551, and is connected to a second path member 570 or a third path member 580, which will be described later. The ball is extended along the flow path of the game ball flowing down between the opposing sides of the ball. Further, the guide portion 564a is provided in a protruding manner at a position separated by a radius of the game ball from the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551. In other words, the guide portion 564a is provided protrudingly at approximately the same position as the center position of the game ball flowing down the first path member 560. Thereby, the portion where the front plate 564 and the game ball come into contact can be limited to the protruding tip portion of the guide portion 564a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of scratches due to contact with the game ball over the entire area of the front plate 564 and the transfer of dirt attached to the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down inside the first path member 560 via the front plate 564 can be easily seen by the player.

The first receiving part 561, the second receiving part 562, and the third receiving part 563 are parts that receive game balls flowing down from the gaming area above the first unit 551 (in the direction of the arrow U) into the inside of the first unit 551. , the opening on the upper side is set to a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) at the upper end (arrow U direction side) of the front plate 564. Ru.

The first receiving part 561 is set to have a larger receiving width for game balls (width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction)) than the second receiving part 562 and the third receiving part 563. Thereby, game balls flowing into the special winning device 550 are made easier to flow into the first receiving section 561 than into the second receiving section 562 or the third receiving section 563.

Further, the first receiving portion 561 is communicated with a downstream path formed inside the first unit 551. Thereby, the game balls received in the first receiving section 561 are flown down inside the first unit 551. In addition, the downstream path of the game ball of the first unit 551 will be described later.

The second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 are communicated with a downstream path formed inside the second unit 552, which will be described later. As a result, the game balls received in the second receiving section 562 and the third receiving section 563 are flown down inside the second unit 552. Note that the downstream path of the second unit 552 will be described later.

The first wall portion 565 is an inner wall that forms a space in which a game ball is thrown between opposing fourth wall portions 573 formed in a second path member 570, which will be described later. The first wall portion 565 has one end connected to the lower side of the first receiving portion 561 described above, and the other end connected to the lower side of the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 in the left-right direction (arrow LR). The upper side wall portion 565a extends in the upper side wall portion 565a, and the curved wall portion 565b is curved in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the rear and is connected to the upper side wall portion 565a.

The upper side wall portion 565a is an inner wall that covers the upper side of the rolling surface of the game ball when the game ball rolls on the upper surface (surface in the direction of arrow U) of the fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later. It is formed at a position spaced apart above the diameter of the game ball (in the direction of arrow U) in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the game ball.

The curved wall portion 565b is an inner wall that changes the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later, and is formed at a position facing the rolling side end of the fourth wall portion 573. Ru. Further, the curved wall portion 565b is formed in a semicircular arc shape centered on the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall section 573 can be guided to the lower surface side of the fourth wall section 573 by flowing down along the inner wall of the curved wall section 565b, and the ball can be guided to the lower surface side of the fourth wall section 573, and its rolling. The moving direction can be opposite to the rolling direction of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573.

The second wall portion 566 is an inner wall that forms a space for a path branching from the main flow path of the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551, and is a pair of wall portions that protrude from the back surface of the front plate 564. The opposing distance is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the number of paths flowing down the first unit 551 can be increased.

The third wall portion 567 is a wall portion that forms the inner surface of a path branching from the main throwing path (main path SK3) of the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551, and is provided protruding from the back surface of the front plate 564. The distance between the pair of opposing walls is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the path of the game balls flowing down the first unit 551 can be increased.

Further, the downstream end portions of the second wall portion 566 and the third wall portion 567 are arranged on opposite sides of the first unit 551 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Thereby, the game ball can be thrown to both sides of the first unit 551 in the left-right direction from the branch passage described later.

The second path member 570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 571 facing the front plate 564 of the first path member 560, and a fourth wall portion 573 that protrudes from the front of the base plate 571 toward the first path member 560. a fifth wall 574 protruding from the fourth wall 573 at a predetermined distance downward; and a fifth wall 574 protruding from the fifth wall 574 at a predetermined distance downward. A sixth wall portion 575 is formed.

The base plate 571 is arranged at a position separated from the front plate 564 of the first path member 560 by a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to flow down between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571. The base plate 571 also has a first opening 571a, a second opening 571b, and a third opening 571c that open at positions corresponding to the first receiving section 561, the second receiving section 562, and the third receiving section 563, respectively. a fourth opening 571d opening below the first opening 571a; a fifth opening 571e and a sixth opening 571f opening above the fifth wall 574 and the sixth wall 575, respectively; A recessed portion 571g located between the fifth wall portion 574 and the sixth wall portion 575 and recessed on the back side is provided.

The first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 571c allow game balls to flow into the first receiving section 561, second receiving section 562, and third receiving section 563 of the first path member 560 described above. This is an opening through which the back side of the base plate 571 is passed.

The base plate 571 also includes a first rolling part 576, a second rolling part 577, and a second rolling part 576, which protrudes from the lower end of the first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 571c toward the back side. Three rolling parts 578 are provided. As a result, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is transferred to the third path member 580, which will be described later, and the game ball passing through the second opening 571b or third opening 571c is transferred to the second unit 552, which will be described later. Each ball is thrown.

The first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d are covered with a portion of a third path member 580, which will be described later, on the back side. As a result, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is thrown toward the front side of the base plate 571 (in the direction of arrow F) from the fourth opening 571d.

The fourth wall portion 573 projects from the base plate 571 along the lower end of the fourth opening 571d and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Further, the fourth wall portion 573 is formed such that its upper surface is inclined downward as it goes from the fourth opening 571d side opened on the left side of the base plate 571 when viewed from the front to the right side when viewed from the front (in the direction of arrow R). . As a result, the game ball thrown to the front side of the base plate 571 through the fourth opening 571d is placed on the upper surface of the fourth wall 573, and the slope of the upper surface of the fourth wall 573 allows the game ball to be thrown toward the front side of the base plate 571. The ball can be thrown to the right side (in the direction of arrow R).

The fifth wall portion 574 is a portion that becomes the rolling surface of the game ball thrown from the curved wall portion 565b of the first wall portion 565, and the game ball is rolled in a direction perpendicular to the lower surface of the fourth wall portion 573. It is provided in a protruding manner at a position spaced apart downwardly from the diameter, and extends in the left-right direction of the base plate 571 (in the direction of the arrow LR). Further, the upper surface (surface on the arrow U direction side) of the fifth wall section slopes downward as it goes from the curved wall section 565b side (arrow R direction side) to the recessed part 574g side (arrow L direction side), which will be described later. It is formed by Thereby, the game ball thrown from the curved wall portion 565b to the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 can be rolled toward the recessed portion 574g side. Further, the fifth wall portion 574 includes a first receiving recess 574a and a second receiving recess 574b that are recessed downward in the rolling surface of the game ball.

The first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are arranged in parallel in the extending direction of the fifth wall 574. Further, the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are set to have a recessed width and a recessed depth larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, a fifth opening 571e that opens to the base plate 571 is formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the first receiving recess 574a or the second receiving recess 574b passes through the fifth opening 571e and is thrown to the back side of the base plate 571.

The recessed portion 574g is formed above the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the fifth wall 574, and allows the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fifth wall 574 to be held in the recessed portion. The ball can be thrown to the upper part of the sixth wall part 575 formed below the recessed part 574g (in the direction of arrow D) while allowing the ball to flow inside the recessed part 574g.

The sixth wall portion 575 is a portion that serves as a rolling surface for the game ball that rolls on the fifth wall portion 574 and is thrown to the recessed portion 574g, and the game ball rolls downward from the lower surface of the fifth wall portion 574. It protrudes from the base plate 571 at a position spaced apart from the diameter of the base plate 571, and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR) of the base plate 571. Further, the sixth wall portion 575 is formed such that its upper surface is inclined downward from the recessed portion 574g side (arrow L direction side) toward the third wall portion 567 side described above. Thereby, the game ball thrown from the recessed portion 574g to the upper surface of the sixth wall portion 575 can be rolled toward the ball throwing path side formed by the third wall portion 567. Further, the sixth wall portion 575 includes a third receiving recess 575a and a fourth receiving recess 575b that are recessed toward the lower side on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are arranged in parallel in the extending direction of the sixth wall 575. Further, the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are set to have a recessed width and a recessed depth larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, a sixth opening 571f that opens to the base plate 571 is formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b pass through the sixth opening 571f and are thrown to the back side of the base plate 571.

The third path member 580 includes a first covering member 581 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side), and a first covering member 581 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the lower side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side). A second covering member 582 disposed on the back surface of the D-direction side), a first drive unit 583 disposed between the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582, and a second covering member 583 disposed on the back surface of the second covering member 582 The second drive unit 584 is disposed on the back side of the member 582.

The first covering member 581 includes a curved portion 581a disposed on the back side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d described above, and a plate-shaped attachment portion 581b continuous to the lower side of the curved portion 581a. , is mainly provided.

The curved portion 581a is curved to have a U-shaped cross section with the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side open, and the first rolling portion 576 is disposed inside the curved portion 581a. (See FIG. 24(a)). Further, the distance between the curved inner wall surface of the curved portion 581a and the protruding tip of the first rolling portion 576 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the first rolling part 576 can be caused to flow down along the inner wall of the curved part 581a, and can be thrown to the lower side of the first rolling part 576. Therefore, by throwing the game ball to the curved portion 581a that curves toward the back side, the rolling time of the game ball can be lengthened. As a result, even if the rolling surface of the game ball cannot be ensured on a plane parallel to the game area of the game board 13, the rolling speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Furthermore, the lower end of the curved portion 581a is arranged at a position slightly higher than the lower inner edge of the fourth opening 571d. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has been flown down from the first rolling part 576 along the inner wall of the curved part 581a and thrown into the fourth opening part 571d from flowing backward and flowing into the inside of the curved part 581a.

The attachment portion 581b has two through holes 581b1 through which screws for fastening the first covering member 581 to the back surface of the second path member 570 are inserted. Furthermore, the attachment portion 581b includes a columnar body 551a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side. The columnar body 551a has a screw hole bored at its tip for fastening a second unit 552, which will be described later, to the first unit 551. Thereby, the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be fastened together by screwing a screw inserted from the back side of the second unit 552 into the columnar body 551a.

The second covering member 582 includes a second curved portion 582a disposed on the back side of the sixth opening 571f, and a back side wall portion disposed on the back side of the first receiving recess 574a to fourth receiving recess 575b. 582b.

The second curved portion 582a is curved to have a U-shaped cross section with the sixth opening 571f (second path member 570) side open (see FIG. 24(c)). The second curved portion 582a also includes an upright wall 582a1 on the inside of the U-shape, which is erected from the front side toward the back side. Due to the standing wall 582a1, the internal space of the second curved portion 582a is formed as a first space 582a2 on the left side in front view (arrow L direction side) and next to the first space 582a2 with the standing wall 582a1 in between. It is divided into a second space 582a3 and a second space 582a3.

The first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are spaces larger than the diameter of the game ball, and are formed from the front side to the back side. Further, the first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are connected on the back side. Further, the inner surface of the first space 582a2 is formed to be inclined downward as it goes toward the back side, and the inner surface of the second space 582a3 is formed to be inclined downward as it goes to the front side. Thereby, the game ball thrown from the recessed part 571g to the second curved part 582a is rolled toward the back side due to the inclination of the first space 582a2, and the second curved part 582a is curved at the end on the back side. The ball is thrown into the second space 582a3, rolled toward the front side by the slope of the second space 582a3, passes through the sixth opening 571f, and is thrown toward the front side of the base plate 571.

The back side wall portion 582b is a ball throwing path that guides game balls that are thrown into the first to fourth receiving recesses 574a to 575b and pass through the fifth opening 571e and the sixth opening 571f below the special prize winning device 550. This is the wall on the back side. Thereby, the game balls thrown into the first to fourth receiving recesses 574a to 575b can be collected. Therefore, the game balls that have been thrown into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, have passed through the detection devices SE3 to SE6, which will be described later, and have given gaming value to the player, flow down the gaming area again, can be prevented from being given to the player again.

The first drive unit 583 includes a first solenoid 583a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a first variable plate 583b connected to the shaft of the first solenoid 583a, a first solenoid 583a and a first variable plate. It mainly includes a first protection member 583c surrounding the periphery of the protection member 583b.

The first variable plate 583b is a rectangular plate member that is long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and is displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in accordance with the displacement of the shaft of the first solenoid 583a. . In addition, when the first variable plate 583b is extended to the front side, the tip of the first variable plate 583b is inserted into the fifth opening 571e, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess are 574b. Thereby, when the first variable plate 583b is extended to the front side, the first variable plate 583b can prevent game balls from flowing into the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b.

The first protection member 583c is formed into a box shape with the second path member 570 side open, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the first solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b is disposed inside the first protection member 583c. Further, the first protection member 583c includes a plurality of through holes 583c1 that penetrate in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 583c1 is a portion into which a screw for fastening the first drive unit 583 to the second path member 570 is inserted. The screw inserted through the through hole 583c1 is inserted through the through hole 581b1 of the first covering member 581 or the through hole 582b1 of the second covering member 582, and is inserted into the hole drilled in the second path member 570. Screwed together. Therefore, by disposing the first drive unit 583 on the second path member 570, the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582 can be arranged on the second path member 570. Thereby, the screw fastening portions of the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582 can be reduced, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, since the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 can be sandwiched between the second path member 570 and the first drive unit 583, the first drive unit 583 can receive a special prize. If the game ball is forcibly removed from the device 550, the connection between the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 and the second path member 570 is incomplete, and the game ball is removed from the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582. It is easy to make it impossible to pass through the covering member 582. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state where fraud has been committed.

The second drive unit 584, like the first drive unit 583, includes a second solenoid 584a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-back direction by electric power, and a second variable plate 584b connected to the shaft of the second solenoid 584a. It mainly includes a second protection member 584c that covers the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b.

The second variable plate 584b is formed from a plate-shaped body that is long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and is bent into a crank shape when viewed from the front. In addition, when the second variable plate 584b is extended to the front side, the tip of the second variable plate 584b is inserted into the sixth opening 571f, and the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575a are inserted. It is arranged above the recess 575b. Thereby, when the second variable plate 584b is extended to the front side, the second variable plate 584b can prevent the game balls from flowing into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b.

The second protection member 584c is formed into a box shape that is open on the second path member 570 side, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b is disposed inside the second protection member 584c. The second protection member 584c also includes a back side wall portion 584c1 that covers the back side of the ball throwing path formed by the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560. Thereby, not only can a throwing path be formed by the back side wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion 566, but also the second path member 570 can be covered by the back side wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion 566. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent unauthorized members from being inserted from the side of the first unit 551 and tampering with the detection devices SE3 to SE6 disposed on the second path member 570.

Next, the throwing path of the game ball flowing into the first unit 551 from the first receiving portion 561 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXI-XXI in FIG. 18(b). FIG. 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 shown in FIG. 21. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. 18(b). 24(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 21, and FIG. 24(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. FIG. 24(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG. 21.

The game balls flowing into the first unit flow down the game ball main paths SK1 to SK6 in the order of main path SK1, main path SK2, main path SK3, main path SK4, main path SK5, and main path SK6. Alternatively, the water flows from the main route SK3 on the way down the main routes SK1 to SK6 into the sub route HK1 communicating with the main route SK3 and flows down the sub route HK1. Alternatively, the water flows from the main route SK5 on the way down the main route SK1 to SK6 into either the sub route HK2 or the sub route HK3 that communicates with the main route SK5, and flows down either the sub route HK2 or the sub route HK3. do.

In addition, detection devices SE3 to SE6 that detect the passing of game balls are arranged on the sub-paths HK1 to HK3, and the player receives a predetermined gaming value by detecting the game balls by the detection devices SE3 to SE6. Granted. In this embodiment, a game value is awarded to the player based on a predetermined number of prize balls.

As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the main path SK1 is formed by the curved portion 581a of the first covering member 581 and the first rolling portion 576 of the second path member 570 (see FIG. 24(a)). The first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d communicate with each other. As described above, the curved portion 581a is curved and formed to have a U-shaped cross section with the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side open, and the game passing through the main path SK1 is The ball can be diverted to the back side. As a result, when the game ball passes through a space with a limited area in front view (the inside of the first opening 571a or the fourth opening 571d), the amount of movement of the game ball in the left and right direction can be reduced. It is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the main path SK1.Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the first unit 551, thereby increasing the player's interest. can.

In addition, as will be described later, the game balls flowing into the main path SK1 are given a predetermined gaming value to the player, so the rolling of the game balls that may give the player a gaming value is This makes it easier for people to see. As a result, it is possible to easily provide interest to the players. The main path SK1 is in communication with a main path SK2, which will be described later, and allows game balls passing through the main path SK1 to flow into the main path SK2.

Further, the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 is accommodated in the recessed portion 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86 described above. Thereby, when the main path SK1 is clogged with game balls (flow is slow), the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) can detect the malfunction and notify an error.

Furthermore, the passage width of the main path SK1 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than the opening through which the game ball of the detection devices SE3 to SE7 (see FIG. 23) passes. As a result, if a game ball (illegal game ball) with a diameter larger than the standard game ball diameter (11 mm) is manufactured and an illegal game is performed with that ball, the ball will be sent to the main route. It can be kept inside SK1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegal game balls from flowing down to the detection devices SE3 to SE7 arranged downstream of the main path SK1 and from committing fraud. In addition, by keeping the illegal game ball on the main path SK1, it is possible to detect it with the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and notify an error (illegality). In addition, fraud in this case means that an illegal game ball is inserted into the opening of any of the detection devices SE3 to SE7, the detection devices SE3 to SE7 continue to detect it, and the illegal game ball is paid out (gaming value). It is to obtain.

The main path SK2 is a space formed between the first wall 565 of the first path member 560 and the fourth wall 573 of the second path member 570. The game balls flowing into the main path SK2 roll on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 and flow down. As described above, the fourth wall portion 573 extends in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrow LR) and is formed to be inclined downward as it moves away from the fourth opening portion 571d.

Therefore, the above-mentioned curved portion 581a (the curved path toward the back side) is formed at the switching portion of the throwing direction of the game ball (the connecting portion between the main path SK1 and the main path SK2), so that the player can It is possible to prevent losing sight of the game ball flowing down the SK1. That is, when a path that curves toward the back side is formed in the middle of a straight ball throwing path (for example, main path SK2) extending in the left-right direction, the game ball rolling with a constant acceleration on the curved path Since the acceleration is changed (decreased), the line of sight that was following the game ball may end up ahead of the game ball, which may cause the player to lose sight of the game ball.

On the other hand, since the rolling direction of the game ball is switched and a curved path toward the back side is formed in the part where the rolling speed of the game ball is originally slowed down, the player's line of sight is ahead of the game ball. It is possible to suppress the player from losing sight of the game ball.

In addition, the curved portion 581a, which is the inner wall of the main path SK1, is on the left side (in the direction of the arrow L) of the first unit 551, which is disposed slightly to the right (in the direction of the arrow R) with respect to the center of the game board 13 in the left-right direction. (side end). Therefore, a curved path (main path SK1) to the back side is formed on the side where the first unit 551 is easily visible to the player located in front of the game board 13, so that the player can move from the main path SK1 to the main path SK1. It is possible to easily prevent losing sight of a game ball passing through SK2.

Further, the main route SK2 is communicated with a curved route WK1, and via the curved route WK1, is communicated with a main route SK3, which will be described later. Thereby, the game ball passing through the main path SK2 flows into the main path SK3 via the curved path WK1. Note that a detailed explanation of the curved path WK1 will be given later.

The main path SK3 is a space formed between the fourth wall 573 and the fifth wall 574 of the second path member 570. The game balls flowing into the main path SK3 roll on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 and flow down. Further, on the main path SK3, the first variable plate 583b of the first drive unit 583 described above is projected onto the main path SK3 when extended. In the state where the first variable plate 583b protrudes onto the main path SK3, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the fifth wall portion 574 rolls on the upper surface of the first variable plate 583b and is thrown to the main path SK4. Ru.

On the other hand, when the first variable plate 583b is retracted from above the main path SK3, the sub path HK1 in the space formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b formed in the fifth wall portion 574 is Game balls are flowed in. The ball is thrown through the secondary path HK1 to the recovery path formed by the back side wall 582b via the fifth opening 571e.

In this way, the first unit 551 is provided with the first variable plate 583b that protrudes onto the throwing path of the game ball or retreats from the throwing path of the game ball, and the displacement of the first variable plate 583b causes the main unit of the first unit 551 to move. Since it is possible to change the case where the game ball flowing down the path SK3 is guided to the sub path HK1 and the case where it is guided to the main path SK4, the direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 changes. can be given.

In this case, since the game balls flowing into the sub-route HK1 are given a predetermined gaming value to the player, the player can be made to keep an eye on whether the game balls have flowed into the sub-route HK1. Further, the first variable plate 583b is disposed in the middle of the ball throwing path formed in the first unit 551, and is displaced in the player's viewing direction (arrow FB direction). The displacement of 583b can be made difficult to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game ball flowing down from the first unit 551, and it is possible to easily give the player an interest in the game ball flowing down.

In addition, the sub route HK1 is located below the main route SK3, which throws the game ball from the right side (direction of arrow R) to the left side (direction of arrow L), and the secondary route HK1 is located below the main route SK3, and the game ball is thrown from the left side. It is formed in the fifth wall portion 574 that forms a gap with the main path SK6 for throwing the ball to the right side. Therefore, since the sub-path HK1 is formed using the space between the game balls thrown left and right, it is possible to suppress the external shape of the first unit 551 from increasing in the vertical direction. As a result, by reducing the external size of the first unit 551, it is possible to narrow the range in which the player follows the game ball with his eyes, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551. can.

The main path SK4 is a space formed by the recessed portion 571g and the protrusion 568 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing into the main path SK4 comes into contact with the protrusion 568 and is thrown inside the recessed part 571g (back side), and then rolls around the protrusion 568 along the inner surface of the recessed part and becomes recessed. The ball is thrown to the outside (front side) of the set area. That is, the game ball is rolled so as to bypass the protrusion 568. Moreover, the main path SK4 is connected to the main path SK5, and the game balls passing through the main path SK4 can flow into the main path SK5.

The main path SK5 is a space formed by the first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 of the second covering member 582 of the third path member 580 described above. The game ball flowing into the main path SK5 rolls inside the first space 582a2 toward the back side as described above, and then rolls inside the second space 582a3 toward the front side. Further, on the main path SK5, the second variable plate 584b of the second drive unit 584 described above projects onto the main path SK5 when extended. In a state where the second variable plate 584b protrudes onto the main path SK5, the game ball rolling inside the second curved portion 582a is thrown to the main path SK6.

On the other hand, when the second variable plate 584b is retracted from above the main path SK5, the sub path HK2 in the space formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b formed in the sixth wall portion 575 is The game ball is thrown down. The ball is thrown into the recovery path formed by the back side wall 582b through the sixth opening 571f through the subpath HK2.

Further, the second curved portion 582a constituting the main path SK5 is formed to be curved toward the back side as described above, and can detour the game ball passing through the main path SK5 to the back side. Thereby, even if the area in front view is set to a predetermined limited space, the distance over which the game ball can roll can be increased.

Further, the second variable plate 584b is configured to be extended or retracted in a part of the upstream side of the main path SK5 and a part of the downstream side of the main path SK5. Since a curved path toward the back side is formed between the upstream side of the main path SK5 and the downstream side of the main path SK5, the time during which a game ball passing through the main path SK5 may provide gaming value to the player is reduced. You can make it longer. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the time for providing interest to the player.

A sub-route HK3 is connected to the communication portion between the main route SK4 and the main route SK5. The sub-pathway HK3 is a space formed between the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560 and the rear side wall portion 584c1 of the third path member 580, which face each other.

The sub route HK3 is a direction different from the flowing direction of the game ball (the right direction in front view (arrow R direction)) when the game ball flows from the main route SK4 to the main route SK5 (the left direction in front view (arrow L direction)). Further, the lower inner edge of the inlet of the sub-path HK3 is set below the second variable plate 584b (in the direction of arrow D).

Here, when the game ball flows down from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 normally (with no external force other than gravity acting on it), the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 or the sub path HK2. Ru. On the other hand, at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the sub path HK2, the second variable plate 584b is extended, and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, causing an external force other than gravity to be applied to the game ball. When the second variable plate 584b acts, the game ball is pushed out to the inlet of the sub-path HK3 and flows into the sub-path HK3.

Therefore, the first unit 551 is provided with a second variable plate 584b that protrudes onto or retreats from the throwing path of the game ball, and the main path SK4 of the first unit 551 is adjusted by the displacement of the second variable plate 584b. Alternatively, since the game balls flowing down the main route SK5 are guided to either the main route SK5, the sub route HK2, or the sub route HK3, it is possible to change the direction of the game balls flowing down the first unit 551.

In this case, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player by the game balls that flow into the sub-route HK2 or HK3, so the player should pay close attention to whether or not the game balls flow into the sub-route HK2 or HK3. can be done. Further, since the second variable plate 584b is disposed in the middle of the ball throwing path formed in the first unit 551, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the plate member 584b2. As a result, the first unit 551 can be made to watch the game balls flowing down, making it easier for the player to enjoy the game balls flowing down.

Further, as described above, on the upstream side across the main path SK4, the path along which the game ball flows is switched by the first variable plate 583b. Therefore, game balls that do not flow into the upstream sub-route HK1 and are not given any gaming value to the player can be made to flow further downstream to the sub-route HK2 or HK3. Therefore, by allowing game balls that once had the possibility of being given gaming value to the player to pass through the switching part of the downstream path, the player can once again have the desire for the game balls to flow into the sub-paths HK2 and HK3. be able to.

Furthermore, a main path SK4 that curves toward the back side is provided between the main path SK3 and the main path SK5 where the path along which the game ball flows is switched. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled within a predetermined range when viewed from the front, making it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball. That is, by having the player recognize the position of the game ball through the main path SK4 after it has flown down the main path SK3, the player can watch the game ball rolling on the main path SK5 connected downstream of the main path SK4. You can easily do it. As a result, the game balls flowing into the sub-paths HK2 and HK3 can be easily seen by the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

Further, at both left and right end portions on the front side of the second variable head 584b, inclined surfaces 584b1 (see FIG. 24(c)) which are inclined toward the back side toward the end portions in the left-right direction are formed. As a result, when the second variable plate 584b is extended at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the sub path HK2 and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b abuts the game ball, the inclined surface 584b1 This allows the game ball to be pushed out to the inlet side of the sub-path HK3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the second variable plate 584b and the first path member 560 by the inclined surface 584b1 and the sub-route HK2, and the difference in the timing at which the game ball is flown down makes it possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the second variable plate 584b and the first path member 560. A plurality of routes (three routes in this embodiment) can be formed to switch between the two routes.

The main path SK6 is a space surrounded by the third wall portion 567 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing down the main path SK6 is thrown to the game area of the game board 13. Therefore, if the game balls that have flowed into the first receiving section 561 do not flow into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, no gaming value is given to the player, and the game ball is transferred from the main path SK6 to the game board 13. The ball is thrown into the game area and recovered from the out port 71 formed on the game board 13.

<Guiding means for displacing the game ball in the front-back direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28, the flow of the game ball from the main path SK2 to the main path SK3 will be explained. 25(a) and 26(a) are partially enlarged views of the first unit 551 in the range XXVa in FIG. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line -XXVb. 27(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 25(a), and FIG. 27(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 25(a). 27(c) is a schematic sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXVIIc-XXVIIc in FIG. 25(a). 28(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXVb-XXVb in FIG. 25(a), and FIG. 28(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb in FIG. 551 is a schematic cross-sectional view. In addition, in FIG. 26, a game ball flowing down the curved path WK1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 28, the main path SK2, the main path SK3, and the curved path WK1 each have a first recess that is recessed in the base plate 571 of the second path member 570 and has an arcuate cross section toward the back side. 571h, a second recess 571i and a third recess 571j, a first step 571k protruding stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK2 to the front side, and a second step protruding stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK3. 571m.

The front plate 564 of the first path member 560 has a first convex portion 564b, a second convex portion 564c, and a third convex portion 564d at positions facing the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j, respectively. It is installed protrudingly.

A dimension L11 between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c (see FIG. 28(a)) is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a distance between the facing plate 564 and the base plate 571 is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball. is set to a value smaller than the distance dimension L12 (see FIG. 28(a)). As a result, the game ball thrown between the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j and the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d is transferred to the first concave portion. 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are brought into contact with each other to slow down the rolling (downward) speed of the game ball. can.

Further, the opposing dimension between the first recess 571h and the first protrusion 564b and the opposing dimension between the third recess 571j and the third protrusion 564d are the opposing dimension between the second recess 571i and the second protrusion 564c. The distance is set to be approximately the same as L11.

Further, the protruding tip surfaces of the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d face the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. The distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28(a)) between them is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball thrown between the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j and the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d is placed in the first convex portion. It can be made to collide with the portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d. As a result, the rolling (downward) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

In addition, in this case, the game balls that have come into contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are flown down inside the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. . Therefore, the game ball flowing down can be guided in the recessed direction of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j.

The stepped portion 571k projects from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK2 toward the front side. Furthermore, the stepped portion 571k is formed on the downstream side of the main route SK2. The stepped portion 571k is set such that the upstream end of the main path SK2 protrudes from the front of the base plate 571 to the front side, and the downstream end is located at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. Set. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be brought into contact with the stepped portion 571k and moved toward the front side.

Further, the step portion 571k is formed as an inclined surface whose upstream end protrudes toward the front side from the upstream side toward the downstream side. Thereby, the game ball that flows down the main path SK2 and comes into contact with the upstream end of the stepped portion 571k can be guided to the front side and flowed down to the downstream side.

Furthermore, the upstream end of the stepped portion 571k is formed upstream of the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564 in the main path SK2. Thereby, the game ball that comes into contact with the stepped portion 571k and is guided to the front side can easily come into contact with the first convex portion 564b.

The first recess 571h is recessed in the base plate 571 constituting the main path SK2, and is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) when viewed from the front. Further, the first recess 571h is formed in the base plate 571 at a position projected toward the front side by the stepped portion 571k. The depth of the first recess 571h toward the back side at the center in the vertical direction is set to be substantially the same as the height L22 of the stepped portion 571k toward the front side (see FIG. 27(b)). As a result, the game ball that is thrown smoothly along the main path SK2 is allowed to flow into the inside of the first recess 571h without being displaced in the recessed direction (back side (direction of arrow B)) of the first recess 571h. be able to.

On the other hand, the game ball that is thrown down the main path SK2 in a wild state is brought into contact with the upstream end of the stepped portion 571k, guided to the front side of the main path SK2, and is guided to the front side of the main path SK2 to form the first convex portion of the front plate 564. 564b. Thereby, the game ball can be thrown inside the first recess 571h while suppressing the wild movement of the game ball.

Furthermore, the first recessed portion 571h has a height dimension Y8 ( 25(a)) is set to the radius of the game ball, and the concavity in the direction perpendicular to the rolling surface of the game ball (the surface on the arrow U direction side of the fourth wall portion 573) on the downstream side of the main path SK2. The height dimension Y9 (see FIG. 25(a)) to the bottom surface is set higher than the radius of the game ball. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 is thrown along the first recess 571h, resistance in the direction of lifting upward in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow U) is applied to the game ball, causing the game ball to roll. The moving speed can be reduced. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball flowing into the curved path WK1 can be made sufficiently small, and the game ball can be made to flow down smoothly.

The radius X11 (see FIG. 27(b)) in the cross section of the first recess 571h is set to a value larger than the radius of the game ball, so that when the game ball is thrown inside the first recess 571h, A game ball can be brought into contact with the inner wall. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the number of contact portions of the game ball that contacts the first recessed portion 571h from becoming two, and it is possible to suppress an increase in resistance to rolling of the game ball due to an increase in the number of contact portions. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from stopping on the main path SK2.

The first convex portion 564b formed at a position facing the first concave portion 571h is directed from the upstream end of the first concave portion 571h to the throwing direction of the game ball along the main path SK2 (direction of arrow R in FIG. 27(b)). The balls are formed at positions spaced apart from each other, and the distance value is set to be smaller than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b and can be easily thrown inside the first recessed portion 571h.

The second recess 571i is recessed in the base plate 571 of the curved path WK1, and has an elliptical outer shape that is elongated in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction) when viewed from the front. Further, the center position of the second recessed portion 571i in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) when viewed from the front is set at an intermediate position of the curved path WK1. Furthermore, the second recess 571i is formed at a center position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in a front view in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the curved path WK1.

In addition, the main path SK1, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK2 are all set to have the same width dimension L18 (see FIG. 25(a)) that is perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball when viewed from the front. The width dimension L18 is set to approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball.

Further, the maximum width of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j in the transverse direction when viewed from the front is set to approximately 1/2 of the width L18 described above. As a result, the center of the game ball passing through each path (main path SK1, curved path WK1, and main path SK2) can be caused to pass through the front side of the first recess 571h, second recess 571i, and third recess 571j. , it is possible to easily throw the game ball inside the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j.

The stepped portion 571m projects from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK3 toward the front side. Furthermore, the stepped portion 571m is formed on the upstream side of the main route SK3. The stepped portion 571m has a downstream end of the main route SK3 set at a position protruding toward the front side of the base plate 571, and an upstream end set at the same position as the back side of the curved route WK1. Ru. Thereby, after the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 is thrown downstream from the stepped portion 571m, it can be suppressed from flowing backward (rebounding) beyond the stepped portion 571m to the upstream side.

The third recess 571j is formed in the base plate 571 constituting the inner wall of the main path SK3, and is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) when viewed from the front. Further, the third recess 571j is formed in the base plate 571 at a position projected toward the front side by the stepped portion 571m. The depth of the third recess 571j toward the back side at the center in the vertical direction is set to be substantially the same as the height L23 of the stepped portion 571m toward the front side (see FIG. 27(c)). Thereby, the game ball thrown along the main path KR3 can easily flow out from the inside of the third recess 571j to the outside.

Further, the end of the third recess 571j on the downstream side of the main path SK3 is the same as the end of the first variable plate 583b on the upstream side of the main path SK3 (on the arrow R direction side end) in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow U). As a result, when the stop position of the first variable plate 583b shifts upward in the direction of gravity due to the displacement (when the first variable plate 583b is disposed above the downstream end of the curved wall portion 565b), By throwing the game ball passing through the main path SK3 along the inner surface of the third recess 571j, the ball can be thrown without being caught by the first variable plate 583b. As a result, in the portion where the first wall portion 565 and the first variable plate 583b are adjacent to each other, it is no longer necessary to arrange the first variable plate 583b downward, and it is possible to suppress the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 from increasing. .

Furthermore, in this case, the third recess 571j has its longitudinal direction in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) when viewed from the front, and is spaced upward from the game ball flowing down the main path SK3. , it is possible to apply resistance in an upward lifting direction to the game ball thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b. As a result, the game ball thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b can be prevented from being caught on the first variable plate 583b.

Furthermore, the first unit 551 has a main path SK2 for throwing the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction (arrow R direction side) with respect to the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and a main path SK2 for throwing the game ball from the main path SK2. The curved route WK1 includes a main route SK3 that throws the ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the main route SK2, and a curved route WK1 that connects one side of the main route SK2 and the main route SK3. Since guide means (second convex portion 564c and second recess 571i) for throwing the game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side with respect to the game board are provided on the inner walls of the front side and the back side with respect to the game board, The game ball passing through the curved path WK1 can be moved to the front side or the back side (the front-rear direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front).

Therefore, compared to the case where the throwing path of the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 is formed on the same plane in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, the game ball accelerated by rolling on the main path SK2 (first path) flows downward. You can slow down the speed. Therefore, since the falling speed of the game ball can be reduced, the game ball that collided with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 returns to the main path SK2, or the ball throw direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the main path SK2 inside the curved path WK1. Shaking (shaking) in the direction of arrow LR) can be suppressed. This allows the player's line of sight to follow the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 in a fixed direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown onto the curved path WK1.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from swinging (shaking) in the horizontal direction (left and right direction when viewed from the front) with respect to the game board 13 when viewed from the front, the curved path WK1 connecting the main path SK2 and the main path SK3 is There is no need to lengthen the path to suppress swinging of the game ball, and the curved path WK1 can be shortened. As a result, the first unit 551 can be accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board 13, and a space for disposing the first unit 551 with respect to the game board 13 can be secured.

Further, the width of the first recess 571h is increased toward the upstream side of the main path SK2 in a direction perpendicular to the downstream direction of the main path SK2 (in the direction of the arrow UD). Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily received into the first recess 571h. Furthermore, since the first recess 571h is set to have a smaller recess width toward the downstream side of the main path SK2, the game ball received in the first recess 571h can easily escape from the same position. That is, the first recess 571h can easily receive the game ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2, and can easily allow the game ball to escape from the same position on the downstream side of the main path SK2. As a result, it is possible to easily throw the game ball to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1 communicating downstream of the main path SK2.

In this case, the concave end of the first concave portion 571h in the downstream direction (direction of arrow R) of the main path SK2 is the rolling surface (the fourth The upper surface of the wall portion 573 is formed at a position exceeding the upper surface of the wall portion 573. Therefore, the game ball that escapes from the first recess 571h can be made less susceptible to the influence of the rolling surface of the main path SK2. As a result, the game ball that has come out of the first recess 571h can be easily thrown to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1.

Moreover, the main path SK2 extends from the fourth opening 571d side toward the curved wall portion 565b side (that is, from the left side in front view (arrow L direction side) to the right side in front view (arrow R direction side)). The space is formed to be inclined toward the front plate 564 side (front side (direction side of arrow F)). Further, the main path SK2 is formed such that its rolling surface (the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the front side. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily rolled on the front plate 564 side, and the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down by the first convex portion 564b, and the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be prevented from flowing backward through the main path SK2 due to the reaction force of colliding with the curved wall portion 565b. . As a result, the game ball can be stably flowed down at the point where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed.

The upper end (end in the direction of arrow U) of the second recess 571i is drawn in a straight line along the rolling locus of the center of the game ball rolling on the main path SK2 (fourth wall portion 573). It is formed at a position in contact with the virtual line IL3 (see FIG. 25(a)). Thereby, it is possible to easily receive the game ball thrown through the main path SK2 at a relatively high speed and flowing into the curved path WK1 into the second recess 571i.

A second concave portion 571i and a second convex portion 564c are formed at the location where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed (curved path WK1). As described above, the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding the protruding tip surfaces of the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d, and the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j Since the distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28(a)) between the opposing sides is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball flowing down between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c is It can be pushed into the second recess 571i in contact with the protrusion 564c. Therefore, the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 (coming out from between the second recess 571i and the second convex part 564c) can be made to flow down along the arc of the inner surface of the second recess 571i.

Here, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 tends to flow down a position closer to the rolling direction of the game ball on the main path SK2. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the inside of the second recess 571i comes into contact with the inner surface of the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second recess 571i when viewed from the front, and flows down. Therefore, the throwing direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be easily directed in the downstream direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the curved wall portion 565b and temporarily stopping the flow of the game ball at the point where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed (see FIG. 28).

Furthermore, since the throwing direction of the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 can be directed toward the downstream direction of the main path SK3, the force with which the game ball collides with the curved wall portion 565b can be reduced. I can do it. As a result, damage to the curved wall portion 565b due to repeated collisions of game balls with the curved wall portion 565b can be suppressed.

Further, the first convex portion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and the first recess 571h is formed on the second path member 570 disposed on the back side.

Here, if a recessed portion (corresponding to the first recessed portion 571h of the second path member 570) is formed in the first path member 560 toward the front side, the first path member 560 It is necessary to increase the thickness of the plate. Therefore, as the thickness of the first path member 560 increases, the transparency of the first path member 560 deteriorates, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the first unit 551.

Furthermore, if a recessed portion is formed on the back side of the bulging portion that partially bulges out on the front side of the first path member 560, the game board 13 It is necessary to increase the gap between the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front side of the glass unit. Therefore, as the first path member 560 moves away from the glass unit 16, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

On the other hand, the first protrusion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and the first recess 571h is formed on the second path member 570 disposed on the back side. , the thickness of the first path member 560 disposed on the front side can be reduced. Moreover, since a portion that partially protrudes from the front side of the first path member 560 is not formed, the first path member 560 can be disposed close to the glass unit 16. As a result, the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560 can be easily recognized by the player.

The second convex portion 564c is located below the main path SK2 (the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573) in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow D), and descends in substantially the same direction as the rolling direction of the main path SK2 when viewed from the front. Formed at an angle. As a result, the game ball flowing down between the opposing portions of the second convex portion 564c and the second concave portion 571i is guided to the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second concave portion 571i when viewed from the front due to the inclination of the second convex portion 564c. can do. As described above, the second recess 571i is formed with a curved recessed surface, so that it abuts the inside of the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second recess 571i when viewed from the front and prevents the falling game ball. The ball can be thrown toward the downstream direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, the game balls can smoothly flow from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.

In addition, the second recessed portion 571i has an end on the lower side (arrow D direction side) when viewed from the front as an imaginary line IL4 ( (see FIG. 25(a)). Thereby, the height of the center of the game ball discharged from the downstream end of the second recessed portion 571i can be set on the virtual line IL4. As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i is thrown in the downstream direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall 565b side to the recessed part 571g (see FIG. 21) side). Therefore, the game ball ejected from the second recess 571i comes into contact with the inner surface of the main path SK3 or the curved path WK1, and the game ball thrown to the main path SK3 collides with the inner wall of the curved path WK1. It is possible to suppress stagnation inside those routes.

Therefore, the downward direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be directed to the throwing direction of the main path SK3 at a position close to the rolling surface of the main path SK3. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 from the curved path WK1 can be suppressed from being thrown in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. As a result, the game ball thrown to the main path SK3 can be prevented from colliding with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 and becoming stagnant.

<Disposing the first member that provides high gaming value on the front side>
Next, the configuration of the second unit 552 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. 29(a) is a front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 29(b) is a rear view of the second unit 552. 30 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second unit 552.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the second unit 552 includes a fourth path member 610 disposed on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) and a fourth path member 610 disposed on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). A throwing path for a game ball is formed between a fifth path member 620 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and a fifth path member 620 disposed on the back side of the fifth path member 620 facing the fifth path member 620. The second unit 552 mainly includes a sixth path member 630 and a decorative member 650 disposed on the side surface of the second unit 552.

The fourth path member 610 is attached to the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the first unit 551 via the center frame 86 described above. The fourth path member 610 also includes a mounting plate 611 formed in a plate shape with a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a mounting plate 611 that stands upright from the end of the mounting plate 611 toward the first unit 551 (front side (direction of arrow F)). A first communicating path 615 and a second communicating path 616 whose internal spaces communicate with the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578 of the first unit 551 are provided.

The mounting plate 611 includes an insertion portion 617 recessed in a circular shape on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) and a through hole formed in the bottom of the recess, and a fifth path member 620. A path-side fastening part 618 and a decorative-side fastening part 619 that protrude in a circular shape on the side (back side (arrow B direction side)) and have a hole into which a screw is screwed on the protruding tip surface, and The plate 611 includes an opening 613 opened in the center and a second insertion part 614 opened outside the opening 613.

The insertion portions 617 are portions through which the tips of screws for fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are inserted, and are formed at multiple locations (in this embodiment, three locations) on the mounting plate 611.

The path-side fastening portion 618 is a portion into which a screw inserted into an insertion hole 632 of a sixth path member 630 (described later) is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the insertion hole 632. Thereby, the sixth path member 630 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The decoration-side fastening portion 619 is a portion into which a screw inserted into a fastening hole 652 formed in a decorative member 650 (described later) is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 652. Thereby, the decorative member 650 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The opening 613 is formed at a position facing the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged in the first unit 551. Thereby, when the fourth path member 610 is disposed on the back surface of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be disposed inside the opening 613. Therefore, when the fourth path member 610 is disposed on the back surface of the first unit 551, it is possible to suppress the fourth path member 610 from increasing in the front-rear direction, and to protect the periphery of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a. It can be surrounded by a fourth path member 610.

The first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 are formed in a U-shape with an open upper side (arrow U direction side) when viewed from the front, and extend in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). . In addition, the first communicating path 615 and the second communicating path 616 have front end portions in contact with the back sides of the second rolling portion 577 and third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551, and The side end is brought into contact with the front side of the end of a first inlet 625 and a second inlet 626 of a fifth path member 620, which will be described later. Further, the first communicating path 615 and the second communicating path 616 are formed to be inclined downward from the first unit 551 side toward the fifth path member 620. Thereby, the game balls thrown from the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578 of the first unit 551 to the first communicating path 615 and the second communicating path 616 are transferred to the first communicating path 615 and the second communicating path 616. The communication passage 616 can be rolled to flow into the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 of the fifth path member 620 .

The second insertion part 614 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, which is screwed into the screw hole 86b4 of the protruding part 86b when the fourth path member 610 is fastened to the protruding part 86b of the center frame 86. It is formed at a position corresponding to a screw hole 86b4 (see FIG. 35) formed in 86b. Thereby, the fourth path member 610 can be disposed on the back surface of the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86.

When the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened together, the side wall portion 612 connects the side surface of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the first unit 551. It is a plate member that covers the side surface of the mounting plate 611, and is erected from the entire end portion of the mounting plate 611 to the first unit 551 side (front side (direction side of arrow F)). Note that the length of the side wall portion 612 erected toward the front side (first unit 551 side) is set to a length such that the side wall portion 612 comes into contact with the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86. As a result, the side wall portion 612 is disposed between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, so that it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. As a result, it is possible to prevent illegal objects from being inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

The fifth path member 620 includes a plate member 621 formed from a substantially rectangular plate when viewed from the front, a first inlet 625 and a second inlet 626 opened in the plate member 621, and a periphery of the second inlet 626. A second standing wall 623 that extends from the periphery of the first inlet 625 to the sixth path member 630 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) extends downward from the second inlet 626 . The first standing wall 624 that extends below the inlet 625 and stands on the sixth path member 630 side, and the fastened portion 627 that protrudes from the plate member 621 on the sixth path member 630 side. Prepare for.

The plate member 621 is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the outer shape of the fourth path member 610 when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the fourth path member 610. The plate member 621 also includes a central opening 622 that is opened at the center when viewed from the front. This central opening 622 is formed larger than the outer shape of the second solenoid 584a in rear view, and is formed at a position corresponding to the second solenoid 584a. As a result, when the plate member 621 (fifth path member 620) is arranged on the back side of the fourth path member 610, the second solenoid 584a inserted through the inside of the opening 613 of the fourth path member 610 is placed in the center. It can be placed inside the opening 622.

As described above, the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 connect the game balls that interlock the first communicating path 615 and the second communicating path 616 of the fourth path member 610 to the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member. 630 (opening for inflow).

The fastened portion 627 is a portion into which the tip of a screw inserted through a fastening hole 633 formed in a sixth path member 630 (described later) is screwed into the fastened portion 627, and is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 633. Thereby, the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are fastened together. Further, the protrusion dimension of the fastened portion 627 toward the sixth path member 630 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a gap is formed between the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 in which the game ball can flow down.

The first standing wall 624 is a wall that guides game balls flowing from the first inflow port 625 between the opposing fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630, and extends downward. It is connected to the second standing wall 623. The second standing wall 623 is a wall that guides the game balls flowing into the fifth path member 620 from the second inlet, and extends in the vertical direction of the plate member 621. Note that the ball throwing path formed by the first erected wall 624 and the second erected wall 623 will be described later.

The sixth path member 630 includes a base plate 631 formed from a substantially rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and a second central opening 634 opened in the base plate 631 at a position facing the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. and an insertion hole 632 and a fastening hole 633 formed around the second central opening 634 of the base plate 631.

The second central opening 634 is formed to have approximately the same size as the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 when viewed from the front, and when the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are combined, It communicates with the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 . Thereby, when the second unit 552 is arranged on the back side of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a of the first unit 551 can be arranged inside the second central opening 634.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the ball throwing path formed by the fifth path member 620 will be described. FIG. 32 is a sectional view of the second unit 552 taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 29.

As shown in FIG. 32, the second unit 552 is formed by being surrounded by the sub-path HK4 surrounded by the first erected wall 624 of the fifth path member 620, and by the second erected wall 623. and a sub-route HK5.

The sub-path HK4 extends downward from the first inlet 625, is bent toward a sub-path HK5, which will be described later, and communicates with the sub-path HK5. Furthermore, a detection device SE7 for detecting passage of a game ball is disposed in a downwardly extending portion of the sub-route HK4. Thereby, it is possible to detect that the game ball has passed through the sub-route HK4. Further, when the detection device SE7 detects passage of the game ball, a predetermined game value is given to the player (in this embodiment, a prize ball of the game ball).

In the present embodiment, the number of game balls awarded to the player (for example, 3) as the game balls pass through the detection device SE7 is determined by the detection device SE3 disposed in the first unit 551. - The number of game balls awarded to the player as the game balls pass through SE6 (for example, 15 balls) is reduced. That is, the gaming value given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection device SE7 is given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 disposed in the first unit 551. The game value is set higher than the game value. This makes it easier to draw attention to the game ball passing through the first unit 551. As a result, it is possible to easily provide interest to the players.

The auxiliary path HK5 extends downward from the second inlet 626 and communicates with the recovery path of the pachinko machine 10 below the second unit 552. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the sub-route HK5 are collected without giving any game value to the player. In addition, the game balls flowing down the sub-route HK4 and detected by the detection device SE7 are thrown to the sub-route HK5 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

The special winning device 550 also includes a first unit 551 made of a light-transmissible material and disposed on the front side of the gaming area, and a second unit disposed on the back side of the first unit 551. 552, the first unit 551 includes a first receiving section 561 into which game balls can be inserted, and the second unit 552 includes a second receiving section 562 and a third receiving section into which game balls can enter. 563, the game balls that enter the first receiving section 561 have a higher gaming value to the player (payout of game balls) than the game balls that enter the second receiving section 562 and the third receiving section 563. will be granted.

Therefore, the routing of the ball throwing paths of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is complicated (for example, the ball throwing path of the first unit 551 and the ball throwing path of the second unit 552 are Compared to the case where the game balls flow down the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 at the same timing, it is easier for the player to watch the game balls flowing down the first unit 551. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 including the first receiving portion 561 having a high gaming value. As a result, the player can see the game ball passing through a path that provides a high gaming value to the player, making it easier to increase the player's interest.

In addition, there is an inlet (first receiving part 561) of the ball throwing route for throwing the game ball to the first unit 551, and an inlet of the ball throwing route (the second receiving part 562 and the third receiving part 561) for throwing the game ball to the second unit 552. The receiving portions 563) are formed at adjacent positions, so whether the game ball flows into the first unit 551 where a high game value is given, or into the second unit 552 where a low game value is given, the game ball It is possible to make it difficult for the player to make a judgment until the inflow occurs. As a result, it is possible to easily keep the player interested until just before the game balls flow into the special winning device 550.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, the arrangement state of the special prize winning device 550 on the center frame 86 will be described. 33(a) is a front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 33(b) is a side view of the center frame 86. 34(a) is a perspective front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 34(b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86 taken along the line XXXVI-XXXVI in FIG. 33. 37(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 37(b) is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board 13. Note that FIGS. 37(a) and 37(b) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 36.

<Fixing means for biasing the first member toward the base member>
As shown in FIGS. 33 to 37, the special winning device 550 includes a first unit 551 that is removable on the front side of the center frame 86 and a removable first unit 551 on the back side of the center frame 86, with the center frame 86 in between. A possible second unit.

The first unit 551 is mounted on the front side of the protrusion 86b with the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a disposed on the back side of the first unit 551 inserted into the opening 86b1 of the center frame 86. will be placed in Further, the first unit 551 includes a columnar body 551a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the second unit 552 side.

The columnar body 551a is formed at a position facing the insertion portion 617 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552, and has a hole at its tip into which a screw inserted through the insertion portion 617 is screwed.

The first unit 551 is fixed to the center frame 86 by screws inserted into the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552. To explain in detail, the first unit 551 is disposed with the protrusion 86b of the center frame 86 interposed between the first unit 551 and the fourth path member 610 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side). Further, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 by screwing a screw inserted through the insertion portion 617 of the fourth path member 610 into the columnar body 551a.

Further, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened together, the screw inserted into the second insertion part 614 formed in the second unit 552 is inserted into the screw hole 86b4 ( (see FIG. 35), the protruding portion 86b and the fourth path member 610 can be fastened together. As described above, the fourth path member 610 and the first unit 551 are fastened and fixed, so when the fourth path member 610 is fastened to the protrusion 86b, the first unit 551 is connected to the protrusion 86b. It will be concluded against.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the vertical opening dimension Y1 (see FIG. 37(b)) of the first opening 60a of the base plate 60 is the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 (second path member 570). It is set slightly smaller than Y2 (see FIG. 37(b)). Further, the distance dimension Y4 (see FIG. 37(b)) from the contact surface of the first unit 551 with the front surface of the base plate 60 to the contact surface of the second unit 552 with the base plate 60 is When the second unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened together, the thickness is set to be slightly smaller than the thickness Y3 of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 37(b)).

Thereby, when the first unit 551, the second unit, and 552 are fastened together, the first unit 551 can be urged toward the base plate 60 side (back side). Therefore, formation of a gap between the front surface of the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to fasten the first unit 551 with screws from the front side of the base plate 60, and the screw fastening allowance is not required on the front side of the first unit 551. The area on the front side can be used as a throwing space for game balls. As a result, a throwing space for the game ball formed in the first unit 551 can be secured.

Further, since the fastening part (column 551a) between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is formed protruding from the back side of the first unit 551, when the fastening part is formed on the front side of the base plate 60, Compared to the above, it is possible to secure a throwing space for the game ball formed in the first unit 551.

Further, since the second unit 552 can be biased toward the base plate 60 (front side), it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wire or piano wire from being inserted between the opposing sides of the second unit 552 and the base plate 60, thereby preventing the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 from being tampered with. can.

Furthermore, since the first unit 551 is disposed on the base plate 60 with screws inserted from the back side of the base plate 60, the front side of the first unit 551 has a fastening allowance (screws are inserted) with the base plate 60. This eliminates the need to form an extended portion (in which an opening is formed). As a result, the entire area of the outer shape of the first unit 551 when viewed from the front can be used as a throwing path, and the throwing path of the first unit 551 can be enlarged.

In addition, since the fastening part between the base board 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base board 60, the fastening part between the base board 60 and the first unit 551 can be removed due to fraud from the front side of the game board 13. It is possible to prevent this from happening. As a result, unauthorized access to the first unit 551 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the connecting portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the head of the screw. As a result, since the player recognizes the configuration for fixing the first unit 551 to the base plate 60, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Further, the first unit 551 is disposed on the base plate 60 in a state where it is biased toward the back side of the base plate 60 by the fixing means (screws) fastened from the back side of the base plate 60. The biasing force acting on the first unit 551 toward the rear side allows the first unit 551 and the base plate 60 to be disposed in close contact with each other.

Furthermore, since the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged in the center frame 86 in a state where a ball throwing path capable of throwing a game ball is formed in each of them, the ball throwing path of the first unit 551 and the second The throwing path of the unit 552 can be prevented from being deviated when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are assembled. As a result, the game balls flowing down inside the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be prevented from stopping in the ball throwing paths of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

Further, the first unit 551 includes a rolling surface (a second rolling part 577 and a third rolling part 578) for causing the game ball thrown to the first unit 551 to flow into the second unit 552. Therefore, if each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is fastened to the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86, an error in assembling the first unit 551 to the center frame 86 will occur, and the first There was a risk that the game ball would not be smoothly thrown from the unit 551 to the second unit 552.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 as described above, so that the error when fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is minimized (when fastened The location where errors occur can be minimized. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly thrown from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

The fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 are arranged at positions overlapping with at least a portion of the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 of the fourth path member 610 in rear view. . Accordingly, the first unit 551 can be removed from the center frame 86 only after removing the fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610. This can prevent the first unit 551 forming the main routes SK1 to SK6 from being removed from the center frame 86 and tampering with the main routes SK1 to SK6.

Further, the protruding portion 86b includes an upright portion 86b5 that stands on the second unit 552 side (folds back) at the end (see FIG. 33(b)). As a result, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86 with the protrusion 86b of the center frame 86 in between, the upright portion 86b5 of the first unit 551 It surrounds the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a which are arranged on the back side.

Therefore, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86, it is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or piano wire from being inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 facing each other. It can be suppressed. As a result, with the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 disposed on the center frame 86, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551.

Further, between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, a portion of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is disposed, and an upright portion 86b5 is interposed. Therefore, a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be disposed using the space in which the upright portion 86b5 is disposed. Therefore, since a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is accommodated between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are placed on the back side. Protrusion can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to easily surround the back sides of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a with the second unit 552, thereby preventing unauthorized access to the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from the back side. 2 unit 552.

Furthermore, since a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is disposed between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the game balls flowing down the second unit 552 are It can be hidden by the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a to make it difficult to see from the player side. As a result, even if the flow line of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 and the flow line of the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 overlap in front view, the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 can be This can be easily seen by players. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 that gives the player a higher gaming value than the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 can be visually recognized by the player. This makes it easier for players to enjoy the game.

Further, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86, the decorative member 650 is disposed to cover the inner side surface of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86. Thereby, it is possible to prevent illegal objects such as wires and piano wires from being inserted into the special prize winning device 550 through (through) the opening of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the first solenoid 583a disposed in the first unit 551 has a central opening formed in the fourth path member 610 and the fifth path member 620 of the second unit 552 on the back side. 622 and inside the second central opening 634 . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the second unit 552 from expanding toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B), and it is also possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires from accessing the first solenoid 583a.

Further, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the second unit 552, it is possible to suppress the second path member 570 of the first unit 551, in which the first solenoid 583a is disposed, from being bent. As a result, the passage of the game ball through the first unit 551 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, as described above, since the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are surrounded and arranged in the opening 86b1 of the protrusion 86b formed in the center frame 86, the load is relatively large (heavy). The first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be supported by the opening 86b1 (projection 86b). As a result, the protruding portion 86b can be prevented from bending due to the load of the special prize winning device 550.

Therefore, since the center frame 86 disposed on the base plate 60 can be suppressed from bending (bending), the position of the first unit 551 disposed on the center frame 86 is misaligned with respect to the base plate 60. can be suppressed. As a result, game balls can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

Further, the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578, which throw the game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552, are formed outside the opening 86b1 of the protruding part 86b. As a result, the rolling of the game ball thrown from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 is inhibited by the electromagnetic force generated by driving the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged inside the opening 86b1. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In other words, the protrusion 86b can prevent the electromagnetic force generated by driving the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from acting on the outside of the protrusion 86b. As a result, the throwing of game balls from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 can be stabilized.

As described above, the first solenoid 583a is disposed with its rear side inserted into the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552. Thereby, the wiring of the detection devices SE3 to SE6 of the first unit 551 and the first solenoid 583a can be inserted through the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634. Further, since the wiring can be arranged along the first solenoid 583a, it is possible to suppress the wiring from becoming tangled.

Furthermore, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552, the protrusion 86b on which the first unit 551 is disposed does not bend. can be suppressed. Therefore, since the center frame 86 disposed on the base plate 60 can be prevented from bending (flexing), the position of the first unit 551 disposed on the center frame 86 can be prevented from shifting with respect to the base plate 60. It can be suppressed. As a result, game balls can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

<Displacement member for arranging the fixing member of the board unit on the back member>
Next, the connection structure between the rear case 300 and the board box 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42. First, the structure of the back case 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

38(a) is a front view of the rear case 300, and FIG. 38(b) is a rear view of the rear case 300. 39(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 300, and FIG. 39(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case 300.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the rear case 300 includes an engaging member 310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 301, and It mainly includes a fixing member 320 that is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the case 300 and fixes the above-described board box 100 (main controller 110).

The rear case 300 also includes a protrusion 301b that protrudes from two places on the front side of the bottom wall 301, a first opening 301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. A second opening 301d that opens at an opposing position is provided.

The protrusion 301b is a shaft for holding the engagement member 310 in a slidable state, and is inserted inside a sliding groove 314 that opens in the engagement member 310, which will be described later. Further, the protruding portion 301b is provided in a circular ring shape, and a screw can be screwed into the inner side of the circular ring shape. Therefore, after inserting the protruding part 301b into the sliding groove 314, a screw having a head having a diameter larger than the width of the sliding groove 314 is screwed into the protruding part 301b. 310 can be disposed in the rear case 300.

The first opening 301c is an opening through which a part of the fixing member 320 (an engaging part with the engaging member 310, which will be described later) is inserted. ) is formed into a shape that allows it to be inserted. As a result, the fixing member 320 provided on the back side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) is engaged with the engaging member 310 provided on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). be able to.

Further, the first opening 301c has a projecting wall 301c1 that protrudes toward the back side at an end that is opposite to the engagement side (arrow L direction side) between the fixing member 320 and the engagement member 310 (arrow R direction side). Equipped with The protruding wall 301c1 has a hook-like shape with a protruding tip on the back side bent at approximately 90 degrees, and the bending direction is set in a direction away from the first opening 301c (in the direction of arrow R).

The tip of the projecting wall 301c1 is inserted into a locking portion 331 of a fixing member 320, which will be described later. Thereby, the opposite side (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the engaging portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be locked. As a result, the fixing member 320 disposed on the back case 300 can be supported (engaged) at both left and right ends (arrow LR direction), and the engagement portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 It is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 from being damaged. Note that a detailed explanation of the arrangement of the fixing member 320 in the first opening 301c will be given later.

The second opening 301d is an opening for inserting a part of the engaging member 310 (operator 315), which will be described later, into the back side of the back case 300. It can be operated from. Therefore, as described above, after placing the fixing member 320 on the back surface of the back case 300, the engaging member 310 is operated from the back side of the back case 300, and the fixing member 320 and the engaging member are attached to the back case 300 ( It can be engaged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301).

The engaging member 310 has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and includes a first piece 311 and a second piece 312 extending in parallel directions, and the first piece 311 and the second piece 312. A third piece 313 connects the ends of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction thereof.

The above-mentioned two sliding grooves 314 are formed at one location each on the first piece 311 and the second piece 312, and are long in the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 (arrow LR direction). It is opened in the shape of a long hole. This allows the engaging member 310 to slide in the direction in which the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 extend (in the direction of the arrow LR).

The first piece 311 has an end on the opposite side (arrow R direction side) to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected, as an engaging portion with a fixing member 320 described later. The engaging portion 316 is formed to protrude outward on both sides in the up and down direction (direction of arrow UD), which is a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 311, and the engaging portion 316 at two locations. A recess 317 recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 311 (direction of arrow LR) from a substantially intermediate position and toward the bottom wall 301 side (back side (direction of arrow B)) of the back case 300. A protruding operator 315 is provided.

The engaging portion 316 has a substantially triangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the outer surface of one side (the side in the direction of the arrow R) becomes larger as it goes from the end of one side to the other side (the side in the direction of the arrow L). The first piece 311 is formed as an inclined surface projecting outward, while the outer surface on the other side is formed in the up-down direction (arrow U -D direction) is extended.

The recess 317 is formed by cutting out the first piece 311 in the thickness direction, and is recessed from one end (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 311 toward the other side (arrow L direction side). Ru. Therefore, one side of the first piece 311 is divided into two. Thereby, the rigidity of one side of the first piece 311 can be made lower than that of the other side. As a result, one side of the first piece 311 can be easily elastically deformed, and the engaging member 310 can be easily engaged with the fixing member 320. Note that a detailed explanation of the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be given later.

The operator 315 is an operation part for operating the engagement member 310, is formed at the other end of the first piece 311, and has a protruding dimension larger than the thickness of the bottom wall 301 of the back case 300. It is set to a value of 1, and protrudes to the back side of the back case 300 by at least a size that an operator can grasp with his or her fingers. Thereby, the operator 315 can be made to protrude from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall portion 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 315) can be grasped and operated.

The second piece 312 includes a circular fastening hole 318 on the front side. The fastening hole 318 is a portion into which a screw inserted into a hole (see FIG. 89) penetrated through a rear base 720 of a rotating unit 700, which will be described later, is screwed. As a result, after the rotation unit 700 is disposed inside the back case 300 (on the front side of the bottom wall part 301), the engagement member 310 disposed on the back side of the rotation unit 700 is operated, and the engagement member 310 can be operated to a specified position (an engagement position with a fixing member 320 described later), and a screw is screwed into the fastening hole 318 to fasten the engaging member 310 and the rotation unit 700 (rear base 720). can do. Therefore, the engaging member 310 disposed at the specified position can be made inoperable only by operating the operator 315 protruding from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operator 315 may be manipulated in an unauthorized manner, and the fixing member 320 and the board box 100 (main controller 110) may be easily replaced with an unauthorized board box. can be suppressed.

In this case, the screw inserted through the hole in the rear base 720 of the rotation unit 700 and fastened to the fastening hole 318 may be operated from the hole from which the first prize opening 64 provided on the game board 13 is removed. good. In this case, there is no need to release the connection between the game board 13 and the back case 300, so it is possible to prevent the work of replacing the board box 100 with a normal board box 100 from becoming complicated. As a result, the work of replacing a normal board box 100 can be simplified.

The fixing member 320 is composed of a separate member from the back case 300. As a result, the board box 100 can be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 320, which has a smaller outer diameter than the rear case 300. Easy to set up. As a result, the board box 100 can be easily disposed in the rear case 300 in a state where the board box 100 is difficult to be removed from the fixing member 320.

Furthermore, while the back case 300 can be used as a component with the same shape for each model of pachinko machine, the board box 100 has a different shape and size depending on the model of each pachinko machine 10. The fixing member 320 provided with the pachinko machine cannot be shared with another pachinko machine. Therefore, compared to the case where the fixing member 320 is formed integrally with the back case 300, the mold for molding the back case 300 can be the same mold as another pachinko machine. As a result, it is only necessary to form a mold for the fixing member 320 whose outer diameter is smaller than that of the back case 300, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The fixing member 320 includes an intervening member 330 that engages with the above-described engaging member 310, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the intervening member 330. Thereby, the shaft supporting member 340 can be used as a second-use item having the same shape as the fixing member of another game machine.

The intervening member 330 is formed into a box shape that is open on the front side (direction of arrow F), and has a locking portion 331 protruding from the side surface of the other side (direction of arrow L) and an engaged portion 332 that is formed in a frame shape and protrudes from the side surface of the rear case 300 (front side); an insertion hole 333 that opens in a circular shape on the box-shaped bottom; and a shaft support member 340 that extends from the rear surface. It mainly includes a protrusion 334 that protrudes to the side.

Further, the interposed member 330 is formed with a protrusion that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from both outer sides of the engaged portion 332 in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow UD) toward the front side (direction of arrow F). Further, the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 is formed with a circular opening recessed at a position corresponding to the protrusion protruding from both outer sides of the engaged portion 332 in the direction of gravity. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion into the opening, movement of the intervening member 330 (fixing member 320) in the vertical direction as seen from the front is restricted.

The locking portion 331 has an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 301, and has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 301c to the opening. The protruding wall 301c1 provided in a protruding manner is inserted into the bottom wall portion 301 and engaged with the bottom wall portion 301. As a result, when installing the intervening member 330 (fixing member 320) on the back case 300, the protruding wall 301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 331 of the intervening member 330, and one side of the intervening member 330 (arrow R direction side) can be locked to the back case 300.

The engaged portion 332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 310, and has a dimension in which it protrudes toward the back case 300 (in the direction of arrow F) beyond the engaging member 310 disposed on the back case 300. The distance from the inner surface of the front side (direction of arrow F) of the enclosed space to the front of the bottom wall 301 is larger than the distance from the front of the engagement member 310 to the front of the bottom wall 301. Set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are arranged at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The insertion hole 333 is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the intervening member 330 to a shaft support member 340 (described later) is inserted, and is set coaxially with the fastening hole 343 of the shaft support member 340.

The protrusion 334 has a substantially L-shaped cross section, and the distance between the tip on the bent side and the bottom surface of the intervening member 330 is set to be larger than the thickness of the insertion portion 344 of the shaft support member 340, which will be described later. be done. Thereby, the insertion part 344 can be inserted and disposed between the bent end of the protrusion 334 and the bottom surface of the intervening member 330, which face each other.

The shaft support member 340 includes a main body 341 formed in a box shape that is open on the back case 300 side (direction of arrow F), and a substantially U-shaped cross section from the back side of the main body 341 (direction of arrow B). The support portion 342 is formed mainly of a bulging support portion 342.

The main body part 341 has an insertion part 344 that protrudes upward from the side surface on the upper side (the side in the direction of arrow U), and an insertion part 344 that protrudes upward from the side surface on the upper side (the side in the direction of arrow U), and the insertion part 344 that protrudes upward from the side surface of the main body part 341 formed in a box shape. It mainly includes a fastening hole 343 that is recessed toward the direction B).

The insertion portion 344 is a plate member inserted between the bent end of the protrusion 334 and the bottom surface of the intervening member 330, as described above. Thereby, the upper side of the shaft support member 340 can be prevented from tilting toward the back side of the back case 300.

The fastening hole 343 is arranged on the lower side (in the direction of arrow D) toward the end opposite to the insertion portion 344 . Furthermore, as described above, the fastening hole 343 is a hole for fastening a screw that is inserted through the insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39(b)) of the intervening member 330. Therefore, the insertion portion 344 on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the shaft support member 340 is inserted into the protrusion 334 of the intervening member 330, and the lower side is fastened and fixed to the intervening member 330. Therefore, since the shaft support member 340 is fixed to the intervening member 330 only by fastening the screws on the lower side, the number of fastening parts can be reduced, and the manufacturing process can be simplified.

The support portion 342 is a portion that is caulked to the bearing portion 117 of the above-described board box 100 (main controller 110), and is formed in a hollow shape into which a caulking fitting can be placed. Note that the board box 100 is held in a rotatable state relative to the shaft support member 340 by fastening with caulking metal fittings.

Next, the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 41(b). 40(a) is a front view of the rear case 300 before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, and FIG. 40(b) is a front view of the rear case 300 before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the state shown in FIG. 41(a) is a front view of the rear case 300 after the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, and FIG. 41(b) is a front view of the rear case 300 after the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the state shown in FIG. Note that in FIGS. 40(b) and 41(b), a part of the outer shape of the engaging member 310 that overlaps with the back case 300 is illustrated with a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, the intervening member 330 and the shaft support member 340 are placed on the intervening member 330 side (front side (arrow) They are fastened and assembled using screws inserted from the F direction side)). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the intervening member 330 and the shaft supporting member 340 from being illegally disassembled (the fastened screws being removed) from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 caulked and fixed to the shaft support member 340 from being replaced with an unauthorized board box.

As described above, the interposed member 330 and the shaft supporting member 340 (fixed member 320) in the fastened state have the projecting wall 301c1 formed in the first opening 301c inside the locking portion 331 of the interposed member 330. inserted. In this case, the interposed member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixed member 320) in a fastened state are arranged in the first opening 301c from the bent side (arrow R direction side) of the projecting wall 301c1.

When the fixing member 320 is disposed in the back case 300, a space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 is disposed at a position facing one end (on the engaging portion 316 side) of the engaging member 310. Thereby, by slidingly displacing the engaging member 310, one end (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the engaging member 310 can be inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

Here, the outer dimensions in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the two engaging parts 316 of the engaging member 310 are the openings in the vertical direction of the space surrounded by the engaged parts 332 of the fixed member 320 described above. It is set larger than the dimensions. Therefore, there is a problem that the engaging member 310 cannot be disposed in the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

On the other hand, the engaging member 310 allows the first piece 311 to be easily elastically deformed by the recess 317 provided on one side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 311 as described above, and also allows the first piece 311 to be easily elastically deformed. Due to the triangular shape of the joint portion 316, the force generated when the engaging member 310 is slid and abuts against the inner edge of the engaged portion 332 can be applied to the recessed portion 317 side of the engaging member 310. As a result, the first piece 311 formed into two forks can be elastically deformed and inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are arranged so that the engaging member 310 is slid and the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is attached to the intervening member. When inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of 330, the elastically deformed first piece 311 is returned to its pre-deformed shape. As described above, the other side surface of the engaging portion 316 extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 311 . Therefore, the force that causes the engagement member 310 to slide in the opposite direction alone does not act to cause the first piece 311 to elastically deform toward the recess 317. That is, the inclined surface and the recessed portion 317 of the engaging portion 316 make it easier to insert the first piece 311 into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332, and the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) of the engaging portion 316 The first piece 311 inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 can be made difficult to come off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the back side of the back case 300 due to a fraudulent act by the player, and the board box 100 (main controller 110) which is caulked to the fixing member 320 is an unauthorized board box. It is possible to suppress the exchange.

Further, the back case 300 is disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300, and is located on the back side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of arrow B), and is located between the base plate 60 and the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). The fixing member 320 includes an engaging member 310 that can be operated from the outside between the opposing sides, and the fixing member 320 includes an engaged portion 332 that protrudes toward the front side of the rear case 300 (in the direction of arrow F). Since the engaging member 310 is engaged with the rear case 300, the accessory device (in this example, the rotating unit 700) is installed between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300. , the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 can be engaged with each other by operating the engaging member 310 from the outside between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300.

Therefore, the fixing member 320 can be disposed on the back case 300 without the engagement member 310 being obstructed by the accessory device disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300 facing each other. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be easily disposed on the back case 300.

Furthermore, since the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300, the engaging portion between the back case 300 and the fixing member 320 is connected to the base plate. 60 and the rear case 300 facing each other. This makes it difficult to access the engaging portion between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 from the back side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of arrow B). As a result, the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released from the back side of the base plate 60, and the fixing member 320 is prevented from being tampered with (for example, replaced with an incorrect fixing member). can.

The back case 300 also includes a first opening 301c that is opened in a portion where the fixing member 320 is disposed, and a second opening 301d that is opened in a portion where the engagement member 310 is disposed. The engaging member 310 is disposed on the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the back case 300, and is inserted from the back side (the side in the direction of the arrow B) of the back case 300 via (inserting) the second opening 301d. The fixed member 320 is operable, and since the engaged portion 332 that has passed through the first opening 301c is disposed on the front side of the rear case 300, the engaged portion 332 of the engaging member 310 and the fixed member 320 is This makes it difficult to access the engaging portion from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be fixed to the back case 300 regardless of the size of the accessory device disposed on the back case 300, and the board box 320 can be manipulated from the back side of the game board 13 to prevent fraud. can be prevented from being replaced.

Furthermore, the engaging member 310 includes an operator 315 that is inserted through the second opening 301d and protrudes toward the back side of the back case 300 (the direction of the arrow B). ), the engaging member 310 can be easily operated. As a result, the engaging operation between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 can be easily performed.

In addition, since the engaging member 310 can be slid on a plane parallel to the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301), the engaging member 310 can be moved in the front-rear direction (arrowed by the arrow) relative to the back case 300. Since the engagement member 310 is not displaced in the F-B direction), the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the engagement member 310 can be easily used as a space for an accessory device disposed in the rear case 300. As a result, the area on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) can be easily used as a space for installing accessory devices.

Next, the operation for removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 300 from the state shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first opening 301c is opened in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is It is possible to operate from the back side of the back case 300 (the side in the direction of arrow B) through the first opening 301c.

Therefore, by elastically deforming the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 toward the concave side of the recess 317 using a special tool or the like, the engagement between the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be prevented. The connection is canceled. With this engagement released, the engaging member 310 is displaced in the direction of pulling it out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 332 (in the direction of arrow L), and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is restored. , the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be released.

Note that it is preferable that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 and the first opening 301c be formed as small as possible. According to this, the finger of the person removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 300 cannot be inserted, and a special tool can be inserted. As a result, only a worker with a dedicated tool can replace the board box 100 (main controller 110), and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced with an unauthorized one.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), the board box 100 (main controller 110) caulked to the shaft support member 340 will be described. 42(a) is a perspective rear view of the back case 300 and the board box 100 (main controller 110), and FIG. 42(b) is a rear view of the back case 300 and the board box 100 (main controller 110). It is. In addition, in FIG. 42(b), the outer shape of the engaging member 310 that overlaps with the substrate box 100 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), the substrate box 100 includes a bearing portion 117 protruding from one end (in the direction of arrow R). A pair of bearing portions 117 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD). As described above, the pair of bearing parts 117 are parts that are caulked and fastened to the support part 342 of the shaft support member 340, and the vertical dimension (arrow UD direction) of the support part 342 and the distance between the opposing parts are approximately the same. Set to be the same. As a result, the board box 100 is fastened to the shaft supporting member 340 by arranging the support part 342 between the pair of bearing parts 117 facing each other, and by inserting a caulking pin from above the bearing part 117 and fixing it by caulking. be done.

According to the board box 100 configured as above, the board box 100 is rotatably held with respect to the shaft support member 340 and is disposed on the back side of the engagement member 310, so that the above-mentioned When operating the operator 315 to engage the engaging member 310 with the fixed member 320, the operator 315 can be easily operated by rotating the substrate box 100. Further, after the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, by arranging the board box 100 on the back side of the engaging member 310, it becomes difficult to operate the operator 315 from the back side of the back case 300. . As a result, after the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, it is possible to prevent the board box from being replaced by an unauthorized board box due to the operator 315 being operated.

The other end of the board box 100 (the side in the direction of arrow L) is inserted from the back side of the board box 100 (in the direction of arrow B) toward the bottom wall 301 of the back case 300 and fastened to the back case 300. It is fixed with a screw. As a result, the board box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 69. First, a structure for displacing the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

43 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. 45 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 43 to 14 illustrate a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position (the lowest position with respect to the base member 410).

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 46, the lower displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a transmission member disposed on the base member 410. 420, a link member 430 that is connected to the base member 410 and is displaced as the transmission member 420 is displaced, and one end is slidably connected to the base member 410 and the other end is connected to the link member 430. and a lower displacement member 440 that is displaced by transmission of driving force from the link member 430.

The base member 410 is formed by combining two rectangular and laterally elongated plate members when viewed from the front in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 411 disposed on the front side and a back base 412 disposed on the back side. A transmission member 420 and a link member 430 are arranged between the front base 411 and the rear base 412, which face each other.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 43), two cylindrical pivot pins 411c and 411d protruding toward the back side, and a pivot pin 411d. It is formed mainly with a curved wall portion 411e projecting in an arc shape with the axis as the axis.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are holes into which two protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back side of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted, respectively. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each formed to extend in the left-right direction. Therefore, by displacing the projections 472, 473 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a, 411b along the sliding grooves 411a, 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each curved in an arc shape, extending upward (in the upper direction in FIG. 43) from the left end (left side in FIG. 43) to the right end (right side in FIG. 43) of the front base 411. ) is opened. Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged so that the axes of their circular arcs are located at different positions, and the gap between the opposing grooves in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It is possible to displace the object while moving it. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated as it slides without applying rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440. Note that the detailed manner of displacement of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

The pivot pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of a transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Further, the pivot pin 411c is formed from a metal rod-shaped body and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when force is applied to the cam member 422 from its outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, it is possible to suppress the pivot pin 411c from breaking (damaging).

The pivot pin 411d is a projection inserted into a through hole 431a formed at one end of a first link member 431, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431a. Further, the pivot pin 411d is formed from a metallic rod-shaped body, and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when force is applied to the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, it is possible to suppress the pivot pin 411d from breaking (damaging).

The curved wall portion 411e protrudes from the back side of the front base 411 and is curved around the axis of the pivot pin 411d. The protruding distance of the curved wall portion 411e is set to a distance at which the curved wall portion 411e comes into contact with a protruding end surface of a plate-shaped projection 431b of the first link member 431, which will be described later. Therefore, displacement of the first link member 431 toward the front side is suppressed. Further, since the curved wall portion 411e is formed to be curved around the axis of the pivot pin 411d, even when the first link member 431 is rotated around the axis of the pivot pin 411d, the first link member 431 The plate-like projection 431b can be brought into contact with the protruding end surface of the curved wall portion 411e.

The recovery port 411f is an opening for allowing the ball ejected from the exit opening 471 by movement of the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, to flow into the recovery port 411f and to be recovered. The downstream side of the recovery port 411f is connected to the ball recovery path. The recovery port 411f is a hole formed in a protruding manner at the right end of the front base 411, and its opening surface faces the surface facing the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and the surface facing the lower displacement member 440 in the first extended state. This is a surface located below the exit opening 471 in the direction of gravity.

Further, the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is arranged above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the ball emitted from the emission opening 471 can be received into the recovery port 411f and quickly recovered.

The back base 412 has grooves 412a and 412b recessed from the front side (the front side in FIG. 44) toward the back side, and a locking part 412c formed protruding toward the front side near the groove 412b. Formed primarily in preparation.

The groove 412a is a hole into which the distal end side of the pivot pin 411c of the front base 411 described above is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pin 411c, and faces the pivot pin 411c. Recessed in position. Therefore, the cam member 422 is held so that it cannot fall off from the base member 410 by assembling the front base 411 and the back base 412 after the pivot pin 411c is inserted into the shaft portion 422a. Further, since the back base 412 can hold the tip of the pivot pin 411c, when a force is applied to the cam member 422 in the axial direction from its outer circumferential surface, the pivot pin 411c is able to hold the front end of the pivot pin 411c. It is possible to suppress bending and breaking from the connecting portion.

The groove 412b is a hole into which the distal end side of the pivot pin 411d of the front base 411 described above is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pin 411d, and faces the pivot pin 411d. Recessed in position. Therefore, the first link member 431 is held so that it cannot fall off from the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the back base 412 after the pivot pin 411d is inserted into the through hole 431a. In addition, since the back base 412 can hold the tip of the pivot pin 411d, when a force is applied to the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, the pivot pin 411d can hold the front end of the pivot pin 411d. It is possible to suppress bending and breaking from the connecting part.

The locking portion 412c is a plate that locks one end side of a biasing spring SP1, which will be described later, and is formed on the outside of the biasing spring SP1. Thereby, one end side of the biasing spring SP1 can be locked. Note that a detailed explanation of the biasing spring SP1 will be given later.

The transmission member 420 includes a transmission gear 421 connected to the shaft of a drive motor KM1 attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam that meshes with the transmission gear 421 and rotates as the transmission gear 421 is driven. 422.

The transmission gear 421 is a gear that has a toothing surface over the entire outer peripheral surface, and is fitted onto the shaft of the drive motor KM1. Therefore, when electric power is applied to drive motor KM1 and the shaft portion is rotated, transmission gear 421 is similarly rotated.

The cam member 422 has a shape in which the outer shape in a front view is a combination of ends of two semicircles of different sizes, and is formed from a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. A tooth surface 422b that meshes with the transmission gear 421 is carved on the outer peripheral surface of the small semicircular portion of the cam member 422, and a shaft portion 422a is formed to penetrate through the center of the semicircle. A sliding groove 422c is formed in the large semicircular portion of the cam member 422 on the back side facing a link member 430, which will be described later.

The shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the shaft support pin 411c is inserted, as described above, and the shaft portion 422a is rotatably supported by the shaft support pin 411c, so that the cam member 422 supports the shaft of the shaft support pin 411c. Rotatably held in the center.

The cam member 422 is disposed on the base member 410 with the tooth surface 422b meshing with the transmission gear 421, so when the transmission gear 421 is rotated, the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a. can.

The sliding groove 422c is recessed along the outer periphery of the semicircular portion of the cam member 422 having a large radius. Therefore, the distance from the shaft portion 422a increases from one end to the other end. The sliding groove 422c also includes a step portion 422c1 extending from the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 toward the through hole 431a when the lower displacement member 440 is located in a retracted state, which will be described later. A step portion 422c3 extends from the sliding protrusion 431d toward the through hole 431a when the member 440 is in a second extended state, which will be described later, and a step portion 422c3 extends between the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and the second extended state. A step portion 422c2 is provided that extends from the sliding protrusion 431d toward the through hole 431a when located in the intermediate first extended state.

The link member 430 is formed from two link members, a first link member 431 and a second link member 432. Further, the link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the respective ends of a first link member 431 and a second link member 432.

The first link member 431 is bent into a generally doglegged shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the cam member 422, and has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side, and a cylindrical connecting protrusion 431c protruding toward the back side on the other end side. , is formed mainly of a plate-like protrusion 431b protruding to a position facing the above-mentioned curved wall portion 411e, and a cylindrical sliding protrusion 431d protruding toward the front side of the bent portion.

The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the pivot pin 411d is inserted as described above. The first link member 431 is rotatably held relative to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the back base 412 with the pivot pin 411d inserted into the through hole 431a.

The plate-like protrusion 431b is a protrusion that suppresses displacement of the first link member 431 in the front-rear direction and prevents the first link member 431 from colliding with the cam member 422 disposed forward. It is formed as a plate-shaped body that protrudes in a curved manner with the hole 431a as an axis, and its protrusion length is set larger than the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction. This can prevent the back surface of the cam member 422 from colliding with the front surface of the first link member 431.

Further, the protruding dimension of the plate-like protrusion 9431b is set larger than the thickness (dimension in the direction of arrow FB) of the cam member 422. Further, the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b and the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) are arranged with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 55(a))).

The cam member 422 is disposed in such a manner that it can be displaced in a region between the opposing front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e. Further, the dimensions of the two gaps, which are the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 facing each other and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 facing each other, are larger than the distance X14 described above. It is set large.

As a result, when the first link member 9431 is bent in the direction in which the above-mentioned distance It can be brought into contact with the Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from being sandwiched between the opposing front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e and restricting its displacement.

The connecting protrusion 431c is a shaft portion connected to a second link member 432, which will be described later, and is inserted into a through hole 432a of the second link member 432, and the outer diameter of the head is larger than that of the through hole 432a from the back side. Large screws, etc. are fastened. Thereby, the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 are rotatably connected.

A wall portion 431f that protrudes toward the back side is formed at the edge of the through hole 431a. The wall portion 431f is a wall surface for fitting and holding a biasing spring SP1, which will be described later, into its outer peripheral surface.

The link-side engaging portion 431e is a protrusion that locks the other end of the biasing spring SP1 fitted into the wall portion 431f, and is formed to protrude in a hook shape from the back side of one end of the first link member 431. . Therefore, the biasing spring SP1 has one end engaged with the locking portion 412c of the back base 412, and the other end engaged with the link side engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. Ru. Therefore, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 can be applied in a direction to rotate the other end side of the first link member 431 upward with respect to the base member 410. As a result, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 acts, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 can be suppressed.

The sliding protrusion 431d is formed at a position spaced apart from the through hole 431a by approximately the same distance as the distance from the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the through hole 431a. Furthermore, the tip of the sliding protrusion 431d is inserted into the sliding groove 422c. That is, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed so that its outer diameter is smaller than the width dimension between the opposing sliding grooves 422c.

The sliding protrusion 431d is disposed inside the sliding groove 422c and is displaced by sliding inside the sliding groove 422c as the cam member 422 rotates. That is, by displacing the cam member 422, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the first link member 431 will be given later.

Furthermore, since the sliding projection 431d and the plate-like projection 431b are formed in close proximity to each other, the forward displacement of the first link member 431 is suppressed by the plate-like projection 431b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sliding protrusion 431d from pushing the cam member 422 forward. As a result, there is no need to increase the depth of the sliding groove 422c provided in the cam member 422, and the rigidity of the cam member 422 can be ensured without increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction.

The second link member 432 is formed into a rectangular shape when viewed from the front with one side long, and is formed into a plate shape with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The second link member 432 is mainly formed with a through hole 432a formed to penetrate in the front-back direction on one end side, and a through hole 432b formed to penetrate in the front-back direction at the other end side.

The through hole 432a is a hole for connecting with the first link member 431 as described above, and the connecting protrusion 431c is inserted into the through hole 432a. Thereby, the second link member 432 is rotatably connected to the first link member 431.

The through hole 432b is connected to a lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, and can transmit displacement of the link member 430 to the lower displacement member 440. The through hole 432b is a hole into which a protrusion 482a of a rear case 482, which will be described later, is inserted, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 482a. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a, the lower displacement member 440 can be connected to the second link member 432. It is rotatably held against the Therefore, the drive of the lower displacement member 440 is transmitted through the link member 430 when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced.

Next, the displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. FIG. 47 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 48 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 49 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state. 400 is a front view. FIG. 50 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 52 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state. 400 is a rear view. Note that in FIGS. 50 to 52, the back base 412 is shown in a transparent manner. Moreover, in FIGS. 50 to 52, a part of the plate-shaped projection 431b and the curved wall portion 411e of the first link member 431 are illustrated with chain lines.

Furthermore, the retracted state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d arranged inside the sliding groove 422c is arranged between the opposing step portions 442c1, and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged on the lower side. The second extended state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d is disposed between the opposing step portions 442c3, and the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the uppermost position. The first extended state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d is arranged between the opposing step portions 442c2, and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 50, in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, the cam member 422 in the first position is rotated by the transmission gear 421 to move the other end side of the sliding groove 422c (step 422c3 side). The shaft portion 422a is positioned on the right side in rear view (right side in FIG. 50). In this case, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c and positioned at the stepped portion 422c1. Therefore, the first link member 431 is in a state in which the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) is located on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the through hole 431a on the one end side (rotated around the through hole 431a as an axis). The end side is positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range (first driven position).

Since the second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431, one end side (through hole 432a side) connected to the first link member 431 is located on the right side in rear view (right side in FIG. 50). As a result, in the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432, the protrusions 472, 473 connected to the front base 411 are located on the right side of the sliding grooves 411a, 411b in rear view (right side in FIG. 50). state. As described above, since the distance between the vertically opposing sliding grooves 411a and 411b is larger on the right side in rear view than on the left side, the lower displacement member 440 has its longitudinal direction substantially parallel to the left-right direction. It is placed in such a state. That is, it is placed in front of the front base 411.

The displacement from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 47 and 50 to the first extended state shown in FIGS. 46 and 51 is performed by displacing the cam member 422.

In the first extended state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the retracted state position and displaced to the third position. As a result, the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is placed above the shaft portion 422a. Due to this rotational displacement, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 guided by the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c is displaced along with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and is placed in the third driven position. Note that in the first extended state, the sliding protrusion 431d is guided between opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) is moved from the retracted position to the upper left in rear view (FIG. 51). upper left).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, since the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shapes of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, since the distance between the vertically opposing sliding grooves 411a and 411b becomes narrower from the right side to the left side in rear view, the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in front view (right side in FIG. 48). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Furthermore, in the first extended state, the collection port 411f is located on the lower side in the direction of gravity on the distal end side. That is, by sliding and rotating the lower displacement member 440 during transition from the retracted state to the first extended state, the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 is extended to the right side of the base member 410 when viewed from the front. It can be displaced without causing any damage. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region different from the variable regions of other displacement accessories. Collisions with other displacement accessories can be suppressed.

In addition, since the recovery port 411f is located below one end of the lower displacement member 440 (the side opposite to the protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, When the ball drops downward from the exit opening 471 during the firing operation, the ball can be sent to the recovery port 411f.

The displacement from the first extended state shown in FIGS. 48 and 51 to the second extended state shown in FIGS. 49 and 52 is performed by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first extended state.

In the second extended state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated from the first extended state by the driving force of the drive motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the first extended state position (third position). is placed in the second position. Therefore, the other end side of the cam member 422 (step portion 422c3 side) is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Also, due to this rotational displacement, the sliding of the first link member 431 guided by the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c The moving protrusion 431d is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and is placed in the second driven position.In the second extended state, the sliding protrusion 431d is moved along the step 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. Guided between opposing inner walls.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) changes from the position in the first extended state to approximately 30 degrees when viewed from the rear. It is displaced to the upper left (upper left in FIG. 52).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, since the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shapes of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, the distance between the vertically opposing sliding grooves 411a and 411b becomes narrower from the right side to the left side in the rear view, so the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 49). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Further, similarly to the first extended state, in the second extended state, the collection port 411f is located on the lower side in the direction of gravity on the distal end side. That is, by sliding and rotating the lower displacement member 440 during transition from the retracted state to the second extended state, the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 is extended to the right side of the base member 410 when viewed from the front. It can be displaced without causing any damage. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement area that is different from the variable area of other displacement accessories, and it is possible to suppress collisions with other displacement accessories.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described. 53(a) is a rear view of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in the retracted state, FIG. 53(b) in the first extended state, and FIG. 53(c) in the second extended state. be. In addition, in FIGS. 53(a) to 53(c), a portion of the cam member 422 that overlaps with the first link member 431 is illustrated with a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), in the retracted state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is arranged between opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. Furthermore, as described above, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed at a position spaced apart from the through hole 431a by approximately the same distance as the distance from the through hole 431a to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. Therefore, when a force that rotates around the axis of the through hole 431a is applied to the first link member 431 located in the retracted state, that force is applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding protrusion 431d. can. Therefore, rotation of the cam member 422 due to the rotational force of the first link member 431 can be suppressed. As a result, in the retracted state, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed from being displaced.

As shown in FIG. 53(b), in the first extended state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is arranged between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Therefore, similarly to the retracted state, when a force to rotate around the through hole 431a is applied to the first link member 431 located in the first extended state, the force is transferred from the sliding protrusion 431d to the cam member 422. It can act on the shaft portion 422a. Therefore, rotation of the cam member 422 due to the rotational force of the first link member 431 can be suppressed. As a result, in the first extended state, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed from being displaced.

Here, at the first extended position, the lower displacement member 440 is at an intermediate position of displacement, and therefore, in order to maintain the stopped state, it is necessary to maintain the drive motor KM1 in the stopped state. Therefore, there is a problem in that energy consumption increases when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first extended position (intermediate position of displacement).

In contrast, in the present embodiment, in the first extended state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is disposed between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c, so as described above. In addition, displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the electric power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at a position halfway through its displacement, the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 from increasing when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped mid-displacement.

As shown in FIG. 53(c), in the second extended state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is disposed between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Therefore, similarly to the retracted state and the first extended state, when a force that rotates around the axis of the through hole 431a is applied to the first link member 431 located in the second extended state, the force is removed by sliding. The shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 can be actuated from the projection 431d. Therefore, rotation of the cam member 422 due to the rotational force of the first link member 431 can be suppressed. As a result, in the second extended state, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed from being displaced.

Furthermore, since each step portion 422c1, 422c2, 422c3 extends in the direction connecting the sliding projection 431d and the through hole 431a, the sliding groove 422c extends in the direction in which the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced. The width dimension of can be reduced. Therefore, in the retracted position, the first extended position, and the second extended position, the gap between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding protrusion 431d, in which the first link member 431 can rotate around the axis of the through hole 431a, is reduced. can. Therefore, the gap in which the first link member 431 in each state can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a can be reduced. As a result, the amount by which the lower displacement member 440 swings in each state due to vibration or inertial force when the displacement is stopped can be reduced, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the stopped state.

Therefore, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (drive mechanism) that drive the lower displacement member 440 restrict the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiver 467. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced with respect to the base member 410 due to the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction will be described. 54(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 50, and FIG. 54(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. be. Note that in FIGS. 51 and 52, the back base 412 is shown as being transparent, but in FIGS. .

As shown in FIG. 54(a), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state is arranged between the back base 412 and the cam member 422. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging back and forth. That is, the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected via the second link member 432 to a lower displacement member 440 that is constructed by combining a plurality of fixtures, so that the load of the lower displacement member 440 causes it to move in the front-rear direction. Since the cam member 422 is disposed at the front where there is a risk of the first link member 431 bending forward, it is possible to suppress the first link member 431 from bending forward. As a result, it is possible to suppress the first link member 431 from moving forward, and therefore it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 54(b), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state is arranged between the back base 412 and the cam member 422, as in the retracted state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging back and forth.

Furthermore, in the retracted state and the first extended state, the cam member 422 is disposed on the front side of the connecting portion between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 of the link member 430. Therefore, when the link member 430 is formed from two members, it is necessary to make the connecting part rotatable, so the rigidity becomes weaker than other parts and easily bends due to the gap, but there is a cam on the front side. Since the member 422 is arranged, bending of the connecting portion of the link member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

<Regulating the displacement of the displacement member by means of regulating the displacement of the driven member>
Next, the relationship between the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LVa-LVa in FIG. 50, and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 51, FIG. 55(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LVc-LVc in FIG. 52.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the retracted state (first position), the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e are placed in different positions. Therefore, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first extended state (third position), it is possible to suppress the resistance acting on the cam member 422 from increasing. As a result, the start of displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be stabilized.

As shown in FIGS. 55(b) and 55(c), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extended state (third position), a part of the cam member 422 It is arranged at a position separated by a predetermined gap on the front side (in the direction of arrow F). Thereby, when the cam member 422 is displaced in the front direction, the axial side surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e, and the cam member 422 can be prevented from being displaced in the front direction.

Note that the surface of the cam member 422 on the front base 411 side (arrow F direction side) is formed into a flat surface parallel to the back surface of the front base 411 (see FIG. 45). Thereby, when the cam member 422 is displaced toward the curved wall portion 411e, the flat surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from partially abutting the curved wall portion 411e, and to prevent force from being concentrated in one part. As a result, damage to the cam member 422 can be suppressed.

Here, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first extended state (third position), the lower displacement member 440 (on the opposite side in the longitudinal direction) is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, as the longitudinal direction component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the force component that causes the lower displacement member 440 to tilt in the front-rear direction is increased. Therefore, when the first extended state (third position) is set, the force in the longitudinal direction acting on the link member 430 supporting the lower displacement member 440 is greater than when the retracted state (first position) is set. be made larger. As a result, the cam member 422 connected to the link member 430 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) beyond the first extended state (third position), a portion of the cam member 422 Since it is disposed on the front side of the portion 411e, displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging back and forth between the first extended state (third position) and the second extended state (second position). It can be easily seen.

Note that the displacement of the link member 430 toward the back side can be regulated by disposing the link member 430 between the back base 412 and the cam member 422 as described above. That is, when the link member 430 swings toward the back side, the link member 430 can be brought into contact with the back base 412 to restrict displacement of the link member 430. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging back and forth.

Further, the front base 411 includes a regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) that regulates the swinging of the link member 430 in a direction other than the driven direction, and the cam member 422 is displaceable between the first position and the second position. and is capable of displacing a first displacement area for displacing from the first position to a third position intermediate between the first position and the second position, and a second displacement area for displacing the second position from the third position, The link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position by the cam member 422 being displaced from the first position to the second position, and from the first driven position to the first driven position and the second driven position. a first driven region that displaces a third driven position intermediate between the third driven position and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position; A part of the cam member 422 is set in the same area, and when the cam member 422 is displaced through the second displacement area, the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e) restricts the swinging of the cam member 422 in a direction other than the displacement direction. Therefore, the swinging of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be restricted using the same portion of the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e).

Therefore, since it is only necessary to form the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) at one location, the shape of the regulating means is smaller than when the regulating means for regulating displacement is formed on each of the cam member 422 and the link member 430. can be simplified and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Further, since the swinging of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be restricted using the same portion of the restriction means (curved wall portion 411e), the link member 430 can be restricted to one restriction means (curved wall portion 411e). Since it is not necessary to form the cam member 422 and the regulating portion, the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) can be made smaller accordingly.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state to the second extended state, the projections 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b formed in the front base 411. (Collar C disposed on the protrusions 472, 473 (see FIG. 14)) moves toward the front side (arrow F direction side) of the other end side (stepped portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 as the cam member 422 is displaced. (See FIGS. 50 to 52). As a result, when the other end side (step 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is pushed out to the back side by the protrusions 472, 473 (collars C disposed on the protrusions 472, 473), the cam member 422 There is a possibility that it will be rotationally displaced in the front-rear direction about 422a and come into contact with the link member 430.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side can be restricted by contacting the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 can move around the shaft portion 422a. Rotational displacement in the front-back direction can be suppressed. As a result, contact between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the first extended state (third position), the displacement is regulated by the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 is not bent during the initial operation. It is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance due to contact with the wall portion 411e. As a result, the initial operation of the cam member 422 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state will be described. 56(a) is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the LVIa-LVIa line in FIG. 52, and FIG. 56(b) is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state (second position). 5 is a front view of a link member 431 and a cam member 422. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 56(b), the outer shape of the base member 410 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-shaped projection 431b of the first link member 431. Thereby, rotational displacement of the cam member 422 in the direction of displacing the lower displacement unit 400 from the retracted state (first position) to the second displacement state can be restricted. As a result, the operation of stopping the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 can be distributed to the meshing portion of the transmission gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b, and the abutment portion of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431. Damage to the tooth surfaces of the gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b can be suppressed.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the contact surface between the plate-like projection 431b of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 is in contact with the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. The direction is set perpendicular to the virtual line KS1 passing through the portion. As a result, when a force is applied around the axis of the first link member 431 from the second displacement state to the retracted state (first position), the force is applied to the axis of the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. It is possible to suppress the action in the direction of rotation. As a result, rotation of the cam member 422 due to the force acting on the first link member 431 can be suppressed.

Here, as described above, the distal end side (the side opposite to the protrusion 473 connected to the front base 411 in the longitudinal direction) of the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, as the longitudinal component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through hole 431a of the first link member 431 supporting the lower displacement member 440 becomes maximum. Since the transmission of force from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 is suppressed, the lower displacement member 440 can be easily maintained in the second displacement state.

Further, when the cam member 422 is placed in the second displacement state, a force is applied to rotate the cam member 422 around the axis of the through hole 431a of the first link member 431 due to the load of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, a force PW1 (see FIG. 56(b)) in which the end of the cam member 422 is pushed out by the plate-like protrusion 431b and the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a, and a sliding force of the cam member 422 is applied. The inner wall of the moving groove 422c is pushed out from the sliding protrusion 431d, and the force PW2 (see FIG. 56(b)) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a acts in a direction that cancels each other out. As a result, rotation of the cam member 422 due to the force exerted by the first link member 431 can be suppressed.

Next, the configuration of the lower displacement member 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. 57(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 58 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 60(a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 440.

Note that in FIG. 60(a), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 60(b), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently. The state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the lower displacement member 440 includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and a case member 480 and the base member 470. It is formed mainly of a transmission mechanism 460 disposed displaceably therebetween, and a decorative member 450 formed to cover the front and rear of a case member 480.

The base member 470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 that protrude toward the back side on one end side, and a standing wall 471a that stands from the edge on the other end side to the front side. , a protruding wall 477 protruding from the upper end of the center portion toward the front side in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 57) in an upside-down U-shape; A rack gear 476 provided, shaft portions 474 and 475 protruding to the front side, a rectangular wiring locking portion 478 attached to the back surface of one end of the base member 470, and a vertical center portion of the base member 470. and an opening 479 which extends from one end to the other end and is recessed.

As described above, the protrusions 472 and 473 are connecting portions that are inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411 to connect the lower displacement member 440 and the front base 411. Therefore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the dimension between opposing inner walls of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b.

The standing wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the facing front case 481 and the base member 470 when the front case 481, which will be described later, is attached to the base member 470. The vertical dimensions are set to be larger than the above.

The shaft portions 474, 475 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of transmission gears 462, 463 of a transmission mechanism 460, which will be described later, and rotatably hold the transmission gears 462, 463. It is formed into a cylindrical shape with a small outer diameter.

The rack gear 476 has a tooth surface that meshes with a transmission gear 465, which will be described later. Thereby, the movable rack 464, which will be described later, slides relative to the base member 470, thereby allowing the transmission gear 465 to rotate.

The projecting wall 477 prevents the ball from falling to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 when a ball thrown from a ball throwing unit 600 (described later) is received in front of the base member 470 through the opening 451a of the decorative member 450. The space between the opposing wall portions formed in a substantially U-shape is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The wiring locking part 478 is a member for locking a flexible wiring (not shown) to a control board disposed on the back side of the base member 470, and connects one end of the flexible wiring to the base member 470. It is attached to the back side of the base member 470 via the. Thereby, even if the lower displacement member 440 is disposed so as to be displaceable with respect to the base member 410, it is possible to suppress the flexible wiring from becoming entangled.

Further, the wiring locking portion 478 includes a projection 478a projecting in a columnar shape on the back side. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 478a is set to a distance that protrudes further to the back side than the link member 430 connected to the back side, and is set to a distance that allows the projection 478a to come into contact with the front surface of the back base 412. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging rearward, and it is also possible to suppress the link member 430 from colliding with the back base 412.

The opening 469 is an opening that defines the sliding direction of the movable rack 464 disposed on the front side, and a guide plate 464d of the movable rack 464, which will be described later, is inserted inside.

The transmission mechanism 460 is a member disposed in front of the base member 470, and meshes with transmission gears 461, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface and slidably disposed in front of the base member 470, and a transmission gear rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464 and meshed with a rack gear 476. 465, a rack 466 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and disposed so as to be slidable in front of the movable rack 464, and a ball rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 466. The receiving portion 467 is mainly formed.

The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is fitted into the shaft hole, and when the drive motor KM2 is attached to the base member 470 while being connected to the drive motor KM2, the base member 470 will be placed in

As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 are rotatably held by the base member with the shaft portions 474 and 475 of the base member 470 inserted into the shaft holes. Further, the transmission gears 461 to 463 are gear trains in mesh with each other, and when the transmission gear 461 is rotated by the drive motor KM2, the terminal transmission gear 463 is rotated.

The movable rack 464 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a shaft portion 464b projecting in a cylindrical shape from the front side, and upwardly projecting from one end side of the upper end surface. A contact plate 464c, a guide plate 464d protruding from one end to the other end at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, a rack guide portion 464e protruding toward the front side opposite to the guide plate 464d, and a rack guide portion 464e protruding downward from the other end. The collision portion 464f is mainly formed.

The rack gear 464a is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. Therefore, by arranging the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 in mesh with the base member 470, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by driving the drive motor KM2.

The shaft portion 464b is a shaft portion on which the transmission gear 465 is rotatably held, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 465.

The contact plate 464c is a contact portion that comes into contact with a distribution member 540 of a distribution unit 500, which will be described later, and displaces the distribution member 540. That is, the distributing member 540 can be displaced by displacing the movable rack 464. Note that the manner in which the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 come into contact will be described later.

As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-shaped body inserted into the opening 479 of the base member 470, and can define the direction of displacement of the movable rack 464 that is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2. That is, the movable rack 464, which is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2, can be displaced along the direction in which the opening 479 extends. In this embodiment, since the opening 479 extends in the left-right direction, the movable rack 464 can be slid in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

The rack guide portion 464e is a projecting wall for regulating the displacement direction of the rack 466, which will be described later, and is provided to protrude from one end to the other end in the left-right direction.

The collision portion 464f is a wall portion that displaces the displacement member 492 by coming into contact with a projection 492b of the displacement member 492, which will be described later, and is formed to protrude from the lower end of the movable rack 464. Further, the collision portion 464f is formed such that the other end thereof is inclined. Thereby, the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492 can be slid and displaced along the inclined surface thereof.

The rack 466 is formed from a horizontally long rod-shaped body that is rectangular in front view, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 466b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the other end toward the back side, and a shaft portion 466b that protrudes toward the front side. It is formed mainly by two sliding plates 466c and a recessed part 466d recessed from one end to the other end on the back side.

Rack gear 466a is meshed with transmission gear 465 attached to movable rack 464. As a result, when the rack 466 is placed in front of the movable rack 464, when the movable rack 464 slides, the transmission gear 465 rotates with the sliding displacement, and driving force is transmitted to the rack 466. . Therefore, rack 466 can be displaced relative to movable rack 464.

The shaft portion 466b is a projection inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 467, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. Thereby, the ball receiving part 467 can be held rotatably.

The sliding plate 466c is a projection inserted into an opening 481a of the front case 481, which will be described later, and is formed from a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness. Thereby, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the direction in which the opening 481a extends. can.

When the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, the recessed part 466d is in a state in which the rack guide part 464e is arranged inside. Thereby, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e. can.

Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, by forming the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacement member 440 rotates while sliding in the left-right direction, depending on the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440, the state of engagement between the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 changes due to its own weight, and the transmission There was a risk that the driving force would not be properly transmitted from the gear 465 to the rack 466.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, two locations are formed to define the displacement direction of the rack 466: the sliding plate 466c, the opening 481a, the recessed portion 466d, and the rack guide portion 464e, so that the lower displacement member 440 When the displacement state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 change, it is possible to suppress changes in the meshing state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466. As a result, the transmission of drive from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 can be prevented from being inhibited.

Further, the sliding plate 466c is formed to protrude from two places in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 57(a)) of the rack 466, and the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) At the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 is most extended with respect to the movable rack 464), it is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57).

Here, at the displacement end position, since the ball receiver 467 disposed on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a firing operation (rotational displacement) as described later, the ball receiver disposed on one end side of the rack 466 The other end of the rack is likely to be displaced due to the inertial force caused by the displacement of the portion 467. Therefore, a load is likely to be applied to the meshing surfaces of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and there is a risk that the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 will be damaged.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is located at the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 is most extended with respect to the movable rack 464). Since the rack 466 is disposed below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57), when the ball receiver 467 performs a firing operation (rotation operation), the rack 466 is in mesh with the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466. displacement can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 can be suppressed.

The ball receiving part 467 is a part that holds a game ball, and is formed into a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed so that the ball can be received in the inner part of the U-shape. That is, the inside of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the ball. As a result, one ball can be placed inside the ball receiving portion 467. Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed mainly including a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end position of the U-shape, and leg portions 467a protruding downward from the lower outer circumferential surface.

As described above, the shaft hole 467b is a shaft hole for rotatably holding the ball receiving portion 467 on the rack 466, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. Further, after the shaft portion 466b is inserted into the shaft hole 467b, a biasing spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft of the shaft portion 466b, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. Ru. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the rack 466 in a state where it is biased clockwise in a front view. Note that a detailed description of the aspect of the ball receiving portion 467 will be given later.

The leg portion 467a is a protrusion that urges the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotated by the urging spring SP2, and with the U-shaped open portion of the ball receiving portion 467 facing upward, the tip thereof faces the front side described later. It is set at a position where it comes into contact with the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481. Thereby, rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 can be restricted.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 481 disposed on the front side of the base member 470 and a back case 482 disposed on the back side.

The front case 481 is formed into a rectangular and horizontally elongated plate shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 481a that extends in the left-right direction at approximately the middle position in the direction of gravity, a bottom wall portion 481b that protrudes from the lower end surface on the back side, and a bottom wall portion 481b that is formed protrudingly from the lower end surface on the back side. It is formed mainly with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 481a is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and as described above, when the front case 481 is disposed on the base member 470, the sliding plate 466c of the rack is inserted therein.

The bottom wall portion 481b is formed to protrude from the lower end of the front case 481 toward the back side, and extends in the left-right direction. Furthermore, when the front case 481 is disposed on the base member 470, the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the top surface of the bottom wall portion 481b.

The back case 482 is a plate member for arranging the control board 491 on the back side of the base member 470, and has a laterally elongated rectangular outer shape smaller than the outer shape of the base member 470 when viewed from the front. Further, the back case 482 includes a protrusion 482a that projects toward the back side.

As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b, by fastening a screw or the like with a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a, the back case 482 and the second link member 432 can be rotated. Can be connected in a state.

The decorative member 450 is formed into an external shape that resembles a pattern or character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 450 is formed mainly of a front side decorative part 451 arranged on the front side of the front case 481 and a back side decorative part 452 arranged on the back side of the back case 482. Note that in this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 450.

The front decoration part 451 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the front case 481 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front case 481. This makes it possible to make the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) disposed on the back side of the front decorative part invisible to the player.

The back side decoration part 452 is arranged behind the upper end of the front side decoration part 451. Thereby, the member arranged on the back side of the front side decoration part 451 from above the back side decoration part 452 can be made invisible to the player.

Further, a displacement member 492 is disposed on the same plane as the front decorative portion 451 in the front-rear direction. The displacement member 492 is formed mainly of a shaft portion 492a that projects toward the back side and a protrusion 492b.

The shaft portion 492a is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481c of the front case 481. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c, the displacement member 492 can be rotatably connected to the front case. Further, a biasing spring SP3 is disposed on the distal end side of the shaft portion 492a inserted into the shaft hole 481c. Thereby, the displacement member 492 can be placed in a biased state. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the displacement member 492 will be given later.

The shaft portion 492a can transmit a driving force rotating around the axis of the shaft portion 492a to the displacement member 492 by colliding with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above. That is, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 as the movable rack 464 is displaced.

Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 includes a displacement member 492 (arrangement member) displaceably disposed on the lower displacement member 440 (base member), and the ball receiving part 467 (displacement member) can hold a game ball. In addition, since the displacement member 492 is formed to be ejectable and can be displaced when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440.

That is, when a game ball is launched from the ball receiver 467, the center of gravity position of the lower displacement member 440 is changed by the weight of the game ball, for example, the change in the center of gravity position due to the launch of the game ball is offset. If a configuration is adopted in which the displacement member 492 is displaced in the direction shown in FIG. In addition, when a game ball is fired from the ball receiver 467, the lower displacement member 440 receives a reaction due to the firing of the game ball. When a configuration in which the lower displacement member 440 is displaced is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to reaction.

Further, as described above, when the cam member 422 is placed in the second displacement state, a force PW1 in a direction that causes the cam member 422 to rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 422a (see FIG. 56(b)) and the force PW2 (see FIG. 56(b)) in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a act in directions that cancel each other out, and the cam member 422 is acted upon by the first link member 431. Rotation due to force can be suppressed. Therefore, in the second displacement state, the cam member 422 and the link member 430 can be arranged in a stable state. Therefore, when a game ball is fired from the ball receiving part 467 of the lower displacement member 440 in the second displacement state position, the first link member 431 or the cam member 422 swings due to the inertia caused by the game ball's firing. can be suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 492 is displaced by the collision portion 464f colliding with the shaft portion 492a due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, there is no need to separately provide a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. . That is, the drive motor KM2 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 can also be used as a drive means for displacing the displacement member 492. Therefore, the weight of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced by that amount, and its wobbling can be easily suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by a sensor device, and the displacement member 492 is moved in accordance with the detection result. It is not necessary to control the drive unit 492 by a driving means, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly, and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 with respect to the ball receiving portion 467 can be ensured.

Next, the transition of the transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. 61 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, FIG. 62 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position, and FIG. 63 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position. It is a diagram. 64(a) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440.

Note that the first position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is located approximately in the center of the base member 470 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 61). The second position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is placed below the protruding wall 477 in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 62). The third position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at the right end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction.

In addition, in FIGS. 61 to 64, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated with a chain line. Further, FIGS. 64(a) and (b) sequentially illustrate the transition state immediately before displacement to the third position, and FIG. 64(c) illustrates the lower displacement member 440 in the third position.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the first position of the lower displacement member 440, the movable rack 464 is located at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. Further, in the first position, the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 overlap in the front-rear direction. That is, like the movable rack 464, the rack 466 is also located at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is arranged at approximately the center position in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

In the first position, as described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are gathered at the left end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction. Here, since the lower displacement member 440 rotates while sliding (displaces from the retracted state to the first and second extended states), the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged near the rotating shaft. It is desirable that the

According to this embodiment, since the transmission mechanism 460 that displaces the ball receiving part 467 is in a state in which the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are superimposed in the front and back (two-stage rack), the center of gravity of the transmission mechanism 460 is shifted by sliding the front base 411. It can be brought closer to the grooves 411a, 411b side (the rotating shaft side of the lower displacement member 440).

Therefore, as described above, when displacing the lower displacement member 440 from the retracted state position to the first and second extended state positions, by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, the lower displacement member 440 The driving force when rotating and displacing can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 61 to the second position shown in FIG. 62 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. As a result, transmission gear 462 and transmission gear 463 are rotated. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, a driving force is transmitted from the rack gear 464a meshing with the transmission gear 463 to the movable rack 464, and the movable rack 464 is slid to the right with respect to the base member 470.

When the movable rack 464 is slid, the transmission gear 465 disposed on the movable rack 464 is rotated by the rack gear 476 of the base member 470 as the movable rack 464 is slid. As a result, driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466a meshed with the transmission gear 465. As a result, the rack 466 is slid to the right in the left-right direction with respect to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

The displacement from the second position shown in FIG. 62 to the third position shown in FIG. 63 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2, similarly to the displacement from the first position to the second position. Note that since the transmission of drive from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the contact state between the leg portion 467a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is released. , is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2 disposed on the shaft portion 466b.

To explain in detail, in the first and second positions (the state in which the ball receiving part 467 is arranged on the left side in front view from the ball receiving part 467 in the third position), the tip of the leg part 467a of the ball receiving part 467 is It is brought into contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481, and rotation clockwise in the front view around the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2 is restricted.

On the other hand, when the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip portion of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the right side of the end portion of the bottom wall portion 481b in front view, and It is arranged inside the recessed part 481b1 formed between the facing wall 471a. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2. When the ball receiving part 467 is rotated in the third position, the tip of the leg part 467a comes into contact with the end surface of the bottom wall part 481b, and rotation of the ball receiving part 467 about the shaft hole 467b is restricted. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 40 degrees around the shaft hole 467b. Note that, hereinafter, the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position will be referred to as a firing operation.

Further, the ball receiving part 467 is provided with a recessed part 481b1 that is recessed in the orbital region when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction). In addition, the leg portion 467a is provided to be engaged with the recess 481b1, and the posture can be changed by the leg portion 467a being engaged with the recess 481b1. The structure can be simplified.

Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464f is slid to the right in front view due to the displacement of the movable rack 464, and collides with the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492. As a result, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 492a.

That is, when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving part 467 is rotationally displaced, and the displacement member 492 is also rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving part 467 performs a firing operation and the ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467, and the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter, which causes the lower displacement member 440 to swing and the displacement member 492 to rotate. The inertial force can be applied in the opposite direction. As a result, when the ball is ejected from the inside of the lower displacement member 440, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging.

Next, referring to FIG. 65, the operation of receiving the ball into the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. 65(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. Note that in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c), transition states in which a ball is received into the ball receiving portion 467 are sequentially illustrated.

In addition, in FIGS. 65A to 65C, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated with a chain line.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 65(a) to (c), the horizontal direction when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state is indicated by a two-dot chain line with the symbol H1, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first tension state. The horizontal direction in the extended state is illustrated with the symbol of a virtual line H2. Further, the angle at which the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted state position to the first extended state position is shown with the symbol angle θ. Note that the virtual line H1, the virtual line H2, and the angle θ are also illustrated in the figures after FIG. 65.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the imaginary line H1), the ball receiving part 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is in the first position. By displacing the game ball T1 to the opening 451a formed in the front decorative portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440, the game ball T1 is thrown from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later. The game ball T1 thrown into the opening 451a is thrown inside the protruding wall 477, and then into the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), when the game ball T1 is thrown into the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, since the ball receiving part 467 is arranged below the protruding wall 477, the game ball T1 thrown inside the projecting wall 477 is transferred to the inside of the ball receiving part 467. Can throw the ball. By receiving the game ball T1 in the ball receiving part 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced in accordance with the operation of the ball receiving part 467.

As shown in FIG. 65(c), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the ball receiver, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position. Thereby, the ball receiving part 467 can be placed in the first position while the game ball T1 is placed in the ball receiving part 467.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a base member whose one side is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member. According to this gaming machine, in addition to an effect in which the base member is displaced between an extended position where the base member is extended into the game area and made visible to the player and a retracted position where the base member is retreated from the game area, the base member is It is possible to perform an effect in which the displacement member is displaced in a state where it is placed in the extended position.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, one side of the base member is disposed on the base member so that it can be displaced, so when the displaceable member is displaced, the backlash of the base member relative to the base member is caused with one side as the dead center. There was a problem in that sticking easily occurred. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from a stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximum, and the base member is likely to wobble due to the influence of inertial force.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 starts to be displaced from the second position, and from the first position, which is closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position. At least a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member 410 (for example, the lower displacement member 440 extends into the gaming area and is visible to the player) In the first extended state), since displacement starts from the first position, it is possible to suppress rattling of the lower displacement member 440 of the base member. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the lower displacement member than the second position, by setting the first position as the displacement start position of the ball receiving part 467, the ball receiving part 467 can be moved. The weight can be kept close to the dead center when the lower displacement member 440 wobbles with respect to the base member 410, and the influence of inertial force when the ball receiver 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be reduced accordingly. This makes it difficult to act on the displacement member 440. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be easily suppressed.

Furthermore, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states) while slidingly displacing. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced with the game ball T1 disposed far from the rotation axis, centrifugal force is likely to be generated on the game ball T1, and the game ball T1 moves to the inner wall of the ball receiving part 467. There was a problem in that the collision between the ball and the game ball T1 caused a collision sound, or the ball receiving part 467 was damaged.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position after the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving part 467, so the game ball T1 can be moved around the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440. It can be placed nearby (closer to). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states) with the game ball T1 received in the lower displacement member 440, centrifugal force is applied to the game ball T1. This can be prevented from occurring. As a result, when the game ball T1 and the ball receiving part 467 collide, it is possible to suppress generation of a collision sound or damage to the ball receiving part 467.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the lower displacement member 440, the transmission mechanism 460 for operating the ball receiving part 467 is formed of a movable rack 464, a transmission gear 465 (pinion gear), and a rack 466 (rack member), and the ball receiving part 467 is attached to the rack 466. Since the portion 467 is disposed, when starting the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 from the first position, not only the weight of the rack 466 but also the weight of the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are transferred to one side of the lower displacement member 440. (the fulcrum at which the lower displacement member 440 wobbles with respect to the base member 410). As a result, shaking of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

Further, in a state where the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the load on the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, by placing the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is shifted toward the sliding grooves 411a, 411b of the front base 411 (the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440). side). Therefore, when displacing the lower displacement member 440 from the retracted state position to the first and second extended state positions, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position. The driving force can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the ball payout operation will be described. 66(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. Note that in FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c), transition states of the lower displacement member 440 in the ball discharging operation are sequentially illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 66(a) to (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated with a chain line. Further, the ball discharging operation is an operation of discharging the game ball T1 received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the exit opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) to (c), the dispensing operation of dispensing the ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 sequentially displaces the lower displacement member 440 from the first position to the third position. It is done by

That is, by receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving part 467 in the receiving operation and displacing the lower displacement member 440 arranged at the first position to the third position, the game ball T1 is moved inside the ball receiving part 467. Along with the displacement, it is transported to the exit opening 471 side. The game ball T1 that has been moved to the exit opening 471 side is applied with inertia force toward the exit opening 471 side by the sliding displacement of the ball receiving part 467 and the firing operation of the ball receiving part 467 in the third position, and the game ball T1 is moved to the exit opening 471 side. It is popped out from inside the section 467. Thereby, the ball can be ejected from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Here, when the ball receiving part 467 (displacement member) starts to be displaced from the first position, the displacement direction is a direction away from the position of the lower displacement member 440, so the ball receiving part 467 is in the first position. In the arranged state, the rack 466 (rack member) can be brought closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440. That is, in order for the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) to be displaced in the direction away from one side of the lower displacement member 440, the rack 466 must be connected to the transmission gear 465 ( The portion on the rack gear 466a side where the pinion gear (pinion gear) is engaged is directed toward one side of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be kept closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 wobbles with respect to the base member 410), and as a result, the ball receiver 467 Shaking of the lower displacement member 440 when it is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

The ball receiving part 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction) and is formed so that its posture can be changed when the third position is reached. While it is possible to easily maintain the state held by the ball receiving part 467 and prevent the game ball T1 from falling off from the ball receiving part 467, when the ball receiving part 467 reaches the second position, the change in the attitude of the ball receiving part 467 can be used. Thus, the game ball T1 can be easily put out from inside the ball receiving part 467.

Note that when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally to the imaginary line H1), the ball receiver 467 shown in FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c) is released. When performing the operation, the game ball paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the inside of the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member The game ball paid out to the outside of 440 is thrown to the upper part of the ball holder 710 of the rotation unit 700.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, a discharge operation when two or more balls are thrown into the interior of the lower displacement member 440 will be described. 67(a) to (c) and FIG. 68(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440.

Note that in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c) and FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c), transition states of the ejection operation are illustrated in order. 43(a) to (c) and FIG. 44(a) to (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 The outline of is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 67(a) to (c), when two or more balls are consecutively thrown from the distribution unit 500 (described later), the lower displacement member 440 is operated to receive the second ball. The game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiver 467.

That is, by displacing the ball receiving part 467 from the first position to the second position, the first game ball T1 can be thrown inside the ball receiving part 467, and the second game ball T2 can be thrown to the inside of the ball receiving part 467. It can be held inside the protruding wall 477 in contact with the game ball T1 (see FIG. 67(b)). By displacing the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position after receiving the first game ball T1 at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position, the second game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiver 467.

Here, in a game machine that displaces the ball received in the ball receiving part 467 at the second position to the third position by the displacement of the ball receiving part 467, if a malfunction occurs in the displacement of the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later. There is a possibility that more than the prescribed number of game balls may be thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, and in this case, there is a problem that the game balls exceeding the prescribed number may cause problems. For example, there was a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number would enter the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiver 467 and become caught in the movable part, causing damage. Alternatively, there was a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number would flow out of the game area (for example, to the back side of the game board 13 or inside the back case 300).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the ball receiving part 467 is formed to be movable from the second position to the first position opposite to the throwing direction of the ball. The orbital area can be expanded. Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the sorting member 540 and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the expanded trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 will prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from being thrown. It can be accepted into the orbital region. As a result, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiver 467 and from flowing out of the gaming area, and as a result, the game balls exceeding the specified number Problems caused by balls can be made less likely to occur.

In addition, the ball receiver 467 is capable of receiving and holding one game ball T1 thrown from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, at the second position, and also in the direction from the second position to the first position (second direction). ), so that after receiving one game ball at the second position, the ball receiving part 467 is moved from the second position to the third direction (the first direction). ), game balls exceeding the specified number can be thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467 (the area of the ball receiving part 467 in the first direction). Therefore, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be moved as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction).

In this case, the ball receiver 467 holds the first game ball T1, and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiver 467. It is possible to separate the game ball T2 after the ball. Therefore, for example, by displacing the ball receiving part 467 in the third position direction (first direction), while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving member holds the first game ball T1, the second ball and subsequent games can be played. It becomes possible to eject only the ball T2 from the orbital region.

In addition, in the case where the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the second position to receive the first ball, and then the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the third position and the game ball T1 is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467, the second ball is The game ball T2 falls onto the upper part of the rack 466, and the second game ball T2 is thrown between the ball receiving part 467 and the transmission gear 465, and the second game ball T2 is moved to the lower displacement member 440. There is a risk that it will not be possible to discharge the liquid to the outside.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the receiving operation of receiving the ball into the ball receiving part 467 is performed after receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving part 467 at the second position, and then at the first position opposite to the exit opening 471. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second game ball T2 from being unable to be ejected to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is equipped with an accessory that performs a discharging operation to discharge a game ball thrown into the accessory, the movement of the member that discharges the ball (in this embodiment, the ball receiving part 467) is performed at a position that receives the ball. (second position) and the ball ejecting position (third position), when two or more game balls are thrown into the accessory, the ball is ejected from the member that ejects the balls. There is a possibility that the second game ball T2 may be ejected to the side opposite to the exit (output opening 471), but in this embodiment, after receiving the first game ball T1, the ball receiving part 467 is moved to the exit opening 471. By displacing the second game ball T2 to the first position on the opposite side, it is possible to throw the second game ball T2 between the ball receiving portion 467 and the exit opening 471.

As shown in FIGS. 68(a) to (c), after throwing the second game ball T2 onto the displacement path of the ball receiver 467, the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the third position before the firing operation. By doing so, the second game ball T2 can be rolled toward the exit opening 471 side while being in contact with the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the second game ball T2 can be ejected from the exit opening 471.

In this case, the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion of the ball receiver 467 is located above the center position of the second game ball T2 thrown onto the displacement path of the ball receiver 467 (upper part of FIG. 68(a)). will be placed in Further, in a state where the leg portion 467a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a is arranged at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the contact surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Furthermore, since the right side of the U-shape (right side in FIG. 68(a)) of the ball receiving part 467 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction as the right end of the leg part 467a, the second game ball The outer surface of T2 can be brought into contact with leg portion 467a.

In addition, since the leg portion 467a is tilted at approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a is in contact with the outer surface of the lower hemisphere of the second game ball T2 (lower hemisphere on the bottom wall portion 481b side). be touched. Thereby, when rolling the second game ball T2 toward the exit opening 471 side, it is possible to generate a force to lift the second game ball T2 upward on the inclined surface of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, the frictional force between the second game ball T2 and the bottom wall portion 481b when the second game ball T2 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b can be reduced. As a result, when rolling the second game ball T2 toward the exit opening 471 side, it is possible to suppress the ball receiving portion 467 from being stopped.

In other words, the leg portion 467a protrudes from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction), and the protruding tip thereof aligns with the trajectory of the ball receiving portion 467. Since it is formed so that it can come into contact with the lower half of the game ball thrown into the area (that is, the second and subsequent game balls T2), the ball receiving part 467 moves from the first position to the third position (first direction). When the game ball is displaced to , the game ball can be moved while pushing its lower half with the leg portions 467a. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily ejected from the orbital region of the ball receiver 467.

In addition, a leg portion 467a is provided between the first game ball T1 held in the ball receiving portion 467 and the game ball thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 (the second and subsequent game balls T2). By intervening, it is possible to secure an interval between the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 by the protruding length of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the first game ball T1 is held by the ball receiving portion 467, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region.

Furthermore, by engaging with the recess 481b1, the leg portion 467a serves both the role of changing the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 and the role of moving the game ball while pushing its lower half, so the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. This can reduce product costs.

Further, since the size of the recessed portion 481b1 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction) is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the size of the recessed portion 481b1 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the size of the recessed portion 481b1 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (i.e., the size of the recessed portion 481b1). When the second and subsequent game balls T2) are moved as the ball receiver 467 is displaced in the first direction, they can easily pass through the recess 481b1. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily ejected from the orbital region.

As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is placed in the retracted state, the recovery port 411f is placed below the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the game ball T2 discharged in the retracted state is thrown to the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is placed in the first extended state, the recovery port 411f is located below the emission opening 471. Further, the recovery port 411f is opened on the upper side. Therefore, the ejected game ball T2 is thrown to the collection port 411f.

That is, since the recovery port 411f is disposed vertically below the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (erected wall 471a side) and has an opening vertically above, the recovery port 411f The game ball (that is, the second ball and subsequent game balls T2) that is moved as the ball moves in the third position direction (first direction) and is ejected from the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467 is received from the opening of the collection port 411f. can be recovered.

Further, the opening of the collection port 411f is vertically aligned with the end of the base member 470 in the first direction (on the standing wall 471a side) at least in each of the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state. It is placed in the downward direction. As a result, even if the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to the retracted position, the first extended state, or the second extended state, the game ball (i.e., the second ball) that is ejected from the orbital area of the ball receiver 467 Subsequent game balls T2) can be received and collected through the opening of the collection member.

67(a) to (c) and FIG. 68(a) to (c) when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally to the imaginary line H1). When performing the discharging operation of the ball receiving portion 467 shown in , the game ball paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the inside of the collection port 411f. In addition, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state (a state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member 440 The game ball paid out to the outside of 440 is thrown to the collection port 411f as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the configuration when the second game ball T2 is ejected from the exit opening 471 will be described. 69(a) is a partial enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXa of FIG. 68(b), and FIG. 69(b) is a partial enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXb of FIG. 68(a). It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the third position immediately before the firing operation, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the side surface of the ball receiver 467 on the side of the standing wall 471a, and the exit opening is 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

In this case, the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 471a, and when the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, the game ball T2 and the ball receiving portion 467 are brought into contact with each other. By doing so, the rotational force of the ball receiving portion 467 can be transmitted to the game ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily ejected from the exit opening 471. Moreover, the ball receiving part 467 can be returned to the state before the rotation operation by using the repulsive force when the ball receiving part 467 is brought into contact with the game ball T2. Therefore, when discharging the game ball T2 thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467, it is possible to suppress the first game ball T1 held in the ball receiving part 467 from falling off.

Furthermore, the lower displacement member 440 is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in a trajectory area when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position direction (first direction), and has a recessed part. 481b1 is provided with an erected wall 471a located on the first direction side, and the second and subsequent game balls thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467 are disposed in the first direction as the ball receiving part 467 is displaced. When the game ball T2 is moved, it comes into contact with the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving part 467, and the posture change of the ball receiving part 467 can be regulated, so that the first game ball T1 can be moved. While maintaining the state held by the ball receiving part 467, only the second and subsequent game balls can be easily ejected from the orbital area.

That is, since the standing wall 471a is erected at a height from the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the erecting tip that is lower than the radius of the game ball, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction When the game ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the legs, the lower half of the game ball T2 comes into contact with the erected wall 471a, making it easier for the game ball to get over the erected wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the ball receiver 467 (that is, the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiver 467 and the standing wall 471a), and a reaction force is applied from the game ball T2 to the ball receiver 467. Therefore, it is possible to control the change in the posture of the ball receiving part, and it is possible to suppress the first game ball held by the ball receiving part 467 from falling off. As a result, while maintaining the state in which the first game ball is held by the ball receiving portion 467, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the game area.

On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls T2 are not thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467, no game ball is interposed between the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving part 467, so the leg By engaging the portion 467a with the recessed portion 481b1, the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed. As a result, the first game ball T1 (that is, the game ball held in the ball receiver 467) can be easily ejected from the ball receiver 467 by utilizing the change in the attitude of the ball receiver 467.

Next, the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. 70(a) is a top view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 70(b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 500. 71 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 72 is an exploded rear perspective view of the distribution unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the sorting unit 500 includes a base plate 520 formed in a plate-shaped body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a space between the base plate 520 that is attached to the front side of the base plate 520 and that faces the base plate 520. a path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of downstream paths through which balls can flow; a distribution member 540 that is rotatably attached to the back side of the base plate 520; and a distribution member 540 that is attached to the end surface of the base plate 520. and an extended path member 530 that extends the downward flow path of the ball formed between the opposing path forming member 510 and the path forming member 510.

The base plate 520 includes a cylindrical shaft portion 523 protruding toward the back side, a first opening 521 formed through the shaft portion 523 in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft portion 523, and a radius smaller than the first opening 521. A second opening 522 penetratingly formed in a large arc shape, a rolling portion 525 formed in a U-shaped cross section with an open upper end side on the side surface of the upper end and extending in the left-right direction, and a hook-shaped protrusion on the back side. It is formed mainly with a locking part 524.

The shaft portion 523 is a shaft that is inserted into a shaft hole 545 of a distribution member 540 to be described later and rotatably attaches the distribution member 540 to the base member, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 545. be done.

The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings into which a regulating plate 541 and a storage plate 542 of a distribution member 540, which will be described later, are inserted, and have a width larger than the thickness of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542. It is formed. Further, since the distribution member 540 is rotatably attached to the base plate 520, the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are larger than the circumferential dimension of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 when viewed from the front. The length of the arc is large.

The locking portion 524 is an engaging portion that locks the biasing spring SP4 with a locking portion 544 formed on the distribution member 540, and one end of the biasing spring SP4 is locked.

The rolling portion 525 is a bottom surface on which the ball rolls, and is formed to be inclined downward toward one end on the left side in rear view (left side in FIG. 70(b)) and has a U-shaped curved shape. It is formed larger than the outer shape of a sphere. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be prevented from stopping at the rolling portion, and the ball can be rolled toward one end.

Further, the rolling portion 525 includes a plurality of protrusions 525b that protrude toward the inside of the U shape from the front and rear sides, and an opening 525a that opens toward the back side at one end.

The protrusions 525b are formed on the front and rear sides at regular intervals, and the protrusions 525b formed on the front side and the protrusions 525b formed on the back side are formed at alternate positions when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can collide with the protrusion 525b, so that the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be slowed down.

Here, as described above, the ball is thrown to the ball receiver 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 with the ball receiver 467 placed in the first position (Figs. 65(a) and 65(b) )reference). Therefore, when the ball throwing speed of the game ball rolling on the rolling part 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3 is increased, the game ball is thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 440 before the ball receiving part 467 is moved to the second position. There is a risk that it will be done.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 525b are formed to protrude from the inner surface of the rolling portion 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3, and the game balls passing through the rolling portion 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3 are Since resistance can be applied, the speed of the game ball passing through the third ball throwing route KR3 can be slowed down. Therefore, since the time required when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position) can be increased accordingly, the game ball can be securely placed in the ball receiving part 467. can be received by. Further, since the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be reduced, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced, and product costs can be reduced.

The opening 525a is formed to be open to the back side of one end of the rolling portion 525, and its outer shape when viewed from the back is larger than the size of a sphere. Therefore, the ball rolling toward one end of the rolling portion 525 is discharged from the opening 525a.

The path forming member 510 is formed in a rectangular and vertically elongated plate shape with a horizontal width smaller than that of the base plate 520, and has a plurality of walls larger than the outer diameter of the game ball on the back side. By forming the distance between the opposing sides to be larger than the outer diameter of the sphere, a plurality of downward flow paths for the spheres are formed inside the sphere.

The path forming member 510 has a first opening 511 that opens on the upper end surface, a first ball throwing path KR1 formed between opposing side walls of the first opening 511, and a second ball throwing path KR1 connected to the first ball throwing path KR1. KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3, and the second opening 512 and the third opening 513 that open on the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the ends of the second ball throwing path KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3, are formed to penetrate in the front and back direction. A fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed by a plurality of openings 514, 515, 516 and the walls on the back side of the openings 514, 515, 516, and a fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed on the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the end of the fourth ball throwing path KR4. The fourth opening 517 is mainly formed.

The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing balls thrown from a ball throwing unit 600 (described later) to flow into the distribution unit, and is formed on the side surface of the upper end of the path forming member 510, and its outer shape is smaller than that of the ball. Formed large. Further, the first opening 511 is connected to the ball throwing unit 600 and allows a ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600 to flow into the first opening 511 .

The first ball throwing path KR1 is a path through which the ball flowing from the first opening 511 flows down between the opposing base plate 520 and the path forming member 510, and is formed by extending downward. Further, the fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed to extend approximately one third of the path forming member 510 in the vertical direction, and its downstream end is connected to the second ball throwing path KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3. be done. That is, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 is configured to be able to flow down the second ball throwing path KR2 or the third ball throwing path KR3.

As described above, the second ball throwing route KR2 is a route formed by being connected to the first ball throwing route KR1, and its downstream end is connected to the second opening 512. That is, when a ball that flows down from the first opening 511 and flows down the first ball throwing path KR1 flows down to the second ball throwing path KR2, it is discharged from the second opening 512 to the outside of the distribution unit 500.

The second opening 512 is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for recovering the balls. Therefore, the balls discharged from the second opening are collected by the collection path. Moreover, inside the second opening 512 (downstream end of the second ball throwing path KR2), a sensor device SE2 that detects passage of the game ball is arranged. Therefore, by detecting the number of game balls passing through the third winning opening 82 with the sensor device SE1 and detecting the number of game balls passing through the second ball throwing path KR2 with the sensor device SE2, the third ball throwing The number of game balls passing through route KR3 can be detected.

That is, it is possible to detect whether a predetermined number of game balls (one ball) are stored upstream of the regulation plate 541, which will be described later, based on the difference between the sensor device SE1 and the sensor device SE1. For example, when the third electric accessory 82a is opened once, the number of balls passing through the third prize opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight, and the number of balls passing through the second ball throwing route KR2 (sensor device SE2) is eight. If the number is seven, it can be detected that one game ball is flowing down (storing) the third ball throwing route KR3.

As described above, the third ball throwing route KR3 is a route formed by being connected to the first ball throwing route KR1, and the downstream end thereof is connected to the third opening 513. That is, when the ball that flows down from the first opening 511 and flows down the first ball throwing route KR1 flows down to the third ball throwing route KR3, it is discharged from the third opening 513.

The third opening 513 is formed above the other end side of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520 (the end side opposite to the opening 525a). Therefore, the ball discharged from the third opening 513 is thrown inside the rolling portion 525. That is, the ball thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 is thrown to the rolling portion 525 via the third opening 513.

The openings 514 to 516 are each formed on the back side of the third winning hole 82 formed on the game board 13, and the ball that wins the third winning hole 82 is thrown. That is, when a ball flowing down the game area on the front side of the game board 13 enters the third winning opening 82, the ball is thrown into the distribution unit 500 from the openings 514 to 516.

The fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed so as to be connected to the openings 514 to 516, and is connected to one path on the downstream side, and connected to the fourth opening formed in the lower end surface of the path forming member 510. The fourth opening is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for recovering the balls. Therefore, the ball won in the third prize opening 82 of the game board 13 is thrown to the fourth ball throwing path KR4 of the distribution unit 500, and then discharged from the fourth opening 517 and collected.

The extension path member 530 has a U-shaped cross section with an open bottom, and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the extended path member 530 is formed so that the inner diameter of the U-shape is larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Therefore, by being disposed above the rolling part 525 of the base plate 520, the ball thrown to the upper part of the rolling part 525 can be thrown inside the rolling part 525 and the extension path member 530, and , the balls rolling on the rolling portion can be prevented from falling from the rolling portion 525.

Further, the extension path member 530 is formed with protrusions 531 that are formed at regular intervals at the same positions in the left-right direction as the protrusions 525b formed on the rolling portion 525. Thereby, similarly to the protrusion 525b, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be reduced.

The distribution member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front with one end long, and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 includes a regulating plate 541 and a storage plate 542 that are plate-shaped and protrude from the front side, a shaft hole 545 that is formed through the upper end, and a hook-shaped locking part 544 that is formed on the back side. It is formed mainly by

As described above, the shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, and is formed to penetrate in the front-back direction. The distribution member 540 can be rotated by the base plate 520 by inserting the shaft part 523 of the base plate 520 into the shaft hole 545 and fastening a screw or the like with a larger head than the shaft hole to the shaft part 523 from the back side. It is installed in a perfect condition.

The regulating plate 541 is disposed at a connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2 through the first opening 521 to prevent the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 from flowing into the second ball throwing path KR2. This plate member is formed to protrude toward the front side from the front end surface of the shaft hole 545, and the distance from the base plate 520 toward the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the regulating plate 541 is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545, the displacement area of the regulation plate 541 can be minimized.

The storage plate 542 is a plate member that is disposed on the second ball throwing route KR2 through the second opening 522 and stores balls flowing down the second ball throwing route KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542. It is formed so as to protrude toward the front side from the front end face, and the protruding distance from the base plate 520 toward the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the storage plate 542 is formed to be curved into an arc centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545, and the radius of the arc is larger than the radius of the curved portion of the regulating plate 541. Therefore, the storage plate 542 is formed at a position farther away from the shaft hole 545 than the regulating plate 541 is. Thereby, the regulation plate 541 can be made to protrude into the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2, and the storage plate 542 can be arranged on the second ball throwing path KR2. Furthermore, the displacement area when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

The protrusion 543 is a drive transmission member that applies rotational driving force to the distribution member 540 when collided with the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 described above, and protrudes toward the other end of the distribution member 540. It is formed. That is, the protrusion 543 to which the driving force is transmitted is formed on the side opposite to one end where the shaft hole 545 serving as the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is formed. Thereby, the force with which the abutting plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides can be reduced.

Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor KM3 that displaces the abutting plate 464c can be reduced, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 can be reduced. Moreover, since the energy when the abutment plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 during driving can be reduced, the collision sound when the abutment plate 464c and the protrusion 543 collide can be reduced. Note that detailed aspects of the collision between the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 will be described later.

Further, a circularly bulging portion 543a is formed at a portion where the protruding tip of the protruding portion 543 contacts the abutting plate 464c. By bringing the contact plate 464c into contact with the bulging portion 543a, the contact area between the contact plate and the distribution member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, when rotating and displacing the sorting member 540, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance between the protrusion 543 (bulging portion 543a) and the contact plate 464c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 from increasing.

The locking portion 544 is a portion that locks the biasing spring SP4 with the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520, as described above. Therefore, since the other end side of the distribution member 540 can always apply a rotational force to the locking portion 524 side, it is possible to suppress the distribution member 540 from shaking due to vibrations of the Pachinko machine 10 or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the flow path of the balls of the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail. FIG. 73 is a sectional view of the distribution unit 500 taken along the line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 70(a). In addition, in FIG. 73, the distribution member 540 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, FIG. 73 shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is placed at the storage position.

Here, the state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is the state in which the distribution member 540 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 and the storage plate 542 is placed on the second ball throwing path KR2. .

As shown in FIG. 73, the first ball throwing path KR1 is such that the lower end side of the downstream path is tilted toward the center portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 73), and the tilted portion is gentle. It is curved into an S-shape. Further, the S-shaped curved tip portion is connected to the third ball throwing path KR3, and the second ball throwing path KR2 is tilted at the end of the first ball throwing path KR1 in a direction opposite to the direction in which the first ball throwing path KR1 is tilted. are connected in the same state.

Thereby, by causing the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 to collide with the lower surface of the tilting portion, the direction of the ball flowing down can be directed from the direction of gravity to the direction in which the first ball throwing path KR1 is tilted. Therefore, the ball can be caused to flow down toward the entrance of the third ball throwing path KR3 (the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3). Therefore, in a state where the distribution member 540 is not disposed, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 can be thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3.

Here, there is a downstream path along which the game ball flows, a first branch path and a second branch path that are branched from the downstream path, and a game ball that has flown down the downstream path is directed to either the first branch path or the second branch path. A game machine that distributes games is known.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are alternately distributed one ball at a time to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, so the game balls flowing down the flow passage are distributed to the first branch passage. It is distributed equally (that is, half each) to the passage and the second branch passage. That is, there was a problem in that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage could not be changed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the ball receiving part 467 is formed to be displaceable and receives game balls from the third ball throwing path KR3, and the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving part 467 comes into contact with the distribution member 540. Since the distribution member 540 is displaced by contacting and being displaced, the number of game balls to be distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route can be changed according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3 can be changed.

Note that the distributing member 540 can be displaced by using the displacement of the ball receiver 467, so it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displacing the distributing member 540. It can be made unnecessary. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and product costs can be reduced.

In addition, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the distribution member 540 is controlled using position detection by a sensor device or drive by a drive means, reliability of the distribution operation of the distribution member may decrease due to malfunction due to poor detection or control. However, according to this embodiment, the destinations to which balls are distributed by the distribution member 540 can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiver 467, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the ball receiving section 467 is a member that receives game balls from the rolling section 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3, the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 is changed to the third ball sending path in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving section 467. By switching to , it is possible to ensure that the displacement member receives the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3.

Furthermore, in the conventional gaming machine, the game balls flowing down the flowing path are only distributed to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, so that it is insufficient to provide players with interest.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is set to the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), the flow of game balls in the third ball is restricted. , since it is equipped with a storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) that allows the game balls to flow down in the third ball throwing path KR3 when the destination to which the distribution member 540 distributes is the second ball throwing path KR2 (second branch path). , can provide interest to players.

That is, when the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third ball throwing route, the flow of the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 is restricted and the game balls are stored in the third ball throwing route KR3, and at the same time, the regulation plate 541 When the distribution destination according to 541 is set to the second ball throwing route KR2, it is possible to allow the game balls to flow down the third ball throwing route KR3, and to allow the game balls stored in the third ball throwing route KR3 to flow down (release). can. As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 (downstream route) to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2, the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 are A downward (opening) action can be formed. Furthermore, these storage and release operations can be performed alternately in conjunction with the distribution operation. As a result, it is possible to provide interest to the player.

Further, since a distribution member 540 (integral member) is provided in which a regulation plate 541 (distribution means) and a storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) are integrally formed, the regulation plate 541 and storage plate 542 are operated. The structure can be simplified and the reliability of operation can be improved. In other words, when the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed separately, they are two parts, so it is possible to simplify the operation of these two parts. This complicates the structure and reduces the reliability of operation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be formed as a single component, so the structure can be simplified accordingly, reducing product cost and improving operational reliability. be able to.

Further, the distribution member 540 is formed to be movable between a storage position (first state position) and a regulation position (second state position), and when the distribution member 540 is displaced to the storage position, the regulation plate 541 is The third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) is placed in a position where the distribution destination is the destination, and the storage plate 542 is placed in a position to restrict the flow of game balls in the third ball throwing path KR3, and the distribution member 540 is displaced to the restriction position. In the state in which the distribution member 540 By displacing the ball at two positions (storage position and regulation position), in addition to distributing the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 (flowing path) to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route, 3. It is possible to form an action that temporarily stops the falling of the game balls distributed to the ball throwing path KR3 (storage) and an action that causes the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (release), and also allows these storage. The opening and opening operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution operation. That is, by simplifying the structure, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve operational reliability.

The sorting member 540 (integral member) is formed to be rotatable, and the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed to be able to move in and out of the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path), and the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) By protruding toward KR3, the falling of game balls is restricted, and since the distribution member 540 is formed into an arc-shaped curved shape centered on the rotation axis, the third ball throwing path KR3 is controlled so that the restriction plate 541 can come and go. The area of the hole (recess 519) opened in the inner wall of the can be reduced.

Since the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is arranged in such a manner that the side facing upstream of the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) is concave, the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third ball throwing path KR3. In the initial state (i.e., the state in which only the distal end side of the flow state changing means is protruded into the passageway), the shape of the distal end side of the storage plate 542 can be arranged in a direction that facilitates regulating the flow of game balls; The flow of game balls distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3 can be easily regulated.

Furthermore, in a state where the storage plate 542 is maximally protruded to the third ball throwing path and restricts the game balls from flowing down, the game balls can be held stably by the concave portion of the storage plate 542, so that it is possible to suppress the game balls from going wild.

The sorting unit 500 includes a biasing spring SP4 (biasing means) that applies a biasing force to the distributing member 540 (integral member) and biases the regulation plate 541 in the direction of protruding into the third ball throwing path (first branch path). ), and the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540. , it is possible to easily maintain the distribution member 540 in a position in which the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third emergency route (i.e., the storage position).

In this case, since the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540, when a falling game ball collides with the rotation axis, Since the distance from the ball is large, the storage plate 542 is likely to retract even when the same impact force is applied, and the biasing direction of the biasing spring SP4 is set to be the direction in which the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third ball throwing path KR3. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from being recessed into the recess 519 by the biasing force.

In addition, the distribution member 540 (integrated member) rotates the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) in the direction of protruding into the third ball throwing path (first branch path) due to its own weight, so it The sorting member 540 can be easily maintained in a position where the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third ball throwing path KR3 (ie, the storage position). Therefore, when a game ball collides, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the recess 519 by its own weight.

Furthermore, even if the biasing spring SP4 (biasing means) falls off, the distribution member 540 is maintained in a posture in which the regulating plate 541 protrudes toward the third ball throwing path KR3 due to its own weight, and the game player goes to the third ball throwing path. It is possible to suppress the ball from flowing down.

Furthermore, the ball receiver 467 is provided with a biasing spring SP4 that applies a biasing force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 on either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2. 540 in a direction opposed to the direction of the biasing spring SP4, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the other of the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2, and the biasing force of the biasing spring , the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is returned to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 from being changed inadvertently. In this case, after the distribution member 540 is displaced with the displacement of the ball receiver 467 and the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before switching can be performed by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4. Therefore, it is not necessary for the abutment plate 464c that interlocks with the ball receiving portion 467 to be in abutment with the distribution member 540. That is, the abutment plate 464c that interlocks with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the distribution member 540. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467 can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, displacement of the distribution member 540 will be described. 74(a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500 in the range LXXIV of FIG. 73. Note that FIG. 74(a) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is located at the storage position, and FIG. 74(b) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is located in the restriction position. In addition, the state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the regulation position means that the abutment plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540, and the distribution member 540 moves around the axis of the shaft hole 545. This is a state in which the regulating plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3 after being rotated.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), when the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position, the storage plate 542 is placed on the third ball throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 541 is placed on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is located inside a recess 518 formed in the wall of.

In this case, the distance L1 between the end of the tip of the storage plate 542 protruding inward of the third ball throwing path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball throwing path KR3 that faces the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, a ball thrown from upstream of the third ball throwing path KR3 (first ball throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542.

Further, the distance L2 from the inside of the curved portion of the storage plate 542 to the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3 is set to be larger than the radius of the ball, and is set to be larger than the diameter of the ball. is set small. Thereby, the number of balls stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 can be set to one ball. Note that, hereinafter, the state of the distribution unit 500 in which one ball is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 will be referred to as a storage state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74(b), when the distribution member 540 is placed in the restriction position, the restriction plate 541 is placed at the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3. , the storage plate 542 is disposed inside the recess 519 formed in the wall on the back side of the path forming member 510.

In this case, the distance L3 between the end of the tip of the regulating plate 541 protruding inward of the first ball throwing path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 541 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 540 between the regulation position and the storage position, a ball thrown along the first ball throwing path KR1 is thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third ball throwing path KR3; A state can be created in which a ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 cannot flow into the third ball throwing path KR3 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

Therefore, by displacing one distribution member 540, when the ball is divided into two downstream paths from one downstream path, it is possible to reliably switch the downstream path of the ball to either one.

In addition, the biasing spring SP4 applies a biasing force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 on the second ball throwing route KR2, so that when the ball receiving section 467 is unable to receive game balls, It is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 from being switched to the third ball throwing path.

Further, the regulation plate 541 (distributing means) is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) or the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path), and its appearance and retraction position is Since it is an inner wall on the downstream end of the first ball throwing route KR1 on an extended line in the downstream direction, the regulating plate 541 can be made to protrude at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first ball throwing route KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the regulation plate 541 starts to protrude into the downstream passageway or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passageway) to when the game balls can be sorted. As a result, the distribution destination can be reliably switched by the regulation plate 541.

In addition, the regulation plate 541 (distributing means) is projected into the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branching path) to move the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) to the second ball throwing path ( Since the protruding direction of the regulating plate 541 is set to point toward the upstream end of the second ball throwing route KR2, the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 make a protruding action. When the game ball comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the regulation plate, the game ball can be pushed into the second ball throwing path KR along with the protruding operation of the regulation plate. As a result, the distribution to the second ball throwing path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

In this embodiment, the regulation plate 541 of the distribution member 540 is arranged at a position closer to the shaft hole 545 than the storage plate 542, but the regulation plate 541 is arranged at a position farther from the shaft hole 545 than the regulation plate 541 is. may be placed in That is, the axis of the distribution member 540 may be arranged at the position of the point P on the downstream side of the third ball throwing path KR3 as shown in FIGS. 74(a) and 74(b). . In this case, the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 formed in the distribution member 540 are arranged at the same position as in this embodiment.

With the shaft hole 545 disposed at the point P, the displacement speed of the regulating plate 541 can be made faster than that of the storage plate 542 when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the restriction position as described later, the restriction plate 541 can be quickly projected onto the flow path. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 from flowing into the third ball throwing path KR3 at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the regulation position to the storage position.

Moreover, in this case, the shape of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 when viewed from the front is formed into an arc shape centered on the point P. Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the restriction position to the storage position (or the opposite), the displacement area of the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be minimized. Further, the recesses 518 and 519 that receive the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 outside the third ball throwing path KR3 have a concave shape along the displacement locus of the regulation plate 541 and the regulation plate 541.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, a case will be described in which two or more balls are thrown from the ball throwing path when the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position. FIGS. 75(a) and 75(b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIGS. 76(a) and 76(b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 74(a). Further, from FIG. 75(a) to FIG. 76(b), transition states of the sphere when the sphere is introduced are sequentially illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 75(a) to 76(b), the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 75(b), when the first game ball T1 is thrown to the first ball throwing route KR1 with the distribution member 540 placed in the storage position, as described above, , the game ball T1 is thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542.

In this case, since the storage plate 542 is located downstream from the upper end of the third ball sending path KR3 by a distance between the radius and the diameter of the ball, some of the balls stopped at the upper part of the storage plate 542 is projected toward the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 75).

Therefore, as described above, the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed to be able to roll on the inner wall on the gravity direction side. The storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed to be able to move in and out of the third ball throwing path KR3 from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity, so the game ball is not stored until the storage plate 542 starts protruding into the third ball throwing path KR3. The time required to reach a state where the flow of water can be regulated can be shortened. As a result, the distribution destination of the regulation plate 541 is switched from the second ball throwing route KR2 (second branch path) to the third ball throwing route KR3, and when the game ball is distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3, the game ball is The protrusion of the storage plate 542 can be easily adjusted in time to regulate the flow down.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is formed so as to be able to protrude and retract from the third ball throwing path KR3, and in a state where it is maximally projected into the third ball throwing path KR3, a force component in the direction of the projection is applied from the game ball to the storage plate 542. Therefore, when regulating the flow of the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the recess 519 due to the impact when the game balls collide. Therefore, it is possible to easily control the flow of game balls.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76(a) and (b), when the second game ball T2 is thrown to the first ball throwing route KR1 when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, the game ball T2 is The ball is thrown in the direction from the first ball throwing path KR1 to the upper end of the third ball throwing path KR3. Since the game ball T1 is stopped at the upper end of the third ball throwing path KR3, the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

In this case, as described above, since the game ball T1 is in a state of protruding toward the first ball throwing path KR1 side, the game ball T2 is not thrown inside the third ball throwing path KR3, but is sent to the second ball throwing path KR2. Since the game ball T2 can be guided, it is possible to throw the game ball T2 to the second ball throwing route KR2 without staying inside the third ball throwing route KR3. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the ball throwing on the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2.

That is, the inner wall of the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) on the side facing the second ball throwing path KR2 (second branch path) directs the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 to the third ball throwing path KR3 (first ball path). Since it is formed so that the last game ball out of a specified number (one ball) of game balls stored in the branch passageway can be guided to the side of the third ball throwing route KR3, the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1. After colliding with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls, the ball can be easily caused to flow down to the second ball throwing path KR2.

In addition, among the specified number of game balls, the last game ball means the game ball located on the upstream side (on the opposite side to the regulation plate 541). Further, in this embodiment, the prescribed number is set to one ball. In this case, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the third ball throwing route KR3.

Further, as described above, the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) is such that the lower end side of the downstream path is tilted toward the center portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 73), and the tilting The part is formed with a gentle S-shape. That is, since the downstream end of the first ball throwing route KR1 (downstream path) is formed in the downstream direction of the upstream end of the third ball throwing route KR3, the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 is When colliding with the last game ball of the prescribed number of game balls stored in the throwing path, the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last game ball is different from the downstream direction of the upstream end of the third ball throwing path KR3. can be set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tail game ball from flying out from the upstream end of the third ball throwing path KR3 and flowing into the second ball throwing path KR2 due to the repulsive force upon collision.

Furthermore, since the upper end of the third ball throwing path KR3 is formed to be inclined in the direction of inclination of the lower end of the first ball throwing path KR1, the position where the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 is set in the upper hemisphere of the game ball T1. In addition, it can be set to the second ball throwing path KR2 side. Therefore, the rebound direction of the game ball T2 that collided with the game ball T1 can be set to the entrance (upper end) side of the second ball throwing path KR2. Therefore, the game ball T2 that collides with the game ball T1 can be easily thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball from stagnating in the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2.

In addition, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), and the flow of game balls in the third ball throwing route KR3 is regulated by the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means). In a state where a specified number (1 ball) of game balls are stored in the third ball throwing route KR3, the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 (downstream path) can flow down to the second ball throwing path KR2 (second branch path). Therefore, when more than a specified number of game balls flow down the flow path, the game balls exceeding the specified number (game balls T2 from the second ball onward) are prevented from staying in the first ball throwing path KR1. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the regulating plate 541 (the operation of assigning the second ball throwing route KR2) from being obstructed by the game ball stuck in the first ball throwing route KR1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a description will be given of a case where a ball is thrown into the ball throwing path when the distribution member 540 is placed at the restriction position. FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 77(a) and (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 74(a). Further, FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) each illustrate the transition state of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Furthermore, FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) show a state in which the distribution member 540 is placed at the regulation position.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), when a ball is thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 with the distribution member 540 disposed at the regulating position, the thrown game ball T1 is transferred to the first ball throwing path KR1. It collides with the regulation plate 541 at the lower end of the route KR1. Thereby, the game ball T1 is guided to the second ball throwing route KR2 and flows down the second ball throwing route KR2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a description will be given of the operation when the ball is caused to flow down the downstream side of the third ball throwing path KR3. FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 74(a). Further, FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b) each illustrate the transition state of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Furthermore, FIG. 78(a) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is placed at the storage position, and FIG. 78(b) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is placed in the restriction position.

As shown in FIGS. 78(a) and (b), when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state (the state shown in FIG. 78(a)), the distribution member 540 is displaced and placed in the regulation position. , the game ball T1 stagnated above the storage plate 542 is flown down to the downstream side of the third ball throwing route KR3.

That is, only the balls that are stagnant above the storage plate 542 are allowed to flow down the third ball throwing path KR3. Furthermore, as described above, the number of balls stagnant above the storage plate 542 is set to 1, so that the balls can be flown down to the third ball throwing path KR3 one ball at a time. Therefore, the number of balls flowing down the third ball throwing path KR3 can be stabilized, and it is possible to suppress an unintended number of balls from falling down the third ball throwing path KR3.

Therefore, the distributing member 540 (distributing means) has a regulating plate 541 (first protruding and retracting part) formed so as to be able to protrude and retract from the third ball throwing path (first branch passage) as the distributing member 540 is displaced. The regulating plate 541 includes a storage plate (second protruding and retracting part), and by protruding into the third ball throwing path, the regulating plate 541 directs the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) to the second ball throwing path KR2 (second branch). The storage plate 542 is located on the downstream side of the third ball throwing route KR3 than the regulating plate 541 and projects into the third ball throwing route KR3, so that the storage plate 542 can distribute the balls to the third ball throwing route KR3. The regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed so as to be able to regulate the flow of the game balls that are thrown, and when one of the regulating plates 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third ball throwing route KR3, the other is outside the passage of the third ball throwing route KR3 (recessed part). 518, 519), by displacing the sorting member 540 in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member), only the specified number (one ball) of game balls are transferred to the third ball throwing path KR3. The ball receiving portion 467 can receive the ball.

That is, by protruding the regulation plate 541, the first state in which the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 are distributed to the second ball throwing route, and by retracting the regulation plate 541, the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 are distributed to the second state. A second state in which the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing route are distributed to the third ball throwing route, and a third state in which the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 are restricted from flowing down (game balls are stored) by the second protruding part protruding. By retracting the second protruding and retracting part, it is possible to form a fourth state in which the game ball stored in the third ball throwing path is caused to flow down and received by the ball receiving part, and each of these states By combining the above, it is possible to distribute only a prescribed number (one ball) of game balls to the third ball throwing route KR3 and have the ball receiver 467 receive them.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 includes the regulation plates 541 and 542, that is, is formed as one component, the structure of the distribution member 540 (the structure of the distribution member 540 (the structure of the distribution member 540 (for operating the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 and exhibiting their functions) structure) can be simplified. Further, when one of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the third ball throwing path KR3, the other is retracted outside the third ball throwing path KR3, so that the two of the ball receiving portions 467 It is sufficient if the distribution member 540 is also formed to be movable into two positions depending on the position (first position and second position). That is, by displacing the distribution member 540 at two positions, the first to fourth states described above can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distribution member 540 and the structure for displacing the distribution member 540 in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiver 467 can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distribution operation can be improved accordingly.

Next, the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 80. FIG. 79 is a front view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 80 is a top view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. Note that the lower displacement unit 400 is illustrated in a state where it is disposed at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the distribution unit 500 is arranged on the front side (lower side in FIG. 80) of the lower displacement unit 400. In this case, the opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the sorting unit 500 and the opening 451a formed in the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 are arranged at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 is sent into the lower displacement member 440 through the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

In other words, throwing the ball to the lower displacement member 440 involves passing the ball flowing down the playing area in front of the game board 13 from the third prize opening 82 formed on the game board 13 via the ball throwing unit 600 and the distribution unit 500. will be carried out.

Therefore, the distribution unit 500 includes a rolling part 525 that communicates with the orbital region of the ball receiving part 467, and the distribution member 540 restricts the passage of game balls in the rolling part 525. To surely throw the second and subsequent game balls T2 to the trajectory area of a distribution member 540 via a rolling part 525 even when a malfunction occurs and the second and subsequent game balls T2 are thrown. Can be done. As a result, problems caused by the second and subsequent game balls T2 are less likely to occur.

Next, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. 81, 83, and 85 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 82, 84, and 86 are sectional views of the distribution unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 81, 83, and 85, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and only the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500 disposed on the front side is illustrated. . In addition, in FIGS. 82, 84, and 86, the distribution member 540 is illustrated with a chain line, and the abutting plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 disposed on the back side is illustrated with a chain line.

Furthermore, FIGS. 81 and 82 illustrate a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the first position and the distribution member 540 is placed in the regulation position, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state. The located state is illustrated. 83 and 84 illustrate a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the second position, the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position, and the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state. The condition is illustrated. 85 and 86 illustrate a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the first position and the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state. A state located at is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiver 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is in the first position, the ball receiver A rack 466 for driving the movable rack 467 is disposed on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (on the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), and a movable rack 464 is disposed on the back side so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, like the rack 466, the movable rack 464 is placed on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (on the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front). Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is located on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, the side surface on the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the left side surface when viewed from the front) is brought into contact with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, a rotational driving force is applied to the distribution member 540 around the axis of the shaft hole 545, and the distribution member 540 is displaced to a position (restriction position) in which the restriction plate 541 is projected into the first ball throwing path KR1.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiver 467 is placed in the first position, the ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is transferred to the third ball throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2 without being thrown down. In addition, as described above, by displacing the distribution member 540 from the storage state in which balls are stored above the storage plate 542 to the regulation position, the game player is placed on the downstream side of the third ball throwing path KR3 (downstream side of the storage plate 542) Can throw the ball. At this time, the game ball can be thrown inside the ball receiving part 467 by causing the ball receiving part 467 to perform a ball receiving operation.

Note that the opening operation of the third electric accessory 82a to store game balls in the sorting unit 500 is performed before the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the first position, and the ball receiving part 467 is moved to the first position. When being displaced to the position, the third electric accessory 82a is in a closed state. As a result, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position, the game balls passing through the first ball throwing path KR1 are not restricted from flowing down by the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and unintended game balls are 3. It is possible to suppress the ball from being thrown to the downstream side of the ball throwing path KR3.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is formed to be able to operate in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiver 467, it regulates the throwing of game balls to the trajectory area of the ball receiver 467 in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiver 467. Or acceptable. In other words, regulation or permission of throwing a game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiver 467, so that, for example, the distribution member 540 can It is not necessary to control the driving means for driving the drive unit 540 or each of these means, and accordingly, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability of the operation.

Furthermore, the distribution member 540 is configured to throw the game ball T2 to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 from the second position to the first position direction (second direction). This allows the game ball to be reliably thrown to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, which is on the first direction side of the ball receiving portion 467.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be displaceable between a switching position for switching the distribution member 540 and a receiving position (second position) set at a position different from the switching position (first position). When the ball receiving section 467 is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distributing member 540 is switched to the third ball throwing path KR3, and when the ball receiving section 467 is displaced to the receiving position, the ball receiving section is distributed from the third ball throwing path. 467 is enabled to receive game balls, and the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the second ball throwing route KR2. It is possible to prevent the exceeded game balls from being distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the ball receiving part 467 receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 remains switched to the third ball throwing route. There is a possibility that more game balls than the prescribed number that can be received by the ball receiving section 467 will be distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3. If a means for regulating the inflow of game balls into the third ball throwing route KR3 is provided separately, the structure becomes complicated, reliability decreases, and product cost increases.

In contrast, in the embodiment, after the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position and a prescribed number (one ball in this embodiment) of game balls are distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3, the distribution member 540 is moved to the receiving position. When the ball is displaced to , the distribution destination is switched to the second ball throwing route KR2, so that more than one game ball can be prevented from flowing down to the third ball throwing route. Therefore, the ball receiving section 467 can prevent game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) that can be received from being distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3. Further, since there is no need to separately provide the above-mentioned means (means for regulating the inflow of game balls into the third ball throwing path KR3), it is possible to improve reliability and reduce product costs.

Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (turned on), each operation unit starts from the position where the power is turned off (turned off). Furthermore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, only the control thereof may be reset. In that case, if the distribution member 540 is provided with a driving means, when the power is turned on, the distribution unit 500 in the storage state operates during the initial operation to cause the game balls to flow down the third ball throwing path KR3, There is a risk that the game ball will be thrown to the retracted side (first position side) of the ball receiving portion 467 located at the third position.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiver 467 are synchronized, so even if the power is turned off while the pachinko machine 10 is not located at the predetermined reference position, the pachinko machine It is possible to prevent an unintended game ball from being thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiver 467 when the machine 10 is powered on. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from clogging inside the lower displacement member 440.

Furthermore, if the power is turned off while the game balls are left in the orbital area of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving part 467 is caused to perform the ejection operation described above, so that the game balls are not left in the orbital area of the ball receiving part 467. The game balls can be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 and collected from the collection port 411f.

Next, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the retracted state, and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the second or third position (a position other than the first position). In this state, as described above, the rack 466 that drives the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at approximately the center position of the lower displacement member 440 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 83), and the movable rack 464 It is arranged at a position movable toward one end from the other end (left side in the left-right direction in FIG. 83).

Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is arranged at a position spaced from the other end of the lower displacement member 4440 toward one end. In this case, the surface on the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the surface on the left side when viewed from the front) is separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the sorting member 540 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the sorting member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is rotated to the third throwing ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) where it is projected onto path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiver 467 is placed in the second position or the third position (a position other than the first position), the first ball throwing path of the distribution unit 500 is The ball thrown to KR1 is stopped above the storage plate 542. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, a ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 collides with a ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2. .

Next, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, when the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the first extended state or the second extended state, the lower displacement member 440 slides with respect to the front base 411 as described above. It is both displaced and rotationally displaced. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, and is separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the sorting member 540 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the sorting member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is rotated to the third throwing ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) where it is projected onto path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state or the second extended state, the ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542. be done. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, a ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 collides with a ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2. .

That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state and the second extended state (states other than the retracted state), the opening 451a of the decorative member 450 is opened as the lower displacement member 440 is displaced. Since the position is displaced, the communication state of the sphere between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the sorting unit 500 is released. Therefore, when the ball flows down the third ball throwing path KR3, there is a risk that the ball will be discharged from the opening 451a into the back case 300. However, in this embodiment, by setting the distribution member 540 to the storage position, the third ball throwing path It is possible to suppress the ball from flowing down the downstream side of the route KR3. As a result, the balls of the back case 300 can be prevented from being ejected into the interior.

In other words, the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 is formed to be displaceable in the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state, and when the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state, Since the ball receiver 467 is disposed on the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiver 467 can be displaced with the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state, or in the first or second extended state. A mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced can be formed. Therefore, the performance effect can be increased accordingly.

In this case, when the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the first or second extended state, the ball receiving part 467 cannot receive the game ball from the rolling part 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3 (the third ball throwing path KR3 The rolling portion 525 and the opening 451a of the lower displacement member 440 are in a non-communicating state), but in such a state, the abutment plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 cannot come into contact with the distribution member 540. Therefore, when the ball receiving part 467 is in a state where it cannot receive game balls (the state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first extended state or the second extended state), the destination to which the ball is distributed by the distribution member 540 is the third ball throwing path. Switching to KR3 can be suppressed.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is disposed on the base plate 520 of the distribution unit 500, which is formed as a separate member from the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 is increased in size accordingly. can be suppressed.

Here, since the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first extended state to the retracted state is not only a rotational displacement in the left-right direction but also a rotational displacement, when the abutment plate 464c in the tilted state is rotated, , there is a possibility that the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 will come into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the distribution member 540 will not be able to rotate.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first extended position shown in FIG. (second position or third position). Thereby, the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 displaced to the retracted state can be prevented from colliding with the protrusion 543. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 from coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and preventing the distribution member 540 from rotating.

Furthermore, since the distributing member 540 is formed with the bulging portion 543a as described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first extended state to the retracted state due to poor control or the like, the contact plate 464c Even when the projection 543 of the distribution member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface, the distribution member 540 can be rotationally displaced.

That is, since the bulging portion 543a can reduce the area of contact with the abutting plate 464c, the bulging portion 543a can easily slide along the surface when the abutting plate 464c comes into contact with the bulging portion 543a. Therefore, the distribution member 540 can be easily rotated and displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 from coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and preventing the distribution member 540 from rotating.

Next, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of the rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. 87 is a front view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 88 is a rear view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation unit 700. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the rotation unit 700 includes a decoration unit 750 composed of a plurality of displacement members, a ball holder 710 disposed above the decoration unit 750 in the direction of gravity, and a ball holder 710 arranged above the decoration unit 750 in the direction of gravity. 710, a back base 720 arranged on the back side of the decoration unit 750, a left side transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front, and a right side transmission member placed on the right side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front. 740.

The ball holder 710 is a member for dropping the game ball emitted from the emitting opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. Thereby, the ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 440 can be caused to be thrown by the rotation unit 700. Note that the detailed configuration of the ball holder 710 will be described later.

The decoration unit 750 is a substantially D-shaped block body with a curved portion arranged upward when viewed from the side, and the front side is decorated with characters and patterns. Furthermore, the decoration unit 750 is made up of a plurality of members, and is configured to be able to be displaced by transmission of a drive, which will be described later. Note that the configuration of the decoration unit 750 will be described later.

The back base 720 is a plate member that connects the back side of the ball holder 710 and the back side of the decoration unit 750, and is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. As described above, since the decoration unit 750 is composed of a plurality of movable members, the fastening portion thereof is limited. By connecting them, the decorative unit 750 and the ball holder 710 can be assembled as one unit while ensuring the range of movement of the decorative unit 750.

The left side transmission member 730 is attached to the drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side surface of the decoration unit 750 (left side in FIG. 87), the transmission member 730 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. It is formed mainly of a motor base 732, a gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 730, and a throwing path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and forms a predetermined gap between the opposing gear cover 733. Ru.

The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decoration unit 750, which will be described later. The drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730, which will be described later.

The transmission member 730 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b that meshes with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c that meshes with the transmission gear 731b, and a transmission gear 731c that meshes with the transmission gear 731b. The transmission gear 731d is arranged adjacent to the transmission gear 731d and is coaxially arranged with the shaft 735, and the load gear 731e is meshed with the transmission gear 731d.

The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates when the drive motor KM4 is rotationally driven.

The transmission gear 731b has a one-way clutch OW1 disposed therein, and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to a shaft portion JB1 that transmits rotational driving force from the decoration unit 750 to the right transmission member 740 on the right side.

The one-way clutch OW1 includes an inner ring disposed inside and having a cam surface formed on its outer circumferential surface, an outer ring disposed outside the inner ring, and a plurality of springs and rollers between the inner ring and the outer ring. When the outer ring tries to rotate in one direction relative to the inner ring, the contact pressure between the cam surface and the roller increases, creating resistance and transmitting power to the inner ring, and the outer ring rotates in the other direction relative to the inner ring. This is a cam-type clutch that, when rotated, the contact pressure between the cam surface and the roller decreases, causing the clutch to slip and cut off power transmission.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731b can transmit the rotational driving force to the shaft portion JB1 when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, and when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, The outer ring slips with respect to the inner ring, cutting off the transmission of driving force to the shaft portion JB1.

The transmission gear 731c has a one-way clutch OW1 disposed therein similarly to the transmission gear 731b. Further, a shaft 735 is disposed inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c can transmit the rotational driving force to the shaft 735 when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, and can transmit the rotational driving force to the shaft 735 when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4. The outer ring slips against the shaft 735, and the transmission of driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted. Further, the transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and their rotation directions are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b rotates in one direction, the transmission gear 731c rotates in the other direction. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 731b rotates in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b rotates in one direction. That is, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the mode is switched to a mode in which the shaft portion JB1 rotates or a mode in which the shaft 735 rotates.

Transmission gear 731d is attached to shaft 735. As described above, the shaft 735 is rotated only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction. Therefore, the transmission gear 731c rotates in one direction only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction, and does not rotate in the other direction.

The load gear 731e is connected to a shaft portion 791a of a resistance member 791 whose shaft hole is attached to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 includes a shaft portion 791a that is rotatable with respect to a base portion fastened to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed so that a predetermined amount of resistance acts when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. That is, since a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, a force greater than the predetermined amount is similarly required to rotate the load gear 731e connected to the shaft portion 791a.

Thereby, when the rotating body 800 meshed with the transmission gear 731d is rotated and stopped due to the rotation of the transmission gear 731d, rotation due to the inertia force can be suppressed. That is, the resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion is set to be larger than the inertial force that acts around the axis of the rotor 800 when the rotation of the rotor 800 is stopped.

Further, the load gear 731e is connected to a transmission gear 731d disposed coaxially with the transmission gear 731c. Therefore, the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4 can be reduced to only one direction of rotation that rotates the transmission gear 731d. That is, when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the other direction, the transmission of drive between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is cut off, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed. As a result, when rotating the transmission gear 731b in one direction, the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed.

The motor base 732 is formed into a box-like body with the decorative unit 750 side open, and a drive motor KM4 is disposed outside the bottom part of the box (on the left side in FIG. 87) with its shaft inserted into the inside of the box. Thereby, the transmission gear 731a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM4 can be disposed inside the motor base 732. That is, the depth dimension of the box of the motor base 732 is set larger than the width dimension of the transmission gear 731a. As a result, it is possible to arrange the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a attached to the motor base 732 in the decoration unit 750, and it is possible to suppress the transmission gear 731a from colliding with the decoration unit 750.

The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is fastened to the decoration unit 750 with the left transmission member 730 disposed therebetween. Further, a through hole 733a is formed in the decoration unit 750 at a position facing a shaft hole of a rotating body 800, which will be described later. Thereby, the ball rolling inside the rotating body 800 can be discharged to the outside through the through hole 733a. Note that a description of the ball thrown to the rotating body 800 will be given later.

The ball throwing route cover 734 is a member disposed on the outside of the gear cover 733 (on the left side in FIG. 87), and is formed from a plate-shaped body, and has a wall portion projecting toward the gear cover 733 from its edge. As a result, a gap can be formed between the gear cover 733 and the ball throwing route cover 734 facing each other, and the ball inserted through the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733 can be passed through the gap and discharged to the outside of the rotation unit 700. I can do it. The ball discharged from the gap between the facing gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover is thrown into a recovery path (not shown) and collected.

The right side transmission member 740 includes a rotating member 741 connected to the other end of the shaft portion JB1, an arm member 742 having one end connected to the rotating member 741, and a rotating member 741 and an arm member 742 that cover each other. The crank cover 743 is disposed on the decorative unit 750 in a closed state.

The rotating member 741 includes a main body part 741b formed in a disc-shaped plate shape, a one-way clutch OW1 fitted into the shaft of the main body part 741b, and a cylindrical part protruding to the opposite side of the decoration unit 750 (the right side in FIG. 87). It is formed mainly with a protrusion 741a.

In the one-way clutch OW1 attached to the rotating member 741, the shaft hole of the inner ring is inserted into the other end side of the shaft portion JB. Further, the one-way clutch OW1 is arranged so that when rotation opposite to the rotational direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring, no transmission occurs between the inner ring and the outer ring.

As a result, when a driving force having a rotational speed faster than the rotational speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 to the rotating member 741 is input to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer ring is rotated and the rotating member 741 is transferred to the drive motor KM4. It can be rotated by a driving force other than driving. As a result, the rotating member 741 can be made to rotate at two or more different speeds.

The arm member 742 has a shape that is a combination of a C-shape and an I-shape when viewed from the side, and is formed by connecting one end of the C-shape to the other end of the I-shape. The arm member 742 also has a shaft hole 742a formed through the connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, an elliptical first sliding groove 742b formed through the one end of the I-shaped portion, and a C-shaped first sliding groove 742b. The second sliding groove 742c is mainly formed with an elliptical second sliding groove 742c formed through the other end of the cylindrical portion.

The shaft hole 742a is a hole into which a shaft portion 764a formed on a right side plate 764 of a box member 760, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, the arm member 742 is arranged in the decoration unit 750 with the shaft portion 764a inserted into the shaft hole 742a, so that the arm member 742 is rotatable with respect to the decoration unit 750.

The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction of the ellipse is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the protrusion 741a can be inserted inside the first sliding groove 742b, and the arm member 742 can be rotationally displaced by the rotation of the rotating member 741.

Further, the rotating member 741 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742, and its shaft is located half the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion from the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. placed at a location further apart. Thereby, by rotating the rotating member 741, it is possible to cause the arm member 742 to perform reciprocating rotational movement around the axis of the shaft hole 742a.

The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which a protrusion 773a of the right lid part 773, which will be described later, is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction of the ellipse is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 773a. Therefore, the protrusion 773a can be inserted inside the second sliding groove 742c. Further, the right side cover portion 773 is formed to be rotatably displaceable with respect to the box member 760. Therefore, as described above, when the rotating member 741 is rotated and the arm member 742 performs a reciprocating rotational movement, the right lid portion 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 is rotated with respect to the box member 760. be able to.

The crank cover 743 mainly includes an elliptical portion 743a formed into an ellipse when viewed from the rear, and a ball throwing portion 743b formed continuously on the back side of the elliptical portion 743a.

The elliptical portion 743a is a cover that covers the arm member 742, and has an outer shape larger than the arm member 742 and the displacement area of the arm member 742 in side view, and extends the arm member 742 from the edge toward the decoration unit 750. A wall portion is formed that protrudes more than the thickness of the wall. Thereby, when the crank cover 743 is arranged on the decoration unit 750, the arm member 742 can be arranged between the crank cover 743 and the decoration unit 750 facing each other.

The ball throwing part 743b is a path member for sending the ball flowing down the downstream area in front of the game board 13 to a collection path when the ball is collected from a predetermined collection port, and has a predetermined size inside. It is formed into a rod shape with a small space. Further, the ball throwing portion 743b has an open upper end and is connected to the collection port of the game board 13, and a lower end thereof is connected to an opening formed in the decoration unit 750. Thereby, the balls collected on the game board 13 can be passed through the interior of the decoration unit 750 via the ball throwing section 743b and guided to a collection path (not shown).

Next, the decoration unit 750 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 91 to 95. FIG. 91 is a front view of the decoration unit 750. 92(a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 as seen in the direction of arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and FIG. 92(b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 as seen in the direction of arrow XCIIb in FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit 750, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit 750. Note that in FIGS. 91(b) and 91(c), the right side plate 764 and left side plate 765 of the box member 760 are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the decoration unit 750 includes a box member 760 that serves as an outer decoration part of the decoration unit 750, and a lid disposed above the box member 760 in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91(a)). It is formed mainly of a member 770 and a rotating body 800 disposed inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770.

The box member 760 includes a base member 762 disposed below the rotating body 800, a front plate 761 disposed in front of the base member 762, and a lower plate 763 disposed on the bottom surface of the base member 762. It is formed mainly of a right side plate 764 disposed on the right side of the base member 762 when viewed from the front, and a left side plate 765 disposed on the left side of the base member 762 when viewed from the front.

The base member 762 is formed to have a laterally elongated rectangular shape that is larger than the rotating body 800 when viewed from above, and is formed to have a thickness larger than the outer diameter of the sphere in the direction of gravity. The base member 762 has an upper surface formed into a curved surface coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800. Thereby, when the base member 762 is placed near the rotating body 800, collision between the base member 762 and the rotating body 800 can be suppressed.

The base member 762 mainly includes a recessed portion 762a recessed downward in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a ball throwing portion 762b recessed in a substantially L-shape on the bottom surface.

The recessed portion 762a is a groove in which the above-mentioned shaft portion JB1 is disposed, and is recessed on the shaft of the transmission gear 731b disposed on the side surface of the decoration unit 750. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM4 can be transmitted via the shaft portion JB1.

The ball throwing part 762b is bent in an L-shape and recessed on the bottom surface, and one end side is connected to the opening 764b of the right side plate 764, and the other end side is connected to the back side of the prize opening 761a of the front plate 761. connected to. Further, the concave width of the ball throwing portion 762b is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball. Thereby, by disposing the lower surface plate 763 on the lower side, it is possible to throw a ball into the inside of the box member 760.

The front plate 761 is formed to have a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness on the back side. In addition, the front plate 761 has a winning opening 761a having a size that allows a ball to be inserted into the front side. The prize opening 761a is connected to the ball throwing part 762b of the base member 762 arranged on the back side as described above. Therefore, the ball thrown into the winning hole 761a is thrown to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762.

The right side plate 764 has a D-shaped outer shape with an upward curve when viewed from the side. In addition, the right side plate 764 has a shaft portion 764a protruding outward from the decoration unit 750, a bearing portion 764c penetratingly formed below the shaft portion 764a, and a curved shape of the same axis as the rotation axis of the rotating body 800. A curved opening 764d that is formed in the opening, an opening 764b that opens at a position facing the lower end of the ball throwing portion 762b of the crank cover 743, and an opening 764b that is formed penetratingly in a semicircular shape in side view on the axis of the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800. The engagement portion 764e is mainly formed.

The opening 764b is a hole for allowing a ball to be thrown from the ball-throwing portion of the crank cover 743 to the base member 762, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the ball. Thereby, the ball thrown to the crank cover 743 can be thrown to the base member 762.

The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the shaft portion JB1 described above is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. Thereby, the driving force can be transmitted to the above-described right transmission member 740.

The curved opening 764d is an opening into which the protrusion 773a protruding from the right lid portion 773 is inserted. Further, the curved opening 764d is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the lid member 770 because the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced. Thereby, when the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced, collision between the protrusion 773a and the curved opening 764d can be suppressed.

The engaging portion 764e is a member that engages with the right end of the base plate 810 disposed inside the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front, and holds the base plate 810 non-rotatably. That is, the tip portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted and arranged in the engaging portion 764e. This makes the base plate 810 unrotatable.

The left side plate 765 has an outer shape substantially the same as the right side plate 764 when viewed from the side. The left side plate 765 also includes a through hole 765a formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, a shaft portion 765b protruding toward the rotating body 800 side, and a through hole 765b into which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted. The hole 765c is mainly formed.

The through hole 765a is an opening for inserting the ball discharged from the opening on the left side of the rotating body 800 in the front view into the through hole 733a of the motor base 732 described above. That is, the through hole 765a is formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, and its inner diameter is set to be the same size as the inner diameter of the opening on the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front.

The shaft portion 765b is inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in a rotation regulating member 780, which will be described later, and can hold the rotation regulating member 780 in a rotatable state. Note that the displacement of the rotation regulating member 780 will be described later.

The through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted, as described above, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

The lower plate 763 is a plate member that is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762 so that the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762 and the lower plate 763 form a throwing path through which a ball can pass. Furthermore, an opening 763a is formed in the bottom plate 763, passing through it in the vertical direction. The opening 763a is an opening for throwing a ball thrown inside the ball throwing section 762b to a recovery path (not shown). Therefore, the ball that has won in the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761 and the ball that is thrown from the game area to the ball throwing section 743b of the right side transmission member 740 can be discharged from the inside of the decoration unit 750.

The lid member 770 includes a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, a right side lid portion 773 fastened to the right side surface of the curved lid portion 771 when viewed from the front, and a curved lid portion 771. It is mainly formed to include a left side lid part 772 fastened to the left side surface in front view.

As described above, the curved lid portion 771 has a curved outer shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the side, and has a radius larger than that of the rotating body 800 . The curved lid part 771 includes a transparent part 771a formed from a transparent plate on a part of the front side.

The transparent portion 771a is a board that allows the player to see the patterns, characters, etc. drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800. That is, even if the upper end of the rotating body 800 is covered by the lid member 770, the player can view the display on the rotating body 800 through the transparent portion 771a.

The right lid portion 773 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius of the outer side of the annular ring is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the right lid portion 773 is formed to be larger than the external size of the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 in a side view. Thereby, the right side lid part 773 is disposed with the right end part 811 of the rotating body 800 inserted into the annular inner part.

Furthermore, the right lid portion 773 is formed mainly of a protrusion 773a that protrudes to the outside (right side in front view) of the decorative unit 750, and a recess 773b that is recessed toward the inner side in the radial direction on the outer peripheral edge. . The protrusion 773a is a protrusion inserted into the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742, as described above.

The opening/closing member 870 can be rotated by inserting a protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870, which will be described later, into the recess 773b. Therefore, the width of the recess 773b is set to be larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 871. Further, the recessed portion 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge of the right lid portion 773 where the curved lid portion 771 is disposed.

The left lid portion 772 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius of the outer side of the annular ring is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771 . Further, the inner diameter of the left lid portion 772 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of a tooth surface 881a of a left rotating portion 880, which will be described later. Thereby, the left side cover part 772 is disposed with the left rotating part 880 of the rotating body 800 inserted into the annular inner part.

In addition, the left side lid portion 772 is formed with a plate-shaped sensor plate 772a that protrudes to the outside of the decoration unit 750 (left side in front view). The sensor plate 772a can detect the position of the left lid portion 772 by being placed between opposing bifurcated sensors (not shown).

Here, the lid member 770 for the rotating body 800 will be explained. The arrangement of the lid member 770 with the rotating body 800 assembled is the same as inserting the left and right ends of the rotating body 800 inside the right side lid part 773 and the left side lid part 772, respectively, before assembly (separate members). do. Then, by assembling the right side lid part 773, the left side lid part 772, and the curved lid part 771, the rotating body 800 and the lid member 770 are connected. Therefore, the lid member 770 is rotatable about the axis of the rotating body 800 relative to the rotating body.

The rotation regulating member 780 is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side. The rotation regulating member 780 mainly includes a shaft hole 781 penetrating through the bent portion, a protrusion 782 protruding in the bending direction on one end side, and an abutment surface 783 formed flat at the tip of the other end side. be done.

The shaft portion 765b of the left side plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781 as described above. Thereby, the rotation regulating member 780 is rotatably held relative to the left side plate 765. Further, a biasing spring SP5 is inserted into the shaft portion. As a result, a rotational force in one direction is applied to the rotation regulating member 780.

The projection 782 can restrict rotational displacement of the rotating body 800 by engaging with an engagement projection 882 of a left rotation section 880, which will be described later. The contact surface 783 is a surface that the end of the back side of the lid member 770 mentioned above comes into contact with, and when the lid member 770 comes into contact with it, the rotation regulating member 780 can be rotated. Note that the manner of regulating the rotation regulating member 780 and the rotating body 800 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, the transmission path of the driving force when the drive motor KM4 is rotated will be described. 95(a) and 96(a) show the rotating unit 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and FIGS. 95(b) and 96(b) show the rotating unit 700 as seen in the direction of arrow XCVb in FIG. be.

In addition, in FIG. 95, the displacement direction of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 96, the direction of displacement of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 95(a) and 95(b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the forward direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the forward direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the negative direction, and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the positive direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731b does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is brought to a stopped state.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731 is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735 is rotated. As a result, the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d and the tooth surface 881a of the rotating body 800 are rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates forward, the driving force to the lid member 770 is not transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction, and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731b is brought into a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 rotates and reciprocates about the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the lid member 770 is displaced.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731 does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735, and the rotating body 800 and the load gear 731e are in a non-rotating state. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates negatively, the driving force to the lid member 770 is transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is not transmitted.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c (rotation side drive means) that transmits the driving force from the drive motor KM4 to the rotary body 800 and the transmission gear 731b (displacement side transmission means) that transmits the driving force from the drive motor KM4 to the opening/closing member 870 (described later) via the lid member 770. In addition, by disposing the one-way clutch OW1, it is possible to transmit the rotational force to one of the transmission gear 731c or the transmission gear 731b and cut off the transmission to the other, depending on the rotational direction of the drive motor KM4. . As a result, by simply switching the rotational direction of the drive motor KM4, it is possible to switch the drive target driven by the rotational driving force. It is possible to switch between stopping, displacement of the opening/closing member 870, and stopping thereof, and the structure can be simplified while making it possible to form a plurality of modes.

Here, in a structure in which the one-way clutch OW1 is used to switch the drive target (the rotating body 800 or the opening/closing member 870 (lid member 770)) according to the rotational direction of the drive means, the transmission of the driving force from the drive motor KM4 is When it is cut off, it becomes free to rotate or displace in the direction in which it was driven by the driving force.Therefore, for example, the driving target of the driving means is switched from the rotating body 800 to the opening/closing member 870 (lid member 770). When the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating body 800 becomes rotatable and may continue to rotate (rotate) due to inertial force.

In contrast, this embodiment includes a load gear 731e (load gear) meshed with a transmission gear 731d driven by a transmission gear 731c, so that transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM4 is interrupted. However, by using the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear 731e, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 800 from continuing to rotate.

Next, displacement of the lid member 770 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. 97(a) and 98(c) are in the closed state, FIG. 97(b) and 98(b) are in the intermediate state, and FIG. 97(c) and FIG. 98(a) are in the open state, respectively. 7 is a side view of a decoration unit 750 and a right side transmission member 740. FIG.

Note that FIGS. 97(a) to 97(c) and FIGS. 98(a) to 98(c) illustrate a state in which the crank cover 743 of the right side transmission member 740 is removed. In addition, the closed state of the decoration unit 750 is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged to cover the upper half of the rotating body 800 (upper part in FIG. 97(a)), and the open state is a state in which the lid member 770 is rotated. It is in a state where it has been displaced and placed on the back side of the rotating body 800 (the right side in FIG. 97(c)). The intermediate state is a state in which the lid member 770 is located between the closed state and the open state.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 97(a) to 97(c), states in which the closed state is displaced to the open state are illustrated in order, and in FIGS. 98(a) to 98(c), the states in which the state is displaced from the open state to the closed state The following states are illustrated in order.

First, with reference to FIG. 97, the displacement of the lid member 770 when it is displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described. The driving force is transmitted to the arm member 742 by rotating the drive motor KM4 in the negative direction as described above.

In the closed state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is placed on the back side (on the right side in FIG. 97(a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. Therefore, in the arm member 742, the first sliding groove 742b into which the projection 741a is inserted is arranged closer to the back side than the shaft hole 742a.

The shaft hole 742a, the first sliding groove 742b, and the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742 are formed on substantially the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 97(a)) with respect to the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a protruding from the right side of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(b), when the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees to position the protrusion 741a below the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is , is displaced downward in the direction of gravity of the shaft hole 742a (lower side in FIG. 97(b)) as the projection 741a is displaced.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged above the shaft hole 742a in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 97(b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed in a position where it is rotationally displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. .

In this case, the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is located closer to the back side than the rotation axis of the lid member 770 (the center position of the rotating body 800 formed in a cylindrical shape). Therefore, due to the load on the lid member 770, a rotational force is applied in a direction to displace the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state. As described above, the rotating member 741 is provided with the one-way clutch OW1 and configured to be rotatable with the outer ring preceding the inner ring, so the drive motor KM4 is stopped due to the load of the lid member 770. Thus, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated.

As shown in FIG. 97(c), when the lid member 770 is displaced to the back side of the rotating body, the projection 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the intermediate position. That is, it is the leftmost (left side in FIG. 97) end of the displacement region of the projection 741a. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted, and the rotation of the lid member 770 is stopped.

That is, the displacement of the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state is performed by driving the drive motor KM4 to displace it to the intermediate state, and by causing the lid member 770 to fall under load.

As a result, when displacing the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state, the section in which the drive motor KM4 is driven can be reduced to half of the total section, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the displacement speed from the closed state to the intermediate state can be set according to the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4, and the displacement speed from the intermediate state to the open state can be set according to the load of the lid member 770. The displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two stages. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, there is no need to complicate the control. As a result, control can be simplified and control failures can be suppressed.

The displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4 is referred to as a first section, and the displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the load of the lid member 770 is referred to as a second section. will be described with reference numeral DK2 being assigned to the second section.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the displacement of the lid member 770 when it is displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described.

As described above, in the open state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is placed on the front side (left side in FIG. 98(a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742, and the curved lid of the lid member 770 The portion 771 is placed on the back side of the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(b), when the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees to position the protrusion 741a above the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is As the protrusion 741a is displaced, it is displaced downward in the gravity direction of the shaft hole 742a (lower side in FIG. 98(b)).

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged above the shaft hole 742a in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 98(b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and is rotationally displaced approximately 45 degrees upward from the state in which the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is located on the back side of the rotating body 800. It is assumed that it is placed at the position shown in the figure.

Furthermore, the lid member 770 that has been displaced to the closed state position (the position shown in FIG. 97(a)) is placed in the game area (the front side of the game board 13), and is placed in the open state position (the position shown in FIG. 97(c)). The lid member 770 that has been displaced to the position ) is placed outside the gaming area (on the back side of the gaming board 13). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down the game area from colliding with the rotating body 800 and causing the rotating body 800 to rotate. In particular, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the rotating body 800 is provided with an opening/closing member 870 that is displaced toward the gaming area. This opening/closing member 870 can be prevented from being opened (extended).

Furthermore, since the lid member 770 is placed outside the gaming area in the open position, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position creates a space for the opening/closing member 870 to protrude into the gaming area. can be secured. Therefore, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be brought closer to the game area side, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the opening/closing member 870.

Furthermore, since the lid member 770 is formed to be rotatable around an axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotary body 800 and is formed in a plate shape that curves along the outer surface of the rotary body 800, the lid member 770 is in a closed state. The space required for displacement between the position (covered position) and the open position (retracted position) can be suppressed, and therefore, the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. In addition, by forming the lid member 770 in a curved manner as described above, the game balls flowing down the game area are prevented from being stopped on the lid member 770 disposed in the closed position, and the game balls flow smoothly. It can be flowed down to

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(c), when the rotating member 741 is further rotated approximately 90 degrees and the protrusion 71a is displaced to the right side of the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is displaced toward the back side (to the right in FIG. 98(c)) with respect to the shaft hole 742a as the projection 741a is displaced.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 98(c)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

In this case, as the lid member 770 is displaced, the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is displaced toward the front side relative to the rotation axis of the lid member 770. Therefore, during the transition from the intermediate state to the closed state, the load on the lid member 770 causes a rotational force to be applied in a direction to displace the lid member 770 from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, even when the driving motor KM4 is stopped, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated by the load of the lid member 770.

Therefore, since the lid member 770 can be brought into the closed state by the load of the lid member 770, the lid member 770 can be reliably brought into the closed state.

Here, if the rotational displacement of the lid member 770 is caused only by the drive motor KM4, there is a possibility that the lid member 770 may not be able to be stopped at a normal position if the driving stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is deviated. Further, in the case where the rotating member 741 has only one direction of rotation as in this embodiment, if the stopping operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, one rotation is required to return it to the normal position.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the position at which the lid member 770 is stopped can be mechanically stopped using the load of the lid member 770, so it is possible to suppress the position at which the lid member 770 is stopped from shifting. can.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a drive means that generates a driving force, a displacement member that is displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force to the displacement member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the transmission state of the driving force by the transmission means from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, so when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member also remains constant. It is impossible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member. Therefore, there was a problem in that the effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member was insufficient.

Note that the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the driving speed of the drive means, but if the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement sections of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. In order to achieve this speed, it is necessary to install a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member, and to control the output of the drive means to increase or decrease according to the detection result of the sensor device, which increases product cost and control cost. invite Furthermore, the structure and control become complicated, leading to a decrease in reliability.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the transmission means (rotating member 741 and arm member 742) includes a one-way clutch OW1, and the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1. On the other hand, when the inner ring is displaced in one direction, the rollers engage with the inner ring and the outer ring to transmit driving force, and when the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the inner ring and the outer ring The engagement of the rollers with the outer ring is released, the transmission of driving force is cut off, and in the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement sections of the lid member 770 (displacement member), the outer ring is displaced relative to the inner ring. Since the lid member 770 is displaced in one direction, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in other sections, regardless of the driving state of the rotating member 741. . Therefore, it is possible to impart changes to the lid member 770 and enhance the performance effect accompanying the displacement of the lid member 770.

Furthermore, regardless of the driving state of the drive motor KM4, the outer ring can be caused to advance in one direction relative to the inner ring, so for example, the drive motor KM4 is driven at a constant drive speed over the entire displacement range of the lid member 770. There is no need to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive motor KM4 during the displacement section of the lid member 770 (that is, depending on whether it is the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, control can be simplified, control costs can be reduced, and operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, in the second section DK2, the operation of the driving means can be stopped, and in this case, it is possible to suppress energy consumption.

In addition, in the driving state in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction relative to the outer ring, the engagement of the rollers is released and the transmission of driving force is cut off, so the displacement member is brought to a stopped state (driven state). The driving force of the driving means (drive motor KM4) in this driving state can be used as the driving force for driving the rotating body 800. That is, by switching the drive direction of the drive means (drive motor KM4), the two members, the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800, can be respectively displaced.

Further, the lid member 770 is formed to be rotatable, and its center of gravity is located at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and in the second section DK2, the weight of the lid member 770 displaces the outer ring in one direction. Since the cover member 770 is formed so as to be able to act in one direction, the outer ring can be displaced in one direction in advance of the inner ring by utilizing the weight of the lid member 770. That is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the lid member 770 and enhance the presentation effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Furthermore, the driving force is transmitted through a main body 741b to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached, and a protrusion 741a (pin portion) that protrudes from the main body 741b and is displaced from the center of rotation of the main body 741c. The rotating member 741 (crank member) having a The other end side (second sliding groove 742c side) can be reciprocated. In this case, the other end of the arm member 742 can reciprocate the lid member 770 between the open position and the closed position as the lid member 770 reciprocates. That is, the direction of displacement of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the driving direction of the drive motor KM4.

Further, in this case, since the second section DK can be formed to have both reciprocating motion, when the lid member 770 is reciprocated, when displacing it in any direction, it starts from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased, and as a result, the displacement mode of the lid member 770 can be varied, and the performance effect accompanying the displacement of the lid member can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, displacement of the rotation regulating member 780 will be described. FIG. 99(a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 99(b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the open state. Note that in FIGS. 99(a) and 99(b), the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is shown transparently.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), when the lid member 770 is in the closed state, the rotation regulating member 780 is in a state where the protrusion 782 side is pushed down by the urging force of the urging spring SP5 (see FIG. 99(a)). (a), it is rotated clockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance L4 from the rotation axis of the rotor 800 to the outside of the engagement protrusion 882 is smaller than the distance L5 from the rotation axis of the rotor 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 (L4 <L5).

Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation regulating member 780 are not engaged with each other, and the rotating body 800 is allowed to rotate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99(b), when the lid member 770 is in the open state, the rotation regulating member 780 is a lid member 770 whose contact surface 783 is displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. The abutting surfaces 783 are brought into contact with each other, and the abutment surface 783 is pushed downward (rotated counterclockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781 in FIG. 99(b)).

Therefore, the distance L4 from the rotation axis of the rotor 800 to the outside of the engagement protrusion 882 is made larger than the distance L6 from the rotation axis of the rotor 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 (L6 <L4).

As a result, in the rotating body 800 in which the engagement protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880 is disposed at the lowest position in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 can be inserted inside the engagement protrusion 882. That is, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation regulating member 780 are engaged, the rotating body 800 is made unrotatable. In addition, in this embodiment, the position where rotation of the rotating body 800 is disabled (the position where the protrusion 782 is inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882) is the position where the opening/closing member 870 of the rotating body 800 is in an open state, which will be described later. is set to

That is, the rotation regulating member 780 (rotation regulating means) that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800 is configured such that the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position) and the other side of the displacement member is stretched over the gaming area. Since the rotation of the rotating body 800 is restricted when the opening/closing member 870 is extended, the rotating body 800 is rotated with the opening/closing member 870 extended, and the opening/closing member 870 interferes with other members located on its rotation trajectory. can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress rotation of the rotating body 800 due to the load that is applied when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

Here, the first member and the second member are displaceably formed, and the first member has a covering position where at least a part of the second member is hidden from view, and a state where the first member is disposed at the covering position. A gaming machine is known that is movable between a retracted position and a retracted position that reduces the area that covers the second member invisibly. According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by displacing the first member to the retracted position from a state in which the first member is placed in the covered position and the second member is made invisible to the player. It is possible to perform an effect that is visually recognized by the player.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the second member is formed to be displaceable, so when the second member is exposed, there is a risk that the second member will be displaced. Therefore, there was a problem in that the second member could not be seen in an appropriate state by the player, and the performance effect was reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the lid member 770 (first member) is capable of regulating the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) when it is displaced to the open position (retracted position). Because of this, the rotating body 800 can be made visible to the player in an appropriate state, and the performance effect can be ensured. That is, when displacing the lid member 770 to the open position to expose the rotating body 800, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position, which must be performed for the purpose of the performance, is performed by rotating the lid member 770. It is used as a means for regulating the displacement of the body 800. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide or control a mechanism for regulating the displacement of the rotating body 800, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

Further, as will be described later, the shape of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically from the center of rotation (see FIG. 101). Therefore, since the rotating body 800 is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity is offset from the center of rotation, the degree of freedom in designing the rotating body 800 can be increased. That is, it is not necessary for the rotating body 800 to have a shape in which its center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and a shape that is asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the performance effect of the rotating body 800 can be enhanced. On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is eccentric in this way, the rotating body 800 will rotate around the rotation center (there is a risk of being rotated) due to the gravity, and will be displaced to the closed state position. A configuration in which the lid member 770 is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotary body 800 is particularly effective, and thereby the rotary body 800 can be made visible to the player in an appropriate state, and the performance effect can be ensured.

Note that the rotating body 800 may be formed symmetrically about the axis. In this case, by forming the rotating body 800 from two or more members having different specific gravities, the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 can be placed at a position different from the rotation axis. For example, by forming one half from a metal material and the other half from a flexible material, the center of gravity can be located on the side of the metal material, which generally has a higher specific gravity than the flexible material.

Next, the configuration of the rotating body 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. 100(a) is a front view of the rotating body 800, FIG. 100(b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100(a), and FIG. 100(c) is a front view of the rotating body 800. 100A is a side view of the rotating body 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow Cc in FIG. 100(a). FIG. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800.

As shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the rotating body 800 is formed into a columnar shape by combining a plurality of members. The rotating body 800 includes a base plate 810 disposed on the shaft portion, and a first display section 830, a second display section 840, a third display section 850, and a fourth display section disposed surrounding the base plate 810 and combined in an annular shape. A display section 860, a right rotation section 89 disposed at one end in the axial direction, a left rotation section 880 disposed at the other end in the axial direction, and an opening/closing member disposed inside the first display section 830. 870.

The base plate 810 has a substantially L-shaped cross section when viewed in the axial direction, and is also formed in a shape extending in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed with a right end portion 811 and a left end portion 812 that protrude outward from both left and right ends.

The right end portion 811 is formed to protrude in an annular shape from the right side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (the right side in FIG. 100(a)). The right end portion 811 is formed mainly of a tip portion 811a that partially projects from the protruding tip of the right end portion 811, and a communication hole 811b in an annular inner portion.

The distal end portion 811a further protrudes in the axial direction from the distal end portion of the right end portion 811, and the protruding area in the right side view (direction view in FIG. 100(c)) is inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side plate 764. is set smaller than the area of . The tip portion 811a is inserted inside the engagement portion 764e of the right side plate 764 as described above. Thereby, the base plate 810 and the right side plate 764 (lid member 770) are brought into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be kept in a stopped state against rotational displacement of each display surface (first display section 830, second display section 840, third display section 850, and fourth display section 860) to be described later.

The communication hole 811b is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) connected to an LED board 820 (described later) is inserted, and is formed through the right side surface of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front. This allows the wiring to be inserted.

The left end portion 812 is formed to protrude in an annular shape from the left side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (the left side in FIG. 100(a)). The left end portion 812 is formed mainly of a tip portion 812a protruding from a lower semicircle of the left end portion 812, and a communication hole 812b in an annular inner portion.

The distal end portion 812a further protrudes in the axial direction from the distal end portion of the left end portion 812, and its protruding shape in a left side view (direction view in FIG. 100(b)) is an annular lower semicircle.

The communication hole 812b is a path for discharging the ball thrown into the rotating body 800 to the outside of the rotating body 800 by an opening/closing member 870 described later. The inner diameter of the communication hole 812b is set larger than that of the sphere and is set to be approximately the same as the through hole 733a formed in the gear cover 733.

Further, the communication hole 812b is an opening connected to the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733, and the protruding distance of the left end portion 812 is set to a distance at which it comes into contact with the through hole 733a. Furthermore, a protrusion 733b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end surface of the through hole 733a. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 733b is set to be approximately the same as the protrusion distance of the tip portion 812a. Thereby, the base plate 810 and the gear cover 733 (left side transmission member 730) are brought into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be kept in a stopped state against rotational displacement of each display surface (first display section 830, second display section 840, third display section 850, and fourth display section 860) to be described later.

A reverse rotation prevention member 813 is rotatably disposed on the bottom surface of the base plate 810. The reverse rotation prevention member 813 is formed into a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and has an inclined protrusion 813a formed on one end side. In addition, a biasing spring SP6 is disposed between the reverse rotation prevention member 813 and the base plate 810, so that the protrusion 813a is always biased to the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 100(a)). It is said that

The right rotation portion 890 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side. The right rotation part 890 is formed so that the inner diameter of the inner side of the ring is larger than the size of the right end part 811 of the base plate 810 . Thereby, the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the right rotation portion 890. Moreover, the right rotation part 890 is formed mainly including a shaft hole 891 penetrating in the left-right direction and a sliding groove 892 that is curved and opened around the shaft hole 891.

The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which a shaft portion 872 of an opening/closing member 870 described later is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of the shaft portion 872. Thereby, displacement of the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 with respect to the first display portion 830 can be suppressed.

The sliding groove 892 is formed into a curved shape centered on the shaft hole 891, and its radius is set to be the same as the distance between the protrusion 871 and the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870. Thereby, by inserting the protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870 into the sliding groove 892, the protrusion 871 can be slid inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced.

The left rotation portion 880 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side. The left rotating portion 880 is formed so that the inner diameter of the ring is larger than the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810 . Thereby, the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the left rotating portion 880. In addition, the left rotation portion 880 mainly includes a wall portion 881 that protrudes in an annular shape from the inner edge portion, an engagement protrusion 882 that protrudes from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 that has sloped surfaces continuously arranged on the inner edge portion. be prepared and formed.

The wall portion 881 is formed to protrude to the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front. The wall portion 881 has a gear tooth surface 881a engraved on the outer circumferential surface of the protruding tip, and is provided with a communication hole 881b that opens inward. The tooth surface 881a meshes with the transmission gear 881d as described above. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM4 can be transmitted to the rotating body 800.

The communication hole 881b is an opening that communicates the internal space and the external space of the rotating body 800, and can discharge the ball thrown into the rotating body 800 by opening the opening/closing member 870, which will be described later.

As described above, the engagement protrusion 882 is a protrusion with which the rotation regulating member 780 is engaged. The engagement protrusion 882 is formed to protrude from the left side surface of the left rotating portion 880 when viewed from the front. Further, two engaging protrusions 882 are formed at positions separated by a predetermined distance, and the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 is formed so as to be insertable between them.

The locking portion 883 has a sawtooth cross section. When the left rotation part 880 is disposed on the base plate 810, the tip of the protrusion 813a of the above-mentioned reverse rotation prevention member 813 is brought into contact with the locking part 883. As a result, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotation part 880 in one direction is applied, the projection 813a can be slid along the inclined surface of the locking part 883 to rotate the left rotation part 880. , when a rotational force for rotating the left rotating portion 880 in the other direction is applied, the surface of the locking portion 883 is caught on the protrusion 813a and rotation is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 800 from being rotated in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor KM4. Reverse rotation of the rotating body due to a collision or the like can be suppressed.

The first display section 830 to the fourth display section 860 are each formed in the same curved shape, and can be formed into one annular shape by connecting their end surfaces. Moreover, the inner diameters of the first display section 830 to the fourth display section 860, which are formed into one ring, are set to be approximately the same as the outer diameters of the left and right rotating sections 880, 890. Accordingly, by arranging each of the display sections 830 to 860 on the left and right rotating sections 880 and 890, the first display section 830 to the fourth display section 860 can be formed into one columnar shape.

In addition, the first display section 830 to the fourth display section 860 each have a character or a pattern drawn thereon, and as described above, they are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the left rotation section 880 to display the respective characters. This allows the player to visually recognize the patterns.

The first display section 830 is formed mainly of an opening 831 that is open on its curved surface, and a bearing section 832 that is open toward the shaft and protrudes in a U-shape.

The opening 831 is an opening in which an opening/closing member 870 (described later) is disposed, and is formed to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the opening/closing member 870. The bearing portion 832 is formed in a size that allows the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 to be inserted into the open U-shaped portion. Therefore, by inserting the opening/closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832, the opening/closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first display section 830. Note that the manner of displacement of the opening/closing member 870 will be described later.

The LED board 820 can cause the LED light mounted on the LED board 820 to emit light by being supplied with power. Further, the LED board 820 is attached to the back side of the base plate 810.

Next, opening and closing of the opening/closing member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103(a) is a side view of the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 in the closed state. FIG. 103(b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 in an open state. In addition, in FIG. 103, when the opening/closing member 870 overlaps with another member, its outer diameter is illustrated by a chain line.

Further, the closed state of the opening/closing member 870 is a state in which the outer circumferential surface of the opening/closing member 870 is arranged substantially parallel to the outer circumferential surface of the first display section 830. On the other hand, the open state of the opening/closing member 870 is a state in which the outer circumferential surface of the opening/closing member 870 intersects with the outer circumferential surface of the first display section 830.

As shown in FIG. 103(a), in the rotating body 800 when the opening/closing member 870 is in the closed state, the protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870 is on one end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotation part 890 (in FIG. 103(a), the rotating body 800 is in the closed state). 872).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103(b), in the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 in the open state, the protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870 is located on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotation part 890. That is, the opening/closing member 870 is displaced by the protrusion 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the right rotation part 890.

Next, the displacement of the protrusion 871 will be explained with reference to FIG. 104. 104(a) and (b) are side views of the decoration unit 750. Note that in FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b), the right side plate 764 of the box member 760 is shown in a transparent state.

Further, FIG. 104(a) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in a closed state and the opening/closing member 870 is in a closed state. FIG. 104(b) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in an open state and the opening/closing member 870 is in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), when the decorative unit 750 is in the closed state, the outer edge of the right lid portion 773 is brought into contact with the protrusion 871. When the decoration unit 750 is in the closed state, the outer diameter L7 of the lower half of the right lid part 773 from the rotating shaft is smaller than the distance L8 from the axis of the right rotating part 890 to one end of the sliding groove 892 (L7 <L8).

Further, the difference in dimension between L7 and L8 is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the protrusion 871. Therefore, when the outer edge of the right lid portion 773 is in contact with the protrusion 871, the protrusion 871 is displaced toward one end of the sliding groove 892. As a result, the opening/closing member 870 is brought into the closed state. That is, when the decoration unit 750 is brought into the closed state, the opening/closing member 870 can be prevented from being displaced to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 104(b), when the decoration unit 750 is in the open state, the recess 773b formed at the outer edge is displaced as the right cover 773 is displaced. In this case, the protrusion 871 is inserted inside the recess 773b. This allows the protrusion 871 to move the sliding groove 892 to the other side. As a result, the opening/closing member 870 is brought into the open state by the urging force of the urging spring SP7 disposed between the shaft portion 872 and the first display portion 830.

As described above, the opening/closing member 870 can be displaced to the open state in accordance with the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, since there is no need to provide a drive source for driving the opening/closing member 870 in the rotating body 800, the rotating body 800 can be formed small.

Further, the drive motor KM4 for displacing the opening/closing member 870 can also be used as a drive means for displacing the lid member 770. In this case, when the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by the driving force of separate driving means, there is a risk that the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 will interfere if poor control occurs. Since the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, interference between the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 104(b), when the opening/closing member 870 is opened, the rotating tip side is placed above the prize opening 761a of the box member 760. Thereby, the ball thrown from the ball throwing part 711c of the ball holder 710, which will be described later, can fall onto the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870.

In this case, the rotating tip side of the opening/closing member 870 is arranged above the shaft portion 872. Therefore, the ball falling on the upper surface can be caused to roll toward the inside of the rotating body 800. The game ball rolled into the rotating body 800 is rolled onto the upper surface of a base plate 810 disposed inside the rotating body 800. Further, since the base plate 810 is tilted downward toward the left end 812 side, the ball rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 is rolled toward the left end 812 side and rotated from inside. It can be discharged to the outside of the body 800. That is, the interior of the rotating body 800 can be used as a throwing path for the ball.

Further, as described above, the rotation regulating member 780 that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800 is disposed on the rotating body 800, so the lid member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800. When performing a performance, the performance effect can be further enhanced by displacing the opening/closing member 870. On the other hand, there is a possibility that the rotating body 800 may be rotated (rotated). Therefore, the configuration in which the lid member 770 displaced to the open position is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, and thereby the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It is possible to ensure the production effect.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a rotating member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer surface around the rotational axis is arranged so that it can be viewed by the player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member can be visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating member or by stopping the rotating member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there was a problem in that the rotating member was not fully utilized, as it was only used as a member to hold the display on the outer surface for the player to see. . That is, the rotating member is formed to be relatively large because it is necessary to maintain a display visible to the player. As a result, while the space it occupies increases, the area other than its outer surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) communicates the internal space formed therein with the outside, and the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b are formed through which game balls can pass. (Communication port) is provided, so game balls flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space via the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body 800, which is a dead space, can be used as a storage space for game balls or a ball throwing path, and the rotating body 800 can be utilized accordingly.

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is only possible to create a presentation mode in which the player can see the display on the outer circumferential surface when the rotating member is stopped, so there is little change in the presentation mode and the presentation effect is insufficient. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the opening/closing member 870 (displaceable member) disposed displaceably on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is provided, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is In addition to the performance mode in which the display of is made visible to the player, a performance mode in which the opening/closing member 870 is displaced can be formed, so that the performance mode can be changed accordingly, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

When the lid member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), a part of the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is formed by the opening/closing member 870. It can be made smaller, and the space required for the rotating body 800 to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening/closing member 870 is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the opening/closing member 870. It is possible to enhance the performance effect. In addition, by rotating the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 placed in the closed position and disposing (displacing) the opening/closing member 870 in the open position when the rotation is stopped, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be The visually recognized portion (opening/closing member 870) can be configured to protrude outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, thereby increasing interest.

Furthermore, an LED board 820 that emits light is disposed on a base plate 810 in the interior space of the rotating body 800 . Therefore, by setting the opening/closing member 870 to the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened, the internal space is communicated with the outside, and the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 870 is placed in the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed, and light emitted from the LED board 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and to displace the opening/closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, a driving means is required for each of the rotating body 800 and the opening/closing member 870, which increases the product cost. increases. Further, if a driving means for displacing the opening/closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the opening/closing member 870 is displaced as the lid member 770 is displaced, and the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same drive motor KM4. KM4 can also be used to rotate the rotating body 800 and displace the opening/closing member 870. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs. Further, since there is no need to mount a driving means on the rotating body 800 for displacing the opening/closing member, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and rotation of the rotating body 800 can be smoothly started or stopped.

In addition, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 is used as the inflow port through which game balls flow from the outside into the internal space, and the communication hole 881b can be used as an outlet through which game balls flow from the internal space to the outside. That is, even if the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is not rotated (maintained in a stopped state), the rotating body 800 can be used as a ball throwing path for the game ball.

Furthermore, the opening 831 is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 800, and the communication hole 881b is formed on the end face in the axial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the game balls can enter the internal space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member). In addition to making it easier for the player to visually recognize the inflow, the game balls can be ejected while the rotating body 800 is maintained in a stopped state.

That is, the rotating body 800 is arranged such that the outer surface thereof can be visually recognized by the player, and since an opening 831 (inflow port) is formed on the outer surface, it is possible to easily allow the player to visually recognize the inflow of game balls. On the other hand, when the communication hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800, when the rotating body 800 is placed in a rotational position where the communication hole 881b is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the communication hole 881b (outflow port) is formed on the end face of the rotating body 800 in the direction of the rotation axis, a state can be formed in which the game balls can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotational position of the rotating body 800.

Furthermore, a displaceable opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is disposed inside the opening 831 (first communication port), and when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the closed position (first position), the opening 831 opens. When the opening/closing member 870 is shielded and the opening/closing member 870 is moved to the open position (second position), the opening 831 is opened, so that the inflow of game balls through the opening 831 is switched between the shielding state and the allowing state. be able to.

Furthermore, one side of the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is rotatably supported by the rotating body 800 (rotating member), and when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opposite side to the one side Since the other side of the opening/closing member 870 is projected toward the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870. Therefore, when the opening 831 is formed as an inlet, the game balls flowing down the game area can be easily caused to flow into the internal space of the rotating body 800 by using the opening/closing member 870.

Moreover, the game balls flowing down the game area can be easily stopped on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870. Therefore, for example, when an inlet for game balls is formed in the rotating body 800, the game balls flowing down the gaming area can be made to easily flow into the inlet by using the opening/closing member 870. In this case, if the opening/closing member 870 receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the rotating body 800 may be rotated due to the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. . Therefore, the configuration in which the lid member 770 displaced to the open state position is formed so as to be able to displace the rotation regulating member 780 and regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective. It is possible to easily maintain a state in which the area is extended at a predetermined position.

The shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 is arranged on the rotational direction side of the rotating body 800. In other words, one side of the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is located further forward in the rotational direction of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) than the other side. Therefore, even if the opening/closing member 870 interferes with members disposed around the rotating member 800 when the rotating body 800 is rotated, the force generated by such interference closes the opening/closing member 870 (displaces it to the closed position). can be made to act in the direction of That is, when the rotating body 800 rotates, the opening/closing member 870 can be prevented from interfering with other members and being displaced to the extended position (second position). Further, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing member 870 from engaging with another member and inhibiting the rotation of the rotating body 800.

Furthermore, since the base plate 810 (fixed member) disposed in the internal space of the rotating body 800 does not rotate with respect to the box member 760 (base member) on which the rotating body 800 is rotatably disposed, By rolling the game ball that has flowed into the internal space of the rotating body 800 from the opening 831 with the top surface of the base plate 810 toward the communication hole 881b, the game ball goes wild in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates. Alternatively, the rolling of the game ball is inhibited and it can be prevented from remaining in the internal space.

As described above, since the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 870 is regulated by the displacement of the lid member 770, the opening/closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) does not interfere with members around the rotating body 800. can be suppressed.

As described above, the rotary body 800 has the communication hole 811b through which the wiring to the LED board 820 attached to the back side of the base plate 810 is inserted, and the communication hole 811b is located opposite to the end surface of the rotary body 800 in which the communication hole 881b is formed. formed on the end face of Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space that can be used for each of the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b.

That is, when electrically wiring an LED board disposed inside the rotating body 800, if the wiring is inserted from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, the wiring will become tangled due to the rotation of the rotating body 800, so that the axial end face of the rotating body Although it is preferable to wire the wires from the inside, if an opening through which the game balls flow in and an opening through which the game balls flow out are formed on both axial end surfaces of the rotating body 800, it becomes difficult to secure a space for the wires to pass through.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the inlet of the game ball of the rotating body 800 can be made on the outer circumferential surface, one of the axial end faces of the rotating body 800 is used as the outlet of the game ball, and the other side is used as the outlet for inserting the wiring. Since it can be used as an opening, it is easy to secure a space for the wiring to pass through.

As a result, the game balls can be smoothly discharged through the communication hole 881b, and the wiring work for electrical connection lines (wiring to the LED board 820) to the opening can be easily performed. Moreover, since the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b can be separated to the maximum extent, it is possible to easily suppress interference between the game ball rolling through the internal space of the rotating body 800 to the communication hole 881b and the electrical connection line.

Next, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. 105 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow CVI in FIG. 105. Note that in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 is illustrated in the retracted state.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 are arranged at adjacent positions in the left-right direction. Further, in the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 106), the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at approximately the center position of the ball holder 710 in the front-rear direction.

Next, referring to FIG. 107, the manner in which the ball is thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 107 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is placed in the first extended state.

As shown in FIG. 107, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extended state, and the ball receiving part 467 disposed inside the lower displacement member 440 is in a state in which the ball is received inside (the state in which the ball receiving part 467 is in the first extended state). When the firing operation is performed in the lower displacement member 440, the ball disposed inside the ball receiver 467 is ejected from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440, as described above.

The ball ejected from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 falls freely onto the ball holder 710 of the rotation unit 700 disposed on the right side in front view. As a result, the ball can be thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating body 800.

Next, the configuration of the ball holder 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. 108(a) is a top view of the ball holder 710, FIG. 108(b) is a front view of the ball holder 710, and FIG. 108(c) is the CVIIIc-CVIIIc of FIG. 108(a). FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the ball pedestal 710 along the line. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the ball holder 710.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the ball holder 710 includes a box-shaped tray holder 711, a solenoid 712 disposed inside the tray holder 711, and a solenoid 712 connected to the solenoid 712. It is formed mainly of a displacement member 713 that covers the solenoid 712, and a cover member 714 that covers the solenoid 712.

The tray receiving part 711 includes a bottom plate 711a forming a bottom surface, an upright part 711b standing on the edge of the bottom plate 711a, a throwing part 711c protruding from a part of the outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and a throwing part 711c. The shaft hole 711d is formed through an upright portion 711b that stands upright on the edge of the shaft.

The bottom plate 711a is bent downward toward the ball throwing section 711c, which will be described later. Thereby, the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a can be caused to roll toward the ball throwing portion 711c by the bending (inclination).

The bottom plate 711a is made of a flexible material, and the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a (bottom surface in FIG. 108(c)) is textured to form fine irregularities on the surface. Thereby, when the bottom plate 711a is molded, the rate of heat shrinkage is made different between the top surface and the bottom surface, so that it can be easily bent toward the bottom surface. That is, when the textured bottom surface undergoes heat shrinkage due to the unevenness, it becomes difficult for force to act in the direction of convexly curving the bottom plate side. On the other hand, since the upper surface side is formed as a flat surface, when it is thermally shrunk, a horizontal pulling force acts and the end portion tends to change upward (the upper surface side tends to form a concave curve). Therefore, it is possible to easily bend the ball in a direction that makes it easier to roll when it is thermally shrunk. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bottom plate 711a from becoming a defective product when molded.

The upright portion 711b is a wall portion that is erected upward in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 108(c)) from the outer edge of the ball throwing portion 711c. The standing distance of the standing portion 711b is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Thereby, the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a can be suppressed from falling downward from the edge thereof. In this embodiment, the upright dimension of the upright portion 711b is set to approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere.

Further, the upright portion 711b is formed by connecting a central upright portion 711b1 that divides the area of the bottom plate 711a into two parts to the upright portion 711b. The central upright portion 711b1 divides the upper area of the bottom plate 711a into an area where a ball is thrown and the other area where a solenoid 712 (described later) is disposed.

The ball throwing portion 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a. Moreover, the position in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 108(a)) is arranged on the right side (the right side in FIG. 108) of the approximate center position of the bottom plate 711a. Furthermore, the ball throwing portion 711c is protruded from the bottom plate and is therefore curved downward. Thereby, the ball thrown from the bottom plate 711a can fall downward via the ball throwing part 711c. In addition, the prize opening 761a of the cover member 770 is arranged below the ball throwing part 711c (see FIG. 106), and the ball that falls from the ball throwing part 711c can be thrown into the inside of the winning hole 761a.

A shaft portion 713a of a displacement member 713, which will be described later, is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. Thereby, the displacement member 713 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

The solenoid 712 can piston-displace the shaft inserted into the solenoid 712 by applying electric power. A transmission member 712a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712. The transmission member 712a is a member that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 712 to a displacement member 713, which will be described later, and has a communicating hole 712a1 formed therethrough at its tip.

The displacement member 713 has a C-shaped cross section and mainly includes a protrusion 713b that protrudes to the outside of the C-shape at one end, and a shaft portion 713a that protrudes to the inside of the C-shape at both ends.

The protrusion 713b is a protrusion inserted into the communication hole 712a1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712a1. Thereby, the displacement of the solenoid 712 is transmitted to the displacement member 713 via the transmission member 712a.

The shaft portion 713a is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 711d. By inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d, the displacement member 713 can rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 713a. That is, displacement of the solenoid 712 drives the displacement member 713.

The cover member 714 is formed to have an outer shape larger than that of the solenoid 712, is disposed above the solenoid 712 disposed on the upper part of the bottom plate 711a, and is fastened and fixed to the tray holder 711. This allows the solenoid 712 to be fixed.

Next, the ball falling onto the ball holder 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. 110(a) and 110(b) are cross-sectional views of the ball holder 710. Note that FIGS. 110(a) and 110(b) correspond to the cross section of the ball holder 710 in FIG. 108(c).

As shown in FIG. 110, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 falls freely in the direction of gravity, and due to the firing operation of the ball receiver 467, the ball is thrown toward the rotating unit 700 (right side in FIG. 110(a)). ). That is, the ball is dropped toward the bottom right of the bottom plate 711a of the ball holder 710 when viewed from the front.

In this case, as described above, the bottom plate 711a is bent downward toward the ball throwing part 711c, and the ball throwing part 711c is formed on the right side of the bottom plate 711a, so the upper surface of the bottom plate 711a where the ball falls. can be made into a slope that slopes downward to the right. Therefore, the direction of displacement of the ball and the direction of inclination of the bottom plate 711a on which the ball falls can be brought close to parallel.

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 110(b), it is possible to suppress the ball that has fallen onto the bottom plate 711a from bouncing upward (upward in FIG. 110(b)). Therefore, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball holder 710 of the rotation unit 700 can be prevented from falling from the ball holder 710.

Furthermore, the ball that has fallen onto the bottom plate 711a can be rolled toward the ball throwing section 711c by the momentum of the fall. Therefore, the rolling time of the ball to the ball throwing portion 711c can be shortened. As a result, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball holder 710 can be thrown smoothly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, light emission from the ball holder 710 will be described. 111(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 700 taken along the line CXI-CXI in FIG. 87. Note that FIG. 111(a) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is placed in a closed state, and FIG. 111(b) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is placed in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), when the decoration unit 750 is placed in the closed state, light is emitted to the ball holder 710 by an LED board 721 placed on the back side of the back base 720. .

To explain in detail, the light emitted from the LED 721a of the LED board 721 is reflected on the back side of the lid member 770, thereby making it incident on the bottom plate 711a of the ball holder 710. Further, as described above, since the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a is textured, the incident light can be diffusely reflected by the unevenness of the texture. This allows the entire bottom surface of the ball holder 710 to emit light.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111(b), when the decoration unit 750 is placed in the open state, the transparent portion 771a is formed in the lid member 770 as described above, so the LED 721a of the LED base 721 is The light is transmitted without being reflected by the lid member 770. Since the rotating body 800 is formed inside the lid member 770, the light can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and made to enter the ball holder 710.

In this case, by rotating the third display section 850 of the rotating body 800 toward the ball holder 710 (upper side in FIG. 111(b)), the LEDs 821 of the LED board 820 disposed on the back side of the base plate 810 emit light. The light can be reflected by the inner wall of the rotating body 800 and emitted from the third display section 850.

As described above, the inner wall of the third display section 850 is textured, and a plurality of projections and depressions are formed on the surface. Therefore, the third display section 850 can more easily emit light to the outside of the rotating body 800 than the other display sections. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the third display section 850 on the ball holder 710 side.

Next, the detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118. First, a structure for displacing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114.

FIG. 112 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 114 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper displacement unit 900. Note that FIGS. 112 to 114 illustrate a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is placed at the retracted position (the uppermost position with respect to the base member 910).

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the upper displacement unit 900 includes a base member 910 disposed on the bottom wall 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a base member 910 disposed inside the base member 910. a transmission member 920 , a rotation member 930 which is rotatably connected to the base member 910 and is displaced as the transmission member 920 is displaced, and a rotation member 930 whose one end is slidably and displaceably connected to the base member 410 . The upper displacement member 940 is connected to the upper displacement member 940 and is displaced by receiving the driving force from the rotation member 930.

The base member 910 is formed by combining two rectangular and laterally elongated plate members when viewed from the front, and includes a front base 911 disposed on the front side and a back base 912 disposed on the back side. A transmission member 920 and a rotating member 930 are arranged between the front base 911 and the rear base 912, which face each other.

The front base 911 has three sliding grooves 911c, 911d, and 911e penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 112), a pivot pin 911b protruding toward the back side at the center position in the circumferential direction, and one end side of the front base. It is formed mainly of a shaft portion 911f that projects toward the front (left side when viewed from the front) and an opening 911a that penetrates in the front-rear direction at one end.

The opening 911a is an opening through which the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front base 911 is inserted to the rear side. Thereby, the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front side of the front base 911 can be inserted into the back side of the front base 911.

The shaft support pins 911g and 911b are inserted into shaft holes of a transmission gear 922 and a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, and can rotatably hold the transmission gear 922 and transmission gear 923. That is, the shaft support pins 911g and 911b are formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft holes of the transmission gears 922 and 923.

The sliding groove 911c is formed penetratingly in an arc shape centered on the axis of the pivot pin 911b. The sliding groove 911c is an opening into which a shaft support pin 923a of a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, is inserted, and the radius of the arc is approximately the same as the distance from the shaft hole of the transmission gear 923, which will be described later, to the shaft support pin 923a. Set. Thereby, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated with the pivot pin 923a inserted into the sliding groove 911c, collision between the pivot pin and the inner wall of the sliding groove 911c can be suppressed.

The sliding grooves 911d and 911e are grooves into which pivot pins 951 and 952 of an upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, are inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction thereof is set larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pins 951 and 952. be done.

The sliding groove 911e is formed linearly in the longitudinal direction of the front base 911 (left and right direction in front view). On the other hand, the sliding groove 911d is formed in an arc shape centered below the front base 911. That is, the sliding groove 911e and the sliding groove 911d are formed non-parallel. Therefore, at different positions in the left-right direction, the distances between the two sliding grooves 911e and 911d facing each other in the vertical direction are formed to be different. As a result, when the pivot pins 951 and 952 are slid inside the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, the upper displacement member 940 is rotated and slid due to the difference in the distance between the vertically opposing sides. Ru.

The shaft portion 911f is formed to protrude in a cylindrical shape toward the front side. The shaft portion 911f can be inserted into a through hole 931 formed at one end of a rotating member 930, which will be described later, and can hold the rotating member 930 in a rotatable state. That is, the shaft portion 911f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotating member 930.

The back base 912 is a plate member attached to the back side of the front base 911 at a predetermined interval. Back base 912 is formed from a metal material. Thereby, the overall rigidity of the base member 910 can be improved. As a result, when the relatively heavy upper displacement member 940 is disposed on the base member 910 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, twisting of the base member 910 can be suppressed.

The transmission member 920 is disposed between the front base 911 and the rear base 912, which face each other. The transmission member 920 mainly includes a transmission gear 921 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5, a transmission gear 922 meshed with the transmission gear 921, and a transmission gear 923 meshed with the transmission gear 922. It is formed by

As described above, the transmission gear 921 is connected to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front side of the front base 911 into the shaft hole. Thereby, the transmission gear 921 can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the drive motor KM5.

The transmission gear 922 meshes with the transmission gear 921 and the transmission gear 923 as described above. Thereby, the rotational driving force of the transmission gear 921 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 923.

The transmission gear 923 is formed with a pivot pin 923a protruding toward the front on its outer peripheral edge. Therefore, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the pivot pin 923a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923.

The rotating member 930 is formed in the shape of a long rod on one side, and mainly includes a through hole 931 that is formed through the end of the one end in the front-rear direction, and an opening 932 that extends in the longitudinal direction at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction. be prepared and formed.

As described above, the through hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft portion 911f of the front base 911 is inserted, and by inserting the shaft portion 911f, the rotating member 930 can be rotated with respect to the front base 911. can be retained. Further, a biasing spring SP8 is provided at the tip of the shaft portion 911f. As a result, the rotating member 930 is biased in a direction that lifts the other end upward relative to the front base 911.

The opening 932 is a groove into which the pivot pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and is formed so that the pivot pin 923a can slide inside. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotationally displaced and the arrangement of the pivot pin 923a is displaced, the pivot pin 923a is displaced inside the opening 932. Therefore, since the rotating member 930 is arranged with one end rotatably supported, the rotating member 930 is rotated about the one end by displacement of the supporting pin 923a.

Further, on the other end side of the rotating member 930, an annular member 933 is disposed, which is formed into an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a plate shape with a predetermined thickness on the back side.

The front side of the annular member 933 is formed with two sliding grooves 933a recessed at symmetrical positions along its outer periphery. The annular member 933 is a portion connected to an upper displacement member 940 described later, and a shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. Further, the annular member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected, and as the rotation member 930 is rotationally displaced, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced.

A protrusion 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside the sliding groove 933a, and when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member, the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. can.

Further, the arcuate axis of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a different position from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotation member 930. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930, the first opening portion 960 can be displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the first opening portion 960 will be given later.

Note that on one end side (rotating shaft side) of the rotating member 930, a shaft cover 913 and a deformation regulating cover 914, which are formed from a plate-shaped body, are disposed at the front. The shaft cover 913 is disposed in front of the rotating shaft portion of the rotating member 930, and prevents the rotating member 930 from shaking in the front-back direction. The deformation regulating cover 914 is disposed at a position spaced a predetermined distance from the rotating shaft, and can suppress deformation of the rotating member 930 in the front-back direction due to the weight of the upper displacement member 940 disposed on the other end side.

The upper displacement member 940 includes a base body 950 connected to the front base 911 and the rotating member 930, two first openings 960 rotatably disposed on the back side of the base body 950, and the base body 950. It is formed mainly of two second open parts 970 rotatably arranged on the front side and a variable part 980 arranged on one end side.

The base body 950 mainly includes two pivot pins 951 and 952 that are formed to protrude from the back surface of one end, and a shaft portion 953 that is formed to protrude from the back surface of the other end.

The pivot pins 951, 952 are projections inserted into the sliding grooves 911e, 911d of the front base 911, as described above. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the pivot pins 951 and 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, thereby slidingly displacing the upper displacement member 940 in the left-right direction. At the same time, the other end side can be rotationally displaced downward.

As described above, the shaft portion 953 is a protrusion that is inserted into the annular member 933 and connected to the rotating member 930, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the annular member 933. Thereby, the upper displacement member 940 can be rotatably connected to the rotation member 930. Therefore, when the rotating member 930 is rotationally displaced around one end by the driving force of the drive motor KM5, the driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940 due to the displacement of the annular member 933. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.

The first open portions 960 are plate members having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two of the first open portions 960 are disposed on the back side of the base body 950. The first open portion 960 is rotatably supported on the other end of the base body 950. The first open portion 960 also includes a protrusion 961 that protrudes toward the back side and is disposed inside the sliding groove 933a of the annular member 933. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930 due to the displacement of the rotating member 930, the protrusion 961 can be slid inside the sliding groove 933a.

In this case, as described above, the curved axis of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a different position from the rotating axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member 930, so that the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. Accordingly, the first opening portion 960 that is pivotally supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

The second open portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two of the second open portions 970 are arranged on the front side of the base body 950. The second open portion 970 is rotatably supported on the other end of the base body 950. Also. The second opening part 970 is formed with an engagement protrusion (not shown) that engages when the first opening part 960 is displaced a predetermined amount. As a result, as described above, when the first opening part 960 is rotationally displaced about the pivot portion when the upper displacement member 940 is subjected to a predetermined rotational displacement, the first opening part 960 engages with the second opening part 970. The second opening portion 970 can be rotationally displaced.

Next, displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. 115 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 116 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 disposed at an intermediate position. FIG. 117 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 placed in the extended position.

Note that the retracted position of the upper displacement member 940 is a position in which the pivot pins 951 and 952 are arranged on the other end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 (the right side of the front base 911 when viewed from the front). It is. Further, the extended position is a position in which the pivot pins 951 and 952 are arranged at one end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 (left side of the front base 911 when viewed from the front). Furthermore, the intermediate position is a position in which the upper displacement member 940 is displaced to a position intermediate between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 117, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced with respect to the front base 911, the upper displacement member 940 changes its longitudinal direction from the approximately horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 115) to the approximately vertical direction ( (vertical direction in FIG. 117).

Further, along with the rotational displacement, the position of one end of the upper displacement member 940 is displaced from the right end position of the front base 911 in the front view to the substantially center position in the front view. That is, as described above, when the rotating member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM5, the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced while being slid.

Furthermore, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 116 to the extended position shown in FIG. The second opening part 970, which is engaged with and displaced by the rotational displacement of the first opening part 960, is also rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. Therefore, in the extended position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is directed in the vertical direction, and the first opening part 960 and the second opening part 970 are in a displaced state.

Note that in this embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape that imitates the shape of a human arm (including a hand). Therefore, by displacing the first opening part 960 and the second opening part 970 from the first position to the third position, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the displacement in which the human arm becomes thicker. .

Next, the variable section 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 118. 118(a) is a front view of the variable portion 980, and FIG. 118(b) is a rear view of the variable portion 980.

As shown in FIGS. 118(a) and 118(b), the variable portion 980 is formed in a shape imitating a human hand, and includes a main body portion 981 forming the rear part of the hand, and a main body portion 981 that forms the rear part of the hand. It is formed mainly of finger parts 982 to 986 that are connected to form the finger parts of the hand.

A drive motor (not shown) is disposed inside the main body portion 981, and a variable plate (not shown) disposed inside can be moved by a piston in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 118(a)). be done.

The finger portion 982 corresponds to a thumb, and its base side is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981. Thereby, the finger portion 982 can be displaced by the piston movement of the variable plate.

The finger portions 983 to 986 are formed to mainly include a first link RB1 disposed on the base side and a second link RB2 disposed on the distal end side.

The first link RB1 is rotatably connected to the second link RB2 at its distal end and connected to the variable plate of the main body 981 at its base. Therefore, by the piston movement of the variable plate of the main body portion 981, it is possible to displace the first link RB1 and the second link RB2 via the first link RB1. This allows the finger portions 983 to 986 to be displaced. Note that in this embodiment, by displacing the finger sections 982 to 986, the player can visually recognize the opening and closing actions of the fingers of the hand.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 43), two cylindrical pivot pins 411c and 411d protruding toward the back side, and a pivot pin 411d. It is formed mainly with a curved wall portion 411e projecting in an arc shape with the axis as the axis.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are holes into which two protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back side of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted, respectively. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each formed to extend in the left-right direction. Therefore, by displacing the projections 472, 473 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a, 411b along the sliding grooves 411a, 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each curved in an arc shape, extending upward (in the upper direction in FIG. 43) from the left end (left side in FIG. 43) to the right end (right side in FIG. 43) of the front base 411. ) is opened. Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged so that the axes of their circular arcs are located at different positions, and the gap between the opposing grooves in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It can be displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated as it slides without applying rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440.

The pivot pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of a transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Further, the pivot pin 411c is formed from a metal rod-shaped body and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when force is applied to the cam member 422 from its outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, it is possible to suppress the pivot pin 411c from breaking (damaging).

Next, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. In the first embodiment, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2, but in the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment, the movable rack 2464 and the rack 466 It is displaced in the opposite direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2. Note that the same parts as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and a description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment. FIG. 120 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. Note that FIG. 120 shows a state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are seen transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 2470, and a case member 480. The case member 480 mainly includes a transmission mechanism 2460 that is disposed displaceably between the base member 2470 and a decorative member 450 that covers the front and rear of the case member 480.

The base member 2470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472, 473 protruding from the back surface on one end side, and a standing wall 471a erected from the edge on the other end side to the front side. A protruding wall 477 that protrudes from the upper end of the center portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 120) in a vertically opposite U-shape toward the front side, shaft portions 474, 475 that project toward the front side; It is formed mainly of shaft parts 2470a and 2470b that protrude above 475.

The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468a (described later) is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

The shaft portion 2470b is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468b (described later) is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468b. As will be described later, the transmission gear 2468a and the shaft portion 2470a are arranged such that gear tooth surfaces carved on their outer peripheral surfaces are meshed with each other. That is, the distance between the shaft portion 2470a and the shaft portion 2470b when viewed from the front is set to a distance equal to the radius of the transmission gear 2468a and the transmission gear 2468b.

The transmission mechanism 2460 is disposed in front of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 2464 that is slidably disposed in front of the base member 470, a transmission gear 2468a that meshes with the movable rack 2464, a transmission gear 2468b that meshes with the transmission gear 2468a, and a transmission gear 2468b that meshes with the transmission gear 2468a. It is formed mainly of a rack 46 that meshes with the transmission gear 2468b, and a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed at one end of the rack 466.

The movable rack 2464 is formed into a rectangular and oblong plate-like body when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a rack gear 2464g engraved on the upper end surface, and a collision part 464f protruding from the lower end. It is mainly formed by

Rack gear 2464g is meshed with transmission gear 2468a, which will be described later. Thereby, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated in accordance with the displacement.

The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are respectively pivotally supported by the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b of the base member 2470 in a mutually meshed state as described above. Thereby, when transmission gear 2468a is rotated, transmission gear 2468b is rotated. Further, the transmission gear 2468b is meshed with the rack gear 466a of the rack 466, and when the transmission gear 2468b is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466, and the rack 466 is displaced.

That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM4. Note that the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are disposed at positions partially shifted in the front-back direction, and transmission gear 2468a and transmission gear 2468b are restrained from colliding with rack 466 and movable rack 2464, respectively.

Next, displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be explained with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. Note that in FIG. 121, the decorative member 450 and front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are shown in a transparent state, similar to FIG. 120.

As shown in FIG. 121, when power is applied to the drive motor KM2 and the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the firing position by the transmission mechanism 2460 described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in different directions. Ru.

To explain in detail, by rotating the drive motor KM4, the movable rack 464 is displaced to the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (left side in FIG. 121). Along with this displacement, the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are rotated, and the rack 466 is displaced to one end side (to the right in FIG. 3). Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position.

Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component that is opposite to the direction of displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the center of gravity position of the displacement member 2440 can be reduced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. As a result, shaking of the lower displacement member 2440 due to a change in the center of gravity position can be suppressed.

Next, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 127. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by a rack and pinion mechanism, but in the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by a link mechanism. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. FIG. 122(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 122(b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. 123 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. 125(a) and 91(b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440.

Note that in FIG. 125(a), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 125(b), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 3481 are shown transparently. The state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 3470, and a case member 480 and the base. The case member 480 mainly includes a transmission mechanism 3460 that is disposed displaceably between the case member 3470 and a decorative member 450 that covers the front and rear of the case member 480.

The base member 3470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 that protrude from the back surface on one end side, and a standing wall 471a that stands from the edge on the other end side to the front side. A sliding wall 3470c is formed continuously from the base end side of the standing wall 471a and is erected at the lower edge of the base member 3470, and an upper end of the central part in the left-right direction (FIG. 122(a) left-right direction) The base member 470 mainly includes a protruding wall 477 that protrudes in a vertically opposite U-shape toward the front side, and an opening 479 that is recessed and extends from one end to the other end in the vertical center of the base member 470. It is formed.

The sliding wall 3470c is a wall portion that comes into contact with the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 to regulate the position (aspect) of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, it is formed to protrude to a position below the ball receiving part 467. Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held with the opening of the U-shaped portion facing upward.

Further, the sliding wall 3470c has a recessed portion 3470c1 recessed below the end on the side of the standing wall 471a. The recessed portion 3470c1 is a groove that receives the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 therein. Thereby, when the ball receiving part 467 is slid toward the upright part side by the transmission mechanism 3460 described later, the ball receiving part 467 can be received in the recess and the ball receiving part 467 can be rotated. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can perform a firing operation (an operation of ejecting the ball held inside the U-shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

The transmission mechanism 3460 includes a drive motor KM2 attached to a front case 3480, which will be described later, a first link member 3468 rotatably connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and a first link member 3468 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2. The second link member 3469 is rotatably connected, and a ball receiving portion 467 is connected to one end of the second link member 3469.

The first link member 3468 is formed from a rectangular horizontally elongated plate-like body, and has a shaft hole 3468b penetratingly formed at one end side, a connecting hole 3468a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and a bulging hole at the other end side. A load portion 3468c is formed.

The shaft hole 3468b is a through hole into which a rotating shaft 3469a of a second link member 3469, which will be described later, is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 3469a and is formed through the shaft hole 3468b in the front-rear direction.

As described above, the connecting hole 3468a is a hole that is fastened to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and is formed to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. By fitting and fastening the shaft of the drive motor KM2 into the connection hole 3468a, the first link member 3468 can be rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM2.

The load portion 3468c is formed to bulge out from the connecting hole 3468a toward the other end. The load portion 346c is a member for applying a load to position the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side than the connection hole 3468a, and is formed to bulge outward from the one end side.

The second link member 3469 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape and is disposed on the back side of the first link member 3468. The second link member 3469 mainly includes a rotating shaft 3469a that projects from the other end toward the front in a cylindrical shape, and a through hole 3469b that extends through the first end in the front-rear direction.

The rotating shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468, as described above. Thereby, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 can be connected in a rotatable state.

The through hole 3469b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469. Further, the through hole 3469b is formed smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467 and the through hole 3469b are arranged coaxially, and a screw with a head larger than the width of the opening 469 in the transverse direction is inserted into the opening 479 and the shaft hole 467b from the back side of the base member 3470. By inserting and fastening into the through hole 3469b, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotatably connected to the second link member.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 3481 disposed on the front side of the base member 470 and a back case 482 disposed on the back side.

The front case 3481 is formed into a rectangular and horizontally elongated plate shape when viewed from the front, and includes an opening 3481d penetrated at a position facing the drive motor KM2, a bottom wall portion 481b protruding from the lower end surface on the back side, and a lower edge. It is formed mainly with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 3481d is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 is inserted to the back side, and is formed to have a larger outer diameter than the shaft of the drive motor KM2. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 can be transmitted to the first link member 3468 arranged on the back side.

Next, displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, and FIG. 126(b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position. FIG. 127(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position.

Note that from FIG. 126(a) to FIG. 127(b), transition states of the lower displacement member 440 are sequentially illustrated. Further, FIGS. 126(a) and 126(b) or FIGS. 127(a) and 127(b) illustrate a state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 3440 are seen transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the lower displacement member 440 in the first position has a first link member 3468 and a second link member 3469 whose longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 126(a)) is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the base member 3470. The first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the direction (left-right direction in FIG. 126(a)), and to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is placed at one end side of the base member 3470 (left side in FIG. 126(a)). Thereby, the second link member 3469 is arranged at one end side. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at the first position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(b), when the drive motor KM2 is rotated from the first position and the first link member 3468 is rotationally displaced, one end side of the first link member 3468 touches the base member 3470. is displaced relative to. As a result, the second link member 3469 connected to one end side of the first link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, one end side of the second link member 3469 is connected to the ball receiving part 467 and is slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470, so that one end side of the second link member 3469 is connected to the ball receiving part 467. is pushed out to the other end. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the other end side of the second link member 3469 can be displaced to the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(a), the drive motor KM2 is further rotationally displaced from the second position, and the first link member 3468 is rotated approximately 180 degrees from the first position. , the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is placed on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to its rotation axis. Therefore, one end side of the second link member 3469 is further pushed out toward the other end side of the base member 3470, and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the third position.

In this case, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is placed inside the recess 3470c1, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the biasing spring SP2 and performs a firing operation.

Further, the load portion 3468c of the first link member 3468 is displaced toward one end of the base member 3470. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the center of gravity position of the lower displacement member 3440 from being changed when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component can be formed in the direction opposite to the direction of displacement of the ball receiving part 467. The change in the center of gravity position of the displacement member 3440 can be reduced by the displacement of the load portion 3468c. As a result, shaking of the lower displacement member 440 due to a change in the center of gravity position can be suppressed.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127(b), by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468, the ball receiving portion 467 can be retracted to the second position and the first position. Therefore, there is no need to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the displacement to the second position or the first position can be quickly performed.

Therefore, when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiver 467, the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 changes, so the lower displacement member 3440 tends to shake, but the ball receiver 467 can be quickly evacuated. By quickly bringing the center of gravity position closer to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440, it is possible to suppress rattling of the lower displacement member 3440.

Furthermore, by immediately displacing the ball receiving part 467, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 due to the reaction of the ejecting operation when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467.

That is, when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467, the load on the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 3440 is likely to be displaced upward as a reaction. Immediately displacing the ball receiver 467 applies a force that displaces the base member 470 downward due to the reaction caused by the rotational displacement of the ball receiver 467, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 3440. be able to.

Next, the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is formed to be able to fire, but the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment The firing operation of 440 is regulated. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of a lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 128, the decoration member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown in a transparent state, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown with a chain line. Further, FIG. 128 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in a retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 128, the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has an opening formed in the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 between the facing wall 471a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. 4471b is formed.

A tip portion 4411g1 of an engagement wall 4411g, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 4471b. That is, the opening 4471b is opened larger than the tip portion 4411g1.

The front base 411 is provided with a substantially L-shaped engagement wall 4411g that is continuous with the bottom surface of the recovery port 411f.

The engagement wall 4411g can prevent the ball receiver 467 from rotating at the third position (shooting operation) by inserting the substantially L-shaped tip portion 4411g1 into the opening 4471b. . That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set to be substantially the same as the height of the top surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the lower displacement member 440 located in the retracted state.

Next, a state in which each member of the lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. 129 and 130 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. 129 and 130, similarly to FIG. 128, the decoration member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown in a transparent state, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is indicated by the chain line. Illustrated.

Further, FIG. 129 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed in the third position. Further, FIG. 130 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed in the first position.

As shown in FIG. 129, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 comes into contact with the upper surface of the tip portion 4411g1 of the engagement wall 4411g, and the recess 481b1 or the opening Intrusion into 4471b is restricted. This restricts rotation of the ball receiving portion 467.

Therefore, when the ball receiving part 467 is caused to perform a discharging operation in order to eject the ball thrown onto the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving part 467 is moved to the third position. can be prevented from rotating and ejecting the game ball held inside the ball receiving part 467.

That is, with the displacement of the ball receiving part 467 to the third position, the attitude of the ball receiving part 467 is changed when ejecting game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) from the orbital area of the ball receiving part 467. can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital area.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first extended state position (a position other than the retracted state position), the lower displacement member 440 is displaced with respect to the base member 470. Therefore, the opening 4471b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engagement wall 4411g are spaced apart. Therefore, in the first extended state, the ball receiver 467 can be displaced to the third position to perform a firing operation.

That is, with the displacement of the ball receiving part 467 to the third position, when ejecting game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) from the orbital area of the ball receiving part 467, the attitude of the ball receiving part 467 changes. While it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the ball receiving part 467 holds the prescribed number of game balls by suppressing the change in the ball position, the ball receiving part 467 is engaged when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first and second extended positions. Since the wall 4411g is separated from the internal space of the opening 4471b, the leg portion 467a is engaged with the opening 4471b as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, thereby changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467. This allows the specified number of game balls to be easily discharged from the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the distribution member 540 rotates to form the storage state and the regulation state, but in the fifth embodiment, the distribution member 540 slides and displaces to form the storage state and the regulation state. do. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of a distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. FIG. 131(a) is a top view of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 131(b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 5500. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 5500, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 5500. FIG. 134 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 5500 taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV in FIG. 131(a). In addition, in FIG. 134, the outer shape of the distribution member 540 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the sorting unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment includes a base plate 5520 formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a base plate 5520 attached to the front side of the base plate 5520 and facing the base plate 5520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of downstream paths through which balls can flow; a distribution member 5540 that is slidably attached to the back side of the base plate 5520; and a base plate that is attached to the end surface of the base plate 5520. 5520 and an extension path member 530 that extends the downward flow path of the ball formed between the opposing path forming member 510.

The base plate 5520 has two cylindrical shaft portions 5526 protruding toward the back side, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 formed through the rectangular shape, and a U-shaped cross section with the upper end open on the side surface of the upper end. It is formed mainly of a rolling part 525 which is formed in a shape and extends in the left-right direction, and a locking part 524 which projects in a hook shape from the back side.

Two shaft portions 5526 are formed to protrude from the back side, and are inserted into two sliding grooves 5546, which will be described later.

The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are openings into which a regulating plate 541 and a storage plate 5542 of a distribution member 5540, which will be described later, are inserted. It is formed. Further, since the distribution member 5540 is attached to the base plate 5520 in a slidable state, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are larger in the sliding direction of the distribution member 5540 than the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. formed in the opening.

The distribution member 5540 is formed into a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with one end being long, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The sorting member 5540 includes a regulation plate 5541 and a storage plate 5542 that protrude in a plate shape toward the front side, and a sliding groove 5546 that is formed in a long hole in substantially the same direction as the extension direction of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. and a hook-shaped locking portion 544 on the back side.

The regulation plate 5541 is disposed at a connecting portion between the first ball throwing route KR1 and the second ball throwing route KR2 through the first opening 5521, so that the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 is directed to the second ball throwing route KR2. It is a plate member that restricts the flow into the ball, and the distance from which it projects from the first opening 5521 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 is formed in a straight line shape when viewed from the front, and the direction in which it extends is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540. Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement area of the regulation plate 5541 can be minimized. As a result, the opening area of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The storage plate 5542 is a plate member that is disposed on the second ball throwing route KR2 through the second opening 5522, and allows the game balls flowing down the second ball throwing route KR2 to flow down to the upstream side of the storage plate 5542. The distance projected from the opening 5522 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a linear shape when viewed from the front, and the direction in which it extends is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540. Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement area of the storage plate 5542 can be minimized. As a result, the opening area of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The sliding groove 5546 is an elongated hole formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 is inserted into the sliding groove 5546. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 5526 into the sliding groove 5546 and fastening a screw or the like to the tip of the shaft portion 5526 from the back side, the distribution member 5540 is held in a state where it can be slid relative to the base plate 5520. be able to.

The sliding grooves 5546 are formed at two locations, with their longitudinal directions parallel to each other. Thereby, the distribution member 5540 can be slidably displaced while suppressing rotational displacement of the distribution member 5540.

Next, displacement of the distribution member 5540 will be explained with reference to FIG. 135. 135(a) and 135(b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 5500 in the range CXXXV of FIG. 134. Note that FIG. 135(a) shows a state in which the distribution member 5540 is placed at the storage position, and FIG. 135(b) shows a state in which the distribution member 5540 is placed in the restriction position.

As shown in FIG. 135(a), when the distribution member 5540 is placed in the regulation position, the storage plate 5542 is arranged in the shape of the third ball throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 5541 is placed on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is placed inside a recess 518 formed in the wall.

In this case, the distance dimension L9 between the tip of the storage plate 5542 protruding inward from the third ball throwing path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball throwing path that faces the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from upstream of the third ball throwing path KR3 (first ball throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 5542.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 135(b), when the distribution member 5540 is placed at the restriction position, the restriction plate 5541 is placed at the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3. , a regulating plate 5541 is arranged at a connecting portion between the first ball throwing route KR1 and the third ball throwing route KR3, and a storage plate 5542 is arranged inside the recess 519 formed in the wall on the back side of the route forming member 510. Ru.

In this case, the distance L10 between the end of the tip of the regulating plate 5541 protruding inward of the first ball throwing path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 5541 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 5540 between the regulation position and the storage position, a ball thrown on the first ball throwing path KR1 is thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third ball throwing path KR3; A state can be created in which a ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 cannot flow into the third ball throwing path KR3 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing one sorting member 5540, when the first downstream path is divided into two downstream paths, the downstream path of the ball can be reliably switched to either one.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 (distributing means) is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) or the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path), and its appearance and retraction position is set to the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) or the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path). This is the inner wall on the extended line in the downstream direction at the downstream end of the first ball throwing route KR1. Therefore, the regulation plate 5541 can be made to protrude at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first ball throwing path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the regulation plate 5541 starts to protrude into the downstream path or the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) to when the game balls can be sorted. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the distribution destination using the regulation plate 5541.

In addition, the regulation plate 5541 (distributing means) is projected into the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branching path) to move the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) into the second ball throwing path ( Since the protruding direction of the regulating plate 5541 is set to point toward the upstream end of the second ball throwing route KR2, the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 make a protruding action. When the game ball comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the regulation plate, the game ball can be pushed into the second ball throwing path KR along with the protruding operation of the regulation plate. As a result, the distribution to the second ball throwing path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

Next, a rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 140. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the load gear 731e is connected to drive the rotating body 800 and the rotating body 800 is restricted from operating by inertia force, but the rotating body 800 in the sixth embodiment is Gear 731e is removed. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of a rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. FIG. 136 is a front view of a rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 6700. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 6500.

As shown in FIGS. 136 to 138, the rotation unit 6700 includes a decoration unit 6750 including a rotating body 800 that is rotationally displaced, a ball pedestal 710 disposed above the decoration unit 6750 in the direction of gravity, and a ball pedestal 710 disposed above the decoration unit 6750 in the direction of gravity. 710 and a rear base 720 arranged on the back side of the decoration unit 6750, a left side transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the decoration unit 6750 when viewed from the front, and a crank cover 743 arranged on the right side of the decoration unit 6750 when viewed from the front. It is formed mainly by the following.

The decoration unit 6750 mainly includes a box member 760 formed in a box shape with an open upper side in the direction of gravity, and a rotating body 800 rotatably disposed inside the box member. That is, in the first embodiment, the rotating body 800 is arranged inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770, but in the sixth embodiment, the decoration unit 750 is formed with the lid member 770 removed. Ru.

The left side transmission member 730 is attached with a drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side surface of the decoration unit 750 (left side in FIG. 136), a transmission member 6731 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. The motor base 732, the gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 6731, and the ball throwing path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and is formed with a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the opposite side. be prepared and formed.

The transmission member 6731 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 6731b, and a transmission gear 731c. and a transmission gear 731d that is arranged adjacent to and coaxially with the shaft 735.

Transmission gear 6731b is a gear that transmits driving force to transmission gear 731c. Note that in the first embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 was attached to the inside of the transmission gear 731b, but the one-way clutch OW1 is removed from the transmission gear 6731b of the sixth embodiment. Further, since the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d are the same as in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, when driving force in one direction is transmitted from drive motor KM4, rotational driving force can be transmitted to shaft 735, and when driving force in the other direction is transmitted from drive motor KM4, rotational driving force can be transmitted to the inner ring of one-way clutch OW1. As a result, the outer ring slips (slips) and the transmission of driving force to the shaft 735 is cut off.

Next, the rotation of the rotating body 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. 139(a) to 139(c) are side views of the decoration unit 6750 as seen in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138, and FIGS. 140(a) to 140(c) are side views as seen in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. It is a side view of the decoration unit 6750 in FIG.

139 and 140, the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is shown transparently. 139(a) to 139(c) sequentially illustrate how the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 displaces the second section DK2, and in FIGS. 140(a) to 140(c), the rotating body The manner in which the center of gravity G of 800 is displaced in the first section DK1 is illustrated in order.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced clockwise (as viewed from the direction of FIG. 139) to the left (as viewed from the direction of FIG. 139).

As described above, the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically about the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G is arranged at a different position from the rotation axis. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated from the state in which the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140(a) is placed above the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140(b) is displaced to a position approximately parallel to the rotation axis. Once started, the load exerts a rotating force in the direction of rotation.

Therefore, the engagement of the rollers interposed between the outer ring and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731c is released, and the outer ring (rotating body 800 side) takes the lead with respect to the inner ring (drive motor side). and is in a state where it is driven. That is, in the second section, the rotational speed of the rotating body 800 can be made faster than the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4.

Note that the rotating body 800 that rotates in the second section DK2 by the load is rotated by the load to a position where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 139(c) is located below the rotation axis.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in a direction opposite to the direction in which the rotating body 800 rotates. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated according to the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the rotating body 800 and enhance the presentation effect according to the displacement of the rotating body 800.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the lid member 770 causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring (that is, increases the displacement speed of the lid member 770) due to its own weight. The displacement member 7710 in this embodiment uses the weight of the game ball to advance the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 relative to the inner ring (that is, increases the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

141 and 142 are schematic side views of a displacement unit 7700 in the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 141 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the raised position, and FIG. 142 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the lowered position.

As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the displacement unit 7700 includes a displacement member 7710 formed to be slidably displaceable, and transmits rotational driving force of a driving means (not shown, for example, an electric motor) to the displacement member 7710. It mainly includes a transmission member 7720 that rotates, and a load gear 7730 that rotates as the displacement member 7710 slides.

The displacement member 7710 is a member that is supported by a support mechanism (not shown) so as to be linearly displaceable along the virtual line L1. It mainly includes a rack gear 7712 carved along the imaginary line L1 and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported at the tip of the displacement member 7710.

Note that the virtual line L1 is set as a straight line that slopes downward from the raised position shown in FIG. 141 to the lowered position shown in FIG. 142. That is, in the raised position, the displacement member 7710 is located higher in the direction of gravity than in the lowered position.

The driven pin 7711 is a member that is slidably inserted into the drive groove 7723b of the arm member 7723 of the transmission member 7720, and is formed as a cylindrical body with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the groove width of the drive groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is meshed with the rack gear 7712, and the load gear 7730 is rotated as the displacement member 7710 slides.

The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding a game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, and by being rotated around the rotation axis 7713a, it can be switched between the upright state shown in FIG. 141 and the tilted state shown in FIG. 142. It is said that it can be formed. In the upright state, one end side protrudes beyond the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, making it possible to hold the game ball (see FIG. 143). On the other hand, in the tilted state, one end side is positioned below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, so that the game ball can be ejected from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 144).

Note that the ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in an upright state by an urging force acting from an unillustrated urging spring (for example, a torsion spring). An engagement pin 7740 is fixed on the orbit of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), and when the displacement member 7710 is slid to the lowered position, the engagement pin 7740 is attached to the other end of the ball receiving member 7713. 7740 is engaged, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated and placed in a tilted state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slid to the raised position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring and returned to the tilted state.

The transmission member 7720 includes a disc-shaped rotating member 7721 that is rotationally driven by the above-mentioned driving means (not shown), protrudes from an axial end surface of the rotating member 7721, and is located eccentrically from the center of rotation of the rotating member 7721. It mainly includes a cylindrical drive pin 7722 and an arm member 7723 having a driven groove 7723a formed at one end thereof into which the drive pin 7722 is slidably inserted.

A one-way clutch OW1 is interposed between the rotating member 7721 and the drive means. Specifically, the one-way clutch OW1 has an inner ring connected to a driving means, an outer ring connected to a rotating member 7721, and when the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) by the driving means. While transmitting the rotational driving force to the outer ring (that is, rotating the rotating member 7721 in the direction of arrow A), the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow A (counterclockwise in FIG. 141) by the driving means. , disconnects power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721).

The arm member 7723 has a driving groove 7723b, through which the driven pin 7711 of the displacement member 7710 is slidably inserted, formed on the other end side opposite to the one end side in which the driven groove 7723a is formed. At the same time, the space between the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b (the intermediate portion) is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft 7723c.

Note that the drive pin 7722 is formed as a cylindrical body with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a. Further, the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b are formed as linear grooves along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 7723.

According to the displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, when the rotation member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the raised position shown in FIG. , the drive pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation axis 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates clockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push down the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slid along the imaginary line L1, and as shown in FIG. It is placed in the lowered position shown in .

On the other hand, when the rotating member 7721 is further rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the state where the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the lowered position shown in FIG. Acting on the wall surface, the arm member 7723 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation axis 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push up the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slid along the imaginary line L1, and as shown in FIG. It is placed in the raised position shown at 141.

Here, like the load gear 731e in the first embodiment, the load gear 7730 is formed so as to generate a predetermined amount of resistance when rotating. As a result, the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723 and rotates the rotating member 7721 in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), so that the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is moved relative to the inner ring. This can prevent the vehicle from moving ahead in one direction (the direction of arrow A). That is, in a state where no game ball is held, it is possible to suppress the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 from increasing when going from the raised position to the lowered position.

That is, while the rotating member 7721 is being rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIGS. 141 and 142) by the rotational driving force of the driving means, the displacement is maintained at a sliding speed corresponding to the rotational driving speed of the rotational driving means. The member 7710 is reciprocated (slided) between a raised position and a lowered position.

143 and 144 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when a game ball is held by the displacement member 7710. Note that FIG. 143 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the raised position, and FIG. 144 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the lowered position.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the displacement member 7710 is formed to be able to hold a game ball on its upper surface. That is, in this embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is disposed in the area where the game ball flows down in the game area, and the displacement member 7710 is formed to be able to receive the game ball flowing down on its upper surface. In addition, in FIG. 143, a state in which four game balls indicated by the symbol T are held on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 is illustrated.

In this case, when the displacement member 7710 holds the game ball, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole is increased (heavier) by the weight of the game ball to overcome the resistance caused by the rotation of the load gear 7730. can be done. That is, by applying the entire weight of the displacement member 7710 (the weight including the game ball) to the arm member 7723 and rotating the rotating member 7721 in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 143), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 can be advanced in one direction (direction of arrow A) with respect to the inner ring. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when going from the raised position to the lowered position can be made faster than the displacement speed when no game ball is held (see FIG. 141).

Furthermore, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole can be varied depending on the number of game balls held. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be varied (changed) not only depending on whether or not the displacement member 7710 holds game balls, but also depending on the number of game balls held. As a result, variations in the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be increased accordingly.

As described above, the displacement member 7710 is provided with the ball receiving member 7713 at its tip (the end on the downwardly inclined side). Therefore, when the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) receives a game ball flowing down the game area, the force exerted on the displacement member 7710 from the game ball is directed toward the lowered position and slides. It can act as a force that causes displacement. That is, such force can be applied via the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721 in a direction that causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to advance in one direction (the direction of arrow A) relative to the inner ring.

As a result, when the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) receives a falling game ball, the kinetic energy of the game ball is used to slide the displacement member 7710 in the direction toward the lowered position. The displacement speed can be made faster.

In this case, the falling game balls have different flowing directions and flowing speeds. Therefore, the force (magnitude of kinetic energy) applied to the displacement member 7710 can be varied depending on the difference in the falling state (flowing direction and speed) of the game ball to be received. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 is varied depending not only on whether or not the displacement member 7710 holds game balls and the number of game balls held, but also on the flowing state of the game balls. be able to) As a result, variations in the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be increased accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the rotating direction of the rotating member 7721 is set to be one direction, there is no need to switch the driving direction of the driving means. In other words, by continuously rotating the rotating means in one direction, the displacement member 7710 can be reciprocated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the time required to switch the driving direction of the driving means. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be immediately displaced without the need to switch the driving means.

In this case, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the reaction occurs when the ball receiving member 7713 rotates and drops the game ball received by the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713). Shaking of the displacement member 7710 can be suppressed.

That is, when a game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load on the displacement member 7710 becomes lighter by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. However, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the reaction force caused by the displacement of the ball receiving member 7713 acts to displace the displacement member 7710 downward, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710. be able to.

Note that the game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to a game ball that moves along the front surface (front surface) of the game board 13 in the direction of gravity, but also includes a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Examples of game balls that move in a direction different from the direction of gravity include game balls that collide with nails, tulips, objects, etc. and move in a direction different from the direction of gravity, and balls that roll on a stage and then jump off the stage. A game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

Here, in this embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, when the displacement member 7710 is not holding a game ball (see FIG. 141), the displacement member 7710 is slid toward the lowered position. The one-way clutch OW1 is configured such that the outer ring does not advance in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase).

On the other hand, when the load gear 7730 is omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 is set to a small value, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is moved against the inner ring when the displacement member 7710 is slid toward the lowered position. The displacement member 7710 may be configured to advance in one direction (arrow A direction) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 becomes faster). That is, even when only the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 is applied to the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is rotated against the inner ring. It is also possible to take the lead.

Next, the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148. In the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment, a rotation operation unit 8650 is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotation operation unit 8650 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147. FIG. 145 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation operation unit 8650. FIG. 147 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line CXLVII-CXLVII in FIG. 145.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, the rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged in the internal space of the upper tray 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation section 8654, which will be described later, protrudes outward from the upper tray 8017. It will be placed in such a state.

The rotation operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8652 meshed with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651, and a shaft of the transmission gear 8652. It is formed mainly of a shaft portion 8653 that is fitted into the hole, a one-way clutch OW1 whose inner ring is fitted onto the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operation portion 8654 into which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted. .

Transmission gear 8651 is connected to the shaft of drive motor KM6. Therefore, by applying rotational driving force to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 8651 can be rotated. As described above, the transmission gear 8652 is disposed in mesh with the transmission gear 8651. Therefore, when rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 8652 can be rotated via the transmission gear 8651.

The shaft portion 8653 is a bar member formed in a cylindrical shape, and its axial length is longer than the width dimension of the rotation operation portion 8654 in the left-right direction. As described above, one end of the shaft portion 8653 is fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, and the other end is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. Thereby, the driving force generated when the transmission gear 8652 is rotated can be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

As mentioned above, the one-way clutch OW1 is formed of an inner ring, an outer ring, and a roller engaged between them, and when the inner ring rotates in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring, and the inner ring can rotate in the other direction. When rotated, the rotation of the inner ring can be prevented from being transmitted to the outer ring.

The rotation operation section 8654 is formed in an annular shape, and is disposed with a portion of its outer peripheral surface protruding from the upper plate 8017. Furthermore, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted into the inner circular portion of the rotation operation portion 8654. That is, the inward inclination of the rotation operation portion 8654 is formed to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, rotation is transmitted to the rotation operation section 8654 by rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1.

As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651, 8652 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. is rotated. On the other hand, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in the other direction, the inner ring and the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 are not transmitted, and the transmission of rotational drive to the rotational operation section 8654 is cut off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the case where the player operates the rotation operation section 8654 will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the cross section in FIG. 148 corresponds to FIG. 147.

As described above, the rotation operation section 8654 is configured such that the rotation operation section 8654 rotates when the drive motor KM6 is rotated, and the rotation operation section 8654 rotates when the drive motor KM6 does not rotate. An embodiment in which the displacement is stopped can be formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, when the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction and the rotation operation section 8654 is rotated in the A direction, the player operates the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation section 8654 to rotate the rotation operation section 8654. When a rotational force is generated in 8654 in the same direction as the direction of rotation A, the outer circumferential surface of one-way clutch OW1 and rotation operation portion 8654 are rotated first. That is, the rotation operation section 8654 can be operated by the player at a rotation speed faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM6.

Further, when the rotational operation section 8654 is not rotated (the drive motor KM6 is not rotated), the player rotationally displaces the rotational operation section 8654 by applying a driving force to the rotational operation section 8654 in the direction of rotation A. be able to.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operation section 8654 not only forms a non-rotating or rotating state by driving the drive motor KM6, but also a mode in which the rotation operation section 8654 rotates from a stopped state by the player's operation. Further, it is possible to form a mode in which the rotation operation section 8654 is rotated at a faster speed from the rotation state by the player's operation.

As a result, it is possible to create a plurality of modes in which the displacement mode of the rotary operation section 8654 is made visible to the player, thereby making it possible to provide interest to the player. Further, by forming a plurality of rotation modes of the rotation operation section 8654, it is possible to form a plurality of presentation modes of the pachinko machine 10, so that it is possible to increase the number of presentations and provide interest to the players.

Note that a sensor device or the like that measures the number of rotations is placed on the side surface of the rotational operation section 8654, and effects that change based on the number of rotations and rotational speed of the rotational operation section 8654 can be performed.

Next, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 149. The plate-like protrusion 9431b of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment includes an inclined surface 9431b1 formed so that the contact surface with the cam member 422 is inclined. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 149(a) is a perspective front view of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 149(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400. Note that FIG. 149(b) corresponds to the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 56(a).

Note that, similarly to the lower displacement unit 400 in the first embodiment, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and It includes a transmission member 420 disposed on the base member 410, and a lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 45) that is displaced by the transmission of driving force from the transmission member 420. Further, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a link member 9430 that is connected to the base member 410 and the lower displacement member 440 and is displaced as the transmission member 420 is driven. Lower displacement member 440 is displaced.

As shown in FIG. 149, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment is bent into a generally doglegged shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 9431 has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side (in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 149(a)), and a through hole 431a that protrudes toward the back side on the other end side (in the direction of arrow U in FIG. 149(a)). a cylindrical connecting protrusion 431c (see FIG. 46), a plate-shaped protrusion 9431b protruding to a position facing the curved wall portion 411e of the base member 410, and a cylindrical sliding protrusion 431d protruding toward the front side of the bent portion. And prepare.

The plate-like protrusion 9431b extends in a curved manner about the axis of the through hole 431a, and protrudes toward the front side (front base 411 side (arrow F direction side)). Further, the protruding dimension of the plate-like protrusion 9431b is set larger than the thickness (dimension in the direction of arrow FB) of the cam member 422. Further, the protruding end surface of the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) are arranged with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 149(b))).

The cam member 422 is disposed in such a manner that it can be displaced in a region between the opposing front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e. Further, the dimensions of the two gaps, which are the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410, are smaller than the distance X14 described above. It is set large.

As a result, when the first link member 9431 is bent in the direction in which the above-mentioned distance It can be brought into contact with the Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from being sandwiched between the opposing front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e and restricting its displacement.

Further, the plate-like projection 9431b includes an inclined surface 9431b1 that protrudes toward the front side toward the cam member 422 on the circumferential side surface on the cam member 422 side (arrow L direction side in FIG. 149(b)). As shown in FIG. 149(b), the inclined surface 9431b1 is formed to be inclined at approximately 45 degrees toward the protrusion side (arrow F direction side).

As a result, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-like protrusion 9431b, the cam member 422 is moved toward the back surface of the first link member 9431 (on the side in the direction of arrow F). It is possible to press (displace) the protruding end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b of the first link member 9431 against the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 from swinging in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 in the second displacement state.

In this case, it is preferable that a flat surface parallel to the inclined surface 9431b1 be formed at the end of the cam member 422 at a portion that contacts the inclined surface 9431b1. Thereby, when the cam member 422 and the inclined surface 9431b1 come into contact with each other, the cam member 422 can be easily displaced toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B).

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the adhesive tape 154a is attached to the end of the decorative member 154 in the general winning a prize opening unit 150 has been described, but in the tenth embodiment, the adhesive tape 10154a is attached to the end of the decorative member 10154. It is affixed to the inside part separated by a predetermined width from the part. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 150 is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 150 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 16. In addition, the general winning a prize unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment is arranged in the gaming area (the front of the base board 60) of the gaming board 13, like the general winning a prize unit 150 in the first embodiment. It is possible to change the path of the game ball. In addition, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 is located at the end of the lower side in the gravity direction (arrow D direction side) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B) with respect to the gaming area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. It is placed along the section.

Furthermore, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 includes a main body part 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front, and a first upright part 152 that stands upright from the end of the main body part 151 on the front side (in the direction of arrow F). (see FIG. 12), and a second upright portion 153 (see FIG. 12) extending from the upper end of the first upright portion 152 in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction side) toward the center of the gaming area. a)) and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 (see FIG. 12(a)) formed on the front side of the main body portion 151.

As shown in FIG. 150, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment includes a decorative member 10154 arranged on the back surface of the main body part 10151. In the decorative member 10154, an adhesive tape 10154a that is adhered to the main body portion 151 is attached to the inner side of the decorative member 10154, which is separated by a predetermined width from the end of the decorative member 10154. As a result, a predetermined gap (space) is formed at the end of the decorative member 10154 between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 10154 by the thickness of the adhesive tape 10154a. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the gravity direction), the decorative member 60c and The boundary between the decorative member 10154 and the decoration can be made difficult for the player to see.

To explain in detail, by forming an air layer between the end of the decorative member 10154 and the main body 151, the inside of the main body 151 is reflected and the air is drawn from the end of the main body 151 (sloped surface 151a) toward the player. It is possible to prevent the light L emitted from being affected by the decoration at the end of the decorative member 10154 (to make it difficult for the wavelength of the light L to be changed). In addition, the light that passes through the adhesive tape 10154a and is affected by the decoration of the decorative member 10154 is repeatedly reflected inside the main body 151 and is emitted to the outside of the main body 151, so that the player When reflected toward the viewpoint, the influence of the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be reduced.

Therefore, it is possible to reduce the change in the wavelength of the light L emitted to the player, and when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 10154 change. This can make it difficult to recognize the boundaries of As a result, when a player visually recognizes the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 10154 from a normal angle (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 13 in the direction of gravity), the decoration of the base plate The member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration, and can also be viewed at a predetermined angle (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity). When viewed from above, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see that the decoration is divided by making it difficult to see the decoration at the border.

Next, the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153. In the first embodiment, the decorative member 450 is irradiated with light by the control board 491 disposed on the back side of the lower displacement member 440. However, the lower displacement member 11440 of the eleventh embodiment The player can recognize the position of the game ball inside by the light emitted from 491. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment. 152(a) and 152(b) are front views of the lower displacement member 11440. Note that in FIG. 152(a), the outer shape of the light emitting body 11491a disposed on the control board 491 is illustrated by a chain line, and in FIG. 152(b), a state with the decorative member 11450 removed is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 152(a) and 152(b), the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45), and the front and rear of the base member 470. a case member 480 that covers the case member 480, a transmission mechanism 11460 that is displaceably disposed between the case member 480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member that is formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 (in the direction of the arrow FB). 11450.

The decorative member 11450 is formed to have an external shape imitating a pattern or character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 11450 includes a front side decorative part 11451 arranged on the front side of the front case 481 (in the direction of arrow F), and a back side decoration part arranged on the back side of the back case 482 (in the direction of arrow B). 452. Note that in this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 11450.

The front decoration part 11451 is formed to have a larger outer shape than the front case 481 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front case 481. This makes it possible to make the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) disposed on the back side of the front side decorative part 11451 invisible to the player. Further, the front side decorative portion 11451 includes a transparent portion 11451b formed from a light-transmitting material on the inside in a front view.

The transmitting portion 11451b is formed over the entire area facing a plurality of light emitters 11491a arranged on a control board 491, which will be described later, and can guide light emitted from the plurality of light emitters 11491a toward the player side. It is said that Further, the transparent portion 11451b is formed such that the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) is curved toward the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B) toward the outer end in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow UD). This makes it easier for light entering from the back side of the transmitting section 11451b to be diffused when passing through the inside of the transmitting section 11451b and being emitted from the front side.

The transmission mechanism 11460 is a member disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, and 463, and a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461. A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and is disposed so as to be slidable on the front side of the base member 470, a transmission gear 465 rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464, and a base. A rack gear 476 formed on the member 470 and having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465; and a rack that has a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465 and is disposed so as to be slidable on the front side of the movable rack 464. 11466 and a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 11466.

The rack 11466 is formed from a horizontally long rod-shaped body that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, and a rack gear 466a carved from the other end in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrow L) to the rear side (direction of arrow B). A shaft portion 466b that projects in a cylindrical shape, two sliding plates 466c that project toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F), and a recessed portion on the back surface extending from one end in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of arrow R) to the other end. 59), and a shielding plate 11466e that protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the front side of the rack gear 466a.

The shielding plate 11466e is made of a non-light-transmitting material and can block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a. Further, the upward protruding height (height in the direction of arrow U) of the shielding plate 11466e is set at a position (position in the direction of arrow U) higher than the light emitting body 11491a disposed on the back side. Thereby, as the rack 11466 is displaced, the shielding plate 11466e can be displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) to block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a.

The control board 491 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member 470, and includes a plurality of light emitters 11491a that can irradiate light to the front side. The plurality of light emitters 11491a are arranged in parallel in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower displacement member 11440, and are ball receivers arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) via the base member 470. 467 (in the direction of arrow U). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a from being blocked by the ball receiver 467.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, a state in which the game ball is thrown inside the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. 153(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 11440, and FIG. 153(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 taken along the line CLIIIb-CLIIIb in FIG. 153(a). ) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 taken along the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line in FIG. 153(a).

As shown in FIG. 153, when a game ball is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the received game ball is placed in a position overlapping the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the light emitting body 11491a. Thereby, the game ball received by the ball receiver 467 can block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a toward the player. As a result, the player can recognize the position of the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 11440 by the shadow created by blocking the light.

The eleventh embodiment also includes a control board 491 that is disposed on the back side of the decorative member 11450 and is capable of emitting light toward the displacement area of the ball receiver 467. The light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiver 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiver 467 disposed on the back side, and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is partially reduced. Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 located on the front side of the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 is different from the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 at other positions. By varying the amount of light (darkening and forming a shadow), the player can see that the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light differs. can be recognized.

To explain in detail, when the control board 491 is arranged on the back side of the ball receiving part 467, the light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiving part 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467. By doing so, the amount of light emitted from the ball receiving portion 467 or the decorative member 11450 on the front side of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 can be made darker than other parts of the decorative member 11450. As a result, the player can be made aware that the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is small (dark).

In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed in a shape to receive the lower hemisphere of the game ball, and the light emitting body 11491a is arranged at a higher position than the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467, so that the light emitting body 11491a is It is possible to make it difficult for the ball receiving portion 467 to be irradiated with the irradiated light. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a casts a shadow on the outer shape of the ball receiving part 467 that receives the game balls and the rack 11466 that slides the ball receiving part 467, and a shadow is formed on the transparent part 11451b. It can be suppressed. As a result, only the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467 can form a shadow on the transparent part 11451b, so the ball receiving part 467 is displaced in a state where no game ball is received in the ball receiving part 467. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from drawing attention to the ball receiver 467.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, a ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a by the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467 is blocked, but in the twelfth embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a is The three pieces 12467e block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 154(b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion 12467. In addition, in FIG. 154(a), a part of the ball receiving part 12467 is illustrated by a chain line.

Note that, similarly to the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45), and the front and rear portions of the base member 470. The decorative member 11450 is formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 (in the direction of arrow FB). Further, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment includes a transmission mechanism 12460 that is displaceably disposed between the case member 480 and the base member 470 and has a ball receiving part 12467c that can be deformed by receiving a game ball. .

As shown in FIG. 154, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment includes a first piece 12467c bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and a second piece 12467d connected to the first piece 12467c. , a third piece 12467e connected to the second piece 12467d and disposed on the back side of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d.

The first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are parts that hold the game ball thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 12440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57), and the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are opposed to each other. When the game ball is thrown, the second piece 12467d is displaced in the direction of separating from the first piece 12467c, and a part of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are arranged in a U-shape when viewed from the front. The game ball can be held inside the U-shape.

The first piece 12467c includes a receiving piece 12467c4 forming an L-shape in front view, forming one extending side, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, and the receiving piece 12467c4 and the leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 12467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b passing through the connecting portion (bending portion) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed, and a connecting portion 12467c1 protruding to the opposite side with the bent portion 12467c5 in between. and.

The receiving piece 12467c4 is a part forming the other side (the side in the direction of arrow R) formed by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a crescent shape in the front. , is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 12467d.

The connecting portion 12467c1 projects from two locations at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 12467c5. The connecting portion 12467c1 is a portion that connects a second piece 12467d and a third piece 12467e, which will be described later, and extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and has a connecting hole 12467c2 that has a circular cross section. Be prepared.

The connecting hole 12467c2 is an opening into which a shaft portion 12467e3 protruding from a third piece 12467e, which will be described later, is inserted. A shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into a through hole 12467d3 formed in a second piece 12467d, which will be described later, is inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 from the back side (direction side of arrow B). Further, the shaft portion 12467e3 is fastened with a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side (front side (direction side of arrow F)) of the connecting hole 12467c2. Thereby, the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e can be fastened to the first piece 12467c.

Further, the first piece 12467c includes a recessed portion 12467c3 that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow D) on the protruding base end side of the connecting portion 12467c1. The recessed bottom surface of the recessed portion 12467c3 is formed at the lowest position (lowest part) of the bottom surface where the game ball is held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. Thereby, the game ball held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d is rolled inside the recessed part 12467c3.

The second piece 12467d is a part forming the other side (the side in the direction of arrow L) that is formed into a U-shape when viewed from the front by the receiving piece 12467c4 of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, and is a crescent-shaped part when viewed from the front. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the receiving piece 12467c4. In addition, there is an insertion hole 12467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow F-B) at the connecting portion of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, and an insertion hole 12467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow F) and from the back side (in the direction of arrow B) to the front side (in the direction of arrow F). It mainly includes a recessed portion 12467d2 that is recessed toward the side) and has a circular cross section.

In the second piece 12467d, the shaft portion 12467e3 of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the insertion hole 12467d3, and the connecting shaft 12467e4 of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is displaced, the third piece 12467e is similarly displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 12467c, the third piece 12567e is also rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 12467c.

Further, the second piece 12467d is disposed between opposing connecting portions 12467c1 that protrude from two locations on the first piece 12467c, and is connected to the first piece 12467c. Thereby, when the second piece 12467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 12467d3, the second piece 12467d can be brought into contact with the opposite side surface of the connecting part 12467c1, and the shaft part 12467e3 can be prevented from breaking.

The recessed portion 12467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 12467e4 of a third piece 12467e to be described later is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 12467e4.

The third piece 12467e includes a shielding plate 12467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed from the front, a shaft portion 12467e3 protruding from the shielding plate 12467e1 toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F), and a connecting shaft 12467e4. and.

The shielding plate 12467e1 is made of a non-light-transmitting material, and when placed in front of the light-emitting body 11491a, can block the light emitted from the light-emitting body 11491a. Note that the shielding of the light from the light emitter 11491a by the shielding plate 12467e1 will be described later.

The shaft portion 12467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 of the first piece 12467c and the insertion hole 12467d3 of the second piece 12467d, as described above. Further, a hole is formed in the protruding distal end surface of the shaft portion 12467e3, into which a screw inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 12467e3 can be screwed. Therefore, with the shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into the connection hole 12467c2 and the insertion hole 12467d3, by fastening a screw to the insertion end surface of the shaft portion 12467e3, the first piece 12467c, the second piece 12467d, and the third piece 12467e are connected. At the same time, the third piece 12467e can be made rotatable relative to the first piece 12467c.

As described above, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2 of the second piece 12467d. Thereby, when the second piece 12467d is rotationally displaced about the shaft portion 12467e3 with respect to the first piece 12467c, the connecting shaft 12467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 12467d. Therefore, the third piece 12467e can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 12467d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described in detail. 155(a) and 155(b) are front views of the lower displacement member 12440, and FIG. 155(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 12440 taken along the CLVc-CLVc line in FIG. 155(b). be. Note that in FIGS. 155(a) and 155(b), a part of the lower displacement member 12440 and the light emitting body 11491a are illustrated with chain lines. Further, FIG. 155(a) shows a state before the game ball is received by the ball receiving part 12467 (before it is held), and FIG. 155(b) shows the state before the game ball is received by the ball receiving part 12467. The retained (held) state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 155, before the game ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the second piece 12467d is moved to the first side by the load of the third piece 12467e. The third piece 12467e is located closer to the piece 12467c side, and the third piece 12467e is located below the light emitting body 11491a arranged on the back side of the ball receiving part 12467. Therefore, before the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be emitted to the player side.

On the other hand, when a game ball is received between the opposing first piece 12467c and second piece 12467d, the received game ball is (inner side surface) and is guided to the recess 12467c3 located at the lowest end of the receiving surface. Thereby, the second piece 12467d can be rotated around the shaft portion 12467e3 in a direction away from the first piece 12467c on the outer surface of the game ball. As a result, the third piece 12467e, which moves with the displacement of the second piece 12467d, can be placed on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the light emitting body 11491a arranged on the back side of the ball receiver 12467.

Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be blocked by the shielding plate 12467e1 of the third piece 12467e. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be easily shielded only when the game ball is received in the ball receiving part 12467, so the position of the game ball received in the lower displacement member 12440 can be adjusted to the position of the light emitting body 11491a. The player can recognize the position of the shadow that blocks the light.

Further, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2 of the second piece 12467d, and the load of the third piece 12467e is always applied thereto. The center of gravity G of the third piece 12467e (see FIG. 154(b)) is set on the opposite side of the shaft portion 12467e3 from the connection portion between the second piece 12567d and the third piece 12567e. As a result, when no force other than gravity is acting on the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467de, the second piece 12467d can be rotated toward the first piece 12467c by the load of the third piece 12467e. .

Therefore, when the game ball is discharged (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 12467, the second piece 12467d can be displaced toward the receiving piece 12467c4 side of the first piece 12467c due to the load of the third piece 12467e.

Furthermore, similarly to the ball receiving part 467 in the first embodiment, the ball receiving part 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 12467b by the operation of slidingly displacing the inside of the lower displacement member 12440, so that the lower displacement member 12440 emits light. The game ball received through the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game balls received in the ball receiving part 12467, a structure in which the ball receiving part 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b as the ball receiving part 12467 slides is used. The rotational speed of the ball receiving portion 12467 around the shaft hole 467b is changed by the sliding speed. Therefore, since the rotational speed depends only on the sliding speed of the ball receiving part 12467, there was a problem that the ejection speed of the game balls from the ball receiving part 12467 was not stable.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, the direction in which the second piece 12467d rotates due to the load of the third piece 12467e and the direction in which the ball receiving part 12467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b when ejecting the game ball are different. Since they are set in substantially the same direction, a driving force can be applied to the game ball emitted from the emitting opening 471 when the second piece 12467d is displaced. Therefore, even if the force applied to the game ball from the ball receiver 12467 is reduced when displacing the ball receiver 12467 and ejecting the game ball from the exit opening 471, the speed of the ejected game ball can be maintained. can. As a result, the ejection speed of the game balls ejected from the ball receiver 12467 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158, the special prize winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the throwing path of the game ball that has flowed into the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 is switched by the first and second drive units 583 and 584 of the third path member 580. In the thirteenth embodiment, by changing the facing interval of the ball throwing path of the special winning device 13550, the falling path of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 is adjusted. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the special prize winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157. 156(a) is a front view of the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment, FIG. 156(b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 156(c) is a front view of the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a sectional view of the special prize winning device 13550 along the CLVIc-CLVIc line in a). FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective front view of the special winning device 13550.

As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the special prize winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment includes a first path member 13560 disposed on the front side and a first path member 13560 disposed on the back side of the first path member 13560. 2-path member 13570.

The first path member 13560 includes a front plate 13564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13, and a front plate 13564 that protrudes from the left and right ends of the front plate 13564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). It mainly includes a first wall portion 13565.

The front plate 13564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 13570, which will be described later, and is formed from a light-transmitting member. Thereby, the player can visually check the game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 through the front plate 13564. Further, the front plate 13564 includes a first convex portion 13564b and a second convex portion 13564c that protrude toward the second path member 13570, and a second convex portion 13564b and a second convex portion 13564c located below the second convex portion 13564c. A third convex portion 13564d protruding from the 13570 side.

The first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c are protrusions for guiding the game balls flowing down inside the special prize winning device 13550, and are from the outside in the left and right direction of the front plate 13564 (outside in the direction of arrow LR). It is formed to be inclined downward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the face plate 13564.

The third convex portion 13564d is located at the center of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and extends in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). In the thirteenth embodiment, in the game area of the game board 13, the throwing paths of the game balls flowing down from the special winning device 13550 are different on the left and right sides of the substantially central position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the special winning device 13550. , the game ball flowing down from the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front is thrown into the first winning slot 64 (see FIG. 2), and the thrown game ball gives the player a specific gaming value (a predetermined value). number of game balls are paid out). On the other hand, the game ball flowing down from the right side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front is thrown to the outlet 71 of the game board 13 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning hole 64 is arranged below the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (arrow D direction side). The game balls flowing down can be made to flow into the first prize opening 64.

The first wall portion 13565 is a portion that connects the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and the special winning device 13550, and a connecting plate 13565a that protrudes outward to the left and right at the protruding tip is attached to the left and right first wall portions 13565, respectively. Provide two locations each.

A through hole 13565a1 for inserting a screw for fastening the special winning device 13550 to the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed through the connecting plate 13565a. The special winning device 13550 can be fastened to the base plate 60 with the screw inserted into the through hole 13565a1.

The second path member 13570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 13571 that faces the front plate 13564 of the first path member 13560, and a base plate 13571 that connects the first path member 13560 from the left and right ends (arrow LR direction) of the base plate 13571. A fourth wall portion 13573 protruding from the front plate 13564 side is provided.

The base plate 13571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in the gap between the first path member 13560 and the front plate 13564, and is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the front plate 13564 when viewed from the front. This allows the front side of the base plate 13571 to be covered with the front plate 13564, making it difficult for the player to see the base plate 13571.

Further, the base plate 13571 has a fourth convex portion 13571b and a fifth convex portion 13571c that protrude toward the first path member 13560 side, and is located below the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c on the front plate 13564 side. It mainly includes a sixth convex portion 13571d that protrudes from.

The fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are protrusions for guiding the game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are from the outside in the left and right direction of the base plate 13571 (the outside in the arrow direction (LR direction)). The base plate 13571 is formed to be inclined downward toward the center side.

The sixth convex portion 13571d is formed at a position facing the third convex portion 13564d described above, and has a length that has a predetermined gap from the tip of the third convex portion 13564d. Note that the gap between the opposing third convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In the fourth wall portion 13573, two fastening holes 13573a for fastening screws inserted through the first path member 13560 are formed in each of the left and right fourth wall portions 13573. As a result, the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 are fastened and fixed.

Further, around the fastening hole 13573a of the fourth wall portion 13573, a shim member SI is arranged to adjust the gap between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other.

The shim member SI is formed from a thin plate-shaped transparent material, and is made difficult to be visually recognized from the player side. Further, in this embodiment, the shim member SI is disposed at the end on the left side when viewed from the front, and the distance between the opposing front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side when viewed from the front is increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, a game ball flowing down inside the special prize winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 158(a) is a top view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 158(b) is a sectional view of the special winning device 13550 along the line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb in FIG. 158(a).

As shown in FIG. 158, the special winning device 13550 has a shim member SI disposed at the end on the left side when viewed from the front, and an interval L14 between the opposing front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 158). a)) is set to be larger than the distance L15 (see FIG. 158(a)) between the opposing front plate 13564 and base plate 13571 on the right side in front view (L14>L15).

Note that the interval L14 is the interval between the left end (on the arrow L direction side) at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Further, the interval L15 is the interval between the right end (on the arrow R direction side) at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Furthermore, the interval L15 is set larger than the diameter of the game balls, and the game balls flowing down from above the special winning device 13550 can flow into the inside of the special winning device 13550 from any position in the left and right direction ( L14>L15>Diameter of game ball).

Further, the special winning device 13550 is partitioned into left and right on the downstream side by a third convex portion 13564d and a sixth convex portion 13571d. As a result, the game balls flowing down the main path SK1 (see FIG. 158(b)) on the upstream side of the special winning device 13550 are connected to the main path SK2 formed on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front, and the main path SK2 formed on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front. It flows into either one of the sub-paths HK1 and the formed sub-path HK1. In addition, as mentioned above, the game area on the downstream side of the special winning device 13550 is formed with different ball throwing paths at approximately the center position in the left-right direction of the special winning device 13550. Therefore, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the game area is thrown to a specific winning hole, and the game ball thrown from the sub path HK1 to the game area is thrown to the out port 71 of the game board 13.

Further, the protruding dimensions of the first convex portion 13564b and second convex portion 13564c of the front plate 13564 described above and the fourth convex portion 13571b and fifth convex portion 13571c of the base plate 13571 are set to be approximately the same. That is, the first protrusion 13565b and the second protrusion 13564c protruding from the front plate 13564 toward the back side are set to have the same protrusion dimension. Furthermore, the fourth protrusion 13571b and the fifth protrusion 13571c protruding from the base plate 13571 toward the front side are set to have the same protrusion dimension. Furthermore, the protrusion dimensions of the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth convex portion 13571b are set to be the same.

Further, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c, and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are arranged at different heights in the vertical direction. That is, the first convex portion 13565b and the second convex portion 13564c that protrude from the front plate 13564 toward the back side protrude from the same height. Further, the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c that protrude from the base plate 13571 toward the front side protrude from the same height. Furthermore, the first protrusion 13565b and the fourth protrusion 13571b are arranged at different heights, and the fourth protrusion 13571b is arranged below the first protrusion 13565b. Further, the lower side of the first protrusion 13565b, which protrudes from two places in the gravity direction, is arranged at an intermediate position between the fourth protrusion 13571b, which protrudes from two places in the gravity direction.

Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 can be made to flow down while colliding with the first convex part 13564b and the fourth convex part 13571b or the second convex part 13564c and the fifth convex part 13571c in order. As a result, the game ball can be made to flow down along the extending direction of the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, the fourth convex portion 13571b, and the fifth convex portion 13571c.

The distance L16 (see FIG. 158(a)) between the front plate 13564 and the fourth convex portion 13571b or the base plate 13571 and the first convex portion 13564b on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front is determined by the shim member SI. The distance L17 between the opposing front plate 13564 and the fifth convex portion 13571c or the base plate 13571 and the second convex portion 13564c on the right side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Note that the distance L16 is the distance between the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b at the ends of the fifth convex portion 13571c and the second convex portion 13564c (arrow R direction side) facing the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571. is the distance dimension between. Further, the distance L17 is defined by the distance between the fifth convex portion 13571c and the second convex portion 13564c at the ends of the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b (arrow L direction side) facing the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571. is the distance dimension between.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning opening 64 is arranged below the left side (direction of arrow L) of the special winning device 13550 (direction of arrow D). The game balls flowing down can be made to flow into the first prize opening 64.

Therefore, the game balls flowing into the main path SK1 of the special winning device 13550 from the right side in front view (arrow R direction side) of the special winning device 13550 are made to easily come into contact with the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c, It becomes easier to flow down along the extending direction of the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c and to be guided toward the sub-path HK1 side. On the other hand, the game balls flowing into the main path SK1 of the special winning device 13550 from the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front (arrow L direction side) are made difficult to collide with the first convex portion 13564b and the fourth convex portion 13571b, The ball is more likely to be thrown to the secondary path HK1. As a result, the direction of flow of the game balls flowing into the special winning device 13550 can be changed.

Note that in this embodiment, the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, the fourth convex portion 13571b, and the fifth convex portion 13571c are connected to the sixth convex portion 13571d and the third convex portion 13564d (main path HK1 and sub path It is formed above (in the direction of arrow U) than the game ball inflow port with SK6. Therefore, most of the game balls flowing down the main route SK1 can be flowed down the sub route HK1, and a relatively smaller number of game balls can be flowed down the main route SK6 than the sub route HK1.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, the opposing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is adjusted by the shim member SI, and the opposing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is made non-parallel. The position of the game ball flowing down (the direction in which the game ball flows down) can be adjusted.

Therefore, compared to adjusting the direction in which the game ball is more likely to flow down by changing the angle of the nail nailed to the front surface of the base board 60 with respect to the front surface of the base board 60, the direction in which the game ball is more likely to flow down inside the special winning device 13550 is can be made difficult for players to recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is disadvantageous before playing the game with the gaming machine, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In addition, by simply changing the two opposing directions (back and forth direction (arrow FB direction)) of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570, the flow of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 can be improved. Since the direction can be changed, the adjustment can be made easier than with a nail that can be adjusted in all directions with respect to the front of the game board 13 (base board 60). As a result, it is possible to easily cause the game balls to flow down in the direction intended by the adjuster.

Note that the direction intended by the adjuster is, for example, between the opposing first path member 13560 and second path member 13570 on the sub-route HK1 side (arrow L direction side) to the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). The space between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is made larger so that the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 flows down to the sub path HK1, or to the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). ) to make the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 larger than the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 on the sub-route HK1 side (arrow L direction side) to win a special prize. The game ball flowing down inside the device 13550 flows down to the main path SK6.

Furthermore, by sandwiching the shim member SI with respect to the first path member 13560 that is placed on the front side, the second path member 13570 that is placed on the back side is moved in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow FB). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other. That is, since the second path member 13570 disposed far from the player is moved in the front-back direction, the distance between the first path member 13560 and The distance between the opposing second path members 13570 can be made difficult for the player to grasp. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Next, an engaging member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 159. In the first embodiment, the operation element 315 of the engaging member 310 is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300. The operator 14315 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed with a protruding distal end surface inclined toward the proximal end side. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

159(a) is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 159(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 300 taken along the line CLIXb-CLIXb in FIG. 159(a).

Note that, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a wall extending from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

In addition, the rear case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment has an engaging member 14310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear case 14300. It mainly includes a fixing member 320 that is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board box 100 (main controller 110).

As shown in FIG. 159, the engaging member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a first piece 14311 and a second piece 312 extending in parallel directions. and a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312.

The first piece 14311 has an end on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side to which the third piece 313 is connected to the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41(a)). The engagement portion 316 is formed as an engagement portion with the first piece 14311 and protrudes outward on both sides in the up and down direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 14311, and A recess 317 is recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 14311 (direction of arrow LR) from a substantially intermediate position of the engaging portion 316 of )).

The operator 14315 is formed at the end of the other side (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 14311, and its protruding dimension is set to a value larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. It protrudes from the back side of the back case 14300 (bottom wall portion 301) by a size that the operator can grasp with his or her fingers. Thereby, the operator 14315 can be made to protrude from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall portion 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 14315) can be grasped and operated.

Further, the protruding tip surface of the operating element 14315 is formed as an inclined surface 14315a that approaches the proximal end of the operating element 14315 as it approaches the engaging portion 316 side (the other side of the first piece 14311 (arrow L direction side)). As a result, when the operator operates the operator 14315 in the direction of disengaging the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L), the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged. The force acting in the direction of releasing can be reduced.

That is, the force of the operator operating the operator 14315 can be dispersed by the inclined surface 14315a. This makes it difficult to release the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 by operating the operator 14315 from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, a worker attempting to replace the board box 100 that has been illegally placed on the fixing member 320 may operate the operator 14315 from the back side of the rear case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the rear case 300. can be suppressed.

Further, the end portion of the inclined surface 14315a on the engaging portion 316 side is arranged closer to the front side (in the direction of arrow F) than the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. Thereby, the hand of the operator who operates the operator 14315 for the purpose of releasing the engagement between the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 14315a. As a result, an operator attempting to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 by making it difficult to operate the operator 14315 operates the operator 14315 from the back side of the rear case 300. Removal of the fixing member 320 from the back case 300 can be suppressed.

Next, an engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160(a). In the first embodiment, the operation member 315 of the engaging member 310 is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300. The operator 15315 in the fifteenth embodiment is pivotally supported by the first piece 15311 of the engagement member 15310. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 in the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section in FIG. 160(a) corresponds to the cross section in FIG. 159(b).

Note that, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a wall extending from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. An opening 301a (see FIG. 5), which is rectangular in front view, is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible.

In addition, the rear case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment has an engaging member 15310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear case 15300. It mainly includes a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41) that is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board box 100 (main controller 110).

As shown in FIG. 160(a), the engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a first piece 15311 and a second piece extending in parallel directions. A third piece 313 (see FIG. 41) that connects the ends of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 15311 and the second piece 312. (see FIG. 41).

The first piece 15311 has an end on the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected and one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the engaged part 332 of the fixing member 320 (Fig. 41(a)), and protrudes outward on both sides in the up and down direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 15311. 316 (see FIG. 41), and a recess 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 15311 (arrow LR direction) from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316; It mainly includes an operator 15315 inserted into the second opening 301d of the back case 300, and a bearing part 15319 on which the operator 15315 is supported.

The bearing portion 15319 is provided protruding from the first piece 15311 on the other side (the side in the direction of arrow L) to which the third piece 313 of the first piece 15311 is connected. Further, the bearing portion 15319 is formed with a recess into which a cylindrical shaft member 15315c through which an operator 15315 (described later) is inserted in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow UD) is inserted.

The operator 15315 is formed into a rod shape and includes a through hole 15315b that penetrates in the direction of gravity at the end on the first piece 15311 side, and a shaft member 15315c that is inserted into the through hole 15315b.

Therefore, the shaft member 15315c inserted into the through hole 15315b is inserted into the recess of the bearing portion 15319, so that the operator 15315 is held in a rotatable state relative to the first piece 15311. Further, the rotation shaft (shaft member 15315c) of the operator 15315 is arranged closer to the front than the first piece 15311. As a result, the rightward (clockwise) rotation of the operator 15315 in the state shown in FIG. 160(a) when viewed from above can be restricted by contacting the other end of the first piece 15311, Rotation to the left (counterclockwise) is allowed.

Therefore, when the operator operates the operator 15315 in the direction of releasing the engagement between the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L), the operator operates the operator 15315 in the direction shown in FIG. 160(a). When rotating clockwise), the force that acts in the direction of disengaging the engagement member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L) can be reduced. This makes it difficult to release the engagement between the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 by operating the operator 15315 from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, a player who attempts to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 may operate the operator 15315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160(b), an engaging member 15310 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the sliding operation of the engagement member 310 is performed using the operator 315, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the end of the first piece 16311 of the engagement member 16310 is operated. It will be held in Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 in the sixteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section in FIG. 160(b) corresponds to the cross section in FIG. 160(a). Also, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a bottom wall portion 301 that extends from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. An opening 301a (see FIG. 5), which is rectangular in front view, is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible.

Furthermore, the rear case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment has an engaging member 16310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301; It mainly includes a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41) that is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board box 100 (main controller 110).

As shown in FIG. 160(b), the engaging member 16310 in the sixteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a first piece 16311 and a first piece 16311 extending in parallel directions. Two pieces 312 (see FIG. 41) and a third piece 313 (which connects the ends of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312). (see FIG. 41). Furthermore, the engagement member 16310 in the sixteenth embodiment can be slid and displaced by a finger inserted into a second opening 301d formed in the back case 300 from the back side.

The first piece 16311 has an end on the opposite side (arrow R direction side) to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected, and the engaged part 332 of the fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41), and protrudes outward on both sides in the up and down direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 311 (see FIG. 41). 41), and a recessed portion 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 16311 (arrow LR direction) from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316. Be prepared.

As shown in FIG. 160(b), when the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 16310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, the other side of the first piece 16311 (the side in the direction of arrow L) An end portion of the second opening portion 301d is arranged horizontally outward from the opening of the second opening portion 301d. Therefore, when the operator operates the engaging member 16310 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 16310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L), the operator inserts the engaging member 16310 through the second opening 301d of the rear case 300. It is possible to make it difficult to displace the engaging member 16310 in the direction of releasing the engagement between the engaging member 16310 and the fixing member 320 with a finger. As a result, a worker attempting to replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 illegally operates the engagement member 16310 from the back side of the rear case 300 and removes the fixing member 320 from the rear case 300. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, a rear case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the operator 315 of the engaging member 310 protrudes from the second opening 301d of the back case 300. However, in the seventeenth embodiment, the second opening 301d of the back case 17300 An operator 315 protruding from the rear case is covered by a portion of the rear case at a predetermined position. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

161(a) is a rear view of the rear case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 161(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 17300 taken along the line CLXIb-CLXIb in FIG. 161(a).

As shown in FIG. 161, a rear case 17300 according to the seventeenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 17301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands upright from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 17301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 17301 and 302. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 17301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

The rear case 17300 also has a protrusion 301b protruding from two places on the front side of the bottom wall 17301, a first opening 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. It includes a second opening 301d that opens at opposing positions, and a covering part 17301e that covers the back surface of the second opening 301d on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side).

The covering portion 17301e is erected from the end of the second opening 301d on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side) toward the back side (arrow B direction side). Furthermore, the covered portion 17301e includes a bent portion 17301e1 whose standing tip portion is bent toward the inside of the second opening 301d in rear view. As a result, the covered portion 17301e is formed into a box shape that is open on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side) and the opposite side (arrow L direction side).

Further, the standing distance of the covered portion 17301e (distance from the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301c to the front surface of the bent portion 17301e1) is set to be larger than the protrusion dimension of the operator 315 that protrudes from the bottom wall portion 17301c. . Further, in the covered portion 17301e, the dimension of the bent portion 17301e1 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) when viewed from the rear is set to be larger than the dimension of the operator 315 in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear.

As a result, when the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, the operator 315 is inside the covered portion 17301e, as shown in FIG. 161(b). will be placed in Therefore, when the operator operates the engaging member 310 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L), the operator grasps the operator 315 from the back side of the back case 17300. It can be made difficult. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the engagement member 310 from being displaced in the direction in which the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released (in the direction of arrow L). As a result, a worker (player) attempting to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 operates the engaging member 310 from the back side of the back case 17300 and moves the fixing member 320 from the back side. Removal from the case 17300 can be suppressed.

Next, a rear case 18300 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164. In the first embodiment, the engagement member 310 is slid in the linear direction (arrow LR direction), but the engagement member 18310 in the 18th embodiment is rotationally displaced. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163, the configuration of the back case 18300 and the operation of the engagement member 18310 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. 162(a) and 163(a) are front views of a rear case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 162(b) and 163(b) are rear views of the rear case 18300. Note that FIGS. 162(a) and 162(b) illustrate a state in which the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged, and in FIGS. 163(a) and 163(b), the engaging member 18310 A state in which the engagement with the fixing member 18320 is released is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the rear case 18300 in the 18th embodiment has a bottom wall portion 18301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and is erected toward the front from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 18301. An outer wall portion 18302 is provided, and each wall portion 18301, 18302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open. In addition, the rear case 18300 has an engaging member 18310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) of the bottom wall portion 18301, and an engagement member 18310 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 18300. and a fixing member 18320 for fixing the board box 100 (main controller 110).

The bottom wall portion 18301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is said that The bottom wall portion 18301 also includes a first opening 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320, and a protruding portion located below the first opening 18301c (in the direction of arrow D) and protruding toward the front side. 18301b.

The first opening 18301c is an opening for inserting an engaged portion 18332 of a fixing member 18320, which will be described later, and is formed to have a larger shape than the engaged portion 18332 when viewed from the front. As a result, after the accessory device (rotation unit 700) is arranged inside the back case 18300, the engaging portion of the fixing member 18320 can be placed on the front side of the back case 18300 from the back side of the back case 18300. can.

The protruding portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports an engaging member 18310, which will be described later, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the front of the bottom wall portion 18301. Further, a hole into which a screw is screwed is provided in the protruding end surface of the protruding portion 18301b. Thereby, by screwing the screw into the protrusion 18301b while the engagement member 18310 is disposed on the back case 18300, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 18310 from slipping out from the protrusion 18301b.

The outer wall portion 18302 includes an opening 18302a that opens in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) on the right side (arrow R direction side) when viewed from the front. The opening 18302a is formed on the rotation locus of an engagement member 18310, which will be described later. Thereby, after the engaging member 18310 is disposed inside the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310 can be made to protrude outside the rear case 18300 by rotating the engaging member 18310.

The fixing member 18320 includes an intervening member 18330 that engages with an engaging member 18310, which will be described later, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the intervening member 18330.

The intervening member 18330 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and has a locking part 18331 that protrudes from the other side (arrow L direction side) and a rear case from the one side (arrow R direction side). 300 side and formed in a frame shape, an insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39(b)) opening in a circular shape on the box-shaped bottom surface (side surface in the direction of arrow B), and a rear surface. It mainly includes a protrusion 334 that protrudes from.

The locking portion 18331 has an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 18301, and an L-shaped cross section is inserted into the opening from the periphery of the first opening 18301c. A protruding wall 18301c1 provided in a protruding manner is inserted into the bottom wall portion 18301 to be engaged with the bottom wall portion 18301.

As a result, when installing the intervening member 18330 (fixing member 18320) on the back case 18300, the protruding wall 18301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 18331 of the intervening member 18330, and the other side of the intervening member 18330 (arrow L direction side) can be locked to the rear case 18300.

The engaged portion 18332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310, and has a dimension in which the protruding dimension toward the back case 18300 side (arrow F direction side) exceeds the engaging member 18310 disposed on the back case 18300. The distance from the inner surface of the front side of the enclosed space (arrow F direction side) to the front of the bottom wall 18301 is larger than the distance from the front of the engagement member 18310 to the front of the bottom wall 18301. Set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 and the engaging member 18310 are arranged at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The engaging member 18310 is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a second piece 18312 that is pivotally supported by the protrusion 18301b of the rear case 18300, and is bent from one end of the second piece 18312. and a first piece 18311 formed by.

The second piece 18312 is provided with a shaft support hole 18312a that is circularly opened in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. The shaft support hole 18312a is a hole into which the protruding portion 18301b of the back case 18300 described above is inserted, so that the engagement member 18310 can be disposed inside the back case 18300 in a state where it is supported pivotally.

The first piece 18311 extends in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a described above. Thereby, the displacement area of the first piece 18311 can be minimized when the engagement member 18310 is rotated about the axis of the support hole 18312a. Further, the first piece 18311 has an engaging portion 18316 that protrudes from the shaft support hole 18312a to both sides in the radial direction at the end opposite to the connecting side with the second piece 18312, and the engaging portions 316 at the two locations. a recessed portion 18317 recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 18311 from a substantially intermediate position.

The two engaging portions 18316 have a substantially triangular outer shape when viewed from the front. Further, one of the two engaging portions 18316 is arranged so that the first piece 18311 is closer to the end opposite to the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting portion with the second piece 18312. It is formed in an outer shape that protrudes radially outward. The other of the two engaging parts 18316 has a diameter of the first piece 18311 that increases from the end opposite to the connecting part with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting part with the second piece 18312. It is formed in an outer shape that protrudes inward.

The recess 18317 is formed by notching in the thickness direction of the first piece 18311, and extends in the extending direction of the first piece 18311 from the end of the first piece 18311 opposite to the connection side with the second piece 18312. It is recessed along the direction toward the connection side with the second piece 18312. Therefore, the end of the first piece 18311 is divided into two. As a result, the end of the first piece 18311 opposite to the side connected to the second piece 18312 is more easily elastically deformed than the side connected to the second piece 18312, and the engaging member 18310 is connected to the fixing member 18320. It can be easily engaged.

Next, the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 163, the intervening member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 are fastened and assembled using screws inserted from the intervening member 18330 side before engaging with the engaging member 18310.

Further, as described above, the engaging member 18310 is disposed in a state where it is pivotally supported by the protruding portion 18301b of the back case 18300, and the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is connected to the rear case 18300. It is arranged so as to protrude from the opening 18302a.

Note that the center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 that is pivotally supported by the back case 18300 is located closer to the opening 18302a than the protrusion 18301b of the back case 18300, and when no external force is applied, the center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 is As a result, a force is applied to the engagement member 18310 that rotates the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 in a direction that projects from the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300. As a result, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 is made to protrude outside the back case 18300, and the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixation member 18320 is This will prevent you from forgetting to do so.

When the interposed member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixed member 18320) are in a fastened state, a protruding wall 18301c1 protruding from the periphery of the first opening 18301c is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the interposed member 18330. , the left side of the fixing member 18320 in front view (arrow L direction side) is locked to the rear case 18300. In this case, the engaged portion 18332 of the fixed member 18320 is inserted inside the first opening 18301c, and the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 faces the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310. It is placed in a position where

Next, the operator who engages the engaging member 18310 with the fixing member 18320 moves the engaging member 18310 (the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312) protruding from the opening 18302a of the back case 18300 to the back side. By pushing it inside the case 18300 (in the direction of arrow R1) (see FIG. 163), the engaging member 18310 is rotated around the protrusion 18301b.

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 162, the tip of the engaging member 18310 can be inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 18332. In this case, the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging parts 18316 is set to be larger than the vertical opening dimension of the internal space of the engaged part 18332, but the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 Since the first piece 18311 is easily elastically deformed, the end of the first piece 18311 is elastically deformed inside the recess 18317, and the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging parts 18316 is reduced. The end of the first piece 18311 can be inserted inside the engaged part 18332 by making it smaller than the vertical opening dimension of the internal space of the engaging part 18332.

Further, since the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted inside the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310 is engaged in the engaged state. It is possible to prevent the mating member 18310 from being operated from the outside of the back case 18300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board due to unauthorized manipulation of the engaging member 18310.

Next, the release of the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 163(a), the first opening 18301c has a substantially L-shaped opening when viewed from the front, and the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320. can be operated from the back side (direction of arrow B) of the back case 1300 through the first opening 18301c.

Therefore, by elastically deforming the outer portion of the recessed portion 18317 of the engaging member 18310 toward the recessed side of the recessed portion 18317 using a special tool or the like, the engagement between the engaging portion 18316 of the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is improved. The connection is canceled. With this engagement released, the engaging member 18310 is displaced in the direction (in the direction of arrow L) to be pulled out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 18332, and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is restored. , the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 can be released.

Note that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engagement member 18310 and the first opening 18301c is preferably formed as small as possible. According to this, the finger of the person removing the fixing member 18320 from the back case 300 cannot be inserted, and a special tool can be inserted. As a result, only a worker with a dedicated tool can replace the board box 100 (main controller 110), and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced with an unauthorized one.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a case where the engaging member 18310 forgets to engage the fixing member 18320 will be described. 164(a) is a schematic top view of the game board 13, and FIG. 164(b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. Note that FIGS. 164(a) and 164(b) illustrate a state in which the engaging member 18310 has forgotten to engage with the engaged portion 18332. Further, FIGS. 164(a) and 164(b) illustrate a state in which an upper piece of the outer frame 11, which is formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front, is removed.

As described above, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 can be caused to protrude to the outside of the back case 18300 due to gravity. In this case, the distance dimension LR1 from the end of the engaging member 18310 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the game board 13 to the right-hand side (arrow R direction side) end of the back case 18300 (FIG. 164(a) (see FIG. 164(b)) is set larger than the inner left-right dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164(b)) in the left-right direction of the outer frame 11 in which the game board 13 is arranged. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixed member 18320 are not engaged and the game board 13 is inserted inside the outer frame 11, the back side of the engaging member 18310 hits the front of the outer frame 11. can be brought into contact. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixed member 18320 are not engaged, the game board 13 is prevented from being disposed on the outer frame 11, and the engaging member 18310 and the fixed member 18320 are not engaged with each other. Forgetting can be suppressed.

Next, an engaging member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. In the 18th embodiment, the engagement member 18310 is arranged inside the outer frame 11 to prevent the engagement member 18310 from being tampered with, but in the 19th embodiment, the release direction of the engagement member 19310 is The rotation of the engagement member 18310 is restricted to prevent unauthorized manipulation of the engagement member 18310. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective front view of the engagement member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment. 166(a) is a front view of the rear case 18300, and FIG. 166(b) is a sectional view of the one-way 19350 taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. 165.

As shown in FIG. 165, the engagement member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a second piece 19312 having a rotation axis relative to the back case 19300, and a second piece 19312 having a rotation axis relative to the rear case 19300. 19312 and a first piece 18311 formed by bending from one end.

The second piece 19312 includes a fitting hole 19312b that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. The fitting hole 19312b is a hole into which a one-way 19350 described later is fitted, and is formed to have approximately the same inner diameter as the outer ring 19351 of the one-way 19350.

The one-way 19350 includes an inner ring 19352 having a cam surface formed on its outer peripheral surface, an outer ring 19351 formed in an annular shape surrounding the outside of the inner ring 19352, and a plurality of rings arranged between the outer ring 19351 and the inner ring 19352. It includes a spring 19353 and a roller 19354 (see FIG. 166(b)), and when the inner ring 19352 tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the outer ring 19351, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 19354 increases, creating resistance. This is a cam-type clutch that transmits power to the outer ring, and when the inner ring rotates in the other direction with respect to the outer ring 19351, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 10354 decreases and slips, cutting off the power transmission. Note that a detailed explanation of the one-way 19350 will be given later.

Further, an operator 19360 is inserted into the center of the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350. The operator 19360 includes an operating section 19361 disposed on the back side (direction of arrow B) of the rear case 19300, and an insertion section 19362 protruding from the front side of the operating section 19361 (direction of arrow F). Prepare for the Lord.

The operation part 19361 is a part where the operator operates the operator 19360 from the back side of the back case 19300, and is formed in a circular shape, and its outer shape is larger than the opening into which the insertion part 19362 described later is inserted. . Thereby, when the operator 19360 is disposed from the back side of the back case 19300, the operating section 19361 can be prevented from slipping out to the front side of the back case 19300 (in the direction of arrow F).

The insertion portion 19362 is formed into a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operating portion 19361, and protrudes toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). In addition, the insertion portion 19362 includes a protruding wall 19362a that protrudes in the radial direction on its outer peripheral surface.

The protruding wall 19362a is an engagement portion that prevents the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 from idling with respect to the insertion portion 19362, and is inserted into a recess 19352a formed in the inner ring 19352. This can prevent the rotational force acting on the operator 19360 from not being transmitted to the inner ring 19352.

Further, a concave portion having a circular shape when viewed from the front is formed on the protruding distal end surface of the insertion portion 19362, and by screwing a screw into the concave portion from the front side toward the back side, the one-way 19350 A control element 19360 can be connected to.

Next, the arrangement of the rear case 19300 and the engaging member 19310 will be described with reference to FIG. 166. The back case 19300 includes a bottom wall portion 19301 that is generally rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands up from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 19301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open. In addition, the rear case 19300 has an engaging member 19310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 19301, and an engaging member 19310 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 19300. and a fixing member 18320 for fixing the board box 100 (main controller 110).

The bottom wall portion 19301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 19301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is said that In addition, the bottom wall portion 19301 has a first opening 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320, and a first opening 18301c located below the first opening 18301c (in the direction of arrow D) and opening in the front-rear direction and inside. and an opening (not shown) into which the insertion portion 19362 of the operator 19360 described above is inserted.

The above-mentioned engaging member 19310 is constructed by disposing the engaging member 19310 with the one-way 19350 inside the fitting hole 19312b on the front side of the bottom wall 10301, and then inserting the operator 19360 from the back side of the back case 19300. The insertion portion 19362 of the one-way 19350 is inserted into the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 through the opening of the back case 19300, thereby disposing it on the bottom wall portion 19301.

Next, the operation of the one-way 19350 will be explained. As described above, the one-way 19350 is switched between allowing and blocking transmission of power to the outer ring 19351 in one direction and the other direction of rotation of the inner ring 19352.

First, a case will be described in which power from the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring. As shown in FIG. 166(b), when the inner ring 19352 is rotated in one direction (in the direction of arrow LK (see FIG. 166(b)), there is a gap between the cam surface of the inner ring 19352 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351. The roller 19354 is pinched, and the contact of the roller 19354 acts as resistance, so that the power of the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring 19351. In this case, one rotational direction is set in a direction in which the engaging member 19310 is engaged with the fixed member 18320.

Next, a case where the power to the inner ring 19352 is cut off will be described. When the inner ring 19352 is rotated in the other direction (arrow RK direction (see FIG. 166(b)), the roller 19354 is displaced radially inward of the inner ring 19352 due to the resistance of contact with the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351. This reduces the contact surface pressure between the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351 and the roller 19354, causing the roller 19354 to slide relative to the outer ring 19351, cutting off power transmission. In this case, the other direction of rotation is set in a direction in which the engagement member 19310 is disengaged from the fixed member 18320.

Thereby, with the engaging member 19310 disposed on the back case 19300, the operator 19360 can be rotated to engage the engaging member 19310 with the fixing member 18320. Furthermore, rotation of the operator 19360 to release the engagement between the engagement member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 from the engaged state of the engagement member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board due to unauthorized manipulation of the engaging member 19310 (operator 19360).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, an engaging member 20310 in the twentieth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the movement of the engagement member 310 is regulated by a screw inserted into the rear base 720 of the rotation unit 700. However, in the twentieth embodiment, the engagement member 20310 is When engaged with , movement of the engaging member 20310 is regulated by being engaged with an engaging portion 20724a formed on the back base 20720 of the rotation unit 20700. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the engagement member 20310 and rotation unit 20700 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the back case 20300 and rotation unit 20700 in the twentieth embodiment. 168(a) is a front view of the engagement member 20310, and FIG. 168(b) is a rear view of the rotation unit 20700 and the engagement member 20310.

Note that, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 20300 in the 20th embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a wall extending from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. An opening 301a (see FIG. 5), which is rectangular in front view, is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible.

In addition, the rear case 20300 in the 20th embodiment has an engaging member 20310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 301, and the rear case 20300. It mainly includes a fixing member 320 that is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board box 100 (main controller 110). Further, in the rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment, a rotation unit 20700 is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the engagement member 20310 disposed on the front side (direction side of arrow F) of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment has a crank-like shape when viewed from the front. The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 extend in directions parallel to each other, and the ends of the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are connected to the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312. 20312, and a third piece 313 connected in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of 20312.

The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are each formed with a sliding groove 314 which is an elongated hole that is long in the direction in which the engaging member 20310 extends. It is possible to slide in the extending direction (arrow LR direction).

Further, the second piece 20312 includes a recess 20312c recessed in a side surface parallel to the sliding direction of the engagement member 20310. The recess 20312c is a recess into which a tip of an engaging portion 20724a of a rear base 20720 of a rotation unit 20700, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the engaging portion 20724a.

To explain in detail, the recessed portion 20312c has a dimension SH1 (see FIG. 168(a)) from the connecting side of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313 to the end on the opposite side (arrow L direction side). It is set to be approximately the same as the dimension SH2 (see FIG. 168(b)) that allows the protruding portion 301b to slide inside the sliding groove 314 of 20310. Further, the recessed portion 20312c is recessed into a triangular shape with a right angle when viewed from the front, and the right-angled portion is set on the side where the second piece 20312 is connected to the third piece 313 (the side in the direction of arrow R).

The rotation unit 20700 has a rectangular rear base 20720 disposed on the right side (in the direction of arrow R) of the lower part of the opening 301a of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 20300, and a front surface of the rear base 20720. A rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) disposed on the side (in the direction of arrow F), and rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via a light-transmissive center frame 86 disposed on the game board 13. can be visually recognized by the player.

The back base 20720 is a plate member that connects the back side of the ball holder 710 and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the decoration unit 750, and is arranged on the back side of the ball holder 710 and the decoration unit 750. Further, the back base 20720 includes an upright wall 20724 erected from the back.

The standing wall 20724 extends to surround the outer edge of the engagement member 20310 disposed on the back case 20300. Further, the standing wall 20724 includes an engaging portion 20724a that is formed at a position facing the recess 20312c of the engaging member 20310, and whose tip is inserted into the inside of the recess 20312c.

The engaging portion 20724a protrudes from the standing wall 20724 in the direction in which the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixed member 320 (the direction of the arrow R), and is provided in the standing manner in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. It is formed separated from the wall 20724 by a predetermined gap. This makes it possible to reduce the rigidity of the engaging portion 20724a and make it easier to elastically deform the engaging portion 20724a. Moreover, an area in which the engaging portion 20724a can be elastically deformed can be secured by the gap between the standing wall 20724 and the engaging portion 20724a.

Furthermore, the engaging portion 20724a has a bent portion 20724a1 bent toward the engaging member 20310 at the protruding tip, and the bent portion 20724a1 has a triangular shape in front view that is approximately the same shape as the recessed portion 20312c described above. be done. As a result, before the engagement member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the bent portion 20724a1 is arranged inside the recess 20312c of the engagement member 20310. Therefore, the engagement member 20310 can be made difficult to slide in the direction of displacement (arrow LR direction) (see FIG. 168(b)).

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the engagement member 20310 from vibrating with respect to the back case 20300 due to force such as vibration or shaking, and moving in the direction of engagement with the fixing member 320 (arrow R direction). Therefore, before the fixing member 320 is disposed on the rear case 20300, the position of the engaging member 20310 is displaced, and when the fixing member 320 is disposed on the rear case 20300, the engaged portion of the fixing member 320 332 can be prevented from coming into contact with the engagement member 20310. In other words, when disposing the fixing member 320 on the back case 20300, the engaging member 20310 is located within the displacement region when the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 167) of the fixing member 320 is disposed. can be suppressed. As a result, there is no need to operate the engaging member 20310 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 20310 from the fixing member 320, so that workability when engaging the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 can be improved. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the engagement member 20310 and rotation unit 20700 in a state where the engagement member 20310 and the fixed member 320 are engaged will be described. 169(a) is a rear view of the rotation unit 20700 and the engaging member 20310, and FIG. 169(b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. Note that FIGS. 169(a) and 169(b) illustrate a state in which the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 20320 are engaged. Further, in FIG. 169(b), the outlines of a part of the engaging member 20310 and the standing wall 20724 are illustrated with chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 169, when the operator 315 is operated from the back side of the back case 20300 (arrow B direction side), the engagement member 20310 is moved to the left side (arrow L in front view) with respect to the bottom wall 301 of the back case 20300. When the engagement member 20310 is disposed on the inside of the recess 20312c of the engagement member 20310, when the engagement member 20310 is displaced to the right (arrow R direction) with respect to the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 20300. The bent portion 20724a1 is pushed out into the recess 20312c by the inclined surface of the recess 20312c.

Here, as described above, the recess 20312c has a distance SH1 from the connecting side of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313 to the end on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) (see FIG. 168(a)). is set to be approximately the same as the dimension SH2 (see FIG. 168(b)) in which the protruding portion 301b can slide inside the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 20310, so that the engaging member 20310 When the second piece 20312 of the engaging member 20310 is moved to the position where it engages with the third piece 313, the end of the second piece 20312 on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) connects the bent portion 20724a1 with the engaging member. It is arranged at a position adjacent to 20310 in the displacement direction (arrow LR direction). This can prevent the engaging member 20310 from being incorrectly displaced in the direction of disengaging the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L).

Note that, similarly to the first embodiment, the engaging member 20310 is connected to the fixing member 320 of the engaging member 20310 by the engaging portion 316 catching (engaging) with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320. Displacement in the direction of releasing the engagement is restricted. However, since the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is inserted through the first opening 301c of the back case 300, the engagement between the engaged portion 332 and the engaging portion 316 is through the first opening 301c. There was a risk that it would be illegally terminated.

On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the displacement of the engagement member 20310 in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member 320 is opposite to the direction of the engagement portion 316 of the engagement member 20310 that engages with the fixed member 320. Since the side end can be brought into contact with the bent portion 20724a1 and restricted, an unauthorized object may be inserted through the first opening 301c and the engagement between the end of the engagement member 20310 and the bent portion 20724a1 is released. It is possible to prevent this from happening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 being replaced with an incorrect board. .

Note that the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 20310 are connected by removing the rotation unit 20700 disposed inside the back case 20300 (bottom wall portion 301) from the back case 20300, and then removing the end portion and the bent portion of the engaging member 20310. After disengaging from the engagement member 20724a1, the end of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 20310 is elastically deformed and the end of the engagement member 20310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, thereby separating both. The engagement can be released.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 20300, it is necessary to remove the rotation unit 20700 from the front side of the rear case 20300, so that the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is not illegally released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an incorrect board.

Furthermore, as described above, since the engaging member 20310 is bent into a crank shape when viewed from the front, an illegal object such as a wire or the like inserted from the first piece 311 side can be inserted into the second piece in a straight line. It is possible to restrict feeding to the end of the piece 20312. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal object inserted from the first piece 311 side from being accurately sent to the engagement portion between the second piece 20312 and the bent portion 20724a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 being replaced with an incorrect board. .

Next, the rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. In the first embodiment, the movement of the engagement member 310 is regulated by a screw inserted into the rear base 720 of the rotation unit 700, but in the twenty-first embodiment, the screw inserted into the rear base 21720 of the rotation unit 21700 The movement of the engagement member 310 is regulated by inserting the first piece 311 into the formed insertion portion 21724b. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the engagement member 310 and rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case 300 and rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment. 171(a) is a rear view of the rotation unit 21700 and the engagement member 310, and FIG. 171(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 21700 taken along the line CLXXIb-CLXXIb in FIG. 171(a).

Note that, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 21300 in the 21st embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a wall extending from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

In addition, the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment has an engaging member 310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear case 21300. It mainly includes a fixing member 320 that is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board box 100 (main controller 110). Further, in the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment, a rotation unit 21700 is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the rotation unit 21700 in the 21st embodiment is arranged on the right side (the side in the direction of arrow R) below the opening 301a (the side in the direction of arrow D) of the bottom wall 301 of the back case 300. ), and a rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) disposed on the front side of the rear base 21720, and a light beam disposed on the game board 13. The player can visually recognize the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800 through the transparent center frame 86.

The back base 21720 is a plate member that connects the back side of the ball holder 710 and the back side of the decoration unit 750, and is arranged on the back side of the ball holder 710 and the decoration unit 750. Further, the back base 21720 includes an upright wall 21724 erected on the back thereof.

The standing wall 21724 extends to surround the outer edge of the engagement member 310 disposed on the back case 300. Further, the standing wall 21724 is arranged in a state in which the engagement member 310 is located at the left end (in the direction of arrow L) with respect to the rear case 300 (a state in which the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released). ) includes an insertion portion 21724b that protrudes toward the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 (in the direction of arrow L).

The insertion portion 21724b extends from the standing wall 21724 in a direction parallel to the direction of displacement of the engagement member 310 (arrow LR direction), and is connected to the engagement member 310 in a state engaged with the fixing member 320. The dimensions are set to overlap in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow UB). Further, a bent portion 21724b1 that is bent toward the back side (toward the engaging member 310 side) is formed at the tip of the insertion portion 21724b, and the bent tip of the bent portion 21742b1 is bent in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 (arrow F- B direction), the length is set to overlap with the engaging member 310.

Furthermore, the width of the insertion portion 21742b in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD) is set to be smaller than the width of the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 in the vertical direction. Therefore, in the insertion portion 21724b, the bent portion 21724b1 is inserted into the recess 317 when the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320. This can suppress elastic deformation of the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 toward the inner side of the recess 317 from the state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 being replaced with an incorrect board. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173, the operation of the insertion portion 21724b when engaging the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320 will be described. 172(a) and 173(a) are rear views of the rotation unit 21700 and the engagement member 310. 172(b) and 173(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rear case 300 and the rotation unit 21700. Note that FIGS. 172(a) and 172(b) illustrate a state in which the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged, and FIGS. 173(a) and 173(b) illustrate A state in which the mating member 310 is being engaged with the fixing member 320 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the engagement member 310 is in a state where the engagement with the fixed member 320 is released, and the end of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 is connected to the fixed member 320. When inserted into the internal space of the portion 332 , the end portion of the first piece 311 is elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 317 . As a result, the width of the recess 317 in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD) is made smaller than the width of the insertion portion 21724b in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, when the engaging part 316 is located in the internal space of the engaged part 332 (in the case of the position shown in FIG. 173(a)), the end of the first piece 311 touches the protruding tip of the insertion part 21724b. placed in a position that exceeds In other words, the length dimension of the engaging portion 316 in the left-right direction is set larger than the opposing dimension from the protruding tip of the insertion portion 21724b to the end of the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.

Therefore, when the engaging part 316 is pushed out from the internal space of the engaged part 332, the end of the engaging member 310 on the first piece 311 side can be brought into contact with the bent part 21724b1 of the insertion part 21724b. . In this case, the tip of the insertion portion 21724b is pushed out toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) along the inclined surface of the bent portion 21724b1. Thereby, the engaging member 310 can be displaced to a position where it engages with the fixing member 320.

As shown in FIG. 171, when the engaging part 316 is pulled out of the internal space of the engaged part 332, as described above, the width of the recessed part 317 in the vertical direction of the first piece 311 Also, since the vertical width dimension of the insertion portion 21724b is increased, the bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside the recessed portion 317.

Therefore, as described above, the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 can be prevented from being elastically deformed to the inner side of the recess 317. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 being replaced with an incorrect board. .

The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are constructed by removing the rotating unit 21700 disposed inside the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) from the back case 21300, and then attaching the end of the engaging member 310 and the back case. 20300, the end portion of the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is elastically deformed and the end portion of the engaging member 310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, thereby separating both. The engagement can be released.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300, it is necessary to remove the rotation unit 21700 from the front side of the back case 21300. It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being illegally released from the back side and replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320, but in the 22nd embodiment, the engaging member 22310 is provided with a recess. A bent portion 22332a1 formed on the fixing member 22320 is engaged with the recessed portion 22311a. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The configurations of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176(a). FIG. 174 is a perspective front view of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. 175(a) and 175(b) are front views of the rear case 22300. FIG. 176(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 22300 taken along the line CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa in FIG. 175(b). Note that FIG. 175(a) shows a state before the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged, and FIG. 175(b) shows a state in which the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged. is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 174 to 176(a), the back case 22300 in the twenty-second embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is generally rectangular in front view, and a bottom wall portion 301 that extends from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall part 302 that stands upright, and is formed into a box shape with one side open by the respective wall parts 301 and 302. The rear case 22300 also includes an engaging member 22310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 301 and an engagement member 22310 disposed on the rear side of the bottom wall 301. A fixing member 22320 is provided to fix the board box 100 (main controller 110).

The engaging member 22310 has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and includes a first piece 22311 and a second piece 312 extending in parallel directions, and the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312. A third piece 313 connects the ends of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction thereof.

Further, the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 are each formed with a sliding groove 314 which is an elongated hole that is long in the direction in which the engaging member 22310 extends. The piece 312 is allowed to slide in the extending direction (arrow LR direction).

The first piece 22311 includes a recess 22311a that is recessed toward the back side (arrow B direction) on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the end opposite to the side to which the third piece 313 is connected. .

The recessed portion 22311a is a portion into which a bent portion 22332a1 formed on the fixing member 22320, which will be described later, is inserted to engage the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. It is formed at a position opposite to 22332a of the fixing member 22320 when the end of the piece 22311 on one side (arrow R direction side) is accommodated in the internal space of the engaged portion 22332 of the fixing member 22320.

Further, the internal shape of the recessed portion 22311a is formed in a substantially right triangular cross section, and the right-angled portion is set on the end side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311, and the recessed bottom surface is located on the It is formed as an inclined surface that becomes deeper toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B) toward the end side of one piece 22311.

The fixing member 22320 includes an intervening member 22330 that engages with the above-mentioned engaging member 22310, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the back side of the intervening member 22330.

The interposed member 22330 is formed in a box shape with an open front side (arrow F direction side), and has a locking part 331 protruding from one side (arrow R direction side) and the other side (arrow L direction side). An engaged portion 22332 formed in a frame shape and protruding from the side surface to the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 22300, and a box-shaped bottom surface (side surface in the arrow B direction side) It mainly includes an insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39(b)) that opens in a circular shape, and a protrusion 334 that protrudes from the back surface.

The engaged portion 22332 is a portion into which the end of the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 on one side (arrow R direction side) is inserted into the enclosed internal space, and the inner edge shape is the first It is set slightly larger than the outer shape of the piece 22311. Further, the engaged portion 22332 is formed in a frame shape, and extends from one side of the front side (arrow F direction side) in the direction of insertion of the engaging member 22310 into the engaged portion 22332 (arrow R direction side). A protruding portion 22332a is provided.

The protrusion 22332a has a bent portion 22332a1 bent toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) at the end of the tip, and when the bent portion 22332a1 is inserted into the recessed portion 22311a of the engagement member 22310 described above, the protrusion 22332a is engaged. The mating member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be engaged. That is, the bent portion 22332a1 is formed at a position opposite to the recessed portion 22311a when the engaging member 22310 is inserted into the engaged portion 22332.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 176(a), the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is formed on the front side of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 22300 with the engaging member 22310 interposed therebetween. be done. Therefore, since the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be separated from the first opening 301c formed in the bottom wall portion 301, unauthorized objects such as wires or the like can be separated from the first opening 301c. can be prevented from being inserted and the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 being illegally released.

Furthermore, since the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 can be disposed between the bottom wall part 301 and the engaging parts of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, the first piece 22311 formed on the bottom wall part 301 It is possible to prevent wires, wires, etc. that have been illegally inserted through the openings such as the first opening 301c from reaching the engaging portions of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in a straight line. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member (such as a wire or the like) from being inserted through the opening of the bottom wall portion 301 and illegally releasing the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the protrusion 22332a is provided to protrude in the insertion direction of the engagement member 22310 into the internal space of the engaged portion 22332. Therefore, the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is set on the front side of the fixing member 22320. As a result, when an unauthorized member such as a wire or the like is inserted from the first opening 301c of the bottom wall portion 301, the insertion direction of the unauthorized member reaching the engagement portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is determined. It can be tilted obliquely to the front of the bottom wall portion 301. This can make it difficult for the force in the direction of disengaging the engagement portion between the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 to be transmitted from the tip of the incorrect member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of an unauthorized member through the first opening 301c of the bottom wall portion 301 and the unauthorized release of the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176(b), an engaging member 23310 and a fixing member 23320 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the protrusion 22332a that engages the engaging member 22310 is provided protrudingly in the insertion direction of the engaging member 22310 into the engaged portion 22332, but in the twenty-third embodiment, A protrusion 23332a is provided to protrude in a direction opposite to the insertion direction of the engaged portion 23332 of the engagement member 23310. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 176(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment. Note that the cross-sectional view in FIG. 176(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view in FIG. 176(a). Furthermore, as described above, the 23rd embodiment differs from the 22nd embodiment only in the engagement position of the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, so that the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 Since the other parts are the same as those of the twenty-second embodiment, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

The rear case 22300 in the 23rd embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 23301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands up from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 23301 toward the front. Each wall portion 23301, 302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a (see FIG. 5), which is rectangular in front view, is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible.

In addition, the rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment has an engaging member 23310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 23301, and the rear case 23300. It mainly includes a fixing member 23320 that is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board box 100 (main controller 110).

As shown in FIG. 176(b), in the twenty-third embodiment, the protrusion direction of the protrusion 23332a protruding from the engaged portion 23332 as described above is different from that of the protrusion 22332a of the twenty-second embodiment (see FIG. 176(a). ) is set in the opposite direction (arrow L direction), and a bent portion 23332a1 that bends toward the back side (arrow B direction side) is formed at the protruding tip of the protrusion 23332a.

In the engagement member 23310, a rectangular opening 23310b larger than the outer shape of the bent portion 23332a1 is formed at a position facing the bent portion 23332a1. As a result, when the engaging member 23310 is inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 23332 of the fixing member 23320, the bent portion 23332a1 is inserted inside the opening 23310b, and the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 are inserted. engaged.

Furthermore, a third opening 23301e is formed in the bottom wall portion 23301 of the rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment at a position facing the fixing member 23320. This third opening 23301e allows the operator to release the engagement between the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 from the back side of the bottom wall 23301. As a result, the work of removing the fixing member 23320 from the back case 23300 can be simplified.

Next, a rear case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178. In the eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the engagement between the fixing member 18320 and the engagement member 18310 is released when the fixing member 18320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 18301. However, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the fixing member 24320 When removing the engaging member 24310 from the bottom wall portion 24301, the portion of the engaging member 24310 inserted into the fixing member 24320 is cut. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 177(a) is a front view of the back case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177(b) is a sectional view of the back case 24300 taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177(a). FIG. 178 is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 24300 taken along the line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII in FIG. 177(b).

As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the rear case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 24301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a bottom wall portion 24301 that stands upright from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 24301 toward the front. The outer wall portion 302 is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the respective wall portions 24301 and 302. The rear case 24300 also has an engaging member 24310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 24301 and an engagement member 24310 disposed on the back side of the bottom wall 24301. A fixing member 24320 is provided to fix the board box 100 (main controller 110).

The bottom wall portion 24301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 24301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible. In addition, the bottom wall portion 24301 has a first opening 24301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 24320, and a first opening 24301c that is located on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the first opening 24301c and that is located in the front-rear direction (arrow F- An opening (not shown) that opens in the B direction) and into which an insertion section 24362 of an operator 24360 (described later) is inserted.

The engagement member 24310 mainly includes a second piece 24312 formed in a T-shape when viewed from the front, and a first piece 24311 bent from the end of the second piece 24312 and extending in an arc shape. . The second piece 24312 is provided with a through hole 24312d that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a connecting part of two orthogonal extending parts, and the distance from the through hole 24312d to the outside of the extended part of the second piece 24312 is They are set to be approximately the same.

The through hole 24312d is a portion into which an insertion portion 24362 of an operator 24360, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed into a circular shape that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the insertion portion 24362. As a result, when the operator 24360 is rotated, the engagement member 24310 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 24312d.

The first piece 24311 is formed in an arc shape centered on the through hole 24312d, and protrudes from each end of the second piece 24312 in one direction of rotation (left rotation in front view). Furthermore, each first piece 24311 has an engaging portion 24316 that protrudes on both sides in the radial direction centering on the axis of the through hole 24312d at the protruding tip, and a connecting side with the second piece 24312 from the protruding tip surface. A recessed portion 24317 is provided.

The engaging portion 24316 is a portion to be engaged with a fixing member 24320, which will be described later, and the concave portion 24317 elastically deforms the protruding tip portion (the portion where the engaging portion 24316 is formed) of the first piece 24311 to engage the fixing member 24320. It can be engaged with the engaged portion 24332 formed in the. Note that a detailed description of the shapes of the engaging portion 24316 and the recessed portion 24317 will be given later.

The operator 24360 is an operating member that transmits an operation from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301 to the engagement member 24310 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301. The operating section 24361 has a cylindrical shape, and an insertion section 24362 protrudes coaxially with the operating section 24361. The operating portion 24361 is formed on the bottom wall portion 24301, and has an outer diameter set to be larger than the opening through which the insertion portion 24362 is inserted. Thereby, the entire operation element 24360 can be prevented from being displaced toward the front side of the bottom wall portion 24301.

The insertion portion 24362 is a portion inserted into the through hole 24312d of the engagement member 24310 as described above, and thereby the rotational force input from the operation portion 24361 can be transmitted to the engagement member 24310.

The fixing member 24320 includes an intervening member 24330 that engages with the above-described engaging member 24310, and a shaft support member 340 that is disposed on the back side of the intervening member 24330.

The intervening member 24330 is formed into a box shape whose front side (arrow F direction side) is open. Furthermore, the intervening member 24330 includes a housing portion 24335 that projects from the front and is formed in a box shape with an open lower side (arrow D direction side). The housing portion 24335 is a portion into which the engaging portion of the engaging member 24310 (the tip portion of the first piece 24311) is inserted, and the open portion on the lower side accommodates the displacement of the first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 described above. placed on the trajectory. Thereby, the end of the first piece 24311 of the engagement member 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 by rotating the engagement member 24310.

Further, the housing portion 24335 has an internal space larger than the engagement portion of the engagement member 24310 at one location. Thereby, when the engagement member 24310 is cut as will be described later, the cut portion of the engagement member 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335. Note that in this embodiment, the size of the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 is set to be approximately three times that of the engaging portion of the engaging member 24310 (the tip portion of the first piece 24311). At least three or more engaging members 24310 can be accommodated in the space.

As shown in FIG. 178, the accommodating portion 24335 is opened at the lower side, and a stepped portion 24335a protrudes from the opening portion in a step-like manner. The engaging portion 24316 of is engaged. Thereby, when the engaging member 24310 is rotated, the distal end portion of the first piece 24311 can be inserted into the inside of the accommodating portion 24335, and the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24320 can be engaged with each other.

Further, in this case, the recess depth SH3 (see FIG. 178) of the recess 24317 is the distance from the end of the first piece 24311 accommodated in and engaged with the accommodating portion 24335 to the lower end of the accommodating portion 24335. It is set smaller than the dimension SH4. Therefore, the recessed portion 24317 formed in the engaged first piece 24311 is housed inside the housing portion 24335. This can prevent the end portion of the first piece 24311 from being elastically deformed and the engagement between the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24320 being released.

Therefore, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the fixing member 24320 can be removed from the bottom wall part 24301 by cutting the first piece 24311 that is inserted inside the housing part 24335 and protrudes from the housing part 24335. can.

In this case, the distance dimension SH5 (see FIG. 178) from the upper inner edge of the accommodating portion 24335 to the tip of the first piece 24311 is set larger than the distance dimension SH4 described above. As a result, the cut portion of the first piece 24311 can be moved above the accommodating part 24335, and the other first piece 24311 is inserted from the open side of the accommodating part 24335 (the side in the direction of arrow F) to form the stepped part 24335a. can be engaged with.

Therefore, the number of times the fixing member 24320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 is determined based on the number of remaining first pieces 24311 of the engagement member 24310 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the housing portion 24335. be able to. As a result, if the fixing member 24320 is illegally removed from the bottom wall 24301 and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 24320 is replaced with an incorrect board, the engaging member 24310 The number of remaining first pieces 24311 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335 allows the operator to recognize that the fixing member 24320 has been removed illegally.

In addition, as described above, the second piece 24312 of the engaging member 24310 is formed in a T-shape when viewed from the front, and by utilizing the region on the side where the first piece 24311 is not formed (the upper side of the T-shape), The first piece 24311 can be inserted into the fixing member 24320 by rotating the engaging member 24310. Further, when the first piece 24311 is cut, the engaging member 24310 can be rotated by using the cut area of the first piece 24311, and the next (other) first piece 24311 is attached to the fixing member 24320. can be inserted. Thereby, the order in which the first pieces 24311 are accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335 can be determined. Therefore, the operator can visually check the position of the uncut first piece 24311 and determine whether the fixing member 24320 has been illegally released. It is possible to prevent workers from overlooking traces of fraud compared to when workers count them.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the decorative member 154 of the general prize winning opening unit 150 is glued to the main body 151, but in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the decorative member 154 is glued to the front side of the base plate 60. be done. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. Moreover, in FIG. 179(b), a state in which the general winning a prize opening unit 25150 is disassembled from the base plate 60 is illustrated.

Note that the game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 25013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front; The center frame 86 is disposed in an opening formed in the center frame 86. In addition, the game board 25013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and in addition to many nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling the winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 25150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base plate 60.

As shown in FIG. 179, the general winning a prize unit 25150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is connected to the main body part 151 disposed along the front side of the base plate 60. , a first erected portion 152 erected from the end of the main body 151 , and a second erected portion erected from the front of the main body 141 and whose one end is connected to the first erected portion 152 . 153, a decorative member 25154 arranged on the back side of the main body part 151, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning holes 63 formed in the main body part 151.

The decorative member 25154 is formed into a plate shape from a light-transmitting material, and is decorated with a pattern or a letter (picture) that is connected to the decorative member 60c disposed on the front side of the base plate 60. Further, the outer edge of the decorative member 25154 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner edge of the recess 151b formed in the main body portion 151.

The decorative member 25154 also includes an adhesive tape 25154a attached to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) at the end of the back surface of the decorative member 25154. Thereby, the decorative member 25154 can be attached and disposed on the base plate 60. Therefore, when placing the decorative member 25154 on the base board 60, the operator can attach the decorative member 25154 to the front of the base board 60 while visually checking the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base board 60. Therefore, the decorative positions of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily aligned. As a result, the position of the decoration between the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is suppressed from shifting, and the player can use the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 as one decoration. It can be easily recognized.

Furthermore, since the decorative member 25154 is attached directly to the front of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c), the front-rear direction of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c is more The arrangement in the direction of the arrow FB can be made closer. As a result, when the player views the decorative member 25154 obliquely, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the decorations of the decorative members 25154 and 60c from increasing. As a result, the player can easily see the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 as one decoration.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the concave dimension X1 of the concave portion 151b of the main body portion 151 is set smaller than the width dimension X2 of the decorative member 25154 and the adhesive tape 25154a in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow F-B). be done. This prevents the front surface of the decorative member 25154 from coming into contact with the recessed bottom surface 151b2 of the recessed portion 151b when the main body portion 151 is disposed from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 25154. can.

Therefore, the back surface portion 151d forming the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recessed portion 151b can be brought into contact with the front surface of the base plate 60, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60. It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60 and making it difficult for the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 to be visually recognized.

Next, the game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 180. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body part 151 of the general winning opening unit 150, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body part 26151. The inclined surface 26151a is formed to have an arcuate cross section that bulges outward. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 180(a) and 180(b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 180(a) and 180(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. Furthermore, in FIG. 180(a), the game board 26013 is viewed from a higher position than usual (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity). The line of sight is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. 180(b), when the player views the game board 26013 from a normal position (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 26013 in the direction of gravity) The line of sight is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

Note that the game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 26013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front; The center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening formed in the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the game board 26013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling the winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 26150 is disposed in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 180, the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment includes a plate-shaped main body part 26151 along the front side of the base plate 60, and A decorative member 154 is provided on the back side of the main body portion 26151.

The main body portion 26151 is made of a transparent resin material, and allows the player to view decorations such as patterns, letters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side. In addition, the main body part 26151 has an inclined surface 26151a whose end part in a front view is inclined toward the back side and which bulges out in an arcuate cross-section, and a recessed part which is recessed from the back surface of the main body part 26151 toward the front side. 151b.

In the inclined surface 26151a, the inclination angle θ1 of the imaginary line IL1 connecting the connecting point with the plane on the front side of the main body part 26151 and the end on the rear side with respect to the front side of the base plate 60 is set to be smaller than 45 degrees. be done. As a result, the incident angle when light traveling horizontally through the main body 26151 is incident on the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is made larger than when the inclination angle θ1 is set larger than 45 degrees. . Therefore, when light is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151, the traveling direction of the light can be easily bent upward. Therefore, when a player views the general winning a prize unit 26150 from a higher position than the normal position with respect to the game board 26013, it is possible to easily view the connecting portion of the decorative members 154, 60c from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the position of the connecting portions of the decorative members 154, 60c in the front and back direction, so that the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 are different from each other. Together, they can be easily recognized as a decoration. Note that in this embodiment, the angle θ1 is set to 40 degrees.

Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 26151a is formed in an arcuate cross-sectional shape that bulges outward, the closer to the center of the main body 26151 (lower side in FIG. 180(a)), the more the main body 26151 is horizontally The angle of incidence when the light traveling to the outside of the main body portion 26151 is incident from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. Therefore, as it goes toward the center of the main body 26151 (lower side in FIG. 180(a)), the angle of incidence of light traveling horizontally through the main body 26151 when it enters the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a becomes larger. Ru.

Therefore, the player can move via the inclined surface 26151a below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180(a)), which passes through the intermediate position between the connection point with the plane on the front side of the main body part 26151 and the end on the back side. When the side decoration is visually recognized, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body portion 26151 can be easily brought closer to the direction (horizontal direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60.

Furthermore, the end of the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b is located on a horizontal line HR1 passing through an intermediate position between the connecting point with the front plane of the main body 26151 and the end on the back side. (See FIG. 180(a)) and is set on the back side of the inclined surface 26151a. As described above, when the player views the decoration below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180(a)) through the inclined surface 26151a, the angle of the player's line of sight passing through the main body portion 26151 can be easily moved closer to the front surface of the base plate 60 in a direction perpendicular to the front surface (horizontal direction).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180(a), even when the player visually recognizes the general winning a prize unit 26150 and the base plate 60 on the game board 26013 from a higher position than usual, the base plate 60 can be seen through the inclined surface 26151a. The decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180(b), when the player views the general winning slot unit 26150 and the base plate 60 on the game board 26013 from the normal height, the bulging shape of the inclined surface 26151a causes the main body Since the incident angle when the light traveling horizontally through the section 26151 enters the outside of the main body section 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a approximates a right angle, the light emitted to the outside of the main body section 26151 can be made difficult to refract. Therefore, the direction of the player's line of sight is prevented from being bent when passing through the inclined surface 26151a, and the positional deviation in the front-rear direction between the decorative member 154 of the general prize winning port unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is prevented. can be made difficult for players to recognize. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, a game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body part 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 has been described, but in the 27th embodiment, the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body part 26151. The inclined surface 27151a is formed to have an arcuate cross section that is recessed inside the main body portion 27151. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 181(a) and 181(b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. Note that FIGS. 181(a) and 181(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. Furthermore, in FIG. 181(a), the game board 27013 is viewed from a higher position than usual (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity). The line of sight is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. 181(b), the player views the game board 27013 from a normal position (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the approximately midpoint position of the game board 27013 in the direction of gravity). The line of sight is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

Note that the game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 27013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front; The center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening formed in the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the game board 27013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling the winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a general winning a prize opening unit 27150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 181, the general winning a prize opening unit 27150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment includes a plate-shaped main body part 27151 along the front side of the base plate 60; A decorative member 154 is provided on the back side of the main body portion 27151.

The main body portion 27151 is made of a transparent resin material, and allows the player to view decorations such as patterns, letters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side. In addition, the main body part 27151 has an inclined surface 27151a whose end part in a front view is inclined toward the back side, and which has an arcuate cross section and which is recessed toward the inside of the main body part 27151, and a sloped surface 27151a that extends from the back side of the main body part 27151 to the front side. It is formed mainly with a recessed portion 151b that is recessed toward the surface.

In the inclined surface 27151a, the inclination angle θ2 of the imaginary line IL2 connecting the connecting point with the plane on the front side of the main body part 27151 and the end on the rear side with respect to the front side of the base plate 60 is set to be larger than 45 degrees. be done. Thereby, the outward protrusion distance of the inclined surface 2751a can be reduced, and the external shape of the main body portion 27151 can be prevented from increasing.

Furthermore, as described above, since the inclined surface 27151a is recessed inside the main body portion 27151 and has an arcuate cross section, the player can visually recognize each decorative member 60c, 154 through the inclined surface 27151a. In this case, the recessed shape can widen the area in which the decorations of each decorative member 60c, 154 can be viewed through the inclined surface 27151a. That is, the arc-shaped cross section recessed toward the inside of the main body portion 27151 refracts the light incident on the inclined surface 27151a from each decorative member 60c, 154, and focuses the light toward the player's viewpoint. I can do it. As a result, the patterns and characters (pictures) visible through the inclined surface 27151a can be made smaller, making it difficult for the player to understand the connections between the decorative members 60c and 154. As a result, the displacement of each decorative member 60c, 154 can be made difficult for the player to notice, and the player's interest can be prevented from being lost.

Furthermore, the end of the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b is located on a horizontal line HR2 passing through an intermediate position between the connecting point with the front plane of the main body 27151 and the end on the back side. It is set higher than , and is set on the back side of the inclined surface 27151a.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 181(a), when the player visually recognizes the general winning a prize unit 27150 and the base plate 60 on the game board 26013 from a higher position than usual, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 The angle of incidence when light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body 26151 on the front side of the connecting portion is incident on the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. Therefore, light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the decorative member 154 is easily refracted toward the player's viewpoint, so that the player can move from the normal position with respect to the game board 27013. When the general winning a prize opening unit 27150 is viewed from a high position, the connecting portion of the decorative members 154, 60c can be easily viewed from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the position of the connecting portions of the decorative members 154, 60c in the front and rear direction, so that the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 are different from each other. Together, they can be easily recognized as a decoration.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181(b), when the player views the general winning slot unit 27150 and the base plate 60 on the game board 27013 from the normal height, the concave shape of the inclined surface 27151a allows the player to see the decoration. When light traveling horizontally through the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the member 154 enters the outside of the main body 27151 from the inclined surface 27151a, the incident angle approximates a right angle, so the light is emitted to the outside of the main body 27151. This makes it difficult for the light to be refracted. Therefore, the direction of the player's line of sight is suppressed from being bent when passing through the inclined surface 27151a, and the positional deviation in the front-rear direction between the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is prevented. can be made difficult for players to recognize. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182(a), a game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the inner surface of the end of the recess 151b recessed in the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 is parallel to the thickness direction of the main body 151. The inner surface of the end of the recess 28151b in the embodiment is inclined inward toward the recessed bottom surface 151b2. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182(a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. Note that FIG. 182(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. In addition, in FIG. 182(a), the line of sight when the player views the game board 28013 from a normal position (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 28013 in the direction of gravity) is indicated by a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

Note that the game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 28013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front; The center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening formed in the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the game board 28013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling the winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 28150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182(a), the general winning a prize opening unit 28150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment has a plate-shaped main body part 28151 along the front side of the base plate 60. and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 28151.

The main body portion 28151 is made of a transparent resin material, and allows the player to view decorations such as patterns, letters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side. Further, the main body portion 28151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back side, and a recessed portion 28151b recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 28151 toward the front side.

As described above, the inner surface 28151b3 of the recessed portion 28151b extends outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side) toward the end side of the main body portion 28151. It is formed sloping towards the top. In this case, the inclination angle θ3 of the inner surface 28151b3 in the cross section of the recessed portion 28151b with respect to the front of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 182(a)) is different from the inclination angle θ4 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body portion 151 with respect to the base plate 60 (see FIG. (see (a)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182(a), when a player visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the inclined surface 28151a of the main body part 28151, it bends as it passes through the main body part 28151 and is visually recognized by the player. The decorative position of the virtual image can be brought closer to the decorative position of the real image when the decorative member 60c is visually recognized without passing through the main body portion 28151. That is, the position of the decorative member 60c, which is refracted and visually recognized by the inclined surface 28151a of the main body portion 28151 and the inner surface 28151b3 of the recessed portion, can be positioned on the extension line of the player's line of sight. As a result, when the player views the decorative member 60c through the main body portion 28151, it is possible to suppress the positional shift of the decoration caused by the refraction of light, thereby preventing the player's interest from being lost.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182(b), a game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the inclination angle θ3 of the inner surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b with respect to the front of the base plate 60 is set smaller than the inclination angle θ4 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the inclination angle θ5 of the inner surface 29151b3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the cross section of the recessed portion 29151b is set to be larger than the inclination angle θ6 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment. Note that FIG. 182(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. In addition, in FIG. 182(b), the line of sight when the player views the game board 29013 from a normal position (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 29013 in the direction of gravity) is indicated by a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

Note that, like the game board 13 in the first embodiment, the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front; The center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening formed in the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the game board 29013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling the winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the 29th embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 29150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182(b), the general winning opening unit 29150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment has a plate-shaped main body part 29151 along the front side of the base plate 60. and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 29151.

The main body part 29151 is made of a transparent resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize the decorations such as patterns, letters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side. Further, the main body portion 29151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back side, and a recessed portion 29151b recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 29151 toward the front side.

As described above, the inner surface 29151b3 of the recessed portion 29151b extends outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side) toward the end side of the main body portion 29151. It is formed sloping towards the top. In this case, the inclination angle θ5 of the inner surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recessed portion 29151b with respect to the front of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 182(b)) is different from the inclination angle θ6 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body portion 151 with respect to the base plate 60 (see FIG. (see (b)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182(b), when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the inclined surface 151a of the main body portion 29151, the player can see the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 through the inclined surface 151a. The light irradiated to the viewpoint can be light irradiated in a direction substantially perpendicular to the slope of the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b. Therefore, when the light enters the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154, it is possible to suppress the light from being refracted. As a result, when the light enters the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b, the light is refracted, so that the connecting portion of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be suppressed from being viewed from above in the direction of gravity, and the decorative member 60c And the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Furthermore, since a predetermined gap is provided between the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b and the end of the decorative member 154, the dimensional error that occurs when the decorative member 154 is formed can be absorbed by the gap.

Next, with reference to FIG. 183(a), the general winning a prize opening unit 30150 in the 30th embodiment will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the inner surface 28151b3 of the recess 28151b is formed with an inclination, but in the thirtieth embodiment, the inner surface 30151b3 of the recess 30151b bulges inside the recess 28151b and has a circular cross section. It is curved into an arc. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Note that the game board 30013 in the 30th embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 30013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front; The center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening formed in the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the game board 30013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling the winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the 30th embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 30150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

FIG. 183(a) is a sectional view of the general winning a prize opening unit 30150 in the 30th embodiment. Note that FIG. 183(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. In addition, in FIG. 183(a), when the player views the game board 30013 from a normal position (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 30013 in the direction of gravity), the line of sight is the two-dot chain line. Illustrated in

As shown in FIG. 183(a), the general winning opening unit 30150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 30013 in the 30th embodiment has a plate-shaped main body part 30151 along the front side of the base plate 60. and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 30151.

The main body portion 30151 is made of a transparent resin material, and allows the player to view decorations such as patterns, letters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side. Further, the main body portion 30151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back side, and a recessed portion 30151b recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 30151 toward the front side.

The inner surface 30151b3 of the recessed portion 30151b is formed to be inclined outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side) toward the end of the main body portion 30151. At the same time, the recess 30151b bulges inward to have an arcuate cross section. Thereby, the line of sight of the player viewing the decorative member 60c through the recessed portion 30151b can be easily directed in the direction (horizontal direction) perpendicular to the decorative surface of the decorative member 60c. As a result, when the decoration of the game board 30013 is visually recognized through the concave portion 30151b, the end of the decorative member 154 is suppressed from being seen, and the player can see the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as one decoration. It can be easily recognized.

Next, the general winning a prize unit 31150 in the 31st embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 183(b). In the first embodiment, the slope 151a is formed as a linear surface in cross section, but the slope 31151a in the 31st embodiment includes a plurality of recesses 31151a1. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 183(b) is a sectional view of the general winning a prize opening unit 31150 in the 31st embodiment. Note that FIG. 183(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. Further, the game board 31013 in the 31st embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 31013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front; The center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening formed in the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the game board 31013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling the winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the 31st embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 31150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 183(b), the general winning a prize opening unit 31150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 31013 in the 31st embodiment has a plate-shaped main body part 31151 along the front side of the base plate 60. and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 31151.

The main body portion 31151 is made of a transparent resin material, and allows the player to view decorations such as patterns, letters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side. Further, the main body portion 31151 mainly includes an inclined surface 31151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back side, and a recessed portion 151b recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 31151 toward the front side.

The inclined surface 31151a includes a plurality of recessed portions 31151a1 recessed in a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction. The plurality of recessed portions 31151a1 are arranged in parallel in the direction of inclination of the inclined surface 31151a, and extend along the end of the main body portion 31151 when viewed from the front. Thereby, it is possible to diffusely reflect the light that enters the inside of the main body 31151 and exits from the end (slanted surface 31151a) of the main body 31151. Therefore, the decoration visible through the inclined surface 31151a can be visible to the player in a blurred state.

Here, since the end portion of the decorative member 154 disposed on the main body portion 31151 is disposed on the back side of the inclined surface 31151a as in the first embodiment, the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c are The connected parts can be visually recognized by the player in a blurred state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the connection of the decorative members, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

<Adjustment means for changing the flow direction by adjusting the distance between opposing faces>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186, the special prize winning device 32550 in the 32nd embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the shim member SI is sandwiched between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 to adjust the opposing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. As described above, in the 32nd embodiment, a case will be described in which the facing distance between the first path member 32560 and the second path member 32570 is adjusted by the fastening position of the screw. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the special prize winning device 32550 in the 32nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185. FIG. 184 is an exploded perspective front view of the special prize winning device 32550 in the 32nd embodiment. 185(a) is a front view of the special winning device 32550, FIG. 185(b) is a top view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG. 185(c) is CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc of FIG. 185(a). It is a sectional view of the special prize winning device 32550 along the line.

As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the special prize winning device 32550 in the 32nd embodiment includes a first path member 32560 disposed on the front side and a first path member 32560 disposed on the back side of the first path member 32560. 2-path member 32570.

The first path member 32560 is formed from a non-light transmitting material. In addition, the first path member 32560 includes a front plate 32564 formed in a plate shape and arranged on the front side of the gaming area, and a front plate 32564 that protrudes from the left and right ends of the front plate 32564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). and a first wall portion 32565.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between opposing second path members 32570, which will be described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the special prize winning device 33550 can be made invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the downward direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

The first wall portion 32565 is a portion that is connected (fastened) with the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c that penetrates in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and the two first wall portions 32565 are opposed to each other. A plurality of protrusions 32565d on one side are arranged in parallel on the surface and protrude in a triangular cross-section, and two protrusions 32565d are provided on the opposite surface of the second wall 32566 from both upper and lower ends of the first wall 32565. It mainly includes an upright portion 32565e.

The through hole 32565c is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the first path member 32560 to the second path member 32570 is inserted, and is formed at one location in each first wall portion 32565.

The one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c of a second path member 32570, which will be described later, to position the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, and is a portion in the front-rear direction (arrow F -B direction) and extend in the vertical direction (arrow UD).

The upright portion 32565e is a portion that covers the one side protrusion 32565d to make the one side protrusion 32565d invisible to the player, and is set to be larger than the protrusion distance of the one side protrusion 32565d. This suppresses the position where the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c from being visually recognized, and prevents the player from recognizing the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570. It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from deciding that they are at a disadvantage and not playing the pachinko machine 10.

The second path member 32570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 32571 that faces the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560, and a base plate 32571 that extends from the left and right (arrow LR direction) ends of the base plate 32571 to the first path member 32560. A fourth wall portion 32573 protruding from the front plate 32564 side is provided.

The base plate 32571 is a member that forms a throwing path for the game ball in the gap between the first path member 32560 and the front plate 32564, and the base plate 32571 is vertically moved in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) when viewed from the front. The size is made smaller than the front plate 32564. This can prevent the base plate 32571 from being viewed from the player side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the opposing distance between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and determining whether the game is advantageous or disadvantageous.

Further, the base plate 32571 includes a fourth convex portion 32571b and a fifth convex portion 32571c that protrude toward the first path member 32560, and is located below the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c, and the front plate 32564 A sixth convex portion 32571d protruding from the side.

The fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 32550, and are from the outside in the left and right direction of the base plate 32571 (outside in the direction of arrows LR) to the base. It is formed to be inclined downward toward the center of the plate 32571. As a result, the game ball that flows down between the opposing sides of the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and collides with the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c is prevented from colliding with the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c. It can be made easier to flow down in the direction of inclination.

The sixth convex portion 32571d is formed on the lower side of the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c described above, and is also formed at approximately the center position of the base plate 32571 in the left-right direction. Further, the sixth convex portion 32571d extends in the direction of gravity. As a result, game balls that flow down between the opposing base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and are guided to the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c can be distributed to either the left or right side of the sixth convex portion 32571d. .

The two opposing fourth wall portions 32573 have a plurality of other side recesses 32573c recessed toward the inner side in the opposing direction on the outer side surface in the opposing direction, and adjustment holes 32573b penetrating in the opposing direction. The housing section 32573d is formed inside the fourth wall section 32573 in the opposing direction and surrounds the adjustment hole 32573b.

A plurality of the other side recesses 32573c are arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) of the fourth wall 32573, and extend in the direction of gravity. Further, the other side concave portion 32573c is recessed and formed to have a substantially triangular cross section, and the cross sectional shape is set to be approximately the same as the one side protrusion 32565d. Thereby, the first path member 32560 can be positioned by inserting the protrusion 32565d on one side into the recess 32573c on the other side.

The adjustment hole 32573b is a portion through which the tip of the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 described above is inserted into the accommodation portion 32573d side. Further, the adjustment hole 32573b is formed into an elongated hole that is long in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), thereby allowing movement of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570.

The accommodating portion 32573d has a U-shaped cross section when viewed from the front, and both ends thereof are connected to the fourth wall portion 32573. Further, the housing portion 32573d extends from the front of the base plate 32571 to the front end of the fourth wall portion 32573. Thereby, the screw plate 32590 into which the screws inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b are screwed can be accommodated in the space surrounded by the housing portion 32573d.

The screw plywood board 32590 is set to a size that allows it to be inserted into the space formed by the accommodating part 32573d, and the width dimension in the front-back direction (arrow FB direction) is the same as the front-back dimension ( This is set smaller than the protruding dimension of the fourth wall portion 32573 toward the front side. Thereby, the screw plywood 32590 can be inserted inside the accommodating portion 32573d and can be moved in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the screw plate 32590 has a screw hole 32591 into which the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b is screwed, and two screw holes from both ends of the screw hole 32591 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). A guide protrusion 32592 is provided that protrudes toward the opposing surface of the fourth wall portion 32573.

The screw holes 32591 are formed in two places, and are formed side by side in the vertical direction. Further, the two screw holes 32591 are formed at positions where the distance of one screw hole 32591 from the upper end is the same as the distance of the other screw hole 32591 from the lower end. Thereby, when the screw groove of one of the screw holes 32591 is crushed, the screw can be fastened using the other screw hole 32591 by turning the screw plate 32590 upside down.

The guide protrusion 32592 projects a predetermined amount outwardly in the left-right direction from both front and rear end portions, and includes an inclined surface that slopes toward the screw hole 32591 side. Thereby, the tip of the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b can be guided to the screw hole 32591. In particular, in this embodiment, if the screw hole 32591 is damaged, a new screw hole 32591 can be used by turning it upside down. In this case, the position of the screw hole 32591 with respect to the tip of the screw is likely to be misaligned, so a configuration in which the tip of the screw is guided to the screw hole 32591 as in this embodiment is particularly effective.

The method of adjusting the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special prize winning device 32550 configured as described above is as follows: First, the first path member 32560 is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and is screwed into the screw plate 32590. Loosen the screws that fit together. This allows the first path member 32560 to move relative to the second path member 32570.

Next, by elastically deforming the first wall portion 32565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564, one side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 After pulling it out from the other side recess 32573c, the position in the front and back direction is adjusted, and at the adjusted position, the elastic deformation of the first wall part 32655 is restored, and the one side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other side recess 32573c again. Thereby, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed (positioned) with respect to the second path member 32570.

Finally, the adjustment of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is completed by re-tightening the screw inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and screwed into the screw plate 32590. .

According to this, as described above, the one side protrusion 32565d and the other side recess 32573c are formed in corresponding shapes, so by tightening the screw after temporarily fixing, the one side protrusion 32565d can be moved to the other side. It can be pushed into the recess 32573c. Therefore, each position where the one-side protrusion 32565d can be inserted into the other-side recess 32573c can be adjusted so that it is always at the same position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of variations in the flow of game balls depending on the operator who makes the adjustment, and it is possible to simplify the adjustment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, position adjustment of the second path member 32570 of the first path member 32560 will be described. FIG. 186(a) is a sectional view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG. 186(b) is a sectional view of the special winning device 32550 along the line CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb in FIG. 186(a).

As shown in FIG. 186, when the first path member 32560 on the left side (arrow L direction side) is pulled out to the front side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the second path member 32570, as shown in FIG. In addition, the distance between the left front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 is made wider than that on the right side. In this case, the game ball flowing down between the opposing sides of the front plate 32564 and the base board 32571 is less likely to collide with the fourth convex portion 32571b on the left side, so that the game ball can flow down between the opposing sides on the left side more easily. . Thereby, the game balls flowing down between the opposing front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 can be easily discharged from the lower left side.

Next, the special prize winning device 33550 in the 33rd embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 187. In the above 32nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the position of the second path member 32570 with respect to the second path member 32570 is adjusted in a state where the first wall portion 32565 of the first path member 32560 is elastically deformed. In this embodiment, the first wall portion 33565 is variably connected to the front plate 32564. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member 33560 in the 33rd embodiment, and FIG. 187(b) is a sectional view of the special winning device 33550. Note that FIG. 187(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 186(c).

As shown in FIG. 187, the special prize winning device 33550 in the 33rd embodiment includes a first path member 33560 disposed on the front side and a second path member disposed on the back side of the first path member 33560. 32570.

The first path member 33560 includes a front plate 33564 formed in a plate shape and disposed on the front side of the game area, and a first wall portion 33565 pivoted on the left and right ends of the front plate 33564. .

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between opposing second path members 32570, which will be described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the special prize winning device 33550 can be made invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the downward direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

The holding portion 33564e is a member that holds a rod RD that pivotally supports a first wall portion 33565, which will be described later, and is set to a size that allows the rod RD to be inserted into an annular inner portion. Further, the holding portions 33564e are formed at two locations separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axes of the annular portions of the holding portions 33564e are coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, of the two holding parts 33564e, the holding part 33564e formed on the lower side is formed at the lower end of the front plate 33564, and the lower end side is closed. Thereby, when the rod RD is inserted into the inside of the holding part 33564e from above the holding part 33564e, it is possible to suppress the rod RD from falling off (coming out) from the lower end of the holding part 33564e.

The first wall portion 33565 is a portion that is connected (fastened) with the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c that penetrates in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction), and two portions of the first wall portion 32565. A plurality of side protrusions 32565d are arranged side by side on opposing surfaces and protrude in a triangular cross-section, and second wall parts 32566 are located two from both ends of the upper and lower ends (direction of arrows UD) of the first wall part 32565. It mainly includes an upright portion 32565e erected on the opposing surface side and a pivoted support 33565f protruding from the front plate 33564 side with an annular cross section.

The shafted support 33565f is a portion into which the rod RD that is inserted into the holding portion 33564e of the front plate 33564 described above is inserted, and the inner portion formed in an annular shape is set to a size that allows insertion of the rod RD. . Further, the pivoted supports 33565f are formed at two locations separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axes of the annular portions of these supported supports 33565f are coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, between the two shafted supports 33565f, a holding portion 33564e formed above of the above-mentioned holding portions 33564e is disposed.

Thereby, the connection between the front plate 33564 and the first wall portion 33565 is achieved by arranging the holding portion 33564e and the pivoted support portion 33565f on the same axis, and from the upper side inside the holding portion 33564e and the supported support portion 33565f. By inserting the rod RD, the first wall portion 33565 is rotatably disposed on the front plate 33564.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 187(b), when the front plate 33564 of the first route member 33560 is disposed non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second route member 32570, the front plate 33564 On the other hand, the angle of the first wall portion 33565 can be changed and arranged.

That is, in the above-mentioned 32nd embodiment, when the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 is disposed non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570, the first wall portion It is necessary to hold 33565 in an elastically deformed state. Further, when adjusting the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, the first wall portion 32565 is elastically deformed outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564, and the position of the second path member 32570 is adjusted. It is necessary to pull out the one side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c from the other side recess 32573c. Therefore, there was a possibility that the connecting portion between the front plate 32564 and the first wall portion 32565 would be damaged.

On the other hand, in the 33rd embodiment, since the first wall portion 33565 can be rotated with respect to the front plate 33564, there is no need to elastically deform the first path member 33560, and the front plate 33564 and the first wall Damage to the connecting portion with the portion 33565 can be suppressed.

The method of adjusting the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special prize winning device 33550 configured as described above is as follows: First, the first path member 33560 is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560 and is screwed into the screw plate 32590. Loosen the screws that fit together. This allows the first path member 33560 to move relative to the second path member 32570.

Next, by rotating the first wall portion 33565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 33564, the one side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 33560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 is rotated. After being pulled out from the other side recess 32573c, the position in the front and rear direction is adjusted, and at the adjusted position, the rotation of the first wall 33565 is returned to insert the one side protrusion 32565d into the other side recess 32573c again. Thereby, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed to the second path member 32570.

Finally, the adjustment of the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is completed by retightening the screw that is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560 and is screwed into the screw plate 32590. .

Next, the special prize winning device 34550 in the 34th embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 188 to 190. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, a case was explained in which the direction in which the game ball flows is adjusted by adjusting the facing interval between the plates before and after the special winning device 13550. However, in the thirty-fourth embodiment, the direction in which the game ball flows down is adjusted. By changing the position of the protrusion that protrudes toward the player, the direction in which the game ball flows can be adjusted. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the special prize winning device 34550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. FIG. 188(a) is a front view of the game board 34013 in the 34th embodiment, and FIG. 188(b) is a sectional view of the game board 34013 taken along the line CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb in FIG. 188(a). FIG. 189 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 34013.

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the special winning device 34550 in the 34th embodiment is arranged above the first winning hole 64 provided on the game board 34013. In addition, the special winning device 34550 is arranged so that the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 34560 arranged on the front side is arranged in the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front. .

Further, the special winning device 34550 and the first winning hole 64 are arranged at positions separated by a diameter of the game ball in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Thereby, the game ball ejected from the special winning device 34550 can be visually recognized by the player.

The special winning device 34550 includes a first route member 34560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a second route member disposed on the back side of the first route member 34560 (arrow B direction side). 34570, and a fixture 34553 that is screwed onto the back side of the second path member 34570.

The first path member 34560 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between opposing second path members 34570, which will be described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the special prize winning device 34550 can be made invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the downward direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 34550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

The first path member 34560 is formed into a plate shape, and includes a front plate 34564 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the gaming area, and a front plate 34564 from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564 to the rear side (arrow A first wall portion 34565 erected on the B direction side).

The front plate 34564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of the downward flow path of the game ball formed between the opposite sides of the second path member 32570, which will be described later. The outer shape is also large when viewed from the front. Thereby, the second path member 34570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560 can be made difficult to see on the front plate 34564. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the second path member 34570 from being visible from the player side. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 34570 is changed, the change can be prevented from being recognized by the player.

The first wall portion 34565 is a portion fastened to the base plate 34060 of the game board 13, and is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section. The vertical dimension of the first wall portion 34565 on the back side is such that the opposing dimension X3 (see FIG. 188(b)) between the front plate 34564 and the fourth convex portion 34571b of the base plate 34571 (described later) is the diameter of the game ball. is set to a value slightly larger than .

In addition, the first wall portion 34565 has a bent portion 34565g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 34060 from the upright tip, and a through hole 34565g1 that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion 34565g. Ru. The through hole 34565g1 is a hole into which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 34560 can be fastened to the base plate 34060 by screwing the screw inserted into the through hole 34565g1 into the base plate 34060.

The second path member 34570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 34571 that faces the front plate 34564 of the first path member 34560, and a support portion 34579 that projects from the back side of the base plate 34571 in a cylindrical shape.

The base plate 34571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in the gap between the first path member 34560 and the front plate 34564, and is formed at a position spaced apart from the front plate 34564 by a predetermined distance. Furthermore, the base plate 34571 includes a fourth convex portion 34571b that protrudes toward the front plate 34564 side. Thereby, the direction in which the game ball flowing down between the opposing base plate 34571 and the front plate 34564 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b can be changed.

The support portion 34579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 34570, and a cylindrical shaft is formed at a position coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571 (at the center of the base plate 34571). Further, a circular through hole 34060d is opened in the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013 at a position corresponding to the support part 34579, and the support part 34579 is inserted inside the through hole 34060d. Thereby, the second path member 34570 is pivotally supported by the base plate 34060.

The support portion 34579 has a fastening hole 34579a recessed at its protruding tip. The fastening hole 34579a is recessed coaxially with the axis of the support portion 34579, and has an internal thread machined on its inner peripheral surface. Thereby, the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 inserted into the through hole 34060d from the back side of the base plate 34060 can be screwed into the fastening hole 34579a.

The fixture 34553 is a fastening member for fastening the second path member 34570 described above to the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, and includes an operating portion 34553a formed in a cylindrical shape and a projection on the front side of the operating portion 34553a. A threaded portion 34553b is provided.

The operating portion 34553a is a portion held by a worker who arranges the second path member 34570 on the base plate 34060, and is formed to have a larger external shape than the through hole 34060d formed in the base plate 34060. Further, the operating portion 34553a is set to have an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060.

As a result, when the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a and the second path member 34570 is disposed on the base plate 34060, the fixture 34553 is inserted into the base plate 34060 through the through hole 34060d. It can prevent it from slipping out to the front side.

The threaded portion 34553b is formed into a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operating portion 34553a, and has a male thread formed on its outer peripheral surface. As described above, the threaded portion 34553b is a portion that is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570, is set to have an outer diameter smaller than the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060, and is inserted through the through hole 34060d. and is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570.

According to the special winning device 34550 configured as described above, when changing the ejection position of the game balls ejected from the special winning device 34550, the operator can 1. Insert your hand (arm) from the front side (direction of arrow F) of the game board 13 through the opening 60a (center frame 86) into the back side (direction of arrow B) of the base plate 34060, and insert the fixing tool 34553. access the operating section 34553a.

Next, the operating portion 34553a is rotated to loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570. Thereby, the second path member 34570 is made rotatable about the support portion 34579, and the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b of the second path member 34570. When the position of the fourth convex part 34571b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 34550 collides with the fourth convex part 34571b is changed, so the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550 The discharge position can be changed.

In this case, as described above, the base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the support portion 34579 is formed coaxially with the axis of the base plate 34571, so that the second path member 34570 cannot be rotated. In this case, it is possible to suppress changes in the arrangement of the second path member 34570 with respect to the base plate 34060 when viewed from the front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the second path member 34570 has been rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from deciding that they are at a disadvantage and not playing the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, a change in the discharge position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b (second path member 34570) is changed will be described. 190(a) to 190(d) are cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 34010 taken along the CXC-CXC line in FIG. 188.

As shown in FIG. 190, the fourth convex portion 34571b has a substantially V-shaped protrusion when viewed from the front. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 190(a), when the bent side of the V-shape is placed on the lower side, the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are thrown to the center part along the slope of the V-shape. It's easy to do. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to flow into the winning hole 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 190(b), when the bent side of the V-shape is placed on the upper side, the game balls flowing from above the special winning device 34550 are directed to both left and right ends along the slope of the V-shape. Makes it easier to throw the ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for game balls to flow into the winning hole 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 190(c) and 190(b), when the bent side of the V-shape is placed at either the left or right end, the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are To easily throw a game ball along the slope of the upper side of the V, and to throw a game ball to the lower side of the V without colliding with the upper side of the V, along the slope of the lower side of the V. I can do it. Therefore, the direction in which the game ball is thrown can be changed by the difference in the areas where the game ball collides between the upper side of the V and the lower side of the V.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, it is also possible to arrange the bent portion of the fourth convex portion 34571b at a position other than the positions shown in FIGS. 190(a) to 190(d). For example, if the second path member 34570 is rotated 10 degrees to the right when viewed from the front from the position shown in FIG. The game ball can be easily ejected from a position slightly shifted to the left (in the direction of arrow L) from the upper side of the winning hole 64 disposed below the special winning device 34550.

Next, the special prize winning device 35550 in the 35th embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 191 to 193. In the above 34th embodiment, a case has been described in which the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b, but in the 35th embodiment, the second path member 35570 is slid to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b. The position of the portion 35571b is changed. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the special prize winning device 35550 in the 35th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 and 192. FIG. 191(a) is a front view of the game board 35013 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 191(b) is a sectional view of the game board 35013 taken along the line CXCIb-CXCIb in FIG. 191(a). FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the special prize winning device 35550.

As shown in FIGS. 191 and 192, the special winning device 35550 in the 35th embodiment is arranged above the first winning opening 64 (in the direction of arrow U) provided on the game board 35013. In addition, in the special winning device 35550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 35560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) is the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front. It is arranged in a shape.

Further, the special winning device 35550 and the first winning hole 64 are arranged at positions separated by a diameter of the game ball in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Thereby, the game ball ejected from the special winning device 35550 can be visually recognized by the player.

The special winning device 34550 includes a first route member 35560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a second route member disposed on the back side of the first route member 35560 (arrow B direction side). 35570, and a fixture 34553 that is screwed onto the back side of the second path member 35570.

The first path member 35560 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between opposing sides of a second path member 35570, which will be described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material. Thereby, it is possible to make the downward direction of the game ball inside the special prize winning device 35550 invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the downward direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

The first path member 35560 is formed in a plate shape and includes a front plate 34564 disposed on the front side of the game area, and a front plate 34564 that stands from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564 to the back side (arrow B direction side). A first wall portion 35565 provided therein.

The front plate 35564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the falling path of the game ball formed between the opposite sides of the second path member 35570, which will be described later. The outer shape of the base plate 35570 in front view is larger than that of the base plate 35571 of the base plate 35570. Thereby, the second path member 35570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560 can be made difficult to see on the front plate 35564. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the second path member 35570 from being visible from the player side. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 35570 is changed, the change can be prevented from being recognized by the player.

The first wall portion 35565 is a portion fastened to the base plate 60 of the game board 35013, and the vertical dimension of the first wall portion 34565, which is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section, on the back side is the same as that of the front plate 35564. A dimension X4 (see FIG. 191(b)) between the base plate 35571 and the fourth convex portion 35571b, which will be described later, is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

In addition, the first wall portion 35565 has a bent portion 35565g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 60 from the erected tip, and penetrates the bent portion 35565g in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). A through hole 35565g1 and a recessed portion 35565g2 recessed from the back surface of the bent portion 35565g toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) are formed.

The through hole 35565g1 is a hole into which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 35560 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by screwing the screw inserted into the through hole 35565g1 into the base plate 60.

The recessed portion 35565g2 is a portion that accommodates both left and right ends (arrow LR direction side) of a base plate 35571 of a second path member 35570, which will be described later, inside, and is recessed from the base end of the bent portion 35565g. , is recessed in the vertical center of the bent portion 35565g. Thereby, when both left and right ends of the base plate 35571 are accommodated inside the recessed portion 35565g2, both left and right ends of the base plate 35571 can be hidden by the bent portion 35365g. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the position of the base plate 35571. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from deciding that they are at a disadvantage and not playing the game.

Further, the concave dimension of the concave portion 35565g2 is set to a depth dimension larger than the plate thickness of the base plate 35571, and the separation distance X5 (see FIG. 191(b)) between the left and right ends of the bent portion 35565g is , is set larger than the horizontal width dimension X6 of the base plate 35571 (see FIG. 191(b)). Thereby, the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) can be displaced in the left-right direction. Note that a method for displacing the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) will be described later.

The second path member 35570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 35571 facing the front plate 35564 of the first path member 35560, and a rectangular shape in rear view projecting from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 35571. A support portion 35579 is provided.

The base plate 35571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in the gap between the first path member 35560 and the front plate 35564, and is formed at a position spaced apart from the front plate 35564 by a predetermined distance. Furthermore, the base plate 35571 includes a fourth convex portion 35571b that protrudes toward the front plate 35564 (in the direction of arrow F). Thereby, the direction in which the game ball flowing down between the opposing base plate 35571 and the front plate 35564 collides with the fourth convex portion 35571b can be changed.

The support portion 35579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 35570, and a cylindrical shaft is formed at a position coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571 (center of the base plate 34571). Furthermore, the base plate 60 of the game board 34013 has a sliding hole 35060e in the form of an elongated hole extending in the left-right direction at a position corresponding to the supporting part 35579, and the supporting part 35579 is inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e. Ru. Thereby, the second path member 35570 is supported by the base plate 60.

The width of the sliding hole 35060e in the transverse direction (in the direction of the arrow UD) is set to be approximately the same as the dimension in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrow UD) of the support part 35579, and The width dimension in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) is set larger than the direction dimension (arrow LR direction). Thereby, the support part 35579 inserted into the inside of the sliding hole 35060e can be slid in the longitudinal direction of the sliding hole 35060e.

Further, the support portion 35579 has a fastening hole 35579a recessed at its protruding tip. The fastening hole 35579a has a female thread on its inner peripheral surface, and the threaded portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 can be screwed into the fastening hole 35579a. Note that the protruding dimension of the support portion 34579 is set smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and by screwing the threaded portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 into the fastening hole 35579a, the second path member 35570 is attached to the base. It can be fixed to the plate 60.

According to the special winning device 35550 configured as described above, when changing the ejection position of the game balls ejected from the special winning device 35550, the operator can 1. Insert your hand (arm) from the front side (direction of arrow F) of the game board 35013 through the opening 60a (center frame 86) into the back side (direction of arrow B) of the base plate 60, and attach the fixing tool 34553. access the operating section 34553a.

Next, the operating portion 34553a is rotated to loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed into the fastening hole 35579a of the second path member 35570. This makes the second path member 35570 slidable in the left-right direction, and the second path member 35570 is slid to change the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b of the second path member 35570. When the position of the fourth convex part 35571b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 35550 collides with the fourth convex part 35571b is changed, so the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550 The discharge position can be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, a change in the discharge position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b (second path member 35570) is changed will be described. FIGS. 193(a) to 193(c) are cross-sectional views of the game board 35013 taken along the line CXCIII-CXCIII in FIG. 191(b). Note that in FIGS. 193(a) to 193(c), the position of the second path member 35570 in FIG. 193(b) is used as the reference position, and in FIG. 193(a), the second path member 35570 is A state in which the second path member 35570 is displaced to the left in the view is illustrated, and a state in which the second path member 35570 is displaced from the reference position to the right (in the direction of the arrow R) in the front view is illustrated in FIG. 193(c).

As shown in FIG. 193, the fourth convex portion 35571b has a substantially V-shaped protruding shape when viewed from the front, and the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 35550 are centered along the slope of the V-shape. (V-shaped bent part).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193(b), when the V-shaped bent portion of the fourth convex portion 35571b is disposed above the first winning opening 64, the special winning device 35550 is discharged from below. This makes it easier for game balls to flow into the first prize opening 64.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(c), when the second path member 35570 is moved from the reference position (the position shown in FIG. 193(b)), the V of the fourth convex portion 35571b Since the bent portion of the letter is placed at a position shifted to the left or right from the top of the first winning opening 64, the position is lower than the special winning device 35550 compared to when the second path member 35570 is placed at the reference position. Game balls discharged from the slot are made difficult to flow into the first prize opening 64.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, a special prize winning device 36550 in the 36th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 551 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60, and In the thirty-sixth embodiment, the first unit 36551 is held in a state where it is biased toward the rear surface of the base plate 60 due to the elastic recovery force of the fastening portion 36551b formed in the first unit 36551. Forced toward the side. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 194(a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board 36013 in the 36th embodiment, and FIG. 194(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 36013. Note that FIG. 194 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 36.

As shown in FIG. 194, the special prize winning device 36550 in the 36th embodiment is a first unit disposed on the base plate 60, which is slid from inside the first opening 60a where the center frame 86 is disposed. 36551.

The first unit 36551 has a space inside thereof in which a game ball can be thrown, and the space is arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 (in the direction of arrow F). Thereby, the game balls flowing down the front surface of the base plate 60 can be made to flow into the inside of the first unit 36551. The first unit 36551 also includes a fastening portion 36551b that protrudes from a side surface (back surface) adjacent to the front surface of the base plate 60 toward the back surface (in the direction of arrow B).

The fastening portion 36551b is a portion into which a screw for fastening the first unit 36551 to the base plate 60 is inserted, and is provided protruding toward the back side (direction of arrow B) and parallel to the back side of the base plate 60. The protruding tip is bent in the direction.

Furthermore, the fastening portion 36551b has a bulging portion 36551b2 that bulges toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) on the side surface on the bending side, and a bulging portion 36551b2 that bulges toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F), and a bulging portion 36551b2 that bulges toward the front side of the bending portion 36551b, and a plate thickness direction (arrow FB a through hole 36551b1 that penetrates in the direction).

In addition, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X7 from the base end (back surface of the first unit 36551) to the front of the bent portion when the first unit 36551 is not attached to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 194(b)). is set larger than the thickness of the base plate 60. Furthermore, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X8 (FIG. 194 (b)) is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the thickness of the base plate 60.

When a screw is fastened to the through hole 36551b1, the bulging portion 36551b2 generates a force that presses (energizes) the first unit 36551 against the back side of the base plate 60 (in the direction of arrow F). It is formed between the base end of the bent portion of the fastening portion 36551b and the through hole 36551b1.

As a result, when the screw inserted through the fastening portion 36551b is fastened to the back surface of the base plate 60, the bulging portion 36551b2 comes into contact with the back surface of the base plate 60, thereby reducing the gap between the bent portion and the base plate 60. , the force of pushing the bent end side into the base plate 60 side with the screw can be converted into the force of pulling out the base end side of the bent part toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B). Thereby, formation of a gap between the back surface of the first unit 36551 and the front surface of the base plate 60 can be suppressed.

As a result, there is no need to fasten the screws through which the first unit 36551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 36551 can be easily formed larger by the amount of fastening allowance. Further, in the 36th embodiment, the first unit 36551 is attached to the base plate 60 using the first opening 60a to which the center frame 86 is fastened, so the first unit 36551 is slid and displaced to attach the base plate 60. It can be easily attached to the first opening 60a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195, a special prize winning device 37550 in the 37th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 551 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60, and In the thirty-seventh embodiment, the first unit 37551 is fastened with a screw inserted from the back side of the base plate 60, and the first unit 37551 is held in a state where it is urged toward It is held in a state where it is biased toward the side. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 195(a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board 37013 in the 37th embodiment, and FIG. 195(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 37013. Note that FIG. 195 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 36.

As shown in FIG. 195, a special prize winning device 37550 in the thirty-seventh embodiment is formed from a first unit 37551 disposed in front of the base plate 60.

The first unit 37551 has a space inside thereof in which a game ball can be thrown, and the space is arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 (in the direction of arrow F). Thereby, the game balls flowing down the front of the base plate 60 can be made to flow into the inside of the first unit 37551. Further, the first unit 37551 includes a plurality of annular convex portions 37551b that protrude in an annular shape on the back side (in the direction of arrow B).

The annular convex portion 37551b is a portion into which a screw inserted from the back side of the base plate 60 is screwed, and an internal thread is formed on the inner peripheral surface. In this embodiment, the annular convex portions 37551b are formed at four locations on the back surface of the first unit 37551.

Further, a circular concave portion 37060d is formed in the base plate 60 at a position facing the annular convex portion 37551b. The recess 37060d is a portion into which the annular protrusion 37551b is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 37551b. Further, the depth of the recess 37060d is set to be larger than the protrusion dimension of the annular projection 37551b.

Furthermore, a circular through hole 37060d1 coaxially with the recess 37060 is formed in the bottom surface of the recess 37060d. The through hole 37060d1 is a hole through which the tip of a screw screwed into the annular convex portion 37551b is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the recessed portion 37060d. Thereby, a screw can be fastened to the first unit 37551 disposed from the back side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of arrow B) to the front side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of arrow F).

In this case, as described above, the depth of the recess 37060d is set larger than the protrusion dimension of the annular projection 37551b, so by screwing the screw into the annular projection 37551b, The first unit 37551 can be disposed on the base plate 60 with the convex portion 37551b (first unit 37551) urged toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B). Thereby, formation of a gap between the back surface of the first unit 37551 and the front surface of the base plate 60 can be suppressed.

As a result, there is no need to fasten the screws through which the first unit 37551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 37551 can be easily formed larger by the amount of fastening allowance. In addition, in the 37th embodiment, since the fastening portion of the first unit 37551 can be accommodated inside the recess 37060d of the base plate 60, the space for throwing the game ball formed in the first unit 37551 is correspondingly reduced. Can be made larger.

<Change the amount of light emitted to the front side using the game ball>
Next, a lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. In the eleventh embodiment, a case will be described in which a shadow is formed at the position of the game ball accommodated in the lower displacement member 11440 by light emitted from the control board 491, and the position of the game ball is recognized from the position of the shadow. However, the lower displacement member 11440 in the 38th embodiment reflects the light emitted from the control board 491 on the outer surface of the game ball, and allows the position of the game ball to be recognized at a position where the amount of light is increased. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment. 197(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440, FIG. 197(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 taken along the line CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb of FIG. 197(a), and FIG. 197(c) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440. is a sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 taken along the line CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc in FIG. 197(a). In addition, in FIG. 197(a), a state in which the front side decorative member 38451 and the front case 38481 are removed is illustrated, and the LED 38483b disposed on the front case 38481 is illustrated with a two-dot chain line. Moreover, FIG. 197(b) and FIG. 197(c) illustrate a state in which the front side decorative portion 451 is attached.

As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 38440 in the 38th embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to a front base 411 (see FIG. 46), and a base member 470 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB Direction) A case member 38480 that covers both sides, a transmission mechanism 460 that is displaceably disposed between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member 11450 that is formed to cover the front and back of the case member 38480. It is mainly formed by

The case member 38480 is a member that covers both sides of the base member 470 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and includes a front case 38481 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, and a rear side. It mainly includes a back case 482 disposed on the side (the side in the direction of arrow B).

The front case 38481 is formed into a rectangular and horizontally long plate shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the front case 38481 has an opening 481a that extends in the left-right direction (in the direction of arrows LR) at a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrows UD) and a protruding opening 481a on the lower end surface on the back side (in the direction of arrow B). It mainly includes a bottom wall portion 481b, a shaft hole 481c extending through the lower end in the front-rear direction, and an LED board 38483 disposed on the back side.

The LED board 38483 is a member that causes the inside of the lower displacement member 38440 (front case 38481) to emit light, and includes a main body portion 38483a formed in a plate shape, and a plurality of LED boards disposed on the main body portion 38483a that emit light. It includes an LED38483b.

The main body portion 38483a is a base on which wiring for conducting electricity to the plurality of LEDs 38483b is laid, and extends in the direction of displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 (arrow LR direction). The plurality of LEDs 38483b are arranged at predetermined intervals in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the main body portion 38483a.

Further, each LED 38483b is set in a direction toward the center of the game ball when the game ball passes through the back side (arrow B direction side) of each LED 38483b. Thereby, when the game ball is located on the back side of each LED 38483b, the light of the LED can be reflected on the outer surface of the game ball and irradiated onto the front side decoration part 11451. Therefore, as described above, since the front decoration part 11451 includes the transmission part 11451b that can transmit light, the light reflected on the outer surface of the game ball and irradiated to the front decoration part 11451 is transmitted through the transmission part 11451b. The light can be emitted to the player side (in the direction of arrow F) through the light beam. Therefore, it is possible to make the amount of light visible from the player side through the transmitting portion 11451b greater in the portion reflected by the game ball than in the other portions. As a result, by increasing (changing) the amount of light, the player can recognize the position of the game ball thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 38440.

In addition, in this embodiment, the interval at which the plurality of LEDs 38483b are arranged is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, even if the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467 is displaced, at least a part of the game ball can be irradiated with the light emitted from the LED 38483b. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b can be constantly irradiated onto the game ball received in the ball receiving section 467.

Further, according to the thirty-eighth embodiment, the base member 470, the transmission mechanism 460, and the back case 482, which are arranged on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the LED 38483b, are preferably members with a high light absorption rate. For example, the outer surface of each member forms a black color scheme. According to this, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the LED 38483b from being reflected inside the case member 38480 (lower displacement member 38440) and emitted from the transparent portion 11451b of the front decoration portion 11451. As a result, it is possible to increase the difference in the amount of light emitted between the front where the game ball is placed and the other front, allowing the player to recognize the position of the game ball received inside the lower displacement member 39440. You can make it easier to do so.

Next, a lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the above 38th embodiment, a case has been described in which the player is made to recognize the position where the game ball is placed by reflecting light on the game ball, but in the 39th embodiment, the game ball is placed on the ball receiving part 39467. The position of the game ball is recognized by reflecting the light with the reflective member. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment. 199(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 39440, and FIGS. 199(b) and 199(c) are sectional views of the lower displacement member 39440. Note that FIGS. 199(b) and 199(c) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 198(c).

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 39440 in the 39th embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46), and a case member 38480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 470. , a transmission mechanism 39460 disposed displaceably between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member 11450 disposed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 38480.

The transmission mechanism 39460 is a member disposed on the front side of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a transmission gear 463 and meshing. A movable rack 464 has a tooth surface and is disposed so as to be slidable on the front side of the base member 470, and the movable rack 464 is rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464 and meshed with a rack gear 476. A transmission gear 465, a rack 39466 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and disposed so as to be slidable on the front side of the movable rack 464, and a rack 39466 rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 39466. It is formed mainly of a ball receiving part 39467.

The rack 39466 is formed from a horizontally long rod-shaped body that is rectangular in front view, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 39466b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the other end toward the front side, and a shaft portion 39466b that protrudes toward the front side. It is formed mainly by two sliding plates 466c and a recessed part 466d recessed from one end to the other end on the back side.

The shaft portion 39466b is a projection inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 39467, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. Thereby, the ball receiving part 467 can be held rotatably.

The ball receiving portion 39467 includes a first piece 39467c bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, a second piece 39467d connected to the first piece 39467c, and a second piece 39467d connected to the second piece 39467d. A third piece 39467e is provided on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d.

The first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are parts that hold the game ball thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 39440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57), and the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are opposed to each other. When the game ball is thrown, the second piece 39467d is displaced in the direction of separating from the first piece 39467c, and a part of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are arranged in a U-shape when viewed from the front. The game ball can be held inside the U-shape.

The first piece 39467c includes a receiving piece 39467c4 forming an L-shape when viewed from the front, forming one extending side, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, and the receiving piece 39467c4 and the leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 39467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bent portion), and a connecting portion 39467c1 that protrudes to the opposite side with the bent portion 39467c5 in between. and.

The receiving piece 39467c4 is a part that forms the other side (the side in the direction of arrow R) formed by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a crescent shape in the front. , is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 39467d.

The connecting portion 39467c1 protrudes from two locations at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 39467c5. The connecting portion 39467c1 is a portion that connects a second piece 39467d and a third piece 39467e, which will be described later, and extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and has a connecting hole 39467c2 that has a circular cross section. Be prepared.

The connecting hole 39467c2 is an opening into which a shaft portion 39467e3 protruding from a third piece 39467e, which will be described later, is inserted. A shaft portion 39467e3 inserted into an insertion hole 39467d3 formed in a second piece 39467d, which will be described later, is inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 from the front side (direction of arrow F). Further, the shaft portion 39467e3 is fastened with a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side of the connecting hole 39467c2 (the side in the direction of arrow B). Thereby, the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e can be fastened to the first piece 39467c.

Further, the first piece 39467c includes a recessed portion 39467c3 that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow D) on the protruding base end side of the connecting portion 39467c1. The concave bottom surface of the concave portion 39467c3 is formed at the lowest position (lowest part) of the side surfaces where the game ball is held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. Thereby, the game ball held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d is rolled inside the recessed part 39467c3. As a result, the second piece 39467d can be easily displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c due to the load of the game ball.

The second piece 39467d is a part that forms the other side (arrow L direction side) of the receiving piece 39467c4 of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d that is formed into a U-shape when viewed from the front, and has a crescent shape when viewed from the front. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the first piece 39467c. In addition, the second piece 39467d has an insertion hole 39467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the connecting portion of the first piece 39467c, and a circular insertion hole 39467d3 that opens from the front side (arrow F direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side). It mainly includes a recessed part 39467d2 that is recessed in the shape.

In the second piece 39467d, the shaft portion 39467e3 of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the insertion hole 39467d3, and the connecting shaft 39467e4 of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is displaced, the third piece 39467e is similarly displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 39467c, the third piece 39567e is similarly rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 39467c.

Furthermore, the second piece 39467d is disposed between opposing connecting portions 39467c1 that protrude from two locations on the first piece 39467c, and is connected to the first piece 39467c. Thereby, when the second piece 39467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 39467d3, it is possible to suppress the second piece 39467d from coming into contact with the opposite side surface of the connecting portion 39467c1 and breaking the shaft portion 39467e3.

The recessed portion 39467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 39467e4 of a third piece 39467e to be described later is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 39467e4.

The third piece 39467e includes a reflecting plate 39467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed from the front, a shaft portion 39467e3 protruding from the reflecting plate 39467e1 toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B), and a connecting shaft 39467e4. and.

The reflective plate 39467e1 is made of a resin material and has an outer surface coated with plating. Thereby, when the light emitted from the LED 38483b is irradiated onto the reflecting plate 39467e1, the light can be reflected on the outer surface of the reflecting plate 39467e1. Further, the entire reflecting plate 39467e1 is formed to be curved in an arc shape toward the front side (arrow F direction side). Thereby, when light emitted from the front side is reflected, the light can be focused on a predetermined portion. Note that the shielding of the light from the light emitter 11491a by the reflection plate 39467e1 will be described later.

The shaft portion 39467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connection hole 39467c2 of the first piece 39467c and the insertion hole 39467d3 of the second piece 39467d, as described above. Further, a hole is formed in the protruding distal end surface of the shaft portion 39467e3, into which a screw inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 39467e3 can be screwed. Therefore, with the shaft portion 39467e3 inserted into the connection hole 39467c2 and the insertion hole 39467d3, by fastening a screw to the insertion end surface of the shaft portion 39467e3, the first piece 39467c, the second piece 39467d, and the third piece 39467e are connected. At the same time, the third piece 39467e can be made rotatable relative to the first piece 39467c.

As described above, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2 of the second piece 39467d. Thereby, when the second piece 39467d is rotationally displaced about the shaft portion 39467e3 with respect to the first piece 39467c, the connecting shaft 39467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 39467d. Therefore, the third piece 39467e can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 39467d.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 199, when a game ball is received between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d facing each other, the ball receiving part 39467 moves the received game ball between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. 39467d and is guided to the recess 39467c3 located at the lowest end of the receiving surface. Thereby, the second piece 39467d can be rotated around the shaft portion 39467e3 in a direction away from the first piece 39467c on the outer surface of the game ball. As a result, the third piece 39467e, which moves with the displacement of the second piece 39467d, can be displaced upward and placed above the light irradiation of the LED 38483b.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b can be reflected toward the front side (direction of arrow F) of the lower displacement member 39440 by the reflection plate 39467e1 of the third piece 39467e, and can be emitted from the transmission section 11451b. Thereby, the amount of light emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b can be partially increased, allowing the player to recognize the position of the game ball thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 39440.

Further, the second piece 39467d has the connecting shaft 39467e4 inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2, and the load of the third piece 39467e is always applied thereto. The center of gravity G of the third piece 39467e is set on the opposite side of the shaft portion 394673e from the connecting portion between the second piece 39567d and the third piece 39567e. As a result, when no force other than gravity is acting on the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e, the second piece 39467d can be rotated toward the first piece 39467c by the load of the third piece 39467e. .

Therefore, when the game ball is discharged (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 39467, the second piece 39467d can be displaced toward the receiving piece 39467c4 side of the first piece 39467c due to the load of the third piece 39467e. Therefore, only when the game ball is received in the ball receiving part 39467, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 and emitted from the transmitting part 11451b can be partially increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress light from being reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 due to the positioning operation of the ball receiving portion 39467 or the like.

Furthermore, like the ball receiving part 467 in the first embodiment, the ball receiving part 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 39467b by the operation of slidingly displacing the inside of the lower displacement member 39440, so that the lower displacement member 39440 emits light. The game ball received through the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received in the ball receiving part 39467, a structure in which the ball receiving part 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b as the ball receiving part 39467 slides, the ball receiving part 39467 The rotational speed of the ball receiving portion 39467 around the shaft hole 467b is changed by the sliding speed. Therefore, since the rotational speed depends only on the sliding speed of the ball receiving part 39467, there is a problem that the ejection speed of the game balls from the ball receiving part 39467 is not stable.

On the other hand, in the 39th embodiment, the direction in which the second piece 39467d rotates due to the load of the third piece 39467e and the direction in which the ball receiving part 39467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b when ejecting the game ball are different. Since they are set in substantially the same direction, it is possible to apply a driving force when the second piece 39467d is displaced to the game ball emitted from the emitting opening 471. Therefore, even if the force applied from the ball receiver 39467 to the game ball is reduced when displacing the ball receiver 39467 and ejecting the game ball from the exit opening 471, the speed of the ejected game ball can be maintained. can. As a result, the ejection speed of the game balls ejected from the ball receiver 39467 can be stabilized.

Next, the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 200. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a malfunction is reported when a game ball gets stuck in the curved part 581a of the main path SK1, but in the 40th embodiment, a game ball of a size other than the specified size Fraud can be reported when passing SK1. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 200(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment, and FIG. 200(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 along the CCb-CCb line of FIG. 200(a). be. Note that the cross-sectional view in FIG. 200(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view in FIG. 25.

As shown in FIG. 200, the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment includes a first path member 560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a back side of the first path member 560 (arrow B direction side). It is formed mainly of a second path member 570 disposed on the second path member 570 (direction side) and a third path member 40580 disposed on the back side of the second path member 570.

The third path member 40580 includes a first covering member 40581 disposed on the back surface above the second path member 570 (in the direction of arrow U), and a first covering member 40581 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the bottom side (in the direction of arrow D). A second covering member 582 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back surface of the second covering member 582 (see FIG. 19), and a first drive unit 583 (see FIG. 19) disposed between the first covering member 40581 and the second covering member 582. and a second drive unit 584 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back surface of the second covering member 582.

The first covering member 40581 is a member that forms a throwing path for the game ball that curves in a substantially U-shape toward the back side (arrow B direction side), and is on the back side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. It mainly includes a curved part 40581a that connects the curved parts 40581a, and a plate-shaped attachment part 40581b that continues below the curved part 40581a.

The curved portion 40581a is curved to have a U-shaped cross section with the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side open, and the first rolling portion 576 is arranged inside the curved portion 40581a. be done. In addition, the curved portion 40581a has a width dimension in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) that is formed smaller toward the back side (direction of arrow B), and a width dimension in the left-right direction of the curved portion having a U-shaped cross section. X10 (see FIG. 200(a)) is formed to have a size that is 1.1 times or less the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when a game ball with a diameter of 1.1 times or more than a prescribed game ball is thrown, the game ball can be stopped inside the curved portion 40581a (main path SK1).

Further, the curved portion 40581a is arranged inside the recessed portion 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86, similar to the curved portion 581a in the first embodiment. Therefore, the game ball stopped inside the curved portion 40581a can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17), and the pachinko machine 10 can be notified of an error (fraud).

Further, the curved portion 40581a includes an opening 40581a1 opening in the curved portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a housing portion 40581a2 projecting in a box shape from an end on the back side of the opening 40481a1 and opening upward.

The opening 40581a1 is an opening for discharging balls with a smaller diameter than the prescribed game ball diameter from the main path SK1, and the opening dimension X15 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) (see FIG. 200(a)) is It is formed to have a size larger than 0.9 times the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the opening 40581a1 is formed on the back side of the curved part 40581a, which is the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the first rolling part 576, and throws the game ball passing through the main path SK1 to the opening 40581a1. be able to. Thereby, when a game ball whose diameter is 0.90% or more smaller than a prescribed game ball is thrown, the game ball can be discharged from the opening 40581a1 to the outside of the main path SK1.

The accommodating part 40581a2 is a box that accommodates the game ball discharged from the opening 40581a1, and the inner space is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game balls ejected from the opening 40581a1 can be stored in the storage section 40581a2, and the stored game balls can be detected by the detection device 86b3, and the pachinko machine 10 can be notified of an error (fraud). .

In addition, in the 40th embodiment, a case has been described in which the width dimension X10 and the opening dimension X11 are formed to be 0.1 times different in size from a game ball having a prescribed diameter (11 mm), but this is not necessarily the case. The size is not limited to , and the magnification of the size of the game ball may be changed.

Next, the first unit 41551 in the 41st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202. In the first embodiment, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j formed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK3 are arranged vertically (arrow Although the case has been described in which the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j in the forty-first embodiment are formed substantially symmetrically in the U-D direction), the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j are each formed in irregular shapes. The same parts as in the form are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

201(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the forty-first embodiment, and FIG. 201(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 along the CCIb-CCIb line of FIG. 201(a). be. 202(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 taken along the line CCIIa-CCIIa in FIG. 201(a), and FIG. 41551 is a schematic cross-sectional view.

As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 41551 in the forty-first embodiment includes a first path member 41560 disposed on the front side and a first path member 41560 disposed on the back side of the first path member 41560. It is formed mainly of a second path member 41570 and a third path member 580 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back side of the second path member 41570.

The first path member 41560 includes a front plate 41564 that is formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), and a substantially U-shaped cross section that is open on the upper side (the side in the direction of arrow U). A first receiving part 561, a second receiving part 562, and a third receiving part 563 are formed in the front plate 41564 and protrude from the upper side (arrow U direction side) end to the back side (arrow B direction side). (See FIG. 21), is provided continuously and protrudes from the lower side (in the direction of arrow D) of the first receiving part 561, second receiving part 562, and third receiving part 563, and a part of the end of the front plate 41564. A first wall 41565 extends along the section, and two sets of second wall 566 and second wall 566 are formed below the first wall 565 and protrude from two locations separated by a predetermined distance. 3 wall portion 567 (see FIG. 21).

The front plate 41564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of a falling path of a game ball formed between opposing second path members 41570 and third path members 580, which will be described later. Formed from a transparent member. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 via (through) the front plate 41564.

In addition, the front plate 564 has a first convex portion 41564b, a second convex portion 41564c, and a third convex portion 41564d protruding from positions facing a first concave portion 41571h, a second concave portion 41571i, and a third concave portion 41571j, which will be described later. be done.

The second path member 41570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 41571 facing the front plate 41564 of the first path member 41560, and a plate-shaped base plate 41571 that projects from the front side of the base plate 41571 (in the direction of arrow F) toward the first path member 41560. a fourth wall 573 (see FIG. 21), a fifth wall 574 (see FIG. 21) projecting downward from the fourth wall 573 at a predetermined distance apart; The sixth wall portion 575 (see FIG. 21) is formed so as to protrude downward from the portion 574 by a predetermined distance.

The base plate 41571 has a first recess 41571h, a second recess 41571i, and a second recess 41571h, which are recessed in the throwing path of the game ball (main path SK2, curved path WK1, and main path SK3) formed between facing the front plate 41564. 3 recesses 41571j.

The first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j are formed in a curved shape toward the back side. Further, the opposing dimensions of the first recess 41571h and the first protrusion 41564b, the opposing dimensions of the second recess 41571i and the second protrusion 41564c, and the opposing dimensions of the third recess 41571j and the third protrusion 41564d are as follows: They are each set to the same opposing distance L19 (see FIG. 201(b)).

In addition, the opposing dimension L19 is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is smaller than the opposing dimension L20 (see FIG. 201(b)) between the back of the front plate 41564 and the front of the base plate 571. is set to As a result, the game ball thrown between the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i, and the third concave portion 41571j and the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d is transferred to the first concave portion. 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i and the third concave portion 41571j, and the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d can be brought into contact to slow down the rolling (downward) speed of the game ball. can.

Furthermore, the protrusion dimensions of the first protrusion 41564b, the second protrusion 41564c, and the third protrusion 41564d toward the base plate 41571 are set to be the same. Further, the protruding tip surfaces of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d face the front surface of the base plate 41571 excluding the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i, and the third concave portion 41571j. The distance dimension L21 (see FIG. 201(b)) between them is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball thrown between the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i, and the third concave portion 41571j and the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d is placed in the first convex portion. 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d. As a result, the rolling (downward) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

The first recess 41571h is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK2, and is recessed long along the throwing direction of the game ball of the main path SK2. Thereby, when the game ball thrown inside the 1st recessed part 41571h is thrown inside the 1st recessed part 41571h, it can suppress that the frictional resistance with the 1st recessed part 41571h increases. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be prevented from stopping due to contact with the first recess 41571h.

The first convex portion 41564b protruding from the surface facing the first concave portion 41571h extends in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first concave portion 41571h. Thereby, when the game ball thrown along the main path SK2 comes into contact with the first convex portion 41564b, the game ball can be easily thrown inside the first recessed portion 41571h.

The second recess 41571i is formed in the base plate 41571 of the curved path WK1, and is recessed long along the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). The second recess 41571i has an elliptical shape in a front view that is elongated in the vertical direction, and the middle position of the ellipse in the left-right direction is set at the middle position in the left-right direction of the curved path WK1 extending in the vertical direction. Further, the center of curvature of the upper side (main path SK2 side) of the ellipse of the second recessed portion 41571i is arranged on the throwing trajectory of the center of the game ball thrown along the main path SK2. Therefore, since the second recessed portion 41571i is recessed above the trajectory of the game ball thrown from the main path SK2, even when the game ball is thrown at a relatively high speed along the main path SK2, the second recess 41571i The center of the game ball can be passed through the front side of the second recess 41571i. As a result, it is possible to easily slow down the speed of the game ball by throwing the game ball passing through the main path SK2 inside the second recess 41571i, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from going wild on the curved path WK1.

The second convex portion 41564c that protrudes from the surface facing the second concave portion 41571i is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. Further, the bent portion of the second convex portion 41564c is set on the front side of the center of curvature on the upper side of the ellipse of the second recessed portion 41571i when viewed from the front. Further, the bent portion on one side of the second convex portion 41564c extends in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1, and the bent portion on the other side extends in the direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK2. It extends in the direction perpendicular to the direction. As a result, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 comes into contact with the second convex part 41564c on the other side and is thrown inside the second concave part 41571i, and also to the second convex part 41564c on the one side. It is possible to easily reduce the throwing speed of the game ball thrown along the curved path WK11 by making contact with the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball thrown into the curved path WK1 from going wild and to smoothly throw the game ball.

The third recess 41571j is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK3, and is recessed in an elongated elliptical shape in the throwing direction of the game ball of the main path SK3. Thereby, when the game ball thrown inside the 3rd recessed part 41571j is thrown inside the 3rd recessed part 41571j, it can suppress that the frictional resistance with the 3rd recessed part 41571j increases. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 can be prevented from stopping due to contact with the third recess 41571j.

Further, the center of curvature of the upstream end of the throwing path of the game ball in the third recess 41571j is set below the center position in the left-right direction of the second recess 41571i. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the second recess 41571i of the curved path WK1 can be easily received into the second recess 41571i, and the game ball can be easily thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.

The third convex portion 41564d protruding from the surface facing the third concave portion 415671j is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. Further, the bent portion of the third convex portion 41564d is set on the front side of the center of curvature of the upstream end of the third recessed portion 41571j when viewed from the front. The bent portion on one side of the third convex portion 41564d extends in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK3, and the bent portion on the other side is perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. It extends in the direction. As a result, the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is brought into contact with the third convex portion 41564d on the other side and thrown inside the third concave portion 41571j, and is also thrown into the third convex portion 41564d on the one side. It is possible to reduce the throwing speed of the game ball that is thrown along the main path SK3 by making contact with the ball. As a result, the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK1 can be suppressed from going wild, and the game ball can be thrown smoothly.

Next, the game board 42013 in the 42nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 206. In the first embodiment, the other end side of the board box 100 (main controller 110) disposed in the back case 300 is fixed to the back case 300 by screws inserted from the back side of the board box 100. As described above, in the forty-second embodiment, a case will be described in which the second engaging member 42370 disposed on the back case 42300 is engaged with the board box 42100.

First, the overall configuration of the back case 42300 in the 42nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204. FIG. 203 is an exploded perspective front view of a rear case 42300 in the forty-second embodiment. 204(a) is a front view of the back case 42300, and FIG. 204(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 42300 taken along the line CCIVb-CCIVb in FIG. 204(a). Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, the rear case 42300 in the 42nd embodiment has a bottom wall portion 42301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 42301 toward the front. An outer wall portion 42302 is provided, and each wall portion 42301, 42302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open.

In addition, the rear case 42300 has an engaging member 310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 42301, and an engagement member 310 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 42300. The board box 42100 has a fixing member 320 that fixes one end of the board box 42100, and a second engagement member 42370 that is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall 42301 and fixes the other end of the board box 42100.

The bottom wall portion 42301 has a rectangular opening 301a formed in the center thereof when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible. The bottom wall portion 42301 also includes a protruding portion 301b that protrudes from the front side in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 310, and a first protruding portion 301b that is opened at a position opposing the fixing member 320. An opening 301c, a second opening 301d that opens at a position facing the engagement member 310, and a second engagement member that is provided in a cylindrical shape and protrudes from the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the bottom wall 42301, which will be described later. A second protruding portion 42301f inserted into the sliding groove 42372 of the member 42370, and a second protruding portion 42301f formed through the second protruding portion 42301f in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction) above the second protruding portion 42301f (in the direction of arrow U). 3 openings 42301g.

The second protruding portions 42301f are protrusions that define the displacement direction of the second engaging member 42370, and are formed in line at two locations in the direction of gravity. Further, the outer diameter of the second protrusion 42301f is set to be slightly smaller than the groove width in the lateral direction of a sliding groove 42372 of a second engaging member 42370, which will be described later. Furthermore, the distance between the centers of the two second protruding portions 42301f is set to be smaller than the groove width in the longitudinal direction of the sliding groove 42372. Thereby, the second protruding portions 42301f can be inserted and disposed at two locations inside the sliding groove 42372.

The third opening 42301g is an opening into which a protrusion 42118 of a substrate box 42100, which will be described later, is inserted, and has a size larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 42118 when viewed from the front. Further, the third opening 42301g allows the engagement member 310 to be released from the engagement with the fixation member 320 in the state where the engagement member 310 and the fixation member 320 are engaged (the state shown in FIG. 204(a)). are formed at positions adjacent to each other in the direction of arrow L (direction of arrow L). This makes it impossible to disengage the engagement member 310 from the fixing member 320 in a state where the protruding portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g. Note that a detailed description of the positional relationship between the protruding portion 42118 and the engaging member 310 will be given later.

The outer wall portion 42302 includes a second opening 42302b that opens in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow UD) on the side surface on the lower side (in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front. The second opening 42302b is an opening through which a lower end (in the direction of arrow D) of a second engagement member 42370, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in a displacement region of the second engagement member 42370. Thereby, the second engagement member 42370 can be displaced.

The board box 42100 has a horizontally long rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the main controller 110 is disposed inside. Further, the board box 42100 has a bearing part 117 (see FIG. 206(a)) that protrudes from one end (arrow R direction side) and a protruding part that protrudes from one surface of the front side of the board box 42100. 42118.

As described above, the protruding portion 42118 is a portion inserted into the third opening 42301g of the back case 42300, and when the front of the board box 42100 and the back of the back case 42300 are parallel, the back case 42300 The length is set such that an opening 42118a, which will be described later, is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall 42301 of. Furthermore, the protruding portion 42118 includes an opening 42118a that opens in the direction of gravity, and a second engaging member 42370, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 42118a. This prevents the board box 42100 from rotating around the fixing member 320, and allows the board box 42100 to be disposed on the back side of the back case 42300 (in the direction of arrow B) in a non-displaceable state.

Further, the third opening 42301g into which the protruding portion 42118 is inserted is in the state where the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged as described above (the state shown in FIG. 204(a)). Since the member 310 is formed at a position adjacent to the fixing member 320 in the direction in which it is disengaged (arrow L direction), the protruding portion 42118 is arranged at a position adjacent to the engaging member 310. In addition, the insertion dimension Y6 (see FIG. 204(b)) of the protruding portion 42118 into the third opening 42301g is the separation distance Y7 (see FIG. 204(b)) between the front surface of the engaging member 310 and the front surface of the bottom wall portion 42301. )). As a result, as shown in FIG. 204(b), the engaging member 310 and the protruding portion 42118 are arranged at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

Therefore, when the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a of the protrusion 42118, the direction in which the engagement member 310 disengages from the fixed member 320 (the direction in which the protrusion 42118 is disposed) is direction) is regulated. As a result, with the second engagement member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 310 from being illegally disengaged from the fixed member 320, and the board box 42100 (main controller 110) can be prevented from being exchanged to an unauthorized base.

Further, the opening 42118a of the protrusion 42118 is opened in the direction of gravity, and the second engagement member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a is displaced in the direction of gravity and inserted. Therefore, since the direction of displacement of the second engagement member 42370 (gravitational direction) and the direction of displacement (horizontal direction) of the engagement member 310 are set perpendicular to each other, the engagement member 310 is forced to move due to fraud by the player. The second engaging member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a can easily absorb the force caused by the operation. As a result, even if the engaging member 310 is forcibly operated by the player, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 310 from being disengaged from the fixing member 320.

The second engagement member 42370 includes a plate member 42371 formed in a plate shape having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a second engagement member 42370 extending downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the upper end (direction of arrow U) of the plate member 42371. A recessed portion 42374 is recessed, a second engaging portion 42373 is recessed, and a second engaging portion 42373 is protruded horizontally outward (in the direction of arrows LR) from the upper end (in the direction of arrow U) of the plate member 42371. It mainly includes a sliding groove 42372 located below the installation part 42374 and opened in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

As described above, the sliding groove 42372 is an opening for movably disposing the second engaging member 42370, and is opened long in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Furthermore, the width dimension of the sliding groove 42372 in the short direction (arrow LR direction) is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the second protrusion 42301f disposed inside the sliding groove 42372. Therefore, when the second protrusion 42301f is inserted into the sliding groove 42372 as described above, the sliding direction of the second engaging member 42370 is defined in the longitudinal direction of the opening of the sliding groove 42372.

The recessed portion 42374 is an opening for making it easier to elastically deform the upper end of the plate member 42371, and is recessed downward and cut out in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the rigidity of the upper end of the plate member 42371 can be lowered, making it easier to elastically deform.

The second engaging portion 42373 is a portion that engages with the end of the opening 42118a of the above-mentioned protruding portion 42118, and is protruded from both side surfaces of the recessed portion 42374 in a direction perpendicular to the notch direction. The separation distance X12 (see FIG. 204(a)) between the ends of the protrusions on both sides is set to be larger than the opening dimension X13 (see FIG. 204(b)) in the left-right direction of the opening 42118a. As a result, when the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engagement part 42373 engages with the end of the opening 42118a, so that the second engagement part 42373 is inserted into the opening 42118a. You can prevent yourself from getting out of it.

Note that the second engaging portion 42373 is formed in a shape that projects horizontally outward from the upper side of the plate member 42371 toward the lower side. Thereby, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engaging portion 42373 is brought into contact with the inside of the opening 42118a, making it easier to elastically deform the upper side of the plate member 42371. be able to.

In addition, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a (the engaging portion 42373 is engaged with the protruding portion 42118), the lower end portion of the second engaging member 42370 is connected to the second opening of the outer wall portion 42302. It is arranged inside the section 42302b. This can prevent the second engagement member 42370 from being operated from outside the back case 42300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the second engaging part 42373 and the protruding part 42118 from being illegally released and the board box 42100 (main controller 110) being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, a method for disposing the board box 42100 in the rear case 42300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205. 205(a) is a front view of the back case 42300, and FIG. 205(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 42300 taken along the CCVb-CCVb line in FIG. 205(a). Note that FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b) illustrate the state after the board box 42100 is arranged in the back case 42300, and FIGS. 205(a) and 205(b) show the state after the back case 42300 is installed. The state before the board box 42100 is arranged is illustrated in FIG.

In the board box 42100 in the 42nd embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the fixing member 320 is first engaged with the engaging member 310, and one side is disposed on the back side of the back case 42300. .

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 205(a) and 205(b), before the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixed member 320 (before being displaced), the tip of the second piece 312 of the engaging member 310 is , is arranged on the front side of the third opening 42301g. This can prevent the protruding portion 42118 of the board box 42100 from being inserted into the third opening 42301g before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. As a result, the board box 42100 can be prevented from being disposed in the back case 42300 only by engagement of the protruding portion 42118 and the second engaging member 42370.

Next, the other side of the board box 42100 is rotated around the connecting portion between the fixing member on one side and 320, and the protrusion 42118 is inserted inside the third opening 42301g of the back case 42300. Thereby, the protruding portion 42118 is placed in a position where it can engage with the second engaging member 42370.

Note that, before the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the third opening 42301g, the lower side thereof is inserted into the second opening 42302b, and the second engagement member 42370 is disposed outside the back case 42300 (FIG. 205(a) reference). As a result, the operator who arranges the board box 42100 in the rear case 42300 operates the second engaging member 42370 from the outside of the rear case 42300, and the second engaging member 42370 is placed inside the third opening 42301g. can be inserted into the

In addition, since the displacement direction of the second engagement member 42370 is set in the direction of gravity, the second engagement member 42370 is disposed at the lower end due to the action of gravity before being inserted inside the third opening 42301g. . Thereby, when the protruding portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g of the back case 42300, it can be suppressed from colliding with the second engagement member 42370. As a result, the work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

In addition, if the second engaging member 42370 is forgotten to engage with the protruding portion 42118, the second engaging member 42370 can be placed outside the back case 42300, so that the operator will not be in a normal state. can be easily recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second engaging member 42370 from forgetting to engage with the protruding portion 42118.

Next, the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 206(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line CCVIb-CCVIb in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206, an upright member 4206Of is provided on the back surface of a base plate 42060 in the forty-second embodiment. The upright member 42060f is erected toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 42060, and its upright tip position is set on the same plane as the bottom wall portion 42301 of the back case 42300. . Further, the upright member 4206Of is arranged below the second engagement member 42370 and on the outside of the back case 42300. As a result, when the back case 42300 is disposed on the game board 42013 with the second engagement member 42370 and the protruding portion 42118 forgotten to be engaged, the upright member 4206Of is attached to the second engagement member 42370. It can be caused to collide with the lower side. As a result, when the second engaging member 42370 and the protruding portion 42118 are forgotten to be engaged, or when the board box 42100 is forgotten to be disposed on the rear case 42300, the rear case 42300 is disposed on the base plate 42060. It is possible to suppress the setting of

Note that in this embodiment, a light emitting board that illuminates the inside of the back case 42300 is disposed on the standing member 4206Of. Thereby, the upright member 42060f can be used both as a part that irradiates light and as a part that suppresses engagement between the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the external size of the base plate 42060 from increasing.

Next, a rear case 43300 according to the forty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 211. In the first embodiment, the engaged portion 332 is formed on the fixed member 320. However, the engaged portion 43101 in the 43rd embodiment is formed on the board box 43100 that is pivotally supported on the fixed member 43320. is formed. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the back case 43300 in the 43rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 211. FIG. 207 is an exploded perspective front view of a rear case 43300 in the forty-third embodiment. 208(a) is a front view of the rear case 43300, and FIG. 208(b) is a rear view of the rear case 43300. 209(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 43300 taken along the CCIXa-CCIXa line in FIG. 208(b), and FIG. 209(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 43300 taken along the CCIXb-CCIXb line in FIG. It is a diagram. Note that FIGS. 208 and 209 illustrate a state in which the engaging member 18310 and the substrate box 43100 (engaged portion 43101) are engaged.

As shown in FIGS. 207 to 209, the rear case 43300 in the 43rd embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 43301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and is erected toward the front from the outer edges of the four pieces of the bottom wall portion 43301. An outer wall portion 18302 is provided, and each wall portion 43301, 18302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open. In addition, the rear case 43300 has an engaging member 18310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) of the bottom wall portion 43301, and an engagement member 18310 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 43300. and a fixing member 43320 that fixes (spins) the board box 43100 (main controller 110).

The bottom wall portion 43301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 43301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is said that The bottom wall portion 43301 also includes a first opening 43301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 43320, and a protruding portion located below the first opening 43301c (in the direction of arrow D) and protruding toward the front side. 18301b.

The protrusion 18301b is a protrusion that pivotally supports the engagement member 18310, as in the eighteenth embodiment, and protrudes from the front of the bottom wall 43301 in a cylindrical shape. Further, a hole into which a screw is screwed is provided in the protruding end surface of the protruding portion 18301b. Thereby, by screwing the screw into the protrusion 18301b while the engagement member 18310 is disposed on the back case 18300, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 18310 from slipping out from the protrusion 18301b.

Note that the center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the back case 43300 is located closer to the opening 18302a of the outer wall 18302 than the protrusion 18301b of the back case 43300. As a result, in a state where no external force is applied, the engagement member 18310 is rotated by gravity in a direction in which the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 protrudes from the opening 18302a of the rear case 43300. It is affected by Therefore, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 43320 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 is made to protrude outside the back case 43300 and the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixation member 43320 is prevented. Forgetting can be prevented.

The first opening 43301c is an opening for inserting an engaged portion 43101 of a board box 43100, which will be described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the engaged portion 43101 when viewed from the front. This allows the engaged portion 43101 of the board box 43100 to be placed from the back side of the back case 43300 to the front side of the back case 43300 after the accessory device (rotation unit 700 is arranged inside the back case 43300). can.

Further, at the edge of the first opening 43301c, a projecting wall 43301c1 (see FIG. 209(a) ) and a second projecting wall 43301c2 (see FIG. 209(a)) for engaging a second locking portion 43336 formed on the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 43320, which will be described later. It is installed protrudingly.

The protruding tip portions of the protruding wall 43301c1 and the second protruding wall 43301c2 on the back side (arrow B direction side) are bent in opposite directions. Thereby, in a state where the fixing member 43320 described later is engaged with the protruding wall 43301c1 and the second protruding wall 43301c2, it is possible to suppress the fixing member 43320 from being swung and disengaging from the fixing member 43320.

As described in the eighteenth embodiment, the protruding portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports the engaging member 18310, and protrudes from the front of the bottom wall portion 43301 in a cylindrical shape. Therefore, the engagement member 18310 is disposed on the back case 43300 in a rotatable state about the center of the protrusion 18310b.

The fixing member 43320 includes an intervening member 43330 that engages with the bottom wall portion 43301 of the rear case 43300, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the intervening member 43330.

The intervening member 43330 is formed in a box shape with an open front side, and has a locking part 331 protruding from one side (the side in the direction of arrow R) and a locking part 331 provided on the bottom of the box shape (the side in the direction of arrow B). An insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39(b)) that opens in a cylindrical shape, a protrusion 334 (see FIG. 39(b)) that protrudes from the back side, and one side from the inner surface of the other side (arrow L direction side). It mainly includes a second locking portion 43336 that projects toward the front.

The locking part 331 has an opening for engaging one side (arrow R direction side) of the fixing member 43320 with the bottom wall part 43301, and has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 43301c to the opening. A protruding wall 43301c1 that protrudes from is inserted. As a result, when installing the intervening member 43330 (fixing member 43320) on the back case 43300, the protruding wall 43301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 331 of the intervening member 43330, and one side of the intervening member 43330 (arrow R direction side) can be locked to the back case 43300.

The second locking portion 43336 is a projection for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 43320 with the second projecting wall 43301c2 formed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 43301, as described above, When viewed from the front, it is formed at a position overlapping the bent portion at the tip of the second projecting wall 43301c2. In addition, when the second locking portion 43336 is engaged with the second projecting wall 43301c2 (the state shown in FIG. 209(a)), the second locking portion 43336 is positioned closer to the front side than the bent portion at the tip of the second projecting wall 43301c2. be located. This can prevent the other side of the fixing member 43320 from moving toward the back side.

Furthermore, the front surface of the second locking portion 43336 is inclined toward the back side as it goes from the protruding base end side (the other side of the fixing member 43320) to the protruding tip side (one side of the fixing member 43320). Thereby, when the second locking portion 43336 is engaged with the second projecting wall 43301c2, the protruding tip of the second projecting wall 43301c2 can be easily slid along the front surface of the second locking portion 43301c2. Therefore, the fixing member 43320 can be engaged with the back side of the back case 43300 (bottom wall portion 43301).

Note that, after inserting the protruding wall 43301c1 of the bottom wall portion 43301 inside the opening of the locking portion 331 on one side, the fixing member 43320 inserts the second locking portion 43336 on the other side into the bottom wall portion 43301 side (front side). ) and elastically deforms the other side of the fixing member 43320 while moving the second locking part 43336 to the front side of the bent end of the second protruding wall 43301c2 of the bottom wall part 43301. It is arranged on the bottom wall part 43301).

The board box 43100 has a horizontally long rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the main controller 110 is disposed inside. Further, the board box 43100 includes a bearing part 117 protruding from one end (in the direction of arrow R) and an engaged part 43101 protruding from the front of the board box 43100.

The engaged portion 43101 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310 as described above, and is shown in FIGS. 208(a) and 208(b ), the protrusion dimension toward the rear case 43300 side (arrow F direction side) is set to a dimension exceeding the front surface of the engagement member 18310 disposed on the rear case 43300. Further, the engaged portion 43101 includes an opening portion 43101a that opens in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in a front view on the front side of the bottom wall portion 43301 of the rear case 43300.

Further, the engaged portion 43101 is in a state where the board box 43100 is disposed on the back side of the rear case 43300 (a state where the board box 43100 is engaged with the engaging member 18310 (a state shown in FIG. 209(a)) ) is formed at a position horizontally adjacent to the other side of the fixing member 43320. As a result, when the fixing member 43320 is forcibly pulled toward the back side due to fraud by the player, the other side of the fixing member 43320 moves in a direction that releases the engagement between the second locking portion 43336 and the second projecting wall 43301c2. Elastic deformation can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the board box 43100 is not disposed on the back side of the rear case 43300 (the state where the board box 43100 is not engaged with the engaging member 18310 (the state shown in FIG. 210(a)), the Since the engaging part 43101 can be placed at a position apart from the other side of the fixing member 43320, the fixing member 43320 can be easily engaged with the engaged part 43101 (or the fixed member 43320 can be easily engaged with the engaged part 43101). 43101).

The opening 43101a is formed at a position corresponding to the displacement area of the engagement member 18310 excluding the engagement portion 18316. Thereby, the engaging member 18310 can be inserted inside the opening 43101a and the engaged portion 43101 and the engaging member 18310 can be engaged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the substrate box 43100 will be described. 210(a) and 210(b) are cross-sectional views of the rear case 43300. 210(a) and 210(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 209(a), and in the order of FIG. 210(a), FIG. 210(b), and FIG. A transition state when engaging the mating member 18310 with the substrate box 43100 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 210(a), when engaging the engaging member 18310 and the board box 43100, first, the intervening member 43330 and the shaft supporting member 340 are fastened (integrated) as described above. The fixing member 43320 in the state (fixing member 43320 in the state shown in FIG. 207) is engaged with the back side of the back case 43300 (bottom wall portion 43301).

Next, as shown in FIG. 210(b), the other side of the board box 43100 opposite to the one side where the bearing part 117 is formed is pressed toward the back side of the back case 43300, and the board box 43100 is The board box 43100 is rotated relative to the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 43320) about a caulking fitting (not shown) that connects the shaft support member 340 as an axis. As a result, the front surface of the board box 43100 is placed in a position substantially parallel to the back surface of the rear case 43300, and the opening 43101a of the engaged portion 43101 is connected to the bottom wall portion 43301 through the first opening 43301c of the rear case 43300. The opening 43101a is arranged in the displacement region of the engagement member 18310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 209(a), by rotationally displacing the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 toward the opening 43101a, one side of the engaging member 18310 (the The end portion (181316 side) can be inserted into the opening 43101a while being elastically deformed, and placed in a position via the engaged portion 43101.

Finally, connect the other end of the board box 43100 opposite to the one side on which the bearing part 117 is formed, toward the bottom wall part 43301 of the back case 43300. ) and fixed with screws that are fastened to the rear case 43300. As a result, the board box 43100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 43300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state. Note that the work of fastening the other side of the board box 43100 to the back side of the back case 43300 with screws may be performed before engaging the engaging member 18310 with the engaged portion 43101.

According to the back case 43300 assembled as described above, the engaged portion 43101 that the engaging member 18300 engages is formed in the board box 43100, so the board box 43100 is attached to the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 43320). If it is not pivoted (forgetting to dispose the board box 43100), the engaging member 18300 will not be able to engage.

Further, as described above, when no external force is applied to the engaging member 18300, the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 projects in the direction in which it projects from the opening 18302a of the back case 18300 due to gravity. A rotating force is applied to the engagement member 18310. Therefore, if you forget to arrange the board box 43100, by positioning the engaging member 18310 outside the rear case 43300, the fixing member 43320 and the board box 43310 can be arranged on the bottom wall 43301 of the rear case 43300. This allows the operator to notice the abnormality (forgetting to place the board box 43100). Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the board box 43100 (main controller 110) that controls the pachinko machine 10, so the board box 43100 is installed in the later stages of the assembly process (for example, when checking the operation). It makes it easier to discover things that aren't there. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being introduced into a store (for example, a pachinko parlor) in a defective state (with a part forgotten to be attached).

Furthermore, as in the eighteenth embodiment, if the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the engaged portion 43101 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 can be projected to the outside of the back case 18300. , distance dimension LR1 from the end of the engaging member 18310 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the game board 13 to the right-hand side (arrow R direction side) end of the back case 43300 (see FIG. 164(a)) is set larger than the inner left-right dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164(b)) in the left-right direction of the outer frame 11 on which the game board 13 is arranged. Thereby, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged, it is possible to suppress the game board 13 from being disposed on the outer frame 11. As a result, before the pachinko machine 10 is assembled and the operation is checked, it can be noticed that the board box 43100 has been forgotten. This can prevent electricity from passing through. As a result, failure of other boards and electrical components due to forgetting to dispose the board box 43100 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, when the engagement member 18310 is in a disengaged state with the engaged portion 43101 due to factors such as resistance due to contact with the protruding portion 18301b serving as the rotation axis, the engagement member 18310 is in the disengaged state. A case will be described in which the mating member 18310 stops at the engagement position with the engaged portion 43101. 211(a) and 211(b) are cross-sectional views of the rear case 43300. Note that FIGS. 211(a) and 211(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 209(a). 211(a) and 211(b) illustrate the state before the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 43101 of the board box 43100 are engaged. A state in which the substrate box 43100 is displaced is illustrated in the order of (b).

As shown in FIG. 211(a), when the engagement member 18310 is in a disengaged state with the engaged portion 43101 due to factors such as resistance due to contact with the protruding portion 18301b serving as the rotation axis, When the mating member 18310 is stopped at the engagement position with the engaged portion 43101, the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 (the end on the side in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 211(a)) touches the engaged portion. 43109 on the side surface of the bearing portion 117 side, on the displacement locus of the protruding tip portion (imaginary line A shown in FIGS. 211(a) and 211(b)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 211(b), when the board box 43100 is rotated with respect to the fixed member 43320, the side surface of the engaged portion 43109 on the bearing portion 117 side is moved to the first piece of the engaging member 18310. It can be brought into contact with the tip end surface of 18311.

In this case, the direction of displacement of the engaged portion 43109 and the direction of displacement when the engaging member 18310 is disengaged are set to be substantially the same. Thereby, the force of rotating the board box 43100 toward the bottom wall portion 43301 of the rear case 43300 can be used as a force for pushing back the engaging member 18310 via the engaged portion 43101.

Here, since the engaged part 43101 that engages with the engaging member 18310 is formed in the board box 43100 (an expensive part), it is necessary to replace the board box 43100 if the engaged part 43101 is damaged. , there was a risk that manufacturing costs would increase.

Further, when the engaging member 18310 is not engaged with the engaged portion 43101 due to factors such as resistance due to contact with the protruding portion 18301b serving as the rotation axis, the engaging member 18310 is not engaged with the engaged portion 43101. When the engaging member 18300 is stopped at the engagement position with the portion 43101, the engaging member 18300 is moved from the back side of the bottom wall portion 43301 of the rear case 43300 to the front side of the bottom wall portion 43302 in the displacement region of the engaged portion 43101. will be placed. Therefore, when the substrate box 43100 is displaced, the engaged portion 43101 may collide with the engaging member 18310, and the engaged portion 43101 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the 43rd embodiment, when disposing the fixing member 43320 on the bottom wall portion 43301 of the rear case 43300, the engaging member 18300 is arranged at a predetermined position (part of the engaging member 18310 is When the board box 43100 is not placed in the position protruding from the opening 18302a of the case 43300, the engagement member 18300 is moved to a predetermined position using the force that moves the board box 43100 to the back side of the bottom wall 43301 of the rear case 43300. It can be moved to any position. As a result, damage to the engaged portion 43101 of the board box 43100 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214, a rear case 44300 according to the 44th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the movement of the engagement member 310 is regulated by a screw inserted into the rear base 720 of the rotation unit 700. However, in the forty-fourth embodiment, the engagement member 44310 is When engaged with the substrate box 44100, the movement of the engagement member 44310 is regulated by being engaged with a protrusion 44102 protruding from the board box 44100. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the rear case 44300 in the 44th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213. FIG. 212 is an exploded perspective front view of a rear case 44300 in the forty-fourth embodiment. 213(a) is a front view of the back case 44300, and FIG. 213(b) is a sectional view of the back case 44300 taken along the line CCXIIIb-CCXIIIb in FIG. 213(a). FIGS. 213(a) and 213(b) illustrate a state in which the engaging member 44310 and the board box 44100 (protruding portion 44102) are engaged.

As shown in FIGS. 212 and 213, the rear case 44300 in the 44th embodiment includes a bottom wall 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and is erected from the outer edges of the four pieces of the bottom wall 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. In addition, the back case 44300 includes an engaging member 44310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 301, and the back case 44300 (bottom wall 301). A fixing member 44320 that is disposed on the back side of the board box 44100 (main controller 110) and fixes (spins) the board box 44100 (main controller 110).

The engaging member 44310 has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and includes a first piece 44311 and a second piece 312 extending in parallel directions to each other, and the first piece 44311 and the second piece 312. The third piece 313 connects the ends of the first piece 44311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction thereof. Moreover, a sliding groove 314 is formed in each of the first piece 44311 and the second piece 312.

The first piece 44311 has an end on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected, as an engaging portion with a fixing member 44320 to be described later. The engaging portion 316 is formed to protrude outward on both sides in the up and down direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 44311, and the engaging portion 316 at the two locations. A recess 44317 recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 311 (direction of arrow LR) from the approximately intermediate position and toward the bottom wall 301 side (back side (direction of arrow B)) of the back case 44300. A protruding operator 315 is provided.

The recess 44317 is formed by cutting out the first piece 44311 in the thickness direction (arrow FB direction), and extends from one end (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 44311 to the other side (arrow L direction side). ). Therefore, one side of the first piece 44311 is divided into two. Thereby, the rigidity of one side of the first piece 44311 can be made lower than that of the other side. As a result, one side of the first piece 44311 can be easily elastically deformed, and the engaging member 44310 can be easily engaged with the fixing member 44320. Note that the method of engaging the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 is the same as the method of engaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 in the first embodiment, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. .

Further, the recessed portion 44317 is provided on the recessed bottom surface recessed toward the other side (arrow L direction side) toward the third piece 313 side (arrow L direction side) toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (arrow B direction side). ) is provided.

The inclined surface 44317a is a surface for sliding the protruding portion 44102 when the protruding tip of the protruding portion 44102 of the substrate box 44100 which will be described later comes into contact with the inclined surface 44317a. An angle of 45 degrees or less in the direction opposite to the sliding direction when the engaging member 44310 is engaged with the fixed member 44320 with respect to the moving direction (direction of arrow FB) of the protrusion 44102 when disposed in the (acute angle). Thereby, when the tip of the protruding part 44102 of the board box 44100 abuts, the protruding part 44102 can be easily slid and displaced along the inclined surface 44317a.

The fixing member 44320 is composed of a separate member from the back case 44300. As a result, the board box 44100 can be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 44320, which has a smaller outer diameter than the rear case 44300. Easy to set up. As a result, the board box 44100 can be easily disposed in the rear case 44300 in a state where the board box 44100 is difficult to be removed from the fixing member 44320.

The fixing member 320 includes an intervening member 330 that engages with the above-described engaging member 44310, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the intervening member 330. Thereby, the shaft supporting member 340 can be used as a second-use item having the same shape as the fixing member of another game machine. Further, the shaft support member 340 is caulked and fastened to a bearing portion 117 of a board box 44100 (main controller 110), which will be described later. Note that the board box 44100 is held in a rotatable state relative to the shaft support member 340 by fastening with caulking metal fittings.

The board box 44100 has a horizontally long rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the main controller 110 is disposed inside. Further, the board box 44100 includes a bearing part 117 protruding from one end (in the direction of arrow R) and a protruding part 44102 protruding from the front of the board box 44100. Note that the protruding portion 44102 of the board box 44100 is made of an elastically deformable resin material, and can be elastically deformed when brought into contact with the engagement member 44310 as described later.

The protruding portion 44102 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 44310 as described above, and is shown in FIGS. 213(a) and 213(b) The protrusion dimension toward the rear case 44300 side (in the direction of arrow F) is set to a dimension exceeding the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the engagement member 44310 disposed on the rear case 44300. A bent portion 44012a that is bent toward the third piece 313 side (arrow L direction side) of the engaging member 44310 is provided at the distal end portion of the engaging member 44310 that extends to the front side.

Furthermore, in a state where the board box 44100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 44300 and the engagement member 44310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the protrusion part 44102 has a proximal end excluding the bent part 44102a. It is arranged inside the recess 44317 of the engagement member 44310 and at a position adjacent to the recessed bottom surface (slanted surface 44317a) of the recess 44317. Therefore, the bent portion 44102a can be placed at a position overlapping the engagement member 44310 when viewed from the front.

As a result, the board box 44100 is rotated around the caulking fitting (the part pivotally supported by the support part 342) with the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 engaged, and the board box 44100 (main controller 110 ) can be prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized board box.

Further, the width dimension of the protruding portion 44102 in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow UD) is set to be approximately the same as the width dimension in the vertical direction of the recessed portion 44317 of the engagement member 44310. This can prevent the first piece 44311 of the engaging member 44310 from being elastically deformed inside the recess 44317 from the state in which the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 from being illegally released and the board box 44100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 44320 being replaced with an incorrect board. .

In the 44th embodiment, after the board box 44100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 44300 (the position shown in FIG. 213(b)), the operator 315 is inserted between the back case 44300 and the board box 44100. The engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged with each other by operation. Thereby, the bent portion 44102a can be placed on the front side of the engaging member 44310 without the protruding portion 44102 of the board box 44100 and the engaging member 44310 coming into contact with each other.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, a case will be described in which the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged with each other before the board box 44100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 44300.

FIGS. 214(a) to 214(c) are cross-sectional views of the back case 44300. Note that FIGS. 214(a) to 214(c) correspond to the cross-sectional views of the rear case 44300 in FIG. 213(b). Further, FIGS. 214(a) to 214(c) show transition states when the board box 44100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 44300 in a state where the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged. are illustrated in order.

As shown in FIG. 214(a), in a state before the engagement member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged (a state in which the engagement member 44310 is disposed in the direction of arrow L), the engagement member 44310 is attached to the board box. It is located outside the displacement area of the protruding portion 44102 of 44100. Therefore, when the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are not engaged, the board box 44100 rotates around the caulking fitting (the part pivotally supported by the support part 342) without coming into contact with the engaging member 44310. It can be arranged on the back side of the back case 44300.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 214(b), when the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged (the engaging member 44310 is disposed in the direction of arrow R), the engaging member 44310 is It is set at a position that overlaps the displacement area of the protrusion 44102 of the board box 44100.

Here, the board box 44100 is a component that includes the main controller 110 and the like, and is more expensive than other components (for example, the fixing member 44320). Therefore, with the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 engaged, the board box 44100 rotates around the caulking fitting (the part that is pivotally supported by the support part 342) and is disposed on the back side of the back case 44300. When the board box 44100 is moved, the protruding portion 44102 may come into contact with the engaging member 44310 and the board box 44100 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the 44th embodiment, since the engaging member 44310 includes the inclined surface 44317a in the recessed portion 44317, the tip portion of the protruding portion 44102 comes into contact with the inclined surface 44317a, as shown in FIG. 214(c). can be done. As a result, the protruding portion 44102 is elastically tilted toward the front side of the inclined surface 44317a (in the direction of arrow R) by using the force with which the board box 44100 is pushed toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). It can be transformed. Therefore, the tip of the protrusion 44102 can be displaced toward the front along the inclined surface 44317a while elastically deforming the protrusion 44102. As a result, damage to the board box 44100 due to the protrusion 44102 coming into contact with the engagement member 44310 can be suppressed.

Further, when the protrusion part 44102 is slid along the inclined surface 44317a, a part of the elastic recovery force of the protrusion part 44102 is generated in the direction of disengaging the fixing member 44320 from the engagement member 44310 (direction of arrow L). Therefore, when the engagement between the engagement member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 is incomplete, the engagement between the engagement member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 can be released. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) from being assembled in a state where the engagement member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are incompletely engaged.

Note that when the bent portion 44102a is displaced to a position exceeding the front side of the engaging member 44310, the protruding portion 44102 returns its elastic deformation and is disposed in the position shown in FIGS. 213(a) and 213(b). be done.

Next, a rear case 45300 according to the 45th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 217. In the 18th embodiment or the 43rd embodiment, a case has been described in which the engaging member 18310 is engaged with either the fixing member 18320 or the board box 43100, but the rear case 45300 in the 45th embodiment Engagement member 18310 is engaged with both fixing member 320 and substrate box 45100. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the back case 45300 in the 45th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216. FIG. 215 is an exploded perspective front view of a rear case 45300 in the forty-fifth embodiment. 216(a) is a front view of the rear case 45300, and FIG. 216(b) is a rear view of the rear case 45300. 217(a) is a front view of the rear case 45300, and FIG. 216(b) is a rear view of the rear case 45300. Note that FIGS. 216(a) and 216(b) illustrate a state in which the engaging member 18300 is engaged with the fixing member 320 and the board box 45100, and FIG. 217(a) and FIG. A state in which the mating member 18300 is engaged only with the fixing member 320 (not engaged with the substrate box 45100) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 215 to 217, the rear case 45300 in the 45th embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 45301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and is erected toward the front from the outer edges of the four pieces of the bottom wall portion 45301. An outer wall portion 18302 is provided, and each wall portion 45301 and 18302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open. In addition, the back case 45300 includes an engaging member 18310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 45301, and a back case 45300 (bottom wall 45301). ), and a fixing member 320 that fixes (spins) the board box 45100 (main controller 110).

The bottom wall portion 45301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 45301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. be done. The bottom wall portion 45301 also includes a first opening 45301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 45320, and a protruding portion located below the first opening 45301c (in the direction of arrow D) and protruding toward the front side. 18301b.

The protrusion 18301b is a protrusion that pivotally supports the engagement member 18310, as in the eighteenth embodiment, and protrudes from the front of the bottom wall 45301 in a cylindrical shape. Further, a hole into which a screw is screwed is provided in the protruding end surface of the protruding portion 18301b. Thereby, by screwing the screw into the protrusion 18301b while the engagement member 18310 is disposed on the back case 18300, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 18310 from slipping out from the protrusion 18301b.

Note that the center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the back case 45300 is located closer to the opening 18302a of the outer wall 18302 than the protrusion 18301b of the back case 45300. As a result, when no external force is applied, a force that rotates the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 in the direction protruding from the opening 18302a of the rear case 45300 due to gravity is applied to the engaging member 18310. It is affected by Therefore, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 45320 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 is made to protrude outside the back case 45300, and the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixation member 45320 is It is possible to prevent forgetting.

The first opening 45301c is an opening for inserting the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 and the engaged portion 45101 of the board box 45100, which will be described later, and corresponds to the two engaged portions 332 and 45101. It has a long opening in the horizontal direction. This allows the engaged portion 45101 of the board box 45100 to be placed from the back side of the back case 45300 to the front side of the back case 45300 after the accessory device (rotation unit 700 is arranged inside the back case 45300). can.

Furthermore, a projecting wall 45301c1 for engaging a locking portion 331 formed on one side (arrow R direction side) of the fixing member 45320 is provided protrudingly from the edge of the first opening 45301c. The tip of the projecting wall 45301c1 is bent in the direction (direction of arrow R) opposite to the direction of displacement (direction of arrow L) when an engaging member 18310 (described later) is engaged with the engaged portion 45101. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 is engaged with the engaged portion 45101, the fixed member 45320 moves in the direction of displacement of the engaging member 18310 as the engaged portion 45101 is pressed by the engaging member 18310. , it is possible to suppress the projecting wall 45301c1 from slipping out from the opening of the locking portion 331. As a result, it is possible to suppress the engagement between one side (arrow R direction side) of the fixing member 45320 and the back case 45300 from being disengaged.

As described in the eighteenth embodiment, the protruding portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports the engagement member 18310, and protrudes from the front of the bottom wall portion 45301 in a cylindrical shape. Therefore, the engaging member 18310 is arranged in the back case 45300 in a rotatable state about the center of the protrusion 18310b.

The board box 45100 has a horizontally long rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the main controller 110 is disposed inside. Further, the board box 45100 includes a bearing part 117 protruding from one end (in the direction of arrow R) and an engaged part 45101 protruding from the front of the board box 45100.

The engaged portion 45101 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310 when the tip of one side is inserted inside the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320, and the substrate box 45100 is connected to the back case 45300 (bottom). In the state where the wall portion 45301) is disposed on the back side (the position shown in FIG. 216(a)), the protruding dimension toward the back case 45300 side (in the direction of arrow F) is the engagement disposed on the back case 45300. The dimension is set to exceed the front surface of member 18310. Further, the engaged portion 45101 includes an opening portion 45101a that opens in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in a front view on the front side of the bottom wall portion 45301 of the rear case 45300.

The opening 45101a is an opening into which the first piece 18311 of the engagement member 18310 is inserted, and is opened at a position corresponding to the displacement area of the first piece 18311 of the engagement member 18310 excluding the engagement member 18316. It is formed. Thereby, the engaging member 18310 can be inserted inside the opening 45101a, and the engaged portion 45101 and the engaging portion 45310 can be engaged.

Further, the engaged portion 45101 is spaced apart from the engaged portion 332 of the fixed member 320 by a predetermined distance and is arranged at a different position in the direction of displacement when the engaging member 18310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332. . Thereby, after the engaging member 18310 is engaged with the fixed member 320, the engaged portion 332 of the engaged portion 45101 and the engaging member 18310 can be engaged.

Note that the distance between the engaged portion 45101 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixed member 320 is set to be greater than or equal to the length of the engaging portion 18316 in the displacement direction of the engaging member 18310. Thereby, the engaging portion 18316 of the engaging member 18310 can be arranged between the two engaged portions 332 and 45101 in front view (see FIG. 217(a)). As a result, it is possible to engage the engagement member 18310 with the fixing member 320 and maintain a state in which it is not engaged with the substrate box 45100.

This makes it possible to engage the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 18310 and rotationally displace the board box 45100 with respect to the fixing member 320 with the fixing member 320 disposed on the back side of the rear case 45300. can.

According to the rear case 45300 configured as described above, when disposing the fixing member 320 and the board box 45100 on the rear case 45300 (bottom wall part 45301), first, as shown in FIG. 45100 connected with a caulking metal fitting is placed on the back side of the rear case 45300 (bottom wall portion 45301), and the engaging member 18310 is rotated to attach the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 to the fixing member 320. to be engaged with the engaged portion 332 of. Thereby, the substrate box 45100 can be supported by the fixing member 320 in a state in which the engaging member 18310 is not engaged with the board box 45100.

Therefore, the board box 45100 can be rotated around the caulking fitting (the part pivotally supported by the support part 342) at a position on the back side of the back case 45300 (bottom wall part 4531). Therefore, wiring can be easily connected to the board box 45100 (main controller 110).

Next, as shown in FIG. 217, after rotating the board box 45100 toward the rear case 45300 and placing the front of the board box 45100 in a position parallel to the back of the rear case 45300 (bottom wall portion 45301), , the engaging member 18100 is rotated toward the engaged portion 45101 side of the substrate box 45100 (in the direction of arrow L). Thereby, the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18100 can be inserted inside the opening 45101a of the engaged portion 45101. As a result, the board box 45100 can be fixed to the back side of the back case 45300.

Therefore, in the 45th embodiment, the engagement member 18300 can have the role of fixing the two members, the fixing member 320 and the board box 45100, to the back side of the back case 45300. As a result, the board box 45100 can be attached to the back side of the back case 45300 without fixing one side of the bearing part 117 side and the other side opposite to the side (arrow L direction side) to the back side of the back case 45300. can be fixed, reducing manufacturing costs.

In this case, the engaging portion (the engaging portion between the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 45101) for fixing the other side (arrow L direction side) of the back case 45300 to the back case 45300 The base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) can be disposed between the bottom wall portion 45301 of the base plate 60 and the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). As a result, it can be difficult to access the engaging portion of the board box 45100 from the outside of the rear case 45300 and the base plate 60. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 45100 from being illegally disengaged and replacing the board box 45100 (main controller 110) with an unauthorized main controller.

In addition, in order to remove the board box 45100 from the back case 45300 in the 45th embodiment, the base board 60 (see FIG. 2) and the back case 45300 are disassembled from the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), which are assembled together. After that, each accessory device (eg, rotation unit 700) disposed inside the back case 45300 (on the front side of the bottom wall portion 45301) is removed. As a result, the engagement portion between the engagement member 18310 and the substrate box 45100 can be accessed, and the first piece 18311 of the engagement member 18310 is elastically deformed to connect the substrate box 45100, the fixing member 320, and the engagement member 18310. The engagement can be released.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In the first embodiment, the ball receiving part 467 is retracted from the third position to the second position or the first position according to the drive of the drive motor KM2. The drive for retracting to the first position may be driven by a biasing spring. For example, a biasing spring is disposed between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470, so that an elastic force is applied as the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 is displaced.

In this case, when the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the third position and performs the dispensing operation, by turning off the drive of the drive motor KM3, the ball receiver 467 is moved to the second position or the second position by the biasing force of the biasing spring. It can be displaced toward the 1st position.

Therefore, the ball receiving part 467 can be displaced by utilizing the time until the driving force of the drive motor KM2 is switched to the third position, so that the ejection when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467 can be avoided. It is possible to suppress wobbling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction of the operation.

That is, when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467, the load on the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 440 tends to be displaced upward due to the reaction. Immediately displacing the ball receiver 467 applies a force that displaces the base member 470 downward due to the reaction caused by the rotational displacement of the ball receiver 467, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 440. be able to.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which two engaging protrusions 882 that restrict the rotation of the rotating body 800 are formed on the side surface of the rotating body 800 at a predetermined interval, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, a plurality of them may be arranged in a row on the side wall of the rotating body 800 at predetermined intervals. In this case, rotation of the rotating body 800 can be restricted at any position, and rotation of the rotating body 800 due to external force can be restricted when the lid member 770 is in the open state.

In the first embodiment, the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the game ball is thrown from the opening 831. may be formed on the side of the That is, openings may be formed on both sides of the rotating body 800 in the axial direction, one of which may be used as an inlet for the balls, and the other may be used as an outlet for the balls. In this case, since the ball throwing path can be formed inside the rotating body 800, the accessory (the rotating body 800) can be used as the ball throwing path, especially when there is no space for placing the ball on the back side of the game board 13. , it is possible to secure a throwing path without increasing the size of the game board 13.

In the first embodiment, the rotating body 800 has a cylindrical outer shape, but the outer shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be a polygon, an ellipse, or a combination thereof. In this case, since the shape of the rotating body 800 can be made complicated, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the effect has been switched due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the outer circumferential surface of the rotary operation section 8654 is formed to be operable by the player, but a push-in button may be provided on the outer circumferential surface of the rotary operation section 8654. In this case, the player can not only apply rotational force to the rotational operation section 8654, but also press a push button, or perform a combination of rotational operation and push operation of the rotational operation section 8654. . As a result, it is possible to create a plurality of operation modes for the rotary operation section 8654, which can provide interest to the player.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 are in mesh with each other, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a torque limiter or the like may be interposed between the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 to interrupt the transmission of driving force when an overload is applied.

In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotary operation section 8654 in the rotating state, the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM6 can be interrupted, and the rotation of the rotation operation section 8654 can be prevented from continuing. . As a result, when the player inputs rotation to the rotation operation section 8654 in the direction opposite to the rotation in the A direction, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from breaking.

Further, when the player operates the rotation operation section 8654 and the player's finger or clothing gets caught between the rotation operation section 8654 and the upper tray 8017 on the rotation direction side, the rotation is stopped. It is possible to prevent the player's fingers or clothes from being further caught. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being pinched between the rotary operation section 8654 and the upper plate 8017 and being injured.

In the eighth embodiment, the rotational direction of the rotational operation section 8654 is set to the direction A, but the rotational direction is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 may be set to the left and right with respect to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the player can be made to perform actions accompanying the performance of the gaming machine, and the performance effect can be improved. For example, by operating the rotary operation unit 8654 by hitting it with the left hand so as to rotate it in the right direction, it is possible to perform an effect of hitting (slapping) a character or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the board box 100 is disposed on the fixing member 320, and by engaging the fixing member 320 with the engaging member 310, the board box 100 is prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized board. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and other members (for example, the third pattern It may be a display device 81 or a detection device capable of detecting unauthorized input such as unauthorized radio waves or vibrations.

In the first embodiment, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j formed in the first unit 551, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are as follows. Although a case has been described in which they are formed at positions facing each other, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The first concave portion 571h is placed upstream of the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, and after the flowing game ball is brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d. , may be formed so as to be received in the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j.

In the first embodiment, the thickness of the decorative member 154 is smaller than the depth of the recess 151b of the main body 151, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative member 154 may be made of an elastically deformable material and may be formed to be thicker than the recess depth of the recess 151b of the main body portion 151. In this case, by compressing and elastically deforming the general winning a prize unit 150 when disposing it on the base plate 60, the main body part 151 can be disposed in a state in contact with the base plate 60.

In the first embodiment, when the cam member 422 is placed in the second displacement state, the forces PW1 and PW2 applied to the cam member 422 from the first link member 431 act in directions that cancel each other out. Although the case has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of the force input to the cam member 422 from the point where the end of the cam member 422 and the plate-shaped protrusion 431b come into contact may be set in the direction from that contact point toward the axis of the shaft portion 422a. . According to this, it is possible to suppress the force acting on the cam member 422 in the direction of rotation about the shaft portion 422a.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the other end of the board box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 using screws, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the other end of the board box 100 may be fixed by a seal that cannot be removed once it is engaged with the rear case 300. To explain in detail, a cylindrical sealing tool inserted through openings formed at a plurality of locations on the other end side of the back case 300 is inserted into an insertion portion recessed at a plurality of locations on the back side of the back case 300. By engaging the insertion portion and the sealing tool, the board box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

Note that when removing the board box 100, the other end side of the board box 100 can be removed from the back case 300 by cutting the engagement portion between the insertion portion and the sealing tool. Moreover, when disposing the other end side of the board box 100 in the back case 300 again, insert a new sealing tool into the unused opening of the board box 100, and insert the new seal into the unused insertion part of the back case 300. By engaging with the board box 100, the other end side of the board box 100 can be disposed in the rear case 300.

In the first embodiment, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view is formed larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b, and the end of the decorative member 154 overlaps the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction. Although a case has been described in which the device is arranged in a state in which the device is placed in the state, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 when viewed from the front may be set to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b.

In this case, by forming the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 from the same material, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c are formed from a single sheet, By cutting the decorative member 154 from the sheet, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c can be formed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to form the decorative member 154 in a separate process, the yield when forming the decorative member 154 can be improved.

Note that when the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view is formed to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b, the decorative member 154 is arranged inside the second opening 60b, and the decorative member 154 and It is preferable that the front surface of the decorative member 60c be placed on the same plane. In this case, since the decorative surfaces of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c match in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, the player can recognize the decorations of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c as one decoration.

In the first embodiment, the first recess 571h is provided on the inner surface of the front side (direction of arrow F) of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 551 to protrude toward the back side (direction of arrow B); A second convex portion 571i, a third convex portion 571k are formed, and a first concave portion 571h, a second concave portion 571i and Although the case where the third recess 571j is provided has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, even if the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j and the first recess 571h, the second convex part 571i, and the third convex part 571k are formed on the inner surface of the opposite side in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. good.

Further, a recessed portion recessed toward the front image may be formed on the inner surface on the front side at a position facing the second recessed portion 571i. In this case, since the concave portion is provided in the ball throwing space of the curved path WK1, the ball throwing space can be enlarged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down too slowly on the curved path WK1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying on the curved path WK1.

In the ninth embodiment, a case has been described in which the inclined surface 9431b1 protrudes toward the front side toward the cam member 422, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined surface 9431b1 may be formed as an inclined surface whose protrusion amount toward the front side decreases as it approaches the cam member 422.

In this case, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-like projection 9531a, the cam member 422 can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e of the front base 411. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 from swinging back and forth, and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 in the second displacement state.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the light emitting body 11491a is formed at a position higher (in the direction of arrow U) than the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitter 11491a may be disposed at approximately the same height as the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, it is preferable that the height position of the transparent part 11451b is formed from the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467 to the upper side of the center.

According to this, when a part of the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is blocked by the game ball, the shadow of the game ball formed in the transparent part 11451b is formed into a semicircular shape by the upper hemisphere of the game ball. can. This allows the roundness of the game ball to be formed in the shadow formed in the transparent portion 11451b, making it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467.

In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments described above, the case where the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are displaced by the load of the game ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sensor is attached to the ball receiver 12467, 39467 to detect that a game ball has passed through the ball throwing path, and when the game ball is detected by the sensor, the third piece 12467e, 39467e may be displaced alone. According to this, there is no need to displace the second pieces 12467d, 39467d due to the load of the game ball, so the reliability of displacement of the ball receiving parts 12467, 39467 can be improved. In this case, a driving device that independently displaces the third pieces 12467e and 39467e is disposed in the ball receiving portions 12467 and 39467.

In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the rotation axes for the rotational displacement of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are formed in the first pieces 12467c and 39467c, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shaft portions 12467e3, 39467e3 of the third pieces 12467e, 39467e may be inserted into openings formed in the rack 466, and the third pieces 12467e, 39467e may be rotationally displaced with respect to the rack 466. In this case, since it is possible to easily increase the distance between the rotating shaft and the connecting portion of the second pieces 12467d and 39467d, it is possible to easily increase the amount of displacement of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e relative to the amount of displacement of the second pieces 12467d and 39467d. . As a result, the shielding plate 12467e1 of the third piece 12467e can be easily arranged on the front side of the light emitter 11491a. In this case, the opening formed in the rack 466 is formed into an elongated hole in which the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 can slide.

In the thirteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the second path member 13570 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the first path member 13560, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. The two-path member 13570 may be moved in the front-back direction. In this case, the relative positional relationship between the second path member 13570 and the front of the base plate 60 (gaming board 13) prevents the player from grasping the distance between the opposing first and second members. can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the first, tenth, and twenty-fifth embodiments, the decorative members 154, 10154, and 25154 are attached using adhesive tapes 154a, 10154a, and 25154a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, An adhesive made of liquid may also be used.

In the thirteenth, thirty-second, thirty-third, thirty-fourth, and thirty-fifth embodiments, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560 disposed on the front side are made of a non-light-transmitting material. Although a case has been described in which the facing space between the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 13570, 32570, 34570 is made difficult to be recognized by the player, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a slit-like opening with a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball is formed in the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560. The game ball flowing down between the opposing second path members 13570, 32570, and 34570 may be visually recognized by the player through the opening. In this case, the distance between the plurality of slit-shaped openings to the adjacent opening is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Thereby, the game ball flowing down between the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path members 13570, 32570, 34570 can be recognized by the player through the opening.

In addition, a circular opening smaller than the diameter of the game ball is formed in the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560, and the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 The game ball flowing down between the opposing path members 13570, 32570, and 34570 may be visually recognized by the player through the opening. In this case, the adjacent width dimensions of the plurality of openings are formed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the opening of the opening can be made smaller than when the opening is formed in a slit shape, the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member can be connected to each other through the opening. 13570, 32570, and 34570 from facing each other can be suppressed from being recognized by the player.

In the above-mentioned eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the portion to which the engaging member 18310 is engaged (the engaged portion 18332) is formed in the fixed member 18320, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaged portion 18332 to which the engaging member 18310 is engaged may be formed in the substrate box 100 that is caulked and fixed to the fixing member 18320.

In this case, when the board box 100 is not disposed in the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310 cannot be placed inside the rear case 18300, and the engaging member 18310 is pushed to the outside of the rear case 18300 due to its own weight. It can be in a prominent state.

As a result, if the board box 100 is forgotten to be attached to the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310 is hooked onto the outer frame 11 when the game board 18013 is arranged on the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 164(b)). ), it is possible to remind the operator that he or she has forgotten to attach the board box 100.

In the twenty-first embodiment described above, the insertion portion 21724b of the rotation unit 21700 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 is inserted into the inside of the recess 317 of the engagement member 310. Although the case where the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is prevented from being illegally released has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an insertion portion 21724b inserted into the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 may be formed in the substrate box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320.

In this case, the insertion portion 21724b is provided on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 through an opening formed in the fixing member 320. Further, the insertion portion 21724b is formed at a portion into which a shaft to be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 320 is inserted. As a result, even if the bearing portion 117 of the board box 100 is cut and illegally removed from the back case 21300, the insertion portion 21724b can be left behind inside the recess 317 of the engagement member 310. As a result, it may be difficult to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300.

Therefore, when replacing the fixing member 320, it is necessary to correctly caulk the portion between the board box 100 and the fixing member 320 (cut the caulked portion). This makes it difficult to illegally remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300, thereby preventing the fixing member 320 from being removed and replaced with an unauthorized board box.

In the forty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a light emitting board that irradiates light is disposed on the upright member 42060f, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a drive member disposed on the base plate 42060 It may also be formed as a control board for controlling the game ball or a passage for throwing game balls.

In the forty-third embodiment, the engaged part 43101 that the engaging member 18310 engages is formed on the bearing part 117 side of the board box 43100, and the other side opposite to the bearing part 117 side is attached to the back case with screws. Although the case where the arrangement is described has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaging member 18310 is arranged on the other front side of the board box 43100 (in the left-right direction (opposite side in the arrow LR direction) from the 43rd embodiment), and the engaged part 43101 is placed on the bearing of the board box 43100. It may be formed on the other side opposite to the portion 117 side.The fastening between the rear case 43300 and the board box 43100 using screws may be eliminated.

According to this, one side of the bearing part 117 side of the board box 43100 can be engaged with the projecting wall 43301c1 of the rear case 43300 and the locking part 331 of the fixing member 43320, and the bearing part 117 of the board box 43100 The other side opposite to the side can be engaged with the engagement member 18310 and the substrate box 43100. Therefore, there is no need to fasten one side of the substrate box 43100 on the bearing portion 117 side and the other side on the opposite side, so that the number of work steps can be reduced accordingly.

In the forty-fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the engaging member 18310 is engaged with both the fixing member 320 and the board box 45100, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaging members 18310 may be provided at two locations on the front of the bottom wall portion 45301 of the rear case 45300, and each engaging member 18310 may be engaged with the fixing member 320 and the board box 45100.

In the forty-fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted into the openings formed in the fixed member 320 and the engaged parts 332, 45101 of the board box 45100, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, a portion of the engaging member 18310 that is inserted into the opening of the engaged portion 332 and a portion that is inserted into the opening of the engaged portion 45101 may be formed separately.

According to this, the engaging member 18310 that engages with the fixing member 320 and the substrate box 45100 can be formed from one member, and the engagement position between the fixing member 320 and the substrate box 45100 can be given a degree of freedom. That is, it is no longer necessary to arrange the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 and the engaged portion 45101 of the board box 45100 close to each other, and the degree of freedom in designing the fixing member 320 and the board box 45100 can be improved.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A displacement member formed to be displaceable from a reference position in a first direction and capable of moving a game ball as the game ball is displaced in the first direction, and a game from outside the trajectory area of the displacement member to the trajectory area of the displacement member. and a regulating means for regulating throwing of a ball, characterized in that the displacement member is formed to be displaceable from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction. A gaming machine A1.

Here, a displacement member is formed to be displaceable from a reference position in a first direction, and is formed to be able to move a game ball as the game ball is displaced in the first direction, and A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means for regulating the throwing of a game ball to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, by regulating the regulating means, it is possible to suppress more than a specified number of game balls from being thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the regulating means malfunctions due to sticking or wear, for example, there is a risk that more than the specified number of game balls will be thrown toward the orbital area of the displacement member. In this case, there is a problem that problems may occur due to the number of game balls exceeding the specified number. That is, for example, there was a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number would enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and become caught in the movable part, causing damage. Alternatively, there was a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number would flow out of the game area (for example, to the back side of the game board).

On the other hand, according to gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction opposite to the first direction, so the trajectory area of the displacement member can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, for example, even if the regulating means malfunctions and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the expanded trajectory area of the displacement member prevents the game balls that exceed the specified number from being thrown into the orbital area. I can accept it. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the drive mechanism part of the displacement member or flowing out of the gaming area, and as a result, problems caused by game balls exceeding the specified number can be prevented. It can be made difficult to occur.

The gaming machine A1 includes a passage member formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass and whose downstream side is communicated with the orbital region of the displacement member, and the regulating means restricts passage of the game ball in the passage member. Characteristic gaming machine A2.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1, the game machine A2 is provided with a passage member formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass and whose downstream side is communicated with the orbital region of the displacement member, and the regulating means prevents the game in the passage member. Since the passage of balls is restricted, for example, even if the regulating means malfunctions and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the game balls exceeding the specified number will be transferred to the displacement member through the passage member. The ball can be reliably thrown to the orbital area. As a result, problems caused by game balls exceeding the specified number can be made less likely to occur.

In gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed to be able to receive and hold a prescribed number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and at least change the diameter of the game balls in a second direction from the reference position. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to be displaced by a distance exceeding .

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A2, the displacement member is formed to be able to receive and hold a prescribed number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and also to Since it is formed so that it can be displaced by at least a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball in the direction, after receiving the specified number of game balls at the reference position, by displacing the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction, the specified number can be received. It is possible to throw the game balls exceeding the amount to the orbital region of the displacement member (the region on the first direction side of the displacement member). Therefore, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction.

In this case, the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, and the game balls exceeding the specified number can be thrown to the orbit area, so these specified number of game balls and the game balls exceeding the specified number are separated. can do. Therefore, for example, by displacing the displacement member in the first direction, it is possible to maintain the state in which the displacement member holds a prescribed number of game balls, and to discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the orbital area. It becomes possible.

The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the displacement member is configured to be able to change its posture when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is formed so that its posture can be changed when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position. While it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the displacement member holds the ball and prevent the game ball from falling from the displacement member, when it reaches a predetermined position, the change in the posture of the displacement member is used to release the game ball. can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

The gaming machine A4 includes a recess that is recessed in a trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and the displacement member is recessed in the recess when it is displaced in the first direction. A gaming machine A5 comprising a protrusion that is engaged and is formed so that its posture can be changed by engaging the protrusion with the recess.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A4, the displacement member is provided with a concave portion recessed in the orbit region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. The structure includes a protrusion that is engaged with the recess when the displacement member is moved, and the attitude of the displacement member can be changed by engaging the protrusion with the recess. Therefore, the structure for changing the attitude of the displacement member can be simplified.

In the game machine A5, the protrusion is provided to protrude from the displacement member in the first direction, and the protrusion tip is in contact with the lower half of the game ball thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being touched.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A5, the protrusion is provided to protrude from the displacement member in the first direction, and the tip of the protrusion can be used to prevent the game ball thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member. (In other words, it is formed so that it can come into contact with the lower half of the game balls exceeding the specified number), so when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball can be moved by touching the lower half of the game ball with the protrusion. You can move it while pressing it. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily ejected from the orbit area.

In addition, the protrusion is interposed between the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member and the game balls thrown to the orbital region of the displacement member (game balls exceeding the specified number), so that such protrusion is prevented. A distance can be secured between the specified number of game balls and the game balls exceeding the specified number by the protruding length of the part. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the orbital area.

Furthermore, since the protrusion serves both the role of changing the posture of the displacement member by engaging with the recess and the role of moving the game ball while pushing its lower half, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product can be improved. Cost reduction can be achieved.

A gaming machine A7 in gaming machine A5 or A6, wherein the size of the recess in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the size of the recessed portion in the first direction is made smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member is (That is, game balls exceeding the specified number) can easily pass through the recessed portion when being moved as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily ejected from the orbit area.

In any of gaming machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in a trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and is higher than the recess. The game ball includes a wall portion located on the first direction side, and when the game ball thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member is moved as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is moved toward the wall portion. The game machine A8 is characterized in that a change in posture of the displacement member is regulated by contacting the displacement member with the displacement member.

According to the game machine A8, in any of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and has a recessed portion. When a game ball thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member is moved in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is located on the first direction side of the wall. Since the displacement member is in contact with the displacement member, the posture change of the displacement member can be regulated, so while the displacement member maintains the state in which it holds the specified number of game balls, it only releases game balls that exceed the specified number. It can be easily ejected from the orbital area.

That is, since the wall part is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is moved by being pushed by the protrusion as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball By bringing the lower half of the ball into contact with the wall, the game ball can easily get over the wall. In this case, the game ball is brought into contact with the displacement member (that is, the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member, so that the displacement member Changes in posture can be regulated, and falling of the prescribed number of game balls held by the displacement member can be suppressed. As a result, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls, only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number can be easily discharged from the orbital area.

On the other hand, if no game balls (that is, more than a specified number of game balls) are thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member, no game balls are interposed between the wall and the displacement member, so the protrusion is inserted into the recess. By being engaged, the attitude of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, by utilizing the change in the posture of the displacement member, it is possible to easily discharge the prescribed number of game balls (namely, the game balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member.

A gaming machine A9 in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, wherein the regulating means is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the regulating means is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the regulating means is configured to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member. Throwing of game balls to the orbital region of the member can be regulated or allowed. In other words, regulation or permission of throwing a game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member. It is not necessary to control the driving means for driving the regulating means or each of these means, and accordingly, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability of the operation.

In the game machine A9, the regulating means allows the game ball to be thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction. Characteristic gaming machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A9, the regulating means operates in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position to the second direction to prevent the game ball from moving into the trajectory area of the displacement member. Since the ball is allowed to be thrown, it is possible to reliably throw the game ball to the orbital region of the displacement member and the region on the first direction side of the displacement member.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, a base member on which the displacement member is disposed to be displaceable, and a base member disposed vertically below and vertically above the end of the base member on the first direction side; A gaming machine A11 is characterized in that it is equipped with a collecting member having an opening at the bottom.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A10, the displacing member is disposed vertically below the base member on which the displaceable member is displaceably disposed, and the end on the first direction side of the base member. and a collection member having an opening vertically upward, so that the game balls that are moved as the displacement member moves in the first direction and are ejected from the trajectory area of the displacement member (i.e., the number exceeding the specified number) are Game balls) can be received and collected through the opening of the collection member.

In the game machine A11, the base member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the opening of the collection member is formed at least in the first position in the base member displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. A gaming machine A12 characterized in that it is formed in a size that is located vertically below the end on the direction side.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed to be movable between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the opening of the collection member can be displaced at least to the retracted position or the displaced position. Since the base member is formed in a size that is located vertically below the end on the first direction side of the base member, even if the base member is displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position, it will not be ejected from the orbital area of the displaced member. The game balls (that is, the game balls in excess of the specified number) can be received through the opening of the collection member and collected.

Game machine A13, characterized in that any one of game machines A5 to A8 includes an insertion member that is inserted into the recessed space of the recess to restrict engagement of the protrusion with the recess. .

According to the gaming machine A13, any one of the gaming machines A5 to A8 includes an insertion member that is inserted into the recessed space of the recess to prevent the protrusion from engaging with the recess. With the displacement in the first direction, it is possible to suppress the attitude of the displacement member from changing when ejecting game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region of the displacement member. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the orbital area.

The gaming machine A13 includes a base member that is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and on which the displaceable member is disposed so as to be displaceable, and the insertion member is arranged such that the base member is displaced to the retracted position. The game machine A14 is characterized in that when the base member is moved to a displacement position, the base member is inserted into the recess space of the recess, and when the base member is displaced to a displacement position, it is separated from the recess space of the recess.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, so that the displacement member in the first direction is Accordingly, when the game balls exceeding the prescribed number are discharged from the orbital area of the displacement member, the posture of the displacement member is suppressed from being changed, and the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls. On the other hand, when the base member is displaced to the displacement position, the insertion member is separated from the recessed space of the recess, so that the protrusion engages with the recess as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. By being combined, the attitude of the displacement member can be changed and a prescribed number of game balls can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

<About the concept of the invention using the distribution unit 500 as an example>
A downstream passage through which the game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downstream passage, and a game ball flowing down the downstream passage into one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine comprising a distributing means for distributing game balls, the displacing member being formed to be displaceable and receiving game balls from the first branch passage, the displacing member coming into contact with the distributing means and being displaced. The game machine B1 is characterized in that the distribution means is displaced to switch the distribution destination.

Here, there is a downstream passage through which the game ball flows, a first branch passage and a second branch passage that branch from the downstream passage, and a game ball that has flown down the downstream passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine equipped with an allocating means for allocating is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-223176). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are alternately distributed one ball at a time to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, so the game balls flowing down the flow passage are It is distributed equally (that is, half each) to the first branch passage and the second branch passage. That is, there was a problem in that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage could not be changed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, it is provided with a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and receives the game balls from the first branch passage, and the displacement member comes into contact with the distribution means and is displaced, thereby distributing the game balls. Since the means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage or the second branch passage can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be changed.

According to the game machine B1, the distributing means can be displaced using the displacement of the displacing member, so there is no need to separately provide a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displacing the distributing means. can. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and product costs can be reduced.

In addition, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the sorting means is controlled using position detection by a sensor device or drive by a driving means, reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting means is reduced due to malfunction due to poor detection or control. However, according to the game machine B1, the allocation destination by the allocation means can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the reliability of the allocation operation can be improved.

In particular, since the displacement member is a member that receives game balls from the first branch passage, the distribution destination of the distribution means can be switched to the first branch passage in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member. The game balls distributed to the passage can be surely received by the displacement member.

The gaming machine B1 includes a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the distributing means to maintain the distribution destination by the distributing means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the displacing member By displacing the distributing means in a direction opposing the direction of the biasing force, the distribution destination by the distributing means is switched to the other of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the biasing force A game machine B2 characterized in that the destination of distribution by the distribution means is returned to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage by the biasing force of the means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B1, a biasing force is applied to the distributing means to maintain the destination of the distributing device by the distributing means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. Since the distribution means is provided, it is possible to prevent the distribution destinations by the distribution means from being changed inadvertently. In this case, after the distribution means is displaced with the displacement of the displacement member and the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging means, so that the displacement It is not necessary for the member to be in contact with the distribution means. That is, the displacement member can be separated from the distribution means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the displacement member can be increased.

A gaming machine B3 in the gaming machine B2, wherein the biasing means applies a biasing force to the distributing means to maintain the destination of distribution by the distributing means in the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the biasing means applies a biasing force to the distributing means to maintain the destination of distribution by the distributing means in the second branch passage, so that the displacement member It is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch passage in a state where the game balls cannot be received by the distribution means.

The gaming machine B3 includes a base member that is formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position and on which the displacement member is disposed, and when the base member is disposed at the first position. , the displacement member is capable of receiving game balls from the first branch passage and is capable of contacting the distribution means, and when the base member is disposed at the second position, the displacement member A gaming machine B4 characterized in that the member cannot receive game balls from the first branch passage and cannot come into contact with the sorting means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, it is provided with a base member that is formed to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the displacing member is disposed on the base member. , a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member disposed in the first position, and a mode in which the displacement member is displaced in a state in which the base member is disposed in the second position can be formed. Therefore, the performance effect can be increased accordingly.

In this case, when the base member is placed in the second position, the displacement member cannot receive game balls from the first branch passage, and in such a state, the displacement member cannot come into contact with the distribution means. Therefore, in a state in which the displacement member cannot receive game balls (a state in which the base member is disposed at the second position), it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch path.

A gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the gaming machine B4 includes a second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distributing means is disposed on the second base member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B4, it is provided with a second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distributing means is disposed on the second base member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the base member from increasing in size.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be able to be displaced at least between a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, and the displacement member is displaced to the switching position. In the state in which the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in the state in which the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member can receive game balls from the first branch passage. A game machine B6 characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be able to be displaced at least between a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, When the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and when the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member receives game balls from the first branch passage. Since the game balls can be received and the destination of distribution by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the prescribed number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacement member receives the game balls while the distribution destination by the distribution means is still switched to the first branch path, so the displacement member There is a possibility that game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received may be distributed to the first branch passage. If a means for regulating the inflow of game balls into the first branch passage is provided separately, the structure becomes complicated, reliability decreases, and product cost increases.

On the other hand, according to game machine B6, after the displacement member is displaced to the switching position and a prescribed number (or less than the prescribed number) of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position. When this happens, the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage, so it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number from flowing down into the first branch passage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage. Further, since there is no need to separately provide the above-mentioned means, it is possible to improve reliability and reduce product cost.

In gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on the inner wall surface thereof, and has a resistance that provides resistance to game balls passing through the first branch passage. A game machine B7 characterized by comprising means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on the inner wall surface of the first branch passage, Since the game ball is provided with a resistance means that applies resistance to the game ball, it is possible to slow down the speed of the game ball passing through the first branch passage. Therefore, since the time required for the displacement member to be displaced from the switching position to the receiving position can be lengthened accordingly, the game ball can be reliably received by the displacement member. Further, since the displacement speed required for the displacement member can be reduced, the output of the driving means can be reduced, and product costs can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B6 or B7, the distributing means includes a first projecting part and a second projecting part that are formed to be able to move in and out of the first branch passage as the distributing means is displaced; The first protruding and retracting part is formed so as to be capable of distributing game balls flowing down the downstream passage to the second branching passage by protruding into the first branch passage, and the second protruding and retracting part is configured to be able to distribute game balls flowing down the downstream passage to the second branch passage. is located on the downstream side of the first branch passage, and is formed so as to be able to restrict the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage by protruding into the first branch passage, and these first protruding and retracting parts A gaming machine B8 is characterized in that when one of the second protruding and retracting parts protrudes into the first branch passage, the other part is retracted out of the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B6 or B7, the distributing means has a first projecting and retracting section that is formed to be retractable relative to the first branch passage as the distributing means is displaced; The first projecting part includes a second projecting part, and the first projecting part is formed to be capable of distributing game balls flowing down the downstream passage to the second branching passage by protruding into the first branching passage. The first projecting part is located downstream of the first branching passage and protrudes into the first branching passage to be able to restrict the flow of game balls distributed to the first branching passage. In the state where one of the second projecting and retracting parts protrudes into the first branch passage, the other is retracted outside the first branch passage, so that the distributing means can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member. Then, only the prescribed number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

That is, the first state in which the first protruding part protrudes and distributes the game balls flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage, and the first state in which the first protrusion part retracts allows the game balls flowing down the flow passage to be distributed to the second branch passage. A second state in which the game balls are distributed to the first branch passage; a third state in which the second protruding portion protrudes to restrict the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage (storage of game balls); By retracting the second protruding and retracting part, a fourth state can be formed in which the game balls stored in the first branch passage are caused to flow down and are received by the displacement member, and by combining these states, the specified Only a certain number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

Furthermore, according to the game machine B8, since the distribution means includes the first protrusion and retrieval part and the second protrusion and retrieval part, that is, is formed as a single component, the structure of the distribution means (the first protrusion and retrieval part and the second protrusion and retrieval part) The structure for operating the systems and demonstrating their functions) can be simplified. Furthermore, when one of the first protruding and retracting parts protrudes into the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the first branch passage. It is sufficient if the distributing means is also formed so as to be able to be displaced into two positions depending on the position (and receiving position). That is, by displacing the distribution means at two positions, the first to fourth states described above can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distribution means and the structure for displacing the distribution means in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distribution operation can be improved accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention using the distribution unit 500 as an example>
A downstream passage through which the game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downstream passage, and a game ball flowing down the downstream passage into one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine equipped with a distributing means for distributing game balls, characterized in that the game machine is provided with a flow state changing means located downstream of the distributing means and regulating or allowing the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. Gaming machine C1.

Here, there is a downstream passage through which the game ball flows, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downstream passage, and a game ball flowing down the downstream passage into one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine equipped with an allocating means for allocating is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-223176). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the game balls flowing down the downstream passage are only distributed to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, so it is insufficient to provide players with interest. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, it is provided with a flow state changing means that is located downstream of the distribution means and that regulates or allows the flow of game balls in the first branch passage. can be given.

That is, by the operation of the flow state changing means, the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage is restricted and the game balls are stored in the first branch passage, and the game balls are allowed to flow down in the first branch passage. , the game balls stored in the first branch passage can be made to flow down (released). As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the downstream passage into either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, there is also an operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the game balls distributed to the first branch passage. , and the action of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (release). As a result, it is possible to provide interest to the player.

The gaming machine C1 includes an integral member in which the distributing means and the flow state changing means are integrally formed, and when the destination of distribution by the distributing means is the first branch passage, the first branch passage The downward flow of game balls in the first branch passage is regulated by the downward flow state changing means, and when the destination of distribution by the allocating means is the second branch passage, the downward flow of the game balls in the first branch passage is regulated by the downward flow state change means. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it is allowed.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, since the distributing means and the flowing state changing means are provided with an integral member formed integrally, the distributing means and the flowing state changing means are operated. The structure can be simplified and the reliability of operation can be improved. That is, when the distributing means and the flow state changing means are formed separately, they are two parts, which complicates the structure for operating these two parts and leads to a decrease in operational reliability. On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, the distribution means and the flow state changing means can be formed as a single component, so the structure can be simplified accordingly, reducing product costs and improving operational reliability. can be achieved.

Further, in this case, when the destination of distribution by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage due to the operation of the integrated member, the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, When the game balls are stored in the branch passage and the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the second branch passage, the flowing state changing means allows the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage, and the game balls are stored in the first branch passage. It is possible to make the game ball that was previously held flow down (release). That is, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the downstream passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage (storage); Not only can the motion of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (release) be formed, but also these motions of storing and releasing can be formed alternately in conjunction with the distribution motion.

In the game machine C2, the integral member is formed so as to be displaceable between a first state position and a second state position, and when the integral member is displaced to the first state position, the distributing means is displaceable between the first state position and the second state position. The integrated member is disposed at a position where the first branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is disposed at a position to restrict the flow of game balls in the first branch passage, and the integral member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, the sorting means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the sorting destination, and the flowing state changing means is arranged at a position which allows the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. A gaming machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the integral member is formed to be able to be displaced between the first state position and the second state position, and when the integral member is displaced to the first state position, , the distributing means is disposed at a position where the first branch passage is the distribution destination, the flowing state changing means is disposed at a position regulating the downward flow of the game balls in the first branch passage, and the integral member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, the distributing means is disposed at a position where the second branch passage is the distributing destination, and the flowing state changing means is disposed at a position allowing the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage, so that the integrated member By displacing the ball in two positions (the first state position and the second state position), in addition to the action of distributing the game balls flowing down the downstream passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the game balls are moved to the first branch passage. It is possible to form an action of temporarily stopping the falling of the distributed game balls (storing) and an action of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (releasing), and also to perform these storing and releasing actions. , can be formed alternately in conjunction with the sorting operation. That is, by simplifying the structure, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve operational reliability.

In the gaming machine C3, the integral member is formed to be rotatable, and at least the flowing state changing means is formed to be able to move in and out of the first branch passage, and by protruding into the first branch passage, the game ball can be changed. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the gaming machine C4 is formed in a shape curved in an arc centered on the rotation axis of the integral member.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C3, the integral member is rotatably formed, and at least the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract from the first branch passage. The ball protrudes from the inner wall of the first branch passageway to prevent the game balls from flowing down, and because it is formed into an arcuate shape centered on the rotation axis of the integral member, the flow state changing means can be moved in and out of the inner wall of the first branch passage. The area of the hole opened can be reduced.

A gaming machine C5 in the gaming machine C4, wherein the flow state changing means is disposed in such a manner that the side facing the upstream side of the first branch passage is concave.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C4, the flow state changing means is arranged in such a manner that the side facing upstream of the first branch passage is concave, so that the flow state is changed to the first branch passage. In the initial state where the means starts to protrude (i.e., the state in which only the distal end side of the flow state changing means is protruded into the passageway), the shape of the distal end side of the flow state changing means can be adjusted so that it is easy to restrict the flow of the game ball. The game balls can be arranged in the same direction, and the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be easily regulated.

In addition, in a state where the flowing state changing means is maximally protruded into the first branch passage and regulating the flowing down of the game ball, the game ball can be held stably by the concave part of the flowing state changing means, so that the wild movement of the game ball can be suppressed. .

The gaming machine C4 or C5 includes a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the integrated member to bias the flow state changing means in a direction in which the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage, A gaming machine C6 characterized in that a distance to the rotation axis of the integral member is larger than a distance from the distribution means to the rotation axis of the integral member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the gaming machine C6 includes a biasing device that applies a biasing force to the integral member to bias the flow state changing device in the direction of protruding into the first branch passage. Therefore, by using this biasing force, it is possible to easily maintain the integral member in a position in which the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage (ie, the first state position).

In this case, in the game machine C6, the distance from the flowing state changing means to the rotating shaft of the integral member is made larger than the distance from the distributing means to the rotating shaft of the integral member, so that the flowing game balls collide. Since the distance from the rotation axis is large, even when the same impact force is applied, the flow state changing means is likely to retract, and the biasing direction of the biasing means is such that the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage. By setting the flow state changing means in the direction of immersion, it is possible to suppress the flow state changing means from being retracted by the biasing force.

In the game machine C6, the integrated member is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the flow state changing means projects into the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the integral member is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage, so the integral member is The member can be easily maintained in a position in which the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage (i.e., the first state position). Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to further suppress the falling state changing means from being immersed by its own weight.

Furthermore, even if the biasing means falls off, the integral component is maintained in a posture in which the flowing state changing means protrudes into the first branching passage due to its own weight, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down into the first branching passage. It can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, and the flow of game balls in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, and the first branch passage is controlled by the flow state changing means. A game machine C8 characterized in that, in a state where a prescribed number of game balls are stored in the branch passage, the game balls flowing down the downstream passage can flow down to the second branch passage.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, and the flowing down of the game ball in the first branch passage is changed by the flowing state changing means. When a specified number of game balls are stored in the first branch passage, the game balls flowing down the downstream passage are configured to be able to flow down to the second branch passage, so that more than the specified number of game balls can flow down. When flowing down the passage, game balls exceeding a specified number can be prevented from staying in the passage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the distribution means (the operation of assigning the distribution destination to the second branch passage) from being hindered by the game balls stuck in the downstream passage.

In the gaming machine C8, the inner wall of the downstream passage facing the second branch passage is configured to move the game balls flowing down the downstream passage to the end of the prescribed number of game balls stored in the first branch passage. A game machine C9 is formed so as to be able to be guided to the side surface of the game ball on the second branch passage side.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C8, the inner wall of the downstream passageway facing the second branching passage allows the game balls flowing down the downstream passageway to be controlled by the specified number of balls stored in the first branching passage. Since it is formed so that the last game ball among the game balls can be guided to the side surface on the second branch passage side, the game ball flowing down the flowing passage collides with the last game ball among the specified number of game balls. After that, it can be easily flowed down to the second branch passage.

Incidentally, the last game ball among the prescribed number of game balls means the game ball located on the upstream side (on the opposite side to the flow state changing means). Further, when the specified number is 1, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the first branch passage.

A gaming machine C10 in the gaming machine C8 or C9, wherein the downstream end of the downstream passage is formed in a different direction from the upstream end of the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C8 or C9, the downstream end of the downstream passage is formed in a different direction from the upstream end of the first branch passage, so that the downstream passage can be When a flowing game ball collides with the last game ball out of a specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last game ball is determined by the first branch passage. The flow direction can be different from the flow direction at the upstream end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tail game ball from flying out from the upstream end of the first branch passage and flowing into the second branch passage due to the repulsive force upon collision.

In any one of gaming machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed to be able to appear and retract with respect to the downstream passage or the first branch passage, and the position of the distributing unit is located in the downstream end of the downstream passage in the downstream direction. A gaming machine C11 characterized in that the inner wall is an extension of the inner wall.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the distributing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the downstream passage or the first branch passage, and its appearing and retracting position is different from that of the downstream passage. Since it is an inner wall on the extension line of the downstream end of the passageway in the downstream direction, the distribution means can be made to protrude at a position close to the game balls flowing down from the downstream end of the downstream passageway. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the distributing means starts to protrude into the downstream passage or the first branch passage to when the game balls can be distributed. As a result, the allocation destination can be switched more reliably by the allocation means.

In the gaming machine C11, the sorting means is for projecting into the downstream passageway or the first branching passage to sort the game balls flowing down the downstream passageway to the second branching passage, and the distribution means A gaming machine C12 characterized in that the protruding direction of the means is set to point toward the upstream end of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, the distributing means is protruded into the downstream passageway or the first branching passage to distribute the game balls flowing down the downstream passageway to the second branching passage. Since the protruding direction of the distributing means is set to point toward the upstream end of the second branch passage, when a game ball flowing down the downstream passage comes into contact with the distributing means during the protruding operation, The game ball can be pushed into the second branch passage with the protruding operation of the distribution means. As a result, distribution to the second branch passage can be performed more reliably.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed to be inclined downwardly toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed to be able to roll on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and the flowing down state A game machine C13 characterized in that the changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract into the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. The flow state changing means is formed to be able to roll, and the flow state changing means is formed to be able to move in and out of the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach a state where the flow of the ball can be regulated. As a result, when the distribution destination of the distribution means is switched from the second branch passage to the first branch passage and the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage, the flow state changing means is used to regulate the flow of the game ball. The protrusion can be easily fixed in time.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to move in and out of the first branch passage, and at least in the state of maximally protruding into the first branch passage, the flow state changing means A game machine C14 characterized in that a force component is applied from the game ball to the flowing state changing means.

According to the game machine C14, in any of the game machines C1 to C13, the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first branch passage, and at least in the state of protruding to the maximum into the first branch passage, the flow state changing means does not protrude. Since a force component in the direction of the ball is applied from the game ball to the flow state changing means, when regulating the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage, the impact of the game ball colliding with the ball causes the ball to flow downward. It is possible to prevent the state changing means from becoming immersed. Therefore, it is possible to easily control the flow of game balls.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, one side of which is disposed displaceably on the base member, and a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, the base member displaces when the displaceable member is displaced. A gaming machine D1 comprising a suppressing means for suppressing a reaction of a member.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a base member whose one side is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member (for example, , JP 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between an extended position where the base member is extended into the gaming area and visible to the player and a retracted position where the base member is retreated from the gaming area, the base member is It is possible to perform an effect of displacing the displacement member in a state where it is placed in the extended position.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, one side of the base member is disposed on the base member so that it can be displaced, so when the displaceable member is displaced, the base member wobbles with respect to the base member using the one side as a fulcrum. There was a problem in that it was easy for this to occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since it is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the reaction of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member, the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member when the displacement member is displaced is suppressed. can do.

Note that the reaction force accompanying the displacement of the displacement member includes, for example, one generated due to a change in the center of gravity due to the displacement of the displacement member, and one generated due to the action of inertial force due to an increase or decrease in the displacement speed (change in acceleration) of the displacement member. Examples include those generated due to a reaction force when a displacement member is displaced and ejects a game ball.

In the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably disposed on the base member, the displacement member is formed to be able to hold and emit a game ball, and the arrangement member is configured to: A gaming machine D2 characterized in that the gaming machine D2 is formed to be able to be displaced when a game ball is ejected from the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displacing member is formed to be able to hold and eject the gaming ball. Since the arrangement member is formed to be able to be displaced when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member. That is, when a game ball is launched from a displacement member, the center of gravity position of the base member is changed by the weight of the game ball, and for example, the center of gravity position of the base member is moved in a direction that offsets the change in the center of gravity position due to the launch of the game ball. When a configuration in which the installation member is displaced is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of wobbling of the base member due to a change in the center of gravity position. In addition, when a game ball is fired from the displacement member, the base member receives a reaction due to the firing of the game ball. When adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of wobbling of the base member due to reaction.

A game machine D3, which is the game machine D1 or D2, and includes a reverse member that is displaced with at least a displacement component that is opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member when the displacement member is displaced.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, a reverse member is displaced with at least a displacement component in the opposite direction to the displacement direction of the displacement member. Therefore, the change in the center of gravity position of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be reduced by the displacement of the opposite member. As a result, wobbling of the base member due to changes in the center of gravity can be suppressed.

Note that if the configuration is such that the displacement of the opposite member is started when the displacement of the displacement member is started, at least a portion of the inertial forces of both can be canceled out. As a result, wobbling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

The gaming machine D2 or D3 is characterized by comprising a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the disposed member or (and) the reverse member to displace the disposed member or (and) the reverse member. Game machine D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D2 or D3, there is a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the disposed member or (and) the reverse member to displace the disposed member or (and) the reverse member. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a driving means for displacing the disposed member and/or the reverse member. That is, the driving means for displacing the displacement member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the disposed member and/or the opposite member. Therefore, the weight of the base member can be reduced by that much, and its wobbling can be easily suppressed.

In addition, since it is possible to displace the disposed or (and) opposite member mechanically synchronized with the displacement of the displaceable member, for example, the position of the displaceable member can be detected by a sensor device, and the disposed or disposed member can be disposed in accordance with the detection result. Control for driving the member or (and) reverse member by a driving means is not required, which reduces product costs and improves the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member or (and) reverse member relative to the displacement member. can be secured.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member may start displacement from a second position, or start displacement from a first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position. A gaming machine D5, which is formed so as to be able to form, and starts displacement from the first position at least when the base member is placed at a predetermined position with respect to the base member.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from a stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximum, so that the base member is likely to wobble due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts displacing from the second position, and is located on one side of the base member from the second position. The base member is formed so as to be able to form a mode in which the displacement starts from a first position close to In the visible extended position), the displacement starts from the first position, so that shaking of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the base member than the second position, by setting the first position as the starting position for displacement of the displacement member, the weight of the displacement member can be reduced from the base member. The member can be kept close to the fulcrum at which it wobbles with respect to the base member, and the effect of inertial force when the displacing member is displaced from a stopped state can be made less likely to act on the base member. As a result, wobbling of the base member can be easily suppressed.

A game machine D5 comprising a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, and the displacement member is disposed on the rack member. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D5, the game machine D6 includes a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member in which a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear is formed, and the rack member is provided with a displacement member. is arranged, so when starting the displacement of the displacement member from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member is It can be kept close to the fulcrum (the fulcrum point when shaking). As a result, wobbling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

A gaming machine D7 in the gaming machine D6, wherein the displacement direction when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is a direction in which it moves away from one side of the base member.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts displacement from the first position is a direction in which the displacement member moves away from one side of the base member. In the state where the rack member is disposed on the base member, the rack member can be brought closer to one side of the base member. That is, in order for the displacement member (rack member) to be displaced in the direction away from one side of the base member, the rack member must be based on the portion on the rack gear side where the pinion gear is engaged after the displacement of the displacement member is started. It will be directed towards one side of the member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be kept closer to one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member wobbles relative to the base member), and as a result, when the displaceable member is displaced from a stopped state, Shaking of the base member can be easily suppressed.

Any one of the game machines D1 to D7 includes a support structure that displaceably supports one side of the base member on the base member, and a drive mechanism that drives the base member supported by the support structure, The displacement member is formed to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism includes a regulating means that restricts the base member from being displaced in a direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. A gaming machine D8 comprising:

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines D1 to D7, there is a support structure that movably supports one side of the base member on the base member, and a base member that is supported by the support structure is driven. The displacement member is formed to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism is configured to displace the base member in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. Since the regulating means is provided, it is possible to suppress the base member from being displaced relative to the base member due to a reaction. As a result, the occurrence of wobbling of the base member can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
A gaming machine equipped with a rotating drum member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer circumferential surface is disposed so as to be visible to a player, further comprising a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating drum member. Characteristic gaming machine E1.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a drum member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so that it can be seen by the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). In this gaming machine, the spinning drum member is formed into a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface is made visible to the player while rotating the spinning drum member or by stopping the spinning drum member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is only possible to form a performance mode that allows the player to visually recognize the display on the outer circumferential surface as the spinning drum member rotates or stops, so there is little change in the performance mode, and the performance effect is limited. The problem was that it was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the displacement member is disposed movably on the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, the display on the outer peripheral surface is displayed to the player as the drum member rotates or stops. In addition to the presentation mode that is visually recognized, it is possible to form a presentation mode that displaces the displacement member, so that the presentation mode can be changed accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the drum member taken along a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis does not necessarily have to be circular, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer circumferential surface of the drum member does not have to be a circumferential surface, and may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between at least a first position and a second position, and in the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is formed by the displacement member. , A game machine E2 characterized in that, in the second position, at least a portion of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the drum member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotation drum member is formed by the displacement member. The outer shape can be made smaller, and the space required for the rotating drum member to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, at least a portion of the displacement member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotation drum member, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the displacement member, resulting in a dramatic effect. can be increased. Further, for example, by rotating the drum member with the displacement member placed in the first position and arranging (displacing) the displacement member in the second position when the rotation of the drum member is stopped, A portion (displacement member) that was visually recognized as the outer circumferential surface of the drum member can be formed to protrude outward in the radial direction of the drum member, thereby increasing interest.

The gaming machine E2 is provided with a light emitting means for emitting light, the drum member is formed with an internal space, the light emitting means is disposed in the internal space, and the displacement member is disposed in the second A game machine E3 characterized in that when the drum member is displaced to the position, the outer circumferential surface of the drum member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, it is provided with a light emitting means for emitting light, and the rotating drum member is formed with an internal space, and the light emitting means is disposed in the internal space. When the displacement member is moved to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside, so that the light emitted by the light emitting means can be emitted to the outside, and the displacement member By being displaced to the first position, the radiation to the outside can be blocked. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

A game machine E4, which is any one of the game machines E1 to E3, and includes a drive means that generates a driving force, and a transmission means that transmits the drive force of the drive means to the drum member and the displacement member. .

Here, in order to form the drum member to be rotatable and to arrange the displacement member in the drum member so that it can be displaced, a driving means is required for each of the drum member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. Bulk. Further, when a drive means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the drum member, the weight of the drum member increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop rotation of the drum member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a driving means for generating a driving force is provided, and the driving force of the driving means is applied to the drum member and the displacement member. Since the rotation drum member is provided with a transmission means for transmitting data, the rotation drum member can be rotated and the displacement member can be displaced by using one driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs. Furthermore, since there is no need to mount a driving means for displacing the displacement member on the rotating drum member, the weight of the rotating drum member can be reduced, and rotation of the rotating drum member can be smoothly started or stopped.

In the game machine E4, the driving means is formed to be able to generate a rotational driving force, and the transmission means includes a rotational side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the drum member, and a rotating side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the drum member; a displacement side transmission means for transmitting rotational driving force to the displacement member; and a displacement side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force to either the rotational side transmission means or the displacement side transmission means according to the rotational direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means; A game machine E5 characterized by comprising a one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off transmission to the other side.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E4, the driving means is formed to be able to generate rotational driving force, and the transmission means is a rotational side transmission that transmits the rotational driving force of the driving means to the drum member. means, a displacement side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and a rotational driving force is transmitted to either the rotational side transmission means or the displacement side transmission means depending on the rotational direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means. Since it is provided with a one-way clutch mechanism that interrupts transmission to the other, simply by switching the rotational direction of the drive means, it is possible to switch the drive target (the drum member or the displacement member) driven by the rotational drive force. That is, depending on the rotational direction of the driving means, it is possible to switch between the rotation of the drum member and the stopping of the rotation, and the displacement of the displacement member and the stopping of the displacement. Can be simplified.

In the gaming machine E5, the rotation side transmission means includes a gear train forming part or all of a transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the drum member, and one gear of the gear train. A game machine E6 comprising a load gear that is meshed with each other.

Here, in a structure that uses a one-way clutch mechanism to switch the driven object (circle drum member or displacement member) according to the rotational direction of the drive means, when the transmission of the driving force from the drive means is cut off, The drive force allows rotation or displacement in the previously driven direction. Therefore, for example, when the drive target of the driving means is switched from the drum member to the displacement member and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the drum member becomes rotatable and continues to rotate due to inertia (rotation). There is a risk that

On the other hand, according to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E5, the rotation side transmission means is a gear train that forms part or all of the transmission path that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive means to the drum member. and a load gear meshed with one of the gears in the gear train, so even if the transmission of rotational driving force from the drive means is cut off, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear is reduced. ) can be used to prevent the rotation drum member from continuing to rotate.

A gaming machine E7 characterized in that the gaming machine E5 or E6 is provided with a reverse rotation regulating means for regulating the rotating drum member from being rotated in a direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. .

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E5 or E6, a reverse rotation regulating means is provided for regulating the rotating drum member from being rotated in a direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotating drum member from being rotated in the opposite direction due to, for example, a deviation in the center of gravity of the rotating drum member or a collision with a game ball.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the drum member is formed with an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is opened and the internal space is opened. A gaming machine E8 is characterized in that a gaming machine E8 is connected to a gaming area.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2 or E3, the drum member is formed with an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the gaming area, allowing game balls flowing down the gaming area to flow into the internal space of the spinning drum member, or allowing game balls in the internal space of the spinning drum member to flow out into the gaming area. can be done. Moreover, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer circumferential surface of the rotation drum member is closed, thereby blocking the inflow and outflow of game balls between the internal space and the game area. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is rotated to the rotation drum member. A game machine E9 is characterized in that it extends into a region.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine E8, the displacement member is rotatably supported on one side by the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the displacement member is rotatably supported on the rotation drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, Since the other side extends to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the drum member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine E9, the gaming machine E10 is characterized in that, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the upper surface thereof is tilted downward from the other side toward the one side.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E9, when the displacing member is displaced to the second position, its upper surface is tilted downward from the other side toward the one side, so that the gaming area can be After the game ball that has flown down is received on the upper surface of the displacement member, the received game ball can be guided (rolled) into the internal space of the rotation drum member along the downward slope of the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the drum member by using the displacement member.

A gaming machine E11, which is the gaming machine E9 or E10, further comprising a displacement setting means for regulating or permitting displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotation drum member.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E9 or E10, it is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the drum member, so that the projected displacement member Interference with other members around the drum member can be suppressed.

Any one of the gaming machines E9 to E11 is provided with a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotation drum member, and the rotation regulating member is arranged so that the displacement member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member is moved to the second position. A gaming machine E12 characterized in that rotation of the drum member is restricted when it is extended into a gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines E9 to E11, a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotation drum member is provided, and the rotation regulating member is arranged such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position. When the other side of the displacement member is extended to the game area, the rotation of the rotation drum member is restricted, so that the rotation drum member is rotated with the displacement member extended and positioned on its rotation trajectory. Interference of the displacement member with other members can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress rotation of the drum member due to the load that is applied when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<About the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine equipped with a rotating drum member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer circumferential surface is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the spinning drum member has an internal space formed inside the rotating drum member, and an internal space that is connected to the outside. A gaming machine F1, characterized in that it is provided with a communication port formed to allow game balls to pass through.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a drum member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so that it can be seen by the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). According to this gaming machine, the spinning drum member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface is made visible to the player while rotating the spinning drum member or by stopping the spinning drum member. be able to. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is a problem in that the rotation drum member is not fully utilized, as it is only used as a member to hold a display on the outer circumferential surface for the player to see. Ta. That is, since the rotation drum member needs to hold a display visible to the player, it is formed relatively large. Therefore, while the space occupied by the drum member increases, the portion other than the outer circumferential surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the drum member includes an internal space formed inside the drum member, and a communication port that communicates the internal space with the outside and is formed so that the game ball can pass through. , the game balls flowing down the game area can be caused to flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the spinning drum member, which is a dead space, can be made to function as a storage space for game balls or a ball throwing path, and the spinning drum member can be utilized accordingly.

Note that the communication port may be formed at only one location on the drum member, or may be formed at two or more locations. When the communication port is formed at only one location, the communication port is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member. As a result, the position of the communication port can be moved up or down according to the rotational position of the spinning drum member, so that the game ball can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port (the communication port faces upward). When the communication port faces downward, the game balls can flow into the internal space, and when the communication port faces downward, the game balls in the internal space can flow out.

Further, the cross-sectional shape of the rotating drum member taken along a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis does not necessarily have to be circular, and may be polygonal, elliptical, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer circumferential surface of the drum member does not have to be a circumferential surface, and may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

A gaming machine F2 in the gaming machine F1, wherein the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port, so that the first communication port is provided with the first communication port. One of the communication port or the second communication port is an inflow port that allows game balls to flow into the internal space from the outside, and the other of the first communication port or the second communication port is an outflow port that allows game balls to flow out from the internal space to the outside. It can be done. That is, even without rotating the spinning drum member (while maintaining it in a stopped state), the spinning drum member can be used as a ball throwing path for the game ball. Note that while the rotating drum member is being rotated, the rotating drum member may be utilized as a ball throwing path.

In the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member, and is formed as an inflow port through which game balls flowing down the gaming area flow into the internal space, and the second communication port is A gaming machine F3, characterized in that the gaming machine F3 is formed on an end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotational axis, and is formed as an outlet that allows game balls to flow out from the internal space to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member and is formed as an inflow port through which the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area flow into the internal space. , the second communication port is formed on the end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotating shaft, and is formed as an outlet that allows the game balls to flow out from the internal space to the gaming area, so that the second communication port does not allow the game balls to flow into the internal space of the rotating drum member. In addition to making it easier for the player to visually recognize the inflow, the game ball can be ejected while the spinning drum member is maintained in a stopped state.

That is, the rotating drum member is arranged so that the outer circumferential surface is visible to the player, and the first communication port (inflow port) is formed on the outer circumferential surface, so that the inflow of game balls can be visually recognized by the player. You can easily do it. On the other hand, when a second communication port is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member, when the drum member is displaced to a rotational position where the communication port is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the second communication port (outflow port) is formed on the end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotation axis, it is possible to create a state in which the game balls can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotational position of the rotating drum member.

Any of the game machines F1 to F3 includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the communication port is moved to the first position. A gaming machine F4, wherein the communication port is shielded by a member and is opened when the displacement member is displaced to a second position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F1 to F3, the game machine F4 includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, and the displacement member is displaced to the first position. Then, the communication port is blocked by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the communication port is opened, so that the inflow and outflow of game balls through the communication port is in a blocked state and a permitted state. Can be switched.

In the game machine F4, the communication port is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the drum member, and the displacement member is in the second position. A gaming machine F5 characterized in that when the gaming machine F5 is displaced, the other side opposite to the one side projects out into the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is rotatably supported on one side by the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the displacement member rotates on the opposite side from the one side. Since the other side extends to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as an inflow port, the game ball flowing down the game area can be made to easily flow into the internal space of the rotation drum member using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F5, the gaming machine F6 is characterized in that one side of the displacement member is located further forward in the rotational direction of the drum member than the other side.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F5, since one side of the displacement member is located further forward in the rotating direction of the drum member than the other side, when the drum member is rotated, Even if the displacement member interferes with a member disposed around the drum member, the force generated by such interference can be applied in the direction of closing the displacement member (displacing it to the first position). That is, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with other members and being extended (displaced to the second position) when the drum member rotates. Further, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with another member and inhibiting the rotation of the drum member.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, there is provided a base member on which the drum member is rotatably disposed, and a base member supported by the base member and arranged in an internal space of the drum member, and A gaming machine F7 is characterized in that it is provided with a fixed member that does not rotate.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, there is provided a base member on which the spinning drum member is rotatably disposed, and an internal space of the spinning drum member that is supported by the base member. Since it is equipped with a fixed member that is disposed in the rotating drum member and does not rotate with respect to the spinning drum member, the game ball that has flowed into the internal space can be held on the fixed member or rolled on the fixed member toward the outlet. With the rotation of the rotation drum member, the game ball can be prevented from moving wildly in the internal space or being prevented from rolling and remaining in the internal space.

A game machine F8, which is any one of the game machines F4 to F6, and further includes a displacement setting means for regulating or permitting displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotation drum member.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F4 to F6, it is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the drum member, so that the movement of the displacement member to the second position is provided. It is possible to suppress the displaced member from interfering with other members around the drum member.

The gaming machine F5 or F6 includes a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotation drum member, and the rotation regulating member is arranged such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member is directed to the gaming area. A game machine F9 characterized in that rotation of the drum member is restricted when it is extended.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F5 or F6, it is provided with a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotation drum member, and the rotation regulating member is arranged so that the displacement member is displaced to the second position. Since the rotation of the drum member is restricted when the other side is extended to the gaming area, the drum member is rotated with the displacement member extended, and other members located on its rotation trajectory are restricted. It is possible to suppress the displacement member from interfering with the displacement member. Further, it is possible to suppress rotation of the drum member due to the load that is applied when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F3, a light emitting means is formed to be able to emit light and is disposed in the internal space of the drum member, and the second communication port is formed on an end face of the drum member in the rotation axis direction. A gaming machine F10 comprising: an opening formed on an end surface opposite to the end surface where the light emitting means is exposed, and an electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F3, an opening is formed on the end surface of the drum member in the direction of the rotation axis, which is opposite to the end surface where the second communication port is formed. Since the electrical connection line of the light emitting means is routed through the opening, it is possible to easily secure a space usable for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly flowed out through the second communication port, and the wiring work for electrical connection lines to the opening can be easily performed. Furthermore, since the second communication port and the opening can be separated to the maximum extent possible, interference between the game ball rolling through the internal space toward the second communication port and the electrical connection line can be easily suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
A first member and a second member are formed to be displaceable, and the first member has a covered position where at least a portion of the second member is hidden from view, and a state where the first member is disposed at the covered position. In the gaming machine, the first member is movable between a retracted position and a retracted position in which an area that invisibly covers the second member is reduced. A gaming machine G1 is formed to be able to regulate displacement of the gaming machine G1.

Here, the first member and the second member are displaceably formed, and the first member has a covering position where at least a part of the second member is hidden from view, and a state where the first member is disposed at the covering position. A gaming machine is known that is movable between a retracted position and a retracted position that reduces the area that covers the second member invisibly (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by displacing the first member to the retracted position from a state in which the first member is placed in the covered position and the second member is made invisible to the player. It is possible to perform an effect that is visually recognized by the player.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the second member is formed to be displaceable, so when the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the second member is not displaced. There is a risk of Therefore, there was a problem in that the second member could not be seen in an appropriate state by the player, and the performance effect was reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the first member is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member when it is displaced to the retracted position. It can be made visible to the public, and the production effect can be ensured. That is, when performing an effect in which the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position, which must be performed for the purpose of the effect, is replaced by the displacement of the second member to the retracted position. Used as a means of regulating displacement. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide or control a mechanism for regulating the displacement of the second member, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the gaming machine G1, the second member is formed to be rotatable, and the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, the second member is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so the degree of freedom in designing the second member is increased. can be increased. In other words, the second member does not need to have a shape in which its center of gravity is located at the center of rotation; for example, a shape that is asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the performance effect of the second member can be enhanced. . On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric in this manner, there is a risk that the second member will rotate (rotate) around the rotation center due to its own weight. Therefore, a configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, and thereby the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure the production effect.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 includes a displacement member disposed displaceably on the second member, and the displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least when the first member is displaced to the retracted position. The game machine G3 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming machine G3 includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the second member, and the displacement member is configured such that at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. Since it is formed so that it can be displaced in the state, when performing a performance in which the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the performance effect can be enhanced by further displacing the displacement member. I can do it. On the other hand, if the displacement member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the position of the center of gravity may move with the displacement, and the second member may rotate (rotate). Therefore, a configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, and thereby the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure the production effect.

In gaming machine G3, the second member is arranged so that its outer peripheral surface is visible to the player, and the displacement member has one side rotatably supported by the outer peripheral surface of the second member, and the displacement member has one side rotatably supported by the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the other side, which is the opposite side, is formed so as to be able to extend into a gaming area.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the second member is arranged such that its outer circumferential surface is visible to the player, and the displacement member has one side rotatable to the outer circumferential surface of the second member. Since the other side opposite to one side is formed to be able to extend into the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when an inlet for game balls is formed in the second member, the game balls flowing down the game area can be made easier to flow into the inlet by using the displacement member. . In this case, if the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area, there is a risk that the second member will be rotated due to the load acting at that time and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, a configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, and thereby the state in which the displacement member is extended to a predetermined position in the game area is particularly effective. can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine G4, the first member is disposed in the gaming area while facing the outer circumferential surface of the second member in the covered position, and is placed outside the gaming area in the retracted position. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being arranged.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G4, the first member is disposed in the gaming area while facing the outer circumferential surface of the second member in the covered position, so that the gaming machine flowing down the gaming area cannot be played. It is possible to prevent the second member from rotating due to the ball colliding with the second member. In particular, when the rotational position of the second member is such that the displacement member is directed toward the gaming area, the game ball flowing down the gaming area collides with the displacement member, and the displacement member is released (tensioned). can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the first member is placed outside the gaming area in the retracted position, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position makes it possible to secure a space for the displacement member to protrude into the gaming area. . Therefore, the outer circumferential surface of the second member can be moved closer to the gaming area side (player side), making it easier for the player to visually recognize the displacement member.

In gaming machine G5, the first member is formed to be rotatable around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is formed in a plate shape curved along the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A game machine G6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G5, the first member is formed to be rotatable around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and the outer circumferential surface of the second member Since the cover is formed in a plate shape that curves along the curve, the space required when moving between the covered position and the retracted position can be reduced. Therefore, space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. In addition, by forming the first member in a curved manner in this way, the game ball flowing down the game area is prevented from being stopped on the first member disposed at the covered position, and can be smoothly played. It can be flowed down.

A gaming machine G7, which is any one of the gaming machines G3 to G6, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second member and the displacement member. .

Here, in order to form the second member rotatably and displaceably displace the displacement member on the second member, a driving means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. Bulk. Furthermore, if a drive means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the second member, the weight of the second member increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop rotation of the second member.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines G3 to G6, a driving means for generating driving force is provided, and the driving force of the driving means is applied to the second member and the displacement member. Since the second member is provided with a transmission means for transmitting data, the first driving means can be used also to rotate the second member and displace the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs. Further, since there is no need to mount a driving means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and rotation of the second member can be smoothly started or stopped.

A gaming machine G8 characterized in that the gaming machine G7 is provided with a connecting means that connects the first member and the displacement member, and links the displacement of the first member to the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine G7, the first member and the displacement member are connected to each other, and since the game machine G8 is provided with a connecting means that links the displacement of the first member to the displacement of the displacement member, the displacement member can be displaced. The driving means for displacing the first displacement member can also be used as a driving means for displacing the first displacement member. In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by the driving force of separate drive means, there is a risk that the displacement member and the first member will interfere if poor control occurs. Since the two members can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, interference between the displacement member and the first member can be reliably suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, the transmission means is , a first member, a second member located closer to the displacement member than the first member in the transmission path of the driving force, and an engagement member disposed between the first member and the second member. and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member, and the driving force is transmitted. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that, in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in advance in the one direction with respect to the first member.

Here, a game machine is known which includes a drive means that generates a driving force, a displacement member that is displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the transmission state of the driving force by the transmission means from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, so when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member also remains constant. The displacement member is displaced at a displacement speed, and the displacement mode of the displacement member cannot be changed. Therefore, there was a problem in that the effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member was insufficient.

Note that the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the driving speed of the drive means, but if the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement sections of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. In order to achieve this speed, it is necessary to install a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member and control the output of the drive means to increase or decrease according to the detection result of the sensor device, which leads to an increase in product cost and control cost. . Furthermore, the structure and control become complicated, leading to a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the transmission means includes a first member, a second member located closer to the displacement member than the first member in the driving force transmission path, and an engaging member disposed between the members, and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member. At the same time, the driving force is transmitted and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, and in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in one direction in advance of the first member. Therefore, regardless of the driving state of the driving means, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Therefore, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Furthermore, according to the game machine H1, the second member can be caused to advance in one direction relative to the first member regardless of the driving state of the driving means, so that, for example, in the entire displacement section of the displacement member, The driving means can be driven at a constant driving speed, and there is no need to increase or decrease the driving speed of the driving means during the displacement section of the displacement member (that is, depending on whether it is a predetermined section or another section). As a result, control can be simplified, control costs can be reduced, and operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, the driving of the driving means can be stopped in a predetermined section, and in this case, it is possible to suppress energy consumption.

Furthermore, according to the game machine H1, in the driving state in which the first member is displaced in the other direction relative to the two members, the engagement of the engagement member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted. The displacement member can be brought into a stopped state (non-driven state), and the driving force of the driving means in such a driven state can be used as a driving force for driving other members. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means, the two members, the displacement member and the other member, can be respectively displaced.

The transmission means is configured such that when the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engagement member is released and transmission of the driving force is interrupted. It may be something that is done.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable, and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, and in the predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member moves the second member in the one direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to act in a direction of displacement.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable, and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so that in a predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member is Since it is formed to be able to act in a direction to displace the two members in one direction, the second member can be displaced in one direction in advance of the first member by utilizing the weight of the displacing member. . That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, when a displacement member is formed to be able to repeatedly rotate 360 degrees around its rotation axis, the displacement speed (rotation speed) of the displacement member in a predetermined section is different from that of the displacement member in other sections. A rotation mode in which the displacement speed (rotation speed) is higher than that, that is, a rotation mode in which the rotation speed is increased or decreased during one rotation, can be repeatedly performed.

In the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body that is rotationally driven by the second member, and a crank member that has a pin that projects from the main body and is located eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body. a sliding groove through which a pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed at one end side, and an arm member whose intermediate portion is rotatably supported; A gaming machine H3 characterized in that it is connected to a member.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body that is rotationally driven by the second member, a transmission means that projects from the main body, and is located eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body. The crank member includes a crank member having a pin portion, and an arm member in which a sliding groove into which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed at one end side and whose intermediate portion is rotatably supported. By rotationally driving the crank member by the second member and sliding the pin member along the sliding groove, the other end side of the arm member can be reciprocated. In this case, since the other end of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can be reciprocated between the first position and the second position as the other end of the arm member reciprocates. . That is, the displacement direction of the displacement member can be changed without changing the driving direction of the driving means.

In the game machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between a first position and a second position in accordance with the reciprocating movement of the other end of the arm member, and is displaced from the first position to the second position. and during the displacement from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member is applied to the second member is such that the second member is displaced from the other position. A game machine H4 characterized in that the direction is changed from a direction in which the second member is displaced in the first direction to a direction in which the second member is displaced in the first direction.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating movement of the other end of the arm member, and the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position. The direction in which the weight of the displacing member is applied to the second member during the displacement from the second position to the second position and from the second position to the first position is such that the second member The direction is changed from the direction of displacing the second member in the other direction to the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, so when the displacing member is reciprocated, when it is displaced in either direction, it starts from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, the displacement member is reciprocated between an extended position (first position), which is a position where the displacement member is extended so that it can be seen by the player, and a retracted position (second position), which is a position that is retracted from the extended position. When operating, when extending the displacement member from the retracted position to the extended position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed halfway, and then the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle to move the displacement member vigorously. In addition to being able to extend the displaceable member to the extended position, when retracting the displaceable member from the extended position to the extended position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed until halfway, and the displacement speed of the displaceable member is increased from halfway. As a result, the displacement member can be immediately retracted to the retracted position.

In the game machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be slidable, and in the predetermined section, it is tilted downward in the direction of the slide displacement, so that the weight of the displacement member is lowered by the second member. A gaming machine H5 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to act in the direction of displacement in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be slidable and tilted downward in the direction of the sliding displacement in a predetermined section, thereby reducing the weight of the displacement member. Since the second member is formed to be able to act in a direction to displace the second member in one direction, the weight of the displacing member is used to displace the second member in advance of the first member in one direction. be able to. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, a gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed to be able to hold a gaming ball at least in the predetermined section.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed to be able to hold the game ball at least in a predetermined section, so that the displacement member can hold the game ball. In this state, the weight of the displacement member as a whole can be increased by the weight of the game ball, and the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster. Furthermore, the weight of the displacement member as a whole is made to differ depending on whether the displacement member holds a game ball or not, or depending on the number of game balls held. be able to. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed in each case. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

In any of the game machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving part that receives a game ball flowing down the gaming area, and at least in the predetermined section, when the receiving part receives the game ball, the game ball is A gaming machine H7 characterized in that a force applied to the displacement member from the above can be applied in a direction to displace the second member in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H7, in any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacement member is provided with a receiving section that receives the game ball flowing down the gaming area, and at least in a predetermined section, when the receiving section receives the gaming ball. Since the force that is applied from the game ball to the displacement member is configured to be able to act in the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, when the receiving part receives the game ball, the kinetic energy of the game ball is By utilizing this, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster. In addition, the force applied to the displacement member is varied depending on whether the receiving part is receiving the game ball or not, or depending on the falling speed (magnitude of kinetic energy) of the game ball when receiving the game ball. be able to. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed in each case. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Note that the game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to a game ball that moves along the front surface of the game board in the direction of gravity, but also includes a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Examples of game balls that move in a direction different from the direction of gravity include game balls that collide with nails, tulips, objects, etc. and move in a direction different from the direction of gravity, and balls that roll on a stage and then jump off the stage. A game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means includes a gear train forming part or all of the drive force transmission path, and a load gear meshed with one gear of the gear train. A game machine H8 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means is configured to mesh with a gear train forming part or all of the driving force transmission path and one gear of the gear train. In a predetermined section, when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the game ball is received by the receiving part, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is used. and displacing the second member in advance of the first member in one direction (i.e., making the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections), If the displacement member does not hold the game ball or the receiving part does not receive the game ball, the second member will move against the first member using the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear. It is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced in one direction in advance (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is increased).

That is, when the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the receiving part does not receive the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section becomes faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Only when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the receiving part receives the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is set to be higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. It is possible to easily form a mode of speeding up the process.

<About the concept of the invention using the back case 300 as an example>
A game board (base board 60), a back member (back case 300) arranged on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member (fixing member 320) arranged on the back side of the back member. In the game machine, the displacement member is disposed between the facing part from the game board to the back member, and is operable from the outside of the facing part from the game board to the back face side of the game board. (an engaging member 310), the fixed member includes a protrusion (an engaged portion 322), at least a portion of which is disposed on the front side of the back member, and which engages with the displacement member; A game machine I1 characterized in that the protruding portion and the displacement member engage with each other, and the fixing member is disposed on the back surface member.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a game board, a back member disposed on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member disposed on the back side of the back member (for example, a special Publication No. 2004-33603). According to this gaming machine, the fixing member is fastened to the back member by the screw inserted from the front side of the back member. This can prevent the fixing member from being removed from the back side of the game board.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the process of arranging the fixing member on the back member and the process of fastening the fixing member to the back member are performed from the back side of the back member and from the front side of the back member. The work will be done from the opposite direction. Therefore, when disposing the fixing member on the back member, the fixing member is placed on the back side of the back member and then wraps around to the front side of the back member, or the back member is reversed and the fixing member is placed on the front side of the back member. It is necessary to tighten the screws from the Therefore, there is a problem in that the number of work steps required to arrange the fixing member on the back member increases.

On the other hand, in the game machine I1, a displacement member is provided between the game board and the back member, and is operable from the outside of the space on the back side of the game board. The fixing member has at least a portion disposed on the front side of the back member and includes a protrusion that engages with the displacement member, and when the protrusion and the displacement member engage, the fixing member Since the fixing member is disposed on the back surface member, the fixing member can be disposed on the back surface member by a one-way operation from the back surface side of the back surface member. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the step of working from the back side and then going around to the front side or reversing the back member. As a result, the work steps for disposing the fixing member on the back member can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the engaging portion between the protruding portion and the fixed member is located on the front side of the back member, the engaging portion between the protruding portion and the fixing member can be accessed from the outside between the opposing sides of the game board and the back member. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized release of the engagement between the protrusion and the fixing member.

The gaming machine I1 includes a first member (rotation unit 700) disposed between the gaming board and the back surface member, and the displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first member. Characteristic gaming machine I2.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1, the gaming machine I2 includes a first member disposed between the gaming board and the back member facing each other, and the displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first member. Therefore, the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixed member can be arranged between the opposing members from the back member to the first member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixed member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member from being illegally released and the fixing member being tampered with (for example, being replaced with an incorrect fixing member).

Furthermore, in recent game machines, there is a tendency for the first member (accessory device, etc.) disposed between the game board and the back member to be larger. For this reason, in conventional game machines in which the fixed member is fastened with screws from the front side of the back member, when the enlarged first member is disposed in front of the fixed member or in a position close to the fixed member, The first member becomes an obstacle when fastening the fixing member with screws from the front side of the back member. Therefore, it has been difficult to arrange the fixing member on the back member by fastening the fixing member with a screw inserted from the front side of the back member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I2, the displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first member, so when the first member is disposed between the game board and the back member, it is possible to move the displacement member away from the game board. The displacement member and the fixed member can be engaged with each other by operating the displacement member from the outside between the facing parts up to the back member. Therefore, the fixed member can be disposed on the back member without being obstructed by the first member that is disposed between the displacing member and the opposing member from the game board to the back member.

A gaming machine I3 in the gaming machine I1 or I2, wherein the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the facing surface of the back member and the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I2, the displacement member is slid on a plane parallel to the opposing surface between the back member and the game board, so when the displacement member is displaced, the back The amount of displacement in the opposing direction between the member and the game board can be set to zero. Thereby, a space between the displacing member and the game board facing each other can be secured.

In any of gaming machines I1 to I3, the back surface member includes a bottom wall portion (bottom wall portion 301) facing the game board, and a side wall standing from an edge of the bottom wall toward the game board. (outer wall 302), an opening (second opening 301d) is formed in either the bottom wall or the side wall, and the displacement member A game machine I4 characterized in that it includes an operator (operator 315) that is inserted through the back member and protrudes from the inside of the back member to the outside.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member is provided with a bottom wall facing the gaming board and an edge of the bottom wall standing on the gaming board side. A box-shaped side wall portion is formed, and an opening is formed in either the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member is inserted through the opening and protrudes from the inside of the back member to the outside. Since the controller is provided with an operator, the displacement member can be displaced by operating the operator from the outside of the back member (the outside between the opposing sides from the game board to the back member). Thereby, it is possible to easily displace the displacement member disposed between the facing part from the game board to the back member from the outside of the facing part from the game board to the back member. As a result, the efficiency of the work of engaging the displacement member with the fixed member can be improved.

The gaming machine I4 is characterized by comprising a biasing means for biasing the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member when the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged. A gaming machine I5.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine I4, in a state where the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is released, the displacement member is biased in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member. Since the biasing means is provided, if you forget to engage the displacement member and the fixed member, or if the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is incomplete, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with the fixed member. It can be displaced in the direction of release. Therefore, the operator can judge whether the displacement member and the fixed member are properly engaged based on the position where the operating element protruding to the outside of the back member is arranged. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting of engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member.

Note that the biasing means may include a form in which a spring, rubber, etc. is disposed between the displacement member and the back member to bias the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member, or a form in which the displacement member is biased in the direction of disengaging from the fixed member. Examples include a form in which the displacement member acts in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member.

In gaming machines I1 to I5, the fixed member includes a supporting member (shaft supporting member 340) disposed on the back surface of the back member, and a substrate member (substrate member) that is connected to the supporting member and controls the gaming machine. box 100), and the protruding portion is formed on the base member.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I1 to I5, the fixing member is connected to a supporting member disposed on the back surface of the back member, and is connected to the supporting member to allow the player to play a predetermined game. and a base member for performing a lottery for assigning value, and since the protrusion is formed on the base member, the displacement member can be tilted toward the fixed member when the base member is not connected to the support member. It disappears. Therefore, compared to the supporting member for connecting the back member and the board member, if you forget to arrange the board member that performs the control required for the game machine, the displacement member is more likely to be displaced and engaged. It can be suppressed. Thereby, when the operator who arranges the board member forgets to arrange the board member, the operator can be made aware of the forgetting to install the board member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board member from being sent to a subsequent process of the gaming machine assembly process in a state where it has been forgotten to be attached.

In the gaming machine I6, the substrate member is rotatably connected to the support member, the protruding portions are disposed at different positions in the radial direction from the rotation axis of the substrate member, By rotating the member relative to the support member, the member can be displaced between a first position located on the front side of the back member and a second position located on the back side of the back member. , wherein the displacement member is configured to be slidable in a direction from the rotation axis of the substrate member toward the protrusion when the protrusion is placed at the i-first position. I7.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine I6, the base member is rotatably connected to the support member, and the protruding portions are arranged at different positions in the radial direction from the rotation axis of the base member. By rotating the substrate member with respect to the support member, the substrate member can be displaced between a first position located on the front side of the back member and a second position located on the back side of the back member. The displacement member is set to be slidable in a direction from the rotation axis of the substrate member toward the protrusion when the protrusion is placed in the first position, so that the substrate member rotates with respect to the support member. Displacing the protrusion from the second position side to the first position when the displacement member is displaced to a position where it engages with the protrusion before being displaced and disposing the protrusion in the first position. With this, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the displacement member.

In this case, since the displacement member is set to be slidable in the direction from the rotation axis of the substrate member toward the protrusion, the force applied by the protrusion is applied to release the engagement between the displacement member and the protrusion. direction can be applied to the displacement member. Therefore, when the protrusion comes into contact with the displacement member, the force of the abutment of the protrusion can displace the displacement member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member. Therefore, the displacement member can be displaced in the direction of releasing the engagement with the protrusion. As a result, the operator who arranges the fixed member on the back member can easily recognize that the displaceable member and the fixed member are engaged, and it is possible to prevent the displaceable member and the fixed member from being disengaged. can.

Furthermore, when the protrusion comes into contact with the displacement member, the displacement member is released in the direction of disengaging from the fixed member. Damage to the member can be suppressed.

Any one of the game machines I4 to I7 includes an outer frame (outer frame 11) formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the game board and the back member, and the inner shape of the outer frame is such that the inner shape of the outer frame accommodates the game board and the back member. When the displacement member and the fixed member are not engaged, the operator is disposed on the outer side between the opposing sides from the game board to the back member. A game machine I8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I4 to I7, it is provided with an outer frame formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the gaming board and the back member, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the same as that of the gaming board. and the outer shape of the back member when viewed from the front, and when the displacement member and the fixed member are not engaged, the operator is arranged on the outside between the opposing sides from the game board to the back member. When the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged and the game board and the back member are housed in the outer frame, the operator can be brought into contact with the outer frame. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game board and the back member from being housed in the outer frame. Therefore, if the fixing member is forgotten to be disposed on the back surface member, or if the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to be engaged, the operator can be made aware of the forgetting (abnormality). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board from being housed in the outer frame in a state where the fixing member is forgotten to be disposed on the back member or the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to engage.

A gaming machine I9 in any of the gaming machines I4 to I8, further comprising a suppressing means for suppressing the operator from being operated in a direction to release the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member. .

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I4 to I8, a suppressing means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member due to the operation of the operator. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from disengaging from the fixed member using the operator.

Note that the suppressing means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member may include a form in which the operator is pivotally supported so that it can idle in the direction of releasing the engagement. , a form in which the protruding tip of the operator is formed on an inclined surface protruding in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member, and a form in which the operator is disposed between the displacement member and the fixed member. etc. are exemplified.

In any one of gaming machines I1 to I9, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed and a first protrusion protruding from the elastic piece, and the fixed member is configured to control the displacement of the displacement member. an accommodating portion that is open to the region and recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member; the accommodating portion includes a second protrusion that protrudes into the displacement region of the first protrusion; When the displacement member is displaced in one direction, the protrusion comes into contact with the first protrusion and can displace the elastic piece, and when the displacement member is displaced in the other direction, the protrusion can displace the elastic piece. A game machine I10 characterized in that the displacement member and the fixed member can be engaged with each other by contacting one member.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines I1 to I9, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed, and a first protrusion that projects from the elastic piece, The fixing member includes a accommodating part that opens in the displacement region of the displacement member and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member, and the accommodating part includes a second protrusion that protrudes in the displacement region of the first protrusion. The second protrusion is configured such that when the displacement member is displaced in one direction, the second protrusion comes into contact with the first protrusion and can displace the elastic piece, and when the displacement member is displaced in the other direction, the second protrusion can displace the elastic piece. Since the second protrusion makes it possible to engage the displacement member and the fixed member by contacting the member, the second protrusion can allow displacement of the displacement member in one direction and restrict displacement of the displacement member in the other direction. . This makes it possible to restrict the displacement of the displacement member in both the direction of engagement with the fixed member and the direction of detachment.

In the gaming machine I10, the accommodating part is set to a size that can accommodate the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, the elastic piece is placed in the accommodating part. A gaming machine I11 characterized in that a gaming machine I11 is accommodated therein.

According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I10, the accommodating portion is set to a size that can accommodate the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, Since the elastic piece is housed in the housing part, it can be made difficult to operate the elastic piece from outside the housing part when the displacement member and the fixing member are engaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic piece from being manipulated from the outside of the accommodating portion and being elastically deformed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member from being improperly released. In this case, the fixing member can be removed from the back member by cutting the displacement member (base end portion of the accommodated portion) located outside the accommodation portion.

In the game machine I11, the displacement member includes a plurality of the elastic pieces that can be stored in the storage portion, and the storage portion is set to a size that can accommodate the plurality of elastic pieces. Machine I12.

According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I11, the displacement member is provided with a plurality of elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating part, and the accommodating part is set in a space large enough to accommodate the plurality of elastic pieces. Therefore, when the fixed member is removed from the back member by cutting the displacement member (base end portion of the elastic piece) located outside the housing part, the cut displacement member (elastic piece) is placed inside the housing part. In this state, the uncut displacement member (elastic piece) can be stored inside the housing part. Therefore, the cut displacement members (elastic pieces) can be stored and left inside the storage part, so it is possible to compare the number of displacement members stored in the storage part and the number of cut elastic pieces of the displacement member. In this case, when the fixing member is illegally removed and replaced with an unauthorized fixing member, the difference in the number of the fixing members allows the operator to detect that the gaming machine has been tampered with.

In any of gaming machines I1 to I12, when the displacement member engages with the fixed member, the first member restricts displacement of the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member. A gaming machine I13 is characterized in that it is provided with a regulating means.

According to the gaming machine I13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I1 to I12, when the displacing member engages with the fixed member, there is a regulation that restricts the displacement of the displacing member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member. Since the means is provided, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the displacement member when a force is applied in a direction to release the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member due to an unauthorized person. Therefore, when a force acts in a direction that causes the displacement member to disengage from the fixed member due to fraud, it is possible to prevent the force from concentrating on the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixed member. It is possible to suppress damage to the displacement member or the fixed member due to the force inputted by.

Furthermore, since the first member includes the regulating means, when the fixed member is removed from the back member, the regulation of displacement of the displacement member by the regulating means can be released by removing the first member from the back member. In this case, by removing the first member, the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be accessed, so that the work efficiency when removing the fixing member from the back member can be improved.

Examples of the regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacement member include a configuration in which a protrusion is arranged inside the engagement recess to regulate elastic deformation of the displacement member, and a configuration in which the protrusion is engaged with the displacement member.

<About the concept of the invention using the general winning slot unit 150 as an example>
a base member having a game area on the front side; a first decoration means forming a decoration on the front side of the base member; and a second decoration means forming a decoration continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means when viewed from the front; A gaming machine J1, characterized in that the first decoration means and the second decoration means are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front.

Conventionally, a base member having a play area on the front side, a first decoration means arranged on the front side of the base member and having decorations formed on the front surface, and a first decoration means arranged on the front side of the first decoration means are conventionally provided. A gaming machine is known that includes a first member and a second decoration means that is disposed in front of the first member and forms a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means when viewed from the front (for example, (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2007-000195). According to this gaming machine, the design of the base member can be ensured by allowing the player to visually recognize the decorations of the first decoration means and the second decoration means as one decoration.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the second decoration means is disposed in front of the first member, the second decoration means is separated from the first decoration means by the thickness of the first member. placed at a remote location. Therefore, depending on the position (direction of line of sight) from which the player views the base member, the decorations on the first decoration means and the decorations on the second decoration means may be seen to be shifted by the thickness of the first member, There was a problem that the design of the member deteriorated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the first decoration means and the second decoration means are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, so that the first decoration means and the second decoration means are The distance between the front and rear can be reduced. Thereby, when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are viewed from an angle oblique to the front view of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means This can prevent the image from being visually recognized as being out of alignment. Therefore, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration, and the design of the base member can be improved.

Further, the first decoration means may be any type of decoration as long as it forms a decoration, for example, a sticker member having a decoration printed on a plate-shaped member is pasted on the front of the base member, or a decoration is formed on the front of the base member. It is intended to print.

In addition, when the second decoration means is pasted (glued) on the front of the first decoration means, the worker can affix (glue) the second decoration means while visually recognizing the decoration of the first decoration means. can. Therefore, the operator can easily attach the second decoration means to the first decoration means at a position where the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means are continuous. Therefore, the work efficiency of the worker who attaches the second decorative means to the first decorative means can be improved.

The gaming machine J1 includes a front member made of a light-transmitting material and having an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the second decoration means when viewed from the front, and disposed in front of the second decoration means, The member is provided with a recessed portion having a larger shape than the outer diameter of the second decorative means on a surface facing the second decorative means, and the recessed dimension of the recessed portion is larger than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means. The game machine J2 is characterized in that a large value is also set to a large value.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine J2 is made of a light-transmitting material, has an outer shape larger than the outer diameter of the second decorative means when viewed from the front, and is disposed in front of the second decorative means. The front member includes a recess formed in a face larger than the outer diameter of the second decoration means on a surface facing the second decoration means, and the recess dimension of the recess is larger than the outer diameter of the second decoration means. Since the thickness is set to a value larger than the thickness dimension, the front member can be disposed on the base member with the second decoration means accommodated in the recess. Thereby, the second decoration means can be prevented from falling off from between the base member and the front member.

Moreover, since the recessed dimension of the recessed portion is set to a larger value than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the front member and the first decorative means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from being caught between the front member and the first decoration means, thereby making it difficult for the decoration of the first decoration means to be visually recognized.

The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the inner surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decoration means, and the second decoration means is disposed by adhering to the bottom surface of the recess. Game machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J2, the inner surface of the recessed portion is formed along the outer shape of the second decorative means, and the second decorative means is disposed by being adhered to the bottom surface of the recessed portion of the recessed portion. Therefore, by arranging the second decoration means along the recessed portion of the front member, the second decoration means can be positioned and arranged with respect to the front member. Thereby, when the front member is disposed in front of the first decoration means, it is possible to suppress the second decoration means from being caught between the opposing edge of the front member and the first decoration means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first decoration means and the front member, and the decoration of the first decoration means can be visually recognized due to dust or dirt being caught between the front member and the first decoration means. This can prevent it from becoming difficult.

In gaming machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the base member from a surface facing the base member, the base member includes an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the front member includes an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the front member is positioned with respect to the base member by being inserted into the opening.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that protrudes from the surface facing the base member toward the base member, and the base member has an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the front member is positioned relative to the base member by inserting the protrusion into the opening, it is possible to suppress the front member from shifting in position relative to the first decoration means. Further, the second decorative means is positioned relative to the front member by the recessed portion of the front member. Therefore, by positioning the front member with respect to the first decoration means, it is possible to suppress misalignment of the first decoration means and the second decoration means. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

In gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recess, the second decoration means has a through hole penetrating at a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the protrusion is inserted into the through hole. A gaming machine J5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recessed part, and the second decoration means is formed with a through hole that penetrates at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the projection is inserted into the hole, the second decoration means can be easily arranged on the front member. That is, simply disposing the second decorative means inside the concave portion of the front member requires the edge of the second decorative means to be disposed along the concave portion. By forming the through hole to be inserted, the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member can be determined simply by inserting the protrusion into the through hole. As a result, the arrangement of the second decoration means on the front member can be simplified.

Furthermore, since the projection for positioning the front member relative to the first decoration means is inserted into the through hole of the second decoration means, the second decoration means and the first decoration means can be positioned at the same part (protrusion). Therefore, the accuracy of positioning the decorative member and the first decorative means can be improved. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

In any one of gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined portion that is inclined toward the first decorative means toward the outer edge in front view, and an edge of the second decorative means is provided on the back side of the inclined portion. A game machine J6 characterized in that a section is provided.

Here, in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize both the decorations of the first decoration means and the decorations of the second decoration means as one decoration, it is necessary to suppress the displacement of the two decorations. However, when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are overlapped in the front-back direction, the positions of the decorations on both sides are shifted in the front-rear direction by the thickness of the second decoration means. There has been a problem in that when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are viewed from an angle oblique to the front view of the second decoration means, there is a possibility that a positional shift between the front and back may be recognized.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined part that is inclined toward the first decorative means side as it goes toward the outer edge in front view. Since the edge of the second decoration means is disposed on the back side of the front member, misalignment of the decoration due to the difference in the arrangement of the second decoration means and the first decoration means in the front-rear direction can be avoided by the inclined part of the front member. The refraction of light can make it difficult for players to recognize it.

To explain in detail, the light that is reflected by the decoration of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, passes through the inside of the front member, and is emitted from the inclined part, is caused by the slope of the light passing direction with respect to the front surface of the base member. When the angle is made smaller than the inclination angle in the direction perpendicular to the inclined surface of the inclined part with respect to the front of the base member, the inclination angle of the direction of light emission from the inclined part with respect to the front of the base member is The angle of inclination of the light passing direction with respect to the front of the member is made smaller. Therefore, the connecting portion between the first decorative means and the second decorative means is viewed from a direction having a smaller intersecting angle with respect to the front surface of the base member than the inclination angle in the direction orthogonal to the slope surface of the slope portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. The passing direction of the light that is visually recognized by the player can be brought closer to the direction in which the first decoration means and the second decoration means overlap. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the positional shift between the front and back.

In gaming machine J6, the second decorative means includes an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member, and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member, and the slope portion and the second decorative means are at least A game machine J7 characterized in that the non-adhesive surfaces are provided at opposing positions.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the connecting part of the decoration between the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction perpendicular to the slope of the slope, the front and back of the first decoration means and the second decoration means are There is a possibility that the player will notice the misalignment of the decoration in the direction.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine J6, the second decoration means includes an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member, and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member, Since the non-adhesive surface is provided at least at a position where the slope part and the second decoration means face each other, a gap is formed between the second decoration means and the front member (slope part) facing each other on the non-adhesive surface, and the front member is Light passing through the non-adhesive surface can be totally reflected. This makes it possible to prevent the player from seeing the decoration at the end of the second decoration means when the player views the second decoration means through the slope from a direction perpendicular to the slope of the slope. . As a result, when a player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means through the slope from a direction perpendicular to the slope of the slope, the decoration of the second decoration means is made difficult to see. , it is possible to suppress the player from perceiving the misalignment of the decorations in the front-rear direction between the first decoration means and the second decoration means.

In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion is formed in an arc shape in which an outer edge of a cross section in a direction perpendicular to an extending direction of the outer edge of the front member when viewed from the front is curved convexly toward the outer edge of the front member. a gaming machine, wherein the end of the second decorative means is disposed closer to the center of the front member when viewed from the front than a substantially midway point of a straight line connecting the ends of the sloped portions. J8.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J6 or J7, the sloping portion has an outer edge in a cross section perpendicular to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member when viewed from the front that is convex toward the outer edge of the front member. The end portion of the second decorative means is arranged closer to the center of the front member when viewed from the front than the approximately midway point of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portion. When the first decoration means and the second decoration means are viewed from an angle oblique to the front view of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, the center of the front member is refracted due to the curvature of the inclined portion. The direction of light passing through the side can be brought closer to the direction in which the first decoration means and the second decoration means overlap.

Moreover, since the end of the second decoration means is disposed closer to the center of the front member than the substantially midway position of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined parts, the first decoration means and the second decoration means It is possible to prevent the player from perceiving a positional shift in the front-rear direction. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

In any of gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recess is formed with a second inclined part that is inclined outward in front view toward the first decorative means, and the second inclined part is A gaming machine J9 characterized in that the angle of inclination of the member with respect to the front is set smaller than the angle of inclination of the inclined portion with respect to the front of the base member.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recessed portion is formed with a second inclined portion that is inclined outward in a front view toward the first decoration means side. Since the slope angle of the slope portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is set to be smaller than the slope angle of the slope portion with respect to the front surface of the base member, the decoration ( The position of the virtual image (virtual image) can be brought closer to the position of the decoration (real image) of the first decoration means that is visually recognized without going through the slope part and the second slope part. As a result, when the first decoration means is visually recognized through the front member, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the first decoration means from becoming difficult to see due to the refraction of light through the front member.

<About the concept of the invention using the special prize winning device 550 as an example>
A game machine comprising a game board having a game area on the front side, and a path unit disposed on the game board and having a path for guiding the throwing of a game ball flowing down the game area, the path unit comprising: A first path for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board when viewed from the front, and a first path for throwing the game ball from the first path to a horizontal direction in the opposite direction to the guiding direction of the first path. A second path for throwing the ball to the other side, and a third path connecting one side of the first path and the second path, and the third path is on the front side or the back side with respect to the game board. A game machine K1 characterized in that a guide means for throwing a game ball to at least one of the game boards is provided on at least one inner wall on the front side or the back side with respect to the game board.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a gaming board having a playing area on the front side, and a path unit disposed on the gaming board and having a path for guiding a thrown game ball flowing down the playing area. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, by guiding (rolling) the game ball that has flowed into the guide route formed in the route unit along the route of the guide route, the rolling (flowing down) of the game ball can be enjoyed. can have.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to ensure a predetermined throwing distance for the game ball inside the path unit, there is a first path for throwing the game ball to one side with respect to the game board, and a first path for throwing the game ball to one side with respect to the game board. When a second path is formed in which the game ball thrown from the first path is thrown to the other side of the game board, and a third path is formed that connects one side of the first path and the second path, the first path Since the speed of the game ball rolling is maximized at the portion communicating with the third path (the downstream end of the first path), the game ball is placed on the inner wall of the third path where the direction of the ball is changed. Collisions and bounces are more likely. Therefore, there was a risk that the game ball that collided with the inner wall of the third path would return to the first path, or swing (shake) inside the third path in the throwing direction of the first path (horizontal direction when viewed from the front). Therefore, since the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path swings in the third path, the player's line of sight cannot follow the game ball thrown to the third path in a fixed direction, There was a problem in that it was difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown along the route.

In this case, by making the third path longer, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown from the first path can be smoothly switched to the rolling direction of the second path, and the game ball passing through the third path can be However, since the third path is formed to be long, the overall size of the path unit increases accordingly, making it impossible to secure space for arranging the path unit on the game board.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the path unit has a first path for throwing the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board when viewed from the front, and a path for throwing the game ball from the first path. A second path for throwing the ball to the other side in the horizontal direction in the direction opposite to the guiding direction of the first path, and a third path connecting one side of the first path and the second path, and the third path includes: Since the guide means for throwing the game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side with respect to the game board is provided on at least one of the inner walls on the front side and the back side of the game board, the game ball passing through the third path can be guided. It can be moved to the front side or the back side (the front-rear direction of the game board when viewed from the front). By this movement of the game ball on the front side or the back side, the game ball that rolled and accelerated on the first path can be slowed down on the third path, and the game ball that collided with the inner wall of the third path will be moved to the third path. It is possible to suppress the ball from returning to the first path or from swinging (shaking) in the throwing direction of the first path (horizontal direction when viewed from the front) on the third path. This allows the player's line of sight to follow the game ball thrown from the third path in a fixed direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown to the third path.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from shaking (shaking) in the horizontal direction (left and right direction when viewed from the front) with respect to the game board when viewed from the front, the third path that connects the first path and the second path can be There is no need to lengthen the route to suppress swinging of the game ball, and the third route can be shortened. As a result, the route unit can be accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the route unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

In addition, as a guide means for guiding the game ball, switching the rolling direction of the game ball using unevenness, or disposing a displacement member at the path switching part and guiding the game ball to the second path by displacing the displacement member. An example of how to do this is given below.

In the gaming machine K1, the guide means is composed of a recess provided in an inner wall on either the front side or the back side, and a protrusion provided protruding from the other inner wall on the front side or the back side. A gaming machine K2 characterized in that the recessed portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, the guiding means includes a recess provided in the inner wall on either the front side or the back side, and an inner wall on the other side of the front side or the back side. The concave part and the convex part are formed at positions facing each other, so that the game ball can be partially displaced in the middle of the third path, and the game ball can be can slow down the ball's throwing speed. Therefore, the third route can be shortened. As a result, the route unit can be easily accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the route unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

A gaming machine K3 in the gaming machine K2, wherein a horizontal distance from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, the horizontal distance from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. , the game ball that flows down the third path and is thrown to the guide means can be easily brought into contact with the convex portion of the guide means. Thereby, the game ball that flows down the first path and is thrown to the third path can be brought into contact with the convex portion, and its rolling speed can be easily slowed down. Therefore, the game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the third path can be prevented from returning to the first path or swinging in the third path in a direction different from the ball throwing direction of the third path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the third route.

A game machine K2 or K3, wherein the convex portion is formed on an inner wall on the front side with respect to the game board, and the recessed portion is formed on an inner wall on the back side with respect to the game board. Machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the game board, and the recessed portion is formed on the inner wall on the back side with respect to the game board. Therefore, the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit can be made thinner. Therefore, the inside of the path unit can be easily seen by the player through the front of the path unit, and the game ball thrown inside the path unit can be easily seen by the player. Furthermore, by forming a recess in the inner wall on the front side of the route unit, it is possible to suppress the guide means from protruding to the front of the route unit, so that the route unit can be disposed on the player's side. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the path unit.

To explain in detail, when the recess is formed on the inner surface on the front side, the thickness of the front side of the path unit needs to be larger than the depth of the recess. Therefore, as the thickness of the front side of the path unit increases, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown on the back side thereof. In addition, when a recess is formed on the inner surface of the front side, it is possible to curve the front plate of the path unit along the shape of the recess, but in this case, the game A gap with the glass plate forming the front side of the area is required, and the entire game board needs to be placed on the back side. Therefore, the further away from the player the player is, the more difficult it becomes for the player to see the game ball thrown through the path unit.

Furthermore, when the recess is formed on the inner surface of the front side, it is also possible to open the part where the recess is formed, but in this case, the rigidity of the path unit decreases due to the opening, and the path The unit becomes easily damaged. Furthermore, if an opening is formed in the front of the path unit, there is a risk that unauthorized persons may pass through the opening.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K4, the concave portion is formed on the back side of the path unit, and the convex portion is formed on the front side of the path unit, so that the thickness of the entire front side of the path unit is suppressed from increasing. In addition to making it easier to see the game balls passing through the inside of the path unit, the path unit is placed on the front side of the gaming machine by suppressing the partial protrusion toward the front side of the path unit. The game ball passing through can be easily recognized.

A game machine K5 in the game machine K3 or K4, wherein the convex portion and the concave portion have arc-shaped cross sections in the direction of gravity when viewed from the front, and the axes of the arcs are set coaxially.

According to the gaming machine K5, in the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex part and the concave part have an arc-shaped cross section in the direction of gravity, and the axes of the arcs are set on the same axis, so that the convex part and the concave part are The separation distance can be kept constant. As a result, the distance between the convex portion and the concave portion can be prevented from becoming partially smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball passing through the inside of the path unit can be prevented from being caught between the convex portion and the inner wall. can.

In the gaming machine K5, the upper end of the recessed portion is formed at a position along an extension line of the rolling locus of the center of the gaming ball rolling on the first path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine K6, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along the extension line of the rolling locus of the center of the game ball rolling on the first path when viewed from the front, so that the game ball rolling on the first path cannot be played. Even when the rolling speed of the ball is high, the center of the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path can be suppressed from being thrown above the upper end of the recess. As a result, the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path can be thrown inside the recess.

A gaming machine K7 in any one of gaming machines K2 to K6, characterized in that the recessed portion is formed at a position spaced apart from both horizontal side surfaces of the third path in a front view by more than the radial dimension of the gaming ball. .

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recessed portion is formed at a position that is spaced apart from both sides of the third path in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front by a radius dimension of the gaming ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball flowing down along the inner wall of the recess from colliding with both side surfaces of the path unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front and swinging inside the recess. As a result, the game ball thrown along the inside of the recess can be smoothly thrown to the second path.

In any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the recessed portion is recessed so that a cross section in the ball throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front has an arcuate cross section centered on a central portion in the horizontal direction of the third path; Game K8 is characterized in that the convex portion has a protruding rectangular cross section in the throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the recessed portion has an arcuate cross section in the throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front, and the convex portion has an arcuate cross section in the throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front. Since the cross section of the first path in the ball throwing direction in view is provided in a protruding rectangular shape, the distance between the opposing concave portions and the convex portions of the guide means is narrowed toward both ends of the first path in the ball throwing direction. Therefore, the game ball thrown inside the recess can be made difficult to swing in the throwing direction of the first path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown to the third path.

In the gaming machine K8, the convex portion extends in a downwardly inclined direction to one side in a direction opposite to the throwing direction of the game ball on the second path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K8, the convex portion extends downwardly and inclines to one side in the direction opposite to the throwing direction of the game ball on the second path when viewed from the front. The game ball that comes into contact with the convex part while flowing down the three routes can be guided in the direction of the inclination of the convex part. Thereby, the game ball that has come into contact with the convex portion can be guided along the inner wall of the concave portion on the side away from the second path. As a result, the game balls flowing into the second path from the third path can be rolled in the throwing direction of the game balls in the second path, and the game balls can smoothly flow into the second path from the third path. can.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first path is provided with a second guide means at a connecting portion with the third path, and the second guide means guides the game ball thrown from the first path. A gaming machine K10 characterized in that it can be guided by the guiding means.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first route is provided with a second guide means at the connection part with the third route, and the second guide means Since the game balls thrown from the route can be guided to the guide means, the game balls thrown from the first route to the third route can be easily thrown to the guide means for the third route. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly throw the game ball from the first route to the third route. Therefore, since the game balls thrown from the first route can be easily thrown to the guide means, the game balls can flow smoothly from the third route to the second route. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of game balls throughout the route unit.

In the gaming machine K10, the second guide means includes a second convex portion protruding from either the front side or the back side of the first path, and a second convex portion recessed at a position opposite to the second convex portion. 2 concave portions, and the second concave portion has a width dimension in a direction perpendicular to a downstream direction of the game ball that is set larger toward the upstream side of the first path when viewed from the front. K11.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K10, the second guide means includes a second protrusion protruding from either the front side or the back side of the first path; and a second recess recessed in an opposing position, and the second recess is set to have a large width in a direction perpendicular to the downward direction of the game ball toward the upstream side of the first path when viewed from the front. Therefore, the game ball thrown along the first path can be easily received in the second recess. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly throw the game ball from the first route to the third route. Therefore, since the game balls thrown from the first route can be easily thrown to the guide means, the game balls can flow smoothly from the third route to the second route. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of game balls throughout the route unit.

A gaming machine K12 in the gaming machine K10 or K11, characterized in that the second recessed portion is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball on the first route, such that the downstream end of the first route is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball on the first route. .

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K10 or K11, the downstream end of the first path of the second recess is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball on the first path. Therefore, the game balls flowing from the first path to the third path along the inner wall of the second recess can be caused to flow into the third path on the far side from the first path. As a result, the game balls flowing from the first path to the third path can be easily thrown inside the recess, and the game balls can easily flow from the third path to the second path.

<About the concept of the invention using the special prize winning device 550 as an example>
A game machine comprising a game board having a game area on the front side, and a flow direction changing means disposed in front of the game board for changing the flow direction of a game ball flowing down the game area, wherein the flow direction change means includes a first member disposed on the front side of the game board, a second member disposed on the front side of the first member at a predetermined interval, and at least one of the first member and the second member. an adjusting means for displacing one side, the adjusting means changes the interval between the facing first member and the second member, and the game ball flows down between the facing first member and the second member. A gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the direction of flow of the game machine L1 is adjustable.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and nails driven into the front of the gaming board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197311). According to this game machine, it is possible to adjust the direction of the game ball flowing down the game area by adjusting the angle of the nail nailed to the game board (by bending the nail). However, when changing the angle of the nail to change the direction in which the game ball flows down, the angle of the nail is visible to the player, which puts the player at a disadvantage (the game ball is difficult to flow down into the flow path where it is advantageous). There is a problem in that when a player recognizes that the game machine is at a disadvantage (the angle of the nail), the player stops playing the game machine that he or she considers to be at a disadvantage, and the operating rate of the game machine decreases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, the flow direction changing means includes a first member disposed in front of the game board, and a second member disposed at a predetermined interval on the front side of the first member. 2 members, and adjusting means for displacing at least one of the first member and the second member, the adjusting means changes the distance between the facing first member and the second member, and the first member and the second member are moved. Since the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down between the two opposing members can be adjusted, the flowing direction of the game ball can be changed (adjusted) by the distance in the front and back direction with respect to the front view of the game board. Therefore, when viewed from the front of the game board, compared to the nails that change the downward direction of the game ball by a distance in the horizontal direction, the player is prevented from visually recognizing the downward direction changing means and determining that it is disadvantageous or advantageous. can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the game machine L1, the second member is fixed to the game board, and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjustment means.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine L1, the second member is fixed to the game board and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjustment means, so that the second member disposed on the front side At least a portion of the first member disposed on the back side is hidden by the second member, thereby making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the position of the first member. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the displacement of the position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the distance between the opposing first and second members. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from not playing a game on the gaming machine because he/she judges that the spacing between the opposing first and second members is disadvantageous, thereby improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In the game machine L2, the game board includes a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and a fastening member that is inserted through the first opening from the back side of the game board is attached to the first member. A game machine L3 characterized in that the first member is disposed on the game board by being fastened to the game board.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine L2, the game board is provided with a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first opening is inserted from the back side of the game board. By fastening the fastening member to the first member, the first member is disposed on the game board, so there is no need to form a fastening part for fastening the first member on the front side of the game board, and the front side The outer shape of the first member can be made smaller when viewed. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure space for arranging other members in front of the game board.

Further, since the fastening member is fastened from the back side of the game board, it is possible to make it difficult to access the fastening member from the front side of the game board when the flow direction changing means and the game board are assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening member from being illicitly manipulated and the position of the first member from being illicitly changed.

In the game machine L3, the first member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the game board and is inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protrusion, so that the A game machine L4 characterized in that a first member is disposed on the game board.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine L3, the first member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the game board and is inserted into the first opening, and a fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protrusion. By doing so, the first member is disposed on the game board, so that the fastening portion of the fastening member can be accommodated inside the first opening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion of the first member from protruding toward the front side of the fastening member, so that it is possible to secure a space between the first member and the second member facing each other.

In the game machine L4, the first member can be slid on a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board by the adjustment means, and the first opening has the same size as the displacement area of the protrusion. A gaming machine L5 is characterized in that it is opened in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L4, the first opening has the same size as the displacement area of the protrusion, so when displacing the position of the first member, the protrusion can be displaced along the first opening. Therefore, when displacing the position of the first member, it is possible to suppress the first member from being displaced in a direction other than the displacement direction (the direction in which it is displaced by the adjustment means). As a result, the operator can easily adjust the position of the first member.

In any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the gaming machine L6 is characterized in that the gaming board includes a second opening that opens at a position different from the first opening.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines L3 to L5, the game board includes a second opening that opens at a position different from the first opening. A fastening member fastened to the back side of the game board can be operated. As a result, the work process when the operator operates the adjusting means can be simplified.

That is, since the accessory device and the case member that houses the accessory device are arranged on the back side of the game board, when the fastening member is operated from the back side of the game board, the accessory device and its case member are arranged. When it is necessary to remove the case member housing the accessory device from the game board, the second opening allows the operator to operate the fastening member from the front side of the game board. Since there is no need to remove the installed accessory device or the case member housing the accessory device, the work process for the worker can be simplified.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the adjustment means changes the position of the second member relative to the first member in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1, the position of the second member relative to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, so that the position of the second member relative to the first member is changed. Compared to the case where the position is changed in the horizontal or vertical direction in a front view, it is possible to suppress the position of the second member from being changed in a front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from determining that the change in the position of the second member as viewed from the front is advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed from a non-light-transmitting material, and is formed to have a larger outer shape in front view than the first member, and the first member is larger than the first member in front view. A gaming machine L8 characterized in that it is covered by a second member.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed from a non-light-transmitting material, has a larger external shape in front view than the first member, and Since the first member is covered by the second member when viewed from the front, the first member can be hidden by the second member when viewed from the front, making it difficult for the player to recognize the first member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the distance between the opposing first and second members, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and at least one of the first member and the second member protrudes from the other of the first member and the second member. A gaming machine L9 is characterized in that it is provided with a protruding part.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is made of a non-light-transmitting material, and at least one of the first member and the second member is made of a non-light-transmitting material. Alternatively, since the second member has a protruding part that protrudes from the other side, the game ball thrown between the first member and the second member can be brought into contact with the protruding part and the direction of the ball thrown can be changed. can. Therefore, by recognizing the distance between the opposing first and second members, it is possible to prevent the player from making a judgment that the player is advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means is configured to adjust the position of the other of the first member or the second member in stages, with respect to one of the first member or the second member. A gaming machine L10 characterized by comprising means.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means adjusts the position of the other of the first member or the second member with respect to one of the first member or the second member. Since the step adjustment means that can be adjusted in steps is provided, an operator who changes the position of the first member or the second member can adjust the change in the position in steps. As a result, it is possible to suppress errors in the adjusted position of the first member or the second member. Therefore, it is possible to easily adjust the position of the first member or the second member.

Note that the means for adjusting the positions of the first member and the second member in stages includes adjusting the position of the first member or the second member with respect to a plurality of grooves formed in one of the first member or the second member. By changing the insertion position of the protruding convex part, the position of the first member or the second member can be changed, or the first member can be inserted into a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the game board. An example is a mode in which the position of the first member is changed by changing the insertion position of a convex portion protruding from the other side of the member or the game board.

<About the concept of the invention using the special prize winning device 550 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a gaming area in which a game ball flows down, and a route unit disposed in the gaming area and having a plurality of guide routes for guiding the throwing of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. The unit includes a first guide route formed from a light-transmissible material and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a second guide route arranged on the back side of the first guide route. and, the first guide route includes a first winning opening into which a game ball can be inserted, and the second guiding route includes a second winning opening into which a gaming ball can enter. , a game machine M1 characterized in that a game ball that enters the first winning hole is given a higher gaming value than a game ball that enters the second winning hole.

Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that improves the player's interest by disposing a path unit in a gaming area that has a plurality of guide paths for letting game balls flow down, and allowing the player to visually see the game balls flowing down inside the unit. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the layout of each guide route has tended to be complicated in order to increase the player's interest by allowing the player to see the game balls flowing down the guide route. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to judge which route among the respective guide routes the game ball is flowing down. Therefore, when the gaming values of game balls flowing down the guide route are different, the player can determine whether they are passing through an advantageous (higher gaming value is given) or unfavorable (lower gaming value is given) route. There is a problem in that it becomes difficult to judge, and the player's interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced by the game balls flowing down the path unit.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the route unit includes a first guide route formed of a light-transmissible material and disposed on the front side of the gaming area, and a rear side of the first guide route. a second guide route disposed on the side, the first guide route includes a first prize opening into which a game ball can enter, and the second guide route has a first winning opening into which a game ball can enter. Since the game ball that enters the first winning hole is given a higher gaming value than the game ball that enters the second winning hole, the first guide route It is possible to make it easier for the player to watch the game ball flowing down. In addition, if the game balls are flown down the first and second guide routes at the same timing, the second guide route with the second winning opening with the lower gaming value will be placed on the back side of the first guide route. Since the game ball is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first guide route that includes the first winning hole with high game value. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize game balls that are given a high gaming value, thereby making it easier to increase the player's interest.

Note that the predetermined game value means, for example, a game ball that is paid out to the player as a benefit when the game ball enters the first or second prize opening.

In the gaming machine M1, the first guide route includes a first route for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and a game ball thrown from the first route to the game ball on the first route. a second path for throwing the game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction; and a connection path that connects one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity, the connection The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that the path is curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, the first guide route includes a first route for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and a ball being thrown from the first route. a second path in which the game ball is thrown to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the game ball in the first path; and one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity. and a connecting path that connects, and the connecting path is curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side of the gaming area, so that the first path and the second path are directly connected by the shortest distance. The throwing path can have more curves than in the case where the pitcher throws the ball. Thereby, the downward speed of the game ball can be slowed down in stages at the curved portion, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connection path and swinging (shaking) within the connection path. As a result, the game balls can flow smoothly from the first route to the second route, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the throwing of the game balls from the first route to the second route.

In addition, in order to prevent the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path and shaking (shaking), the internal space of the connecting path is made larger in the throwing direction of the first path, so that the game ball repeatedly hits the inner wall of the connecting path. It is also possible to suppress the collision, but in this case, the internal space of the connecting path is enlarged in the throwing direction of the first path, so that the connecting path protrudes in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, since the path unit when viewed from the front is enlarged in the horizontal direction, it is difficult to keep the path unit within a predetermined range when viewed from the front.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M2, since the connecting path is curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side, the external shape of the path unit when viewed from the front can be kept within a predetermined range. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the game ball flowing down the first guide route, the range that the player visually recognizes can be kept within a predetermined range (the outer shape of the route unit). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game balls flowing down the route unit.

In the gaming machine M2, the path unit is disposed on the other side of the gaming area in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and the connecting path is formed on one side of the path unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Characteristic gaming machine M3.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M2, the route unit is disposed on the other side of the gaming area in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and the connecting route is located on one side of the route unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Since it is formed on the side, the connection path can be formed at a position close to the player who is located in front of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the connection path. As a result, even if the game ball is thrown to the back side through the connection path, the game ball passing through the connection path can be easily seen by the player.

A gaming machine M4 characterized in that in the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning opening is disposed between the first route and the second route when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning opening is disposed between the first route and the second route when viewed from the front. By using the dead space formed between the two routes, the first prize opening can be formed on the first guide route. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the external size of the route unit when viewed from the front. As a result, the range in which the player visually recognizes the route unit can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the connecting route includes a third prize opening into which a gaming ball can be inserted into two places, a connecting part with the first route and the second route; a displacement member that can be moved to a position that closes or opens the winning hole, and the game ball that enters the third winning hole is the same as the game ball that enters the first winning hole. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that a gaming value is given.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M2 to M4, the connecting route has a third prize opening into which game balls can be inserted into two places, the first route and the connecting part with the second route. , and a displacement member that can be moved to a position that closes or opens the third winning hole, and the game ball that enters the third winning hole is different from the game ball that enters the first winning hole. Since the same gaming value is given, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball thrown from the first route to the connecting route to enter one of the two third winning holes, and the game ball is thrown down the connecting route. It is possible to easily give players interest by using game balls that play.

That is, between the third winning port on the upstream side formed at the connecting portion of the connecting path and the first path and the third winning hole on the downstream side formed at the connecting portion of the connecting path and the second path. Since the connecting path can be arranged in the position, when the displacement member is repeatedly operated at a predetermined timing to the position where the third winning opening is closed or released, the third winning opening is closed by the displacement member. At this time, the game balls thrown from the first route to the connecting route are allowed to flow down the connecting route that curves to the back side, thereby securing the time until the third prize opening is released, and You can make it flow into the winning opening. As a result, the game balls thrown into the connection path can easily flow into the third prize opening, so the game balls flowing down the connection path can easily entertain the players.

In addition, the two third winning openings are formed at the upstream and downstream ends of the connecting route (the connecting part between the first route and the second route), so the third winning opening can be inserted into the third winning opening. You can extend the time you can play the ball. Therefore, it is possible to extend the time for which the player is interested, and it is possible to easily increase the player's interest.

A gaming machine M6 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, a detection means for detecting passage of a gaming ball is disposed outside the connection path.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, a detection means for detecting passage of a game ball is provided in the connecting path, so that the game ball can be prevented from getting stuck in the connecting path. In this case, by continuing the detection by the detection means, it is possible to cause the gaming machine to detect the error. In addition, since the detection means is arranged outside the connection path, compared to the case where the detection means is arranged inside the connection path, it is possible to suppress the game ball from getting caught in the detection means, and the game can be improved accordingly. It is possible to prevent balls from clogging in the connection path.

Furthermore, since the detection means is disposed outside the connecting path where the rolling of the game balls is slowed down, it is easy to accurately detect the number of game balls passing through the connecting path. Therefore, when the number of balls detected by the detection means is greater than the number of balls that enter the first winning hole or the third winning hole, it is possible to make the gaming machine recognize that fraud is being committed. As a result, the continuation of fraud can be suppressed by notifying that fraud is being committed through an alarm sound, abnormal lighting, or the like.

In the gaming machine M6, the connecting path has a dimension between opposing inner walls when viewed from the front, which is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the connecting path has an opposing inner wall of the first path in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball. A game machine M7 characterized in that the size is set smaller than the distance between the two.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M6, the connecting path has a dimension between opposing inner walls when viewed from the front, which is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and is orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming ball. Since the dimension is set smaller than the dimension between the opposing inner walls of the first path in the direction, when a game ball with a diameter larger than a predetermined size (diameter larger than the regulation) is thrown, the game ball cannot be kept in the connecting path. It can be clogged. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls having a diameter larger than the regulation from flowing down the path unit.

In addition, since a detection means for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided in the connection path, if a game ball with a diameter larger than the regulation remains (clogs) in the connection path, the detection means detects the passing of the game ball. can be used to detect errors.

In the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connecting path has an opening opening with a predetermined value smaller than the diameter of the game ball formed in a radially outer side wall of the path that curves in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side. A gaming machine M7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connecting path has a predetermined diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball on the radially outer side wall of the path that curves in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side. Since an opening is formed that opens at a value of Can be discharged. As a result, it is possible to suppress game balls having a smaller diameter than the regulation from flowing down the path unit.

The opening is formed on the radially outer side wall of the connection path, which serves as the rolling surface of the game balls flowing down the connection path, so if the game ball flowing down the connection path has a diameter smaller than the specified value, Makes it easier to eject game balls.

The gaming machine M8 includes a box-shaped accommodating part that projects from the outside in the radial direction of the connection path and communicates with the opening, and the accommodating part is set to a size that can accommodate game balls. , a gaming machine M9 formed in a detection range of the detection means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M8, the gaming machine M9 includes a box-shaped accommodating part that protrudes from the outside in the radial direction of the connection path and communicates with the opening, and the accommodating part has a gaming machine inside. The ball is formed to a size that can accommodate the ball, and is formed within the detection range of the detection means, so that a game with a diameter less than a predetermined size (a diameter smaller than the regulation) is discharged from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connecting path. The balls can be stored inside the receptacle. Furthermore, since the storage section is formed within the detection range of the detection means, the detection means can detect game balls stored inside the storage section. As a result, when game balls are stored inside the storage section, the detection means can cause the gaming machine to detect an error.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M9, a position where a game ball inlet of the first guide route and a game ball inlet of the second guide route are adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. A gaming machine M10 characterized in that it is formed.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M1 to M9, the inflow port for game balls on the first guide route and the inflow port for game balls on the second guide route, Since they are formed at adjacent positions in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, the player cannot determine whether the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board will flow into the first guide route or the second guide route until just before the game balls flow into the game board. It can be made difficult to be grasped. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to keep an eye on the game ball that flows down the game area and is thrown to the path unit. As a result, it is possible to easily give players interest.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A base member having a game area on the front side, and a first member disposed on the front side of the base member and having a ball throwing path formed as a space in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown. In the gaming machine, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state where it is biased toward the back side of the base member by a fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. Game machine N1.

Conventionally, a base member has a game area on the front side, and a first member that is disposed on the front side of the base member and has a ball throwing path formed as a space where a game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown. There is a gaming machine equipped with (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, the first member includes an extending portion extending on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member on a side surface on the base member side (a portion in contact with the base member), and the extending portion extends on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member. By screwing the screw inserted into the opening formed in the base member into the base member, the base member is disposed in close contact with the front surface of the base member.

However, in conventional gaming machines, in order to arrange the first member in close contact with the front side of the base member, it is essential to fasten the screw inserted from the front side of the first member to the base member. It is necessary to form an opening in the first member for the insertion thereof. Here, in order to form the opening in a position that does not interfere with the throwing of the game ball, it is necessary to form the opening outside the throwing space of the game ball, and the extension part where the opening is formed must be placed outside of the throwing space. need to be formed. Therefore, since the extending portion is formed on the outer edge of the first member, the area that can be used as a throwing path becomes smaller with respect to the outer shape of the first member, and the throwing path of the first member cannot be made sufficiently large. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state where it is biased toward the back side of the base member by the fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. The first member and the base member can be disposed in close contact with each other due to the biasing force acting on the first member toward the back side. Furthermore, since the first member is disposed on the base member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member, there is a fastening allowance (an opening through which the fixing means is inserted) for fastening the first member with the base member on the front side of the first member. This eliminates the need to form an extended portion (to be formed). Therefore, with respect to the outer shape of the first member when viewed from the front, the entire area can be used as a throwing path. As a result, the ball throwing path of the first member can be increased.

In addition, since the fastened portion between the base member and the first member is not exposed to the front side, it is possible to prevent the fastened portion between the base member and the first member from being removed by unauthorized persons, and the fastened portion is visible to the player. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

The gaming machine N1 includes a second member disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is inserted from the back side of the second member to the first member side. The game machine is fixed to the first member by the fixing means that is fixed to the first member, and is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the second member is provided on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is arranged on the back side of the second member. The first member is fixed to the first member by a fixing means that is inserted into the first member side and fixed to the first member, and is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. When fastening the first member to the second member, a force that urges the first member toward the back side can be applied to the first member by the amount of the predetermined gap. Moreover, since a force biased toward the front side can be applied to the second member, the base member can be held between the first member and the second member. Therefore, the first member and the second member are unlikely to be displaced from the base member due to the clamping force between the first member and the second member, so it is not necessary to fasten the first member or the second member to the base member. This makes it easier to fasten the second member.

Note that the predetermined gap between the first member and the second member is set to a value larger than 0 and smaller than the width dimension of the base member in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, when the first member and the second member are fastened together, a force that attracts each other can be applied to both the first member and the second member due to the gap.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member has a protrusion that projects inside the first opening. A gaming machine N3, characterized in that the first member is disposed on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member has the first opening. Since the first member is disposed on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the protrusion, the fastening portion of the fixing means is attached to the inside of the first opening. It can be placed in Thereby, the fastening portion of the fixing means can be prevented from being disposed on the front side of the base member, and the fastening portion of the fixing means can be prevented from being formed in the ball throwing space of the first member. As a result, the size of the ball throwing space of the first member can be secured.

Furthermore, since the protruding portion can secure the fastening margin (insertion depth) of the fixing means, it is possible to suppress the fastening of the fixing means from coming off from the first member. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the biasing force acting on the first member toward the back side.

In the gaming machine N1, a second member disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member, and a third member disposed between the first member and the second member facing each other. , the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the third member has a front-rear dimension when viewed from the front of the base member. The first member is set to be smaller than the dimension in the front-rear direction and is disposed inside the first opening, the first member is disposed in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member is A game machine N4 characterized in that the base member is fastened to the back side of the third member with a predetermined gap therebetween by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the second member is disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is disposed between the opposing first and second members. a third member provided therein, the base member has a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the third member has a dimension in the front-rear direction of the base member when viewed from the front. The first member is set to be smaller than the dimension in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and is disposed inside the first opening, the first member is disposed in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member is disposed on the inside of the first opening. Since the fixing means inserted from the back side of the member is fastened to the back side of the third member with a predetermined gap between the third member and the third member, it is possible to attach the first member to the back side through the third member. Forces can be exerted. Therefore, the biasing force toward the back side that is applied when the second member and the third member are fastened together by the fixing means can also be applied to the third member. As a result, the biasing force acting on the portion of the first member that contacts the base member can be reduced, and damage to the first member can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by bringing the third member into close contact with the back side of the first member, the rigidity of the entire first member can be increased. Therefore, the entire first member is elastically deformed by the biasing force acting on the first member toward the back side, and it is possible to suppress deformation of the throwing path of the game ball formed in the first member. As a result, the game ball of the first member can be thrown stably.

In the game machine N4, the third member is a part of a frame-like member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening formed in the base member. Game machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of a frame-shaped member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening opened in the base member. Therefore, the urging force acting on the third member can be used as a force for urging the frame member toward the back side. Therefore, the frame member can be easily disposed in close contact with the base member.

Furthermore, since the biasing force toward the back surface that is applied when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fixing means can be applied to the contact surface between the frame member and the base member, the first member The force acting on the contact portion with the base member can be reduced, and damage to the first member can be suppressed.

In the game machine N4 or N5, the first member includes a displacement member capable of displacing the throwing space of the game ball of the first member, and a drive disposed on the back side of the first member to drive the displacement member. means, the third member includes a third opening having a size that allows the driving means to be inserted therein, and the third member has a third opening having a size that allows the driving means to be inserted thereinto, and the third member has a third opening with the driving means inserted inside the third opening. A game machine characterized in that it is arranged on the back side of one member.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member includes a displacement member capable of displacing the throwing space of the game ball of the first member, and a displacement member disposed on the back side of the first member. and a driving means for driving the displacement member, the third member having a third opening having a size that allows insertion of the driving means, and inserting the driving means inside the third opening. Since it is disposed on the back side of the first member in this state, the driving means can be covered with the third member. Thereby, it is possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires inserted from the outside of the gaming machine from accessing the drive means. As a result, it is possible to suppress tampering with the driving means.

In the game machine N6, the second member projects toward the first member, communicates with the ball throwing space of the first member, and transfers the game ball thrown into the ball throwing space of the first member to the second member. A gaming machine N7 comprising a communication section that allows ball throwing, and the communication section is arranged outside the third opening.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine N6, the second member is protruded toward the first member side, communicates with the ball throwing space of the first member, and allows a game in which the ball is thrown into the ball throwing space of the first member. The ball is provided with a communication part that can send the ball to the second member, and the communication part is disposed outside the third opening, so that the third member can be disposed between the communication part and the driving means. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the magnetic force generated by the driving of the driving means to act on the communication portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the speed of the game ball thrown into the communication section from slowing down or stopping at the communication section due to the influence of the magnetic force of the driving means, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from slowing down or stopping at the communication section due to the influence of the magnetic force of the driving means. Throwing of the game ball to the member can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member protrudes from at least two locations on the back side of the first member. The protrusion includes a first piece that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and is inserted through the first opening, and an end portion of the first piece that is bent to extend outside the first opening. a second piece extending toward the front side of the second piece, and a raised part raised toward the front side of the second piece that overlaps with the base member when viewed from the front; The protrusion dimension is set to a larger value than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the dimension of the protruding portion between facing the back surface of the first member is equal to or equal to the width dimension in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the base member. The bending tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means, so that the first member is biased toward the back side with respect to the base member. The gaming machine N8 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member has a rear surface of the first member. The protrusion includes a first piece that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and is inserted through the first opening, and a first piece that is bent at the end of the first piece and extends from the first member. The first piece includes a second piece extending toward the outside of the opening, and a protuberance raised toward the front side of the second piece that overlaps with the base member in front view, and the first piece extends toward the outside of the base member when viewed from the front. The protrusion dimension is set to a larger value than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the dimension of the protruding portion between facing the back surface of the first member is set to be equal to or smaller than the width dimension in the front-rear direction when the base member is viewed from the front. The bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means, so that the first member is biased toward the back side of the base member. There is no need to provide a portion for fastening a fixing means (for example, a screw) on the side, and a throwing space for the game ball formed in the first member can be secured. As a result, since the ball throwing space can be enlarged, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown to the first member can be varied to make the ball throwing more interesting.

Further, since the screwing portion of the fixing means can be made into the base member, elastic deformation of the ball throwing space of the first member can be suppressed by applying a biasing force to the screwing portion of the fixing means. As a result, the first member is elastically deformed and the speed of the game ball thrown from the ball throwing path of the first member can be suppressed from slowing down.

In gaming machine N8, the base member includes a second opening formed in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening. A gaming machine N9 comprising: the first opening and the second opening communicating with each other.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N8, the base member has a second opening formed in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and a second opening on the front side of the base member along the second opening. Since the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other, the projecting part is arranged inside the first opening using the opening of the second opening. can be set. Therefore, the work of disposing the first unit on the base member can be simplified, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven by displacement of the displacement member, in a driven direction of the driven member. the displacement member is displaced between a first position and a second position, and is moved from the first position to an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. a first displacement region for displacing the third position of the 1st position; and a second displacement region for displacing the second position from the third position; By being displaced to the second position, the first driven position is driven to the second driven position, and the third driven position, which is an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position, is displaced from the first driven position. a first driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a portion of the second driven region and the first driven region are the same. The gaming machine O1 is set in a second displacement area, and when the displacement member is displaced through a second displacement area, the regulating means restricts the swinging of the displacement member in a direction other than the displacement direction.

Conventionally, a base member, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven by the displacement of the displacement member, the driven member being driven by the displacement of the displacement member. A gaming machine that displaces a member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2015-029849). However, in conventional gaming machines, in order to restrict the displacement of the displacement member and the driven member and the rocking motion in directions other than the driven direction, a regulating means for regulating the rocking motion of both the displacement member and the driven member is formed. There was a problem in that it was necessary to form it in two places, which made the shape more complicated and increased the manufacturing cost.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine O1, the displacement member is provided with a regulating means for regulating the swinging of the driven member in a direction other than the driven direction, and the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position, The driven member has a first displacement region for displacing from the first position to a third position intermediate between the first position and the second position, and a second displacement region for displacing the second position from the third position. , the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, thereby being driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, and from the first driven position to an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position. It has a first driven region that displaces the third driven position, and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a portion of the second displacement region and the first driven region are When the displacement member is set in the same area and is displaced through the second displacement area, the restriction means restricts the movement of the displacement member in a direction other than the displacement direction, so the same part of the restriction means is used. It is possible to restrict the swinging of the driven member and the displacement member. Therefore, since the regulating means only needs to be formed at one location, the shape can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In addition, since the swinging of the driven member and the displacement member can be restricted using the same part of the restriction means, there is no need to form the driven member, the displacement member, and the restriction part of one restriction means, respectively. Accordingly, the regulating means can be made smaller.

In the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall protruding from the base member toward the driven member, and the driven member is attached to the base at a position overlapping with at least a portion of the base member when viewed from the front. It is characterized in that it is capable of sliding displacement on a plane parallel to the member, and as it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the area overlapping with the base member in front view is gradually reduced. Game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall portion protruding from the base member toward the driven member, and the driven member has at least one portion of the base member when viewed from the front. It is possible to slide and displace on a plane parallel to the base member at the position overlapping with the base member, and as the base member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the area overlapping with the base member is gradually reduced in front view. In the second driven position, the region in which the driven member projects outward from the base member when viewed from the front is made larger than in the first driven position. Therefore, since the driven member protrudes outward from the base member, it is difficult to restrict the swinging of the driven member using a restriction means provided on the base member. Therefore, the more the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the more easily it swings toward the base member, but by restricting the rocking of the displacement member connected to the driven member, the regulating means By increasing the number of restricted locations, it is possible to make it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the driven member from swinging when placed in the second driven region.

In the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape with one side long when viewed from the front, has a rotatable rotation shaft on one side in the longitudinal direction, is rotatably disposed on the base member, and is rotatably disposed on the base member. In the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction, and when driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates about the rotation axis. A gaming machine O3, wherein the other side of the driven member is arranged above the rotating shaft in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape with one side long when viewed from the front, has a rotatable rotation axis on one side in the longitudinal direction, and has a rotary shaft attached to the base member. The driven member is rotatably arranged, and in the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is approximately parallel to the horizontal direction, and when driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates around the rotation axis. As the driven member rotates, the other side of the driven member is placed above the rotating shaft in the direction of gravity, so when the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, it rotates and its longitudinal side stands up. Therefore, as the driven member stands up, the load of the driven member is more likely to act toward the rotating shaft, and the load is applied to the driven member in the swinging direction of the driven member, making it easier for the driven member to swing.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by restricting the swinging of the displacement member connected to the driven member, the number of locations regulated by the restricting means can be increased, thereby making it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the driven member from swinging when placed in the second driven region.

In addition, when the driven member follows the first driven region where a force to lift the other end side of the driven member is required, the displacement member is moved from the first position to the third position (first displacement region) where the restriction of the displacement member is released. When it is necessary to displace the displacement member, the restriction by the restriction means is released in the first displacement region, so that the movement of the displacement member can be prevented from being slowed down by the restriction means. Therefore, even when the displacement force of the driven member is required, the displacement force of the driven member can be ensured.

In the gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member includes a protrusion that protrudes from a position facing the wall, and the tip of the protrusion comes into contact with the wall to displace the driven member. is regulated, and the displacement member is set to be able to displace the space between the driven member and the wall in the second displacement region, and the displacement member The gaming machine O4 is characterized in that at least a portion of the driven member overlaps with the driven member.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member is provided with a protrusion that protrudes at a position facing the wall, and the tip of the protrusion touches the wall. The displacement member is set to be movable in the space between the driven member and the wall in the displacement region at the end, and the displacement of the driven member is regulated in the direction in which the driven member and the wall face each other. Since at least a portion of the displacement member overlaps with the driven member, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from tilting to the side opposite to the wall portion. As a result, displacement of the displacement member in both axial directions can be restricted by the driven member and the wall, and rocking can be suppressed when the displacement member is displaced.

A gaming machine O5 in the gaming machine O4, wherein a side surface of the displacement member is brought into contact with the protrusion of the driven member in the second driven position.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member is brought into contact with the protrusion of the driven member in the second driven position, so that the displacement member is moved from the first driven position to the second driven position. When the displacement member is displaced to the position, the outer edge can be brought into contact with the protrusion of the displacement member and stopped. Therefore, the projecting portion can serve both of the role of regulating the displacement of the driven member by coming into contact with the wall portion, and the role of assisting the stopping operation of the displacement member. Therefore, a space in which the displacement member and the driven member can be displaced can be secured.

In the gaming machine O5, one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member, and when the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the direction of displacement of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member is is set in a direction toward the axis of the displacement member O6.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O5, when the driven member has one end pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is placed at the second driven position, the driven member is connected to the displacement member. Since the displacement direction of the portion is set toward the axis of the displacement member, when the load of the driven member acts on the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the displacement member due to the load of the driven member. That is, when the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the relationship between the driven member and the displacement member can be set to a dead center relationship, so that displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed. As a result, the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

In the gaming machine O5, one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base portion, and when the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the direction of displacement of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member is , and a direction in which a reaction force acts due to contact between the protruding portion and the displacement member, and a direction in which a reaction force acts is set in a direction toward the axis of the displacement member.

According to the game machine O7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine O5, when the driven member has one end pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the displacement member of the driven member and the The combined direction of the displacement direction of the connecting part and the direction in which the reaction force acts due to the contact between the protruding part and the displacement member is set toward the axis of the displacement member, so that the load on the driven member is reduced. When acting on the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the displacement member due to the load of the driven member. That is, when the displacement member is placed in the second driven position, by directing the direction of the force acting on the displacement member from the driven member toward the axis of the displacement member, the direction in which the displacement member rotates about the pivot portion is set. It is possible to suppress the generation of force. As a result, the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

In the gaming machines O1 to O7, the protruding portion is arranged with a predetermined gap from the wall, and is brought into contact with the wall when the displacement member comes into contact with it. Machine O8.

Here, if the protruding portion of the driven member and the wall portion are constantly in contact with each other, it may create resistance when the displacement member is displaced by the driving means, making it difficult to stably displace the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine O8, the protrusion is disposed with a predetermined gap from the wall, and when the displacement member comes into contact with the wall, the projection is brought into contact with the wall, so that the displacement member is moved to the second driven position. When the displacement member is displaced, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from swinging, and it is also possible to suppress the protrusion and the bulge from becoming resistance during the displacement.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement member 440 as an example>
a decorative member formed of a light-transmitting material at least partially capable of transmitting light from the rear side when viewed from the front; and a decorative member disposed on the rear side of the decorative member in a state that it can be displaced on a plane parallel to the front side; a receiving part capable of receiving and holding a game ball, and a light emitting means disposed on the back side of the decorative member and capable of emitting light toward a displacement area of the receiving part; The means is disposed on the back side of the receiving section or between the decorative member and the receiving section, and is configured to emit light emitted from the light emitting means by the receiving section or a game ball received in the receiving section. A game machine P1 characterized in that the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is partially varied by blocking or reflecting the light.

Conventionally, a decorative member is made of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light from the back side at least in part when viewed from the front, and the decorative member is disposed on the back side of the decorative member in a state that it can be displaced on a plane parallel to the front side. A gaming machine is known that is equipped with a receiving section that can receive and hold game balls (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, by moving the receiving part after receiving and holding the game ball in the receiving part, it is possible to perform an effect in which the game ball is moved as the receiving part moves.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the receiving section is disposed on the back side of the decorative member, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize the receiving section and the position of the game ball received in the receiving section. Therefore, if the receiving section moves after a game ball has been received (held) in the receiving section, the player cannot tell in which direction the receiving section and the game ball received (held) in the receiving section have moved. There was a problem in that it was difficult for the player to grasp the position of the game balls received in the receiving section.

On the other hand, the gaming machine P1 is provided with a light emitting means that is arranged on the back side of the decorative member and can emit light toward the displacement area of the receiving part, and the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the receiving part or The amount of light emitted from the decorative member is partially reduced by blocking or reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means by the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion, which is disposed between the member and the receiving portion. Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the receiving part or the decorative member located on the front side of the game ball received in the receiving part is different from the amount of light emitted from the decorative member located at other positions. By making the light intensity different, the player can be made aware that the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion where the light intensity differs.

To explain in detail, when the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part, so that the receiving part or the receiving part The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received can be made darker than other parts of the decorative member. As a result, the player can be made aware that the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is small (dark).

On the other hand, when a light emitting means is disposed between the decorative member and the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part, so that the receiving part or The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received in the receiving part can be made brighter than other parts of the decorative member. As a result, the player can be made aware that the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is large (bright).

In the game machine P1, the receiving portion is formed below the center of the game ball held in the receiving portion in the direction of gravity, and the light emitting means is approximately the same as the center of the game ball held in the receiving portion. A gaming machine P2 characterized in that a light emitting part is arranged at a height of , and a light transmitting part of the decorative member is formed at a higher position than the light emitting part of the light emitting means.

Here, in a structure in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the decorative member, and the light is reflected or blocked by the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the decorative member. Not only that, but also the receiving part is irradiated with light, which makes it easier for the receiving part to reflect or block the light. Therefore, the brightness and darkness of the light formed by the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is affected by the receiving part, and the shape of the brightness and darkness becomes different from the outer shape of the game ball, and the amount of light is There was a risk that it would be difficult to recognize that game balls are arranged on the back side of different parts of the player.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the receiving part is formed below the center of the game ball held in the receiving part in the direction of gravity, and the light emitting means is provided in the receiving part. The light emitting part is arranged at approximately the same height as the center of the game ball being held, and the light transmitting part of the decorative member is formed at a higher position than the light emitting part of the light emitting means. It is possible to suppress the brightness and darkness of the light, which is formed by being emitted and blocked or reflected by the receiving portion, from passing through the light-transmitting portion of the decorative member and being formed on the front side of the decorative member. Thereby, the shape of the brightness and darkness of the light that is formed by passing through the light-transmitting portion of the decorative member can be brought close to the outer shape (circular shape) of the game ball. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the game balls are placed in areas with different amounts of light.

A gaming machine P3 in the gaming machine P1 or P2, wherein the receiving section is made of a light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, since the receiving part is formed of a light-transmitting material, the light emitted from the light emitting means is not reflected or blocked by the receiving part. It can be suppressed. Thereby, when no game ball is received in the receiving portion, it is possible to suppress the formation of portions with different amounts of light in the light-transmitting portion of the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received in the receiving section, the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving section can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from gazing at the decorative member during the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving section, and allow the player to focus only on the displacement operation of the receiving section when the player wants to watch the decorative member.

The gaming machine P2 or P3 includes a connecting member made of a non-light-transmitting material and connected to one side of the receiving section in the displacement direction, and the light emitting means is provided on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving section. The connecting member is set to have a dimension in the displacement direction of the receiving portion larger than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and is disposed on the back side of the light-transmitting portion of the decorative member, and the connecting member Accordingly, the gaming machine P4 is characterized in that the light emitting means and the decorative member are protruded or retracted between the facing parts.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P2 or P3, the gaming machine P4 includes a connecting member made of a non-light-transmitting material and connected to one side of the receiving part in the displacement direction, and the light emitting means is connected to the receiving part. The connecting member is arranged on the back side of the light-transmitting part of the decorative member, and the connecting member is set to have a dimension larger in the displacement direction of the receiving part than the displacement distance of the receiving part, and is arranged on the back side of the light-transmitting part of the decorative member. As the light emitting means and the decorative member are displaced, the area of light emitted from the decorative member can be changed as the receiving portion is displaced. That is, the connecting member can block the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the decorative member, and the area that blocks the light can be changed in accordance with the displacement of the receiving part. As a result, the receiving portion and the connecting member are displaced so as to protrude between the light emitting means and the decorative member, thereby making it possible to reduce the emission area of light emitted from the decorative member. As a result, the light emitting surface of the decorative member is made smaller, making it easier for the player to recognize the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member by the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion is small.

A gaming machine P5 in the gaming machine P4, wherein the connecting member is a part of a driving means for driving the receiving section.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P4, the connecting member is a part of the driving means that drives the receiving section, so it has the role of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the receiving section, and the light emitting means. The connecting member can also serve the role of blocking light emitted from the connecting member. As a result, a space for arranging the driving means for driving the receiving portion can be secured.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving section, and the receiving section includes a displacement member that can be displaced from a game ball received in the receiving section, and The member is made of a non-light transmitting material and is movable in a position where it protrudes or retreats between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member, and when the game ball is received in the receiving portion, the A gaming machine P6, characterized in that it protrudes between the light emitting means and the decorative member facing each other.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving section, and the receiving section is configured to hold a game ball that is received in the receiving section. The displacement member is made of a non-light-transmitting material and can be displaced in a position where it protrudes or retreats between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the game ball is placed in the receiving part. When received, it protrudes between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member, so that only when the game ball is held in the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the displacement member and the game ball. Therefore, the player can recognize the position of the game ball by the shadow (dark part) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received in the receiving section, the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving section can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, the player is prevented from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on playing the game.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving section, and the receiving section includes a displacement member that can be displaced from a game ball received in the receiving section, and The member is made of a non-light transmitting material and is movable in a position where it protrudes or retreats between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member, and when the game ball is received in the receiving portion, the A game machine P7 characterized by protruding between a light emitting means and a game ball facing each other.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving part, and the receiving part is configured to hold a game ball that is received in the receiving part. The displacement member is made of a non-light-transmitting material and can be displaced in a position where it protrudes or retreats between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the game ball is placed in the receiving part. When the light emitting means and the game ball are received, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the displacement member and the game ball only when the game ball is held in the receiving part. Therefore, the player can recognize the position of the game ball from the bright part (the part where the amount of light is larger than other parts) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received in the receiving section, the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving section can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, the player is prevented from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on playing the game.

In this case, it is preferable that the displacement member is generally made of a metal material whose light reflectance is higher than that of a resin material, or that its outer surface is coated with metal. This makes it easier to reflect the light irradiated to the displacement member, makes it clear that there is a difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member, and makes it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball.

A gaming machine P8 in the gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape concave toward the back side.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P7, since the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape concave toward the back side, the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the displacement member is reflected toward the decorative member side. When doing so, the reflected light can be made difficult to diffuse (light can be easily focused). Therefore, by collecting the light reflected by the displacement member and emitted from the decorative member, the difference in the amount of light can be clearly distinguished, making it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball.

In gaming machines P1 to P8, gaming machine P9 is characterized in that the decorative member is formed to bulge in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed to bulge in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means, so that the light from the light emitting means transmitted from the decorative member is reduced. It can be spread easily. As a result, it is possible to magnify the areas where the amounts of light formed by the game balls received in the receiving section differ and make the player aware of them, so that the player can recognize the position of the game balls received in the receiving section. It's easy to do.

In gaming machines 01 to P9, gaming machine P10 is characterized in that the light emitting means is capable of emitting light of at least two or more colors.

According to the gaming machine P10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines P1 to P9, the light emitting means is capable of emitting at least two or more colors. can be changed.

For example, if the light emission is divided into a first area with a first emission color and a second area with a second emission color, and the receiving part is placed in the first area, the expectation of a jackpot will be increased. Make it expensive. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to watch the position of the game ball held in the receiving section.

In this case, the range of the first region and the range of the second region can be changed by simply changing the emitted light color, so by changing the emitted light range, multiple forms of presentation can be created. This makes it easier for players to enjoy the game.

Gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I13, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, Gaming machine Q1, wherein the gaming machine in any one of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P10 is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I13, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, A gaming machine Q2 characterized in that in any one of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I13, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, A gaming machine Q3 characterized in that in any one of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine 11 Outer frame 13, 25013, 26013, 27013, 28013, 29013, 30013, 31013 Game board 60, 34060, 42060 Base board (gaming board)
60a First opening (second opening)
60b Second opening 60c Decorative member (first decorative means)
34060d Recess (first opening)
35060e Sliding hole (first opening)
63 General prize opening (inlet)
86 Center frame (frame-shaped member)
86b Projection part (third member)
86b1 Opening 86b3 Detection device (detection means)
86b5 Standing part (folding piece)
100, 42100, 43100, 44100 Board box 43101, 45101 Engaged part (engaging part)
150 General winning opening unit (board member)
151 Main body (front member)
154, 10154, 25154 Decorative member (second decorative means)
151a, 26151a, 27151a, 28151a, 31151a Slanted surface (slanted part)
151b, 28151b, 29151b, 30151b Recess (recess)
151b2 Recessed bottom surface 155 Protrusion 300, 15300, 15300, 16300, 17300, 18300, 19300, 20300, 21300, 22300, 23300, 24300, 42300, 43300, 44300 Back case (back member)
301c First opening 301d Second opening (opening)
310, 14310, 15310, 16310, 18310, 19310, 20310, 22310, 23310, 24310 Engagement member (displacement member)
311, 14311, 15311, 16311, 18311, 22311, 24311 Elastic piece (first piece)
315, 14315, 15315 Operator 315a, 14315a Inclined surface (suppression means)
24316 Engagement part (first protrusion)
320, 18320, 20320, 22320, 23320, 24320 Fixed member 322, 18322, 22332, 23332, 24332 Engaged part (engaged part)
24335 Accommodating part 24335a Step part (second protrusion)
340 Axial support material (fixed member)
19360, 24360 Operator 410 Base member 411e Curved wall portion (regulating means, wall portion)
411f Collection port (recovery member)
422 Cam member (part of support structure, displacement member)
430 Link member (part of support structure, driven member)
4441g Engagement wall (insertion member)
11450 Decorative member 11451a Transparent part 460 Transmission mechanism 2464 Movable rack (reverse member)
465 Transmission gear (pinion gear)
466 rack (rack member)
11466e Shielding plate (connecting member)
467,12467 Ball receiving part (displacement member, receiving part)
12467c 1st piece (main body)
12467d Second piece (displacement part)
12467e Third piece (shielding part)
11491 Control board (board member)
11491a Luminous body (light emitting part)
3468 First link member (reverse member)
470 Base member (base member)
471a Standing wall (wall part)
481b1 Recess 491 Control board (light emitting means)
492 Displacement member (regulating means)
520 Base plate (second base member)
525 Rolling part (passage member)
525b Protrusion (resistance means)
540 Distribution member (regulating means, distribution means, integral member)
540a Leg (protrusion)
541 Regulation plate (first appearance part, distribution means)
542 Storage plate (second appearance part, flow state changing means)
550, 13550, 32550, 34550, 35550, 36550, 37550 Special winning device (route unit)
551 First unit (first guide route, first member)
552 Second unit (second guide route, second member)
561 1st acceptance section (1st prize opening)
562 2nd acceptance section (2nd prize opening)
563 3rd acceptance section (3rd prize opening)
564, 13564, 32564, 34564, 35564, 41564 Front plate (first member)
564a Guide part (projection wall)
564c, 41564c Second convex part (part of guide means, convex part)
564b, 41564b First convex part (part of second guide means, second convex part)
13564 Front plate (first member)
13564b First convex part (protrusion)
13564c Second convex part (protrusion)
571, 13571, 32571, 34571, 35571, 41571 Base plate (second member)
571i, 41571i Second recess (part of guide means, recess)
571h, 41571h First recess (part of second guide means, second recess)
13571 Base plate (second member)
13571b Fourth convex part (protrusion)
13571c 5th convex part (protrusion)
574a First receiving recess (third prize opening)
574b Second receiving recess (third prize opening)
34579, 35579 Support part (projection part)
40581a1 Opening 40581a2 Accommodating portion 583a First solenoid (driving means)
583b First variable plate (variable plate, plate member)
584a Second solenoid (driving means)
584b Second variable plate (variable plate, plate member)
615 First communication path (branch path)
616 Second communication path (branch path)
622 Central opening (opening, insertion part)
634 Second central opening (opening, insertion part)
700 Rotating unit (first member)
7710 Displacement member 7713 Ball receiving member (receiving part)
7720 Transmission member (transmission means)
7721 Rotating member (main body)
7722 Drive pin (pin part)
7723 Arm member 7723a Driven groove (sliding groove)
730 Left side transmission member (rotation side transmission means, second member)
731 Transmission mechanism (one-way clutch mechanism)
731a Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731b Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731c Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731d Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731e, 7730 Load gear (load gear)
740 Right side transmission member (displacement side transmission means, first member)
741 Rotating member (crank member)
741a Protrusion (pin part)
742 Arm member 742b first sliding groove (sliding groove)
760 Box member (lid member)
770 Lid member (displacement member, first member)
780 Rotation regulating member (displacement regulating means)
800 Rotating body (rotating member, second member)
810 Base plate (fixed member)
811b Communication hole (opening)
812b Communication hole (second communication port)
820 LED base (light emitting means)
831 Opening (first communication port)
870 Opening/closing member (displacement member)
871 Projection (part of displacement setting means, part of connection means)
892 Sliding groove (part of displacement setting means, part of connection means)
KR1 1st ball throwing route (downstream route)
KR2 2nd ball throwing path (2nd branch path)
KR3 3rd ball throwing path (1st branch path)
SP4 Biasing spring (biasing means)
KM4 Drive motor (drive means)
OW1 One-way clutch (engaging means)
SK1 Main route (first route, part of the guide route)
SK2 Main route (first route, second route, part of the guide route, upstream route)
SK3 Main route (second route, part of guide route, downstream route)
SK4 Main route (part of the guide route, detour)
SK5 Main route (part of the guide route)
SK6 Main route (part of the guide route)
SK7 Main route (part of the guide route)
HK1 Secondary route (part of the guide route)
HK2 Subroute (part of the guide route)
HK3 Secondary route (part of the guide route)
WK1 Curved route (third route, part of the guide route, changed route)
SI shim member (adjustment means)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines are known that include a gaming board, a back member disposed on the back side of the gaming board, and a fixing member disposed on the back side of the back member. (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-33603

However, the gaming machine described above has a problem in that it requires a large number of work steps to arrange the fixing member on the back surface member.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the work process of disposing the fixing member on the back member.

To achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 includes: a game board; a back member disposed on the back side of the game board; a fixing member disposed on the back side of the back member; , which is disposed between the opposing sides from the game board to the back surface member, and is operable from the outside of the opposing space between the game board and the back surface member on the back side of the game board. The fixing member includes a protrusion that is at least partially disposed on the front side of the back member and that engages with the displacement member, and the protrusion and the displacement member engage with each other. , the fixing member is disposed on the back member.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the number of work steps for disposing the fixing member on the back member can be reduced.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of an operation unit and a game board. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. (a) is a front view of the general winning opening unit, and (b) is a sectional view of the general winning opening unit taken along the line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 12(a). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XIII-XIII in FIG. 2. FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in range XIV of FIG. 13. FIG. It is a back view of the general winning a prize unit. 14 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board in range XIV of FIG. 13. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame. (a) is a front view of the first unit, (b) is a side view of the first unit, and (c) is a rear view of the first unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit. FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXI-XXI in FIG. 18(b). 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit shown in FIG. 21. FIG. FIG. 18B is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. 18(b). (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 21, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 21 is a sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXIVc-XXIVc of No. 21. FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in range XXVa in FIG. 21, and (b) is a sectional view of the first unit along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 25(a). (a) is a partially enlarged view of the first unit in range XXVa in FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 26(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 25(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 25(a). 25(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXVIIc-XXVIIc in FIG. 25(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXVb-XXVb in FIG. 25(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb in FIG. 25(a). be. (a) is a front view of the second unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second unit. 30 is a sectional view of the second unit taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 29. FIG. (a) is a front view of the center frame, and (b) is a side view of the center frame. (a) is a perspective front view of the center frame, and (b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame. 34 is a sectional view of the center frame taken along the line XXXVI-XXXVI in FIG. 33. FIG. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board, and (b) is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the back case, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the back case. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a perspective rear view of the rear case and the board box, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case and the board box. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in a retracted state. FIG. 6 is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the first extended state. FIG. 7 is a front view of the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in a retracted state. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the first extended state. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. (a) is a rear view of the first link member and the cam member in the retracted state, (b) in the first extended state, and (c) in the second extended state. 50 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 50, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 51. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LVa-LVa in FIG. 50, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 52 is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the LVc-LVc line of No. 52. (a) is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit taken along the line LVIa-LVIa in FIG. 52, and (b) is a front view of the first link member and cam member of the lower displacement unit in the second extended state. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member. (a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. FIG. 6 is a front view of the lower displacement member in the first position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the lower displacement member in the second position. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position. (a) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in range LXIXa of FIG. 68(b), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower displacement member in range LXIXb of FIG. 68(a). (a) is a top view of the distribution unit, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit. 70(a) is a sectional view of the distribution unit taken along the line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 70(a). FIG. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in range LXXIV in FIG. 73. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit. It is a front view of a distribution unit and a lower displacement unit. It is a top view of a distribution unit and a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a sectional view of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a sectional view of a distribution unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a sectional view of a distribution unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotation unit. It is a front view of a decoration unit. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit as seen in the direction of arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit as seen in the direction of arrow XCIIb in FIG. 91. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit. 89 is a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa, and (b) is a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVb in FIG. 89. 89 is a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa, and (b) is a rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVb in FIG. 89. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit and the right transmission member in a closed state, (b) in an intermediate state, and (c) in an open state, respectively. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit and the right transmission member in an open state, (b) in an intermediate state, and (c) in a closed state, respectively. (a) is a side view of the decoration unit in a closed state, and (b) is a side view of the decoration unit in an open state. (a) is a front view of the rotating body, (b) is a side view of the rotating body as seen in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100(a), and (c) is a side view of the rotating body as seen in the direction of arrow Cc in FIG. FIG. 3 is a side view of the rotating body when viewed from a direction. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body. (a) is a side view of the rotating body with the opening/closing member in the closed state, and (b) is a side view of the rotating body with the opening/closing member in the open state. (a) and (b) are side views of the decoration unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CVI in FIG. 105. FIG. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit and a rotation unit. (a) is a top view of the ball holder, (b) is a front view of the ball holder, and (c) is a sectional view of the ball holder taken along the line CVIIIc-CVIIIc in FIG. 108(a). It is. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball holder. (a) and (b) are sectional views of a ball holder. (a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotation unit taken along the line CXI-CXI in FIG. 87. It is a front view of an upper displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the upper displacement unit. FIG. 7 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 7 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is disposed at an intermediate position. FIG. 3 is a front view of the upper displacement unit in a state where the upper displacement member is disposed at the extended position. (a) is a front view of the variable part, and (b) is a rear view of the variable part. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in the second embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement member. It is a front view of the lower displacement member in a 3rd position. (a) is a front view of a lower displacement member in a third embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member. (a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the first position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the second position. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the third position, and (b) is a front view of the lower displacement member in the second position. It is a front view of the lower displacement unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. It is a front view of a lower displacement unit. (a) is a top view of a distribution unit in a fifth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit. 131(a) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV in FIG. 131(a). FIG. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit in range CXXXV in FIG. 134. It is a front view of the rotation unit in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit. (a) to (c) are side views of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. (a) to (c) are side views of the decoration unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the displacement unit in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view of the displacement unit. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the displacement unit when a game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a side surface schematic diagram of the displacement unit when a game ball is held by the displacement member. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation operation unit. 145 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXLVII-CXLVII in FIG. 145. FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective front view of the 1st link member in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a lower displacement unit. It is a sectional view of the game board in a 10th embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member in an 11th embodiment. (a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the line CLIIIb-CLIIIb of FIG. 153(a), and (c) is a front view of the lower displacement member of FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line of FIG. (a) is an exploded perspective front view of a ball receiver in a twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the ball receiver. (a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member, and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the CLVc-CLVc line in FIG. 155(b). (a) is a front view of the special winning device in the thirteenth embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device, and (c) is a front view of the special winning device in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a sectional view of a special prize winning device. It is an exploded perspective front view of a special prize winning device. (a) is a top view of the special winning device, and (b) is a sectional view of the special winning device along the line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb in FIG. 158(a). (a) is a rear view of the rear case in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case taken along the line CLIXb-CLIXb in FIG. 159(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a back case in a fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a back case in a sixteenth embodiment. (a) is a rear view of the rear case in the seventeenth embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the rear case taken along the line CLXIb-CLXIb in FIG. 161(a). (a) is a front view of the back case in an 18th embodiment, and (b) is a back view of the back case. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a schematic top view of the game board, and (b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of an engagement member in a nineteenth embodiment. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a one-way sectional view taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. 165. It is an exploded perspective view of a back case and a rotation unit in a 20th embodiment. (a) is a front view of the engagement member, and (b) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engagement member. (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case and rotation unit in the twenty-first embodiment. (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engagement member, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotation unit taken along the line CLXXIb-CLXXIb in FIG. 171(a). (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a schematic sectional view of the rear case and the rotation unit. (a) is a rear view of the rotation unit and the engaging member, and (b) is a schematic sectional view of the rear case and the rotation unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective front view of an engaging member and a fixing member. (a) and (b) are front views of the back case. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case taken along the line CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa in FIG. 175(b). 177(b) is a front view of the back case in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177(b) is a sectional view of the back case taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177(a). 177(b) is a sectional view of the rear case taken along the line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII of FIG. 177(b). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board in the twenty-fifth embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board in the twenty-sixth embodiment. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board in the twenty-seventh embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board in the twenty-ninth embodiment. (a) is a sectional view of a general winning a prize mouth unit in a 30th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of a general winning a prize mouth unit in a 31st embodiment. It is an exploded perspective front view of the special prize winning device in a 32nd embodiment. (a) is a front view of the special winning device, (b) is a top view of the special winning device, and (c) is a sectional view of the special winning device along the line CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc in FIG. 185(a). It is. (a) is a sectional view of the special winning device, and (b) is a sectional view of the special winning device along the line CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb in FIG. 186(a). (a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member in the 33rd embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the special prize winning device. (a) is a front view of the game board in the 34th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the line CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb in FIG. 188(a). It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. 189 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXC-CXC in FIG. 188. (a) is a front view of the game board in the 35th embodiment, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the CXCIb-CXCIb line in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of a special prize winning device. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 taken along the line CXCIII-CXCIII in FIG. 191(b). (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board in a 36th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board. (a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board in a thirty-seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective front view of a lower displacement member in a thirty-eighth embodiment. (a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb line of FIG. 197(a), and (c) is a front view of the lower displacement member of FIG. 197(a). FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member taken along the line CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of a lower displacement member in a thirty-ninth embodiment. 199(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member, and FIGS. 199(b) and 199(c) are sectional views of the lower displacement member. 200(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the fortieth embodiment, and FIG. 200(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the line CCb-CCb in FIG. 200(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit in the forty-first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit along the CCIb-CCIb line in FIG. 201(a). (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the CCIIa-CCIIa line in FIG. 201(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit taken along the CCIIb-CCIIb line in FIG. 201(a). be. It is an exploded perspective front view of the back case in a 42nd embodiment. (a) is a front view of the back case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case taken along the line CCIVb-CCIVb in FIG. 204(a). (a) is a front view of the back case, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case taken along the CCVb-CCVb line in FIG. 205(a). (a) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a sectional view of the game board taken along the CCVIb-CCVIb line in FIG. 206(a). It is an exploded perspective front view of the back case in a 43rd embodiment. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a sectional view of the back case taken along the CCIXa-CCIXa line in FIG. 208(b), and (b) is a sectional view of the back case taken along the CCIXb-CCIXb line in FIG. 209(a). (a) and (b) are sectional views of the back case. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the back case. It is an exploded perspective front view of the back case in a 44th embodiment. (a) is a front view of the back case, and (b) is a sectional view of the back case taken along the line CCXIIIb-CCXIIIb in FIG. 213(a). (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the back case. It is an exploded perspective front view of the back case in a 45th embodiment. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case. (a) is a front view of the rear case, and (b) is a rear view of the rear case.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 111, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 4. A frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front door serves as the opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 5 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 5c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top and protruding forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination parts 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, at the upper left side of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1), there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 5c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize winning machine. It is constructed by assembling the opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are installed in the through holes of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws, etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and at the inside position of the outer rail 77, a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is installed. An arcuate inner rail 76 formed of The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (top left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing probability mode, shortening time mode, or normal mode, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable mode mode by the lighting condition. , The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a guaranteed variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates whether the round is in the middle of a jackpot. Displays numbers and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, after which the jackpot transitions to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability fluctuation).In other words, a game that is easy to transition to a special gaming state. It refers to the state of The high probability state (probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol described later increases and the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640. "Low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of winning is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is changing. In addition, the time saving state (medium time saving) of the "low probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol increases and the second prize opening 640 is reached. Refers to the state of the game in which it is easy to win a ball. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state, it is a state in which the game is neither changing probability nor shortening the time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol has increased).

During the probability change or time saving period, not only the winning probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened is changed, and it is longer than during the normal period. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), compared to when the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state), the access to the second prize opening 640 is The ball is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or time saving period, the ball is likely to enter the second prize opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, one winning The first electric accessory 640a may be opened more often than usual. In addition, during the probability change or time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is opened and the first electric accessory At least one of the number of times 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is released and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened in one win are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased compared to the normal one.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays a third symbol in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (starting prize) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that displays symbols in a variable manner, and an LED that displays a second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of a ball through the first through gate 66 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device alternately displays an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. This is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the "○" symbol), the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter when the gaming state is changing probability or during time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and time saving periods, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short period of time, so it is possible to perform more winning lots than during normal times. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more opportunities to have the first electric accessory 640a of the second prize opening 640 in the open state. Therefore, during probability change and time saving, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, the second winning hole can be opened during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a per win, etc. If the state is such that it is easy for the ball to enter 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the first electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot onto the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls held is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown) is displayed. ) is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first prize opening 64 through which a ball can be won is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning port switch, the main controller 110 A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main control device 110 ( A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 each serve as one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are set to different numbers, for example, the number of balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins a prize may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize opening 640 may be five.

Further, on the left side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a third winning hole 82 is provided in which a ball can be won. When a ball is won, the third winning hole 82 can throw the winning ball to the first opening 521 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, via the ball throwing unit 600. That is, the third winning a prize opening 82 is arranged in a state in which it communicates with a first opening 521, which will be described later.

A third electric accessory 82a is attached to the third prize opening 82. This third electric accessory 82a is configured to be able to open and close by rotationally displacing with respect to the game board 13, and normally the third electric accessory 82a is in a closed state (reduced state) and the ball wins the third prize. The situation is such that it is difficult to win the prize at the mouth 82. On the other hand, if there is a determination of a jackpot triggered by a winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, the third electric accessory 82a will be opened for a predetermined time (expanded) before, after, or during the jackpot. state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the third winning hole 82. Further, on the downstream side of the third winning opening 82, a sensor device SE1 that detects the passing ball is mounted.

In addition, the timing of opening the third electric accessory 82a does not have to be triggered by the winning of the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 5640, and the opening timing of the third electric accessory 82a does not have to be triggered by the winning of the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 5640. As a result of the fluctuating display of the second symbol that is triggered by this, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, it may be released.

A first electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize opening 640. This first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second prize opening 640. There is. On the other hand, when the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a It becomes an open state (enlarged state) and becomes a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change or time saving, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during probability change or time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for balls to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to normal times.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same when the ball enters the first winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, whether in the low probability state or the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 than when the ball enters the first winning hole 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a as in the second winning hole 640, and the ball can always be won.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win in the second winning opening 640, so it is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640. Then, the player shoots the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize opening 64, the user has many chances to win a jackpot lottery, and becomes a jackpot. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for this.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is likely to be in the open state, and the second prize opening 640 can be won. Since the ball is in a comfortable state, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball passes through the first through gate 66. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R jackpot by opening the first electric accessory 640a and winning the second prize opening 640.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows players to shoot balls depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is changing probability, shortening time, or normal). You can change the way the ball is played between "left-handed" and "right-handed." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery conducted due to a winning in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot stops after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by lighting up the first symbol display device 37A or 37B and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 so as to represent the symbol. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning a prize opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closure, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a reward for the game (gaming value). will be held.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate forward about the lower side of the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the special winning hole 65a, and changing the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by alternating between states.

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning hole 64, for example, It may also be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

A pasting space K1 for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. pasted in the pasting space K1 can be attached to a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 82 are guided through the first out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Ru. The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective front view of the operating unit 200 and the game board 13. Moreover, FIGS. 7 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the upper displacement member 940 is retracted upward and the lower displacement member 440 is retracted downward. In FIG. 8, the upper displacement member 940 is rotated downward from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 9, the displaced state shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is extended from the state shown in FIG. 7 to a first extended position, which will be described later, and in FIG. The respective figures show a state in which they are displaced to a second extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and an upper displacement unit 900, a lower displacement unit 400, a rotation unit 700, and an inner space of the rear case 300. A sorting unit 5a00 and a ball throwing unit 600 attached to the back side of the game board 13 are accommodated.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands up from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

The upper displacement unit 900 is slidably disposed on a base member 910 that is rectangular and elongated in front view and is disposed above the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. The upper displacement member 940 is formed so as to be able to perform an effect of rotating and displacing the upper displacement member 940 while sliding it on the front side of the opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device 81). Note that a detailed explanation of the upper displacement unit 900 will be given later.

The lower displacement unit 400 is slidably disposed on a base member 410 that is rectangular and oblong in front view and is disposed below the opening 301a of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. The lower displacement member 440 is formed so as to be able to perform an effect of rotating and displacing the lower displacement member 440 while sliding it on the front side of the opening 301a of the back case (that is, the third symbol display device 81). Note that a detailed explanation of the lower displacement unit 400 will be given later.

The rotation unit 700 includes a rear base 720 that is substantially rectangular in front view and is disposed on the right side (arrow) of the opening 301a of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300, and a rear base 720 that is substantially rectangular in front view. A rotating body 800 disposed in the game board 13 is provided, and the effect of rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player through a transparent plate portion formed on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. Note that a detailed explanation of the rotation unit 700 will be given later.

The ball throwing unit 600 is attached to the back side of the game board 13, and sends game balls thrown from the third prize opening 82 of the game board 13 to the back side of the game board 13 to the first opening 511 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later. A path is formed for the ball to be thrown.

The sorting unit 500 includes a path forming member 510 attached to the back side of the game board 13, a base plate 520 disposed opposite to the path forming member 510 with a predetermined gap formed therebetween, and the base plate. 520 and distributes the game balls flowing down between the opposing path forming member 510 and the base plate 520 to each ball throwing route (second ball throwing route KR2 or third ball throwing route KR3). The game balls sorted by the sorting member 540 are thrown to the lower displacement unit 400. Note that a detailed explanation of the distribution unit 500 will be given later.

<The first decorative body and the second decorative body are arranged at adjacent positions in the front-rear direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16, the general winning a prize opening unit 150 disposed on the game board 13 will be explained.

First, the general winning a prize unit 150 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13, FIG. 12(a) is a front view of the general winning slot unit 150, and FIG. 12(b) is a line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 12(a). It is a sectional view of the general winning a prize mouth unit 150 in .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front, and a center frame 86 disposed in an opening formed in the base plate 60. and a general winning opening unit 150.

The base plate 60 includes a first opening 60a that opens at the center when viewed from the front, and a second opening 60b that opens at the lower side in the direction of gravity of the game area formed by the rail members 76 and 77. . A center frame 86 is disposed in the first opening 60a, and a general winning a prize unit 150 is disposed in the second opening 60b. Further, a sticker with decorations (patterns, designs, etc.) formed on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) is attached to the base plate 60, so that the decoration can be visually recognized by the player. Note that the decoration on the front side of the base plate 60 is not limited to a sticker, and decoration may be printed (painted) on the front side of the base plate 60.

The general prize winning opening unit 150 is arranged in the game area of the game board 13 (the front of the base board 60), and is capable of changing the path of the game ball flowing down the game area. In addition, the general winning a prize opening unit 150 has an end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B) with respect to the gaming area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. It is placed along the section. Note that in FIGS. 13 to 16, the seal provided on the base plate 60 is shown with the reference numeral 60c as a decorative member. Further, in this embodiment, a character (person) is drawn on the decorative member 60c.

The general winning a prize opening unit 150 includes a main body part 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front, and a first standing part 152 that stands from the end of the main body part 151 to the front side (in the direction of arrow F). A second upright portion 153 extends from the upper end in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction side) of the first upright portion 152 toward the center of the gaming area, and a second upright portion 153 is provided on the back side of the main body portion 151. It mainly includes a decorative member 154 and a plurality (three in this embodiment) of general winning openings 63 formed on the front side of the main body part 151.

The main body portion 151 is set to have an outer shape slightly larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b that is opened in the thickness direction of the base plate 60, and is covered with the second opening 60b. is placed on the front side. In addition, the second opening 60b allows the game ball flowing into the general prize opening 63 provided in the main body part 151 to be sent to the back side of the game board 13 (base board 60). Furthermore, the main body part 151 has an inclined surface 151a that is inclined toward the base plate 60 as it goes from the inner part to the outer end in a front view, and a recess provided in the back surface on the base plate 60 side (arrow B direction side). 151b, and a back surface portion 151d forming the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recessed portion 151b.

The inclined surface 151a is formed to be inclined at approximately 30 degrees with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 can be brought into contact with the slope 151a and flowed down along the slope of the slope 151a, and can be moved to the front side of the main body part 151.

Here, if the inclined surface 151a is not formed at the end of the main body part 151 and the side surface of the main body part 151 is formed perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60, the playing area of the game board 13 may be There is a possibility that the game ball that hits (collides with) the side surface of the main body part 151 from a direction perpendicular to the main body part 151, and that the game ball that hits it rebounds in the opposite direction to the flowing direction.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the inclined surface 151a allows the game ball that contacts the side surface of the main body part 151 to be moved to the front side of the main body part, so that the game ball flowing down the game area is temporarily prevented from flowing down. stagnation can be suppressed. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body part 151 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150.

The back surface portion 151d is the back surface of the main body portion 151 as described above, and is formed with a constant width around the recessed portion 151b when viewed from the back. In addition, the back surface portion 151d is disposed in contact with the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) in a state in which the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60.

The recessed portion 151b is recessed toward the front side (arrow F direction side). Further, the recessed portion 151b has a recessed bottom surface 151b2 serving as a bottom surface in the recessed direction, and an inner surface 151b3 that stands up from the outer edge of the recessed bottom surface 151b2 toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B).

The recessed bottom surface 151b2 is an adhesive surface for a decorative member 154, which will be described later, and is formed as a plane parallel to the front surface of the main body portion 151. Thereby, when the decoration of the decorative member 154 is visually recognized through the main body portion 151, the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be uniformly recognized.

The inner surface 151b3 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) when viewed from the front. Further, the shape of the inner surface 151b3 when viewed from the front is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154, which will be described later. Thereby, when the decorative member 154 is disposed in the recessed portion 151b, it is possible to suppress the decorative member 154 from protruding to the outside of the recessed portion 151b. Therefore, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the back side part 151d and the base plate 60, so that the back side part 151d of the main body part 151 and the base plate 60 are separated. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the main body portion 151 from protruding toward the front side with respect to the base plate 60 compared to the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from the front side of the base plate 60 to the front of the main body part 151 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150.

The recess 151b is a recess that accommodates a decorative member 154, which will be described later, in its recessed space, and the recess depth (recess distance toward the front side (direction of arrow F)) is greater than the thickness of the decorative member 154. It is set large. Further, the recess 151b is recessed along the shape of the end of the main body 151 at a position spaced a certain distance inside the main body 151 from the end of the main body 151 when viewed from the front.

Therefore, when the decorative member 154 is disposed inside the recessed portion 151b, the back surface of the decorative member 154 can be prevented from protruding further to the back side than the main body portion 151. Therefore, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the decorative member 154 is sandwiched between the concave bottom surface 151b2 and the base plate 60, so that the back surface 151d of the main body part 151 and the base plate 60 are separated. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the main body portion 151 from protruding toward the front side relative to the base plate 60 compared to the normal arrangement position. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly flowed down from above the main body part 151 in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow U) to the front of the main body part 151 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150.

The first standing portion 152 is erected from the end of the main body portion 151 on the end side of the gaming area (on the inner rail 76 side) to the front side (on the arrow F direction side). The first erected portion 152 has an erected dimension set to be approximately the same as the width dimension in the erected direction of the inner rail 76 erected in front of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). Further, the distance between the first upright portion 152 and the glass unit 16 of the front door 5 that covers the front side of the game board 13 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body part 151 can be caused to collide with the first upright part 152 at the lower end of the game area in the direction of gravity. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front side of the main body part 151 can be prevented from colliding with the inner rail 76, and the inner rail 76 can be prevented from colliding with the game ball and being bent.

Here, the space between the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 is a space for guiding the game ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. Space for arranging reinforcement etc. between the opposing rails 77 is limited. Therefore, it is difficult to provide reinforcement for the purpose of preventing the inner rail 76 from bending, and there is a risk that the game balls flowing down the gaming area will collide with the inner rail 76, causing the inner rail 76 to bend.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball flowing down the game area to collide with the inner rail 76 by the general winning a prize unit 150 (first standing part 152) arranged in the game area. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distance between the opposing inner rails 76 and outer rails 77 from changing due to bending of the inner rails 76. As a result, the game ball can be stably launched into the game area.

The second upright portion 153 extends from the upper end of the first upright portion 152 in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction side) in a downwardly inclined manner toward the center of the gaming area (first prize opening 64). (see Figure 2). As a result, the game ball flowing down between the opposing inner rail 76 and the center frame 83 (see FIG. 2) hits the upper surface (the surface in the direction of arrow U) of the downwardly inclined extending portion of the second upright portion 153. When the ball is thrown, the game ball can be rolled along the downward slope of the second upright portion 153 and thrown toward the center of the game area. As a result, the game ball flowing down the gaming area between the opposing sides of the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 (arrow L direction side) enters the first prize opening 64 arranged in the center of the gaming area (inflow). You can easily do it.

The decorative member 154 is formed into a plate shape and is adhered to the back side of the main body portion 151. Further, the decorative member 154 has a decoration formed on the front side of the main body portion 151 that is continuous with the decoration formed on the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 in a front view. Thereby, the decoration formed on the base plate 60 can be visually recognized as one decoration together with the decoration on the decorative member 154. In this embodiment, a part of the character (person) is drawn on the decorative member 154, and the character of the decorative member 60c and the character of the decorative member 154 can be visually recognized as one character.

Moreover, the decorative member 154 is formed from a light-transmitting material. As a result, the light that has passed through the second opening 60b from the back side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of arrow B) enters the back side of the decorative member 154, and is emitted from the front side of the decorative member 154 (the side in the direction of arrow F). can be done. Therefore, the decoration formed on the front side of the decorative member 154 can be brightened and made visible to the player, and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be easily seen by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the base plate 60 and the general winning a prize opening unit 150 will be explained. FIG. 13 is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line XIII-XIII in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the decorative member 154 is formed to have a larger outer shape than the opening shape of the second opening 60b of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front. As a result, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is arranged on the base plate 60, the end of the decorative member 154 is located between the recessed bottom surface 151b2 of the recessed part 151b of the main body part 151 and the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c). will be placed in Therefore, when the adhesion between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 154 comes off due to deterioration over time, the decorative member 154 can be prevented from falling off the game board 13.

Further, the decorative member 154 has a width that overlaps with the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow FB), which is a circular shape of the base plate 60 into which a protrusion 155 protruding from the back surface of the main body portion 151, which will be described later, is inserted. The diameter of the opening 60g (see FIG. 11) is set larger than that of the opening 60g (see FIG. 11). As a result, a gap is formed between the decorations of the decoration member 154 and the decoration member 60c when viewed from the front due to a misalignment of the arrangement of the decoration member 154 with respect to the main body 151 or a misalignment of the position where the decoration member 60c is formed. can be suppressed. As a result, the player can easily recognize the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

In addition, the three general winning holes 63 provided in the main body 151 are connected to openings 514 to 516 of the distribution unit 500 (see FIG. 71) provided on the back side of the game board 13, and are connected to the openings 514 to 516 of the distribution unit 500 (see FIG. The game ball that has won in the winning hole 63 is thrown to the fourth ball throwing route KR4 of the distribution unit 500. Note that a detailed explanation of the distribution unit 500 will be given later.

Further, in the distribution unit 500, a substrate (not shown) equipped with a light source capable of emitting light to the front side is disposed on a base plate 520 (see FIG. 71), and the light emitted from the substrate is transmitted to the base plate. The light passes through the second opening 60b of 60 and is irradiated onto the back surface of the general winning a prize opening unit 150.

Therefore, the second opening 60b is used as a space for irradiating light onto the path of the game ball that wins from the general winning hole 63 of the general winning hole unit 150 and the back surface of the general winning hole unit 150. This eliminates the need to form two separate openings, one for throwing the game ball and one for passing light, so light can be irradiated across the entire back surface of the general winning a prize opening unit 150. In addition, the general winning hole 63 can be arranged in the entire area of the main body part 151 of the general winning hole unit 150. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the general winning hole unit 150, and also to emit light from the entire area of the general winning hole unit 150 to display the decoration (decorative member 154) of the general winning hole unit 150 to the player. It can be easily recognized.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the decorative decorative member 154 connected to the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is a main body part disposed along the front surface of the base plate 60. 151, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be placed adjacent to each other (close to each other) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). As a result, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are viewed from an angle oblique to the front view of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end in the direction of gravity of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1)). 154, it is possible to suppress the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 from being visually recognized as misaligned compared to the case where the decoration of the general winning hole unit is arranged in front of the general winning hole unit. As a result, the connection between the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 can be seen by the player in the same positional relationship regardless of the player's viewpoint, improving the design of the game board 13. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the connection of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 will be described in detail. FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 in range XIV of FIG. Note that in FIG. 14, the path of light that is visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As described above, the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 are visually recognized by the player as one decoration. Therefore, in order for the player to visually recognize the decorative member 60c of the base board 60 and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration (pattern), it is necessary to suppress the displacement of the two decorations. However, when forming the decoration on the base plate 60 or when arranging the decoration member 154 on the main body part 151, it is difficult to arrange the decoration at an accurate position (same position every time). Therefore, when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is arranged on the base board 60, the position of the decoration of the decorative member 154 with respect to the decorative member 60c of the base board 60 is shifted, so that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 There is a problem in that it becomes difficult for players to visually recognize the decorations as a single decoration.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the end portion of the decorative member 154 is arranged on the back side of the inclined surface 151a. This makes it difficult for the player to accurately recognize the connecting portion between the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 (the connected portion is blurred and visually recognized by the player). Therefore, the player can recognize the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

To explain in detail, as shown in FIG. 14, the connecting portion between the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P1" (see FIG. 14)) is connected to the inclined surface 151a of the main body part 151. It is located on the back side of. Therefore, the light emitted toward the player's viewpoint from the boundary P1 and the connecting part between the front surface of the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P2" (see FIG. 14)) The light emitted toward the player's viewpoint can be reflected at different positions on the decorative member 60c or the decorative member 154 (that is, on the path of the light emitted from the boundary P1 toward the player's viewpoint). (This can prevent the boundary P2 from being formed.)

Therefore, at the boundary P1, a misalignment of the decorative member 60c with respect to the decorative member 154 is easily recognized by the player as a misalignment of the decoration, and at the boundary P2, a misalignment of the decoration due to a difference in the direction of refraction of light is easily recognized by the player. However, since the decorations that are visible to the player from the respective positions of the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 can be placed in different positions, the positional deviation of the decorations at the boundary P1 and the boundary P2 can be easily recognized at the same position. It is possible to prevent players from seeing the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation of the decoration at the boundary P1 and the positional deviation of the decoration at the boundary P2 from being combined, and the amount of positional deviation of the decoration from increasing and being recognized by the player. As a result, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration, and the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Furthermore, by arranging the boundary P1 on the back side of the inclined surface 151a, from the player's perspective, the connection part between the decorative member 60c and the main body part 151 (hereinafter referred to as "boundary P3" (see FIG. 14)), A boundary P1 can be placed between the boundary P2 and the boundary P2. Therefore, the boundary P1 can be placed between the misaligned positions (boundaries P2, P3) of the decoration caused by the light being refracted when the light is emitted from the main body portion 151. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the recognized area from being extended due to the position of the decoration being shifted. In other words, the area where the decoration is visually recognized due to a shift in position can be limited to the front of the game board 13. As a result, the misalignment area of the decoration can be reduced with respect to the game area of the game board 13, making it easier for the player to recognize the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

In addition, in this embodiment, the face of the character is decorated on the decorative member 60c of the base board 60, and the body of the character decorated on the decorative member 60c is decorated on the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150. That is, the outline of the decoration is located at the connecting portion of the decoration between the decoration member 60c and the decoration member 154. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize the positional deviation of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as the outline of the decoration. As a result, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the face of the character up to the neck is decorated on the decorative member 60c of the base board 60, and the clothing worn by the body of the character decorated on the decorative member 60c is placed on the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 150. The character's face (neck) and clothes are decorated with different colors (in this example, the face is skin-colored and the clothes are black). This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 are separated by making the positional deviation of the connecting portion between the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 different in color. I can do it. As a result, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

As described above, the main body portion 151 has a recessed portion 151b on the back side, and a decorative member 154 is disposed inside the recessed portion 151b. Further, the shape of the inner side surface (inner surface 151b3) of the recessed portion 151b is set to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the decorative member 154 when viewed from the front. Thereby, when disposing the decorative member 154 on the main body portion 151, the inner surface 151b3 of the recessed portion 151b can be used as a guide (positioning). As a result, when attaching the decorative member 154 to the main body part 151, it is possible to suppress the arrangement of the decorative member 154 from being misaligned with respect to the main body part 151.

Further, on the back side of the main body portion 151, cylindrical protrusions 155 (see FIG. 15) are formed at a plurality of locations (in this embodiment, three locations (see FIG. 15)). The protrusion 155 is a positioning protrusion that positions the general winning a prize opening unit 150 with the base plate 60 when it is disposed on the base plate 60, and is inserted into the recess 60d provided in the base plate 60. Further, at least one protrusion 155 (one location in this embodiment) protrudes from the concave bottom surface 151b2 of the concave portion 151b, and is inserted into an opening formed in the decorative member 154. Therefore, the protrusion 155 can be used for positioning when the decorative member 154 is disposed on the main body portion 151.

Therefore, the protrusion 155 allows positioning when the general winning a prize opening unit 150 is disposed on the base plate 60, and also enables positioning when disposing the decorative member 154 on the main body part 151. Therefore, since the positioning portion for arranging the decorative member 154 on the front side of the decorative member 60c can be the same portion, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 from being misaligned. It can be suppressed. As a result, the decoration of the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Furthermore, the protrusion 155 protruding from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 is formed in a region E1 (see FIG. 15) (the region to which the adhesive tape 154a is applied), which will be described later. As a result, when disposing the decorative member 154 in the main body portion 151, with the protrusion 155 inserted into the opening of the decorative member 154, one part of the edge of the decorative member 154 is positioned on the inner surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. By arranging them together, the decorative member 154 can be positioned at two locations with respect to the main body portion 151. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to arrange the decorative member 154 on the main body 151 by aligning the edges of the decorative member 154 at two locations on the inner surface 151b3 of the recess 151b. As a result, the work of disposing the decorative member 154 on the main body portion 151 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the adhesion between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 154 will be described. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the general winning a prize unit 150, and FIG. 16 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the game board 13 in range XIV of FIG. 13. In addition, in FIG. 15, the range of the adhesive tape 154a attached to the decorative member 154 is indicated by the symbol E1 and illustrated by a two-dot chain line. Further, in FIG. 14, the path of light that is visually recognized by the player is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line. In this embodiment, the adhesive tape 154a is formed from a light-transmissive double-sided tape and is attached to the area E1.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the adhesive tape 154a that adheres the decorative member 154 and the main body portion 151 is pasted along the edge of the decorative member 154 with a constant width. As a result, in the area to which the adhesive tape 154a is not attached (parts other than the range E1), the thickness of the adhesive tape 154a is increased between the main body part 151 (recessed bottom surface 151b2) and the decorative member 154 (the front surface of the decorative member). A gap (space) with a predetermined width is formed between them.

Further, the adhesive tape 154a is bonded to an area extending from the end of the decorative member 154, passing through the boundary P3 and extending beyond the virtual line PK1 (see FIG. 14) that is orthogonal to the inclined surface 151a. As a result, the light passing through the main body 151 and emitted from the inclined surface 151a is transmitted to the area E1 (decorative member 154 end). As a result, even when the player visually recognizes the general winning a prize opening unit 150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decoration member 60c and the decoration of the decoration member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Here, if the player views the game board 13 from a higher position than usual (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity), As shown, the light L exiting from the inclined surface 151a toward the player's line of sight is repeatedly reflected from the front and back surfaces of the main body 151 and passes through the interior of the main body 151. In this case, if the entire front surface of the decorative member 154 is in contact with the main body 151 via the adhesive tape 154a, the wavelength of the light will be changed by the decoration of the decorative member 154 every time it is reflected on the decorative member 154 side. Ru. Therefore, the light that passes through the interior of the main body portion 151 and is emitted from the inclined surface 151a cannot be reflected due to only a wavelength change due to the decoration at the end of the decorative member 154. Therefore, since the decorations recognized by the player from the inclined surface 151a are different from the wavelengths of the decorations visually recognized by the player from the front of the main body 151, the decorations are no longer continuous between the main body 151 and the inclined surface 151a. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the adhesive part of the decorative member 154 to the main body part 151 is limited to the range E1, so that the light L that is reflected and passes through the interior of the main body part 151 is It can be made so that it is not affected (the wavelength of light is not changed). As a result, as shown in FIG. 16, the light passing through the main body 151 and emitted from the inclined surface 151a connects the adhesive tape 154a to a portion of the decorative member 154 that is affected by the decoration (a portion where the wavelength is changed). The pasted area E1 (the end of the decorative member 154) can be set as the pasted area E1 (the end of the decorative member 154), and the decoration on the slope 151a that is visually recognized by the player can be easily recognized by the player as being continuous with the adjacent decoration. As a result, the design of the game board 13 can be improved.

Next, the special prize winning device 550 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 17 to 36. First, with reference to FIG. 17, a method of arranging the special prize winning device 550 will be described. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective front view of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIG. 17, the center frame 86 includes a base frame 86a formed in a substantially circular frame shape surrounding the central opening of the base plate 60, and a protruding portion that protrudes radially outward of the base frame 86a. 86b.

The base frame 86a has a shape that follows the central opening of the base plate 60, and a part of the base frame 86a is inserted inside the central opening, and a portion other than the part of the base frame 86a is shaped like the base plate 60. It is disposed on the base plate 60 in a state of protruding toward the front side.

The protruding portion 86b is protruded from the gaming area of the game board 13 to the right side (in the direction of arrow R) when viewed from the front. As a result, the special winning device 550 disposed on the protruding portion 86b can be disposed on the right side (arrow R direction side) when viewed from the front with respect to the gaming area, and when the special gaming state is entered, when hitting right A part of the throwing path of the game ball can be configured by the special winning device 550.

The protruding portion 86b includes an opening 86b1 that opens in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow FB), and is located above the opening 86b1 (in the direction of arrow U) toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B). It mainly includes a recessed portion 86b2.

A part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 86b1. Thereby, the first unit 551 can be connected to the second unit 552 of the special prize winning device 550 disposed on the back side of the protrusion 86b via the opening 86b1.

The recessed portion 86b2 is capable of accommodating a part of the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550, which will be described later. Further, a detection device 86b3 capable of detecting passage of a game ball is disposed in the recess 86b2. Thereby, the game ball passing through the portion accommodated inside the recessed portion 86b2 of the first unit 551 can be detected.

The special winning device 550 includes a first unit 551 disposed on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the protrusion 86b of the center frame 86, and a first unit 551 disposed on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the protrusion 86b. The second unit 552 is configured mainly to include a second unit 552.

The first unit 551 has a space (path) through which a game ball can flow down, and a part of the first unit 551 is disposed in the game area of the game board 13. Further, the first unit 551 is arranged on the center frame 86 by a screw inserted through the second unit 552. Note that a detailed explanation of how to arrange the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 will be given later.

Next, the configuration of the first unit 551 of the special prize winning device 550 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20. 18(a) is a front view of the first unit 551, FIG. 18(b) is a side view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 18(c) is a rear view of the first unit 551. . FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective front view of the first unit 551, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective rear view of the first unit 551.

As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the first unit 551 includes a first path member 560 disposed on the front side and a second path member 570 disposed on the back side of the first path member 560. , and a third path member 580 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570.

The first path member 560 includes a front plate 564 formed in a plate shape along the front side of the game area of the game board 13, and a substantially U-shaped cross section with an open upper side (the side in the direction of arrow U). A first receiving portion 561, a second receiving portion 562, and a third receiving portion 563 protruding from the upper end of the face plate 564 toward the back side, and the first receiving portion 561, second receiving portion 562, and third receiving portion thereof. A first wall portion 565 that is formed continuously on the lower side of the portion 563 (in the direction of arrow D) and extends along a part of the edge of the front plate 564; It mainly includes two sets of a second wall part 566 and a third wall part 567, which are formed in a shape and protrude from two places spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance.

The front plate 564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of the game ball formed between the opposite sides of a second path member 570 or a third path member 580, which will be described later, and is formed from a light-transmitting member. Ru. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 via (through) the front plate 564.

The front plate 564 also includes a guide portion 564a that protrudes toward the second path member 570 side (back side (arrow B direction side)).

The guide portion 564a is a wall portion that prevents the entire wall surface of the front plate 564 from becoming dirty due to game balls flowing down inside the first unit 551, and is connected to a second path member 570 or a third path member 580, which will be described later. The ball is extended along the flow path of the game ball flowing down between the opposing sides of the ball. Further, the guide portion 564a is provided in a protruding manner at a position separated by a radius of the game ball from the rolling surface of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551. In other words, the guide portion 564a is provided protrudingly at approximately the same position as the center position of the game ball flowing down the first path member 560. Thereby, the portion where the front plate 564 and the game ball come into contact can be limited to the protruding tip portion of the guide portion 564a. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of scratches due to contact with the game ball over the entire area of the front plate 564 and the transfer of dirt attached to the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down inside the first path member 560 via the front plate 564 can be easily seen by the player.

The first receiving part 561, the second receiving part 562, and the third receiving part 563 are parts that receive game balls flowing down from the gaming area above the first unit 551 (in the direction of the arrow U) into the inside of the first unit 551. , the opening on the upper side is set to a size larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the first receiving portion 561, the second receiving portion 562, and the third receiving portion 563 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) at the upper end (arrow U direction side) of the front plate 564. Ru.

The first receiving part 561 is set to have a larger receiving width for game balls (width dimension in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction)) than the second receiving part 562 and the third receiving part 563. Thereby, game balls flowing into the special winning device 550 are made easier to flow into the first receiving section 561 than into the second receiving section 562 or the third receiving section 563.

Further, the first receiving portion 561 is communicated with a downstream path formed inside the first unit 551. Thereby, the game balls received in the first receiving section 561 are flown down inside the first unit 551. In addition, the downstream path of the game ball of the first unit 551 will be described later.

The second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 are communicated with a downstream path formed inside the second unit 552, which will be described later. As a result, the game balls received in the second receiving section 562 and the third receiving section 563 are flown down inside the second unit 552. Note that the downstream path of the second unit 552 will be described later.

The first wall portion 565 is an inner wall that forms a space in which a game ball is thrown between opposing fourth wall portions 573 formed in a second path member 570, which will be described later. The first wall portion 565 has one end connected to the lower side of the first receiving portion 561 described above, and the other end connected to the lower side of the second receiving portion 562 and the third receiving portion 563 in the left-right direction (arrow LR). The upper side wall portion 565a extends in the upper side wall portion 565a, and the curved wall portion 565b is curved in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the rear and is connected to the upper side wall portion 565a.

The upper side wall portion 565a is an inner wall that covers the upper side of the rolling surface of the game ball when the game ball rolls on the upper surface (surface in the direction of arrow U) of the fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later. It is formed at a position spaced apart above the diameter of the game ball (in the direction of arrow U) in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the game ball.

The curved wall portion 565b is an inner wall that changes the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573, which will be described later, and is formed at a position facing the rolling side end of the fourth wall portion 573. Ru. Further, the curved wall portion 565b is formed in a semicircular arc shape centered on the rolling side end portion of the fourth wall portion 573. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fourth wall section 573 can be guided to the lower surface side of the fourth wall section 573 by flowing down along the inner wall of the curved wall section 565b, and the ball can be guided to the lower surface side of the fourth wall section 573, and its rolling. The moving direction can be opposite to the rolling direction of the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573.

The second wall portion 566 is an inner wall that forms a space for a path branching from the main flow path of the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551, and is a pair of wall portions that protrude from the back surface of the front plate 564. The opposing distance is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the number of paths flowing down the first unit 551 can be increased.

The third wall portion 567 is a wall portion that forms the inner surface of a path branching from the main throwing path (main path SK3) of the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551, and is provided protruding from the back surface of the front plate 564. The distance between the pair of opposing walls is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the path of the game balls flowing down the first unit 551 can be increased.

Further, the downstream end portions of the second wall portion 566 and the third wall portion 567 are arranged on opposite sides of the first unit 551 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Thereby, the game ball can be thrown to both sides of the first unit 551 in the left-right direction from the branch passage described later.

The second path member 570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 571 facing the front plate 564 of the first path member 560, and a fourth wall portion 573 that protrudes from the front of the base plate 571 toward the first path member 560. a fifth wall 574 protruding from the fourth wall 573 at a predetermined distance downward; and a fifth wall 574 protruding from the fifth wall 574 at a predetermined distance downward. A sixth wall portion 575 is formed.

The base plate 571 is arranged at a position separated from the front plate 564 of the first path member 560 by a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to flow down between the front plate 564 and the base plate 571. The base plate 571 also has a first opening 571a, a second opening 571b, and a third opening 571c that open at positions corresponding to the first receiving section 561, the second receiving section 562, and the third receiving section 563, respectively. a fourth opening 571d opening below the first opening 571a; a fifth opening 571e and a sixth opening 571f opening above the fifth wall 574 and the sixth wall 575, respectively; A recessed portion 571g located between the fifth wall portion 574 and the sixth wall portion 575 and recessed on the back side is provided.

The first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 571c allow game balls to flow into the first receiving section 561, second receiving section 562, and third receiving section 563 of the first path member 560 described above. This is an opening through which the back side of the base plate 571 is passed.

The base plate 571 also includes a first rolling part 576, a second rolling part 577, and a second rolling part 576, which protrudes from the lower end of the first opening 571a, the second opening 571b, and the third opening 571c toward the back side. Three rolling parts 578 are provided. As a result, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is transferred to the third path member 580, which will be described later, and the game ball passing through the second opening 571b or third opening 571c is transferred to the second unit 552, which will be described later. Each ball is thrown.

The first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d are covered with a portion of a third path member 580, which will be described later, on the back side. As a result, the game ball passing through the first opening 571a is thrown toward the front side of the base plate 571 (in the direction of arrow F) from the fourth opening 571d.

The fourth wall portion 573 projects from the base plate 571 along the lower end of the fourth opening 571d and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Further, the fourth wall portion 573 is formed such that its upper surface is inclined downward as it goes from the fourth opening 571d side opened on the left side of the base plate 571 when viewed from the front to the right side when viewed from the front (in the direction of arrow R). . As a result, the game ball thrown to the front side of the base plate 571 through the fourth opening 571d is placed on the upper surface of the fourth wall 573, and the slope of the upper surface of the fourth wall 573 allows the game ball to be thrown toward the front side of the base plate 571. The ball can be thrown to the right side (in the direction of arrow R).

The fifth wall portion 574 is a portion that becomes the rolling surface of the game ball thrown from the curved wall portion 565b of the first wall portion 565, and the game ball is rolled in a direction perpendicular to the lower surface of the fourth wall portion 573. It is provided in a protruding manner at a position spaced apart downwardly from the diameter, and extends in the left-right direction of the base plate 571 (in the direction of the arrow LR). Further, the upper surface (surface on the arrow U direction side) of the fifth wall section slopes downward as it goes from the curved wall section 565b side (arrow R direction side) to the recessed part 574g side (arrow L direction side), which will be described later. It is formed by Thereby, the game ball thrown from the curved wall portion 565b to the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 can be rolled toward the recessed portion 574g side. Further, the fifth wall portion 574 includes a first receiving recess 574a and a second receiving recess 574b that are recessed downward in the rolling surface of the game ball.

The first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are arranged in parallel in the extending direction of the fifth wall 574. Further, the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b are set to have a recessed width and a recessed depth larger than the diameter of the game ball. Furthermore, a fifth opening 571e that opens to the base plate 571 is formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the first receiving recess 574a or the second receiving recess 574b passes through the fifth opening 571e and is thrown to the back side of the base plate 571.

The recessed portion 574g is formed above the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the fifth wall 574, and allows the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the fifth wall 574 to be held in the recessed portion. The ball can be thrown to the upper part of the sixth wall part 575 formed below the recessed part 574g (in the direction of arrow D) while allowing the ball to flow inside the recessed part 574g.

The sixth wall portion 575 is a portion that serves as a rolling surface for the game ball that rolls on the fifth wall portion 574 and is thrown to the recessed portion 574g, and the game ball rolls downward from the lower surface of the fifth wall portion 574. It protrudes from the base plate 571 at a position spaced apart from the diameter of the base plate 571, and extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR) of the base plate 571. Further, the sixth wall portion 575 is formed such that its upper surface is inclined downward from the recessed portion 574g side (arrow L direction side) toward the third wall portion 567 side described above. Thereby, the game ball thrown from the recessed portion 574g to the upper surface of the sixth wall portion 575 can be rolled toward the ball throwing path side formed by the third wall portion 567. Further, the sixth wall portion 575 includes a third receiving recess 575a and a fourth receiving recess 575b that are recessed toward the lower side on the rolling surface of the game ball.

The third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are arranged in parallel in the extending direction of the sixth wall 575. Further, the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b are set to have a recessed width and a recessed depth larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, a sixth opening 571f that opens to the base plate 571 is formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b. As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b pass through the sixth opening 571f and are thrown to the back side of the base plate 571.

The third path member 580 includes a first covering member 581 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side), and a first covering member 581 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the lower side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side). A second covering member 582 disposed on the back surface of the D-direction side), a first drive unit 583 disposed between the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582, and a second covering member 583 disposed on the back surface of the second covering member 582 The second drive unit 584 is disposed on the back side of the member 582.

The first covering member 581 includes a curved portion 581a disposed on the back side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d described above, and a plate-shaped attachment portion 581b continuous to the lower side of the curved portion 581a. , is mainly provided.

The curved portion 581a is curved to have a U-shaped cross section with the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side open, and the first rolling portion 576 is disposed inside the curved portion 581a. (See FIG. 24(a)). Further, the distance between the curved inner wall surface of the curved portion 581a and the protruding tip of the first rolling portion 576 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the first rolling part 576 can be caused to flow down along the inner wall of the curved part 581a, and can be thrown to the lower side of the first rolling part 576. Therefore, by throwing the game ball to the curved portion 581a that curves toward the back side, the rolling time of the game ball can be lengthened. As a result, even if the rolling surface of the game ball cannot be ensured on a plane parallel to the game area of the game board 13, the rolling speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

Furthermore, the lower end of the curved portion 581a is arranged at a position slightly higher than the lower inner edge of the fourth opening 571d. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game ball that has been flown down from the first rolling part 576 along the inner wall of the curved part 581a and thrown into the fourth opening part 571d from flowing backward and flowing into the inside of the curved part 581a.

The attachment portion 581b has two through holes 581b1 through which screws for fastening the first covering member 581 to the back surface of the second path member 570 are inserted. Furthermore, the attachment portion 581b includes a columnar body 551a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side. The columnar body 551a has a screw hole bored at its tip for fastening a second unit 552, which will be described later, to the first unit 551. Thereby, the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be fastened together by screwing a screw inserted from the back side of the second unit 552 into the columnar body 551a.

The second covering member 582 includes a second curved portion 582a disposed on the back side of the sixth opening 571f, and a back side wall portion disposed on the back side of the first receiving recess 574a to fourth receiving recess 575b. 582b.

The second curved portion 582a is curved to have a U-shaped cross section with the sixth opening 571f (second path member 570) side open (see FIG. 24(c)). The second curved portion 582a also includes an upright wall 582a1 on the inside of the U-shape, which is erected from the front side toward the back side. Due to the standing wall 582a1, the internal space of the second curved portion 582a is formed as a first space 582a2 on the left side in front view (arrow L direction side) and next to the first space 582a2 with the standing wall 582a1 in between. It is divided into a second space 582a3 and a second space 582a3.

The first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are spaces larger than the diameter of the game ball, and are formed from the front side to the back side. Further, the first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 are connected on the back side. Further, the inner surface of the first space 582a2 is formed to be inclined downward as it goes toward the back side, and the inner surface of the second space 582a3 is formed to be inclined downward as it goes to the front side. Thereby, the game ball thrown from the recessed part 571g to the second curved part 582a is rolled toward the back side due to the inclination of the first space 582a2, and the second curved part 582a is curved at the end on the back side. The ball is thrown into the second space 582a3, rolled toward the front side by the slope of the second space 582a3, passes through the sixth opening 571f, and is thrown toward the front side of the base plate 571.

The back side wall portion 582b is a ball throwing path that guides game balls that are thrown into the first to fourth receiving recesses 574a to 575b and pass through the fifth opening 571e and the sixth opening 571f below the special prize winning device 550. This is the wall on the back side. Thereby, the game balls thrown into the first to fourth receiving recesses 574a to 575b can be collected. Therefore, the game balls that have been thrown into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, have passed through the detection devices SE3 to SE6, which will be described later, and have given gaming value to the player, flow down the gaming area again, can be prevented from being given to the player again.

The first drive unit 583 includes a first solenoid 583a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-rear direction by electric power, a first variable plate 583b connected to the shaft of the first solenoid 583a, a first solenoid 583a and a first variable plate. It mainly includes a first protection member 583c surrounding the periphery of the protection member 583b.

The first variable plate 583b is a rectangular plate member that is long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and is displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in accordance with the displacement of the shaft of the first solenoid 583a. . In addition, when the first variable plate 583b is extended to the front side, the tip of the first variable plate 583b is inserted into the fifth opening 571e, and the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess are 574b. Thereby, when the first variable plate 583b is extended to the front side, the first variable plate 583b can prevent game balls from flowing into the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b.

The first protection member 583c is formed into a box shape with the second path member 570 side open, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the first solenoid 583a and the first variable plate 583b is disposed inside the first protection member 583c. Further, the first protection member 583c includes a plurality of through holes 583c1 that penetrate in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 583c1 is a portion into which a screw for fastening the first drive unit 583 to the second path member 570 is inserted. The screw inserted through the through hole 583c1 is inserted through the through hole 581b1 of the first covering member 581 or the through hole 582b1 of the second covering member 582, and is inserted into the hole drilled in the second path member 570. Screwed together. Therefore, by disposing the first drive unit 583 on the second path member 570, the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582 can be arranged on the second path member 570. Thereby, the screw fastening portions of the first covering member 581 and the second covering member 582 can be reduced, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, since the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 can be sandwiched between the second path member 570 and the first drive unit 583, the first drive unit 583 can receive a special prize. If the game ball is forcibly removed from the device 550, the connection between the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582 and the second path member 570 is incomplete, and the game ball is removed from the first covering member 581 or the second covering member 582. It is easy to make it impossible to pass through the covering member 582. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state where fraud has been committed.

The second drive unit 584, like the first drive unit 583, includes a second solenoid 584a having a shaft that is displaced in the front-back direction by electric power, and a second variable plate 584b connected to the shaft of the second solenoid 584a. It mainly includes a second protection member 584c that covers the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b.

The second variable plate 584b is formed from a plate-shaped body that is long in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and is bent into a crank shape when viewed from the front. In addition, when the second variable plate 584b is extended to the front side, the tip of the second variable plate 584b is inserted into the sixth opening 571f, and the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575a are inserted. It is arranged above the recess 575b. Thereby, when the second variable plate 584b is extended to the front side, the second variable plate 584b can prevent the game balls from flowing into the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b.

The second protection member 584c is formed into a box shape that is open on the second path member 570 side, and a mechanism for connecting the shaft of the second solenoid 584a and the second variable plate 584b is disposed inside the second protection member 584c. The second protection member 584c also includes a back side wall portion 584c1 that covers the back side of the ball throwing path formed by the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560. Thereby, not only can a throwing path be formed by the back side wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion 566, but also the second path member 570 can be covered by the back side wall portion 584c1 and the second wall portion 566. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent unauthorized members from being inserted from the side of the first unit 551 and tampering with the detection devices SE3 to SE6 disposed on the second path member 570.

Next, the throwing path of the game ball flowing into the first unit 551 from the first receiving portion 561 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXI-XXI in FIG. 18(b). FIG. 22 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 shown in FIG. 21. FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along line XXIII-XXIII in FIG. 18(b). 24(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 21, and FIG. 24(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. FIG. 24(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG. 21.

The game balls flowing into the first unit flow down the game ball main paths SK1 to SK6 in the order of main path SK1, main path SK2, main path SK3, main path SK4, main path SK5, and main path SK6. Alternatively, the water flows from the main route SK3 on the way down the main routes SK1 to SK6 into the sub route HK1 communicating with the main route SK3 and flows down the sub route HK1. Alternatively, the water flows from the main route SK5 on the way down the main route SK1 to SK6 into either the sub route HK2 or the sub route HK3 that communicates with the main route SK5, and flows down either the sub route HK2 or the sub route HK3. do.

In addition, detection devices SE3 to SE6 that detect the passing of game balls are arranged on the sub-paths HK1 to HK3, and the player receives a predetermined gaming value by detecting the game balls by the detection devices SE3 to SE6. Granted. In this embodiment, a game value is awarded to the player based on a predetermined number of prize balls.

As shown in FIGS. 21 to 24, the main path SK1 is formed by the curved portion 581a of the first covering member 581 and the first rolling portion 576 of the second path member 570 (see FIG. 24(a)). The first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d communicate with each other. As described above, the curved portion 581a is curved and formed to have a U-shaped cross section with the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side open, and the game passing through the main path SK1 is The ball can be diverted to the back side. As a result, when the game ball passes through a space with a limited area in front view (the inside of the first opening 571a or the fourth opening 571d), the amount of movement of the game ball in the left and right direction can be reduced. It is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the main path SK1.Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball passing through the first unit 551, thereby increasing the player's interest. can.

In addition, as will be described later, the game balls flowing into the main path SK1 are given a predetermined gaming value to the player, so the rolling of the game balls that may give the player a gaming value is This makes it easier for people to see. As a result, it is possible to easily provide interest to the players. The main path SK1 is in communication with a main path SK2, which will be described later, and allows game balls passing through the main path SK1 to flow into the main path SK2.

Further, the curved portion 581a of the main path SK1 is accommodated in the recessed portion 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86 described above. Thereby, when the main path SK1 is clogged with game balls (flow is slow), the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) can detect the malfunction and notify an error.

Furthermore, the passage width of the main path SK1 is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball and smaller than the opening through which the game ball of the detection devices SE3 to SE7 (see FIG. 23) passes. As a result, if a game ball (illegal game ball) with a diameter larger than the standard game ball diameter (11 mm) is manufactured and an illegal game is performed with that ball, the ball will be sent to the main route. It can be kept inside SK1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent illegal game balls from flowing down to the detection devices SE3 to SE7 arranged downstream of the main path SK1 and from committing fraud. In addition, by keeping the illegal game ball on the main path SK1, it is possible to detect it with the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17) and notify an error (illegality). In addition, fraud in this case means that an illegal game ball is inserted into the opening of any of the detection devices SE3 to SE7, the detection devices SE3 to SE7 continue to detect it, and the illegal game ball is paid out (gaming value). It is to obtain.

The main path SK2 is a space formed between the first wall 565 of the first path member 560 and the fourth wall 573 of the second path member 570. The game balls flowing into the main path SK2 roll on the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 and flow down. As described above, the fourth wall portion 573 extends in the left-right direction (in the direction of the arrow LR) and is formed to be inclined downward as it moves away from the fourth opening portion 571d.

Therefore, the above-mentioned curved portion 581a (the curved path toward the back side) is formed at the switching portion of the throwing direction of the game ball (the connecting portion between the main path SK1 and the main path SK2), so that the player can It is possible to prevent losing sight of the game ball flowing down the SK1. That is, when a path that curves toward the back side is formed in the middle of a straight ball throwing path (for example, main path SK2) extending in the left-right direction, the game ball rolling with a constant acceleration on the curved path Since the acceleration is changed (decreased), the line of sight that was following the game ball may end up ahead of the game ball, which may cause the player to lose sight of the game ball.

On the other hand, since the rolling direction of the game ball is switched and a curved path toward the back side is formed in the part where the rolling speed of the game ball is originally slowed down, the player's line of sight is ahead of the game ball. It is possible to suppress the player from losing sight of the game ball.

In addition, the curved portion 581a, which is the inner wall of the main path SK1, is on the left side (in the direction of the arrow L) of the first unit 551, which is disposed slightly to the right (in the direction of the arrow R) with respect to the center of the game board 13 in the left-right direction. (side end). Therefore, a curved path (main path SK1) to the back side is formed on the side where the first unit 551 is easily visible to the player located in front of the game board 13, so that the player can move from the main path SK1 to the main path SK1. It is possible to easily prevent losing sight of a game ball passing through SK2.

Further, the main route SK2 is communicated with a curved route WK1, and via the curved route WK1, is communicated with a main route SK3, which will be described later. Thereby, the game ball passing through the main path SK2 flows into the main path SK3 via the curved path WK1. Note that a detailed explanation of the curved path WK1 will be given later.

The main path SK3 is a space formed between the fourth wall 573 and the fifth wall 574 of the second path member 570. The game balls flowing into the main path SK3 roll on the upper surface of the fifth wall portion 574 and flow down. Further, on the main path SK3, the first variable plate 583b of the first drive unit 583 described above is projected onto the main path SK3 when extended. In the state where the first variable plate 583b protrudes onto the main path SK3, the game ball rolling on the upper part of the fifth wall portion 574 rolls on the upper surface of the first variable plate 583b and is thrown to the main path SK4. Ru.

On the other hand, when the first variable plate 583b is retracted from above the main path SK3, the sub path HK1 in the space formed inside the first receiving recess 574a and the second receiving recess 574b formed in the fifth wall portion 574 is Game balls are flowed in. The ball is thrown through the secondary path HK1 to the recovery path formed by the back side wall 582b via the fifth opening 571e.

In this way, the first unit 551 is provided with the first variable plate 583b that protrudes onto the throwing path of the game ball or retreats from the throwing path of the game ball, and the displacement of the first variable plate 583b causes the main unit of the first unit 551 to move. Since it is possible to change the case where the game ball flowing down the path SK3 is guided to the sub path HK1 and the case where it is guided to the main path SK4, the direction of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 changes. can be given.

In this case, since the game balls flowing into the sub-route HK1 are given a predetermined gaming value to the player, the player can be made to keep an eye on whether the game balls have flowed into the sub-route HK1. Further, the first variable plate 583b is disposed in the middle of the ball throwing path formed in the first unit 551, and is displaced in the player's viewing direction (arrow FB direction). The displacement of 583b can be made difficult to visually recognize. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game ball flowing down from the first unit 551, and it is possible to easily give the player an interest in the game ball flowing down.

In addition, the sub route HK1 is located below the main route SK3, which throws the game ball from the right side (direction of arrow R) to the left side (direction of arrow L), and the secondary route HK1 is located below the main route SK3, and the game ball is thrown from the left side. It is formed in the fifth wall portion 574 that forms a gap with the main path SK6 for throwing the ball to the right side. Therefore, since the sub-path HK1 is formed using the space between the game balls thrown left and right, it is possible to suppress the external shape of the first unit 551 from increasing in the vertical direction. As a result, by reducing the external size of the first unit 551, it is possible to narrow the range in which the player follows the game ball with his eyes, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551. can.

The main path SK4 is a space formed by the recessed portion 571g and the protrusion 568 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing into the main path SK4 comes into contact with the protrusion 568 and is thrown inside the recessed part 571g (back side), and then rolls around the protrusion 568 along the inner surface of the recessed part and becomes recessed. The ball is thrown to the outside (front side) of the set area. That is, the game ball is rolled so as to bypass the protrusion 568. Moreover, the main path SK4 is connected to the main path SK5, and the game balls passing through the main path SK4 can flow into the main path SK5.

The main path SK5 is a space formed by the first space 582a2 and the second space 582a3 of the second covering member 582 of the third path member 580 described above. The game ball flowing into the main path SK5 rolls inside the first space 582a2 toward the back side as described above, and then rolls inside the second space 582a3 toward the front side. Further, on the main path SK5, the second variable plate 584b of the second drive unit 584 described above projects onto the main path SK5 when extended. In a state where the second variable plate 584b protrudes onto the main path SK5, the game ball rolling inside the second curved portion 582a is thrown to the main path SK6.

On the other hand, when the second variable plate 584b is retracted from above the main path SK5, the sub path HK2 in the space formed inside the third receiving recess 575a and the fourth receiving recess 575b formed in the sixth wall portion 575 is The game ball is thrown down. The ball is thrown into the recovery path formed by the back side wall 582b through the sixth opening 571f through the subpath HK2.

Further, the second curved portion 582a constituting the main path SK5 is formed to be curved toward the back side as described above, and can detour the game ball passing through the main path SK5 to the back side. Thereby, even if the area in front view is set to a predetermined limited space, the distance over which the game ball can roll can be increased.

Further, the second variable plate 584b is configured to be extended or retracted in a part of the upstream side of the main path SK5 and a part of the downstream side of the main path SK5. Since a curved path toward the back side is formed between the upstream side of the main path SK5 and the downstream side of the main path SK5, the time during which a game ball passing through the main path SK5 may provide gaming value to the player is reduced. You can make it longer. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the time for providing interest to the player.

A sub-route HK3 is connected to the communication portion between the main route SK4 and the main route SK5. The sub-pathway HK3 is a space formed between the second wall portion 566 of the first path member 560 and the rear side wall portion 584c1 of the third path member 580, which face each other.

The sub route HK3 is a direction different from the flowing direction of the game ball (the right direction in front view (arrow R direction)) when the game ball flows from the main route SK4 to the main route SK5 (the left direction in front view (arrow L direction)). Further, the lower inner edge of the inlet of the sub-path HK3 is set below the second variable plate 584b (in the direction of arrow D).

Here, when the game ball flows down from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 normally (with no external force other than gravity acting on it), the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the main path SK5 or the sub path HK2. Ru. On the other hand, at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the sub path HK2, the second variable plate 584b is extended, and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b comes into contact with the game ball, causing an external force other than gravity to be applied to the game ball. When the second variable plate 584b acts, the game ball is pushed out to the inlet of the sub-path HK3 and flows into the sub-path HK3.

Therefore, the first unit 551 is provided with a second variable plate 584b that protrudes onto or retreats from the throwing path of the game ball, and the main path SK4 of the first unit 551 is adjusted by the displacement of the second variable plate 584b. Alternatively, since the game balls flowing down the main route SK5 are guided to either the main route SK5, the sub route HK2, or the sub route HK3, it is possible to change the direction of the game balls flowing down the first unit 551.

In this case, a predetermined gaming value is given to the player by the game balls that flow into the sub-route HK2 or HK3, so the player should pay close attention to whether or not the game balls flow into the sub-route HK2 or HK3. can be done. Further, since the second variable plate 584b is disposed in the middle of the ball throwing path formed in the first unit 551, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the plate member 584b2. As a result, the first unit 551 can be made to watch the game balls flowing down, making it easier for the player to enjoy the game balls flowing down.

Further, as described above, on the upstream side across the main path SK4, the path along which the game ball flows is switched by the first variable plate 583b. Therefore, game balls that do not flow into the upstream sub-route HK1 and are not given any gaming value to the player can be made to flow further downstream to the sub-route HK2 or HK3. Therefore, by allowing game balls that once had the possibility of being given gaming value to the player to pass through the switching part of the downstream path, the player can once again have the desire for the game balls to flow into the sub-paths HK2 and HK3. be able to.

Furthermore, a main path SK4 that curves toward the back side is provided between the main path SK3 and the main path SK5 where the path along which the game ball flows is switched. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled within a predetermined range when viewed from the front, making it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball. That is, by having the player recognize the position of the game ball through the main path SK4 after it has flown down the main path SK3, the player can watch the game ball rolling on the main path SK5 connected downstream of the main path SK4. You can easily do it. As a result, the game balls flowing into the sub-paths HK2 and HK3 can be easily seen by the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

Further, at both left and right end portions on the front side of the second variable head 584b, inclined surfaces 584b1 (see FIG. 24(c)) which are inclined toward the back side toward the end portions in the left-right direction are formed. As a result, when the second variable plate 584b is extended at the timing when the game ball flows from the main path SK4 to the sub path HK2 and the tip surface of the second variable plate 584b abuts the game ball, the inclined surface 584b1 This allows the game ball to be pushed out to the inlet side of the sub-path HK3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the second variable plate 584b and the first path member 560 by the inclined surface 584b1 and the sub-route HK2, and the difference in the timing at which the game ball is flown down makes it possible to prevent the game ball from being caught between the second variable plate 584b and the first path member 560. A plurality of routes (three routes in this embodiment) can be formed to switch between the two routes.

The main path SK6 is a space surrounded by the third wall portion 567 of the first path member 560. The game ball flowing down the main path SK6 is thrown to the game area of the game board 13. Therefore, if the game balls that have flowed into the first receiving section 561 do not flow into the first receiving recess 574a to the fourth receiving recess 575b, no gaming value is given to the player, and the game ball is transferred from the main path SK6 to the game board 13. The ball is thrown into the game area and recovered from the out port 71 formed on the game board 13.

<Guiding means for displacing the game ball in the front-back direction>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28, the flow of the game ball from the main path SK2 to the main path SK3 will be explained. 25(a) and 26(a) are partially enlarged views of the first unit 551 in the range XXVa in FIG. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line -XXVb. 27(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXVIIa-XXVIIa in FIG. 25(a), and FIG. 27(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 25(a). 27(c) is a schematic sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXVIIc-XXVIIc in FIG. 25(a). 28(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXVb-XXVb in FIG. 25(a), and FIG. 28(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 551 taken along the line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb in FIG. 551 is a schematic cross-sectional view. In addition, in FIG. 26, a game ball flowing down the curved path WK1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 25 to 28, the main path SK2, the main path SK3, and the curved path WK1 each have a first recess that is recessed in the base plate 571 of the second path member 570 and has an arcuate cross section toward the back side. 571h, a second recess 571i and a third recess 571j, a first step 571k protruding stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK2 to the front side, and a second step protruding stepwise from the inner wall on the main path SK3. 571m.

The front plate 564 of the first path member 560 has a first convex portion 564b, a second convex portion 564c, and a third convex portion 564d at positions facing the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j, respectively. It is installed protrudingly.

A dimension L11 between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c (see FIG. 28(a)) is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a distance between the facing plate 564 and the base plate 571 is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball. is set to a value smaller than the distance dimension L12 (see FIG. 28(a)). As a result, the game ball thrown between the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j and the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d is transferred to the first concave portion. 571h, the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are brought into contact with each other to slow down the rolling (downward) speed of the game ball. can.

Further, the opposing dimension between the first recess 571h and the first protrusion 564b and the opposing dimension between the third recess 571j and the third protrusion 564d are the opposing dimension between the second recess 571i and the second protrusion 564c. The distance is set to be approximately the same as L11.

Further, the protruding tip surfaces of the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d face the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. The distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28(a)) between them is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball thrown between the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j and the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d is placed in the first convex portion. It can be made to collide with the portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d. As a result, the rolling (downward) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

In addition, in this case, the game balls that have come into contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are flown down inside the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j. . Therefore, the game ball flowing down can be guided in the recessed direction of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j.

The stepped portion 571k projects from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK2 toward the front side. Furthermore, the stepped portion 571k is formed on the downstream side of the main route SK2. The stepped portion 571k is set such that the upstream end of the main path SK2 protrudes from the front of the base plate 571 to the front side, and the downstream end is located at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. Set. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be brought into contact with the stepped portion 571k and moved toward the front side.

Further, the step portion 571k is formed as an inclined surface whose upstream end protrudes toward the front side from the upstream side toward the downstream side. Thereby, the game ball that flows down the main path SK2 and comes into contact with the upstream end of the stepped portion 571k can be guided to the front side and flowed down to the downstream side.

Furthermore, the upstream end of the stepped portion 571k is formed upstream of the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564 in the main path SK2. Thereby, the game ball that comes into contact with the stepped portion 571k and is guided to the front side can easily come into contact with the first convex portion 564b.

The first recess 571h is recessed in the base plate 571 constituting the main path SK2, and is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) when viewed from the front. Further, the first recess 571h is formed in the base plate 571 at a position projected toward the front side by the stepped portion 571k. The depth of the first recess 571h toward the back side at the center in the vertical direction is set to be substantially the same as the height L22 of the stepped portion 571k toward the front side (see FIG. 27(b)). As a result, the game ball that is thrown smoothly along the main path SK2 is allowed to flow into the inside of the first recess 571h without being displaced in the recessed direction (back side (direction of arrow B)) of the first recess 571h. be able to.

On the other hand, the game ball that is thrown down the main path SK2 in a wild state is brought into contact with the upstream end of the stepped portion 571k, guided to the front side of the main path SK2, and is guided to the front side of the main path SK2 to form the first convex portion of the front plate 564. 564b. Thereby, the game ball can be thrown inside the first recess 571h while suppressing the wild movement of the game ball.

Furthermore, the first recessed portion 571h has a height dimension Y8 ( 25(a)) is set to the radius of the game ball, and the concavity in the direction perpendicular to the rolling surface of the game ball (the surface on the arrow U direction side of the fourth wall portion 573) on the downstream side of the main path SK2. The height dimension Y9 (see FIG. 25(a)) to the bottom surface is set higher than the radius of the game ball. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 is thrown along the first recess 571h, resistance in the direction of lifting upward in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow U) is applied to the game ball, causing the game ball to roll. The moving speed can be reduced. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball flowing into the curved path WK1 can be made sufficiently small, and the game ball can be made to flow down smoothly.

The radius X11 (see FIG. 27(b)) in the cross section of the first recess 571h is set to a value larger than the radius of the game ball, so that when the game ball is thrown inside the first recess 571h, A game ball can be brought into contact with the inner wall. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the number of contact portions of the game ball that contacts the first recessed portion 571h from becoming two, and it is possible to suppress an increase in resistance to rolling of the game ball due to an increase in the number of contact portions. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from stopping on the main path SK2.

The first convex portion 564b formed at a position facing the first concave portion 571h is directed from the upstream end of the first concave portion 571h to the throwing direction of the game ball along the main path SK2 (direction of arrow R in FIG. 27(b)). The balls are formed at positions spaced apart from each other, and the distance value is set to be smaller than the radius of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b and can be easily thrown inside the first recessed portion 571h.

The second recess 571i is recessed in the base plate 571 of the curved path WK1, and has an elliptical outer shape that is elongated in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction) when viewed from the front. Further, the center position of the second recessed portion 571i in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) when viewed from the front is set at an intermediate position of the curved path WK1. Furthermore, the second recess 571i is formed at a center position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in a front view in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the curved path WK1.

In addition, the main path SK1, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK2 are all set to have the same width dimension L18 (see FIG. 25(a)) that is perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball when viewed from the front. The width dimension L18 is set to approximately 1.1 times the diameter of the game ball.

Further, the maximum width of the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j in the transverse direction when viewed from the front is set to approximately 1/2 of the width L18 described above. As a result, the center of the game ball passing through each path (main path SK1, curved path WK1, and main path SK2) can be caused to pass through the front side of the first recess 571h, second recess 571i, and third recess 571j. , it is possible to easily throw the game ball inside the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j.

The stepped portion 571m projects from the inner wall on the back side of the main path SK3 toward the front side. Furthermore, the stepped portion 571m is formed on the upstream side of the main route SK3. The stepped portion 571m has a downstream end of the main path SK3 set at a position protruding toward the front side of the base plate 571, and an upstream end set at the same position as the back surface of the curved path WK1. Ru. Thereby, after the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 is thrown downstream from the stepped portion 571m, it can be suppressed from flowing backward (rebounding) beyond the stepped portion 571m to the upstream side.

The third recess 571j is formed in the base plate 571 constituting the inner wall of the main path SK3, and is formed in an elliptical shape that is long in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) when viewed from the front. Further, the third recess 571j is formed in the base plate 571 at a position projected toward the front side by the stepped portion 571m. The depth of the third recess 571j toward the back side at the center in the vertical direction is set to be substantially the same as the height L23 of the stepped portion 571m toward the front side (see FIG. 27(c)). Thereby, the game ball thrown along the main path KR3 can easily flow out from the inside of the third recess 571j to the outside.

Further, the end of the third recess 571j on the downstream side of the main path SK3 is the same as the end of the first variable plate 583b on the upstream side of the main path SK3 (on the arrow R direction side end) in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow U). As a result, when the stop position of the first variable plate 583b shifts upward in the direction of gravity due to the displacement (when the first variable plate 583b is disposed above the downstream end of the curved wall portion 565b), By throwing the game ball passing through the main path SK3 along the inner surface of the third recess 571j, the ball can be thrown without being caught by the first variable plate 583b. As a result, in the portion where the first wall portion 565 and the first variable plate 583b are adjacent to each other, it is no longer necessary to arrange the first variable plate 583b downward, and it is possible to suppress the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 from increasing. .

Furthermore, in this case, the third recess 571j has its longitudinal direction in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) when viewed from the front, and is spaced upward from the game ball flowing down the main path SK3. , it is possible to apply resistance in an upward lifting direction to the game ball thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b. As a result, the game ball thrown from the first wall portion 565 to the first variable plate 583b can be prevented from being caught on the first variable plate 583b.

Furthermore, the first unit 551 has a main path SK2 for throwing the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction (arrow R direction side) with respect to the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and a main path SK2 for throwing the game ball from the main path SK2. The curved route WK1 includes a main route SK3 that throws the ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the main route SK2, and a curved route WK1 that connects one side of the main route SK2 and the main route SK3. Since guide means (second convex portion 564c and second recess 571i) for throwing the game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side with respect to the game board are provided on the inner walls of the front side and the back side with respect to the game board, The game ball passing through the curved path WK1 can be moved to the front side or the back side (the front-rear direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front).

Therefore, compared to the case where the throwing path of the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 is formed on the same plane in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, the game ball accelerated by rolling on the main path SK2 (first path) flows downward. You can slow down the speed. Therefore, since the falling speed of the game ball can be reduced, the game ball that collided with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 returns to the main path SK2, or the ball throw direction (horizontal direction in front view) of the main path SK2 inside the curved path WK1. Shaking (shaking) in the direction of arrow LR) can be suppressed. This allows the player's line of sight to follow the game ball passing through the curved path WK1 in a fixed direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown onto the curved path WK1.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from swinging (shaking) in the horizontal direction (left and right direction when viewed from the front) with respect to the game board 13 when viewed from the front, the curved path WK1 connecting the main path SK2 and the main path SK3 is There is no need to lengthen the path to suppress swinging of the game ball, and the curved path WK1 can be shortened. As a result, the first unit 551 can be accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board 13, and a space for disposing the first unit 551 with respect to the game board 13 can be secured.

Further, the width of the first recess 571h is increased toward the upstream side of the main path SK2 in a direction perpendicular to the downstream direction of the main path SK2 (in the direction of the arrow UD). Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily received into the first recess 571h. Furthermore, since the first recess 571h is set to have a smaller recess width toward the downstream side of the main path SK2, the game ball received in the first recess 571h can easily escape from the same position. That is, the first recess 571h can easily receive the game ball on the upstream side of the main path SK2, and can easily allow the game ball to escape from the same position on the downstream side of the main path SK2. As a result, it is possible to easily throw the game ball to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1 communicating downstream of the main path SK2.

In this case, the concave end of the first concave portion 571h in the downstream direction (direction of arrow R) of the main path SK2 is the rolling surface (the fourth The upper surface of the wall portion 573 is formed at a position exceeding the upper surface of the wall portion 573. Therefore, the game ball that escapes from the first recess 571h can be made less susceptible to the influence of the rolling surface of the main path SK2. As a result, the game ball that has come out of the first recess 571h can be easily thrown to the second recess 571i of the curved path WK1.

Moreover, the main path SK2 extends from the fourth opening 571d side toward the curved wall portion 565b side (that is, from the left side in front view (arrow L direction side) to the right side in front view (arrow R direction side)). The space is formed to be inclined toward the front plate 564 side (front side (direction side of arrow F)). Further, the main path SK2 is formed such that its rolling surface (the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573 in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the front side. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be easily rolled on the front plate 564 side, and the game ball can be easily brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b formed on the front plate 564. As a result, the rolling speed of the game ball can be easily slowed down by the first convex portion 564b, and the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be prevented from flowing backward through the main path SK2 due to the reaction force of colliding with the curved wall portion 565b. . As a result, the game ball can be stably flowed down at the point where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed.

The upper end (end in the direction of arrow U) of the second recess 571i is drawn in a straight line along the rolling locus of the center of the game ball rolling on the main path SK2 (fourth wall portion 573). It is formed at a position in contact with the virtual line IL3 (see FIG. 25(a)). Thereby, it is possible to easily receive the game ball thrown through the main path SK2 at a relatively high speed and flowing into the curved path WK1 into the second recess 571i.

A second concave portion 571i and a second convex portion 564c are formed at the location where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed (curved path WK1). As described above, the front surface of the base plate 571 excluding the protruding tip surfaces of the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d, and the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j Since the distance dimension L13 (see FIG. 28(a)) between the opposing sides is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball flowing down between the second concave portion 571i and the second convex portion 564c is It can be pushed into the second recess 571i in contact with the protrusion 564c. Therefore, the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 (coming out from between the second recess 571i and the second convex part 564c) can be made to flow down along the arc of the inner surface of the second recess 571i.

Here, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 tends to flow down a position closer to the rolling direction of the game ball on the main path SK2. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the inside of the second recess 571i comes into contact with the inner surface of the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second recess 571i when viewed from the front, and flows down. Therefore, the throwing direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be easily directed in the downstream direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the curved wall portion 565b and temporarily stopping the flow of the game ball at the point where the throwing direction of the game ball is changed (see FIG. 28).

Furthermore, since the throwing direction of the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 can be directed toward the downstream direction of the main path SK3, the force with which the game ball collides with the curved wall portion 565b can be reduced. I can do it. As a result, damage to the curved wall portion 565b due to repeated collisions of game balls with the curved wall portion 565b can be suppressed.

Further, the first convex portion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and the first recess 571h is formed on the second path member 570 disposed on the back side.

Here, if a recessed portion (corresponding to the first recessed portion 571h of the second path member 570) is formed in the first path member 560 toward the front side, the first path member 560 It is necessary to increase the thickness of the plate. Therefore, as the thickness of the first path member 560 increases, the transparency of the first path member 560 deteriorates, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the first unit 551.

Furthermore, if a recessed portion is formed on the back side of the bulging portion that partially bulges out on the front side of the first path member 560, the game board 13 It is necessary to increase the gap between the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) disposed on the front side of the glass unit. Therefore, as the first path member 560 moves away from the glass unit 16, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560.

On the other hand, the first protrusion 564b is formed on the first path member 560 disposed on the front side, and the first recess 571h is formed on the second path member 570 disposed on the back side. , the thickness of the first path member 560 disposed on the front side can be reduced. Moreover, since a portion that partially protrudes from the front side of the first path member 560 is not formed, the first path member 560 can be disposed close to the glass unit 16. As a result, the game ball passing through the inside of the first path member 560 can be easily recognized by the player.

The second convex portion 564c is located below the main path SK2 (the upper surface of the fourth wall portion 573) in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow D), and descends in substantially the same direction as the rolling direction of the main path SK2 when viewed from the front. Formed at an angle. As a result, the game ball flowing down between the opposing portions of the second convex portion 564c and the second concave portion 571i is guided to the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second concave portion 571i when viewed from the front due to the inclination of the second convex portion 564c. can do. As described above, the second recess 571i is formed with a curved recessed surface, so that it abuts the inside of the area on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the second recess 571i when viewed from the front and prevents the falling game ball. The ball can be thrown toward the downstream direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall portion 565b side to the recessed portion 571g (see FIG. 21) side). As a result, the game balls can smoothly flow from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.

In addition, the second recessed portion 571i has an end on the lower side (arrow D direction side) when viewed from the front as an imaginary line IL4 ( (see FIG. 25(a)). Thereby, the height of the center of the game ball discharged from the downstream end of the second recessed portion 571i can be set on the virtual line IL4. As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball discharged from the second recess 571i is thrown in the downstream direction of the main path SK3 (from the curved wall 565b side to the recessed part 571g (see FIG. 21) side). Therefore, the game ball ejected from the second recess 571i comes into contact with the inner surface of the main path SK3 or the curved path WK1, and the game ball thrown to the main path SK3 collides with the inner wall of the curved path WK1. It is possible to suppress stagnation inside those routes.

Therefore, the downward direction of the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 can be directed to the throwing direction of the main path SK3 at a position close to the rolling surface of the main path SK3. Thereby, the game ball flowing into the main path SK3 from the curved path WK1 can be suppressed from being thrown in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. As a result, the game ball thrown to the main path SK3 can be prevented from colliding with the inner wall of the curved path WK1 and becoming stagnant.

<Disposing the first member that provides high gaming value on the front side>
Next, the configuration of the second unit 552 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. 29(a) is a front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 29(b) is a rear view of the second unit 552. 30 is an exploded perspective front view of the second unit 552, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second unit 552.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 31, the second unit 552 includes a fourth path member 610 disposed on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) and a fourth path member 610 disposed on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)). A throwing path for a game ball is formed between a fifth path member 620 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and a fifth path member 620 disposed on the back side of the fifth path member 620 facing the fifth path member 620. The second unit 552 mainly includes a sixth path member 630 and a decorative member 650 disposed on the side surface of the second unit 552.

The fourth path member 610 is attached to the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the first unit 551 via the center frame 86 described above. The fourth path member 610 also includes a mounting plate 611 formed in a plate shape with a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a mounting plate 611 that stands upright from the end of the mounting plate 611 toward the first unit 551 (front side (direction of arrow F)). A first communicating path 615 and a second communicating path 616 whose internal spaces communicate with the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578 of the first unit 551 are provided.

The mounting plate 611 includes an insertion portion 617 recessed in a circular shape on the first unit 551 side (front side (arrow F direction side)) and a through hole formed in the bottom of the recess, and a fifth path member 620. A path-side fastening part 618 and a decorative-side fastening part 619 that protrude in a circular shape on the side (back side (arrow B direction side)) and have a hole into which a screw is screwed on the protruding tip surface, and The plate 611 includes an opening 613 opened in the center and a second insertion part 614 opened outside the opening 613.

The insertion portions 617 are portions through which the tips of screws for fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are inserted, and are formed at multiple locations (in this embodiment, three locations) on the mounting plate 611.

The path-side fastening portion 618 is a portion into which a screw inserted into an insertion hole 632 of a sixth path member 630 (described later) is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the insertion hole 632. Thereby, the sixth path member 630 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The decoration-side fastening portion 619 is a portion into which a screw inserted into a fastening hole 652 formed in a decorative member 650 (described later) is screwed, and is formed at a position facing the fastening hole 652. Thereby, the decorative member 650 can be fastened to the fourth path member 610.

The opening 613 is formed at a position facing the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged in the first unit 551. Thereby, when the fourth path member 610 is disposed on the back surface of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be disposed inside the opening 613. Therefore, when the fourth path member 610 is disposed on the back surface of the first unit 551, it is possible to suppress the fourth path member 610 from increasing in the front-rear direction, and to protect the periphery of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a. It can be surrounded by a fourth path member 610.

The first communication passage 615 and the second communication passage 616 are formed in a U-shape with an open upper side (arrow U direction side) when viewed from the front, and extend in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). . In addition, the first communicating path 615 and the second communicating path 616 have front end portions in contact with the back sides of the second rolling portion 577 and third rolling portion 578 of the first unit 551, and The side end is brought into contact with the front side of the end of a first inlet 625 and a second inlet 626 of a fifth path member 620, which will be described later. Further, the first communicating path 615 and the second communicating path 616 are formed to be inclined downward from the first unit 551 side toward the fifth path member 620. Thereby, the game balls thrown from the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578 of the first unit 551 to the first communicating path 615 and the second communicating path 616 are transferred to the first communicating path 615 and the second communicating path 616. The communication passage 616 can be rolled to flow into the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 of the fifth path member 620 .

The second insertion part 614 is a hole through which a screw is inserted, which is screwed into the screw hole 86b4 of the protruding part 86b when the fourth path member 610 is fastened to the protruding part 86b of the center frame 86. It is formed at a position corresponding to a screw hole 86b4 (see FIG. 35) formed in 86b. Thereby, the fourth path member 610 can be disposed on the back surface of the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86.

When the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened together, the side wall portion 612 connects the side surface of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the first unit 551. It is a plate member that covers the side surface of the mounting plate 611, and is erected from the entire end portion of the mounting plate 611 to the first unit 551 side (front side (direction side of arrow F)). Note that the length of the side wall portion 612 erected toward the front side (first unit 551 side) is set to a length such that the side wall portion 612 comes into contact with the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86. As a result, the side wall portion 612 is disposed between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, so that it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552. As a result, it is possible to prevent illegal objects from being inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

The fifth path member 620 includes a plate member 621 formed from a substantially rectangular plate when viewed from the front, a first inlet 625 and a second inlet 626 opened in the plate member 621, and a periphery of the second inlet 626. A second standing wall 623 that extends from the periphery of the first inlet 625 to the sixth path member 630 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) extends downward from the second inlet 626 . The first standing wall 624 that extends below the inlet 625 and stands on the sixth path member 630 side, and the fastened portion 627 that protrudes from the plate member 621 on the sixth path member 630 side. Prepare for.

The plate member 621 is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the outer shape of the fourth path member 610 when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the fourth path member 610. The plate member 621 also includes a central opening 622 that is opened at the center when viewed from the front. This central opening 622 is formed larger than the outer shape of the second solenoid 584a in rear view, and is formed at a position corresponding to the second solenoid 584a. As a result, when the plate member 621 (fifth path member 620) is arranged on the back side of the fourth path member 610, the second solenoid 584a inserted through the inside of the opening 613 of the fourth path member 610 is placed in the center. It can be placed inside the opening 622.

As described above, the first inlet 625 and the second inlet 626 connect the game balls that interlock the first communicating path 615 and the second communicating path 616 of the fourth path member 610 to the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member. 630 (opening for inflow).

The fastened portion 627 is a portion into which the tip of a screw inserted through a fastening hole 633 formed in a sixth path member 630 (described later) is screwed into the fastened portion 627, and is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 633. Thereby, the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are fastened together. Further, the protrusion dimension of the fastened portion 627 toward the sixth path member 630 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a gap is formed between the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 in which the game ball can flow down.

The first standing wall 624 is a wall that guides game balls flowing from the first inflow port 625 between the opposing fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630, and extends downward. It is connected to the second standing wall 623. The second standing wall 623 is a wall that guides the game balls flowing into the fifth path member 620 from the second inlet, and extends in the vertical direction of the plate member 621. Note that the ball throwing path formed by the first erected wall 624 and the second erected wall 623 will be described later.

The sixth path member 630 includes a base plate 631 formed from a substantially rectangular plate when viewed from the front, and a second central opening 634 opened in the base plate 631 at a position facing the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620. and an insertion hole 632 and a fastening hole 633 formed around the second central opening 634 of the base plate 631.

The second central opening 634 is formed to have approximately the same size as the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 when viewed from the front, and when the fifth path member 620 and the sixth path member 630 are combined, It communicates with the central opening 622 of the fifth path member 620 . Thereby, when the second unit 552 is arranged on the back side of the first unit 551, the first solenoid 583a of the first unit 551 can be arranged inside the second central opening 634.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the ball throwing path formed by the fifth path member 620 will be described. FIG. 32 is a sectional view of the second unit 552 taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 29.

As shown in FIG. 32, the second unit 552 is formed by being surrounded by the sub-path HK4 surrounded by the first erected wall 624 of the fifth path member 620, and by the second erected wall 623. and a sub-route HK5.

The sub-path HK4 extends downward from the first inlet 625, is bent toward a sub-path HK5, which will be described later, and communicates with the sub-path HK5. Furthermore, a detection device SE7 for detecting passage of a game ball is disposed in a downwardly extending portion of the sub-route HK4. Thereby, it is possible to detect that the game ball has passed through the sub-route HK4. Further, when the detection device SE7 detects passage of the game ball, a predetermined game value is given to the player (in this embodiment, a prize ball of the game ball).

In the present embodiment, the number of game balls awarded to the player (for example, 3) as the game balls pass through the detection device SE7 is determined by the detection device SE3 disposed in the first unit 551. - The number of game balls awarded to the player as the game balls pass through SE6 (for example, 15 balls) is reduced. That is, the gaming value given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection device SE7 is given to the player as the game ball passes through the detection devices SE3 to SE6 disposed in the first unit 551. The game value is set higher than the game value. This makes it easier to draw attention to the game ball passing through the first unit 551. As a result, it is possible to easily provide interest to the players.

The auxiliary path HK5 extends downward from the second inlet 626 and communicates with the recovery path of the pachinko machine 10 below the second unit 552. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the sub-route HK5 are collected without giving any game value to the player. In addition, the game balls flowing down the sub-route HK4 and detected by the detection device SE7 are thrown to the sub-route HK5 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

The special winning device 550 also includes a first unit 551 made of a light-transmissible material and disposed on the front side of the gaming area, and a second unit disposed on the back side of the first unit 551. 552, the first unit 551 includes a first receiving section 561 into which game balls can be inserted, and the second unit 552 includes a second receiving section 562 and a third receiving section into which game balls can enter. 563, the game balls that enter the first receiving section 561 have a higher gaming value to the player (payout of game balls) than the game balls that enter the second receiving section 562 and the third receiving section 563. will be granted.

Therefore, the routing of the ball throwing paths of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is complicated (for example, the ball throwing path of the first unit 551 and the ball throwing path of the second unit 552 are Compared to the case where the game balls flow down the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 at the same timing, it is easier for the player to watch the game balls flowing down the first unit 551. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 including the first receiving portion 561 having a high gaming value. As a result, the player can see the game ball passing through a path that provides a high gaming value to the player, making it easier to increase the player's interest.

In addition, there is an inlet (first receiving part 561) of the ball throwing route for throwing the game ball to the first unit 551, and an inlet of the ball throwing route (the second receiving part 562 and the third receiving part 561) for throwing the game ball to the second unit 552. The receiving portions 563) are formed at adjacent positions, so whether the game ball flows into the first unit 551 where a high game value is given, or into the second unit 552 where a low game value is given, the game ball It is possible to make it difficult for the player to make a judgment until the inflow occurs. As a result, it is possible to easily keep the player interested until just before the game balls flow into the special winning device 550.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, the arrangement state of the special prize winning device 550 on the center frame 86 will be described. 33(a) is a front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 33(b) is a side view of the center frame 86. 34(a) is a perspective front view of the center frame 86, and FIG. 34(b) is a perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective rear view of the center frame 86. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86 taken along the line XXXVI-XXXVI in FIG. 33. 37(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 37(b) is a schematic exploded cross-sectional view of the game board 13. Note that FIGS. 37(a) and 37(b) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 36.

<Fixing means for biasing the first member toward the base member>
As shown in FIGS. 33 to 37, the special winning device 550 includes a first unit 551 that is removable on the front side of the center frame 86 and a removable first unit 551 on the back side of the center frame 86, with the center frame 86 in between. A possible second unit.

The first unit 551 is mounted on the front side of the protrusion 86b with the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a disposed on the back side of the first unit 551 inserted into the opening 86b1 of the center frame 86. will be placed in Further, the first unit 551 includes a columnar body 551a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the second unit 552 side.

The columnar body 551a is formed at a position facing the insertion portion 617 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552, and has a hole at its tip into which a screw inserted through the insertion portion 617 is screwed.

The first unit 551 is fixed to the center frame 86 by screws inserted into the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 formed in the fourth path member 610 of the second unit 552. To explain in detail, the first unit 551 is disposed with the protrusion 86b of the center frame 86 interposed between the first unit 551 and the fourth path member 610 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side). Further, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 by screwing a screw inserted through the insertion portion 617 of the fourth path member 610 into the columnar body 551a.

Further, in a state where the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened together, the screw inserted into the second insertion part 614 formed in the second unit 552 is inserted into the screw hole 86b4 ( (see FIG. 35), the protruding portion 86b and the fourth path member 610 can be fastened together. As described above, the fourth path member 610 and the first unit 551 are fastened and fixed, so when the fourth path member 610 is fastened to the protrusion 86b, the first unit 551 is connected to the protrusion 86b. It will be concluded against.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37, the vertical opening dimension Y1 (see FIG. 37(b)) of the first opening 60a of the base plate 60 is the vertical dimension of the first unit 551 (second path member 570). It is set slightly smaller than Y2 (see FIG. 37(b)). Further, the distance dimension Y4 (see FIG. 37(b)) from the contact surface of the first unit 551 with the front surface of the base plate 60 to the contact surface of the second unit 552 with the base plate 60 is When the second unit 551 and the second unit 552 are fastened together, the thickness is set to be slightly smaller than the thickness Y3 of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 37(b)).

Thereby, when the first unit 551, the second unit, and 552 are fastened together, the first unit 551 can be urged toward the base plate 60 side (back side). Therefore, formation of a gap between the front surface of the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to fasten the first unit 551 with screws from the front side of the base plate 60, and the screw fastening allowance is not required on the front side of the first unit 551. The area on the front side can be used as a throwing space for game balls. As a result, a throwing space for the game ball formed in the first unit 551 can be secured.

Further, since the fastening part (column 551a) between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is formed protruding from the back side of the first unit 551, when the fastening part is formed on the front side of the base plate 60, Compared to the above, it is possible to secure a throwing space for the game ball formed in the first unit 551.

Further, since the second unit 552 can be biased toward the base plate 60 (front side), it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the second unit 552 and the base plate 60. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wire or piano wire from being inserted between the opposing sides of the second unit 552 and the base plate 60, thereby preventing the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551 from being tampered with. can.

Furthermore, since the first unit 551 is disposed on the base plate 60 with screws inserted from the back side of the base plate 60, the front side of the first unit 551 has a fastening allowance (screws are inserted) with the base plate 60. This eliminates the need to form an extended portion (in which an opening is formed). As a result, the entire area of the outer shape of the first unit 551 when viewed from the front can be used as a throwing path, and the throwing path of the first unit 551 can be enlarged.

In addition, since the fastening part between the base board 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base board 60, the fastening part between the base board 60 and the first unit 551 can be removed due to fraud from the front side of the game board 13. It is possible to prevent this from happening. As a result, unauthorized access to the first unit 551 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the connecting portion between the base plate 60 and the first unit 551 is on the back side of the base plate 60, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the head of the screw. As a result, since the player recognizes the configuration for fixing the first unit 551 to the base plate 60, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Further, the first unit 551 is disposed on the base plate 60 in a state where it is biased toward the back side of the base plate 60 by the fixing means (screws) fastened from the back side of the base plate 60. The biasing force acting on the first unit 551 toward the rear side allows the first unit 551 and the base plate 60 to be disposed in close contact with each other.

Furthermore, since the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are arranged in the center frame 86 in a state where a ball throwing path capable of throwing a game ball is formed in each of them, the ball throwing path of the first unit 551 and the second The throwing path of the unit 552 can be prevented from being deviated when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are assembled. As a result, the game balls flowing down inside the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 can be prevented from stopping in the ball throwing paths of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552.

Further, the first unit 551 includes a rolling surface (a second rolling part 577 and a third rolling part 578) for causing the game ball thrown to the first unit 551 to flow into the second unit 552. Therefore, if each of the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is fastened to the protruding portion 86b of the center frame 86, an error in assembling the first unit 551 to the center frame 86 will occur, and the first There was a risk that the game ball would not be smoothly thrown from the unit 551 to the second unit 552.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the first unit 551 is fastened to the second unit 552 as described above, so that the error when fastening the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 is minimized (when fastened The location where errors occur can be minimized. As a result, the game ball can be smoothly thrown from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552.

The fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610 are arranged at positions overlapping with at least a portion of the insertion portion 617 and the second insertion portion 614 of the fourth path member 610 in rear view. . Accordingly, the first unit 551 can be removed from the center frame 86 only after removing the fifth and sixth path members 620 and 630 fastened to the fourth path member 610. This can prevent the first unit 551 forming the main routes SK1 to SK6 from being removed from the center frame 86 and tampering with the main routes SK1 to SK6.

Further, the protruding portion 86b includes an upright portion 86b5 that stands on the second unit 552 side (folds back) at the end (see FIG. 33(b)). As a result, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86 with the protrusion 86b of the center frame 86 in between, the upright portion 86b5 of the first unit 551 It surrounds the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a which are arranged on the back side.

Therefore, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86, it is possible to prevent an illegal object such as a wire or piano wire from being inserted between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 facing each other. It can be suppressed. As a result, with the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 disposed on the center frame 86, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a of the first unit 551.

Further, between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, a portion of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is disposed, and an upright portion 86b5 is interposed. Therefore, a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be disposed using the space in which the upright portion 86b5 is disposed. Therefore, since a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is accommodated between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are placed on the back side. Protrusion can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to easily surround the back sides of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a with the second unit 552, thereby preventing unauthorized access to the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from the back side. 2 unit 552.

Furthermore, since a part of the front side of the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a is disposed between the first unit 551 and the second unit 552, the game balls flowing down the second unit 552 are It can be hidden by the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a to make it difficult to see from the player side. As a result, even if the flow line of the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 and the flow line of the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 overlap in front view, the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 can be This can be easily seen by players. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first unit 551 that gives the player a higher gaming value than the game ball flowing down the second unit 552 can be visually recognized by the player. This makes it easier for players to enjoy the game.

Further, when the first unit 551 and the second unit 552 are disposed on the center frame 86, the decorative member 650 is disposed to cover the inner side surface of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86. Thereby, it is possible to prevent illegal objects such as wires and piano wires from being inserted into the special prize winning device 550 through (through) the opening of the base frame 86a of the center frame 86.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the first solenoid 583a disposed in the first unit 551 has a central opening formed in the fourth path member 610 and the fifth path member 620 of the second unit 552 on the back side. 622 and inside the second central opening 634 . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the second unit 552 from expanding toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B), and it is also possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires from accessing the first solenoid 583a.

Further, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the second unit 552, it is possible to suppress the second path member 570 of the first unit 551, in which the first solenoid 583a is disposed, from being bent. As a result, the passage of the game ball through the first unit 551 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, as described above, since the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a are surrounded and arranged in the opening 86b1 of the protrusion 86b formed in the center frame 86, the load is relatively large (heavy). The first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a can be supported by the opening 86b1 (projection 86b). As a result, the protruding portion 86b can be prevented from bending due to the load of the special prize winning device 550.

Therefore, since the center frame 86 disposed on the base plate 60 can be suppressed from bending (bending), the position of the first unit 551 disposed on the center frame 86 is misaligned with respect to the base plate 60. can be suppressed. As a result, game balls can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

Further, the second rolling part 577 and the third rolling part 578, which throw the game ball from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552, are formed outside the opening 86b1 of the protruding part 86b. As a result, the rolling of the game ball thrown from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 is inhibited by the electromagnetic force generated by driving the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a arranged inside the opening 86b1. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In other words, the protrusion 86b can prevent the electromagnetic force generated by driving the first solenoid 583a and the second solenoid 584a from acting on the outside of the protrusion 86b. As a result, the throwing of game balls from the first unit 551 to the second unit 552 can be stabilized.

As described above, the first solenoid 583a is disposed with its rear side inserted into the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552. Thereby, the wiring of the detection devices SE3 to SE6 of the first unit 551 and the first solenoid 583a can be inserted through the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634. Further, since the wiring can be arranged along the first solenoid 583a, it is possible to suppress the wiring from becoming tangled.

Furthermore, since the load of the first solenoid 583a can be supported by the central opening 622 and the second central opening 634 of the second unit 552, the protrusion 86b on which the first unit 551 is disposed does not bend. can be suppressed. Therefore, since the center frame 86 disposed on the base plate 60 can be prevented from bending (flexing), the position of the first unit 551 disposed on the center frame 86 can be prevented from shifting with respect to the base plate 60. It can be suppressed. As a result, game balls can be smoothly flowed from the game area of the game board 13 into the first unit 551 (special winning device 550).

<Displacement member for arranging the fixing member of the board unit on the back member>
Next, the connection structure between the rear case 300 and the board box 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42. First, the structure of the back case 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

38(a) is a front view of the rear case 300, and FIG. 38(b) is a rear view of the rear case 300. 39(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the rear case 300, and FIG. 39(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the rear case 300.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the rear case 300 includes an engaging member 310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 301, and It mainly includes a fixing member 320 that is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the case 300 and fixes the above-described board box 100 (main controller 110).

The rear case 300 also includes a protrusion 301b that protrudes from two places on the front side of the bottom wall 301, a first opening 301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. A second opening 301d that opens at an opposing position is provided.

The protrusion 301b is a shaft for holding the engagement member 310 in a slidable state, and is inserted inside a sliding groove 314 that opens in the engagement member 310, which will be described later. Further, the protruding portion 301b is provided in a circular ring shape, and a screw can be screwed into the inner side of the circular ring shape. Therefore, after inserting the protruding part 301b into the sliding groove 314, a screw having a head having a diameter larger than the width of the sliding groove 314 is screwed into the protruding part 301b. 310 can be disposed in the rear case 300.

The first opening 301c is an opening through which a part of the fixing member 320 (an engaging part with the engaging member 310, which will be described later) is inserted. ) is formed into a shape that allows it to be inserted. As a result, the fixing member 320 provided on the back side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) is engaged with the engaging member 310 provided on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). be able to.

Further, the first opening 301c has a projecting wall 301c1 that protrudes toward the back side at an end that is opposite to the engagement side (arrow L direction side) between the fixing member 320 and the engagement member 310 (arrow R direction side). Equipped with The protruding wall 301c1 has a hook-like shape with a protruding tip on the back side bent at approximately 90 degrees, and the bending direction is set in a direction away from the first opening 301c (in the direction of arrow R).

The tip of the projecting wall 301c1 is inserted into a locking portion 331 of a fixing member 320, which will be described later. Thereby, the opposite side (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the engaging portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 can be locked. As a result, the fixing member 320 disposed on the back case 300 can be supported (engaged) at both left and right ends (arrow LR direction), and the engagement portion between the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 It is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 310 from being damaged. Note that a detailed explanation of the arrangement of the fixing member 320 in the first opening 301c will be given later.

The second opening 301d is an opening for inserting a part of the engaging member 310 (operator 315), which will be described later, into the back side of the back case 300. It can be operated from. Therefore, as described above, after placing the fixing member 320 on the back surface of the back case 300, the engaging member 310 is operated from the back side of the back case 300, and the fixing member 320 and the engaging member are attached to the back case 300 ( It can be engaged on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301).

The engaging member 310 has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and includes a first piece 311 and a second piece 312 extending in parallel directions, and the first piece 311 and the second piece 312. A third piece 313 connects the ends of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction thereof.

The above-mentioned two sliding grooves 314 are formed at one location each on the first piece 311 and the second piece 312, and are long in the extending direction of the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 (arrow LR direction). It is opened in the shape of a long hole. This allows the engaging member 310 to slide in the direction in which the first piece 311 and the second piece 312 extend (in the direction of the arrow LR).

The first piece 311 has an end on the opposite side (arrow R direction side) to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected, as an engaging portion with a fixing member 320 described later. The engaging portion 316 is formed to protrude outward on both sides in the up and down direction (direction of arrow UD), which is a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 311, and the engaging portion 316 at two locations. A recess 317 recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 311 (direction of arrow LR) from a substantially intermediate position and toward the bottom wall 301 side (back side (direction of arrow B)) of the back case 300. A protruding operator 315 is provided.

The engaging portion 316 has a substantially triangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the outer surface of one side (the side in the direction of the arrow R) becomes larger as it goes from the end of one side to the other side (the side in the direction of the arrow L). The first piece 311 is formed as an inclined surface projecting outward, while the outer surface on the other side is formed in the up-down direction (arrow U -D direction) is extended.

The recess 317 is formed by cutting out the first piece 311 in the thickness direction, and is recessed from one end (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 311 toward the other side (arrow L direction side). Ru. Therefore, one side of the first piece 311 is divided into two. Thereby, the rigidity of one side of the first piece 311 can be made lower than that of the other side. As a result, one side of the first piece 311 can be easily elastically deformed, and the engaging member 310 can be easily engaged with the fixing member 320. Note that a detailed explanation of the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be given later.

The operator 315 is an operation part for operating the engagement member 310, is formed at the other end of the first piece 311, and has a protruding dimension larger than the thickness of the bottom wall 301 of the back case 300. It is set to a value of 1, and protrudes to the back side of the back case 300 by at least a size that an operator can grasp with his or her fingers. Thereby, the operator 315 can be made to protrude from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall portion 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 315) can be grasped and operated.

The second piece 312 includes a circular fastening hole 318 on the front side. The fastening hole 318 is a portion into which a screw inserted into a hole (see FIG. 89) penetrated through a rear base 720 of a rotating unit 700, which will be described later, is screwed. As a result, after the rotation unit 700 is disposed inside the back case 300 (on the front side of the bottom wall part 301), the engagement member 310 disposed on the back side of the rotation unit 700 is operated, and the engagement member 310 can be operated to a specified position (an engagement position with a fixing member 320 described later), and a screw is screwed into the fastening hole 318 to fasten the engaging member 310 and the rotation unit 700 (rear base 720). can do. Therefore, the engaging member 310 disposed at the specified position can be made inoperable only by operating the operator 315 protruding from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the operator 315 may be manipulated in an unauthorized manner, and the fixing member 320 and the board box 100 (main controller 110) may be easily replaced with an unauthorized board box. can be suppressed.

In this case, the screw inserted through the hole in the rear base 720 of the rotation unit 700 and fastened to the fastening hole 318 may be operated from the hole from which the first prize opening 64 provided on the game board 13 is removed. good. In this case, there is no need to release the connection between the game board 13 and the back case 300, so it is possible to prevent the work of replacing the board box 100 with a normal board box 100 from becoming complicated. As a result, the work of replacing a normal board box 100 can be simplified.

The fixing member 320 is composed of a separate member from the back case 300. As a result, the board box 100 can be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 320, which has a smaller outer diameter than the rear case 300. Easy to set up. As a result, the board box 100 can be easily disposed in the rear case 300 in a state where the board box 100 is difficult to be removed from the fixing member 320.

Furthermore, while the back case 300 can be used as a component with the same shape for each model of pachinko machine, the board box 100 has a different shape and size depending on the model of each pachinko machine 10. The fixing member 320 provided with the pachinko machine cannot be shared with another pachinko machine. Therefore, compared to the case where the fixing member 320 is formed integrally with the back case 300, the mold for molding the back case 300 can be the same mold as another pachinko machine. As a result, it is only necessary to form a mold for the fixing member 320 whose outer diameter is smaller than that of the back case 300, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

The fixing member 320 includes an intervening member 330 that engages with the above-described engaging member 310, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the intervening member 330. Thereby, the shaft supporting member 340 can be used as a second-use item having the same shape as the fixing member of another game machine.

The intervening member 330 is formed into a box shape that is open on the front side (direction of arrow F), and has a locking portion 331 protruding from the side surface of the other side (direction of arrow L) and an engaged portion 332 that is formed in a frame shape and protrudes from the side surface of the rear case 300 (front side); an insertion hole 333 that opens in a circular shape on the box-shaped bottom; and a shaft support member 340 that extends from the rear surface. It mainly includes a protrusion 334 that protrudes to the side.

Further, the interposed member 330 is formed with a protrusion that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from both outer sides of the engaged portion 332 in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow UD) toward the front side (direction of arrow F). Further, the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 is formed with a circular opening recessed at a position corresponding to the protrusion protruding from both outer sides of the engaged portion 332 in the direction of gravity. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion into the opening, movement of the intervening member 330 (fixing member 320) in the vertical direction as seen from the front is restricted.

The locking portion 331 has an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 301, and has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 301c to the opening. The protruding wall 301c1 provided in a protruding manner is inserted into the bottom wall portion 301 and engaged with the bottom wall portion 301. As a result, when installing the intervening member 330 (fixing member 320) on the back case 300, the protruding wall 301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 331 of the intervening member 330, and one side of the intervening member 330 (arrow R direction side) can be locked to the back case 300.

The engaged portion 332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 310, and has a dimension in which it protrudes toward the back case 300 (in the direction of arrow F) beyond the engaging member 310 disposed on the back case 300. The distance from the inner surface of the front side (direction of arrow F) of the enclosed space to the front of the bottom wall 301 is larger than the distance from the front of the engagement member 310 to the front of the bottom wall 301. Set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 and the engaging member 310 are arranged at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The insertion hole 333 is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the intervening member 330 to a shaft support member 340 (described later) is inserted, and is set coaxially with the fastening hole 343 of the shaft support member 340.

The protrusion 334 has a substantially L-shaped cross section, and the distance between the tip on the bent side and the bottom surface of the intervening member 330 is set to be larger than the thickness of the insertion portion 344 of the shaft support member 340, which will be described later. be done. Thereby, the insertion part 344 can be inserted and disposed between the bent end of the protrusion 334 and the bottom surface of the intervening member 330, which face each other.

The shaft support member 340 includes a main body 341 formed in a box shape that is open on the back case 300 side (direction of arrow F), and a substantially U-shaped cross section from the back side of the main body 341 (direction of arrow B). The support portion 342 is formed mainly of a bulging support portion 342.

The main body part 341 has an insertion part 344 that protrudes upward from the side surface on the upper side (the side in the direction of arrow U), and an insertion part 344 that protrudes upward from the side surface on the upper side (the side in the direction of arrow U), and the insertion part 344 that protrudes upward from the side surface of the main body part 341 formed in a box shape. It mainly includes a fastening hole 343 that is recessed toward the direction B).

The insertion portion 344 is a plate member inserted between the bent end of the protrusion 334 and the bottom surface of the intervening member 330, as described above. Thereby, the upper side of the shaft support member 340 can be prevented from tilting toward the back side of the back case 300.

The fastening hole 343 is arranged on the lower side (in the direction of arrow D) toward the end opposite to the insertion portion 344 . Furthermore, as described above, the fastening hole 343 is a hole for fastening a screw that is inserted through the insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39(b)) of the intervening member 330. Therefore, the insertion portion 344 on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the shaft support member 340 is inserted into the protrusion 334 of the intervening member 330, and the lower side is fastened and fixed to the intervening member 330. Therefore, since the shaft support member 340 is fixed to the intervening member 330 only by fastening the screws on the lower side, the number of fastening parts can be reduced, and the manufacturing process can be simplified.

The support portion 342 is a portion that is caulked to the bearing portion 117 of the above-described board box 100 (main controller 110), and is formed in a hollow shape into which a caulking fitting can be placed. Note that the board box 100 is held in a rotatable state relative to the shaft support member 340 by fastening with caulking metal fittings.

Next, the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 41(b). 40(a) is a front view of the rear case 300 before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, and FIG. 40(b) is a front view of the rear case 300 before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the state shown in FIG. 41(a) is a front view of the rear case 300 after the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, and FIG. 41(b) is a front view of the rear case 300 after the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the state shown in FIG. Note that in FIGS. 40(b) and 41(b), a part of the outer shape of the engaging member 310 that overlaps with the back case 300 is illustrated with a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged, the intervening member 330 and the shaft support member 340 are placed on the intervening member 330 side (front side (arrow) They are fastened and assembled using screws inserted from the F direction side)). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the intervening member 330 and the shaft supporting member 340 from being illegally disassembled (the fastened screws being removed) from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 caulked and fixed to the shaft support member 340 from being replaced with an unauthorized board box.

As described above, the interposed member 330 and the shaft supporting member 340 (fixed member 320) in the fastened state have the projecting wall 301c1 formed in the first opening 301c inside the locking portion 331 of the interposed member 330. inserted. In this case, the interposed member 330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixed member 320) in a fastened state are arranged in the first opening 301c from the bent side (arrow R direction side) of the projecting wall 301c1.

When the fixing member 320 is disposed in the back case 300, a space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 is disposed at a position facing one end (on the engaging portion 316 side) of the engaging member 310. Thereby, by slidingly displacing the engaging member 310, one end (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the engaging member 310 can be inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

Here, the outer dimensions in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the two engaging parts 316 of the engaging member 310 are the openings in the vertical direction of the space surrounded by the engaged parts 332 of the fixed member 320 described above. It is set larger than the dimensions. Therefore, there is a problem that the engaging member 310 cannot be disposed in the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

On the other hand, the engaging member 310 allows the first piece 311 to be easily elastically deformed by the recess 317 provided on one side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 311 as described above, and also allows the first piece 311 to be easily elastically deformed. Due to the triangular shape of the joint portion 316, the force generated when the engaging member 310 is slid and abuts against the inner edge of the engaged portion 332 can be applied to the recessed portion 317 side of the engaging member 310. As a result, the first piece 311 formed into two forks can be elastically deformed and inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are arranged so that the engaging member 310 is slid and the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is attached to the intervening member. When inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 of 330, the elastically deformed first piece 311 is returned to its pre-deformed shape. As described above, the other side surface of the engaging portion 316 extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 311 . Therefore, the force that causes the engagement member 310 to slide in the opposite direction alone does not act to cause the first piece 311 to elastically deform toward the recess 317. That is, the inclined surface and the recessed portion 317 of the engaging portion 316 make it easier to insert the first piece 311 into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332, and the side surface on the other side (arrow L direction side) of the engaging portion 316 The first piece 311 inserted into the space surrounded by the engaged portion 332 can be made difficult to come off. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fixing member 320 from being removed from the back side of the back case 300 due to a fraudulent act by the player, and the board box 100 (main controller 110) which is caulked to the fixing member 320 is an unauthorized board box. It is possible to suppress the exchange.

Further, the back case 300 is disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300, and is located on the back side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of arrow B), and is located between the base plate 60 and the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301). The fixing member 320 includes an engaging member 310 that can be operated from the outside between the opposing sides, and the fixing member 320 includes an engaged portion 332 that protrudes toward the front side of the rear case 300 (in the direction of arrow F). Since the engaging member 310 is engaged with the rear case 300, the accessory device (in this example, the rotating unit 700) is installed between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300. , the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 can be engaged with each other by operating the engaging member 310 from the outside between the base plate 60 and the rear case 300.

Therefore, the fixing member 320 can be disposed on the back case 300 without the engagement member 310 being obstructed by the accessory device disposed between the base plate 60 and the back case 300 facing each other. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be easily disposed on the back case 300.

Furthermore, since the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back case 300, the engaging portion between the back case 300 and the fixing member 320 is connected to the base plate. 60 and the rear case 300 facing each other. This makes it difficult to access the engaging portion between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 from the back side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of arrow B). As a result, the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released from the back side of the base plate 60, and the fixing member 320 is prevented from being tampered with (for example, replaced with an incorrect fixing member). can.

The back case 300 also includes a first opening 301c that is opened in a portion where the fixing member 320 is disposed, and a second opening 301d that is opened in a portion where the engagement member 310 is disposed. The engaging member 310 is disposed on the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the back case 300, and is inserted from the back side (the side in the direction of the arrow B) of the back case 300 via (inserting) the second opening 301d. The fixed member 320 is operable, and since the engaged portion 332 that has passed through the first opening 301c is disposed on the front side of the rear case 300, the engaged portion 332 of the engaging member 310 and the fixed member 320 is This makes it difficult to access the engaging portion from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, the fixing member 320 can be fixed to the back case 300 regardless of the size of the accessory device disposed on the back case 300, and the board box 320 can be manipulated from the back side of the game board 13 to prevent fraud. can be prevented from being replaced.

Furthermore, the engaging member 310 includes an operator 315 that is inserted through the second opening 301d and protrudes toward the back side of the back case 300 (the direction of the arrow B). ), the engaging member 310 can be easily operated. As a result, the engaging operation between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 can be easily performed.

In addition, since the engaging member 310 can be slid on a plane parallel to the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301), the engaging member 310 can be moved in the front-rear direction (arrowed by the arrow) relative to the back case 300. Since the engagement member 310 is not displaced in the F-B direction), the front side (the side in the direction of the arrow F) of the engagement member 310 can be easily used as a space for an accessory device disposed in the rear case 300. As a result, the area on the front side of the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) can be easily used as a space for installing accessory devices.

Next, the operation for removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 300 from the state shown in FIG. 41 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 41, the first opening 301c is opened in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is It is possible to operate from the back side of the back case 300 (the side in the direction of arrow B) through the first opening 301c.

Therefore, by elastically deforming the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engaging member 310 toward the concave side of the recess 317 using a special tool or the like, the engagement between the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be prevented. The connection is canceled. With this engagement released, the engaging member 310 is displaced in the direction of pulling it out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 332 (in the direction of arrow L), and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is restored. , the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 can be released.

Note that it is preferable that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 and the first opening 301c be formed as small as possible. According to this, the finger of the person removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 300 cannot be inserted, and a special tool can be inserted. As a result, only a worker with a dedicated tool can replace the board box 100 (main controller 110), and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced with an unauthorized one.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), the board box 100 (main controller 110) caulked to the shaft support member 340 will be described. 42(a) is a perspective rear view of the back case 300 and the board box 100 (main controller 110), and FIG. 42(b) is a rear view of the back case 300 and the board box 100 (main controller 110). It is. In addition, in FIG. 42(b), the outer shape of the engaging member 310 that overlaps with the substrate box 100 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), the substrate box 100 includes a bearing portion 117 protruding from one end (in the direction of arrow R). A pair of bearing portions 117 are arranged at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD). As described above, the pair of bearing parts 117 are parts that are caulked and fastened to the support part 342 of the shaft support member 340, and the vertical dimension (arrow UD direction) of the support part 342 and the distance between the opposing parts are approximately the same. Set to be the same. As a result, the board box 100 is fastened to the shaft supporting member 340 by arranging the support part 342 between the pair of bearing parts 117 facing each other, and by inserting a caulking pin from above the bearing part 117 and fixing it by caulking. be done.

According to the board box 100 configured as above, the board box 100 is rotatably held with respect to the shaft support member 340 and is disposed on the back side of the engagement member 310, so that the above-mentioned When operating the operator 315 to engage the engaging member 310 with the fixed member 320, the operator 315 can be easily operated by rotating the substrate box 100. Further, after the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, by arranging the board box 100 on the back side of the engaging member 310, it becomes difficult to operate the operator 315 from the back side of the back case 300. . As a result, after the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, it is possible to prevent the board box from being replaced by an unauthorized board box due to the operator 315 being operated.

The other end of the board box 100 (the side in the direction of arrow L) is inserted from the back side of the board box 100 (in the direction of arrow B) toward the bottom wall 301 of the back case 300 and fastened to the back case 300. It is fixed with a screw. As a result, the board box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 69. First, a structure for displacing the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46.

43 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. 45 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 43 to 14 illustrate a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position (the lowest position with respect to the base member 410).

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 46, the lower displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a transmission member disposed on the base member 410. 420, a link member 430 that is connected to the base member 410 and is displaced as the transmission member 420 is displaced, and one end is slidably connected to the base member 410 and the other end is connected to the link member 430. and a lower displacement member 440 that is displaced by transmission of driving force from the link member 430.

The base member 410 is formed by combining two rectangular and laterally elongated plate members when viewed from the front in the front-rear direction, and includes a front base 411 disposed on the front side and a back base 412 disposed on the back side. A transmission member 420 and a link member 430 are arranged between the front base 411 and the rear base 412, which face each other.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 43), two cylindrical pivot pins 411c and 411d protruding toward the back side, and a pivot pin 411d. It is formed mainly with a curved wall portion 411e projecting in an arc shape with the axis as the axis.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are holes into which two protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back side of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted, respectively. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each formed to extend in the left-right direction. Therefore, by displacing the projections 472, 473 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a, 411b along the sliding grooves 411a, 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each curved in an arc shape, extending upward (in the upper direction in FIG. 43) from the left end (left side in FIG. 43) to the right end (right side in FIG. 43) of the front base 411. ) is opened. Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged so that the axes of their circular arcs are located at different positions, and the gap between the opposing grooves in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It is possible to displace the object while moving it. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated as it slides without applying rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440. Note that the detailed manner of displacement of the lower displacement member 440 will be described later.

The pivot pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of a transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Further, the pivot pin 411c is formed from a metal rod-shaped body and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when force is applied to the cam member 422 from its outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, it is possible to suppress the pivot pin 411c from breaking (damaging).

The pivot pin 411d is a projection inserted into a through hole 431a formed at one end of a first link member 431, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 431a. Further, the pivot pin 411d is formed from a metallic rod-shaped body, and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when force is applied to the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, it is possible to suppress the pivot pin 411d from breaking (damaging).

The curved wall portion 411e protrudes from the back side of the front base 411 and is curved around the axis of the pivot pin 411d. The protruding distance of the curved wall portion 411e is set to a distance at which the curved wall portion 411e comes into contact with a protruding end surface of a plate-shaped projection 431b of the first link member 431, which will be described later. Therefore, displacement of the first link member 431 toward the front side is suppressed. Further, since the curved wall portion 411e is formed to be curved around the axis of the pivot pin 411d, even when the first link member 431 is rotated around the axis of the pivot pin 411d, the first link member 431 The plate-like projection 431b can be brought into contact with the protruding end surface of the curved wall portion 411e.

The recovery port 411f is an opening for allowing the ball ejected from the exit opening 471 by movement of the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, to flow into the recovery port 411f and to be recovered. The downstream side of the recovery port 411f is connected to the ball recovery path. The recovery port 411f is a hole formed in a protruding manner at the right end of the front base 411, and its opening surface faces the surface facing the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and the surface facing the lower displacement member 440 in the first extended state. This is a surface located below the exit opening 471 in the direction of gravity.

Further, the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state is arranged above the recovery port 411f. Therefore, the ball emitted from the emission opening 471 can be received into the recovery port 411f and quickly recovered.

The back base 412 has grooves 412a and 412b recessed from the front side (the front side in FIG. 44) toward the back side, and a locking part 412c formed protruding toward the front side near the groove 412b. Formed primarily in preparation.

The groove 412a is a hole into which the distal end side of the pivot pin 411c of the front base 411 described above is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pin 411c, and faces the pivot pin 411c. Recessed in position. Therefore, the cam member 422 is held so that it cannot fall off from the base member 410 by assembling the front base 411 and the back base 412 after the pivot pin 411c is inserted into the shaft portion 422a. Further, since the back base 412 can hold the tip of the pivot pin 411c, when a force is applied to the cam member 422 in the axial direction from its outer circumferential surface, the pivot pin 411c is able to hold the front end of the pivot pin 411c. It is possible to suppress bending and breaking from the connecting portion.

The groove 412b is a hole into which the distal end side of the pivot pin 411d of the front base 411 described above is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pin 411d, and faces the pivot pin 411d. Recessed in position. Therefore, the first link member 431 is held so that it cannot fall off from the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the back base 412 after the pivot pin 411d is inserted into the through hole 431a. In addition, since the back base 412 can hold the tip of the pivot pin 411d, when a force is applied to the first link member 431 in the direction of the through hole 431a, the pivot pin 411d can hold the front end of the pivot pin 411d. It is possible to suppress bending and breaking from the connecting part.

The locking portion 412c is a plate that locks one end side of a biasing spring SP1, which will be described later, and is formed on the outside of the biasing spring SP1. Thereby, one end side of the biasing spring SP1 can be locked. Note that a detailed explanation of the biasing spring SP1 will be given later.

The transmission member 420 includes a transmission gear 421 connected to the shaft of a drive motor KM1 attached to the front side of the front base 411, and a cam that meshes with the transmission gear 421 and rotates as the transmission gear 421 is driven. 422.

The transmission gear 421 is a gear that has a toothing surface over the entire outer peripheral surface, and is fitted onto the shaft of the drive motor KM1. Therefore, when electric power is applied to drive motor KM1 and the shaft portion is rotated, transmission gear 421 is similarly rotated.

The cam member 422 has a shape in which the outer shape in a front view is a combination of ends of two semicircles of different sizes, and is formed from a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. A tooth surface 422b that meshes with the transmission gear 421 is carved on the outer peripheral surface of the small semicircular portion of the cam member 422, and a shaft portion 422a is formed to penetrate through the center of the semicircle. A sliding groove 422c is formed in the large semicircular portion of the cam member 422 on the back side facing a link member 430, which will be described later.

The shaft portion 422a is a hole through which the shaft support pin 411c is inserted, as described above, and the shaft portion 422a is rotatably supported by the shaft support pin 411c, so that the cam member 422 supports the shaft of the shaft support pin 411c. Rotatably held in the center.

The cam member 422 is disposed on the base member 410 with the tooth surface 422b meshing with the transmission gear 421, so when the transmission gear 421 is rotated, the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a. can.

The sliding groove 422c is recessed along the outer periphery of the semicircular portion of the cam member 422 having a large radius. Therefore, the distance from the shaft portion 422a increases from one end to the other end. The sliding groove 422c also includes a step portion 422c1 extending from the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 toward the through hole 431a when the lower displacement member 440 is located in a retracted state, which will be described later. A step portion 422c3 extends from the sliding protrusion 431d toward the through hole 431a when the member 440 is in a second extended state, which will be described later, and a step portion 422c3 extends between the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state and the second extended state. A step portion 422c2 is provided that extends from the sliding protrusion 431d toward the through hole 431a when located in the intermediate first extended state.

The link member 430 is formed from two link members, a first link member 431 and a second link member 432. Further, the link member 430 is formed by rotatably connecting the respective ends of a first link member 431 and a second link member 432.

The first link member 431 is bent into a generally doglegged shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 431 is a link that is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the cam member 422, and has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side, and a cylindrical connecting protrusion 431c protruding toward the back side on the other end side. , is formed mainly of a plate-like protrusion 431b protruding to a position facing the above-mentioned curved wall portion 411e, and a cylindrical sliding protrusion 431d protruding toward the front side of the bent portion.

The through hole 431a is a through hole into which the pivot pin 411d is inserted as described above. The first link member 431 is rotatably held relative to the base member 410 by combining the front base 411 and the back base 412 with the pivot pin 411d inserted into the through hole 431a.

The plate-like protrusion 431b is a protrusion that suppresses displacement of the first link member 431 in the front-rear direction and prevents the first link member 431 from colliding with the cam member 422 disposed forward. It is formed as a plate-shaped body that protrudes in a curved manner with the hole 431a as an axis, and its protrusion length is set larger than the thickness of the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction. This can prevent the back surface of the cam member 422 from colliding with the front surface of the first link member 431.

Further, the protruding dimension of the plate-like protrusion 9431b is set larger than the thickness (dimension in the direction of arrow FB) of the cam member 422. Further, the protruding tip surface of the plate-like protrusion 431b and the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) are arranged with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 55(a))).

The cam member 422 is disposed in such a manner that it can be displaced in a region between the opposing front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e. Further, the dimensions of the two gaps, which are the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 facing each other and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410 facing each other, are larger than the distance X14 described above. It is set large.

As a result, when the first link member 9431 is bent in the direction in which the above-mentioned distance It can be brought into contact with the Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from being sandwiched between the opposing front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e and restricting its displacement.

The connecting protrusion 431c is a shaft portion connected to a second link member 432, which will be described later, and is inserted into a through hole 432a of the second link member 432, and the outer diameter of the head is larger than that of the through hole 432a from the back side. Large screws, etc. are fastened. Thereby, the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 are rotatably connected.

A wall portion 431f that protrudes toward the back side is formed at the edge of the through hole 431a. The wall portion 431f is a wall surface for fitting and holding a biasing spring SP1, which will be described later, into its outer peripheral surface.

The link-side engaging portion 431e is a protrusion that locks the other end of the biasing spring SP1 fitted into the wall portion 431f, and is formed to protrude in a hook shape from the back side of one end of the first link member 431. . Therefore, the biasing spring SP1 has one end engaged with the locking portion 412c of the back base 412, and the other end engaged with the link side engaging portion 431e of the first link member 431. Ru. Therefore, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 can be applied in a direction to rotate the other end side of the first link member 431 upward with respect to the base member 410. As a result, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced, the biasing force of the biasing spring SP1 acts, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 can be suppressed.

The sliding protrusion 431d is formed at a position spaced apart from the through hole 431a by approximately the same distance as the distance from the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the through hole 431a. Furthermore, the tip of the sliding protrusion 431d is inserted into the sliding groove 422c. That is, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed so that its outer diameter is smaller than the width dimension between the opposing sliding grooves 422c.

The sliding protrusion 431d is disposed inside the sliding groove 422c and is displaced by sliding inside the sliding groove 422c as the cam member 422 rotates. That is, by displacing the cam member 422, the first link member 431 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the first link member 431 will be given later.

Furthermore, since the sliding projection 431d and the plate-like projection 431b are formed in close proximity to each other, the forward displacement of the first link member 431 is suppressed by the plate-like projection 431b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sliding protrusion 431d from pushing the cam member 422 forward. As a result, there is no need to increase the depth of the sliding groove 422c provided in the cam member 422, and the rigidity of the cam member 422 can be ensured without increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction.

The second link member 432 is formed into a rectangular shape when viewed from the front with one side long, and is formed into a plate shape with a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The second link member 432 is mainly formed with a through hole 432a formed to penetrate in the front-back direction on one end side, and a through hole 432b formed to penetrate in the front-back direction at the other end side.

The through hole 432a is a hole for connecting with the first link member 431 as described above, and the connecting protrusion 431c is inserted into the through hole 432a. Thereby, the second link member 432 is rotatably connected to the first link member 431.

The through hole 432b is connected to a lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, and can transmit displacement of the link member 430 to the lower displacement member 440. The through hole 432b is a hole into which a protrusion 482a of a rear case 482, which will be described later, is inserted, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 482a. Therefore, by inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b and fastening a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a, the lower displacement member 440 can be connected to the second link member 432. It is rotatably held against the Therefore, the drive of the lower displacement member 440 is transmitted through the link member 430 when the cam member 422 is rotationally displaced.

Next, the displacement operation of the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. FIG. 47 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 48 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 49 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state. 400 is a front view. FIG. 50 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 51 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state, and FIG. 52 is a rear view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state. 400 is a rear view. Note that in FIGS. 50 to 52, the back base 412 is shown in a transparent manner. Moreover, in FIGS. 50 to 52, a part of the plate-shaped projection 431b and the curved wall portion 411e of the first link member 431 are illustrated with chain lines.

Furthermore, the retracted state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d arranged inside the sliding groove 422c is arranged between the opposing step portions 442c1, and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged on the lower side. The second extended state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d is disposed between the opposing step portions 442c3, and the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 is disposed at the uppermost position. The first extended state is a state in which the sliding protrusion 431d is arranged between the opposing step portions 442c2, and the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in an intermediate state between the retracted state and the second extended state.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 50, in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state, the cam member 422 in the first position is rotated by the transmission gear 421 to move the other end side of the sliding groove 422c (step 422c3 side). The shaft portion 422a is positioned on the right side in rear view (right side in FIG. 50). In this case, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is guided along the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c and positioned at the stepped portion 422c1. Therefore, the first link member 431 is in a state in which the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) is located on the right side (right side in FIG. 50) of the through hole 431a on the one end side (rotated around the through hole 431a as an axis). The end side is positioned at the lower end of the rotatable range (first driven position).

Since the second link member 432 is connected to the first link member 431, one end side (through hole 432a side) connected to the first link member 431 is located on the right side in rear view (right side in FIG. 50). As a result, in the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432, the protrusions 472, 473 connected to the front base 411 are located on the right side of the sliding grooves 411a, 411b in rear view (right side in FIG. 50). state. As described above, since the distance between the vertically opposing sliding grooves 411a and 411b is larger on the right side in rear view than on the left side, the lower displacement member 440 has its longitudinal direction substantially parallel to the left-right direction. It is placed in such a state. That is, it is placed in front of the front base 411.

The displacement from the retracted state shown in FIGS. 47 and 50 to the first extended state shown in FIGS. 46 and 51 is performed by displacing the cam member 422.

In the first extended state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the retracted state position and displaced to the third position. As a result, the other end side (step portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is placed above the shaft portion 422a. Due to this rotational displacement, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 guided by the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c is displaced along with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and is placed in the third driven position. Note that in the first extended state, the sliding protrusion 431d is guided between opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) is moved from the retracted position to the upper left in rear view (FIG. 51). upper left).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, since the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shapes of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, since the distance between the vertically opposing sliding grooves 411a and 411b becomes narrower from the right side to the left side in rear view, the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in front view (right side in FIG. 48). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Furthermore, in the first extended state, the collection port 411f is located on the lower side in the direction of gravity on the distal end side. That is, by sliding and rotating the lower displacement member 440 during transition from the retracted state to the first extended state, the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 is extended to the right side of the base member 410 when viewed from the front. It can be displaced without causing any damage. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement region different from the variable regions of other displacement accessories. Collisions with other displacement accessories can be suppressed.

In addition, since the recovery port 411f is located below one end of the lower displacement member 440 (the side opposite to the protrusions 472 and 473 connected to the front base 411), the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440, which will be described later, When the ball drops downward from the exit opening 471 during the firing operation, the ball can be sent to the recovery port 411f.

The displacement from the first extended state shown in FIGS. 48 and 51 to the second extended state shown in FIGS. 49 and 52 is performed by further displacing the cam member 422 from the first extended state.

In the second extended state, the transmission gear 421 is rotated from the first extended state by the driving force of the drive motor KM1, and the cam member 422 is rotated approximately 90 degrees from the first extended state position (third position). is placed in the second position. Therefore, the other end side of the cam member 422 (step portion 422c3 side) is positioned above the shaft portion 422a. Also, due to this rotational displacement, the sliding of the first link member 431 guided by the inner wall of the sliding groove 422c The moving protrusion 431d is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the sliding groove 422c, and is placed in the second driven position.In the second extended state, the sliding protrusion 431d is moved along the step 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. Guided between opposing inner walls.

Therefore, the first link member 431 is rotated approximately 30 degrees around the through hole 431a due to the displacement of the sliding protrusion 431d, and the other end side (connecting protrusion 431c side) changes from the position in the first extended state to approximately 30 degrees when viewed from the rear. It is displaced to the upper left (upper left in FIG. 52).

Due to the rotational displacement of the first link member 431, the second link member 432 connected to the first link member 431 is displaced, and the lower displacement member 440 connected to the second link member 432 is displaced. In this case, since the protrusions 472 and 473 are slidably connected to the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced along the shapes of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b. As described above, the distance between the vertically opposing sliding grooves 411a and 411b becomes narrower from the right side to the left side in the rear view, so the lower displacement member 440 slides to the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 49). While being displaced, the tip side is rotationally displaced upward.

Further, similarly to the first extended state, in the second extended state, the collection port 411f is located on the lower side in the direction of gravity on the distal end side. That is, by sliding and rotating the lower displacement member 440 during transition from the retracted state to the second extended state, the distal end side of the lower displacement member 440 is extended to the right side of the base member 410 when viewed from the front. It can be displaced without causing any damage. As a result, it is possible to easily form a displacement area that is different from the variable area of other displacement accessories, and it is possible to suppress collisions with other displacement accessories.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the positional relationship between the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in each state will be described. 53(a) is a rear view of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 in the retracted state, FIG. 53(b) in the first extended state, and FIG. 53(c) in the second extended state. be. In addition, in FIGS. 53(a) to 53(c), a portion of the cam member 422 that overlaps with the first link member 431 is illustrated with a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 53(a), in the retracted state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is arranged between opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c1 of the sliding groove 422c. Furthermore, as described above, the sliding protrusion 431d is formed at a position spaced apart from the through hole 431a by approximately the same distance as the distance from the through hole 431a to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. Therefore, when a force that rotates around the axis of the through hole 431a is applied to the first link member 431 located in the retracted state, that force is applied to the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 from the sliding protrusion 431d. can. Therefore, rotation of the cam member 422 due to the rotational force of the first link member 431 can be suppressed. As a result, in the retracted state, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed from being displaced.

As shown in FIG. 53(b), in the first extended state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is arranged between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Therefore, similarly to the retracted state, when a force to rotate around the through hole 431a is applied to the first link member 431 located in the first extended state, the force is transferred from the sliding protrusion 431d to the cam member 422. It can act on the shaft portion 422a. Therefore, rotation of the cam member 422 due to the rotational force of the first link member 431 can be suppressed. As a result, in the first extended state, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed from being displaced.

Here, at the first extended position, the lower displacement member 440 is at an intermediate position of displacement, and therefore, in order to maintain the stopped state, it is necessary to maintain the drive motor KM1 in the stopped state. Therefore, there is a problem in that energy consumption increases when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at the first extended position (intermediate position of displacement).

In contrast, in the present embodiment, in the first extended state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is disposed between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c, so as described above. In addition, displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the electric power of the drive motor KM1 is stopped when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped at a position halfway through its displacement, the lower displacement member 440 can be prevented from being displaced. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 from increasing when the lower displacement member 440 is stopped mid-displacement.

As shown in FIG. 53(c), in the second extended state, the sliding protrusion 431d of the first link member 431 is disposed between the opposing inner walls of the stepped portion 422c2 of the sliding groove 422c. Therefore, similarly to the retracted state and the first extended state, when a force that rotates around the axis of the through hole 431a is applied to the first link member 431 located in the second extended state, the force is removed by sliding. The shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422 can be actuated from the projection 431d. Therefore, rotation of the cam member 422 due to the rotational force of the first link member 431 can be suppressed. As a result, in the second extended state, the lower displacement member 440 connected to the first link member 431 via the second link member 432 can be suppressed from being displaced.

Furthermore, since each step portion 422c1, 422c2, 422c3 extends in the direction connecting the sliding projection 431d and the through hole 431a, the sliding groove 422c extends in the direction in which the sliding projection 431d of the first link member 431 is displaced. The width dimension of can be reduced. Therefore, in the retracted position, the first extended position, and the second extended position, the gap between the sliding groove 422c and the sliding protrusion 431d, in which the first link member 431 can rotate around the axis of the through hole 431a, is reduced. can. Therefore, the gap in which the first link member 431 in each state can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 431a can be reduced. As a result, the amount by which the lower displacement member 440 swings in each state due to vibration or inertial force when the displacement is stopped can be reduced, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the stopped state.

Therefore, the transmission member 420 and the link member 430 (drive mechanism) that drive the lower displacement member 440 restrict the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiver 467. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from being displaced with respect to the base member 410 due to the reaction. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the relationship between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 in the front-rear direction will be described. 54(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 50, and FIG. 54(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. be. Note that in FIGS. 51 and 52, the back base 412 is shown as being transparent, but in FIGS. .

As shown in FIG. 54(a), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state is arranged between the back base 412 and the cam member 422. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging back and forth. That is, the other end side of the first link member 431 is connected via the second link member 432 to a lower displacement member 440 that is constructed by combining a plurality of fixtures, so that the load of the lower displacement member 440 causes it to move in the front-rear direction. Since the cam member 422 is disposed at the front where there is a risk of the first link member 431 bending forward, it is possible to suppress the first link member 431 from bending forward. As a result, it is possible to suppress the first link member 431 from moving forward, and therefore it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 54(b), the link member 430 of the lower displacement unit 400 in the first extended state is arranged between the back base 412 and the cam member 422, as in the retracted state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging back and forth.

Furthermore, in the retracted state and the first extended state, the cam member 422 is disposed on the front side of the connecting portion between the first link member 431 and the second link member 432 of the link member 430. Therefore, when the link member 430 is formed from two members, it is necessary to make the connecting part rotatable, so the rigidity becomes weaker than other parts and easily bends due to the gap, but there is a cam on the front side. Since the member 422 is arranged, bending of the connecting portion of the link member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging in the front-rear direction.

<Regulating the displacement of the displacement member by means of regulating the displacement of the driven member>
Next, the relationship between the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LVa-LVa in FIG. 50, and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 51, FIG. 55(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the line LVc-LVc in FIG. 52.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the retracted state (first position), the cam member 422 and the curved wall portion 411e are placed in different positions. Therefore, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first extended state (third position), it is possible to suppress the resistance acting on the cam member 422 from increasing. As a result, the start of displacement of the lower displacement member 440 can be stabilized.

As shown in FIGS. 55(b) and 55(c), when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extended state (third position), a part of the cam member 422 It is arranged at a position separated by a predetermined gap on the front side (in the direction of arrow F). Thereby, when the cam member 422 is displaced in the front direction, the axial side surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e, and the cam member 422 can be prevented from being displaced in the front direction.

Note that the surface of the cam member 422 on the front base 411 side (arrow F direction side) is formed into a flat surface parallel to the back surface of the front base 411 (see FIG. 45). Thereby, when the cam member 422 is displaced toward the curved wall portion 411e, the flat surface of the cam member 422 can be brought into contact with the curved wall portion 411e. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from partially abutting the curved wall portion 411e, and to prevent force from being concentrated in one part. As a result, damage to the cam member 422 can be suppressed.

Here, as described above, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) to the first extended state (third position), the lower displacement member 440 (on the opposite side in the longitudinal direction) is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, as the longitudinal direction component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the force component that causes the lower displacement member 440 to tilt in the front-rear direction is increased. Therefore, when the first extended state (third position) is set, the force in the longitudinal direction acting on the link member 430 supporting the lower displacement member 440 is greater than when the retracted state (first position) is set. be made larger. As a result, the cam member 422 connected to the link member 430 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state (first position) beyond the first extended state (third position), a portion of the cam member 422 Since it is disposed on the front side of the portion 411e, displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging back and forth between the first extended state (third position) and the second extended state (second position). It can be easily seen.

Note that the displacement of the link member 430 toward the back side can be regulated by disposing the link member 430 between the back base 412 and the cam member 422 as described above. That is, when the link member 430 swings toward the back side, the link member 430 can be brought into contact with the back base 412 to restrict displacement of the link member 430. As a result, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging back and forth.

Further, the front base 411 includes a regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) that regulates the swinging of the link member 430 in a direction other than the driven direction, and the cam member 422 is displaceable between the first position and the second position. and is capable of displacing a first displacement area for displacing from the first position to a third position intermediate between the first position and the second position, and a second displacement area for displacing the second position from the third position, The link member 430 is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position by the cam member 422 being displaced from the first position to the second position, and from the first driven position to the first driven position and the second driven position. a first driven region that displaces a third driven position intermediate between the third driven position and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position; A part of the cam member 422 is set in the same area, and when the cam member 422 is displaced through the second displacement area, the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e) restricts the swinging of the cam member 422 in a direction other than the displacement direction. Therefore, the swinging of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be restricted using the same portion of the restricting means (curved wall portion 411e).

Therefore, since it is only necessary to form the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) at one location, the shape of the regulating means is smaller than when the regulating means for regulating displacement is formed on each of the cam member 422 and the link member 430. can be simplified and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Further, since the swinging of the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be restricted using the same portion of the restriction means (curved wall portion 411e), the link member 430 can be restricted to one restriction means (curved wall portion 411e). Since it is not necessary to form the cam member 422 and the regulating portion, the regulating means (curved wall portion 411e) can be made smaller accordingly.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the retracted state to the second extended state, the projections 472 and 473 of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b formed in the front base 411. (Collar C disposed on the protrusions 472, 473 (see FIG. 14)) moves toward the front side (arrow F direction side) of the other end side (stepped portion 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 as the cam member 422 is displaced. (See FIGS. 50 to 52). As a result, when the other end side (step 422c3 side) of the cam member 422 is pushed out to the back side by the protrusions 472, 473 (collars C disposed on the protrusions 472, 473), the cam member 422 There is a possibility that it will be rotationally displaced in the front-rear direction about 422a and come into contact with the link member 430.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the displacement of the cam member 422 toward the front side can be restricted by contacting the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 can move around the shaft portion 422a. Rotational displacement in the front-back direction can be suppressed. As a result, contact between the link member 430 and the cam member 422 can be suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the cam member 422 is displaced beyond the first extended state (third position), the displacement is regulated by the curved wall portion 411e, so that the cam member 422 is not bent during the initial operation. It is possible to suppress an increase in frictional resistance due to contact with the wall portion 411e. As a result, the initial operation of the cam member 422 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the cam member 422 and the first link member 431 when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state will be described. 56(a) is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 taken along the LVIa-LVIa line in FIG. 52, and FIG. 56(b) is a sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400 in the second extended state (second position). 5 is a front view of a link member 431 and a cam member 422. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 56(b), the outer shape of the base member 410 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIG. 56, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-shaped projection 431b of the first link member 431. Thereby, rotational displacement of the cam member 422 in the direction of displacing the lower displacement unit 400 from the retracted state (first position) to the second displacement state can be restricted. As a result, the operation of stopping the rotational displacement of the cam member 422 can be distributed to the meshing portion of the transmission gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b, and the abutment portion of the cam member 422 and the first link member 431. Damage to the tooth surfaces of the gear 421 and the tooth surface 422b can be suppressed.

Further, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state, the contact surface between the plate-like projection 431b of the first link member 431 and the cam member 422 is in contact with the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. The direction is set perpendicular to the virtual line KS1 passing through the portion. As a result, when a force is applied around the axis of the first link member 431 from the second displacement state to the retracted state (first position), the force is applied to the axis of the shaft portion 422a of the cam member 422. It is possible to suppress the action in the direction of rotation. As a result, rotation of the cam member 422 due to the force acting on the first link member 431 can be suppressed.

Here, as described above, the distal end side (the side opposite to the protrusion 473 connected to the front base 411 in the longitudinal direction) of the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, as the longitudinal component of the lower displacement member 440 approaches the direction of gravity, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through hole 431a of the first link member 431 supporting the lower displacement member 440 becomes maximum. Since the transmission of force from the first link member 431 to the cam member 422 is suppressed, the lower displacement member 440 can be easily maintained in the second displacement state.

Further, when the cam member 422 is placed in the second displacement state, a force is applied to rotate the cam member 422 around the axis of the through hole 431a of the first link member 431 due to the load of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, a force PW1 (see FIG. 56(b)) in which the end of the cam member 422 is pushed out by the plate-like protrusion 431b and the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a, and a sliding force of the cam member 422 is applied. The inner wall of the moving groove 422c is pushed out from the sliding protrusion 431d, and the force PW2 (see FIG. 56(b)) in the direction in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a acts in a direction that cancels each other out. As a result, rotation of the cam member 422 due to the force exerted by the first link member 431 can be suppressed.

Next, the configuration of the lower displacement member 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. 57(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 58 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 440, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 440. 60(a) and (b) are front views of the lower displacement member 440.

Note that in FIG. 60(a), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 60(b), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown transparently. The state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the lower displacement member 440 includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and a case member 480 and the base member 470. It is formed mainly of a transmission mechanism 460 disposed displaceably therebetween, and a decorative member 450 formed to cover the front and rear of a case member 480.

The base member 470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 that protrude toward the back side on one end side, and a standing wall 471a that stands from the edge on the other end side to the front side. , a protruding wall 477 protruding from the upper end of the center portion toward the front side in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 57) in an upside-down U-shape; A rack gear 476 provided, shaft portions 474 and 475 protruding to the front side, a rectangular wiring locking portion 478 attached to the back surface of one end of the base member 470, and a vertical center portion of the base member 470. and an opening 479 which extends from one end to the other end and is recessed.

As described above, the protrusions 472 and 473 are connecting portions that are inserted into the sliding grooves 411a and 411b of the front base 411 to connect the lower displacement member 440 and the front base 411. Therefore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the dimension between opposing inner walls of the sliding grooves 411a and 411b.

The standing wall 471a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the facing front case 481 and the base member 470 when the front case 481, which will be described later, is attached to the base member 470. The vertical dimensions are set to be larger than the above.

The shaft portions 474, 475 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of transmission gears 462, 463 of a transmission mechanism 460, which will be described later, and rotatably hold the transmission gears 462, 463. It is formed into a cylindrical shape with a small outer diameter.

The rack gear 476 has a tooth surface that meshes with a transmission gear 465, which will be described later. Thereby, the movable rack 464, which will be described later, slides relative to the base member 470, thereby allowing the transmission gear 465 to rotate.

The projecting wall 477 prevents the ball from falling to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 when a ball thrown from a ball throwing unit 600 (described later) is received in front of the base member 470 through the opening 451a of the decorative member 450. The space between the opposing wall portions formed in a substantially U-shape is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The wiring locking part 478 is a member for locking a flexible wiring (not shown) to a control board disposed on the back side of the base member 470, and connects one end of the flexible wiring to the base member 470. It is attached to the back side of the base member 470 via the. Thereby, even if the lower displacement member 440 is disposed so as to be displaceable with respect to the base member 410, it is possible to suppress the flexible wiring from becoming entangled.

Further, the wiring locking portion 478 includes a projection 478a projecting in a columnar shape on the back side. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 478a is set to a distance that protrudes further to the back side than the link member 430 connected to the back side, and is set to a distance that allows the projection 478a to come into contact with the front surface of the back base 412. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging rearward, and it is also possible to suppress the link member 430 from colliding with the back base 412.

The opening 469 is an opening that defines the sliding direction of the movable rack 464 disposed on the front side, and a guide plate 464d of the movable rack 464, which will be described later, is inserted inside.

The transmission mechanism 460 is a member disposed in front of the base member 470, and meshes with transmission gears 461, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface and slidably disposed in front of the base member 470, and a transmission gear rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464 and meshed with a rack gear 476. 465, a rack 466 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and disposed so as to be slidable in front of the movable rack 464, and a ball rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 466. The receiving portion 467 is mainly formed.

The transmission gear 461 is a gear in which the shaft portion of the drive motor KM2 is fitted into the shaft hole, and when the drive motor KM2 is attached to the base member 470 while being connected to the drive motor KM2, the base member 470 will be placed in

As described above, the transmission gears 462 and 463 are rotatably held by the base member with the shaft portions 474 and 475 of the base member 470 inserted into the shaft holes. Further, the transmission gears 461 to 463 are gear trains in mesh with each other, and when the transmission gear 461 is rotated by the drive motor KM2, the terminal transmission gear 463 is rotated.

The movable rack 464 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a shaft portion 464b projecting in a cylindrical shape from the front side, and upwardly projecting from one end side of the upper end surface. A contact plate 464c, a guide plate 464d protruding from one end to the other end at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, a rack guide portion 464e protruding toward the front side opposite to the guide plate 464d, and a rack guide portion 464e protruding downward from the other end. The collision portion 464f is mainly formed.

The rack gear 464a is a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. Therefore, by arranging the rack gear 464a and the transmission gear 463 in mesh with the base member 470, the movable rack 464 can be displaced by driving the drive motor KM2.

The shaft portion 464b is a shaft portion on which the transmission gear 465 is rotatably held, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 465.

The contact plate 464c is a contact portion that comes into contact with a distribution member 540 of a distribution unit 500, which will be described later, and displaces the distribution member 540. That is, the distributing member 540 can be displaced by displacing the movable rack 464. Note that the manner in which the contact plate 464c and the distribution member 540 come into contact will be described later.

As described above, the guide plate 464d is a plate-shaped body inserted into the opening 479 of the base member 470, and can define the direction of displacement of the movable rack 464 that is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2. That is, the movable rack 464, which is displaced by the drive of the drive motor KM2, can be displaced along the direction in which the opening 479 extends. In this embodiment, since the opening 479 extends in the left-right direction, the movable rack 464 can be slid in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

The rack guide portion 464e is a projecting wall for regulating the displacement direction of the rack 466, which will be described later, and is provided to protrude from one end to the other end in the left-right direction.

The collision portion 464f is a wall portion that displaces the displacement member 492 by coming into contact with a projection 492b of the displacement member 492, which will be described later, and is formed to protrude from the lower end of the movable rack 464. Further, the collision portion 464f is formed such that the other end thereof is inclined. Thereby, the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492 can be slid and displaced along the inclined surface thereof.

The rack 466 is formed from a horizontally long rod-shaped body that is rectangular in front view, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 466b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the other end toward the back side, and a shaft portion 466b that protrudes toward the front side. It is formed mainly by two sliding plates 466c and a recessed part 466d recessed from one end to the other end on the back side.

Rack gear 466a is meshed with transmission gear 465 attached to movable rack 464. As a result, when the rack 466 is placed in front of the movable rack 464, when the movable rack 464 slides, the transmission gear 465 rotates with the sliding displacement, and driving force is transmitted to the rack 466. . Therefore, rack 466 can be displaced relative to movable rack 464.

The shaft portion 466b is a projection inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 467, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. Thereby, the ball receiving part 467 can be held rotatably.

The sliding plate 466c is a projection inserted into an opening 481a of the front case 481, which will be described later, and is formed from a plate-shaped body having a predetermined thickness. Thereby, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the direction in which the opening 481a extends. can.

When the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, the recessed part 466d is in a state in which the rack guide part 464e is arranged inside. Thereby, when the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 and the rack 466 is displaced with respect to the movable rack 464, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e. can.

Here, in order to regulate the displacement direction of the rack 466, by forming the recessed portion 466d and the rack guide portion 464e, the displacement direction of the rack 466 can be defined in the extending direction of the rack guide portion 464e. However, since the lower displacement member 440 rotates while sliding in the left-right direction, depending on the displacement state of the lower displacement member 440, the state of engagement between the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 changes due to its own weight, and the transmission There was a risk that the driving force would not be properly transmitted from the gear 465 to the rack 466.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, two locations are formed to define the displacement direction of the rack 466: the sliding plate 466c, the opening 481a, the recessed portion 466d, and the rack guide portion 464e, so that the lower displacement member 440 When the displacement state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 change, it is possible to suppress changes in the meshing state of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466. As a result, the transmission of drive from the transmission gear 465 to the rack 466 can be prevented from being inhibited.

Further, the sliding plate 466c is formed to protrude from two places in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 57(a)) of the rack 466, and the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) At the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 is most extended with respect to the movable rack 464), it is arranged below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57).

Here, at the displacement end position, since the ball receiver 467 disposed on the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 performs a firing operation (rotational displacement) as described later, the ball receiver disposed on one end side of the rack 466 The other end of the rack is likely to be displaced due to the inertial force caused by the displacement of the portion 467. Therefore, a load is likely to be applied to the meshing surfaces of the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466, and there is a risk that the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 will be damaged.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the sliding plate 466c on the other end side (opposite side of the shaft portion 466b) is located at the displacement end position of the rack (the position where the rack 466 is most extended with respect to the movable rack 464). Since the rack 466 is disposed below the transmission gear 465 (lower side in FIG. 57), when the ball receiver 467 performs a firing operation (rotation operation), the rack 466 is in mesh with the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466. displacement can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the transmission gear 465 and the rack 466 can be suppressed.

The ball receiving part 467 is a part that holds a game ball, and is formed into a substantially U-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed so that the ball can be received in the inner part of the U-shape. That is, the inside of the U-shape of the ball receiving portion 467 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the ball. As a result, one ball can be placed inside the ball receiving portion 467. Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed mainly including a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end position of the U-shape, and leg portions 467a protruding downward from the lower outer circumferential surface.

As described above, the shaft hole 467b is a shaft hole for rotatably holding the ball receiving portion 467 on the rack 466, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 can be rotatably held by inserting the shaft portion 466b of the rack 466 into the shaft hole 467b. Further, after the shaft portion 466b is inserted into the shaft hole 467b, a biasing spring SP2 is arranged around the shaft of the shaft portion 466b, and a screw or the like having a head larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b is fastened to the shaft portion 466b. Ru. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the rack 466 in a state where it is biased clockwise in a front view. Note that a detailed description of the aspect of the ball receiving portion 467 will be given later.

The leg portion 467a is a protrusion that urges the ball receiving portion 467 to be rotated by the urging spring SP2, and with the U-shaped open portion of the ball receiving portion 467 facing upward, the tip thereof faces the front side described later. It is set at a position where it comes into contact with the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481. Thereby, rotation of the ball receiving portion 467 can be restricted.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 481 disposed on the front side of the base member 470 and a back case 482 disposed on the back side.

The front case 481 is formed into a rectangular and horizontally elongated plate shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 481a that extends in the left-right direction at approximately the middle position in the direction of gravity, a bottom wall portion 481b that protrudes from the lower end surface on the back side, and a bottom wall portion 481b that is formed protrudingly from the lower end surface on the back side. It is formed mainly with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 481a is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and as described above, when the front case 481 is disposed on the base member 470, the sliding plate 466c of the rack is inserted therein.

The bottom wall portion 481b is formed to protrude from the lower end of the front case 481 toward the back side, and extends in the left-right direction. Furthermore, when the front case 481 is disposed on the base member 470, the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is in contact with the top surface of the bottom wall portion 481b.

The back case 482 is a plate member for arranging the control board 491 on the back side of the base member 470, and has a laterally elongated rectangular outer shape smaller than the outer shape of the base member 470 when viewed from the front. Further, the back case 482 includes a protrusion 482a that projects toward the back side.

As described above, the protrusion 482a is a connecting portion connected to the through hole 432b of the second link member 432, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b. Therefore, after inserting the protrusion 482a into the through hole 432b, by fastening a screw or the like with a head larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 432b to the tip of the protrusion 482a, the back case 482 and the second link member 432 can be rotated. Can be connected in a state.

The decorative member 450 is formed into an external shape that resembles a pattern or character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 450 is formed mainly of a front side decorative part 451 arranged on the front side of the front case 481 and a back side decorative part 452 arranged on the back side of the back case 482. Note that in this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 450.

The front decoration part 451 is formed to have an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the front case 481 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front case 481. This makes it possible to make the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) disposed on the back side of the front decorative part invisible to the player.

The back side decoration part 452 is arranged behind the upper end of the front side decoration part 451. Thereby, the member arranged on the back side of the front side decoration part 451 from above the back side decoration part 452 can be made invisible to the player.

Further, a displacement member 492 is disposed on the same plane as the front decorative portion 451 in the front-rear direction. The displacement member 492 is formed mainly of a shaft portion 492a that projects toward the back side and a protrusion 492b.

The shaft portion 492a is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 481c of the front case 481. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 492a into the shaft hole 481c, the displacement member 492 can be rotatably connected to the front case. Further, a biasing spring SP3 is disposed on the distal end side of the shaft portion 492a inserted into the shaft hole 481c. Thereby, the displacement member 492 can be placed in a biased state. Note that a detailed explanation of the displacement of the displacement member 492 will be given later.

The shaft portion 492a can transmit a driving force rotating around the axis of the shaft portion 492a to the displacement member 492 by colliding with the collision portion 464f of the movable rack 464 described above. That is, the movable rack 464 can rotationally displace the displacement member 492 as the movable rack 464 is displaced.

Therefore, the lower displacement member 440 includes a displacement member 492 (arrangement member) displaceably disposed on the lower displacement member 440 (base member), and the ball receiving part 467 (displacement member) can hold a game ball. In addition, since the displacement member 492 is formed to be ejectable and can be displaced when the game ball is ejected from the ball receiving portion 467, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440.

That is, when a game ball is launched from the ball receiver 467, the center of gravity position of the lower displacement member 440 is changed by the weight of the game ball, for example, the change in the center of gravity position due to the launch of the game ball is offset. If a configuration is adopted in which the displacement member 492 is displaced in the direction shown in FIG. In addition, when a game ball is fired from the ball receiver 467, the lower displacement member 440 receives a reaction due to the firing of the game ball. When a configuration in which the lower displacement member 440 is displaced is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the lower displacement member 440 due to reaction.

Further, as described above, when the cam member 422 is placed in the second displacement state, a force PW1 in a direction that causes the cam member 422 to rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 422a (see FIG. 56(b)) and the force PW2 (see FIG. 56(b)) in which the cam member 422 rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 422a act in directions that cancel each other out, and the cam member 422 is acted upon by the first link member 431. Rotation due to force can be suppressed. Therefore, in the second displacement state, the cam member 422 and the link member 430 can be arranged in a stable state. Therefore, when a game ball is fired from the ball receiving part 467 of the lower displacement member 440 in the second displacement state position, the first link member 431 or the cam member 422 swings due to the inertia caused by the game ball's firing. can be suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 492 is displaced by the collision portion 464f colliding with the shaft portion 492a due to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, there is no need to separately provide a driving means for displacing the displacement member 492. . That is, the drive motor KM2 for displacing the ball receiving portion 467 can also be used as a drive means for displacing the displacement member 492. Therefore, the weight of the lower displacement member 440 can be reduced by that amount, and its wobbling can be easily suppressed.

Further, since the displacement member 492 can be displaced mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467, for example, the position of the ball receiving portion 467 is detected by a sensor device, and the displacement member 492 is moved in accordance with the detection result. It is not necessary to control the drive unit 492 by a driving means, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly, and the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member 492 with respect to the ball receiving portion 467 can be ensured.

Next, the transition of the transmission mechanism 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64. 61 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, FIG. 62 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position, and FIG. 63 is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position. It is a diagram. 64(a) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the lower displacement member 440.

Note that the first position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is located approximately in the center of the base member 470 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 61). The second position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is placed below the protruding wall 477 in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 62). The third position is a position where the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at the right end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction.

In addition, in FIGS. 61 to 64, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated with a chain line. Further, FIGS. 64(a) and (b) sequentially illustrate the transition state immediately before displacement to the third position, and FIG. 64(c) illustrates the lower displacement member 440 in the third position.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the first position of the lower displacement member 440, the movable rack 464 is located at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. Further, in the first position, the rack 466 is arranged in front of the movable rack 464, and the rack 466 and the movable rack 464 overlap in the front-rear direction. That is, like the movable rack 464, the rack 466 is also located at the left end in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the rack 466 is arranged at approximately the center position in the left-right direction with respect to the base member 470.

In the first position, as described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are gathered at the left end of the base member 470 in the left-right direction. Here, since the lower displacement member 440 rotates while sliding (displaces from the retracted state to the first and second extended states), the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged near the rotating shaft. It is desirable that the

According to this embodiment, since the transmission mechanism 460 that displaces the ball receiving part 467 is in a state in which the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are superimposed in the front and back (two-stage rack), the center of gravity of the transmission mechanism 460 is shifted by sliding the front base 411. It can be brought closer to the grooves 411a, 411b side (the rotating shaft side of the lower displacement member 440).

Therefore, as described above, when displacing the lower displacement member 440 from the retracted state position to the first and second extended state positions, by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position, the lower displacement member 440 The driving force when rotating and displacing can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

The displacement from the first position shown in FIG. 61 to the second position shown in FIG. 62 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2.

When the drive motor KM2 is driven from the first position, the transmission gear 461 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2 is rotated. As a result, transmission gear 462 and transmission gear 463 are rotated. When the transmission gear 463 is rotated, a driving force is transmitted from the rack gear 464a meshing with the transmission gear 463 to the movable rack 464, and the movable rack 464 is slid to the right with respect to the base member 470.

When the movable rack 464 is slid, the transmission gear 465 disposed on the movable rack 464 is rotated by the rack gear 476 of the base member 470 as the movable rack 464 is slid. As a result, driving force is transmitted to the rack 466 by the rack gear 466a meshed with the transmission gear 465. As a result, the rack 466 is slid to the right in the left-right direction with respect to the movable rack 464, and the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the second position.

The displacement from the second position shown in FIG. 62 to the third position shown in FIG. 63 is performed by driving the drive motor KM2, similarly to the displacement from the first position to the second position. Note that since the transmission of drive from the drive motor KM2 to the rack 466 is the same as the displacement from the first position to the second position, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the contact state between the leg portion 467a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is released. , is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2 disposed on the shaft portion 466b.

To explain in detail, in the first and second positions (the state in which the ball receiving part 467 is arranged on the left side in front view from the ball receiving part 467 in the third position), the tip of the leg part 467a of the ball receiving part 467 is It is brought into contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the case 481, and rotation clockwise in the front view around the shaft hole 467b by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP2 is restricted.

On the other hand, when the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip portion of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed on the right side of the end portion of the bottom wall portion 481b in front view, and It is arranged inside the recessed part 481b1 formed between the facing wall 471a. Therefore, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated about the axis of the shaft hole 467b by the urging force of the urging spring SP2. When the ball receiving part 467 is rotated in the third position, the tip of the leg part 467a comes into contact with the end surface of the bottom wall part 481b, and rotation of the ball receiving part 467 about the shaft hole 467b is restricted. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 40 degrees around the shaft hole 467b. Note that, hereinafter, the rotational displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the third position will be referred to as a firing operation.

Further, the ball receiving part 467 is provided with a recessed part 481b1 that is recessed in the orbital region when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced from the first position to the third position direction (first direction). In addition, the leg portion 467a is provided to be engaged with the recess 481b1, and the posture can be changed by the leg portion 467a being engaged with the recess 481b1. The structure can be simplified.

Further, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position, the collision portion 464f is slid to the right in front view due to the displacement of the movable rack 464, and collides with the protrusion 492b of the displacement member 492. As a result, the displacement member 492 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion 492a.

That is, when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the third position, the ball receiving part 467 is rotationally displaced, and the displacement member 492 is also rotationally displaced. Therefore, the ball receiving part 467 performs a firing operation and the ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467, and the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter, which causes the lower displacement member 440 to swing and the displacement member 492 to rotate. The inertial force can be applied in the opposite direction. As a result, when the ball is ejected from the inside of the lower displacement member 440, it is possible to suppress the lower displacement member 440 from swinging.

Next, referring to FIG. 65, the operation of receiving the ball into the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. 65(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. Note that in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c), transition states in which a ball is received into the ball receiving portion 467 are sequentially illustrated.

In addition, in FIGS. 65A to 65C, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated with a chain line.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 65(a) to (c), the horizontal direction when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state is indicated by a two-dot chain line with the symbol H1, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first tension state. The horizontal direction in the extended state is illustrated with the symbol of a virtual line H2. Further, the angle at which the lower displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted state position to the first extended state position is shown with the symbol angle θ. Note that the virtual line H1, the virtual line H2, and the angle θ are also illustrated in the figures after FIG. 65.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), in the lower displacement unit 400 in the retracted state (the state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is parallel to the imaginary line H1), the ball receiving part 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is in the first position. By displacing the game ball T1 to the opening 451a formed in the front decorative portion 451 of the lower displacement member 440, the game ball T1 is thrown from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later. The game ball T1 thrown into the opening 451a is thrown inside the protruding wall 477, and then into the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), when the game ball T1 is thrown into the opening 451a, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the second position. Therefore, as described above, in the second position, since the ball receiving part 467 is arranged below the protruding wall 477, the game ball T1 thrown inside the projecting wall 477 is transferred to the inside of the ball receiving part 467. Can throw the ball. By receiving the game ball T1 in the ball receiving part 467, the game ball T1 can be displaced in accordance with the operation of the ball receiving part 467.

As shown in FIG. 65(c), when the game ball T1 is thrown to the ball receiver, the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first position. Thereby, the ball receiving part 467 can be placed in the first position while the game ball T1 is placed in the ball receiving part 467.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a base member whose one side is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member. According to this gaming machine, in addition to an effect in which the base member is displaced between an extended position where the base member is extended into the game area and made visible to the player and a retracted position where the base member is retreated from the game area, the base member is It is possible to perform an effect in which the displacement member is displaced in a state where it is placed in the extended position.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, one side of the base member is disposed on the base member so that it can be displaced, so when the displaceable member is displaced, the backlash of the base member relative to the base member is caused with one side as the dead center. There was a problem in that sticking easily occurred. In particular, when the displacement member is displaced from a stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximum, and the base member is likely to wobble due to the influence of inertial force.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 starts to be displaced from the second position, and from the first position, which is closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (base member) than the first position. At least a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at a predetermined position with respect to the base member 410 (for example, the lower displacement member 440 extends into the gaming area and is visible to the player) In the first extended state), since displacement starts from the first position, it is possible to suppress rattling of the lower displacement member 440 of the base member. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the lower displacement member than the second position, by setting the first position as the displacement start position of the ball receiving part 467, the ball receiving part 467 can be moved. The weight can be kept close to the dead center when the lower displacement member 440 wobbles with respect to the base member 410, and the influence of inertial force when the ball receiver 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be reduced accordingly. This makes it difficult to act on the displacement member 440. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 440 can be easily suppressed.

Furthermore, as described above, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states) while slidingly displacing. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced with the game ball T1 disposed far from the rotation axis, centrifugal force is likely to be generated on the game ball T1, and the game ball T1 moves to the inner wall of the ball receiving part 467. There was a problem in that the collision between the ball and the game ball T1 caused a collision sound, or the ball receiving part 467 was damaged.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the lower displacement member 440 can be displaced to the first position after the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving part 467, so the game ball T1 can be moved around the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440. It can be placed nearby (closer to). Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced (displaced from the retracted state to the first and second extended states) with the game ball T1 received in the lower displacement member 440, centrifugal force is applied to the game ball T1. This can be prevented from occurring. As a result, when the game ball T1 and the ball receiving part 467 collide, it is possible to suppress generation of a collision sound or damage to the ball receiving part 467.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the lower displacement member 440, the transmission mechanism 460 for operating the ball receiving part 467 is formed of a movable rack 464, a transmission gear 465 (pinion gear), and a rack 466 (rack member), and the ball receiving part 467 is attached to the rack 466. Since the portion 467 is disposed, when starting the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 from the first position, not only the weight of the rack 466 but also the weight of the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are transferred to one side of the lower displacement member 440. (the fulcrum at which the lower displacement member 440 wobbles with respect to the base member 410). As a result, shaking of the lower displacement member 440 when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

Further, in a state where the game ball T1 is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the load on the lower displacement member 440 is increased by the load of the game ball T1. Therefore, as described above, by placing the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 is shifted toward the sliding grooves 411a, 411b of the front base 411 (the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440). side). Therefore, when displacing the lower displacement member 440 from the retracted state position to the first and second extended state positions, the lower displacement member 440 is rotationally displaced by setting the lower displacement member 440 to the first position. The actual driving force can be reduced. Therefore, the energy consumption of the drive motor KM1 that displaces the lower displacement member 440 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the ball payout operation will be described. 66(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440. Note that in FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c), transition states of the lower displacement member 440 in the ball discharging operation are sequentially illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 66(a) to (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the outer shape of the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is illustrated with a chain line. Further, the ball discharging operation is an operation of discharging the game ball T1 received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 from the exit opening 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

As shown in FIGS. 66(a) to (c), the dispensing operation of dispensing the ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 sequentially displaces the lower displacement member 440 from the first position to the third position. It is done by

That is, by receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving part 467 in the receiving operation and displacing the lower displacement member 440 arranged at the first position to the third position, the game ball T1 is moved inside the ball receiving part 467. Along with the displacement, it is transported to the exit opening 471 side. The game ball T1 that has been moved to the exit opening 471 side is applied with inertia force toward the exit opening 471 side by the sliding displacement of the ball receiving part 467 and the firing operation of the ball receiving part 467 in the third position, and the game ball T1 is moved to the exit opening 471 side. It is popped out from inside the section 467. Thereby, the ball can be ejected from the inside of the lower displacement member 440.

Here, when the ball receiving part 467 (displacement member) starts to be displaced from the first position, the displacement direction is a direction away from the position of the lower displacement member 440, so the ball receiving part 467 is in the first position. In the arranged state, the rack 466 (rack member) can be brought closer to the base member 410 from one side of the lower displacement member 440. That is, in order for the ball receiving portion 467 (rack 466) to be displaced in the direction away from one side of the lower displacement member 440, the rack 466 must be connected to the transmission gear 465 ( The portion on the rack gear 466a side where the pinion gear (pinion gear) is engaged is directed toward one side of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the weight of the rack 466 can be kept closer to one side of the lower displacement member 440 (the fulcrum when the lower displacement member 440 wobbles with respect to the base member 410), and as a result, the ball receiver 467 Shaking of the lower displacement member 440 when it is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

The ball receiving part 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction) and is formed so that its posture can be changed when the third position is reached. While it is possible to easily maintain the state held by the ball receiving part 467 and prevent the game ball T1 from falling off from the ball receiving part 467, when the ball receiving part 467 reaches the second position, the change in the attitude of the ball receiving part 467 can be used. Thus, the game ball T1 can be easily put out from inside the ball receiving part 467.

Note that when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally to the imaginary line H1), the ball receiver 467 shown in FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c) is released. When performing the operation, the game ball paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the inside of the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member The game ball paid out to the outside of 440 is thrown to the upper part of the ball holder 710 of the rotation unit 700.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, a discharge operation when two or more balls are thrown into the interior of the lower displacement member 440 will be described. 67(a) to (c) and FIG. 68(a) to (c) are front views of the lower displacement member 440.

Note that in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c) and FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c), transition states of the ejection operation are illustrated in order. 43(a) to (c) and FIG. 44(a) to (c), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 The outline of is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 67(a) to (c), when two or more balls are consecutively thrown from the distribution unit 500 (described later), the lower displacement member 440 is operated to receive the second ball. The game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiver 467.

That is, by displacing the ball receiving part 467 from the first position to the second position, the first game ball T1 can be thrown inside the ball receiving part 467, and the second game ball T2 can be thrown to the inside of the ball receiving part 467. It can be held inside the protruding wall 477 in contact with the game ball T1 (see FIG. 67(b)). By displacing the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position after receiving the first game ball T1 at the second position, the ball receiving portion 467 to the first position, the second game ball T2 can be dropped onto the displacement path of the ball receiver 467.

Here, in a game machine that displaces the ball received in the ball receiving part 467 at the second position to the third position by the displacement of the ball receiving part 467, if a malfunction occurs in the displacement of the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500, which will be described later. There is a possibility that more than the prescribed number of game balls may be thrown into the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, and in this case, there is a problem that the game balls exceeding the prescribed number may cause problems. For example, there was a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number would enter the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiver 467 and become caught in the movable part, causing damage. Alternatively, there was a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number would flow out of the game area (for example, to the back side of the game board 13 or inside the back case 300).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the ball receiving part 467 is formed to be movable from the second position to the first position opposite to the throwing direction of the ball. The orbital area can be expanded. Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in the sorting member 540 and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the expanded trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 will prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from being thrown. It can be accepted into the orbital region. As a result, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the transmission mechanism 460 that drives the ball receiver 467 and from flowing out of the gaming area, and as a result, the game balls exceeding the specified number Problems caused by balls can be made less likely to occur.

In addition, the ball receiver 467 is capable of receiving and holding one game ball T1 thrown from the distribution unit 500, which will be described later, at the second position, and also in the direction from the second position to the first position (second direction). ), so that after receiving one game ball at the second position, the ball receiving part 467 is moved from the second position to the third direction (the first direction). ), game balls exceeding the specified number can be thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467 (the area of the ball receiving part 467 in the first direction). Therefore, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be moved as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced in the third position direction (first direction).

In this case, the ball receiver 467 holds the first game ball T1, and the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiver 467. It is possible to separate the game ball T2 after the ball. Therefore, for example, by displacing the ball receiving part 467 in the third position direction (first direction), while maintaining the state in which the ball receiving member holds the first game ball T1, the second ball and subsequent games can be played. It becomes possible to eject only the ball T2 from the orbital region.

In addition, in the case where the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the second position to receive the first ball, and then the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the third position and the game ball T1 is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467, the second ball is The game ball T2 falls onto the upper part of the rack 466, and the second game ball T2 is thrown between the ball receiving part 467 and the transmission gear 465, and the second game ball T2 is moved to the lower displacement member 440. There is a risk that it will not be possible to discharge the liquid to the outside.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the receiving operation of receiving the ball into the ball receiving part 467 is performed after receiving the game ball T1 inside the ball receiving part 467 at the second position, and then at the first position opposite to the exit opening 471. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second game ball T2 from being unable to be ejected to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

In other words, in a gaming machine that is equipped with an accessory that performs a discharging operation to discharge a game ball thrown into the accessory, the movement of the member that discharges the ball (in this embodiment, the ball receiving part 467) is performed at a position that receives the ball. (second position) and the ball ejecting position (third position), when two or more game balls are thrown into the accessory, the ball is ejected from the member that ejects the balls. There is a possibility that the second game ball T2 may be ejected to the side opposite to the exit (output opening 471), but in this embodiment, after receiving the first game ball T1, the ball receiving part 467 is moved to the exit opening 471. By displacing the second game ball T2 to the first position on the opposite side, it is possible to throw the second game ball T2 between the ball receiving portion 467 and the exit opening 471.

As shown in FIGS. 68(a) to (c), after throwing the second game ball T2 onto the displacement path of the ball receiver 467, the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the third position before the firing operation. By doing so, the second game ball T2 can be rolled toward the exit opening 471 side while being in contact with the ball receiving portion 467. As a result, the second game ball T2 can be ejected from the exit opening 471.

In this case, the lower end surface of the U-shaped portion of the ball receiver 467 is located above the center position of the second game ball T2 thrown onto the displacement path of the ball receiver 467 (upper part of FIG. 68(a)). will be placed in Further, in a state where the leg portion 467a is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a is arranged at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the contact surface with the bottom wall portion 481b. Furthermore, since the right side of the U-shape (right side in FIG. 68(a)) of the ball receiving part 467 is arranged at the same position in the vertical direction as the right end of the leg part 467a, the second game ball The outer surface of T2 can be brought into contact with leg portion 467a.

In addition, since the leg portion 467a is tilted at approximately 45 degrees with respect to the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b, the leg portion 467a is in contact with the outer surface of the lower hemisphere of the second game ball T2 (lower hemisphere on the bottom wall portion 481b side). be touched. Thereby, when rolling the second game ball T2 toward the exit opening 471 side, it is possible to generate a force to lift the second game ball T2 upward on the inclined surface of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, the frictional force between the second game ball T2 and the bottom wall portion 481b when the second game ball T2 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b can be reduced. As a result, when rolling the second game ball T2 toward the exit opening 471 side, it is possible to suppress the ball receiving portion 467 from being stopped.

In other words, the leg portion 467a protrudes from the ball receiving portion 467 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction), and the protruding tip thereof aligns with the trajectory of the ball receiving portion 467. Since it is formed so that it can come into contact with the lower half of the game ball thrown into the area (that is, the second and subsequent game balls T2), the ball receiving part 467 moves from the first position to the third position (first direction). When the game ball is displaced to , the game ball can be moved while pushing its lower half with the leg portions 467a. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily ejected from the orbital region of the ball receiver 467.

In addition, a leg portion 467a is provided between the first game ball T1 held in the ball receiving portion 467 and the game ball thrown to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 (the second and subsequent game balls T2). By intervening, it is possible to secure an interval between the first game ball T1 and the second and subsequent game balls T2 by the protruding length of the leg portion 467a. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the first game ball T1 is held by the ball receiving portion 467, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the orbital region.

Furthermore, by engaging with the recess 481b1, the leg portion 467a serves both the role of changing the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 and the role of moving the game ball while pushing its lower half, so the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. This can reduce product costs.

Further, since the size of the recessed portion 481b1 in the direction from the first position to the third position (first direction) is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball, the size of the recessed portion 481b1 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the size of the recessed portion 481b1 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (i.e., the size of the recessed portion 481b1). When the second and subsequent game balls T2) are moved as the ball receiver 467 is displaced in the first direction, they can easily pass through the recess 481b1. As a result, the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily ejected from the orbital region.

As described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is placed in the retracted state, the recovery port 411f is placed below the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440. Therefore, the game ball T2 discharged in the retracted state is thrown to the collection port 411f.

On the other hand, when the lower displacement unit 400 is placed in the first extended state, the recovery port 411f is located below the emission opening 471. Further, the recovery port 411f is opened on the upper side. Therefore, the ejected game ball T2 is thrown to the collection port 411f.

That is, since the recovery port 411f is disposed vertically below the end of the base member 470 on the first direction side (erected wall 471a side) and has an opening vertically above, the recovery port 411f The game ball (that is, the second ball and subsequent game balls T2) that is moved as the ball moves in the third position direction (first direction) and is ejected from the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467 is received from the opening of the collection port 411f. can be recovered.

Further, the opening of the collection port 411f is vertically aligned with the end of the base member 470 in the first direction (on the standing wall 471a side) at least in each of the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state. It is placed in the downward direction. As a result, even if the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced to the retracted position, the first extended state, or the second extended state, the game ball (i.e., the second ball) that is ejected from the orbital area of the ball receiver 467 Subsequent game balls T2) can be received and collected through the opening of the collection member.

67(a) to (c) and FIG. 68(a) to (c) when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state (the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged horizontally to the imaginary line H1). When performing the discharging operation of the ball receiving portion 467 shown in , the game ball paid out to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 is thrown into the inside of the collection port 411f. In addition, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state (a state in which the longitudinal direction of the lower displacement member 440 is rotated by an angle θ from the virtual line H1), the lower displacement member 440 The game ball paid out to the outside of 440 is thrown to the collection port 411f as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the configuration when the second game ball T2 is ejected from the exit opening 471 will be described. 69(a) is a partial enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXa of FIG. 68(b), and FIG. 69(b) is a partial enlarged view of the lower displacement member 440 in the range LXIXb of FIG. 68(a). It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the third position immediately before the firing operation, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the side surface of the ball receiver 467 on the side of the standing wall 471a, and the exit opening is 471 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440.

In this case, the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is inserted between the bottom wall portion 481b and the standing wall 471a, and when the ball receiving portion 467 rotates, the game ball T2 and the ball receiving portion 467 are brought into contact with each other. By doing so, the rotational force of the ball receiving portion 467 can be transmitted to the game ball T2. As a result, the game ball T2 can be easily ejected from the exit opening 471. Moreover, the ball receiving part 467 can be returned to the state before the rotation operation by using the repulsive force when the ball receiving part 467 is brought into contact with the game ball T2. Therefore, when discharging the game ball T2 thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467, it is possible to suppress the first game ball T1 held in the ball receiving part 467 from falling off.

Furthermore, the lower displacement member 440 is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in a trajectory area when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced from the second position to the third position direction (first direction), and has a recessed part. 481b1 is provided with an erected wall 471a located on the first direction side, and the second and subsequent game balls thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467 are disposed in the first direction as the ball receiving part 467 is displaced. When the game ball T2 is moved, it comes into contact with the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving part 467, and the posture change of the ball receiving part 467 can be regulated, so that the first game ball T1 can be moved. While maintaining the state held by the ball receiving part 467, only the second and subsequent game balls can be easily ejected from the orbital area.

That is, since the standing wall 471a is erected at a height from the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 481b to the erecting tip that is lower than the radius of the game ball, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 in the first direction When the game ball T2 is moved by being pushed by the legs, the lower half of the game ball T2 comes into contact with the erected wall 471a, making it easier for the game ball to get over the erected wall 471a. In this case, the game ball T2 is brought into contact with the ball receiver 467 (that is, the game ball T2 is interposed between the ball receiver 467 and the standing wall 471a), and a reaction force is applied from the game ball T2 to the ball receiver 467. Therefore, it is possible to control the change in the posture of the ball receiving part, and it is possible to suppress the first game ball held by the ball receiving part 467 from falling off. As a result, while maintaining the state in which the first game ball is held by the ball receiving portion 467, only the second and subsequent game balls T2 can be easily discharged from the game area.

On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls T2 are not thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467, no game ball is interposed between the standing wall 471a and the ball receiving part 467, so the leg By engaging the portion 467a with the recessed portion 481b1, the attitude of the ball receiving portion 467 can be changed. As a result, the first game ball T1 (that is, the game ball held in the ball receiver 467) can be easily ejected from the ball receiver 467 by utilizing the change in the attitude of the ball receiver 467.

Next, the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72. 70(a) is a top view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 70(b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 500. 71 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit 500, and FIG. 72 is an exploded rear perspective view of the distribution unit 500.

As shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, the sorting unit 500 includes a base plate 520 formed in a plate-shaped body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a space between the base plate 520 that is attached to the front side of the base plate 520 and that faces the base plate 520. a path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of downstream paths through which balls can flow; a distribution member 540 that is rotatably attached to the back side of the base plate 520; and a distribution member 540 that is attached to the end surface of the base plate 520. and an extended path member 530 that extends the downward flow path of the ball formed between the opposing path forming member 510 and the path forming member 510.

The base plate 520 includes a cylindrical shaft portion 523 protruding toward the back side, a first opening 521 formed through the shaft portion 523 in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft portion 523, and a radius smaller than the first opening 521. A second opening 522 penetratingly formed in a large arc shape, a rolling portion 525 formed in a U-shaped cross section with an open upper end side on the side surface of the upper end and extending in the left-right direction, and a hook-shaped protrusion on the back side. It is formed mainly with a locking part 524.

The shaft portion 523 is a shaft that is inserted into a shaft hole 545 of a distribution member 540 to be described later and rotatably attaches the distribution member 540 to the base member, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 545. be done.

The first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are openings into which a regulating plate 541 and a storage plate 542 of a distribution member 540, which will be described later, are inserted, and have a width larger than the thickness of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542. It is formed. Further, since the distribution member 540 is rotatably attached to the base plate 520, the first opening 521 and the second opening 522 are larger than the circumferential dimension of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 when viewed from the front. The length of the arc is large.

The locking portion 524 is an engaging portion that locks the biasing spring SP4 with a locking portion 544 formed on the distribution member 540, and one end of the biasing spring SP4 is locked.

The rolling portion 525 is a bottom surface on which the ball rolls, and is formed to be inclined downward toward one end on the left side in rear view (left side in FIG. 70(b)) and has a U-shaped curved shape. It is formed larger than the outer shape of a sphere. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be prevented from stopping at the rolling portion, and the ball can be rolled toward one end.

Further, the rolling portion 525 includes a plurality of protrusions 525b that protrude toward the inside of the U shape from the front and rear sides, and an opening 525a that opens toward the back side at one end.

The protrusions 525b are formed on the front and rear sides at regular intervals, and the protrusions 525b formed on the front side and the protrusions 525b formed on the back side are formed at alternate positions when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can collide with the protrusion 525b, so that the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be slowed down.

Here, as described above, the ball is thrown to the ball receiver 467 of the lower displacement unit 400 with the ball receiver 467 placed in the first position (Figs. 65(a) and 65(b) )reference). Therefore, when the ball throwing speed of the game ball rolling on the rolling part 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3 is increased, the game ball is thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 440 before the ball receiving part 467 is moved to the second position. There is a risk that it will be done.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 525b are formed to protrude from the inner surface of the rolling portion 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3, and the game balls passing through the rolling portion 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3 are Since resistance can be applied, the speed of the game ball passing through the third ball throwing route KR3 can be slowed down. Therefore, since the time required when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced from the switching position (first position) to the receiving position (second position) can be increased accordingly, the game ball can be securely placed in the ball receiving part 467. can be received by. Further, since the displacement speed required for the ball receiving portion 467 can be reduced, the output of the displacement speed of the drive motor KM2 can be reduced, and product costs can be reduced.

The opening 525a is formed to be open to the back side of one end of the rolling portion 525, and its outer shape when viewed from the back is larger than the size of a sphere. Therefore, the ball rolling toward one end of the rolling portion 525 is discharged from the opening 525a.

The path forming member 510 is formed in a rectangular and vertically elongated plate shape with a horizontal width smaller than that of the base plate 520, and has a plurality of walls larger than the outer diameter of the game ball on the back side. By forming the distance between the opposing sides to be larger than the outer diameter of the sphere, a plurality of downward flow paths for the spheres are formed inside the sphere.

The path forming member 510 has a first opening 511 that opens on the upper end surface, a first ball throwing path KR1 formed between opposing side walls of the first opening 511, and a second ball throwing path KR1 connected to the first ball throwing path KR1. KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3, and the second opening 512 and the third opening 513 that open on the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the ends of the second ball throwing path KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3, are formed to penetrate in the front and back direction. A fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed by a plurality of openings 514, 515, 516 and the walls on the back side of the openings 514, 515, 516, and a fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed on the side surface of the path forming member 510 at the end of the fourth ball throwing path KR4. The fourth opening 517 is mainly formed.

The first opening 511 is an opening for allowing balls thrown from a ball throwing unit 600 (described later) to flow into the distribution unit, and is formed on the side surface of the upper end of the path forming member 510, and its outer shape is smaller than that of the ball. Formed large. Further, the first opening 511 is connected to the ball throwing unit 600 and allows a ball thrown from the ball throwing unit 600 to flow into the first opening 511 .

The first ball throwing path KR1 is a path through which the ball flowing from the first opening 511 flows down between the opposing base plate 520 and the path forming member 510, and is formed by extending downward. Further, the fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed to extend approximately one third of the path forming member 510 in the vertical direction, and its downstream end is connected to the second ball throwing path KR2 and the third ball throwing path KR3. be done. That is, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 is configured to be able to flow down the second ball throwing path KR2 or the third ball throwing path KR3.

As described above, the second ball throwing route KR2 is a route formed by being connected to the first ball throwing route KR1, and its downstream end is connected to the second opening 512. That is, when a ball that flows down from the first opening 511 and flows down the first ball throwing path KR1 flows down to the second ball throwing path KR2, it is discharged from the second opening 512 to the outside of the distribution unit 500.

The second opening 512 is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for recovering the balls. Therefore, the balls discharged from the second opening are collected by the collection path. Moreover, inside the second opening 512 (downstream end of the second ball throwing path KR2), a sensor device SE2 that detects passage of the game ball is arranged. Therefore, by detecting the number of game balls passing through the third winning opening 82 with the sensor device SE1 and detecting the number of game balls passing through the second ball throwing path KR2 with the sensor device SE2, the third ball throwing The number of game balls passing through route KR3 can be detected.

That is, it is possible to detect whether a predetermined number of game balls (one ball) are stored upstream of the regulation plate 541, which will be described later, based on the difference between the sensor device SE1 and the sensor device SE1. For example, when the third electric accessory 82a is opened once, the number of balls passing through the third prize opening 82 (sensor device SE1) is eight, and the number of balls passing through the second ball throwing route KR2 (sensor device SE2) is eight. If the number is seven, it can be detected that one game ball is flowing down (storing) the third ball throwing path KR3.

As described above, the third ball throwing route KR3 is a route formed by being connected to the first ball throwing route KR1, and the downstream end thereof is connected to the third opening 513. That is, when the ball that flows down from the first opening 511 and flows down the first ball throwing route KR1 flows down to the third ball throwing route KR3, it is discharged from the third opening 513.

The third opening 513 is formed above the other end side of the rolling portion 525 of the base plate 520 (the end side opposite to the opening 525a). Therefore, the ball discharged from the third opening 513 is thrown inside the rolling portion 525. That is, the ball thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 is thrown to the rolling portion 525 via the third opening 513.

The openings 514 to 516 are each formed on the back side of the third winning hole 82 formed on the game board 13, and the ball that wins the third winning hole 82 is thrown. That is, when a ball flowing down the game area on the front side of the game board 13 enters the third winning opening 82, the ball is thrown into the distribution unit 500 from the openings 514 to 516.

The fourth ball throwing path KR4 is formed so as to be connected to the openings 514 to 516, and is connected to one path on the downstream side, and connected to the fourth opening formed in the lower end surface of the path forming member 510. The fourth opening is connected to a recovery path (not shown) for recovering the balls. Therefore, the ball won in the third prize opening 82 of the game board 13 is thrown to the fourth ball throwing path KR4 of the distribution unit 500, and then discharged from the fourth opening 517 and collected.

The extension path member 530 has a U-shaped cross section with an open bottom, and extends in the left-right direction. Further, the extended path member 530 is formed so that the inner diameter of the U-shape is larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Therefore, by being disposed above the rolling part 525 of the base plate 520, the ball thrown to the upper part of the rolling part 525 can be thrown inside the rolling part 525 and the extension path member 530, and , the balls rolling on the rolling portion can be prevented from falling from the rolling portion 525.

Further, the extension path member 530 is formed with protrusions 531 that are formed at regular intervals at the same positions in the left-right direction as the protrusions 525b formed on the rolling portion 525. Thereby, similarly to the protrusion 525b, the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 can be reduced.

The distribution member 540 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front with one end long, and has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The distribution member 540 includes a regulating plate 541 and a storage plate 542 that are plate-shaped and protrude from the front side, a shaft hole 545 that is formed through the upper end, and a hook-shaped locking part 544 that is formed on the back side. It is formed mainly by

As described above, the shaft hole 545 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 523 of the base plate 520 is inserted, and is formed to penetrate in the front-back direction. The distribution member 540 can be rotated by the base plate 520 by inserting the shaft part 523 of the base plate 520 into the shaft hole 545 and fastening a screw or the like with a larger head than the shaft hole to the shaft part 523 from the back side. It is installed in a perfect condition.

The regulating plate 541 is disposed at a connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2 through the first opening 521 to prevent the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 from flowing into the second ball throwing path KR2. This plate member is formed to protrude toward the front side from the front end surface of the shaft hole 545, and the distance from the base plate 520 toward the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the regulating plate 541 is formed to be curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545. Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545, the displacement area of the regulation plate 541 can be minimized.

The storage plate 542 is a plate member that is disposed on the second ball throwing route KR2 through the second opening 522 and stores balls flowing down the second ball throwing route KR2 on the upstream side of the storage plate 542. It is formed so as to protrude toward the front side from the front end face, and the protruding distance from the base plate 520 toward the front side is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere.

Further, the storage plate 542 is formed to be curved into an arc centered on the axis of the shaft hole 545, and the radius of the arc is larger than the radius of the curved portion of the regulating plate 541. Therefore, the storage plate 542 is formed at a position farther away from the shaft hole 545 than the regulating plate 541 is. Thereby, the regulation plate 541 can be made to protrude into the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2, and the storage plate 542 can be arranged on the second ball throwing path KR2. Furthermore, the displacement area when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 545 can be minimized.

The protrusion 543 is a drive transmission member that applies rotational driving force to the distribution member 540 when collided with the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 described above, and protrudes toward the other end of the distribution member 540. It is formed. That is, the protrusion 543 to which the driving force is transmitted is formed on the side opposite to one end where the shaft hole 545 serving as the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is formed. Thereby, the force with which the abutting plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides can be reduced.

Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor KM3 that displaces the abutting plate 464c can be reduced, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 can be reduced. Moreover, since the energy when the abutment plate 464c collides with the protrusion 543 during driving can be reduced, the collision sound when the abutment plate 464c and the protrusion 543 collide can be reduced. Note that detailed aspects of the collision between the contact plate 464c and the protrusion 543 will be described later.

Further, a circularly bulging portion 543a is formed at a portion where the protruding tip of the protruding portion 543 contacts the abutting plate 464c. By bringing the contact plate 464c into contact with the bulging portion 543a, the contact area between the contact plate and the distribution member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, when rotating and displacing the sorting member 540, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance between the protrusion 543 (bulging portion 543a) and the contact plate 464c. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor KM3 from increasing.

The locking portion 544 is a portion that locks the biasing spring SP4 with the locking portion 524 of the base plate 520, as described above. Therefore, since the other end side of the distribution member 540 can always apply a rotational force to the locking portion 524 side, it is possible to suppress the distribution member 540 from shaking due to vibrations of the Pachinko machine 10 or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the flow path of the balls of the distribution unit 500 will be described in detail. FIG. 73 is a sectional view of the distribution unit 500 taken along the line LXXIII-LXXIII in FIG. 70(a). In addition, in FIG. 73, the distribution member 540 is illustrated by a chain line. Further, FIG. 73 shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is placed at the storage position.

Here, the state in which the distribution member 540 is arranged at the storage position is the state in which the distribution member 540 is rotated by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 and the storage plate 542 is placed on the second ball throwing path KR2. .

As shown in FIG. 73, the first ball throwing path KR1 is such that the lower end side of the downstream path is tilted toward the center portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 73), and the tilted portion is gentle. It is curved into an S-shape. Further, the S-shaped curved tip portion is connected to the third ball throwing path KR3, and the second ball throwing path KR2 is tilted at the end of the first ball throwing path KR1 in a direction opposite to the direction in which the first ball throwing path KR1 is tilted. are connected in the same state.

Thereby, by causing the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 to collide with the lower surface of the tilting portion, the direction of the ball flowing down can be directed from the direction of gravity to the direction in which the first ball throwing path KR1 is tilted. Therefore, the ball can be caused to flow down toward the entrance of the third ball throwing path KR3 (the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3). Therefore, in a state where the distribution member 540 is not disposed, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 can be thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3.

Here, there is a downstream path along which the game ball flows, a first branch path and a second branch path that are branched from the downstream path, and a game ball that has flown down the downstream path is directed to either the first branch path or the second branch path. A game machine that distributes games is known.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are alternately distributed one ball at a time to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, so the game balls flowing down the flow passage are distributed to the first branch passage. It is distributed equally (that is, half each) to the passage and the second branch passage. That is, there was a problem in that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage could not be changed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the ball receiving part 467 is formed to be displaceable and receives game balls from the third ball throwing path KR3, and the contact plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving part 467 comes into contact with the distribution member 540. Since the distribution member 540 is displaced by contacting and being displaced, the number of game balls to be distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route can be changed according to the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3 can be changed.

Note that the distributing member 540 can be displaced by using the displacement of the ball receiver 467, so it is not necessary to separately provide a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displacing the distributing member 540. It can be made unnecessary. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and product costs can be reduced.

In addition, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the distribution member 540 is controlled using position detection by a sensor device or drive by a drive means, reliability of the distribution operation of the distribution member may decrease due to malfunction due to poor detection or control. However, according to this embodiment, the destinations to which balls are distributed by the distribution member 540 can be switched in mechanical synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiver 467, so that the reliability of the distribution operation can be improved.

In particular, since the ball receiving section 467 is a member that receives game balls from the rolling section 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3, the distribution destination of the distribution member 540 is changed to the third ball sending path in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiving section 467. By switching to , it is possible to ensure that the displacement member receives the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3.

Furthermore, in the conventional gaming machine, the game balls flowing down the flowing path are only distributed to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, so that it is insufficient to provide players with interest.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 (distribution means) is set to the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), the flow of game balls in the third ball is restricted. , since it is equipped with a storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) that allows the game balls to flow down in the third ball throwing path KR3 when the destination to which the distribution member 540 distributes is the second ball throwing path KR2 (second branch path). , can provide interest to players.

That is, when the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third ball throwing route, the flow of the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 is restricted and the game balls are stored in the third ball throwing route KR3, and at the same time, the regulation plate 541 When the distribution destination according to 541 is set to the second ball throwing route KR2, it is possible to allow the game balls to flow down the third ball throwing route KR3, and to allow the game balls stored in the third ball throwing route KR3 to flow down (release). can. As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 (downstream route) to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2, the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 are A downward (opening) action can be formed. Furthermore, these storage and release operations can be performed alternately in conjunction with the distribution operation. As a result, it is possible to provide interest to the player.

Further, since a distribution member 540 (integral member) is provided in which a regulation plate 541 (distribution means) and a storage plate 542 (flow state changing means) are integrally formed, the regulation plate 541 and storage plate 542 are operated. The structure can be simplified and the reliability of operation can be improved. In other words, when the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed separately, they are two parts, so it is possible to simplify the operation of these two parts. This complicates the structure and reduces the reliability of operation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be formed as a single component, so the structure can be simplified accordingly, reducing product cost and improving operational reliability. be able to.

Further, the distribution member 540 is formed to be movable between a storage position (first state position) and a regulation position (second state position), and when the distribution member 540 is displaced to the storage position, the regulation plate 541 is The third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) is placed in a position where the distribution destination is the destination, and the storage plate 542 is placed in a position to restrict the flow of game balls in the third ball throwing path KR3, and the distribution member 540 is displaced to the restriction position. In the state in which the distribution member 540 By displacing the ball at two positions (storage position and regulation position), in addition to distributing the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 (flowing path) to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route, 3. It is possible to form an action that temporarily stops the falling of the game balls distributed to the ball throwing path KR3 (storage) and an action that causes the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (release), and also allows these storage. The opening and opening operations can be alternately formed in conjunction with the distribution operation. That is, by simplifying the structure, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve operational reliability.

The sorting member 540 (integral member) is formed to be rotatable, and the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed to be able to move in and out of the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path), and the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) By protruding toward KR3, the falling of game balls is restricted, and since the distribution member 540 is formed into an arc-shaped curved shape centered on the rotation axis, the third ball throwing path KR3 is controlled so that the restriction plate 541 can come and go. The area of the hole (recess 519) opened in the inner wall of the can be reduced.

Since the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is arranged in such a manner that the side facing upstream of the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) is concave, the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third ball throwing path KR3. In the initial state (i.e., the state in which only the distal end side of the flow state changing means is protruded into the passageway), the shape of the distal end side of the storage plate 542 can be arranged in a direction that facilitates regulating the flow of game balls; The flow of game balls distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3 can be easily regulated.

Furthermore, in a state where the storage plate 542 is maximally protruded to the third ball throwing path and restricts the game balls from flowing down, the game balls can be held stably by the concave portion of the storage plate 542, so that it is possible to suppress the game balls from going wild.

The sorting unit 500 includes a biasing spring SP4 (biasing means) that applies a biasing force to the distributing member 540 (integral member) and biases the regulation plate 541 in the direction of protruding into the third ball throwing path (first branch path). ), and the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540. , it is possible to easily maintain the distribution member 540 in a position in which the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third emergency route (i.e., the storage position).

In this case, since the distance from the storage plate 542 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540 is made larger than the distance from the regulation plate 541 to the rotation axis of the distribution member 540, when a falling game ball collides with the rotation axis, Since the distance from the ball is large, the storage plate 542 is likely to retract even when the same impact force is applied, and the biasing direction of the biasing spring SP4 is set to be the direction in which the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third ball throwing path KR3. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from being recessed into the recess 519 by the biasing force.

In addition, the distribution member 540 (integrated member) rotates the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) in the direction of protruding into the third ball throwing path (first branch path) due to its own weight, so it The sorting member 540 can be easily maintained in a position where the storage plate 542 protrudes toward the third ball throwing path KR3 (ie, the storage position). Therefore, when a game ball collides, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the recess 519 by its own weight.

Furthermore, even if the biasing spring SP4 (biasing means) falls off, the distribution member 540 is maintained in a posture in which the regulating plate 541 protrudes toward the third ball throwing path KR3 due to its own weight, and the game player goes to the third ball throwing path. It is possible to suppress the ball from flowing down.

Furthermore, the ball receiver 467 is provided with a biasing spring SP4 that applies a biasing force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 on either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2. 540 in a direction opposed to the direction of the biasing spring SP4, the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the other of the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2, and the biasing force of the biasing spring , the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is returned to either the third ball throwing route KR3 or the second ball throwing route KR2.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 from being changed inadvertently. In this case, after the distribution member 540 is displaced with the displacement of the ball receiver 467 and the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before switching can be performed by the biasing force of the biasing spring SP4. Therefore, it is not necessary for the abutment plate 464c that interlocks with the ball receiving portion 467 to be in abutment with the distribution member 540. That is, the abutment plate 464c that interlocks with the ball receiving portion 467 can be separated from the distribution member 540. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the ball receiving portion 467 can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, displacement of the distribution member 540 will be described. 74(a) and (b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 500 in the range LXXIV of FIG. 73. Note that FIG. 74(a) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is located at the storage position, and FIG. 74(b) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is located in the restriction position. In addition, the state in which the distribution member 540 is disposed at the regulation position means that the abutment plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 collides with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540, and the distribution member 540 moves around the axis of the shaft hole 545. This is a state in which the regulating plate 541 is arranged at the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3 after being rotated.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), when the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position, the storage plate 542 is placed on the third ball throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 541 is placed on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is located inside a recess 518 formed in the wall of.

In this case, the distance L1 between the end of the tip of the storage plate 542 protruding inward of the third ball throwing path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball throwing path KR3 that faces the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, a ball thrown from upstream of the third ball throwing path KR3 (first ball throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542.

Further, the distance L2 from the inside of the curved portion of the storage plate 542 to the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3 is set to be larger than the radius of the ball, and is set to be larger than the diameter of the ball. is set small. Thereby, the number of balls stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 can be set to one ball. Note that, hereinafter, the state of the distribution unit 500 in which one ball is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 542 will be referred to as a storage state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 74(b), when the distribution member 540 is placed in the restriction position, the restriction plate 541 is placed at the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3. , the storage plate 542 is disposed inside the recess 519 formed in the wall on the back side of the path forming member 510.

In this case, the distance L3 between the end of the tip of the regulating plate 541 protruding inward of the first ball throwing path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 541 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 540 between the regulation position and the storage position, a ball thrown along the first ball throwing path KR1 is thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third ball throwing path KR3; A state can be created in which a ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 cannot flow into the third ball throwing path KR3 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

Therefore, by displacing one distribution member 540, when the ball is divided into two downstream paths from one downstream path, it is possible to reliably switch the downstream path of the ball to either one.

In addition, the biasing spring SP4 applies a biasing force to the distribution member 540 to maintain the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 on the second ball throwing route KR2, so that when the ball receiving section 467 is unable to receive game balls, It is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 from being switched to the third ball throwing path.

Further, the regulation plate 541 (distributing means) is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) or the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path), and its appearance and retraction position is Since it is an inner wall on the downstream end of the first ball throwing route KR1 on an extended line in the downstream direction, the regulating plate 541 can be made to protrude at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first ball throwing route KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the regulation plate 541 starts to protrude into the downstream passageway or the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passageway) to when the game balls can be sorted. As a result, the distribution destination can be reliably switched by the regulation plate 541.

In addition, the regulation plate 541 (distributing means) is projected into the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branching path) to move the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) to the second ball throwing path ( Since the protruding direction of the regulating plate 541 is set to point toward the upstream end of the second ball throwing route KR2, the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 make a protruding action. When the game ball comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the regulation plate, the game ball can be pushed into the second ball throwing path KR along with the protruding operation of the regulation plate. As a result, the distribution to the second ball throwing path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

In this embodiment, the regulation plate 541 of the distribution member 540 is arranged at a position closer to the shaft hole 545 than the storage plate 542, but the regulation plate 541 is arranged at a position farther from the shaft hole 545 than the regulation plate 541 is. may be placed in That is, the axis of the distribution member 540 may be arranged at the position of the point P on the downstream side of the third ball throwing path KR3 as shown in FIGS. 74(a) and 74(b). . In this case, the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 formed in the distribution member 540 are arranged at the same position as in this embodiment.

With the shaft hole 545 disposed at the point P, the displacement speed of the regulating plate 541 can be made faster than that of the storage plate 542 when the distribution member 540 is rotationally displaced. Therefore, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the restriction position as described later, the restriction plate 541 can be quickly projected onto the flow path. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 from flowing into the third ball throwing path KR3 at the timing when the distribution member 540 is switched from the regulation position to the storage position.

Moreover, in this case, the shape of the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 when viewed from the front is formed into an arc shape centered on the point P. Thereby, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the restriction position to the storage position (or the opposite), the displacement area of the restriction plate 541 and the storage plate 542 can be minimized. Further, the recesses 518 and 519 that receive the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 outside the third ball throwing path KR3 have a concave shape along the displacement locus of the regulation plate 541 and the regulation plate 541.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, a case will be described in which two or more balls are thrown from the ball throwing path when the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position. FIGS. 75(a) and 75(b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500. FIGS. 76(a) and 76(b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 74(a). Further, from FIG. 75(a) to FIG. 76(b), transition states of the sphere when the sphere is introduced are sequentially illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 75(a) to 76(b), the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position.

As shown in FIGS. 75(a) and 75(b), when the first game ball T1 is thrown to the first ball throwing route KR1 with the distribution member 540 placed in the storage position, as described above, , the game ball T1 is thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 and stopped above the storage plate 542.

In this case, since the storage plate 542 is located downstream from the upper end of the third ball sending path KR3 by a distance between the radius and the diameter of the ball, some of the balls stopped at the upper part of the storage plate 542 is projected toward the first ball throwing path KR1 (see FIG. 75).

Therefore, as described above, the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed to be able to roll on the inner wall on the gravity direction side. The storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means) is formed to be able to move in and out of the third ball throwing path KR3 from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity, so the game ball is not stored until the storage plate 542 starts protruding into the third ball throwing path KR3. The time required to reach a state where the flow of water can be regulated can be shortened. As a result, the distribution destination of the regulation plate 541 is switched from the second ball throwing route KR2 (second branch path) to the third ball throwing route KR3, and when the game ball is distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3, the game ball is The protrusion of the storage plate 542 can be easily adjusted in time to regulate the flow down.

Further, the regulation plate 541 is formed so as to be able to protrude and retract from the third ball throwing path KR3, and in a state where it is maximally projected into the third ball throwing path KR3, a force component in the direction of the projection is applied from the game ball to the storage plate 542. Therefore, when regulating the flow of the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3, it is possible to suppress the storage plate 542 from sinking into the recess 519 due to the impact when the game balls collide. Therefore, it is possible to easily control the flow of game balls.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76(a) and (b), when the second game ball T2 is thrown to the first ball throwing route KR1 when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, the game ball T2 is The ball is thrown in the direction from the first ball throwing path KR1 to the upper end of the third ball throwing path KR3. Since the game ball T1 is stopped at the upper end of the third ball throwing path KR3, the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

In this case, as described above, since the game ball T1 is in a state of protruding toward the first ball throwing path KR1 side, the game ball T2 is not thrown inside the third ball throwing path KR3, but is sent to the second ball throwing path KR2. Since the game ball T2 can be guided, it is possible to throw the game ball T2 to the second ball throwing route KR2 without staying inside the third ball throwing route KR3. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the ball throwing on the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2.

That is, the inner wall of the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) on the side facing the second ball throwing path KR2 (second branch path) directs the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 to the third ball throwing path KR3 (first ball path). Since it is formed so that the last game ball out of a specified number (one ball) of game balls stored in the branch passageway can be guided to the side of the third ball throwing route KR3, the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1. After colliding with the last game ball of the specified number of game balls, the ball can be easily caused to flow down to the second ball throwing path KR2.

In addition, among the specified number of game balls, the last game ball means the game ball located on the upstream side (on the opposite side to the regulation plate 541). Further, in this embodiment, the prescribed number is set to one ball. In this case, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the third ball throwing route KR3.

Further, as described above, the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) is such that the lower end side of the downstream path is tilted toward the center portion of the base plate 520 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 73), and the tilting The part is formed with a gentle S-shape. That is, since the downstream end of the first ball throwing route KR1 (downstream path) is formed in the downstream direction of the upstream end of the third ball throwing route KR3, the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 is When colliding with the last game ball of the prescribed number of game balls stored in the throwing path, the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last game ball is different from the downstream direction of the upstream end of the third ball throwing path KR3. can be set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tail game ball from flying out from the upstream end of the third ball throwing path KR3 and flowing into the second ball throwing path KR2 due to the repulsive force upon collision.

Furthermore, since the upper end of the third ball throwing path KR3 is formed to be inclined in the direction of inclination of the lower end of the first ball throwing path KR1, the position where the game ball T2 collides with the game ball T1 is set in the upper hemisphere of the game ball T1. In addition, it can be set to the second ball throwing path KR2 side. Therefore, the rebound direction of the game ball T2 that collided with the game ball T1 can be set to the entrance (upper end) side of the second ball throwing path KR2. Therefore, the game ball T2 that collides with the game ball T1 can be easily thrown to the second ball throwing route KR2. As a result, it is possible to suppress the ball from stagnating in the first ball throwing path KR1 and the second ball throwing path KR2.

In addition, the distribution destination by the regulation plate 541 is set to the third ball throwing route KR3 (first branch passage), and the flow of game balls in the third ball throwing route KR3 is regulated by the storage plate 542 (flowing state changing means). In a state where a specified number (1 ball) of game balls are stored in the third ball throwing route KR3, the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 (downstream path) can flow down to the second ball throwing path KR2 (second branch path). Therefore, when more than a specified number of game balls flow down the flow path, the game balls exceeding the specified number (game balls T2 from the second ball onward) are prevented from staying in the first ball throwing path KR1. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the regulating plate 541 (the operation of assigning the second ball throwing route KR2) from being obstructed by the game ball stuck in the first ball throwing route KR1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a description will be given of a case where a ball is thrown into the ball throwing path when the distribution member 540 is placed at the restriction position. FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 77(a) and (b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 74(a). Further, FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) each illustrate the transition state of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Furthermore, FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b) show a state in which the distribution member 540 is placed at the regulation position.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), when a ball is thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 with the distribution member 540 disposed at the regulating position, the thrown game ball T1 is transferred to the first ball throwing path KR1. It collides with the regulation plate 541 at the lower end of the route KR1. Thereby, the game ball T1 is guided to the second ball throwing route KR2 and flows down the second ball throwing route KR2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a description will be given of the operation when the ball is caused to flow down the downstream side of the third ball throwing path KR3. FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b) are partially enlarged views of the sorting unit 500.

Note that FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b) correspond to a partially enlarged view of the sorting unit 500 in FIG. 74(a). Further, FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b) each illustrate the transition state of the sphere when the sphere is introduced. Furthermore, FIG. 78(a) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is placed at the storage position, and FIG. 78(b) shows a state in which the distribution member 540 is placed in the restriction position.

As shown in FIGS. 78(a) and (b), when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state (the state shown in FIG. 78(a)), the distribution member 540 is displaced and placed in the regulation position. , the game ball T1 stagnated above the storage plate 542 is flown down to the downstream side of the third ball throwing route KR3.

That is, only the balls that are stagnant above the storage plate 542 are allowed to flow down the third ball throwing path KR3. Furthermore, as described above, the number of balls stagnant above the storage plate 542 is set to 1, so that the balls can be flown down to the third ball throwing path KR3 one ball at a time. Therefore, the number of balls flowing down the third ball throwing path KR3 can be stabilized, and it is possible to suppress an unintended number of balls from falling down the third ball throwing path KR3.

Therefore, the distributing member 540 (distributing means) has a regulating plate 541 (first protruding and retracting part) formed so as to be able to protrude and retract from the third ball throwing path (first branch passage) as the distributing member 540 is displaced. The regulating plate 541 includes a storage plate (second protruding and retracting part), and by protruding into the third ball throwing path, the regulating plate 541 directs the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) to the second ball throwing path KR2 (second branch). The storage plate 542 is located on the downstream side of the third ball throwing route KR3 than the regulating plate 541 and projects into the third ball throwing route KR3, so that the storage plate 542 can distribute the balls to the third ball throwing route KR3. The regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 are formed so as to be able to regulate the flow of the game balls that are thrown, and when one of the regulating plates 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the passage of the third ball throwing route KR3, the other is outside the passage of the third ball throwing route KR3 (recessed part). 518, 519), by displacing the sorting member 540 in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 (displacement member), only the specified number (one ball) of game balls are transferred to the third ball throwing path KR3. The ball receiving portion 467 can receive the ball.

That is, by protruding the regulation plate 541, the first state in which the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 are distributed to the second ball throwing route, and by retracting the regulation plate 541, the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 are distributed to the second state. A second state in which the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing route are distributed to the third ball throwing route, and a third state in which the game balls distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3 are restricted from flowing down (game balls are stored) by the second protruding part protruding. By retracting the second protruding and retracting part, it is possible to form a fourth state in which the game ball stored in the third ball throwing path is caused to flow down and received by the ball receiving part, and each of these states By combining the above, it is possible to distribute only a prescribed number (one ball) of game balls to the third ball throwing route KR3 and have the ball receiver 467 receive them.

In addition, since the distribution member 540 includes the regulation plates 541 and 542, that is, is formed as one component, the structure of the distribution member 540 (the structure of the distribution member 540 (the structure of the distribution member 540 (for operating the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542 and exhibiting their functions) structure) can be simplified. Further, when one of the regulating plate 541 and the storage plate 542 protrudes into the third ball throwing path KR3, the other is retracted outside the third ball throwing path KR3, so that the two of the ball receiving portions 467 It is sufficient if the distribution member 540 is also formed to be movable into two positions depending on the position (first position and second position). That is, by displacing the distribution member 540 at two positions, the first to fourth states described above can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distribution member 540 and the structure for displacing the distribution member 540 in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiver 467 can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distribution operation can be improved accordingly.

Next, the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 80. FIG. 79 is a front view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. FIG. 80 is a top view of the distribution unit 500 and the lower displacement unit 400. Note that the lower displacement unit 400 is illustrated in a state where it is disposed at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the distribution unit 500 is arranged on the front side (lower side in FIG. 80) of the lower displacement unit 400. In this case, the opening 525a formed in the rolling portion 525 of the sorting unit 500 and the opening 451a formed in the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 are arranged at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion 525 is sent into the lower displacement member 440 through the opening 525a and the opening 451a.

In other words, throwing the ball to the lower displacement member 440 involves passing the ball flowing down the playing area in front of the game board 13 from the third prize opening 82 formed on the game board 13 via the ball throwing unit 600 and the distribution unit 500. will be carried out.

Therefore, the distribution unit 500 includes a rolling part 525 that communicates with the orbital region of the ball receiving part 467, and the distribution member 540 restricts the passage of game balls in the rolling part 525. To surely throw the second and subsequent game balls T2 to the trajectory area of a distribution member 540 via a rolling part 525 even when a malfunction occurs and the second and subsequent game balls T2 are thrown. I can do it. As a result, problems caused by the second and subsequent game balls T2 are less likely to occur.

Next, the relationship between the distribution member 540 and the lower displacement member 440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. 81, 83, and 85 are front views of the lower displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 82, 84, and 86 are sectional views of the distribution unit 500. In addition, in FIGS. 81, 83, and 85, the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are seen transparently, and only the distribution member 540 of the distribution unit 500 disposed on the front side is illustrated. . In addition, in FIGS. 82, 84, and 86, the distribution member 540 is illustrated with a chain line, and the abutting plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 disposed on the back side is illustrated with a chain line.

Furthermore, FIGS. 81 and 82 illustrate a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the first position and the distribution member 540 is placed in the regulation position, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state. The located state is illustrated. 83 and 84 illustrate a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the second position, the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position, and the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state. The condition is illustrated. 85 and 86 illustrate a state in which the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the first position and the distribution member 540 is placed in the storage position, and the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state. A state located at is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiver 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is in the first position, the ball receiver A rack 466 for driving the movable rack 467 is disposed on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (on the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front), and a movable rack 464 is disposed on the back side so as to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, like the rack 466, the movable rack 464 is placed on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (on the left side of the lower displacement member 440 when viewed from the front). Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is located on the other end side of the lower displacement member 440. In this case, the side surface on the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the left side surface when viewed from the front) is brought into contact with the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, a rotational driving force is applied to the distribution member 540 around the axis of the shaft hole 545, and the distribution member 540 is displaced to a position (restriction position) in which the restriction plate 541 is projected into the first ball throwing path KR1.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiver 467 is placed in the first position, the ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is transferred to the third ball throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2 without being thrown down. In addition, as described above, by displacing the distribution member 540 from the storage state in which balls are stored above the storage plate 542 to the regulation position, the game player is placed on the downstream side of the third ball throwing path KR3 (downstream side of the storage plate 542) Can throw the ball. At this time, the game ball can be thrown inside the ball receiving part 467 by causing the ball receiving part 467 to perform a ball receiving operation.

Note that the opening operation of the third electric accessory 82a to store game balls in the sorting unit 500 is performed before the ball receiving part 467 is displaced to the first position, and the ball receiving part 467 is moved to the first position. When being displaced to the position, the third electric accessory 82a is in a closed state. As a result, when the distribution member 540 is displaced from the storage position to the regulation position, the game balls passing through the first ball throwing path KR1 are not restricted from flowing down by the regulation plate 541 and the storage plate 542, and unintended game balls are 3. It is possible to suppress the ball from being thrown to the downstream side of the ball throwing path KR3.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is formed to be able to operate in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiver 467, it regulates the throwing of game balls to the trajectory area of the ball receiver 467 in accordance with the displacement of the ball receiver 467. Or acceptable. In other words, regulation or permission of throwing a game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the ball receiver 467, so that, for example, the distribution member 540 can It is not necessary to control the driving means for driving the drive unit 540 or each of these means, and accordingly, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability of the operation.

Furthermore, the distribution member 540 is configured to throw the game ball T2 to the trajectory area of the ball receiving portion 467 in conjunction with the displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 from the second position to the first position direction (second direction). This allows the game ball to be reliably thrown to the orbital region of the ball receiving portion 467, which is on the first direction side of the ball receiving portion 467.

Further, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed so as to be displaceable between a switching position for switching the distribution member 540 and a receiving position (second position) set at a position different from the switching position (first position). When the ball receiving section 467 is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distributing member 540 is switched to the third ball throwing path KR3, and when the ball receiving section 467 is displaced to the receiving position, the ball receiving section is distributed from the third ball throwing path. 467 is enabled to receive game balls, and the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 is switched to the second ball throwing route KR2. It is possible to prevent the exceeded game balls from being distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the ball receiving part 467 receives the game ball while the distribution destination by the distribution member 540 remains switched to the third ball throwing route. There is a possibility that more game balls than the prescribed number that can be received by the ball receiving section 467 will be distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3. If a means for regulating the inflow of game balls into the third ball throwing route KR3 is provided separately, the structure becomes complicated, reliability decreases, and product cost increases.

In contrast, in the embodiment, after the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the switching position and a prescribed number (one ball in this embodiment) of game balls are distributed to the third ball throwing path KR3, the distribution member 540 is moved to the receiving position. When the ball is displaced to , the distribution destination is switched to the second ball throwing route KR2, so that more than one game ball can be prevented from flowing down to the third ball throwing route. Therefore, the ball receiving section 467 can prevent game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) that can be received from being distributed to the third ball throwing route KR3. Further, since there is no need to separately provide the above-mentioned means (means for regulating the inflow of game balls into the third ball throwing path KR3), it is possible to improve reliability and reduce product costs.

Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (turned on), each operation unit starts from the position where the power is turned off (turned off). Furthermore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, only the control thereof may be reset. In that case, if the distribution member 540 is provided with a driving means, when the power is turned on, the distribution unit 500 in the storage state operates during the initial operation to cause the game balls to flow down the third ball throwing path KR3, There is a risk that the game ball will be thrown to the retracted side (first position side) of the ball receiving portion 467 located at the third position.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the distribution member 540 and the displacement of the ball receiver 467 are synchronized, so even if the power is turned off while the pachinko machine 10 is not located at the predetermined reference position, the pachinko machine It is possible to prevent an unintended game ball from being thrown into the trajectory area of the ball receiver 467 when the machine 10 is powered on. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls from clogging inside the lower displacement member 440.

Furthermore, if the power is turned off while the game balls are left in the orbital area of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving part 467 is caused to perform the ejection operation described above, so that the game balls are not left in the orbital area of the ball receiving part 467. The game balls can be discharged to the outside of the lower displacement member 440 and collected from the collection port 411f.

Next, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. As shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the retracted state, and the ball receiving portion 467 of the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the second or third position (a position other than the first position). In this state, as described above, the rack 466 that drives the ball receiving portion 467 is arranged at approximately the center position of the lower displacement member 440 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 83), and the movable rack 464 It is arranged at a position movable toward one end from the other end (left side in the left-right direction in FIG. 83).

Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is arranged at a position spaced from the other end of the lower displacement member 4440 toward one end. In this case, the surface on the other end side of the contact plate 464c (the surface on the left side when viewed from the front) is separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the sorting member 540 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the sorting member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is rotated to the third throwing ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) where it is projected onto path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiver 467 is placed in the second position or the third position (a position other than the first position), the first ball throwing path of the distribution unit 500 is The ball thrown to KR1 is stopped above the storage plate 542. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, a ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 collides with a ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2. .

Next, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, when the lower displacement member 440 is placed in the first extended state or the second extended state, the lower displacement member 440 slides with respect to the front base 411 as described above. It is both displaced and rotationally displaced. Therefore, the contact plate 464c formed on the movable rack 464 is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the lower displacement member 440, and is separated from the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540. As a result, the sorting member 540 is rotated around the axis of the shaft hole 545 by the urging force of the urging spring SP4 interposed between the sorting member 540 and the base plate 520, and the storage plate 542 is rotated to the third throwing ball. It is displaced to a position (storage position) where it is projected onto path KR3.

Therefore, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state or the second extended state, the ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 of the distribution unit 500 is stopped above the storage plate 542. be done. Further, as described above, when the distribution unit 500 is in the storage state, a ball thrown to the first ball throwing path KR1 collides with a ball stopped above the storage plate 542 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2. .

That is, when the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state and the second extended state (states other than the retracted state), the opening 451a of the decorative member 450 is opened as the lower displacement member 440 is displaced. Since the position is displaced, the communication state of the sphere between the opening 451a and the opening 525a of the sorting unit 500 is released. Therefore, when the ball flows down the third ball throwing path KR3, there is a risk that the ball will be discharged from the opening 451a into the back case 300. However, in this embodiment, by setting the distribution member 540 to the storage position, the third ball throwing path It is possible to suppress the ball from flowing down the downstream side of the path KR3. As a result, the balls of the back case 300 can be prevented from being ejected into the interior.

In other words, the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 is formed to be displaceable in the retracted state, the first extended state, and the second extended state, and when the lower displacement member 440 is located in the retracted state, Since the ball receiver 467 is disposed on the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiver 467 can be displaced with the lower displacement member 440 in the retracted state, or in the first or second extended state. A mode in which the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced can be formed. Therefore, the performance effect can be increased accordingly.

In this case, when the lower displacement member 440 is disposed in the first or second extended state, the ball receiving part 467 cannot receive the game ball from the rolling part 525 of the third ball throwing path KR3 (the third ball throwing path KR3 The rolling portion 525 and the opening 451a of the lower displacement member 440 are in a non-communicating state), but in such a state, the abutment plate 464c interlocked with the ball receiving portion 467 cannot come into contact with the distribution member 540. Therefore, when the ball receiving part 467 is in a state where it cannot receive game balls (the state in which the lower displacement member 440 is arranged in the first extended state or the second extended state), the destination to which the ball is distributed by the distribution member 540 is the third ball throwing path. Switching to KR3 can be suppressed.

Further, since the distribution member 540 is disposed on the base plate 520 of the distribution unit 500, which is formed as a separate member from the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440, the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 is increased in size accordingly. can be suppressed.

Here, since the displacement of the lower displacement member 440 from the first extended state to the retracted state is not only a rotational displacement in the left-right direction but also a rotational displacement, when the abutment plate 464c in the tilted state is rotated, , there is a possibility that the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 will come into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c, and the distribution member 540 will not be able to rotate.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first extended position shown in FIG. (second position or third position). Thereby, the contact plate 464c of the lower displacement member 440 displaced to the retracted state can be prevented from colliding with the protrusion 543. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 from coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and preventing the distribution member 540 from rotating.

Furthermore, since the distributing member 540 is formed with the bulging portion 543a as described above, when the lower displacement unit 400 is displaced from the first extended state to the retracted state due to poor control or the like, the contact plate 464c Even when the projection 543 of the distribution member 540 comes into contact with the upper surface, the distribution member 540 can be rotationally displaced.

That is, since the bulging portion 543a can reduce the area of contact with the abutting plate 464c, the bulging portion 543a can easily slide along the surface when the abutting plate 464c comes into contact with the bulging portion 543a. Therefore, the distribution member 540 can be easily rotated and displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 543 of the distribution member 540 from coming into contact with the upper surface of the contact plate 464c and preventing the distribution member 540 from rotating.

Next, the configuration of the drive transmission portion of the rotation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. 87 is a front view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 88 is a rear view of the rotation unit 700, FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation unit 700. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 90, the rotation unit 700 includes a decoration unit 750 composed of a plurality of displacement members, a ball holder 710 disposed above the decoration unit 750 in the direction of gravity, and a ball holder 710 arranged above the decoration unit 750 in the direction of gravity. 710, a back base 720 arranged on the back side of the decoration unit 750, a left side transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front, and a right side transmission member placed on the right side of the decoration unit 750 when viewed from the front. 740.

The ball holder 710 is a member for dropping the game ball emitted from the emitting opening 471 on one side of the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 described above. Thereby, the ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 440 can be caused to be thrown by the rotation unit 700. Note that the detailed configuration of the ball holder 710 will be described later.

The decoration unit 750 is a substantially D-shaped block body with a curved portion arranged upward when viewed from the side, and the front side is decorated with characters and patterns. Furthermore, the decoration unit 750 is made up of a plurality of members, and is configured to be able to be displaced by transmission of a drive, which will be described later. Note that the configuration of the decoration unit 750 will be described later.

The back base 720 is a plate member that connects the back side of the ball holder 710 and the back side of the decoration unit 750, and is formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. As described above, since the decoration unit 750 is composed of a plurality of movable members, the fastening portion thereof is limited. By connecting them, the decorative unit 750 and the ball holder 710 can be assembled as one unit while ensuring the range of movement of the decorative unit 750.

The left side transmission member 730 is attached to the drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side surface of the decoration unit 750 (left side in FIG. 87), the transmission member 730 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. It is formed mainly of a motor base 732, a gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 730, and a throwing path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and forms a predetermined gap between the opposing gear cover 733. Ru.

The drive motor KM4 is a drive source for moving each member of the decoration unit 750, which will be described later. The drive of the drive motor KM4 is transmitted by a transmission member 730, which will be described later.

The transmission member 730 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 731b that meshes with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c that meshes with the transmission gear 731b, and a transmission gear 731c that meshes with the transmission gear 731b. The transmission gear 731d is arranged adjacent to the transmission gear 731d and is coaxially arranged with the shaft 735, and the load gear 731e is meshed with the transmission gear 731d.

The transmission gear 731a is attached to the drive motor KM4 as described above, and rotates when the drive motor KM4 is rotationally driven.

The transmission gear 731b has a one-way clutch OW1 disposed therein, and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to a shaft portion JB1 that transmits rotational driving force from the decoration unit 750 to the right transmission member 740 on the right side.

The one-way clutch OW1 includes an inner ring disposed inside and having a cam surface formed on its outer circumferential surface, an outer ring disposed outside the inner ring, and a plurality of springs and rollers between the inner ring and the outer ring. When the outer ring tries to rotate in one direction relative to the inner ring, the contact pressure between the cam surface and the roller increases, creating resistance and transmitting power to the inner ring, and the outer ring rotates in the other direction relative to the inner ring. This is a cam-type clutch that, when rotated, the contact pressure between the cam surface and the roller decreases, causing the clutch to slip and cut off power transmission.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731b can transmit the rotational driving force to the shaft portion JB1 when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, and when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, The outer ring slips with respect to the inner ring, cutting off the transmission of driving force to the shaft portion JB1.

The transmission gear 731c has a one-way clutch OW1 disposed therein similarly to the transmission gear 731b. Further, a shaft 735 is disposed inside the one-way clutch OW1 of the transmission gear 731c.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c can transmit the rotational driving force to the shaft 735 when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, and can transmit the rotational driving force to the shaft 735 when the driving force in the other direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4. The outer ring slips against the shaft 735, and the transmission of driving force to the shaft 735 is interrupted. Further, the transmission gear 731c is meshed with the transmission gear 731b, and their rotation directions are opposite to each other. Therefore, when the transmission gear 731b rotates in one direction, the transmission gear 731c rotates in the other direction. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 731b rotates in the other direction, the transmission gear 731b rotates in one direction. That is, by switching the rotation direction of the drive motor KM4, the mode is switched to a mode in which the shaft portion JB1 rotates or a mode in which the shaft 735 rotates.

Transmission gear 731d is attached to shaft 735. As described above, the shaft 735 is rotated only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction. Therefore, the transmission gear 731c rotates in one direction only when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in one direction, and does not rotate in the other direction.

The load gear 731e is connected to a shaft portion 791a of a resistance member 791 whose shaft hole is attached to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 includes a shaft portion 791a that is rotatable with respect to a base portion fastened to the box member 760. The resistance member 791 is formed so that a predetermined amount of resistance acts when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion. That is, since a predetermined amount of force is required to rotate the shaft portion 791a, a force greater than the predetermined amount is similarly required to rotate the load gear 731e connected to the shaft portion 791a.

Thereby, when the rotating body 800 meshed with the transmission gear 731d is rotated and stopped due to the rotation of the transmission gear 731d, rotation due to the inertia force can be suppressed. That is, the resistance when the shaft portion 791a rotates with respect to the base portion is set to be larger than the inertial force that acts around the axis of the rotor 800 when the rotation of the rotor 800 is stopped.

Further, the load gear 731e is connected to a transmission gear 731d disposed coaxially with the transmission gear 731c. Therefore, the resistance of the load gear 731e applied to the drive motor KM4 can be reduced to only one direction of rotation that rotates the transmission gear 731d. That is, when the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the other direction, the transmission of drive between the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d is cut off, so that the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed. As a result, when rotating the transmission gear 731b in one direction, the resistance of the load gear 731e can be suppressed.

The motor base 732 is formed into a box-like body with the decorative unit 750 side open, and a drive motor KM4 is disposed outside the bottom part of the box (on the left side in FIG. 87) with its shaft inserted into the inside of the box. Thereby, the transmission gear 731a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM4 can be disposed inside the motor base 732. That is, the depth dimension of the box of the motor base 732 is set larger than the width dimension of the transmission gear 731a. As a result, it is possible to arrange the drive motor KM4 and the transmission gear 731a attached to the motor base 732 in the decoration unit 750, and it is possible to suppress the transmission gear 731a from colliding with the decoration unit 750.

The gear cover 733 is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and is fastened to the decoration unit 750 with the left transmission member 730 disposed therebetween. Further, a through hole 733a is formed in the decoration unit 750 at a position facing a shaft hole of a rotating body 800, which will be described later. Thereby, the ball rolling inside the rotating body 800 can be discharged to the outside through the through hole 733a. Note that a description of the ball thrown to the rotating body 800 will be given later.

The ball throwing route cover 734 is a member disposed on the outside of the gear cover 733 (on the left side in FIG. 87), and is formed from a plate-shaped body, and has a wall portion projecting toward the gear cover 733 from its edge. As a result, a gap can be formed between the gear cover 733 and the ball throwing route cover 734 facing each other, and the ball inserted through the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733 can be passed through the gap and discharged to the outside of the rotation unit 700. I can do it. The ball discharged from the gap between the facing gear cover 733 and the ball throwing path cover is thrown into a recovery path (not shown) and collected.

The right side transmission member 740 includes a rotating member 741 connected to the other end of the shaft portion JB1, an arm member 742 having one end connected to the rotating member 741, and a rotating member 741 and an arm member 742 that cover each other. The crank cover 743 is disposed on the decorative unit 750 in a closed state.

The rotating member 741 includes a main body part 741b formed in a disc-shaped plate shape, a one-way clutch OW1 fitted into the shaft of the main body part 741b, and a cylindrical part protruding to the opposite side of the decoration unit 750 (the right side in FIG. 87). It is formed mainly with a protrusion 741a.

In the one-way clutch OW1 attached to the rotating member 741, the shaft hole of the inner ring is inserted into the other end side of the shaft portion JB. Further, the one-way clutch OW1 is arranged so that when rotation opposite to the rotational direction of the shaft portion JB1 is input to the inner ring, no transmission occurs between the inner ring and the outer ring.

As a result, when a driving force having a rotational speed faster than the rotational speed transmitted from the shaft portion JB1 to the rotating member 741 is input to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1, only the outer ring is rotated and the rotating member 741 is transferred to the drive motor KM4. It can be rotated by a driving force other than driving. As a result, the rotating member 741 can be made to rotate at two or more different speeds.

The arm member 742 has a shape that is a combination of a C-shape and an I-shape when viewed from the side, and is formed by connecting one end of the C-shape to the other end of the I-shape. The arm member 742 also has a shaft hole 742a formed through the connecting portion between the C-shaped portion and the I-shaped portion, an elliptical first sliding groove 742b formed through the one end of the I-shaped portion, and a C-shaped first sliding groove 742b. The second sliding groove 742c is mainly formed with an elliptical second sliding groove 742c formed through the other end of the cylindrical portion.

The shaft hole 742a is a hole into which a shaft portion 764a formed on a right side plate 764 of a box member 760, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 764a. Therefore, the arm member 742 is arranged in the decoration unit 750 with the shaft portion 764a inserted into the shaft hole 742a, so that the arm member 742 is rotatable with respect to the decoration unit 750.

The first sliding groove 742b is a hole into which the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction of the ellipse is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 741a. Therefore, the protrusion 741a can be inserted inside the first sliding groove 742b, and the arm member 742 can be rotationally displaced by the rotation of the rotating member 741.

Further, the rotating member 741 is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion of the arm member 742, and its shaft is located half the longitudinal dimension of the I-shaped portion from the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. placed at a location further apart. Thereby, by rotating the rotating member 741, it is possible to cause the arm member 742 to perform reciprocating rotational movement around the axis of the shaft hole 742a.

The second sliding groove 742c is a hole into which a protrusion 773a of the right lid part 773, which will be described later, is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction of the ellipse is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 773a. Therefore, the protrusion 773a can be inserted inside the second sliding groove 742c. Further, the right side cover portion 773 is formed to be rotatably displaceable with respect to the box member 760. Therefore, as described above, when the rotating member 741 is rotated and the arm member 742 performs a reciprocating rotational movement, the right lid portion 773 connected to the other end of the arm member 742 is rotated with respect to the box member 760. be able to.

The crank cover 743 mainly includes an elliptical portion 743a formed into an ellipse when viewed from the rear, and a ball throwing portion 743b formed continuously on the back side of the elliptical portion 743a.

The elliptical portion 743a is a cover that covers the arm member 742, and has an outer shape larger than the arm member 742 and the displacement area of the arm member 742 in side view, and extends the arm member 742 from the edge toward the decoration unit 750. A wall portion is formed that protrudes more than the thickness of the wall. Thereby, when the crank cover 743 is arranged on the decoration unit 750, the arm member 742 can be arranged between the crank cover 743 and the decoration unit 750 facing each other.

The ball throwing part 743b is a path member for sending the ball flowing down the downstream area in front of the game board 13 to a collection path when the ball is collected from a predetermined collection port, and has a predetermined size inside. It is formed into a rod shape with a small space. Further, the ball throwing portion 743b has an open upper end and is connected to the collection port of the game board 13, and a lower end thereof is connected to an opening formed in the decoration unit 750. Thereby, the balls collected on the game board 13 can be passed through the interior of the decoration unit 750 via the ball throwing section 743b and guided to a collection path (not shown).

Next, the decoration unit 750 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 91 to 95. FIG. 91 is a front view of the decoration unit 750. 92(a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 as seen in the direction of arrow XCIIa in FIG. 91, and FIG. 92(b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 as seen in the direction of arrow XCIIb in FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective front view of the decoration unit 750, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decoration unit 750. Note that in FIGS. 91(b) and 91(c), the right side plate 764 and left side plate 765 of the box member 760 are shown in a transparent state.

As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the decoration unit 750 includes a box member 760 that serves as an outer decoration part of the decoration unit 750, and a lid disposed above the box member 760 in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 91(a)). It is formed mainly of a member 770 and a rotating body 800 disposed inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770.

The box member 760 includes a base member 762 disposed below the rotating body 800, a front plate 761 disposed in front of the base member 762, and a lower plate 763 disposed on the bottom surface of the base member 762. It is formed mainly of a right side plate 764 disposed on the right side of the base member 762 when viewed from the front, and a left side plate 765 disposed on the left side of the base member 762 when viewed from the front.

The base member 762 is formed to have a laterally elongated rectangular shape that is larger than the rotating body 800 when viewed from above, and is formed to have a thickness larger than the outer diameter of the sphere in the direction of gravity. The base member 762 has an upper surface formed into a curved surface coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800. Thereby, when the base member 762 is placed near the rotating body 800, collision between the base member 762 and the rotating body 800 can be suppressed.

The base member 762 mainly includes a recessed portion 762a recessed downward in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a ball throwing portion 762b recessed in a substantially L-shape on the bottom surface.

The recessed portion 762a is a groove in which the above-mentioned shaft portion JB1 is disposed, and is recessed on the shaft of the transmission gear 731b disposed on the side surface of the decoration unit 750. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM4 can be transmitted via the shaft portion JB1.

The ball throwing part 762b is bent in an L-shape and recessed on the bottom surface, and one end side is connected to the opening 764b of the right side plate 764, and the other end side is connected to the back side of the prize opening 761a of the front plate 761. connected to. Further, the concave width of the ball throwing portion 762b is formed to be larger than the diameter of the ball. Thereby, by disposing the lower surface plate 763 on the lower side, it is possible to throw a ball into the inside of the box member 760.

The front plate 761 is formed to have a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness on the back side. In addition, the front plate 761 has a winning opening 761a having a size that allows a ball to be inserted into the front side. The prize opening 761a is connected to the ball throwing part 762b of the base member 762 arranged on the back side as described above. Therefore, the ball thrown into the winning hole 761a is thrown to the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762.

The right side plate 764 has a D-shaped outer shape with an upward curve when viewed from the side. In addition, the right side plate 764 has a shaft portion 764a protruding outward from the decoration unit 750, a bearing portion 764c penetratingly formed below the shaft portion 764a, and a curved shape of the same axis as the rotation axis of the rotating body 800. A curved opening 764d that is formed in the opening, an opening 764b that opens at a position facing the lower end of the ball throwing portion 762b of the crank cover 743, and an opening 764b that is formed penetratingly in a semicircular shape in side view on the axis of the rotating shaft of the rotating body 800. The engagement portion 764e is mainly formed.

The opening 764b is a hole for allowing a ball to be thrown from the ball-throwing portion of the crank cover 743 to the base member 762, and is formed larger than the outer diameter of the ball. Thereby, the ball thrown to the crank cover 743 can be thrown to the base member 762.

The bearing portion 764c is a hole into which the shaft portion JB1 described above is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion JB1. Thereby, the driving force can be transmitted to the above-described right transmission member 740.

The curved opening 764d is an opening into which the protrusion 773a protruding from the right lid portion 773 is inserted. Further, the curved opening 764d is formed in an arc shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the lid member 770 because the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced. Thereby, when the lid member 770 is rotationally displaced, collision between the protrusion 773a and the curved opening 764d can be suppressed.

The engaging portion 764e is a member that engages with the right end of the base plate 810 disposed inside the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front, and holds the base plate 810 non-rotatably. That is, the tip portion 811a of the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 is inserted and arranged in the engaging portion 764e. This makes the base plate 810 unrotatable.

The left side plate 765 has an outer shape substantially the same as the right side plate 764 when viewed from the side. The left side plate 765 also includes a through hole 765a formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, a shaft portion 765b protruding toward the rotating body 800 side, and a through hole 765b into which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted. The hole 765c is mainly formed.

The through hole 765a is an opening for inserting the ball discharged from the opening on the left side of the rotating body 800 in the front view into the through hole 733a of the motor base 732 described above. That is, the through hole 765a is formed on the axis of the rotating body 800, and its inner diameter is set to be the same size as the inner diameter of the opening on the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front.

The shaft portion 765b is inserted into a shaft hole 781 formed in a rotation regulating member 780, which will be described later, and can hold the rotation regulating member 780 in a rotatable state. Note that the displacement of the rotation regulating member 780 will be described later.

The through hole 765c is a hole through which the shaft portion 791a of the resistance member 791 is inserted, as described above, and is formed at a position facing the side surface of the load gear 731e described above.

The lower plate 763 is a plate member that is disposed on the lower surface of the base member 762 so that the ball throwing portion 762b of the base member 762 and the lower plate 763 form a throwing path through which a ball can pass. Furthermore, an opening 763a is formed in the bottom plate 763, passing through it in the vertical direction. The opening 763a is an opening for throwing a ball thrown inside the ball throwing section 762b to a recovery path (not shown). Therefore, the ball that has won in the winning opening 761a of the front plate 761 and the ball that is thrown from the game area to the ball throwing section 743b of the right side transmission member 740 can be discharged from the inside of the decoration unit 750.

The lid member 770 includes a curved lid portion 771 formed in a curved shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800, a right side lid portion 773 fastened to the right side surface of the curved lid portion 771 when viewed from the front, and a curved lid portion 771. It is mainly formed to include a left side lid part 772 fastened to the left side surface in front view.

As described above, the curved lid portion 771 has a curved outer shape coaxial with the axis of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the side, and has a radius larger than that of the rotating body 800 . The curved lid part 771 includes a transparent part 771a formed from a transparent plate on a part of the front side.

The transparent portion 771a is a board that allows the player to see the patterns, characters, etc. drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800. That is, even if the upper end of the rotating body 800 is covered by the lid member 770, the player can view the display on the rotating body 800 through the transparent portion 771a.

The right lid portion 773 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius of the outer side of the annular ring is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771. Further, the inner diameter of the right lid portion 773 is formed to be larger than the external size of the right end portion 811 of the rotating body 800 in a side view. Thereby, the right side lid part 773 is disposed with the right end part 811 of the rotating body 800 inserted into the annular inner part.

Furthermore, the right lid portion 773 is formed mainly of a protrusion 773a that protrudes to the outside (right side in front view) of the decorative unit 750, and a recess 773b that is recessed toward the inner side in the radial direction on the outer peripheral edge. . The protrusion 773a is a protrusion inserted into the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742, as described above.

The opening/closing member 870 can be rotated by inserting a protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870, which will be described later, into the recess 773b. Therefore, the width of the recess 773b is set to be larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 871. Further, the recessed portion 773b is formed at a position substantially opposite to the edge of the right lid portion 773 where the curved lid portion 771 is disposed.

The left lid portion 772 is formed in an annular shape in a side view, and the radius of the outer side of the annular ring is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the curved lid portion 771 . Further, the inner diameter of the left lid portion 772 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of a tooth surface 881a of a left rotating portion 880, which will be described later. Thereby, the left side cover part 772 is disposed with the left rotating part 880 of the rotating body 800 inserted into the annular inner part.

In addition, the left side lid portion 772 is formed with a plate-shaped sensor plate 772a that protrudes to the outside of the decoration unit 750 (left side in front view). The sensor plate 772a can detect the position of the left lid portion 772 by being placed between opposing bifurcated sensors (not shown).

Here, the lid member 770 for the rotating body 800 will be explained. The arrangement of the lid member 770 with the rotating body 800 assembled is the same as inserting the left and right ends of the rotating body 800 inside the right side lid part 773 and the left side lid part 772, respectively, before assembly (separate members). do. Then, by assembling the right side lid part 773, the left side lid part 772, and the curved lid part 771, the rotating body 800 and the lid member 770 are connected. Therefore, the lid member 770 is rotatable about the axis of the rotating body 800 relative to the rotating body.

The rotation regulating member 780 is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the side. The rotation regulating member 780 mainly includes a shaft hole 781 penetrating through the bent portion, a protrusion 782 protruding in the bending direction on one end side, and an abutment surface 783 formed flat at the tip of the other end side. be done.

The shaft portion 765b of the left side plate 765 is inserted into the shaft hole 781 as described above. Thereby, the rotation regulating member 780 is rotatably held relative to the left side plate 765. Further, a biasing spring SP5 is inserted into the shaft portion. As a result, a rotational force in one direction is applied to the rotation regulating member 780.

The projection 782 can restrict rotational displacement of the rotating body 800 by engaging with an engagement projection 882 of a left rotation section 880, which will be described later. The contact surface 783 is a surface that the end of the back side of the lid member 770 mentioned above comes into contact with, and when the lid member 770 comes into contact with it, the rotation regulating member 780 can be rotated. Note that the manner of regulating the rotation regulating member 780 and the rotating body 800 will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, the transmission path of the driving force when the drive motor KM4 is rotated will be described. 95(a) and 96(a) show the rotating unit 700 as viewed in the direction of arrow XCVa in FIG. 89, and FIGS. 95(b) and 96(b) show the rotating unit 700 as seen in the direction of arrow XCVb in FIG. be.

In addition, in FIG. 95, the displacement direction of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. In FIG. 96, the direction of displacement of each member when the shaft of the drive motor KM4 is rotated in the negative direction (counterclockwise) is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 95(a) and 95(b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the forward direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the forward direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the positive direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the negative direction, and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the positive direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731b does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the arm member 742 is brought to a stopped state.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731 is in a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 is rotated. Therefore, the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735 is rotated. As a result, the load gear 731e meshed with the transmission gear 731d and the tooth surface 881a of the rotating body 800 are rotated. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates forward, the driving force to the lid member 770 is not transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is transmitted.

As shown in FIGS. 96(a) and 96(b), when the drive motor KM4 is driven in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction. When the transmission gear 731a is rotated in the negative direction, the transmission gear 731b is rotated in the positive direction, and the transmission gear 731c is rotated in the negative direction.

In this case, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731b is brought into a state of transmitting the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft portion JB1 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force is transmitted to the rotating member 741 connected to the shaft portion JB1, and the rotating member 741 is rotated. As a result, the arm member 742 rotates and reciprocates about the axis of the shaft hole 742a, and the lid member 770 is displaced.

On the other hand, the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731 does not transmit the rotation of the outer ring to the inner ring, and the shaft 735 does not rotate. Therefore, the driving force is not transmitted to the transmission gear 731d connected to the shaft 735, and the rotating body 800 and the load gear 731e are in a non-rotating state. That is, when the drive motor KM4 rotates negatively, the driving force to the lid member 770 is transmitted, and the driving force to the rotating body 800 is not transmitted.

Therefore, the transmission gear 731c (rotation side drive means) that transmits the driving force from the drive motor KM4 to the rotary body 800 and the transmission gear 731b (displacement side transmission means) that transmits the driving force from the drive motor KM4 to the opening/closing member 870 (described later) via the lid member 770. In addition, by disposing the one-way clutch OW1, it is possible to transmit the rotational force to one of the transmission gear 731c or the transmission gear 731b and cut off the transmission to the other, depending on the rotational direction of the drive motor KM4. . As a result, by simply switching the rotational direction of the drive motor KM4, it is possible to switch the drive target driven by the rotational driving force. It is possible to switch between stopping, displacement of the opening/closing member 870, and stopping thereof, and the structure can be simplified while making it possible to form a plurality of modes.

Here, in a structure in which the one-way clutch OW1 is used to switch the drive target (the rotating body 800 or the opening/closing member 870 (lid member 770)) according to the rotational direction of the drive means, the transmission of the driving force from the drive motor KM4 is When it is cut off, it becomes free to rotate or displace in the direction in which it was driven by the driving force.Therefore, for example, the driving target of the driving means is switched from the rotating body 800 to the opening/closing member 870 (lid member 770). When the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the rotating body 800 becomes rotatable and may continue to rotate (rotate) due to inertial force.

In contrast, this embodiment includes a load gear 731e (load gear) meshed with a transmission gear 731d driven by a transmission gear 731c, so that transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM4 is interrupted. However, by using the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear 731e, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 800 from continuing to rotate.

Next, displacement of the lid member 770 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. 97(a) and 98(c) are in the closed state, FIG. 97(b) and 98(b) are in the intermediate state, and FIG. 97(c) and FIG. 98(a) are in the open state, respectively. 7 is a side view of a decoration unit 750 and a right side transmission member 740. FIG.

Note that FIGS. 97(a) to 97(c) and FIGS. 98(a) to 98(c) illustrate a state in which the crank cover 743 of the right side transmission member 740 is removed. In addition, the closed state of the decoration unit 750 is a state in which the lid member 770 is arranged to cover the upper half of the rotating body 800 (upper part in FIG. 97(a)), and the open state is a state in which the lid member 770 is rotated. It is in a state where it has been displaced and placed on the back side of the rotating body 800 (the right side in FIG. 97(c)). The intermediate state is a state in which the lid member 770 is located between the closed state and the open state.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 97(a) to 97(c), states in which the closed state is displaced to the open state are illustrated in order, and in FIGS. 98(a) to 98(c), the states in which the state is displaced from the open state to the closed state The following states are illustrated in order.

First, with reference to FIG. 97, the displacement of the lid member 770 when it is displaced from the closed state to the open state will be described. The driving force is transmitted to the arm member 742 by rotating the drive motor KM4 in the negative direction as described above.

In the closed state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is placed on the back side (on the right side in FIG. 97(a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742. Therefore, in the arm member 742, the first sliding groove 742b into which the projection 741a is inserted is arranged closer to the back side than the shaft hole 742a.

The shaft hole 742a, the first sliding groove 742b, and the second sliding groove 742c of the arm member 742 are formed on substantially the same straight line. Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 97(a)) with respect to the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a protruding from the right side of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(b), when the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees to position the protrusion 741a below the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is , is displaced downward in the direction of gravity of the shaft hole 742a (lower side in FIG. 97(b)) as the projection 741a is displaced.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged above the shaft hole 742a in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 97(b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed in a position where it is rotationally displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. .

In this case, the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is located closer to the back side than the rotation axis of the lid member 770 (the center position of the rotating body 800 formed in a cylindrical shape). Therefore, due to the load on the lid member 770, a rotational force is applied in a direction to displace the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state. As described above, the rotating member 741 is provided with the one-way clutch OW1 and configured to be rotatable with the outer ring preceding the inner ring, so the drive motor KM4 is stopped due to the load of the lid member 770. Thus, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated.

As shown in FIG. 97(c), when the lid member 770 is displaced to the back side of the rotating body, the projection 741a of the rotating member 741 is stopped at a position rotated approximately 90 degrees from the intermediate position. That is, it is the leftmost (left side in FIG. 97) end of the displacement region of the projection 741a. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member 742 is restricted, and the rotation of the lid member 770 is stopped.

That is, the displacement of the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state is performed by driving the drive motor KM4 to displace it to the intermediate state, and by causing the lid member 770 to fall under load.

As a result, when displacing the lid member 770 from the closed state to the open state, the section in which the drive motor KM4 is driven can be reduced to half of the total section, so that the energy consumption of the drive motor KM4 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the displacement speed from the closed state to the intermediate state can be set according to the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4, and the displacement speed from the intermediate state to the open state can be set according to the load of the lid member 770. The displacement speed from the closed state to the open state can be changed in two stages. Therefore, since the displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the displacement speed of the drive motor KM4, there is no need to complicate the control. As a result, control can be simplified and control failures can be suppressed.

The displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4 is referred to as a first section, and the displacement section in which the lid member 770 follows the load of the lid member 770 is referred to as a second section. will be described with reference numeral DK2 being assigned to the second section.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the displacement of the lid member 770 when it is displaced from the open state to the closed state will be described.

As described above, in the open state, the protrusion 741a of the rotating member 741 is placed on the front side (left side in FIG. 98(a)) of the shaft hole 742a of the arm member 742, and the curved lid of the lid member 770 The portion 771 is placed on the back side of the rotating body 800.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(b), when the rotating member 741 is rotated approximately 90 degrees to position the protrusion 741a above the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is As the protrusion 741a is displaced, it is displaced downward in the gravity direction of the shaft hole 742a (lower side in FIG. 98(b)).

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged above the shaft hole 742a in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 98(b)). As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and is rotationally displaced approximately 45 degrees upward from the state in which the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is located on the back side of the rotating body 800. It is assumed that it is placed at the position shown in the figure.

Furthermore, the lid member 770 that has been displaced to the closed state position (the position shown in FIG. 97(a)) is placed in the game area (the front side of the game board 13), and is placed in the open state position (the position shown in FIG. 97(c)). The lid member 770 that has been displaced to the position ) is placed outside the gaming area (on the back side of the gaming board 13). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down the game area from colliding with the rotating body 800 and causing the rotating body 800 to rotate. In particular, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the rotating body 800 is provided with an opening/closing member 870 that is displaced toward the gaming area. This opening/closing member 870 can be prevented from being opened (extended).

Furthermore, since the lid member 770 is placed outside the gaming area in the open position, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position creates a space for the opening/closing member 870 to protrude into the gaming area. can be secured. Therefore, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be brought closer to the game area side, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the opening/closing member 870.

Furthermore, since the lid member 770 is formed to be rotatable around an axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotary body 800 and is formed in a plate shape that curves along the outer surface of the rotary body 800, the lid member 770 is in a closed state. The space required for displacement between the position (covered position) and the open position (retracted position) can be suppressed, and therefore, the space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. In addition, by forming the lid member 770 in a curved manner as described above, the game balls flowing down the game area are prevented from being stopped on the lid member 770 disposed in the closed position, and the game balls flow smoothly. It can be flowed down to

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(c), when the rotating member 741 is further rotated approximately 90 degrees and the protrusion 71a is displaced to the right side of the axis of the rotating member 741, the first sliding groove 742b of the arm member 742 is displaced toward the back side (to the right in FIG. 98(c)) with respect to the shaft hole 742a as the projection 741a is displaced.

Therefore, the second sliding groove 742c formed at the end opposite to the first sliding groove 742b is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 98(c)) of the shaft hole 742a. As a result, the protrusion 773a of the lid member 770 is guided by the second sliding groove 742c, and the curved lid portion 771 of the lid member 770 is placed above the rotating body 800.

In this case, as the lid member 770 is displaced, the center of gravity of the lid member 770 is displaced toward the front side relative to the rotation axis of the lid member 770. Therefore, during the transition from the intermediate state to the closed state, the load on the lid member 770 causes a rotational force to be applied in a direction to displace the lid member 770 from the open state to the closed state. Therefore, even when the driving motor KM4 is stopped, the lid member 770 can be continuously rotated by the load of the lid member 770.

Therefore, since the lid member 770 can be brought into the closed state by the load of the lid member 770, the lid member 770 can be reliably brought into the closed state.

Here, if the rotational displacement of the lid member 770 is caused only by the drive motor KM4, there is a possibility that the lid member 770 may not be able to be stopped at a normal position if the driving stop operation of the drive motor KM4 is deviated. Further, in the case where the rotating member 741 has only one direction of rotation as in this embodiment, if the stopping operation of the drive motor KM4 is delayed, one rotation is required to return it to the normal position.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the position at which the lid member 770 is stopped can be mechanically stopped using the load of the lid member 770, so it is possible to suppress the position at which the lid member 770 is stopped from shifting. can.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a drive means that generates a driving force, a displacement member that is displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force to the displacement member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the transmission state of the driving force by the transmission means from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, so when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member also remains constant. It is impossible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member. Therefore, there was a problem in that the effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member was insufficient.

Note that the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the driving speed of the drive means, but if the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement sections of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. In order to achieve this speed, it is necessary to install a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member, and to control the output of the drive means to increase or decrease according to the detection result of the sensor device, which increases product cost and control cost. invite Furthermore, the structure and control become complicated, leading to a decrease in reliability.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the transmission means (rotating member 741 and arm member 742) includes a one-way clutch OW1, and the inner ring (first member) of the one-way clutch OW1 is connected to the outer ring (second member) of the one-way clutch OW1. On the other hand, when the inner ring is displaced in one direction, the rollers engage with the inner ring and the outer ring to transmit driving force, and when the inner ring is displaced in the other direction with respect to the outer ring, the inner ring and the outer ring The engagement of the rollers with the outer ring is released, the transmission of driving force is cut off, and in the second section DK2 (predetermined section) of the displacement sections of the lid member 770 (displacement member), the outer ring is displaced relative to the inner ring. Since the lid member 770 is displaced in one direction, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in other sections, regardless of the driving state of the rotating member 741. . Therefore, it is possible to impart changes to the lid member 770 and enhance the performance effect accompanying the displacement of the lid member 770.

Furthermore, regardless of the driving state of the drive motor KM4, the outer ring can be caused to advance in one direction relative to the inner ring, so for example, the drive motor KM4 is driven at a constant drive speed over the entire displacement range of the lid member 770. There is no need to increase or decrease the drive speed of the drive motor KM4 during the displacement section of the lid member 770 (that is, depending on whether it is the first section DK1 or the second section DK2). As a result, control can be simplified, control costs can be reduced, and operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, in the second section DK2, the operation of the driving means can be stopped, and in this case, it is possible to suppress energy consumption.

In addition, in the driving state in which the inner ring is displaced in the other direction relative to the outer ring, the engagement of the rollers is released and the transmission of driving force is cut off, so the displacement member is brought to a stopped state (driven state). The driving force of the driving means (drive motor KM4) in this driving state can be used as the driving force for driving the rotating body 800. That is, by switching the drive direction of the drive means (drive motor KM4), the two members, the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800, can be respectively displaced.

Further, the lid member 770 is formed to be rotatable, and its center of gravity is located at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and in the second section DK2, the weight of the lid member 770 displaces the outer ring in one direction. Since the cover member 770 is formed so as to be able to act in one direction, the outer ring can be displaced in one direction in advance of the inner ring by utilizing the weight of the lid member 770. That is, the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the lid member 770 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the lid member 770 and enhance the presentation effect accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Furthermore, the driving force is transmitted through a main body 741b to which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is attached, and a protrusion 741a (pin portion) that protrudes from the main body 741b and is displaced from the center of rotation of the main body 741c. The rotating member 741 (crank member) having a The other end side (second sliding groove 742c side) can be reciprocated. In this case, the other end of the arm member 742 can reciprocate the lid member 770 between the open position and the closed position as the lid member 770 reciprocates. That is, the direction of displacement of the lid member 770 can be changed without changing the driving direction of the drive motor KM4.

Further, in this case, since the second section DK can be formed to have both reciprocating motion, when the lid member 770 is reciprocated, when displacing it in any direction, it starts from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the lid member 770 can be increased, and as a result, the displacement mode of the lid member 770 can be varied, and the performance effect accompanying the displacement of the lid member can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, displacement of the rotation regulating member 780 will be described. FIG. 99(a) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the closed state, and FIG. 99(b) is a side view of the decoration unit 750 in the open state. Note that in FIGS. 99(a) and 99(b), the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is shown transparently.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), when the lid member 770 is in the closed state, the rotation regulating member 780 is in a state where the protrusion 782 side is pushed down by the urging force of the urging spring SP5 (see FIG. 99(a)). (a), it is rotated clockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781).

Therefore, the distance L4 from the rotation axis of the rotor 800 to the outside of the engagement protrusion 882 is smaller than the distance L5 from the rotation axis of the rotor 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 (L4 <L5).

Therefore, the rotating body 800 and the rotation regulating member 780 are not engaged with each other, and the rotating body 800 is allowed to rotate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 99(b), when the lid member 770 is in the open state, the rotation regulating member 780 is a lid member 770 whose contact surface 783 is displaced toward the back side of the rotating body 800. The abutting surfaces 783 are brought into contact with each other, and the abutment surface 783 is pushed downward (rotated counterclockwise around the axis of the shaft hole 781 in FIG. 99(b)).

Therefore, the distance L4 from the rotation axis of the rotor 800 to the outside of the engagement protrusion 882 is made larger than the distance L6 from the rotation axis of the rotor 800 to the tip of the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 (L6 <L4).

As a result, in the rotating body 800 in which the engagement protrusion 882 of the left rotating portion 880 is disposed at the lowest position in the direction of gravity, the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 can be inserted inside the engagement protrusion 882. That is, since the rotating body 800 and the rotation regulating member 780 are engaged, the rotating body 800 is made unrotatable. In addition, in this embodiment, the position where rotation of the rotating body 800 is disabled (the position where the protrusion 782 is inserted inside the engaging protrusion 882) is the position where the opening/closing member 870 of the rotating body 800 is in an open state, which will be described later. is set to

That is, the rotation regulating member 780 (rotation regulating means) that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800 is configured such that the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is displaced to the open position (second position) and the other side of the displacement member is stretched over the gaming area. Since the rotation of the rotating body 800 is restricted when the opening/closing member 870 is extended, the rotating body 800 is rotated with the opening/closing member 870 extended, and the opening/closing member 870 interferes with other members located on its rotation trajectory. can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress rotation of the rotating body 800 due to the load that is applied when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

Here, the first member and the second member are displaceably formed, and the first member has a covering position where at least a part of the second member is hidden from view, and a state where the first member is disposed at the covering position. A gaming machine is known that is movable between a retracted position and a retracted position that reduces the area that covers the second member invisibly. According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by displacing the first member to the retracted position from a state in which the first member is placed in the covered position and the second member is made invisible to the player. It is possible to perform an effect that is visually recognized by the player.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the second member is formed to be displaceable, so when the second member is exposed, there is a risk that the second member will be displaced. Therefore, there was a problem in that the second member could not be seen in an appropriate state by the player, and the performance effect was reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the lid member 770 (first member) is capable of regulating the displacement of the rotating body 800 (second member) when it is displaced to the open position (retracted position). Because of this, the rotating body 800 can be made visible to the player in an appropriate state, and the performance effect can be ensured. That is, when displacing the lid member 770 to the open position to expose the rotating body 800, the displacement of the lid member 770 to the open position, which must be performed for the purpose of the performance, is performed by rotating the lid member 770. It is used as a means for regulating the displacement of the body 800. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide or control a mechanism for regulating the displacement of the rotating body 800, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

Further, as will be described later, the shape of the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically from the center of rotation (see FIG. 101). Therefore, since the rotating body 800 is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity is offset from the center of rotation, the degree of freedom in designing the rotating body 800 can be increased. That is, it is not necessary for the rotating body 800 to have a shape in which its center of gravity is located at the center of rotation, and a shape that is asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the performance effect of the rotating body 800 can be enhanced. On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 is eccentric in this way, the rotating body 800 will rotate around the rotation center (there is a risk of being rotated) due to the gravity, and will be displaced to the closed state position. A configuration in which the lid member 770 is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotary body 800 is particularly effective, and thereby the rotary body 800 can be made visible to the player in an appropriate state, and the performance effect can be ensured.

Note that the rotating body 800 may be formed symmetrically about the axis. In this case, by forming the rotating body 800 from two or more members having different specific gravities, the center of gravity of the rotating body 800 can be placed at a position different from the rotation axis. For example, by forming one half from a metal material and the other half from a flexible material, the center of gravity can be located on the side of the metal material, which generally has a higher specific gravity than the flexible material.

Next, the configuration of the rotating body 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. 100(a) is a front view of the rotating body 800, FIG. 100(b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow Cb in FIG. 100(a), and FIG. 100(c) is a front view of the rotating body 800. 100A is a side view of the rotating body 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow Cc in FIG. 100(a). FIG. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotating body 800, and FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective rear view of the rotating body 800.

As shown in FIGS. 100 to 102, the rotating body 800 is formed into a columnar shape by combining a plurality of members. The rotating body 800 includes a base plate 810 disposed on the shaft portion, and a first display section 830, a second display section 840, a third display section 850, and a fourth display section disposed surrounding the base plate 810 and combined in an annular shape. A display section 860, a right rotation section 89 disposed at one end in the axial direction, a left rotation section 880 disposed at the other end in the axial direction, and an opening/closing member disposed inside the first display section 830. 870.

The base plate 810 has a substantially L-shaped cross section when viewed in the axial direction, and is also formed in a shape extending in the axial direction. The base plate 810 is formed with a right end portion 811 and a left end portion 812 that protrude outward from both left and right ends.

The right end portion 811 is formed to protrude in an annular shape from the right side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (the right side in FIG. 100(a)). The right end portion 811 is formed mainly of a tip portion 811a that partially projects from the protruding tip of the right end portion 811, and a communication hole 811b in an annular inner portion.

The distal end portion 811a further protrudes in the axial direction from the distal end portion of the right end portion 811, and the protruding area in the right side view (direction view in FIG. 100(c)) is inside the engaging portion 764e of the right side plate 764. is set smaller than the area of . The tip portion 811a is inserted inside the engagement portion 764e of the right side plate 764 as described above. Thereby, the base plate 810 and the right side plate 764 (lid member 770) are brought into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be kept in a stopped state against rotational displacement of each display surface (first display section 830, second display section 840, third display section 850, and fourth display section 860) to be described later.

The communication hole 811b is an opening through which a wiring (not shown) connected to an LED board 820 (described later) is inserted, and is formed through the right side surface of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front. This allows the wiring to be inserted.

The left end portion 812 is formed to protrude in an annular shape from the left side of the base plate 810 when viewed from the front (the left side in FIG. 100(a)). The left end portion 812 is formed mainly of a tip portion 812a protruding from a lower semicircle of the left end portion 812, and a communication hole 812b in an annular inner portion.

The distal end portion 812a further protrudes in the axial direction from the distal end portion of the left end portion 812, and its protruding shape in a left side view (direction view in FIG. 100(b)) is an annular lower semicircle.

The communication hole 812b is a path for discharging the ball thrown into the rotating body 800 to the outside of the rotating body 800 by an opening/closing member 870 described later. The inner diameter of the communication hole 812b is set larger than that of the sphere and is set to be approximately the same as the through hole 733a formed in the gear cover 733.

Further, the communication hole 812b is an opening connected to the through hole 733a of the gear cover 733, and the protruding distance of the left end portion 812 is set to a distance at which it comes into contact with the through hole 733a. Furthermore, a protrusion 733b is formed on the upper hemisphere of the end surface of the through hole 733a. The protrusion distance of the protrusion 733b is set to be approximately the same as the protrusion distance of the tip portion 812a. Thereby, the base plate 810 and the gear cover 733 (left side transmission member 730) are brought into an engaged state. As a result, the base plate 810 can be kept in a stopped state against rotational displacement of each display surface (first display section 830, second display section 840, third display section 850, and fourth display section 860) to be described later.

A reverse rotation prevention member 813 is rotatably disposed on the bottom surface of the base plate 810. The reverse rotation prevention member 813 is formed into a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and has an inclined protrusion 813a formed on one end side. In addition, a biasing spring SP6 is disposed between the reverse rotation prevention member 813 and the base plate 810, so that the protrusion 813a is always biased to the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 100(a)). It is said that

The right rotation portion 890 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side. The right rotation part 890 is formed so that the inner diameter of the inner side of the ring is larger than the size of the right end part 811 of the base plate 810 . Thereby, the right end portion 811 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the right rotation portion 890. Moreover, the right rotation part 890 is formed mainly including a shaft hole 891 penetrating in the left-right direction and a sliding groove 892 that is curved and opened around the shaft hole 891.

The shaft hole 891 is a hole into which a shaft portion 872 of an opening/closing member 870 described later is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of the shaft portion 872. Thereby, displacement of the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 with respect to the first display portion 830 can be suppressed.

The sliding groove 892 is formed into a curved shape centered on the shaft hole 891, and its radius is set to be the same as the distance between the protrusion 871 and the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870. Thereby, by inserting the protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870 into the sliding groove 892, the protrusion 871 can be slid inside the sliding groove 892 when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced.

The left rotation portion 880 is formed in a plate shape with a predetermined thickness, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the side. The left rotating portion 880 is formed so that the inner diameter of the ring is larger than the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810 . Thereby, the left end portion 812 of the base plate 810 can be inserted inside the left rotating portion 880. In addition, the left rotation portion 880 mainly includes a wall portion 881 that protrudes in an annular shape from the inner edge portion, an engagement protrusion 882 that protrudes from the side wall, and a locking portion 883 that has sloped surfaces continuously arranged on the inner edge portion. be prepared and formed.

The wall portion 881 is formed to protrude to the left side of the rotating body 800 when viewed from the front. The wall portion 881 has a gear tooth surface 881a engraved on the outer circumferential surface of the protruding tip, and is provided with a communication hole 881b that opens inward. The tooth surface 881a meshes with the transmission gear 881d as described above. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM4 can be transmitted to the rotating body 800.

The communication hole 881b is an opening that communicates the internal space and the external space of the rotating body 800, and can discharge the ball thrown into the rotating body 800 by opening the opening/closing member 870, which will be described later.

As described above, the engagement protrusion 882 is a protrusion with which the rotation regulating member 780 is engaged. The engagement protrusion 882 is formed to protrude from the left side surface of the left rotating portion 880 when viewed from the front. Further, two engaging protrusions 882 are formed at positions separated by a predetermined distance, and the protrusion 782 of the rotation regulating member 780 is formed so as to be insertable between them.

The locking portion 883 has a sawtooth cross section. When the left rotation part 880 is disposed on the base plate 810, the tip of the protrusion 813a of the above-mentioned reverse rotation prevention member 813 is brought into contact with the locking part 883. As a result, when a rotational force that rotates the left rotation part 880 in one direction is applied, the projection 813a can be slid along the inclined surface of the locking part 883 to rotate the left rotation part 880. , when a rotational force for rotating the left rotating portion 880 in the other direction is applied, the surface of the locking portion 883 is caught on the protrusion 813a and rotation is suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 800 from being rotated in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor KM4. Reverse rotation of the rotating body due to a collision or the like can be suppressed.

The first display section 830 to the fourth display section 860 are each formed in the same curved shape, and can be formed into one annular shape by connecting their end surfaces. Moreover, the inner diameters of the first display section 830 to the fourth display section 860, which are formed into one ring, are set to be approximately the same as the outer diameters of the left and right rotating sections 880, 890. Accordingly, by arranging each of the display sections 830 to 860 on the left and right rotating sections 880 and 890, the first display section 830 to the fourth display section 860 can be formed into one columnar shape.

In addition, the first display section 830 to the fourth display section 860 each have a character or a pattern drawn thereon, and as described above, they are rotated by the driving force transmitted from the left rotation section 880 to display the respective characters. This allows the player to visually recognize the patterns.

The first display section 830 is formed mainly of an opening 831 that is open on its curved surface, and a bearing section 832 that is open toward the shaft and protrudes in a U-shape.

The opening 831 is an opening in which an opening/closing member 870 (described later) is disposed, and is formed to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the opening/closing member 870. The bearing portion 832 is formed in a size that allows the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 to be inserted into the open U-shaped portion. Therefore, by inserting the opening/closing member 870 into the opening 831 and inserting the shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 into the bearing portion 832, the opening/closing member 870 can be rotationally displaced with respect to the first display section 830. Note that the manner of displacement of the opening/closing member 870 will be described later.

The LED board 820 can cause the LED light mounted on the LED board 820 to emit light by being supplied with power. Further, the LED board 820 is attached to the back side of the base plate 810.

Next, opening and closing of the opening/closing member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103(a) is a side view of the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 in the closed state. FIG. 103(b) is a side view of the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 in an open state. In addition, in FIG. 103, when the opening/closing member 870 overlaps with another member, its outer diameter is illustrated by a chain line.

Further, the closed state of the opening/closing member 870 is a state in which the outer circumferential surface of the opening/closing member 870 is arranged substantially parallel to the outer circumferential surface of the first display section 830. On the other hand, the open state of the opening/closing member 870 is a state in which the outer circumferential surface of the opening/closing member 870 intersects with the outer circumferential surface of the first display section 830.

As shown in FIG. 103(a), in the rotating body 800 when the opening/closing member 870 is in the closed state, the protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870 is on one end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotation part 890 (in FIG. 103(a), the rotating body 800 is in the closed state). 872).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 103(b), in the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 in the open state, the protrusion 871 of the opening/closing member 870 is located on the other end side of the sliding groove 892 of the right rotation part 890. That is, the opening/closing member 870 is displaced by the protrusion 871 sliding inside the sliding groove 892 of the right rotation part 890.

Next, the displacement of the protrusion 871 will be explained with reference to FIG. 104. 104(a) and (b) are side views of the decoration unit 750. Note that in FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b), the right side plate 764 of the box member 760 is shown in a transparent state.

Further, FIG. 104(a) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in a closed state and the opening/closing member 870 is in a closed state. FIG. 104(b) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is in an open state and the opening/closing member 870 is in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), when the decorative unit 750 is in the closed state, the outer edge of the right lid portion 773 is brought into contact with the protrusion 871. When the decoration unit 750 is in the closed state, the outer diameter L7 of the lower half of the right lid part 773 from the rotating shaft is smaller than the distance L8 from the axis of the right rotating part 890 to one end of the sliding groove 892 (L7 <L8).

Further, the difference in dimension between L7 and L8 is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the protrusion 871. Therefore, when the outer edge of the right lid portion 773 is in contact with the protrusion 871, the protrusion 871 is displaced toward one end of the sliding groove 892. As a result, the opening/closing member 870 is brought into the closed state. That is, when the decoration unit 750 is brought into the closed state, the opening/closing member 870 can be prevented from being displaced to the open state.

As shown in FIG. 104(b), when the decoration unit 750 is in the open state, the recess 773b formed at the outer edge is displaced as the right cover 773 is displaced. In this case, the protrusion 871 is inserted inside the recess 773b. This allows the protrusion 871 to move the sliding groove 892 to the other side. As a result, the opening/closing member 870 is brought into the open state by the urging force of the urging spring SP7 disposed between the shaft portion 872 and the first display portion 830.

As described above, the opening/closing member 870 can be displaced to the open state in accordance with the displacement of the lid member 770. Therefore, since there is no need to provide a drive source for driving the opening/closing member 870 in the rotating body 800, the rotating body 800 can be formed small.

Further, the drive motor KM4 for displacing the opening/closing member 870 can also be used as a drive means for displacing the lid member 770. In this case, when the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 are displaced by the driving force of separate driving means, there is a risk that the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 will interfere if poor control occurs. Since the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, interference between the opening/closing member 870 and the lid member 770 can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 104(b), when the opening/closing member 870 is opened, the rotating tip side is placed above the prize opening 761a of the box member 760. Thereby, the ball thrown from the ball throwing part 711c of the ball holder 710, which will be described later, can fall onto the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870.

In this case, the rotating tip side of the opening/closing member 870 is arranged above the shaft portion 872. Therefore, the ball falling on the upper surface can be caused to roll toward the inside of the rotating body 800. The game ball rolled into the rotating body 800 is rolled onto the upper surface of a base plate 810 disposed inside the rotating body 800. Further, since the base plate 810 is tilted downward toward the left end 812 side, the ball rolled on the upper surface of the base plate 810 is rolled toward the left end 812 side and rotated from inside. It can be discharged to the outside of the body 800. That is, the interior of the rotating body 800 can be used as a throwing path for the ball.

Further, as described above, the rotation regulating member 780 that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 800 is disposed on the rotating body 800, so the lid member 770 is displaced to the open position to expose the rotating body 800. When performing a performance, the performance effect can be further enhanced by displacing the opening/closing member 870. On the other hand, there is a possibility that the rotating body 800 may be rotated (rotated). Therefore, the configuration in which the lid member 770 displaced to the open position is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective, and thereby the rotating body 800 can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It is possible to ensure the production effect.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a rotating member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer surface around the rotational axis is arranged so that it can be viewed by the player. According to this gaming machine, the rotating member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member can be visually recognized by the player while rotating the rotating member or by stopping the rotating member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there was a problem in that the rotating member was not fully utilized, as it was only used as a member to hold the display on the outer surface for the player to see. . That is, the rotating member is formed to be relatively large because it is necessary to maintain a display visible to the player. As a result, while the space it occupies increases, the area other than its outer surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the rotating body 800 (rotating member) communicates the internal space formed therein with the outside, and the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b are formed through which game balls can pass. (Communication port) is provided, so game balls flowing down the game area can flow into or out of the internal space via the opening 831 and the communication hole 881b. Therefore, the internal space of the rotating body 800, which is a dead space, can be used as a storage space for game balls or a ball throwing path, and the rotating body 800 can be utilized accordingly.

In addition, in the conventional gaming machine described above, it is only possible to create a presentation mode in which the player can see the display on the outer circumferential surface when the rotating member is stopped, so there is little change in the presentation mode and the presentation effect is insufficient. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the opening/closing member 870 (displaceable member) disposed displaceably on the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is provided, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is In addition to the performance mode in which the display of is made visible to the player, a performance mode in which the opening/closing member 870 is displaced can be formed, so that the performance mode can be changed accordingly, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

When the lid member 770 (displacement member) is displaced to the closed position (first position), a part of the outer surface of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is formed by the opening/closing member 870. It can be made smaller, and the space required for the rotating body 800 to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opening/closing member 870 is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the opening/closing member 870. It is possible to enhance the performance effect. In addition, by rotating the rotating body 800 with the opening/closing member 870 placed in the closed position and disposing (displacing) the opening/closing member 870 in the open position when the rotation is stopped, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 can be The visually recognized portion (opening/closing member 870) can be configured to protrude outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 800, thereby increasing interest.

Furthermore, an LED board 820 that emits light is disposed on a base plate 810 in the interior space of the rotating body 800 . Therefore, by setting the opening/closing member 870 to the open position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is opened, the internal space is communicated with the outside, and the light emitted from the LED board 820 can be emitted to the outside. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 870 is placed in the closed position, the outer surface of the rotating body 800 is closed, and light emitted from the LED board 820 can be blocked from being emitted to the outside. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Here, in order to make the rotating body 800 rotatable and to displace the opening/closing member 870 on the rotating body 800, a driving means is required for each of the rotating body 800 and the opening/closing member 870, which increases the product cost. increases. Further, if a driving means for displacing the opening/closing member 870 is mounted on the rotating body 800, the weight of the rotating body 800 increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop the rotation of the rotating body 800.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the opening/closing member 870 is displaced as the lid member 770 is displaced, and the lid member 770 and the rotating body 800 are displaced by the same drive motor KM4. KM4 can also be used to rotate the rotating body 800 and displace the opening/closing member 870. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs. Further, since there is no need to mount a driving means on the rotating body 800 for displacing the opening/closing member, the weight of the rotating body 800 can be reduced, and rotation of the rotating body 800 can be smoothly started or stopped.

In addition, since the opening 831 (first communication port) and the communication hole 881b (second communication port) are formed at different positions, the opening 831 is used as the inflow port through which game balls flow from the outside into the internal space, and the communication hole 881b can be used as an outlet through which game balls flow from the internal space to the outside. That is, even if the rotating body 800 (rotating member) is not rotated (maintained in a stopped state), the rotating body 800 can be used as a ball throwing path for the game ball.

Furthermore, the opening 831 is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating body 800, and the communication hole 881b is formed on the end face in the axial direction of the rotating body 800, so that the game balls can enter the internal space of the rotating body 800 (rotating member). In addition to making it easier for the player to visually recognize the inflow, the game balls can be ejected while the rotating body 800 is maintained in a stopped state.

That is, the rotating body 800 is arranged such that the outer surface thereof can be visually recognized by the player, and since an opening 831 (inflow port) is formed on the outer surface, it is possible to easily allow the player to visually recognize the inflow of game balls. On the other hand, when the communication hole 881b is formed on the outer surface of the rotating body 800, when the rotating body 800 is placed in a rotational position where the communication hole 881b is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the communication hole 881b (outflow port) is formed on the end face of the rotating body 800 in the direction of the rotation axis, a state can be formed in which the game balls can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotational position of the rotating body 800.

Furthermore, a displaceable opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is disposed inside the opening 831 (first communication port), and when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the closed position (first position), the opening 831 opens. When the opening/closing member 870 is shielded and the opening/closing member 870 is moved to the open position (second position), the opening 831 is opened, so that the inflow of game balls through the opening 831 is switched between the shielding state and the allowing state. be able to.

Furthermore, one side of the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is rotatably supported by the rotating body 800 (rotating member), and when the opening/closing member 870 is displaced to the open position (second position), the opposite side to the one side Since the other side of the opening/closing member 870 is projected toward the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870. Therefore, when the opening 831 is formed as an inlet, the game balls flowing down the game area can be easily caused to flow into the internal space of the rotating body 800 by using the opening/closing member 870.

Moreover, the game balls flowing down the game area can be easily stopped on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 870. Therefore, for example, when an inlet for game balls is formed in the rotating body 800, the game balls flowing down the gaming area can be made to easily flow into the inlet by using the opening/closing member 870. In this case, if the opening/closing member 870 receives the game ball flowing down the game area, the rotating body 800 may be rotated due to the load acting at that time or the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. . Therefore, the configuration in which the lid member 770 displaced to the open state position is formed so as to be able to displace the rotation regulating member 780 and regulate the displacement of the rotating body 800 is particularly effective. It is possible to easily maintain a state in which the area is extended at a predetermined position.

The shaft portion 872 of the opening/closing member 870 is arranged on the rotational direction side of the rotating body 800. In other words, one side of the opening/closing member 870 (displacement member) is located further forward in the rotational direction of the rotating body 800 (rotating member) than the other side. Therefore, even if the opening/closing member 870 interferes with members disposed around the rotating member 800 when the rotating body 800 is rotated, the force generated by such interference closes the opening/closing member 870 (displaces it to the closed position). can be made to act in the direction of That is, when the rotating body 800 rotates, the opening/closing member 870 can be prevented from interfering with other members and being displaced to the extended position (second position). Further, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing member 870 from engaging with another member and inhibiting the rotation of the rotating body 800.

Furthermore, since the base plate 810 (fixed member) disposed in the internal space of the rotating body 800 does not rotate with respect to the box member 760 (base member) on which the rotating body 800 is rotatably disposed, By rolling the game ball that has flowed into the internal space of the rotating body 800 from the opening 831 with the top surface of the base plate 810 toward the communication hole 881b, the game ball goes wild in the internal space as the rotating body 800 rotates. Alternatively, the rolling of the game ball is inhibited and it can be prevented from remaining in the internal space.

As described above, since the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 870 is regulated by the displacement of the lid member 770, the opening/closing member 870 displaced to the open state (second position) does not interfere with members around the rotating body 800. can be suppressed.

As described above, the rotary body 800 has the communication hole 811b through which the wiring to the LED board 820 attached to the back side of the base plate 810 is inserted, and the communication hole 811b is located opposite to the end surface of the rotary body 800 in which the communication hole 881b is formed. formed on the end face of Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space that can be used for each of the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b.

That is, when electrically wiring an LED board disposed inside the rotating body 800, if the wiring is inserted from the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800, the wiring will become tangled due to the rotation of the rotating body 800, so that the axial end face of the rotating body Although it is preferable to wire the wires from the inside, if an opening through which the game balls flow in and an opening through which the game balls flow out are formed on both axial end surfaces of the rotating body 800, it becomes difficult to secure a space for the wires to pass through.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the inlet of the game ball of the rotating body 800 can be made on the outer circumferential surface, one of the axial end faces of the rotating body 800 is used as the outlet of the game ball, and the other side is used as the outlet for inserting the wiring. Since it can be used as an opening, it is easy to secure a space for the wiring to pass through.

As a result, the game balls can be smoothly discharged through the communication hole 881b, and the wiring work for electrical connection lines (wiring to the LED board 820) to the opening can be easily performed. Moreover, since the communication hole 881b and the communication hole 811b can be separated to the maximum extent, it is possible to easily suppress interference between the game ball rolling through the internal space of the rotating body 800 to the communication hole 881b and the electrical connection line.

Next, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. 105 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700, and FIG. 106 is a top view of the lower displacement unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow CVI in FIG. 105. Note that in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 is illustrated in the retracted state.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 are arranged at adjacent positions in the left-right direction. Further, in the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700 in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 106), the emission opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 is arranged at approximately the center position of the ball holder 710 in the front-rear direction.

Next, referring to FIG. 107, the manner in which the ball is thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 107 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 400 and the rotation unit 700. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state in which the lower displacement unit 400 is placed in the first extended state.

As shown in FIG. 107, the lower displacement unit 400 is in the first extended state, and the ball receiving part 467 disposed inside the lower displacement member 440 is in a state in which the ball is received inside (the state in which the ball receiving part 467 is in the first extended state). When the firing operation is performed in the lower displacement member 440, the ball disposed inside the ball receiver 467 is ejected from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440, as described above.

The ball ejected from the exit opening 471 of the lower displacement member 440 falls freely onto the ball holder 710 of the rotation unit 700 disposed on the right side in front view. As a result, the ball can be thrown from the lower displacement unit 400 to the rotating body 800.

Next, the configuration of the ball holder 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. 108(a) is a top view of the ball holder 710, FIG. 108(b) is a front view of the ball holder 710, and FIG. 108(c) is the CVIIIc-CVIIIc of FIG. 108(a). FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the ball pedestal 710 along the line. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the ball holder 710.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the ball holder 710 includes a box-shaped tray holder 711, a solenoid 712 disposed inside the tray holder 711, and a solenoid 712 connected to the solenoid 712. It is formed mainly of a displacement member 713 that covers the solenoid 712, and a cover member 714 that covers the solenoid 712.

The tray receiving part 711 includes a bottom plate 711a forming a bottom surface, an upright part 711b standing on the edge of the bottom plate 711a, a throwing part 711c protruding from a part of the outer edge of the bottom plate 711a, and a throwing part 711c. The shaft hole 711d is formed through an upright portion 711b that stands upright on the edge of the shaft.

The bottom plate 711a is bent downward toward the ball throwing section 711c, which will be described later. Thereby, the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a can be caused to roll toward the ball throwing portion 711c by the bending (inclination).

The bottom plate 711a is made of a flexible material, and the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a (bottom surface in FIG. 108(c)) is textured to form fine irregularities on the surface. Thereby, when the bottom plate 711a is molded, the rate of heat shrinkage is made different between the top surface and the bottom surface, so that it can be easily bent toward the bottom surface. That is, when the textured bottom surface undergoes heat shrinkage due to the unevenness, it becomes difficult for force to act in the direction of convexly curving the bottom plate side. On the other hand, since the upper surface side is formed as a flat surface, when it is thermally shrunk, a horizontal pulling force acts and the end portion tends to change upward (the upper surface side tends to form a concave curve). Therefore, it is possible to easily bend the ball in a direction that makes it easier to roll when it is thermally shrunk. As a result, it is possible to prevent the bottom plate 711a from becoming a defective product when molded.

The upright portion 711b is a wall portion that is erected upward in the direction of gravity (upper side in FIG. 108(c)) from the outer edge of the ball throwing portion 711c. The standing distance of the standing portion 711b is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. Thereby, the ball thrown to the upper part of the bottom plate 711a can be suppressed from falling downward from the edge thereof. In this embodiment, the upright dimension of the upright portion 711b is set to approximately 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere.

Further, the upright portion 711b is formed by connecting a central upright portion 711b1 that divides the area of the bottom plate 711a into two parts to the upright portion 711b. The central upright portion 711b1 divides the upper area of the bottom plate 711a into an area where a ball is thrown and the other area where a solenoid 712 (described later) is disposed.

The ball throwing portion 711c is formed on the front side of the bottom plate 711a. Moreover, the position in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 108(a)) is arranged on the right side (the right side in FIG. 108) of the approximate center position of the bottom plate 711a. Furthermore, the ball throwing portion 711c is protruded from the bottom plate and is therefore curved downward. Thereby, the ball thrown from the bottom plate 711a can fall downward via the ball throwing part 711c. In addition, the prize opening 761a of the cover member 770 is arranged below the ball throwing part 711c (see FIG. 106), and the ball that falls from the ball throwing part 711c can be thrown into the inside of the winning hole 761a.

A shaft portion 713a of a displacement member 713, which will be described later, is inserted into the shaft hole 711d. Thereby, the displacement member 713 can be rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft hole 711d.

The solenoid 712 can piston-displace the shaft inserted into the solenoid 712 by applying electric power. A transmission member 712a is attached to the shaft of the solenoid 712. The transmission member 712a is a member that transmits the driving force of the solenoid 712 to a displacement member 713, which will be described later, and has a communicating hole 712a1 formed therethrough at its tip.

The displacement member 713 has a C-shaped cross section and mainly includes a protrusion 713b that protrudes to the outside of the C-shape at one end, and a shaft portion 713a that protrudes to the inside of the C-shape at both ends.

The protrusion 713b is a protrusion inserted into the communication hole 712a1 of the solenoid 712, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the communication hole 712a1. Thereby, the displacement of the solenoid 712 is transmitted to the displacement member 713 via the transmission member 712a.

The shaft portion 713a is a shaft inserted into the shaft hole 711d. By inserting the shaft portion 713a into the shaft hole 711d, the displacement member 713 can rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 713a. That is, displacement of the solenoid 712 drives the displacement member 713.

The cover member 714 is formed to have an outer shape larger than that of the solenoid 712, is disposed above the solenoid 712 disposed on the upper part of the bottom plate 711a, and is fastened and fixed to the tray holder 711. This allows the solenoid 712 to be fixed.

Next, the ball falling onto the ball holder 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. 110(a) and 110(b) are cross-sectional views of the ball holder 710. Note that FIGS. 110(a) and 110(b) correspond to the cross section of the ball holder 710 in FIG. 108(c).

As shown in FIG. 110, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 falls freely in the direction of gravity, and due to the firing operation of the ball receiver 467, the ball is thrown toward the rotating unit 700 (right side in FIG. 110(a)). ). That is, the ball is dropped toward the bottom right of the bottom plate 711a of the ball holder 710 when viewed from the front.

In this case, as described above, the bottom plate 711a is bent downward toward the ball throwing part 711c, and the ball throwing part 711c is formed on the right side of the bottom plate 711a, so the upper surface of the bottom plate 711a where the ball falls. can be made into a slope that slopes downward to the right. Therefore, the direction of displacement of the ball and the direction of inclination of the bottom plate 711a on which the ball falls can be brought close to parallel.

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 110(b), it is possible to suppress the ball that has fallen onto the bottom plate 711a from bouncing upward (upward in FIG. 110(b)). Therefore, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 of the lower displacement unit 400 to the ball holder 710 of the rotation unit 700 can be prevented from falling from the ball holder 710.

Furthermore, the ball that has fallen onto the bottom plate 711a can be rolled toward the ball throwing section 711c by the momentum of the fall. Therefore, the rolling time of the ball to the ball throwing portion 711c can be shortened. As a result, the ball thrown from the lower displacement member 440 to the ball holder 710 can be thrown smoothly.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, light emission from the ball holder 710 will be described. 111(a) and (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 700 taken along the line CXI-CXI in FIG. 87. Note that FIG. 111(a) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is placed in a closed state, and FIG. 111(b) shows a state in which the decoration unit 750 is placed in an open state.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), when the decoration unit 750 is placed in the closed state, light is emitted to the ball holder 710 by an LED board 721 placed on the back side of the back base 720. .

To explain in detail, the light emitted from the LED 721a of the LED board 721 is reflected on the back side of the lid member 770, thereby making it incident on the bottom plate 711a of the ball holder 710. Further, as described above, since the bottom surface of the bottom plate 711a is textured, the incident light can be diffusely reflected by the unevenness of the texture. This allows the entire bottom surface of the ball holder 710 to emit light.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111(b), when the decoration unit 750 is placed in the open state, the transparent portion 771a is formed in the lid member 770 as described above, so the LED 721a of the LED base 721 is The light is transmitted without being reflected by the lid member 770. Since the rotating body 800 is formed inside the lid member 770, the light can be reflected by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and made to enter the ball holder 710.

In this case, by rotating the third display section 850 of the rotating body 800 toward the ball holder 710 (upper side in FIG. 111(b)), the LEDs 821 of the LED board 820 disposed on the back side of the base plate 810 emit light. The light can be reflected by the inner wall of the rotating body 800 and emitted from the third display section 850.

As described above, the inner wall of the third display section 850 is textured, and a plurality of projections and depressions are formed on the surface. Therefore, the third display section 850 can more easily emit light to the outside of the rotating body 800 than the other display sections. Therefore, it is preferable to arrange the third display section 850 on the ball holder 710 side.

Next, the detailed configuration of the upper displacement unit 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 118. First, a structure for displacing the upper displacement member 940 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114.

FIG. 112 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective front view of the upper displacement unit 900. FIG. 114 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper displacement unit 900. Note that FIGS. 112 to 114 illustrate a state in which the upper displacement member 940 is placed at the retracted position (the uppermost position with respect to the base member 910).

As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the upper displacement unit 900 includes a base member 910 disposed on the bottom wall 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a base member 910 disposed inside the base member 910. a transmission member 920 , a rotation member 930 which is rotatably connected to the base member 910 and is displaced as the transmission member 920 is displaced, and a rotation member 930 whose one end is slidably and displaceably connected to the base member 410 . The upper displacement member 940 is connected to the upper displacement member 940 and is displaced by receiving the driving force from the rotation member 930.

The base member 910 is formed by combining two rectangular and laterally elongated plate members when viewed from the front, and includes a front base 911 disposed on the front side and a back base 912 disposed on the back side. A transmission member 920 and a rotating member 930 are arranged between the front base 911 and the rear base 912, which face each other.

The front base 911 has three sliding grooves 911c, 911d, and 911e penetrating in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the paper in FIG. 112), a pivot pin 911b protruding toward the back side at the center position in the circumferential direction, and one end side of the front base. It is formed mainly of a shaft portion 911f that projects toward the front (left side when viewed from the front) and an opening 911a that penetrates in the front-rear direction at one end.

The opening 911a is an opening through which the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front base 911 is inserted to the rear side. Thereby, the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front side of the front base 911 can be inserted into the back side of the front base 911.

The shaft support pins 911g and 911b are inserted into shaft holes of a transmission gear 922 and a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, and can rotatably hold the transmission gear 922 and transmission gear 923. That is, the shaft support pins 911g and 911b are formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft holes of the transmission gears 922 and 923.

The sliding groove 911c is formed penetratingly in an arc shape centered on the axis of the pivot pin 911b. The sliding groove 911c is an opening into which a shaft support pin 923a of a transmission gear 923, which will be described later, is inserted, and the radius of the arc is approximately the same as the distance from the shaft hole of the transmission gear 923, which will be described later, to the shaft support pin 923a. Set. Thereby, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated with the pivot pin 923a inserted into the sliding groove 911c, collision between the pivot pin and the inner wall of the sliding groove 911c can be suppressed.

The sliding grooves 911d and 911e are grooves into which pivot pins 951 and 952 of an upper displacement member 940, which will be described later, are inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction thereof is set larger than the outer diameter of the pivot pins 951 and 952. be done.

The sliding groove 911e is formed linearly in the longitudinal direction of the front base 911 (left and right direction in front view). On the other hand, the sliding groove 911d is formed in an arc shape centered below the front base 911. That is, the sliding groove 911e and the sliding groove 911d are formed non-parallel. Therefore, at different positions in the left-right direction, the distances between the two sliding grooves 911e and 911d facing each other in the vertical direction are formed to be different. As a result, when the pivot pins 951 and 952 are slid inside the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, the upper displacement member 940 is rotated and slid due to the difference in the distance between the vertically opposing sides. Ru.

The shaft portion 911f is formed to protrude in a cylindrical shape toward the front side. The shaft portion 911f can be inserted into a through hole 931 formed at one end of a rotating member 930, which will be described later, and can hold the rotating member 930 in a rotatable state. That is, the shaft portion 911f is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 931 of the rotating member 930.

The back base 912 is a plate member attached to the back side of the front base 911 at a predetermined interval. Back base 912 is formed from a metal material. Thereby, the overall rigidity of the base member 910 can be improved. As a result, when the relatively heavy upper displacement member 940 is disposed on the base member 910 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, twisting of the base member 910 can be suppressed.

The transmission member 920 is disposed between the front base 911 and the rear base 912, which face each other. The transmission member 920 mainly includes a transmission gear 921 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM5, a transmission gear 922 meshed with the transmission gear 921, and a transmission gear 923 meshed with the transmission gear 922. It is formed by

As described above, the transmission gear 921 is connected to the drive motor KM5 by inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM5 disposed on the front side of the front base 911 into the shaft hole. Thereby, the transmission gear 921 can be rotationally displaced by the driving force of the drive motor KM5.

The transmission gear 922 meshes with the transmission gear 921 and the transmission gear 923 as described above. Thereby, the rotational driving force of the transmission gear 921 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 923.

The transmission gear 923 is formed with a pivot pin 923a protruding toward the front on its outer peripheral edge. Therefore, when the transmission gear 923 is rotated, the pivot pin 923a is rotationally displaced around the axis of the transmission gear 923.

The rotating member 930 is formed in the shape of a long rod on one side, and mainly includes a through hole 931 that is formed through the end of the one end in the front-rear direction, and an opening 932 that extends in the longitudinal direction at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction. be prepared and formed.

As described above, the through hole 931 is an opening into which the shaft portion 911f of the front base 911 is inserted, and by inserting the shaft portion 911f, the rotating member 930 can be rotated with respect to the front base 911. can be retained. Further, a biasing spring SP8 is provided at the tip of the shaft portion 911f. As a result, the rotating member 930 is biased in a direction that lifts the other end upward relative to the front base 911.

The opening 932 is a groove into which the pivot pin 923a of the transmission gear 923 is inserted, and is formed so that the pivot pin 923a can slide inside. As described above, when the transmission gear 923 is rotationally displaced and the arrangement of the pivot pin 923a is displaced, the pivot pin 923a is displaced inside the opening 932. Therefore, since the rotating member 930 is arranged with one end rotatably supported, the rotating member 930 is rotated about the one end by displacement of the supporting pin 923a.

Further, on the other end side of the rotating member 930, an annular member 933 is disposed, which is formed into an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a plate shape with a predetermined thickness on the back side.

The front side of the annular member 933 is formed with two sliding grooves 933a recessed at symmetrical positions along its outer periphery. The annular member 933 is a portion connected to an upper displacement member 940 described later, and a shaft portion 953 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside. Further, the annular member 933 and the upper displacement member 940 are rotatably connected, and as the rotation member 930 is rotationally displaced, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced.

A protrusion 961 of the upper displacement member 940 is inserted inside the sliding groove 933a, and when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member, the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. can.

Further, the arcuate axis of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a different position from the rotation axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotation member 930. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930, the first opening portion 960 can be displaced. Note that a detailed explanation of the first opening portion 960 will be given later.

Note that on one end side (rotating shaft side) of the rotating member 930, a shaft cover 913 and a deformation regulating cover 914, which are formed from a plate-shaped body, are disposed at the front. The shaft cover 913 is disposed in front of the rotating shaft portion of the rotating member 930, and prevents the rotating member 930 from shaking in the front-back direction. The deformation regulating cover 914 is disposed at a position spaced a predetermined distance from the rotating shaft, and can suppress deformation of the rotating member 930 in the front-back direction due to the weight of the upper displacement member 940 disposed on the other end side.

The upper displacement member 940 includes a base body 950 connected to the front base 911 and the rotating member 930, two first openings 960 rotatably disposed on the back side of the base body 950, and the base body 950. It is formed mainly of two second open parts 970 rotatably arranged on the front side and a variable part 980 arranged on one end side.

The base body 950 mainly includes two pivot pins 951 and 952 that are formed to protrude from the back surface of one end, and a shaft portion 953 that is formed to protrude from the back surface of the other end.

The pivot pins 951, 952 are projections inserted into the sliding grooves 911e, 911d of the front base 911, as described above. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 940 is driven by the rotating member 930, the pivot pins 951 and 952 slide along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d, thereby slidingly displacing the upper displacement member 940 in the left-right direction. At the same time, the other end side can be rotationally displaced downward.

As described above, the shaft portion 953 is a protrusion that is inserted into the annular member 933 and connected to the rotating member 930, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the annular member 933. Thereby, the upper displacement member 940 can be rotatably connected to the rotation member 930. Therefore, when the rotating member 930 is rotationally displaced around one end by the driving force of the drive motor KM5, the driving force is transmitted to the upper displacement member 940 due to the displacement of the annular member 933. As a result, the upper displacement member 940 can be displaced along the sliding grooves 911e and 911d.

The first open portions 960 are plate members having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two of the first open portions 960 are disposed on the back side of the base body 950. The first open portion 960 is rotatably supported on the other end of the base body 950. The first open portion 960 also includes a protrusion 961 that protrudes toward the back side and is disposed inside the sliding groove 933a of the annular member 933. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced with respect to the rotating member 930 due to the displacement of the rotating member 930, the protrusion 961 can be slid inside the sliding groove 933a.

In this case, as described above, the curved axis of the sliding groove 933a is arranged at a different position from the rotating axis of the upper displacement member 940 with respect to the rotating member 930, so that the protrusion 961 slides inside the sliding groove 933a. Accordingly, the first opening portion 960 that is pivotally supported by the base body 950 can be rotationally displaced.

The second open portion 970 is a plate member having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, and two of the second open portions 970 are arranged on the front side of the base body 950. The second open portion 970 is rotatably supported on the other end of the base body 950. Also. The second opening part 970 is formed with an engagement protrusion (not shown) that engages when the first opening part 960 is displaced a predetermined amount. As a result, as described above, when the first opening part 960 is rotationally displaced about the pivot portion when the upper displacement member 940 is subjected to a predetermined rotational displacement, the first opening part 960 engages with the second opening part 970. The second opening portion 970 can be rotationally displaced.

Next, displacement of the upper displacement member 940 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 115 to 117. FIG. 115 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 116 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 disposed at an intermediate position. FIG. 117 is a front view of the upper displacement unit 900 with the upper displacement member 940 placed in the extended position.

Note that the retracted position of the upper displacement member 940 is a position in which the pivot pins 951 and 952 are arranged on the other end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 (the right side of the front base 911 when viewed from the front). It is. Further, the extended position is a position in which the pivot pins 951 and 952 are arranged at one end side of the sliding grooves 911d and 911e of the front base 911 (left side of the front base 911 when viewed from the front). Furthermore, the intermediate position is a position in which the upper displacement member 940 is displaced to a position intermediate between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 115 to 117, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced with respect to the front base 911, the upper displacement member 940 changes its longitudinal direction from the approximately horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 115) to the approximately vertical direction ( (vertical direction in FIG. 117).

Further, along with the rotational displacement, the position of one end of the upper displacement member 940 is displaced from the right end position of the front base 911 in the front view to the substantially center position in the front view. That is, as described above, when the rotating member 930 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM5, the upper displacement member 940 is rotationally displaced while being slid.

Furthermore, when the upper displacement member 940 is displaced from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 116 to the extended position shown in FIG. The second opening part 970, which is engaged with and displaced by the rotational displacement of the first opening part 960, is also rotationally displaced with respect to the base body 950. Therefore, in the extended position, the longitudinal direction of the upper displacement member 940 is directed in the vertical direction, and the first opening part 960 and the second opening part 970 are in a displaced state.

Note that in this embodiment, the upper displacement member 940 is formed in a shape that imitates the shape of a human arm (including a hand). Therefore, by displacing the first opening part 960 and the second opening part 970 from the first position to the third position, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the displacement in which the human arm becomes thicker. .

Next, the variable section 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 118. 118(a) is a front view of the variable portion 980, and FIG. 118(b) is a rear view of the variable portion 980.

As shown in FIGS. 118(a) and 118(b), the variable portion 980 is formed in a shape imitating a human hand, and includes a main body portion 981 forming the rear part of the hand, and a main body portion 981 that forms the rear part of the hand. It is formed mainly of finger parts 982 to 986 that are connected to form the finger parts of the hand.

A drive motor (not shown) is disposed inside the main body portion 981, and a variable plate (not shown) disposed inside can be moved by a piston in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 118(a)). be done.

The finger portion 982 corresponds to a thumb, and its base side is connected to the variable plate of the main body portion 981. Thereby, the finger portion 982 can be displaced by the piston movement of the variable plate.

The finger portions 983 to 986 are formed to mainly include a first link RB1 disposed on the base side and a second link RB2 disposed on the distal end side.

The first link RB1 is rotatably connected to the second link RB2 at its distal end and connected to the variable plate of the main body 981 at its base. Therefore, by the piston movement of the variable plate of the main body portion 981, it is possible to displace the first link RB1 and the second link RB2 via the first link RB1. This allows the finger portions 983 to 986 to be displaced. Note that in this embodiment, by displacing the finger sections 982 to 986, the player can visually recognize the opening and closing actions of the fingers of the hand.

The front base 411 has two sliding grooves 411a and 411b penetrating in the front-rear direction (depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 43), two cylindrical pivot pins 411c and 411d protruding toward the back side, and a pivot pin 411d. It is formed mainly with a curved wall portion 411e projecting in an arc shape with the axis as the axis.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are holes into which two protrusions 472 and 473 protruding from the back side of the lower displacement member 440 are inserted, respectively. The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each formed to extend in the left-right direction. Therefore, by displacing the projections 472, 473 inserted into the sliding grooves 411a, 411b along the sliding grooves 411a, 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be slid in the left-right direction.

The sliding grooves 411a and 411b are each curved in an arc shape, extending upward (in the upper direction in FIG. 43) from the left end (left side in FIG. 43) to the right end (right side in FIG. 43) of the front base 411. ) is opened. Furthermore, the sliding grooves 411a and 411b are arranged so that the axes of their circular arcs are located at different positions, and the gap between the opposing grooves in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 43) is narrowed from the left end to the right end.

Since the distance between the protrusions 472 and 473 of the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 does not change, when the lower displacement member 440 is slid along the sliding groove, the lower displacement member 440 is rotated. It can be displaced. That is, by changing the distance between the two sliding grooves 411a and 411b, the lower displacement member 440 can be rotated as it slides without applying rotational driving force to the lower displacement member 440.

The pivot pin 411c is a protrusion inserted into a shaft portion 422a of a cam member 422 of a transmission member 420, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 422a. Further, the pivot pin 411c is formed from a metal rod-shaped body and is fitted onto the front base 411. Therefore, when force is applied to the cam member 422 from its outer peripheral surface in the axial direction, it is possible to suppress the pivot pin 411c from breaking (damaging).

Next, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. In the first embodiment, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in the same direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2, but in the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment, the movable rack 2464 and the rack 466 It is displaced in the opposite direction by the driving force of the drive motor KM2. Note that the same parts as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and a description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment. FIG. 120 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. Note that FIG. 120 shows a state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are seen transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the lower displacement member 2440 in the second embodiment includes a base member 2470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 2470, and a case member 480. The case member 480 mainly includes a transmission mechanism 2460 that is disposed displaceably between the base member 2470 and a decorative member 450 that covers the front and rear of the case member 480.

The base member 2470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472, 473 protruding from the back surface on one end side, and a standing wall 471a erected from the edge on the other end side to the front side. A protruding wall 477 that protrudes from the upper end of the center portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 120) in a vertically opposite U-shape toward the front side, shaft portions 474, 475 that project toward the front side; It is formed mainly of shaft parts 2470a and 2470b that protrude above 475.

The shaft portion 2470a is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468a (described later) is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468a.

The shaft portion 2470b is a shaft member on which a transmission gear 2468b (described later) is rotatably supported, and is formed smaller than the shaft hole of the transmission gear 2468b. As will be described later, the transmission gear 2468a and the shaft portion 2470a are arranged such that gear tooth surfaces carved on their outer peripheral surfaces are meshed with each other. That is, the distance between the shaft portion 2470a and the shaft portion 2470b when viewed from the front is set to a distance equal to the radius of the transmission gear 2468a and the transmission gear 2468b.

The transmission mechanism 2460 is disposed in front of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463. A movable rack 2464 that is slidably disposed in front of the base member 470, a transmission gear 2468a that meshes with the movable rack 2464, a transmission gear 2468b that meshes with the transmission gear 2468a, and a transmission gear 2468b that meshes with the transmission gear 2468a. It is formed mainly of a rack 46 that meshes with the transmission gear 2468b, and a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed at one end of the rack 466.

The movable rack 2464 is formed into a rectangular and oblong plate-like body when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 464a engraved on the lower end surface, a rack gear 2464g engraved on the upper end surface, and a collision part 464f protruding from the lower end. It is mainly formed by

Rack gear 2464g is meshed with transmission gear 2468a, which will be described later. Thereby, when the drive is transmitted from the drive motor KM4 and the rack 466 is displaced, the transmission gear 2468a can be rotated in accordance with the displacement.

The transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are respectively pivotally supported by the shaft portions 2470a and 2470b of the base member 2470 in a mutually meshed state as described above. Thereby, when transmission gear 2468a is rotated, transmission gear 2468b is rotated. Further, the transmission gear 2468b is meshed with the rack gear 466a of the rack 466, and when the transmission gear 2468b is rotated, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 466, and the rack 466 is displaced.

That is, the rack 466 can be driven by the driving force of the drive motor KM4. Note that the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are disposed at positions partially shifted in the front-back direction, and transmission gear 2468a and transmission gear 2468b are restrained from colliding with rack 466 and movable rack 2464, respectively.

Next, displacement of the lower displacement member 2440 will be explained with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a front view of the lower displacement member 2440. Note that in FIG. 121, the decorative member 450 and front case 481 of the lower displacement member 2440 are shown in a transparent state, similar to FIG. 120.

As shown in FIG. 121, when power is applied to the drive motor KM2 and the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the firing position by the transmission mechanism 2460 described above, the movable rack 464 and the rack 466 are displaced in different directions. Ru.

To explain in detail, by rotating the drive motor KM4, the movable rack 464 is displaced to the other end side of the lower displacement member 440 (left side in FIG. 121). Along with this displacement, the transmission gears 2468a and 2468b are rotated, and the rack 466 is displaced to one end side (to the right in FIG. 3). Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be displaced to the third position.

Therefore, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component that is opposite to the direction of displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 can be formed. The change in the center of gravity position of the displacement member 2440 can be reduced by the displacement of the movable rack 464. As a result, shaking of the lower displacement member 2440 due to a change in the center of gravity position can be suppressed.

Next, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 127. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by a rack and pinion mechanism, but in the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, the ball receiving portion 467 is slidably displaced by a link mechanism. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. FIG. 122(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 122(b) is a rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. 123 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 3440, and FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 3440. 125(a) and 91(b) are front views of the lower displacement member 3440.

Note that in FIG. 125(a), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 is shown transparently, and in FIG. 125(b), the decorative member 450 of the lower displacement member 3440 and the front case 3481 are shown transparently. The state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 122 to 125, the lower displacement member 3440 in the third embodiment includes a base member 3470 connected to the front base 411, a case member 480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 3470, and a case member 480 and the base. The case member 480 mainly includes a transmission mechanism 3460 that is disposed displaceably between the case member 3470 and a decorative member 450 that covers the front and rear of the case member 480.

The base member 3470 is a plate member formed in a horizontally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes protrusions 472 and 473 that protrude from the back surface on one end side, and a standing wall 471a that stands from the edge on the other end side to the front side. A sliding wall 3470c is formed continuously from the base end side of the standing wall 471a and is erected at the lower edge of the base member 3470, and an upper end of the central part in the left-right direction (FIG. 122(a) left-right direction) The base member 470 mainly includes a protruding wall 477 that protrudes in a vertically opposite U-shape toward the front side, and an opening 479 that is recessed and extends from one end to the other end in the vertical center of the base member 470. It is formed.

The sliding wall 3470c is a wall portion that comes into contact with the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 to regulate the position (aspect) of the ball receiving portion 467. That is, it is formed to protrude to a position below the ball receiving part 467. Thereby, the ball receiving portion 467 can be held with the opening of the U-shaped portion facing upward.

Further, the sliding wall 3470c has a recessed portion 3470c1 recessed below the end on the side of the standing wall 471a. The recessed portion 3470c1 is a groove that receives the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 therein. Thereby, when the ball receiving part 467 is slid toward the upright part side by the transmission mechanism 3460 described later, the ball receiving part 467 can be received in the recess and the ball receiving part 467 can be rotated. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 can perform a firing operation (an operation of ejecting the ball held inside the U-shape to the outside of the lower displacement member 3440).

The transmission mechanism 3460 includes a drive motor KM2 attached to a front case 3480, which will be described later, a first link member 3468 rotatably connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and a first link member 3468 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2. The second link member 3469 is rotatably connected, and a ball receiving portion 467 is connected to one end of the second link member 3469.

The first link member 3468 is formed from a rectangular horizontally elongated plate-like body, and has a shaft hole 3468b penetratingly formed at one end side, a connecting hole 3468a connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and a bulging hole at the other end side. A load portion 3468c is formed.

The shaft hole 3468b is a through hole into which a rotating shaft 3469a of a second link member 3469, which will be described later, is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 3469a and is formed through the shaft hole 3468b in the front-rear direction.

As described above, the connecting hole 3468a is a hole that is fastened to the shaft of the drive motor KM2, and is formed to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the shaft of the drive motor KM2. By fitting and fastening the shaft of the drive motor KM2 into the connection hole 3468a, the first link member 3468 can be rotated by the driving force of the drive motor KM2.

The load portion 3468c is formed to bulge out from the connecting hole 3468a toward the other end. The load portion 346c is a member for applying a load to position the center of gravity of the first link member 3468 on the other end side than the connection hole 3468a, and is formed to bulge outward from the one end side.

The second link member 3469 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape and is disposed on the back side of the first link member 3468. The second link member 3469 mainly includes a rotating shaft 3469a that projects from the other end toward the front in a cylindrical shape, and a through hole 3469b that extends through the first end in the front-rear direction.

The rotating shaft 3469a is inserted into the shaft hole 3468b of the first link member 3468, as described above. Thereby, the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 can be connected in a rotatable state.

The through hole 3469b is an opening for connecting the ball receiving portion 467 to the second link member 3469. Further, the through hole 3469b is formed smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467. Therefore, the shaft hole 467b of the ball receiving portion 467 and the through hole 3469b are arranged coaxially, and a screw with a head larger than the width of the opening 469 in the transverse direction is inserted into the opening 479 and the shaft hole 467b from the back side of the base member 3470. By inserting and fastening into the through hole 3469b, the ball receiving portion 467 is rotatably connected to the second link member.

The case member 480 is a member that covers the front and rear of the base member 470, and mainly includes a front case 3481 disposed on the front side of the base member 470 and a back case 482 disposed on the back side.

The front case 3481 is formed into a rectangular and horizontally elongated plate shape when viewed from the front, and includes an opening 3481d penetrated at a position facing the drive motor KM2, a bottom wall portion 481b protruding from the lower end surface on the back side, and a lower edge. It is formed mainly with a shaft hole 481c penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The opening 3481d is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM2 disposed on the front side of the front case 3481 is inserted to the back side, and is formed to have a larger outer diameter than the shaft of the drive motor KM2. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor KM2 arranged on the front side of the front case 3481 can be transmitted to the first link member 3468 arranged on the back side.

Next, displacement of the lower displacement member 3440 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the first position, and FIG. 126(b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position. FIG. 127(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the third position, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the lower displacement member 440 in the second position.

Note that from FIG. 126(a) to FIG. 127(b), transition states of the lower displacement member 440 are sequentially illustrated. Further, FIGS. 126(a) and 126(b) or FIGS. 127(a) and 127(b) illustrate a state in which the decorative member 450 and the front case 481 of the lower displacement member 3440 are seen transparently.

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the lower displacement member 440 in the first position has a first link member 3468 and a second link member 3469 whose longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 126(a)) is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the base member 3470. The first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the direction (left-right direction in FIG. 126(a)), and to overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is placed at one end side of the base member 3470 (left side in FIG. 126(a)). Thereby, the second link member 3469 is arranged at one end side. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 is placed at the first position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(b), when the drive motor KM2 is rotated from the first position and the first link member 3468 is rotationally displaced, one end side of the first link member 3468 touches the base member 3470. is displaced relative to. As a result, the second link member 3469 connected to one end side of the first link member 3468 is displaced. In this case, one end side of the second link member 3469 is connected to the ball receiving part 467 and is slidable along the opening 479 of the base member 3470, so that one end side of the second link member 3469 is connected to the ball receiving part 467. is pushed out to the other end. As a result, the ball receiving portion 467 connected to the other end side of the second link member 3469 can be displaced to the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 127(a), the drive motor KM2 is further rotationally displaced from the second position, and the first link member 3468 is rotated approximately 180 degrees from the first position. , the connecting portion between the first link member 3468 and the second link member 3469 is placed on the other end side of the base member 3470 with respect to its rotation axis. Therefore, one end side of the second link member 3469 is further pushed out toward the other end side of the base member 3470, and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the third position.

In this case, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 is placed inside the recess 3470c1, so that the ball receiving portion 467 is rotated by the biasing spring SP2 and performs a firing operation.

Further, the load portion 3468c of the first link member 3468 is displaced toward one end of the base member 3470. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the center of gravity position of the lower displacement member 3440 from being changed when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, rattling of the lower displacement member 3440 can be suppressed.

That is, when the ball receiving part 467 is displaced from the first position, a displacement component can be formed in the direction opposite to the direction of displacement of the ball receiving part 467. The change in the center of gravity position of the displacement member 3440 can be reduced by the displacement of the load portion 3468c. As a result, shaking of the lower displacement member 440 due to a change in the center of gravity position can be suppressed.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127(b), by continuing the rotation of the first link member 3468, the ball receiving portion 467 can be retracted to the second position and the first position. Therefore, there is no need to switch the control of the drive motor KM2, and the displacement to the second position or the first position can be quickly performed.

Therefore, when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiver 467, the center of gravity of the lower displacement member 440 changes, so the lower displacement member 3440 tends to shake, but the ball receiver 467 can be quickly evacuated. By quickly bringing the center of gravity position closer to the rotation axis of the lower displacement member 440, it is possible to suppress rattling of the lower displacement member 3440.

Furthermore, by immediately displacing the ball receiving part 467, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the lower displacement member 3440 due to the reaction of the ejecting operation when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467.

That is, when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467, the load on the lower displacement member 440 is reduced by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 3440 is likely to be displaced upward as a reaction. Immediately displacing the ball receiver 467 applies a force that displaces the base member 470 downward due to the reaction caused by the rotational displacement of the ball receiver 467, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 3440. be able to.

Next, the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower displacement member 440 arranged in the retracted state is formed to be able to fire, but the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment The firing operation of 440 is regulated. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of a lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a front view of the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 128, the decoration member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown in a transparent state, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is shown with a chain line. Further, FIG. 128 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in a retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed at the first position.

As shown in FIG. 128, the lower displacement unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment has an opening formed in the base member 470 of the lower displacement member 440 between the facing wall 471a and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481. 4471b is formed.

A tip portion 4411g1 of an engagement wall 4411g, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 4471b. That is, the opening 4471b is opened larger than the tip portion 4411g1.

The front base 411 is provided with a substantially L-shaped engagement wall 4411g that is continuous with the bottom surface of the collection port 411f.

The engagement wall 4411g can prevent the ball receiver 467 from rotating at the third position (shooting operation) by inserting the substantially L-shaped tip portion 4411g1 into the opening 4471b. . That is, the tip position of the tip portion 4411g1 is set to be substantially the same as the height of the top surface of the bottom wall portion 481b of the lower displacement member 440 located in the retracted state.

Next, a state in which each member of the lower displacement unit 4400 is displaced will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. 129 and 130 are front views of the lower displacement unit 4400. 129 and 130, similarly to FIG. 128, the decoration member 450 of the lower displacement member 440 and the front case 481 are shown in a transparent state, and the bottom wall portion 481b of the front case 481 is indicated by the chain line. Illustrated.

Further, FIG. 129 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the retracted state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed in the third position. Further, FIG. 130 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 440 is in the first extended state and the ball receiving portion 467 is disposed in the first position.

As shown in FIG. 129, when the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, the tip of the leg portion 467a of the ball receiving portion 467 comes into contact with the upper surface of the tip portion 4411g1 of the engagement wall 4411g, and the recess 481b1 or the opening Intrusion into 4471b is restricted. This restricts rotation of the ball receiving portion 467.

Therefore, when the ball receiving part 467 is caused to perform a discharging operation in order to eject the ball thrown onto the trajectory area of the ball receiving part 467 to the outside of the lower displacement member 440, the ball receiving part 467 is moved to the third position. can be prevented from rotating and ejecting the game ball held inside the ball receiving part 467.

That is, with the displacement of the ball receiving part 467 to the third position, the attitude of the ball receiving part 467 is changed when ejecting game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) from the orbital area of the ball receiving part 467. can be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital area.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 130, when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first extended state position (a position other than the retracted state position), the lower displacement member 440 is displaced with respect to the base member 470. Therefore, the opening 4471b of the lower displacement member 440 and the engagement wall 4411g are spaced apart. Therefore, in the first extended state, the ball receiver 467 can be displaced to the third position to perform a firing operation.

That is, with the displacement of the ball receiving part 467 to the third position, when ejecting game balls exceeding the specified number (one ball) from the orbital area of the ball receiving part 467, the attitude of the ball receiving part 467 changes. While it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the ball receiving part 467 holds the prescribed number of game balls by suppressing the change in the ball position, the ball receiving part 467 is engaged when the lower displacement member 440 is displaced to the first and second extended positions. Since the wall 4411g is separated from the internal space of the opening 4471b, the leg portion 467a is engaged with the opening 4471b as the ball receiving portion 467 is displaced to the third position, thereby changing the posture of the ball receiving portion 467. This allows the specified number of game balls to be easily discharged from the ball receiving portion 467.

Next, the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the distribution member 540 rotates to form the storage state and the regulation state, but in the fifth embodiment, the distribution member 540 slides and displaces to form the storage state and the regulation state. do. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of a distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 134. FIG. 131(a) is a top view of the distribution unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 131(b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 5500. FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 5500, and FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 5500. FIG. 134 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 5500 taken along line CXXXIV-CXXXIV in FIG. 131(a). In addition, in FIG. 134, the outer shape of the distribution member 540 is illustrated by a chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the sorting unit 5500 in the fifth embodiment includes a base plate 5520 formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a base plate 5520 attached to the front side of the base plate 5520 and facing the base plate 5520. A path forming member 510 that forms a plurality of downstream paths through which balls can flow; a distribution member 5540 that is slidably attached to the back side of the base plate 5520; and a base plate that is attached to the end surface of the base plate 5520. 5520 and an extension path member 530 that extends the downward flow path of the ball formed between the opposing path forming member 510.

The base plate 5520 has two cylindrical shaft portions 5526 protruding toward the back side, a first opening 5521 and a second opening 5522 formed through the rectangular shape, and a U-shaped cross section with the upper end open on the side surface of the upper end. It is formed mainly of a rolling part 525 which is formed in a shape and extends in the left-right direction, and a locking part 524 which projects in a hook shape from the back side.

Two shaft portions 5526 are formed to protrude from the back side, and are inserted into two sliding grooves 5546, which will be described later.

The first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are openings into which a regulating plate 541 and a storage plate 5542 of a distribution member 5540, which will be described later, are inserted. It is formed. Further, since the distribution member 5540 is attached to the base plate 5520 in a slidable state, the first opening 5521 and the second opening 5522 are larger in the sliding direction of the distribution member 5540 than the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. formed in the opening.

The distribution member 5540 is formed into a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with one end being long, and is formed to have a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The sorting member 5540 includes a regulation plate 5541 and a storage plate 5542 that protrude in a plate shape toward the front side, and a sliding groove 5546 that is formed in a long hole in substantially the same direction as the extension direction of the regulation plate 5541 and the storage plate 5542. and a hook-shaped locking portion 544 on the back side.

The regulation plate 5541 is disposed at a connecting portion between the first ball throwing route KR1 and the second ball throwing route KR2 through the first opening 5521, so that the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 is directed to the second ball throwing route KR2. It is a plate member that restricts the flow into the ball, and the distance from which it projects from the first opening 5521 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 is formed in a straight line shape when viewed from the front, and the direction in which it extends is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540. Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement area of the regulation plate 5541 can be minimized. As a result, the opening area of the first opening 5521 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The storage plate 5542 is a plate member that is disposed on the second ball throwing route KR2 through the second opening 5522, and allows the game balls flowing down the second ball throwing route KR2 to flow down to the upstream side of the storage plate 5542. The distance projected from the opening 5522 is set to be larger than the radius of the game ball.

Further, the storage plate 5542 is formed in a linear shape when viewed from the front, and the direction in which it extends is set to be substantially the same as the sliding direction of the distribution member 540. Thereby, when the distribution member 5540 is slid and displaced, the displacement area of the storage plate 5542 can be minimized. As a result, the opening area of the second opening 5522 can be minimized, and the rigidity of the base plate 5520 can be ensured.

The sliding groove 5546 is an elongated hole formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 5526 of the base plate 5520 is inserted into the sliding groove 5546. Therefore, by inserting the shaft portion 5526 into the sliding groove 5546 and fastening a screw or the like to the tip of the shaft portion 5526 from the back side, the distribution member 5540 is held in a state where it can be slid relative to the base plate 5520. be able to.

The sliding grooves 5546 are formed at two locations, with their longitudinal directions parallel to each other. Thereby, the distribution member 5540 can be slidably displaced while suppressing rotational displacement of the distribution member 5540.

Next, displacement of the distribution member 5540 will be explained with reference to FIG. 135. 135(a) and 135(b) are partially enlarged views of the distribution unit 5500 in the range CXXXV of FIG. 134. Note that FIG. 135(a) shows a state in which the distribution member 5540 is placed at the storage position, and FIG. 135(b) shows a state in which the distribution member 5540 is placed in the restriction position.

As shown in FIG. 135(a), when the distribution member 5540 is placed in the regulation position, the storage plate 5542 is arranged in the shape of the third ball throwing path KR3, and the regulation plate 5541 is placed on the back side of the path forming member 510. It is placed inside a recess 518 formed in the wall.

In this case, the distance dimension L9 between the tip of the storage plate 5542 protruding inward from the third ball throwing path KR3 and the inner wall of the third ball throwing path that faces the tip is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball thrown from upstream of the third ball throwing path KR3 (first ball throwing path KR1) is stopped on the upstream side of the storage plate 5542.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 135(b), when the distribution member 5540 is placed at the restriction position, the restriction plate 5541 is placed at the connecting portion between the first ball throwing path KR1 and the third ball throwing path KR3. , a regulating plate 5541 is arranged at a connecting portion between the first ball throwing route KR1 and the third ball throwing route KR3, and a storage plate 5542 is arranged inside the recess 519 formed in the wall on the back side of the route forming member 510. Ru.

In this case, the distance L10 between the end of the tip of the regulating plate 5541 protruding inward of the first ball throwing path KR1 and the inner wall of the entrance of the third ball throwing path KR3 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 collides with the regulation plate 5541 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

That is, by switching the distribution member 5540 between the regulation position and the storage position, a ball thrown on the first ball throwing path KR1 is thrown to the third ball throwing path KR3 and stopped on the third ball throwing path KR3; A state can be created in which a ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 cannot flow into the third ball throwing path KR3 and is thrown to the second ball throwing path KR2.

Therefore, by slidingly displacing one sorting member 5540, when the first downstream path is divided into two downstream paths, the downstream path of the ball can be reliably switched to either one.

Further, the regulation plate 5541 (distributing means) is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) or the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path), and its appearance and retraction position is set to the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) or the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path). This is the inner wall on the extended line in the downstream direction at the downstream end of the first ball throwing route KR1. Therefore, the regulation plate 5541 can be made to protrude at a position close to the game ball flowing down from the lower end side of the first ball throwing path KR1. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the regulation plate 5541 starts to protrude into the downstream path or the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branch path) to when the game balls can be sorted. As a result, it is possible to reliably switch the distribution destination using the regulation plate 5541.

In addition, the regulation plate 5541 (distributing means) is projected into the third ball throwing path KR3 (first branching path) to move the game ball flowing down the first ball throwing path KR1 (downstream path) into the second ball throwing path ( Since the protruding direction of the regulating plate 5541 is set to point toward the upstream end of the second ball throwing route KR2, the game balls flowing down the first ball throwing route KR1 make a protruding action. When the game ball comes into contact with the regulation plate in the middle of the regulation plate, the game ball can be pushed into the second ball throwing path KR along with the protruding operation of the regulation plate. As a result, the distribution to the second ball throwing path KR2 can be performed more reliably.

Next, a rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 140. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the load gear 731e is connected to drive the rotating body 800 and the rotating body 800 is restricted from operating by inertia force, but the rotating body 800 in the sixth embodiment is Gear 731e is removed. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of a rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138. FIG. 136 is a front view of a rotation unit 6700 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation unit 6700. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 6500.

As shown in FIGS. 136 to 138, the rotation unit 6700 includes a decoration unit 6750 including a rotating body 800 that is rotationally displaced, a ball pedestal 710 disposed above the decoration unit 6750 in the direction of gravity, and a ball pedestal 710 disposed above the decoration unit 6750 in the direction of gravity. 710 and a rear base 720 arranged on the back side of the decoration unit 6750, a left side transmission member 730 arranged on the left side of the decoration unit 6750 when viewed from the front, and a crank cover 743 arranged on the right side of the decoration unit 6750 when viewed from the front. It is formed mainly by the following.

The decoration unit 6750 mainly includes a box member 760 formed in a box shape with an open upper side in the direction of gravity, and a rotating body 800 rotatably disposed inside the box member. That is, in the first embodiment, the rotating body 800 is arranged inside the box member 760 and the lid member 770, but in the sixth embodiment, the decoration unit 750 is formed with the lid member 770 removed. Ru.

The left side transmission member 730 is attached with a drive motor KM4 disposed on the left side surface of the decoration unit 750 (left side in FIG. 136), a transmission member 6731 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor KM4, and the drive motor KM4. The motor base 732, the gear cover 733 that covers the transmission member 6731, and the ball throwing path cover 734 that is attached to the gear cover 733 and is formed with a predetermined gap between the gear cover 733 and the opposite side. be prepared and formed.

The transmission member 6731 includes a transmission gear 731a attached to the shaft of the drive motor KM4, a transmission gear 6731b meshing with the transmission gear 731a, a transmission gear 731c meshing with the transmission gear 6731b, and a transmission gear 731c. and a transmission gear 731d that is arranged adjacent to and coaxially with the shaft 735.

Transmission gear 6731b is a gear that transmits driving force to transmission gear 731c. Note that in the first embodiment, the one-way clutch OW1 was attached to the inside of the transmission gear 731b, but the one-way clutch OW1 is removed from the transmission gear 6731b of the sixth embodiment. Further, since the transmission gear 731c and the transmission gear 731d are the same as in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Therefore, when driving force in one direction is transmitted from drive motor KM4, rotational driving force can be transmitted to shaft 735, and when driving force in the other direction is transmitted from drive motor KM4, rotational driving force can be transmitted to the inner ring of one-way clutch OW1. As a result, the outer ring slips (slips) and the transmission of driving force to the shaft 735 is cut off.

Next, the rotation of the rotating body 800 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. 139(a) to 139(c) are side views of the decoration unit 6750 as seen in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. 138, and FIGS. 140(a) to 140(c) are side views as seen in the direction of arrow CXXXIX in FIG. It is a side view of the decoration unit 6750 in FIG.

139 and 140, the left side plate 765 of the box member 760 is shown transparently. 139(a) to 139(c) sequentially illustrate how the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 displaces the second section DK2, and in FIGS. 140(a) to 140(c), the rotating body The manner in which the center of gravity G of 800 is displaced in the first section DK1 is illustrated in order.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the driving force in one direction is transmitted from the drive motor KM4, the rotating body 800 is rotationally displaced clockwise (as viewed from the direction of FIG. 139) to the left (as viewed from the direction of FIG. 139).

As described above, the rotating body 800 is formed asymmetrically about the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G is arranged at a different position from the rotation axis. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated from the state in which the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140(a) is placed above the rotation axis, and the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 140(b) is displaced to a position approximately parallel to the rotation axis. Once started, the load exerts a rotating force in the direction of rotation.

Therefore, the engagement of the rollers interposed between the outer ring and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1 disposed in the transmission gear 731c is released, and the outer ring (rotating body 800 side) takes the lead with respect to the inner ring (drive motor side). and is in a state where it is driven. That is, in the second section, the rotational speed of the rotating body 800 can be made faster than the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4.

Note that the rotating body 800 that rotates in the second section DK2 by the load is rotated by the load to a position where the center of gravity G shown in FIG. 139(c) is located below the rotation axis.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140, when the center of gravity G of the rotating body 800 is displaced in the first section DK1, the load of the rotating body 800 acts in a direction opposite to the direction in which the rotating body 800 rotates. Therefore, the rotating body 800 is rotated according to the rotational speed of the drive motor KM4.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the second section DK2 can be made faster than the displacement speed of the rotating body 800 in the first section DK1. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the rotating body 800 and enhance the presentation effect according to the displacement of the rotating body 800.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the lid member 770 causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to precede the inner ring (that is, increases the displacement speed of the lid member 770) due to its own weight. The displacement member 7710 in this embodiment uses the weight of the game ball to advance the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 relative to the inner ring (that is, increases the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710). Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

141 and 142 are schematic side views of a displacement unit 7700 in the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 141 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the raised position, and FIG. 142 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the lowered position.

As shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the displacement unit 7700 includes a displacement member 7710 formed to be slidably displaceable, and transmits rotational driving force of a driving means (not shown, for example, an electric motor) to the displacement member 7710. It mainly includes a transmission member 7720 that rotates, and a load gear 7730 that rotates as the displacement member 7710 slides.

The displacement member 7710 is a member that is supported by a support mechanism (not shown) so as to be linearly displaceable along the virtual line L1. It mainly includes a rack gear 7712 carved along the imaginary line L1 and a ball receiving member 7713 rotatably supported at the tip of the displacement member 7710.

Note that the virtual line L1 is set as a straight line that slopes downward from the raised position shown in FIG. 141 to the lowered position shown in FIG. 142. That is, in the raised position, the displacement member 7710 is located higher in the direction of gravity than in the lowered position.

The driven pin 7711 is a member that is slidably inserted into the drive groove 7723b of the arm member 7723 of the transmission member 7720, and is formed as a cylindrical body with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the groove width of the drive groove 7723b. A load gear 7730 is meshed with the rack gear 7712, and the load gear 7730 is rotated as the displacement member 7710 slides.

The ball receiving member 7713 is a member for holding a game ball on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, and by being rotated around the rotation axis 7713a, it can be switched between the upright state shown in FIG. 141 and the tilted state shown in FIG. 142. It is said that it can be formed. In the upright state, one end side protrudes beyond the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, making it possible to hold the game ball (see FIG. 143). On the other hand, in the tilted state, one end side is positioned below the upper surface of the displacement member 7710, so that the game ball can be ejected from the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 (see FIG. 144).

Note that the ball receiving member 7713 is maintained in an upright state by an urging force acting from an unillustrated urging spring (for example, a torsion spring). An engagement pin 7740 is fixed on the orbit of the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), and when the displacement member 7710 is slid to the lowered position, the engagement pin 7740 is attached to the other end of the ball receiving member 7713. 7740 is engaged, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated and placed in a tilted state. On the other hand, when the displacement member 7710 is slid to the raised position, the ball receiving member 7713 is rotated by the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring and returned to the tilted state.

The transmission member 7720 includes a disc-shaped rotating member 7721 that is rotationally driven by the above-mentioned driving means (not shown), protrudes from an axial end surface of the rotating member 7721, and is located eccentrically from the center of rotation of the rotating member 7721. It mainly includes a cylindrical drive pin 7722 and an arm member 7723 having a driven groove 7723a formed at one end thereof into which the drive pin 7722 is slidably inserted.

A one-way clutch OW1 is interposed between the rotating member 7721 and the drive means. Specifically, the one-way clutch OW1 has an inner ring connected to a driving means, an outer ring connected to a rotating member 7721, and when the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) by the driving means. While transmitting the rotational driving force to the outer ring (that is, rotating the rotating member 7721 in the direction of arrow A), the inner ring is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow A (counterclockwise in FIG. 141) by the driving means. , disconnects power transmission to the outer ring (rotating member 7721).

The arm member 7723 has a driving groove 7723b, through which the driven pin 7711 of the displacement member 7710 is slidably inserted, formed on the other end side opposite to the one end side in which the driven groove 7723a is formed. At the same time, the space between the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b (the intermediate portion) is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft 7723c.

Note that the drive pin 7722 is formed as a cylindrical body with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the groove width of the driven groove 7723a. Further, the driven groove 7723a and the driving groove 7723b are formed as linear grooves along the longitudinal direction of the arm member 7723.

According to the displacement unit 7700 formed as described above, when the rotation member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the raised position shown in FIG. , the drive pin 7722 acts on the inner wall surface of the driven groove 7723a, and the arm member 7723 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation axis 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates clockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push down the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slid along the imaginary line L1, and as shown in FIG. It is placed in the lowered position shown in .

On the other hand, when the rotating member 7721 is further rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141) from the state where the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the lowered position shown in FIG. Acting on the wall surface, the arm member 7723 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 141 about the rotation axis 7723c. As the arm member 7723 rotates counterclockwise, the inner wall surface of the drive groove 7723b acts in a direction to push up the driven pin 7711, so that the displacement member 7710 is slid along the imaginary line L1, and as shown in FIG. It is placed in the raised position shown at 141.

Here, like the load gear 731e in the first embodiment, the load gear 7730 is formed so as to generate a predetermined amount of resistance when rotating. As a result, the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 acts on the arm member 7723 and rotates the rotating member 7721 in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), so that the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is moved relative to the inner ring. This can prevent the vehicle from moving ahead in one direction (the direction of arrow A). That is, in a state where no game ball is held, it is possible to suppress the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 from increasing when going from the raised position to the lowered position.

That is, while the rotating member 7721 is being rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIGS. 141 and 142) by the rotational driving force of the driving means, the displacement is maintained at a sliding speed corresponding to the rotational driving speed of the rotational driving means. The member 7710 is reciprocated (slided) between a raised position and a lowered position.

143 and 144 are schematic side views of the displacement unit 7700 when a game ball is held by the displacement member 7710. Note that FIG. 143 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the raised position, and FIG. 144 schematically illustrates a state in which the displacement member 7710 is disposed in the lowered position.

As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the displacement member 7710 is formed to be able to hold a game ball on its upper surface. That is, in this embodiment, the displacement unit 7700 is disposed in the area where the game ball flows down in the game area, and the displacement member 7710 is formed to be able to receive the game ball flowing down on its upper surface. In addition, in FIG. 143, a state in which four game balls indicated by the symbol T are held on the upper surface of the displacement member 7710 is illustrated.

In this case, when the displacement member 7710 holds the game ball, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole is increased (heavier) by the weight of the game ball to overcome the resistance caused by the rotation of the load gear 7730. can be done. That is, by applying the entire weight of the displacement member 7710 (the weight including the game ball) to the arm member 7723 and rotating the rotating member 7721 in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 143), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 can be advanced in one direction (direction of arrow A) with respect to the inner ring. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 when going from the raised position to the lowered position can be made faster than the displacement speed when no game ball is held (see FIG. 141).

Furthermore, the weight of the displacement member 7710 as a whole can be varied depending on the number of game balls held. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be varied (changed) not only depending on whether or not the displacement member 7710 holds game balls, but also depending on the number of game balls held. As a result, variations in the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be increased accordingly.

As described above, the displacement member 7710 is provided with the ball receiving member 7713 at its tip (the end on the downwardly inclined side). Therefore, when the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) receives a game ball flowing down the game area, the force exerted on the displacement member 7710 from the game ball is directed toward the lowered position and slides. It can act as a force that causes displacement. That is, such force can be applied via the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721 in a direction that causes the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 to advance in one direction (the direction of arrow A) relative to the inner ring.

As a result, when the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713) receives a falling game ball, the kinetic energy of the game ball is used to slide the displacement member 7710 in the direction toward the lowered position. The displacement speed can be made faster.

In this case, the falling game balls have different flowing directions and flowing speeds. Therefore, the force (magnitude of kinetic energy) applied to the displacement member 7710 can be varied depending on the difference in the falling state (flowing direction and speed) of the game ball to be received. As a result, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 is varied depending not only on whether or not the displacement member 7710 holds game balls and the number of game balls held, but also on the flowing state of the game balls. be able to) As a result, variations in the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 can be increased, and the effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member 7710 can be increased accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the rotating direction of the rotating member 7721 is set to be one direction, there is no need to switch the driving direction of the driving means. In other words, by continuously rotating the rotating means in one direction, the displacement member 7710 can be reciprocated. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the time required to switch the driving direction of the driving means. As a result, the displacement member 7710 can be immediately displaced without the need to switch the driving means.

In this case, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the reaction occurs when the ball receiving member 7713 rotates and drops the game ball received by the displacement member 7710 (its upper surface or the ball receiving member 7713). Shaking of the displacement member 7710 can be suppressed.

That is, when a game ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710 (ball receiving member 7713), the load on the displacement member 7710 becomes lighter by the amount of the dropped game ball, and the displacement member 7710 is likely to be displaced upward due to the reaction. However, by immediately displacing the displacement member 7710, the reaction force caused by the displacement of the ball receiving member 7713 acts to displace the displacement member 7710 downward, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is dropped from the displacement member 7710. be able to.

Note that the game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to a game ball that moves along the front surface (front surface) of the game board 13 in the direction of gravity, but also includes a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Examples of game balls that move in a direction different from the direction of gravity include game balls that collide with nails, tulips, objects, etc. and move in a direction different from the direction of gravity, and balls that roll on a stage and then jump off the stage. A game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

Here, in this embodiment, by providing the load gear 7730, when the displacement member 7710 is not holding a game ball (see FIG. 141), the displacement member 7710 is slid toward the lowered position. The one-way clutch OW1 is configured such that the outer ring does not advance in one direction (arrow A direction) with respect to the inner ring (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 does not increase).

On the other hand, when the load gear 7730 is omitted or the resistance of the load gear 7730 is set to a small value, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is moved against the inner ring when the displacement member 7710 is slid toward the lowered position. The displacement member 7710 may be configured to advance in one direction (arrow A direction) (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member 7710 becomes faster). That is, even when only the weight (self-weight) of the displacement member 7710 is applied to the arm member 7723 and the rotating member 7721 is rotated in the direction of arrow A (clockwise in FIG. 141), the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is rotated against the inner ring. It is also possible to take the lead.

Next, the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 148. In the upper plate 8017 in the eighth embodiment, a rotation operation unit 8650 is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the rotation operation unit 8650 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147. FIG. 145 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective front view of the rotation operation unit 8650. FIG. 147 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line CXLVII-CXLVII in FIG. 145.

As shown in FIGS. 145 to 147, the rotation operation unit 8650 is arranged in the internal space of the upper tray 8017 of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation section 8654, which will be described later, protrudes outward from the upper tray 8017. It will be placed in such a state.

The rotation operation unit 8650 includes a drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8651 connected to the shaft of the drive motor KM6, a transmission gear 8652 meshed with the outer peripheral surface of the transmission gear 8651, and a shaft of the transmission gear 8652. It is formed mainly of a shaft portion 8653 that is fitted into the hole, a one-way clutch OW1 whose inner ring is fitted onto the shaft portion 8653, and a rotation operation portion 8654 into which the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted. .

Transmission gear 8651 is connected to the shaft of drive motor KM6. Therefore, by applying rotational driving force to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 8651 can be rotated. As described above, the transmission gear 8652 is disposed in mesh with the transmission gear 8651. Therefore, when rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM6, the transmission gear 8652 can be rotated via the transmission gear 8651.

The shaft portion 8653 is a bar member formed in a cylindrical shape, and its axial length is longer than the width dimension of the rotation operation portion 8654 in the left-right direction. As described above, one end of the shaft portion 8653 is fitted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 8652, and the other end is inserted into the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. Thereby, the driving force generated when the transmission gear 8652 is rotated can be transmitted to the one-way clutch OW1.

As mentioned above, the one-way clutch OW1 is formed of an inner ring, an outer ring, and a roller engaged between them, and when the inner ring rotates in one direction, the rotation of the inner ring can be transmitted to the outer ring, and the inner ring can rotate in the other direction. When rotated, the rotation of the inner ring can be prevented from being transmitted to the outer ring.

The rotation operation section 8654 is formed in an annular shape, and is disposed with a portion of its outer peripheral surface protruding from the upper plate 8017. Furthermore, the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 is fitted into the inner circular portion of the rotation operation portion 8654. That is, the inward inclination of the rotation operation portion 8654 is formed to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the one-way clutch OW1. Therefore, rotation is transmitted to the rotation operation section 8654 by rotating the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1.

As a result, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in one direction, the rotation is transmitted to the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 via the transmission gears 8651, 8652 and the inner ring of the one-way clutch OW1. is rotated. On the other hand, when the drive motor KM6 is driven and rotated in the other direction, the inner ring and the outer ring of the one-way clutch OW1 are not transmitted, and the transmission of rotational drive to the rotational operation section 8654 is cut off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the case where the player operates the rotation operation section 8654 will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the cross section in FIG. 148 corresponds to FIG. 147.

As described above, the rotation operation section 8654 is configured such that the rotation operation section 8654 rotates when the drive motor KM6 is rotated, and the rotation operation section 8654 rotates when the drive motor KM6 does not rotate. An embodiment in which the displacement is stopped can be formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, when the drive motor KM6 is rotated in one direction and the rotation operation section 8654 is rotated in the A direction, the player operates the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation section 8654 to rotate the rotation operation section 8654. When a rotational force is generated in 8654 in the same direction as the direction of rotation A, the outer circumferential surface of one-way clutch OW1 and rotation operation portion 8654 are rotated first. That is, the rotation operation section 8654 can be operated by the player at a rotation speed faster than the rotation speed of the drive motor KM6.

Further, when the rotational operation section 8654 is not rotated (the drive motor KM6 is not rotated), the player rotationally displaces the rotational operation section 8654 by applying a driving force to the rotational operation section 8654 in the direction of rotation A. be able to.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the rotation operation section 8654 not only forms a non-rotating or rotating state by driving the drive motor KM6, but also a mode in which the rotation operation section 8654 rotates from a stopped state by the player's operation. Further, it is possible to form a mode in which the rotation operation section 8654 is rotated at a faster speed from the rotation state by the player's operation.

As a result, it is possible to create a plurality of modes in which the displacement mode of the rotary operation section 8654 is made visible to the player, thereby making it possible to provide interest to the player. Further, by forming a plurality of rotation modes of the rotation operation section 8654, it is possible to form a plurality of presentation modes of the pachinko machine 10, so that it is possible to increase the number of presentations and provide interest to the players.

Note that a sensor device or the like that measures the number of rotations is placed on the side surface of the rotational operation section 8654, and effects that change based on the number of rotations and rotational speed of the rotational operation section 8654 can be performed.

Next, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 149. The plate-like protrusion 9431b of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment includes an inclined surface 9431b1 formed so that the contact surface with the cam member 422 is inclined. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 149(a) is a perspective front view of the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 149(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement unit 400. Note that FIG. 149(b) corresponds to the schematic cross-sectional view of FIG. 56(a).

Note that, similarly to the lower displacement unit 400 in the first embodiment, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and It includes a transmission member 420 disposed on the base member 410, and a lower displacement member 440 (see FIG. 45) that is displaced by the transmission of driving force from the transmission member 420. Further, the lower displacement unit 400 in the ninth embodiment includes a link member 9430 that is connected to the base member 410 and the lower displacement member 440 and is displaced as the transmission member 420 is driven. Lower displacement member 440 is displaced.

As shown in FIG. 149, the first link member 9431 in the ninth embodiment is bent into a generally doglegged shape when viewed from the front, and is formed into a plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction. The first link member 9431 has a through hole 431a penetrating in the front-rear direction on one end side (in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 149(a)), and a through hole 431a that protrudes toward the back side on the other end side (in the direction of arrow U in FIG. 149(a)). a cylindrical connecting protrusion 431c (see FIG. 46), a plate-shaped protrusion 9431b protruding to a position facing the curved wall portion 411e of the base member 410, and a cylindrical sliding protrusion 431d protruding toward the front side of the bent portion. And prepare.

The plate-like protrusion 9431b extends in a curved manner about the axis of the through hole 431a, and protrudes toward the front side (front base 411 side (arrow F direction side)). Further, the protruding dimension of the plate-like protrusion 9431b is set larger than the thickness (dimension in the direction of arrow FB) of the cam member 422. Further, the protruding end surface of the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the opposing base member 410 (curved wall portion 411e) are arranged with a slight gap (distance X14 (see FIG. 149(b))).

The cam member 422 is disposed in such a manner that it can be displaced in a region between the opposing front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e. Further, the dimensions of the two gaps, which are the gap between the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 and the gap between the cam member 422 and the base member 410, are larger than the distance X14 described above. It is set large.

As a result, when the first link member 9431 is bent in the direction in which the above-mentioned distance It can be brought into contact with the Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 422 from being sandwiched between the opposing front surface of the first link member 9431 excluding the plate-like protrusion 9431b and the protruding surface (back surface) of the curved wall portion 411e and restricting its displacement.

Further, the plate-like projection 9431b includes an inclined surface 9431b1 that protrudes toward the front side toward the cam member 422 on the circumferential side surface on the cam member 422 side (arrow L direction side in FIG. 149(b)). As shown in FIG. 149(b), the inclined surface 9431b1 is formed to be inclined at approximately 45 degrees toward the protrusion side (arrow F direction side).

As a result, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-like protrusion 9431b, the cam member 422 is moved toward the back surface of the first link member 9431 (on the side in the direction of arrow F). It is possible to press (displace) the protruding end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the plate-shaped protrusion 9431b of the first link member 9431 against the curved wall portion 411e. As a result, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 and the first link member 9431 from swinging in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 in the second displacement state.

In this case, it is preferable that a flat surface parallel to the inclined surface 9431b1 be formed at the end of the cam member 422 at a portion that contacts the inclined surface 9431b1. Thereby, when the cam member 422 and the inclined surface 9431b1 come into contact with each other, the cam member 422 can be easily displaced toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B).

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the adhesive tape 154a is attached to the end of the decorative member 154 in the general winning a prize opening unit 150 has been described, but in the tenth embodiment, the adhesive tape 10154a is attached to the end of the decorative member 10154. It is affixed to the inside part separated by a predetermined width from the part. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 150 is a sectional view of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 150 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 16. In addition, the general winning a prize unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment is arranged in the gaming area (the front of the base board 60) of the gaming board 13, like the general winning a prize unit 150 in the first embodiment. It is possible to change the path of the game ball. In addition, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 is located at the end of the lower side in the gravity direction (arrow D direction side) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B) with respect to the gaming area formed by being surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77. It is placed along the section.

Furthermore, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 includes a main body part 151 formed in a crescent shape when viewed from the front, and a first upright part 152 that stands upright from the end of the main body part 151 on the front side (in the direction of arrow F). (see FIG. 12), and a second upright portion 153 (see FIG. 12) extending from the upper end of the first upright portion 152 in the direction of gravity (arrow U direction side) toward the center of the gaming area. a)) and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 63 (see FIG. 12(a)) formed on the front side of the main body portion 151.

As shown in FIG. 150, the general winning a prize opening unit 10150 in the tenth embodiment includes a decorative member 10154 arranged on the back surface of the main body part 10151. In the decorative member 10154, an adhesive tape 10154a that is adhered to the main body portion 151 is attached to the inner side of the decorative member 10154, which is separated by a predetermined width from the end of the decorative member 10154. As a result, a predetermined gap (space) is formed at the end of the decorative member 10154 between the main body portion 151 and the decorative member 10154 by the thickness of the adhesive tape 10154a. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the gravity direction), the decorative member 60c and The boundary between the decorative member 10154 and the decoration can be made difficult for the player to see.

To explain in detail, by forming an air layer between the end of the decorative member 10154 and the main body 151, the inside of the main body 151 is reflected and the air is drawn from the end of the main body 151 (sloped surface 151a) toward the player. It is possible to prevent the light L emitted from being affected by the decoration at the end of the decorative member 10154 (to make it difficult for the wavelength of the light L to be changed). In addition, the light that passes through the adhesive tape 10154a and is affected by the decoration of the decorative member 10154 is repeatedly reflected inside the main body 151 and is emitted to the outside of the main body 151, so that the player When reflected toward the viewpoint, the influence of the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be reduced.

Therefore, it is possible to reduce the change in the wavelength of the light L emitted to the player, and when the player visually recognizes the general winning opening unit 10150 from a predetermined angle or more, the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 10154 change. This can make it difficult to recognize the boundaries of As a result, when a player visually recognizes the decorations of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 10154 from a normal angle (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 13 in the direction of gravity), the decoration of the base plate The member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 10154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration, and can also be viewed at a predetermined angle (for example, a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity). When viewed from above, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see that the decoration is divided by making it difficult to see the decoration at the border.

Next, the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153. In the first embodiment, the decorative member 450 is irradiated with light by the control board 491 disposed on the back side of the lower displacement member 440. However, the lower displacement member 11440 of the eleventh embodiment The player can recognize the position of the game ball inside by the light emitted from 491. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment. 152(a) and 152(b) are front views of the lower displacement member 11440. Note that in FIG. 152(a), the outer shape of the light emitting body 11491a disposed on the control board 491 is illustrated by a chain line, and in FIG. 152(b), a state with the decorative member 11450 removed is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 152(a) and 152(b), the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45), and the front and rear of the base member 470. a case member 480 that covers the case member 480, a transmission mechanism 11460 that is displaceably disposed between the case member 480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member that is formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 (in the direction of the arrow FB). 11450.

The decorative member 11450 is formed to have an external shape imitating a pattern or character, and a picture of the pattern or character is drawn on the surface. The decorative member 11450 includes a front side decorative part 11451 arranged on the front side of the front case 481 (in the direction of arrow F), and a back side decoration part arranged on the back side of the back case 482 (in the direction of arrow B). 452. Note that in this embodiment, a shark pattern (character) is drawn on the decorative member 11450.

The front decoration part 11451 is formed to have a larger outer shape than the front case 481 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front case 481. This makes it possible to make the members (case member 480, base member 470, etc.) disposed on the back side of the front side decorative part 11451 invisible to the player. Further, the front side decorative portion 11451 includes a transparent portion 11451b formed from a light-transmitting material on the inside in a front view.

The transmitting portion 11451b is formed over the entire area facing a plurality of light emitters 11491a arranged on a control board 491, which will be described later, and can guide light emitted from the plurality of light emitters 11491a toward the player side. It is said that Further, the transparent portion 11451b is formed such that the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F) is curved toward the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B) toward the outer end in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow UD). This makes it easier for light entering from the back side of the transmitting section 11451b to be diffused when passing through the inside of the transmitting section 11451b and being emitted from the front side.

The transmission mechanism 11460 is a member disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, and 463, and a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461. A movable rack 464 having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 463 and is disposed so as to be slidable on the front side of the base member 470, a transmission gear 465 rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464, and a base. A rack gear 476 formed on the member 470 and having a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465; and a rack that has a tooth surface that meshes with the transmission gear 465 and is disposed so as to be slidable on the front side of the movable rack 464. 11466 and a ball receiving portion 467 rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 11466.

The rack 11466 is formed from a horizontally long rod-shaped body that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, and a rack gear 466a carved from the other end in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrow L) to the rear side (direction of arrow B). A shaft portion 466b that projects in a cylindrical shape, two sliding plates 466c that project toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F), and a recessed portion on the back surface extending from one end in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of arrow R) to the other end. 59), and a shielding plate 11466e that protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the front side of the rack gear 466a.

The shielding plate 11466e is made of a non-light-transmitting material and can block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a. Further, the upward protruding height (height in the direction of arrow U) of the shielding plate 11466e is set at a position (position in the direction of arrow U) higher than the light emitting body 11491a disposed on the back side. Thereby, as the rack 11466 is displaced, the shielding plate 11466e can be displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) to block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a.

The control board 491 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base member 470, and includes a plurality of light emitters 11491a that can irradiate light to the front side. The plurality of light emitters 11491a are arranged in parallel in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the lower displacement member 11440, and are ball receivers arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) via the base member 470. 467 (in the direction of arrow U). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a from being blocked by the ball receiver 467.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, a state in which the game ball is thrown inside the ball receiving portion 467 will be described. 153(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 11440, and FIG. 153(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 taken along the line CLIIIb-CLIIIb in FIG. 153(a). ) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 11440 taken along the CLIIIc-CLIIIc line in FIG. 153(a).

As shown in FIG. 153, when a game ball is received in the ball receiving portion 467, the received game ball is placed in a position overlapping the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the light emitting body 11491a. Thereby, the game ball received by the ball receiver 467 can block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a toward the player. As a result, the player can recognize the position of the game ball thrown inside the lower displacement member 11440 by the shadow created by blocking the light.

The eleventh embodiment also includes a control board 491 that is disposed on the back side of the decorative member 11450 and is capable of emitting light toward the displacement area of the ball receiver 467. The light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiver 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiver 467 disposed on the back side, and the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is partially reduced. Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 located on the front side of the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 is different from the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 at other positions. By varying the amount of light (darkening and forming a shadow), the player can see that the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light differs. can be recognized.

To explain in detail, when the control board 491 is arranged on the back side of the ball receiving part 467, the light emitted from the control board 491 is blocked by the ball receiving part 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467. By doing so, the amount of light emitted from the ball receiving portion 467 or the decorative member 11450 on the front side of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 can be made darker than other parts of the decorative member 11450. As a result, the player can be made aware that the ball receiving portion 467 or the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467 is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member 11450 is small (dark).

In addition, the ball receiving portion 467 is formed in a shape to receive the lower hemisphere of the game ball, and the light emitting body 11491a is arranged at a higher position than the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467, so that the light emitting body 11491a is It is possible to make it difficult for the ball receiving portion 467 to be irradiated with the irradiated light. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a casts a shadow on the outer shape of the ball receiving part 467 that receives the game balls and the rack 11466 that slides the ball receiving part 467, and a shadow is formed on the transparent part 11451b. It can be suppressed. As a result, only the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467 can form a shadow on the transparent part 11451b, so the ball receiving part 467 is displaced in a state where no game ball is received in the ball receiving part 467. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from drawing attention to the ball receiver 467.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, a ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a by the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467 is blocked, but in the twelfth embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a is The three pieces 12467e block the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 154(b) is a front view of the ball receiving portion 12467. In addition, in FIG. 154(a), a part of the ball receiving part 12467 is illustrated by a chain line.

Note that, similarly to the lower displacement member 11440 in the eleventh embodiment, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 45), and the front and rear portions of the base member 470. The decorative member 11450 is formed to cover the front and rear of the case member 480 (in the direction of arrow FB). Further, the lower displacement member 12440 in the twelfth embodiment includes a transmission mechanism 12460 that is displaceably disposed between the case member 480 and the base member 470 and has a ball receiving part 12467c that can be deformed by receiving a game ball. .

As shown in FIG. 154, the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment includes a first piece 12467c bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and a second piece 12467d connected to the first piece 12467c. , a third piece 12467e connected to the second piece 12467d and disposed on the back side of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d.

The first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are parts that hold the game ball thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 12440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57), and the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are opposed to each other. When the game ball is thrown, the second piece 12467d is displaced in the direction of separating from the first piece 12467c, and a part of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d are arranged in a U-shape when viewed from the front. The game ball can be held inside the U-shape.

The first piece 12467c includes a receiving piece 12467c4 forming an L-shape in front view, forming one extending side, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, and the receiving piece 12467c4 and the leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 12467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b passing through the connecting portion (bending portion) in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed, and a connecting portion 12467c1 protruding to the opposite side with the bent portion 12467c5 in between. and.

The receiving piece 12467c4 is a part forming the other side (the side in the direction of arrow R) formed by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a crescent shape in the front. , is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 12467d.

The connecting portion 12467c1 projects from two locations at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 12467c5. The connecting portion 12467c1 is a portion that connects a second piece 12467d and a third piece 12467e, which will be described later, and extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and has a connecting hole 12467c2 that has a circular cross section. Be prepared.

The connecting hole 12467c2 is an opening into which a shaft portion 12467e3 protruding from a third piece 12467e, which will be described later, is inserted. A shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into a through hole 12467d3 formed in a second piece 12467d, which will be described later, is inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 from the back side (direction side of arrow B). Further, the shaft portion 12467e3 is fastened with a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side (front side (direction side of arrow F)) of the connecting hole 12467c2. Thereby, the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467e can be fastened to the first piece 12467c.

Further, the first piece 12467c includes a recessed portion 12467c3 that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow D) on the protruding base end side of the connecting portion 12467c1. The recessed bottom surface of the recessed portion 12467c3 is formed at the lowest position (lowest part) of the bottom surface where the game ball is held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d. Thereby, the game ball held by the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d is rolled inside the recessed part 12467c3.

The second piece 12467d is a part forming the other side (the side in the direction of arrow L) that is formed into a U-shape when viewed from the front by the receiving piece 12467c4 of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, and is a crescent-shaped part when viewed from the front. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the receiving piece 12467c4. In addition, there is an insertion hole 12467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow F-B) at the connecting portion of the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, and an insertion hole 12467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow F) and from the back side (in the direction of arrow B) to the front side (in the direction of arrow F). It mainly includes a recessed portion 12467d2 that is recessed toward the side) and has a circular cross section.

In the second piece 12467d, the shaft portion 12467e3 of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the insertion hole 12467d3, and the connecting shaft 12467e4 of the third piece 12467e is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is displaced, the third piece 12467e is similarly displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 12567d is rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 12467c, the third piece 12567e is also rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 12467c.

Further, the second piece 12467d is disposed between opposing connecting portions 12467c1 that protrude from two locations on the first piece 12467c, and is connected to the first piece 12467c. Thereby, when the second piece 12467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 12467d3, the second piece 12467d can be brought into contact with the opposite side surface of the connecting part 12467c1, and the shaft part 12467e3 can be prevented from breaking.

The recessed portion 12467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 12467e4 of a third piece 12467e to be described later is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 12467e4.

The third piece 12467e includes a shielding plate 12467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed from the front, a shaft portion 12467e3 protruding from the shielding plate 12467e1 toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F), and a connecting shaft 12467e4. and.

The shielding plate 12467e1 is made of a non-light-transmitting material, and when placed in front of the light-emitting body 11491a, can block the light emitted from the light-emitting body 11491a. Note that the shielding of the light from the light emitter 11491a by the shielding plate 12467e1 will be described later.

The shaft portion 12467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 of the first piece 12467c and the insertion hole 12467d3 of the second piece 12467d, as described above. Further, a hole is formed in the protruding distal end surface of the shaft portion 12467e3, into which a screw inserted into the connecting hole 12467c2 from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 12467e3 can be screwed. Therefore, with the shaft portion 12467e3 inserted into the connection hole 12467c2 and the insertion hole 12467d3, by fastening a screw to the insertion end surface of the shaft portion 12467e3, the first piece 12467c, the second piece 12467d, and the third piece 12467e are connected. At the same time, the third piece 12467e can be made rotatable relative to the first piece 12467c.

As described above, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2 of the second piece 12467d. Thereby, when the second piece 12467d is rotationally displaced about the shaft portion 12467e3 with respect to the first piece 12467c, the connecting shaft 12467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 12467d. Therefore, the third piece 12467e can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 12467d.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the displacement of the ball receiving portion 12467 in the twelfth embodiment will be described in detail. 155(a) and 155(b) are front views of the lower displacement member 12440, and FIG. 155(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 12440 taken along the CLVc-CLVc line in FIG. 155(b). be. Note that in FIGS. 155(a) and 155(b), a part of the lower displacement member 12440 and the light emitting body 11491a are illustrated with chain lines. Further, FIG. 155(a) shows a state before the game ball is received by the ball receiving part 12467 (before it is held), and FIG. 155(b) shows the state before the game ball is received by the ball receiving part 12467. The retained (held) state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 155, before the game ball is received between the first piece 12467c and the second piece 12467d, the second piece 12467d is moved to the first side by the load of the third piece 12467e. The third piece 12467e is located closer to the piece 12467c side, and the third piece 12467e is located below the light emitting body 11491a arranged on the back side of the ball receiving part 12467. Therefore, before the game ball is received by the ball receiving portion 12467, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be emitted to the player side.

On the other hand, when a game ball is received between the opposing first piece 12467c and second piece 12467d, the received game ball is (inner side surface) and is guided to the recess 12467c3 located at the lowest end of the receiving surface. Thereby, the second piece 12467d can be rotated around the shaft portion 12467e3 in a direction away from the first piece 12467c on the outer surface of the game ball. As a result, the third piece 12467e, which moves with the displacement of the second piece 12467d, can be placed on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the light emitting body 11491a arranged on the back side of the ball receiver 12467.

Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a can be blocked by the shielding plate 12467e1 of the third piece 12467e. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting body 11491a can be easily shielded only when the game ball is received in the ball receiving part 12467, so the position of the game ball received in the lower displacement member 12440 can be adjusted to the position of the light emitting body 11491a. The player can recognize the position of the shadow that blocks the light.

Further, the connecting shaft 12467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 12467d2 of the second piece 12467d, and the load of the third piece 12467e is always applied thereto. The center of gravity G of the third piece 12467e (see FIG. 154(b)) is set on the opposite side of the shaft portion 12467e3 from the connection portion between the second piece 12567d and the third piece 12567e. As a result, when no force other than gravity is acting on the second piece 12467d and the third piece 12467de, the second piece 12467d can be rotated toward the first piece 12467c by the load of the third piece 12467e. .

Therefore, when the game ball is discharged (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 12467, the second piece 12467d can be displaced toward the receiving piece 12467c4 side of the first piece 12467c due to the load of the third piece 12467e.

Furthermore, similarly to the ball receiving part 467 in the first embodiment, the ball receiving part 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 12467b by the operation of slidingly displacing the inside of the lower displacement member 12440, so that the lower displacement member 12440 emits light. The game ball received through the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game balls received in the ball receiving part 12467, a structure in which the ball receiving part 12467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b as the ball receiving part 12467 slides is used. The rotational speed of the ball receiving portion 12467 around the shaft hole 467b is changed by the sliding speed. Therefore, since the rotational speed depends only on the sliding speed of the ball receiving part 12467, there was a problem that the ejection speed of the game balls from the ball receiving part 12467 was not stable.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, the direction in which the second piece 12467d rotates due to the load of the third piece 12467e and the direction in which the ball receiving part 12467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b when ejecting the game ball are different. Since they are set in substantially the same direction, a driving force can be applied to the game ball emitted from the emitting opening 471 when the second piece 12467d is displaced. Therefore, even if the force applied to the game ball from the ball receiver 12467 is reduced when displacing the ball receiver 12467 and ejecting the game ball from the exit opening 471, the speed of the ejected game ball can be maintained. can. As a result, the ejection speed of the game balls ejected from the ball receiver 12467 can be stabilized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 156 to 158, the special prize winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the throwing path of the game ball that has flowed into the first unit 551 of the special winning device 550 is switched by the first and second drive units 583 and 584 of the third path member 580. In the thirteenth embodiment, by changing the facing interval of the ball throwing path of the special winning device 13550, the falling path of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 is adjusted. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the special prize winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157. 156(a) is a front view of the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment, FIG. 156(b) is a perspective front view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 156(c) is a front view of the special winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a sectional view of the special prize winning device 13550 along the CLVIc-CLVIc line in a). FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective front view of the special winning device 13550.

As shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the special prize winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment includes a first path member 13560 disposed on the front side and a first path member 13560 disposed on the back side of the first path member 13560. 2-path member 13570.

The first path member 13560 includes a front plate 13564 formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13, and a front plate 13564 that protrudes from the left and right ends of the front plate 13564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). It mainly includes a first wall portion 13565.

The front plate 13564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between facing a second path member 13570, which will be described later, and is formed from a light-transmitting member. Thereby, the player can visually check the game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 through the front plate 13564. Further, the front plate 13564 includes a first convex portion 13564b and a second convex portion 13564c that protrude toward the second path member 13570, and a second convex portion 13564b and a second convex portion 13564c located below the second convex portion 13564c. A third convex portion 13564d protruding from the 13570 side.

The first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c are protrusions for guiding the game balls flowing down inside the special prize winning device 13550, and are from the outside in the left and right direction of the front plate 13564 (outside in the direction of arrow LR). It is formed to be inclined downward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the face plate 13564.

The third convex portion 13564d is located at the center of the front plate 13564 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) and extends in the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). In the thirteenth embodiment, in the game area of the game board 13, the throwing paths of the game balls flowing down from the special winning device 13550 are different on the left and right sides of the substantially central position in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the special winning device 13550. , the game ball flowing down from the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front is thrown into the first winning slot 64 (see FIG. 2), and the thrown game ball gives the player a specific gaming value (a predetermined value). number of game balls are paid out). On the other hand, the game ball flowing down from the right side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front is thrown to the outlet 71 of the game board 13 and collected by the pachinko machine 10.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning hole 64 is arranged below the left side (arrow L direction side) of the special winning device 13550 (arrow D direction side). The game balls flowing down can be made to flow into the first prize opening 64.

The first wall portion 13565 is a portion that connects the base plate 60 of the game board 13 and the special winning device 13550, and a connecting plate 13565a that protrudes outward to the left and right at the protruding tip is attached to the left and right first wall portions 13565, respectively. Provide two locations each.

A through hole 13565a1 for inserting a screw for fastening the special winning device 13550 to the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed through the connecting plate 13565a. The special winning device 13550 can be fastened to the base plate 60 with the screw inserted into the through hole 13565a1.

The second path member 13570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 13571 that faces the front plate 13564 of the first path member 13560, and a base plate 13571 that connects the first path member 13560 from the left and right ends (arrow LR direction) of the base plate 13571. A fourth wall portion 13573 protruding from the front plate 13564 side is provided.

The base plate 13571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in the gap between the first path member 13560 and the front plate 13564, and is formed to have a smaller outer shape than the front plate 13564 when viewed from the front. This allows the front side of the base plate 13571 to be covered with the front plate 13564, making it difficult for the player to see the base plate 13571.

Further, the base plate 13571 has a fourth convex portion 13571b and a fifth convex portion 13571c that protrude toward the first path member 13560 side, and is located below the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c on the front plate 13564 side. It mainly includes a sixth convex portion 13571d that protrudes from.

The fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are protrusions for guiding the game balls flowing down inside the special winning device 13550, and are from the outside in the left and right direction of the base plate 13571 (the outside in the arrow direction (LR direction)). The base plate 13571 is formed to be inclined downward toward the center side.

The sixth convex portion 13571d is formed at a position facing the third convex portion 13564d described above, and has a length that has a predetermined gap from the tip of the third convex portion 13564d. Note that the gap between the opposing third convex portion 13564d and the sixth convex portion 13571d is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In the fourth wall portion 13573, two fastening holes 13573a for fastening screws inserted through the first path member 13560 are formed in each of the left and right fourth wall portions 13573. As a result, the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 are fastened and fixed.

Further, around the fastening hole 13573a of the fourth wall portion 13573, a shim member SI is arranged to adjust the gap between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other.

The shim member SI is formed from a thin plate-shaped transparent material, and is made difficult to be visually recognized from the player side. Further, in this embodiment, the shim member SI is disposed at the end on the left side when viewed from the front, and the distance between the opposing front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side when viewed from the front is increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, a game ball flowing down inside the special prize winning device 13550 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 158(a) is a top view of the special winning device 13550, and FIG. 158(b) is a sectional view of the special winning device 13550 along the line CLVIIIb-CLVIIIb in FIG. 158(a).

As shown in FIG. 158, the special winning device 13550 has a shim member SI disposed at the end on the left side when viewed from the front, and an interval L14 between the opposing front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 158). a)) is set to be larger than the distance L15 (see FIG. 158(a)) between the opposing front plate 13564 and base plate 13571 on the right side in front view (L14>L15).

Note that the interval L14 is the interval between the left end (on the arrow L direction side) at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Further, the interval L15 is the interval between the right end (on the arrow R direction side) at the position where the front plate 13564 and the base plate 13571 face each other. Furthermore, the interval L15 is set larger than the diameter of the game balls, and the game balls flowing down from above the special winning device 13550 can flow into the inside of the special winning device 13550 from any position in the left and right direction ( L14>L15>Diameter of game ball).

Further, the special winning device 13550 is partitioned into left and right on the downstream side by a third convex portion 13564d and a sixth convex portion 13571d. As a result, the game balls flowing down the main path SK1 (see FIG. 158(b)) on the upstream side of the special winning device 13550 are connected to the main path SK2 formed on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front, and the main path SK2 formed on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front. It flows into either one of the sub-paths HK1 and the formed sub-path HK1. In addition, as mentioned above, the game area on the downstream side of the special winning device 13550 is formed with different ball throwing paths at approximately the center position in the left-right direction of the special winning device 13550. Therefore, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the game area is thrown to a specific winning hole, and the game ball thrown from the sub path HK1 to the game area is thrown to the out port 71 of the game board 13.

Further, the protruding dimensions of the first convex portion 13564b and second convex portion 13564c of the front plate 13564 described above and the fourth convex portion 13571b and fifth convex portion 13571c of the base plate 13571 are set to be approximately the same. That is, the first protrusion 13565b and the second protrusion 13564c protruding from the front plate 13564 toward the back side are set to have the same protrusion dimension. Furthermore, the fourth protrusion 13571b and the fifth protrusion 13571c protruding from the base plate 13571 toward the front side are set to have the same protrusion dimension. Furthermore, the protrusion dimensions of the first convex portion 13565b and the fourth convex portion 13571b are set to be the same.

Further, the first convex portion 13564b and the second convex portion 13564c, and the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c are arranged at different heights in the vertical direction. That is, the first convex portion 13565b and the second convex portion 13564c that protrude from the front plate 13564 toward the back side protrude from the same height. Further, the fourth convex portion 13571b and the fifth convex portion 13571c that protrude from the base plate 13571 toward the front side protrude from the same height. Furthermore, the first protrusion 13565b and the fourth protrusion 13571b are arranged at different heights, and the fourth protrusion 13571b is arranged below the first protrusion 13565b. Further, the lower side of the first protrusion 13565b, which protrudes from two places in the gravity direction, is arranged at an intermediate position between the fourth protrusion 13571b, which protrudes from two places in the gravity direction.

Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 can be made to flow down while colliding with the first convex part 13564b and the fourth convex part 13571b or the second convex part 13564c and the fifth convex part 13571c in order. As a result, the game ball can be made to flow down along the extending direction of the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, the fourth convex portion 13571b, and the fifth convex portion 13571c.

The distance L16 (see FIG. 158(a)) between the front plate 13564 and the fourth convex portion 13571b or the base plate 13571 and the first convex portion 13564b on the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front is determined by the shim member SI. The distance L17 between the opposing front plate 13564 and the fifth convex portion 13571c or the base plate 13571 and the second convex portion 13564c on the right side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. It is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Note that the distance L16 is the distance between the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b at the ends of the fifth convex portion 13571c and the second convex portion 13564c (arrow R direction side) facing the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571. is the distance dimension between. Further, the distance L17 is defined by the distance between the fifth convex portion 13571c and the second convex portion 13564c at the ends of the fourth convex portion 13571b and the first convex portion 13564b (arrow L direction side) facing the front plate 13564 or the base plate 13571. is the distance dimension between.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the first winning opening 64 is arranged below the left side (direction of arrow L) of the special winning device 13550 (direction of arrow D). The game balls flowing down can be made to flow into the first prize opening 64.

Therefore, the game balls flowing into the main path SK1 of the special winning device 13550 from the right side in front view (arrow R direction side) of the special winning device 13550 are made to easily come into contact with the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c, It becomes easier to flow down along the extending direction of the second convex portion 13564c and the fifth convex portion 13571c and to be guided toward the sub-path HK1 side. On the other hand, the game balls flowing into the main path SK1 of the special winning device 13550 from the left side of the special winning device 13550 when viewed from the front (arrow L direction side) are made difficult to collide with the first convex portion 13564b and the fourth convex portion 13571b, The ball is more likely to be thrown to the secondary path HK1. As a result, the direction of flow of the game balls flowing into the special winning device 13550 can be changed.

Note that in this embodiment, the first convex portion 13564b, the second convex portion 13564c, the fourth convex portion 13571b, and the fifth convex portion 13571c are connected to the sixth convex portion 13571d and the third convex portion 13564d (main path HK1 and sub path It is formed above (in the direction of arrow U) than the game ball inflow port with SK6. Therefore, most of the game balls flowing down the main route SK1 can be flowed down the sub route HK1, and a relatively smaller number of game balls can be flowed down the main route SK6 than the sub route HK1.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, the opposing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is adjusted by the shim member SI, and the opposing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is made non-parallel. The position of the game ball flowing down (the direction in which the game ball flows down) can be adjusted.

Therefore, compared to adjusting the direction in which the game ball is more likely to flow down by changing the angle of the nail nailed to the front surface of the base board 60 with respect to the front surface of the base board 60, the direction in which the game ball is more likely to flow down inside the special winning device 13550 is can be made difficult for players to recognize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is disadvantageous before playing the game with the gaming machine, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In addition, by simply changing the two opposing directions (back and forth direction (arrow FB direction)) of the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570, the flow of the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 can be improved. Since the direction can be changed, the adjustment can be made easier than with a nail that can be adjusted in all directions with respect to the front of the game board 13 (base board 60). As a result, it is possible to easily cause the game balls to flow down in the direction intended by the adjuster.

Note that the direction intended by the adjuster is, for example, between the opposing first path member 13560 and second path member 13570 on the sub-route HK1 side (arrow L direction side) to the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). The space between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 is made larger so that the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 13550 flows down to the sub path HK1, or to the main path SK6 side (arrow R direction side). ) to make the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 larger than the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 on the sub-route HK1 side (arrow L direction side) to win a special prize. The game ball flowing down inside the device 13550 flows down to the main path SK6.

Furthermore, by sandwiching the shim member SI with respect to the first path member 13560 that is placed on the front side, the second path member 13570 that is placed on the back side is moved in the front-rear direction (in the direction of arrow FB). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 facing each other. That is, since the second path member 13570 disposed far from the player is moved in the front-back direction, the distance between the first path member 13560 and The distance between the opposing second path members 13570 can be made difficult for the player to grasp. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Next, an engaging member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 159. In the first embodiment, the operation element 315 of the engaging member 310 is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300. The operator 14315 in the fourteenth embodiment is formed with a protruding distal end surface inclined toward the proximal end side. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

159(a) is a rear view of the rear case 300 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 159(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 300 taken along the line CLIXb-CLIXb in FIG. 159(a).

Note that, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a wall extending from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

In addition, the rear case 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment has an engaging member 14310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear case 14300. It mainly includes a fixing member 320 that is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board box 100 (main controller 110).

As shown in FIG. 159, the engaging member 14310 in the fourteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a first piece 14311 and a second piece 312 extending in parallel directions. and a third piece 313 that connects the ends of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312.

The first piece 14311 has an end on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side to which the third piece 313 is connected to the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41(a)). The engagement portion 316 is formed as an engagement portion with the first piece 14311 and protrudes outward on both sides in the up and down direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 14311, and A recess 317 is recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 14311 (direction of arrow LR) from a substantially intermediate position of the engaging portion 316 of )).

The operator 14315 is formed at the end of the other side (arrow L direction side) of the first piece 14311, and its protruding dimension is set to a value larger than the plate thickness of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300. It protrudes from the back side of the back case 14300 (bottom wall portion 301) by a size that the operator can grasp with his or her fingers. Thereby, the operator 14315 can be made to protrude from the second opening 301d of the bottom wall portion 301, and the protruding portion (the tip of the operator 14315) can be grasped and operated.

Further, the protruding tip surface of the operating element 14315 is formed as an inclined surface 14315a that approaches the proximal end of the operating element 14315 as it approaches the engaging portion 316 side (the other side of the first piece 14311 (arrow L direction side)). As a result, when the operator operates the operator 14315 in the direction of disengaging the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L), the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged. The force acting in the direction of releasing can be reduced.

That is, the force of the operator operating the operator 14315 can be dispersed by the inclined surface 14315a. This makes it difficult to release the engagement between the engagement member 14310 and the fixing member 320 by operating the operator 14315 from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, a worker attempting to replace the board box 100 that has been illegally placed on the fixing member 320 may operate the operator 14315 from the back side of the rear case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the rear case 300. can be suppressed.

Further, the end portion of the inclined surface 14315a on the engaging portion 316 side is arranged closer to the front side (in the direction of arrow F) than the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. Thereby, the hand of the operator who operates the operator 14315 for the purpose of releasing the engagement between the engaging member 14310 and the fixing member 320 can be brought into contact with the inclined surface 14315a. As a result, an operator attempting to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 by making it difficult to operate the operator 14315 operates the operator 14315 from the back side of the rear case 300. Removal of the fixing member 320 from the back case 300 can be suppressed.

Next, an engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160(a). In the first embodiment, the operation member 315 of the engaging member 310 is formed to protrude toward the bottom wall 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 300. The operator 15315 in the fifteenth embodiment is pivotally supported by the first piece 15311 of the engagement member 15310. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 in the fifteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section in FIG. 160(a) corresponds to the cross section in FIG. 159(b).

Note that, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a wall extending from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. An opening 301a (see FIG. 5), which is rectangular in front view, is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible.

In addition, the rear case 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment has an engaging member 15310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear case 15300. It mainly includes a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41) that is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board box 100 (main controller 110).

As shown in FIG. 160(a), the engaging member 15310 in the fifteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a first piece 15311 and a second piece extending in parallel directions. A third piece 313 (see FIG. 41) that connects the ends of the first piece 14311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 15311 and the second piece 312. (see FIG. 41).

The first piece 15311 has an end on the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected and one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the engaged part 332 of the fixing member 320 (Fig. 41(a)), and protrudes outward on both sides in the up and down direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 15311. 316 (see FIG. 41), and a recess 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 15311 (arrow LR direction) from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316; It mainly includes an operator 15315 inserted into the second opening 301d of the back case 300, and a bearing part 15319 on which the operator 15315 is supported.

The bearing portion 15319 is provided protruding from the first piece 15311 on the other side (the side in the direction of arrow L) to which the third piece 313 of the first piece 15311 is connected. Further, the bearing portion 15319 is formed with a recess into which a cylindrical shaft member 15315c through which an operator 15315 (described later) is inserted in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow UD) is inserted.

The operator 15315 is formed into a rod shape and includes a through hole 15315b that penetrates in the direction of gravity at the end on the first piece 15311 side, and a shaft member 15315c that is inserted into the through hole 15315b.

Therefore, the shaft member 15315c inserted into the through hole 15315b is inserted into the recess of the bearing portion 15319, so that the operator 15315 is held in a rotatable state relative to the first piece 15311. Further, the rotation shaft (shaft member 15315c) of the operator 15315 is arranged closer to the front than the first piece 15311. As a result, the rightward (clockwise) rotation of the operator 15315 in the state shown in FIG. 160(a) when viewed from above can be restricted by contacting the other end of the first piece 15311, Rotation to the left (counterclockwise) is allowed.

Therefore, when the operator operates the operator 15315 in the direction of releasing the engagement between the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L), the operator operates the operator 15315 in the direction shown in FIG. 160(a). When rotating clockwise), the force that acts in the direction of disengaging the engagement member 15310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L) can be reduced. This makes it difficult to release the engagement between the engaging member 15310 and the fixing member 320 by operating the operator 15315 from the back side of the back case 300. As a result, a player who attempts to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 may operate the operator 15315 from the back side of the back case 300 to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 300. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160(b), an engaging member 15310 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the sliding operation of the engagement member 310 is performed using the operator 315, but in the sixteenth embodiment, the end of the first piece 16311 of the engagement member 16310 is operated. It will be held in Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 160(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 300 in the sixteenth embodiment. Note that the cross section in FIG. 160(b) corresponds to the cross section in FIG. 160(a). Also, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a bottom wall portion 301 that extends from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. An opening 301a (see FIG. 5), which is rectangular in front view, is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible.

Furthermore, the rear case 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment has an engaging member 16310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301; It mainly includes a fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41) that is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board box 100 (main controller 110).

As shown in FIG. 160(b), the engaging member 16310 in the sixteenth embodiment has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a first piece 16311 and a first piece 16311 extending in parallel directions. Two pieces 312 (see FIG. 41) and a third piece 313 (which connects the ends of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 16311 and the second piece 312). (see FIG. 41). Furthermore, the engagement member 16310 in the sixteenth embodiment can be slid and displaced by a finger inserted into a second opening 301d formed in the back case 300 from the back side.

The first piece 16311 has an end on the opposite side (arrow R direction side) to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected, and the engaged part 332 of the fixing member 320 (see FIG. 41), and protrudes outward on both sides in the up and down direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the first piece 311 (see FIG. 41). 41), and a recessed portion 317 (see FIG. 41) recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 16311 (arrow LR direction) from a substantially intermediate position between the two engaging portions 316. Be prepared.

As shown in FIG. 160(b), when the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 16310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, the other side of the first piece 16311 (the side in the direction of arrow L) An end portion of the second opening portion 301d is arranged horizontally outward from the opening of the second opening portion 301d. Therefore, when the operator operates the engaging member 16310 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 16310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L), the operator inserts the engaging member 16310 through the second opening 301d of the rear case 300. It is possible to make it difficult to displace the engaging member 16310 in the direction of releasing the engagement between the engaging member 16310 and the fixing member 320 with a finger. As a result, a worker attempting to replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 illegally operates the engagement member 16310 from the back side of the rear case 300 and removes the fixing member 320 from the rear case 300. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161, a rear case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the operator 315 of the engaging member 310 protrudes from the second opening 301d of the back case 300. However, in the seventeenth embodiment, the second opening 301d of the back case 17300 An operator 315 protruding from the rear case is covered by a portion of the rear case at a predetermined position. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

161(a) is a rear view of the rear case 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 161(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 17300 taken along the line CLXIb-CLXIb in FIG. 161(a).

As shown in FIG. 161, a rear case 17300 according to the seventeenth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 17301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands upright from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 17301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 17301 and 302. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 17301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

The rear case 17300 also has a protrusion 301b protruding from two places on the front side of the bottom wall 17301, a first opening 301c opening at a position facing the fixing member 320, and an engaging member 310. It includes a second opening 301d that opens at opposing positions, and a covering part 17301e that covers the back surface of the second opening 301d on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side).

The covering portion 17301e is erected from the end of the second opening 301d on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side) toward the back side (arrow B direction side). Furthermore, the covered portion 17301e includes a bent portion 17301e1 whose standing tip portion is bent toward the inside of the second opening 301d in rear view. As a result, the covered portion 17301e is formed into a box shape that is open on the first opening 301c side (arrow R direction side) and the opposite side (arrow L direction side).

Further, the standing distance of the covered portion 17301e (distance from the back surface of the bottom wall portion 17301c to the front surface of the bent portion 17301e1) is set to be larger than the protrusion dimension of the operator 315 that protrudes from the bottom wall portion 17301c. . Further, in the covered portion 17301e, the dimension of the bent portion 17301e1 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) when viewed from the rear is set to be larger than the dimension of the operator 315 in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear.

As a result, when the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 are engaged, the operator 315 is inside the covered portion 17301e, as shown in FIG. 161(b). will be placed in Therefore, when the operator operates the engaging member 310 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L), the operator grasps the operator 315 from the back side of the back case 17300. It can be made difficult. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the engagement member 310 from being displaced in the direction in which the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released (in the direction of arrow L). As a result, a worker (player) attempting to illegally replace the board box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320 operates the engaging member 310 from the back side of the back case 17300 and moves the fixing member 320 from the back side. Removal from the case 17300 can be suppressed.

Next, a rear case 18300 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164. In the first embodiment, the engagement member 310 is slid in the linear direction (arrow LR direction), but the engagement member 18310 in the 18th embodiment is rotationally displaced. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163, the configuration of the back case 18300 and the operation of the engagement member 18310 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. 162(a) and 163(a) are front views of a rear case 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 162(b) and 163(b) are rear views of the rear case 18300. Note that FIGS. 162(a) and 162(b) illustrate a state in which the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are engaged, and in FIGS. 163(a) and 163(b), the engaging member 18310 A state in which the engagement with the fixing member 18320 is released is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the rear case 18300 in the 18th embodiment has a bottom wall portion 18301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and is erected toward the front from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 18301. An outer wall portion 18302 is provided, and each wall portion 18301, 18302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open. In addition, the rear case 18300 has an engaging member 18310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) of the bottom wall portion 18301, and an engagement member 18310 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 18300. and a fixing member 18320 for fixing the board box 100 (main controller 110).

The bottom wall portion 18301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 18301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is said that The bottom wall portion 18301 also includes a first opening 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320, and a protruding portion located below the first opening 18301c (in the direction of arrow D) and protruding toward the front side. 18301b.

The first opening 18301c is an opening for inserting an engaged portion 18332 of a fixing member 18320, which will be described later, and is formed to have a larger shape than the engaged portion 18332 when viewed from the front. As a result, after the accessory device (rotation unit 700) is arranged inside the back case 18300, the engaging portion of the fixing member 18320 can be placed on the front side of the back case 18300 from the back side of the back case 18300. can.

The protruding portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports an engaging member 18310, which will be described later, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the front of the bottom wall portion 18301. Further, a hole into which a screw is screwed is provided in the protruding end surface of the protruding portion 18301b. Thereby, by screwing the screw into the protrusion 18301b while the engagement member 18310 is disposed on the back case 18300, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 18310 from slipping out from the protrusion 18301b.

The outer wall portion 18302 includes an opening 18302a that opens in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) on the right side (arrow R direction side) when viewed from the front. The opening 18302a is formed on the rotation locus of an engagement member 18310, which will be described later. Thereby, after the engaging member 18310 is disposed inside the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310 can be made to protrude outside the rear case 18300 by rotating the engaging member 18310.

The fixing member 18320 includes an intervening member 18330 that engages with an engaging member 18310, which will be described later, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the intervening member 18330.

The intervening member 18330 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and has a locking part 18331 that protrudes from the other side (arrow L direction side) and a rear case from the one side (arrow R direction side). 300 side and formed in a frame shape, an insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39(b)) opening in a circular shape on the box-shaped bottom surface (side surface in the direction of arrow B), and a rear surface. It mainly includes a protrusion 334 that protrudes from.

The locking portion 18331 has an opening for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 320 with the bottom wall portion 18301, and an L-shaped cross section is inserted into the opening from the periphery of the first opening 18301c. A protruding wall 18301c1 provided in a protruding manner is inserted into the bottom wall portion 18301 to be engaged with the bottom wall portion 18301.

As a result, when installing the intervening member 18330 (fixing member 18320) on the back case 18300, the protruding wall 18301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 18331 of the intervening member 18330, and the other side of the intervening member 18330 (arrow L direction side) can be locked to the rear case 18300.

The engaged portion 18332 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310, and has a dimension in which the protruding dimension toward the back case 18300 side (arrow F direction side) exceeds the engaging member 18310 disposed on the back case 18300. The distance from the inner surface of the front side of the enclosed space (arrow F direction side) to the front of the bottom wall 18301 is larger than the distance from the front of the engagement member 18310 to the front of the bottom wall 18301. Set. As a result, the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 and the engaging member 18310 are arranged at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The engaging member 18310 is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a second piece 18312 that is pivotally supported by the protrusion 18301b of the rear case 18300, and is bent from one end of the second piece 18312. and a first piece 18311 formed by.

The second piece 18312 is provided with a shaft support hole 18312a that is circularly opened in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. The shaft support hole 18312a is a hole into which the protruding portion 18301b of the back case 18300 described above is inserted, so that the engagement member 18310 can be disposed inside the back case 18300 in a state where it is supported pivotally.

The first piece 18311 extends in an arc shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 18312a described above. Thereby, the displacement area of the first piece 18311 can be minimized when the engagement member 18310 is rotated about the axis of the support hole 18312a. Further, the first piece 18311 has an engaging portion 18316 that protrudes from the shaft support hole 18312a to both sides in the radial direction at the end opposite to the connecting side with the second piece 18312, and the engaging portions 316 at the two locations. a recessed portion 18317 recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 18311 from a substantially intermediate position.

The two engaging portions 18316 have a substantially triangular outer shape when viewed from the front. Further, one of the two engaging portions 18316 is arranged so that the first piece 18311 is closer to the end opposite to the connecting portion with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting portion with the second piece 18312. It is formed in an outer shape that protrudes radially outward. The other of the two engaging parts 18316 has a diameter of the first piece 18311 that increases from the end opposite to the connecting part with the second piece 18312 toward the connecting part with the second piece 18312. It is formed in an outer shape that protrudes inward.

The recess 18317 is formed by notching in the thickness direction of the first piece 18311, and extends in the extending direction of the first piece 18311 from the end of the first piece 18311 opposite to the connection side with the second piece 18312. It is recessed along the direction toward the connection side with the second piece 18312. Therefore, the end of the first piece 18311 is divided into two. As a result, the end of the first piece 18311 opposite to the side connected to the second piece 18312 is more easily elastically deformed than the side connected to the second piece 18312, and the engaging member 18310 is connected to the fixing member 18320. It can be easily engaged.

Next, the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 163, the intervening member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 are fastened and assembled using screws inserted from the intervening member 18330 side before engaging with the engaging member 18310.

Further, as described above, the engaging member 18310 is disposed in a state where it is pivotally supported by the protruding portion 18301b of the back case 18300, and the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 is connected to the rear case 18300. It is arranged so as to protrude from the opening 18302a.

Note that the center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 that is pivotally supported by the back case 18300 is located closer to the opening 18302a than the protrusion 18301b of the back case 18300, and when no external force is applied, the center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 is As a result, a force is applied to the engagement member 18310 that rotates the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 in a direction that projects from the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300. As a result, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 is made to protrude outside the back case 18300, and the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixation member 18320 is This will prevent you from forgetting to do so.

When the interposed member 18330 and the shaft support member 340 (fixed member 18320) are in a fastened state, a protruding wall 18301c1 protruding from the periphery of the first opening 18301c is inserted into the locking portion 18331 of the interposed member 18330. , the left side of the fixing member 18320 in front view (arrow L direction side) is locked to the rear case 18300. In this case, the engaged portion 18332 of the fixed member 18320 is inserted inside the first opening 18301c, and the space surrounded by the engaged portion 18332 faces the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310. It is placed in a position where

Next, the operator who engages the engaging member 18310 with the fixing member 18320 moves the engaging member 18310 (the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312) protruding from the opening 18302a of the back case 18300 to the back side. By pushing it inside the case 18300 (in the direction of arrow R1) (see FIG. 163), the engaging member 18310 is rotated around the protrusion 18301b.

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 162, the tip of the engaging member 18310 can be inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 18332. In this case, the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging parts 18316 is set to be larger than the vertical opening dimension of the internal space of the engaged part 18332, but the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 Since the first piece 18311 is easily elastically deformed, the end of the first piece 18311 is elastically deformed inside the recess 18317, and the distance between the outer ends of the two engaging parts 18316 is reduced. The end of the first piece 18311 can be inserted inside the engaged part 18332 by making it smaller than the vertical opening dimension of the internal space of the engaging part 18332.

Further, since the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted inside the opening 18302a of the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310 is engaged in the engaged state. It is possible to prevent the mating member 18310 from being operated from the outside of the back case 18300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board due to unauthorized manipulation of the engaging member 18310.

Next, the release of the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 in the eighteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 163(a), the first opening 18301c has a substantially L-shaped opening when viewed from the front, and the recess 18317 of the engaging member 18310 in the engaged state with the engaged portion 18332 of the fixing member 18320. can be operated from the back side (direction of arrow B) of the back case 1300 through the first opening 18301c.

Therefore, by elastically deforming the outer portion of the recessed portion 18317 of the engaging member 18310 toward the recessed side of the recessed portion 18317 using a special tool or the like, the engagement between the engaging portion 18316 of the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is improved. The connection is canceled. With this engagement released, the engaging member 18310 is displaced in the direction (in the direction of arrow L) to be pulled out from the internal space engaged by the engaged portion 18332, and then the deformation of the engaging member 310 is restored. , the engagement between the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 can be released.

Note that the gap between the outer portion of the recess 18317 of the engagement member 18310 and the first opening 18301c is preferably formed as small as possible. According to this, the finger of the person removing the fixing member 18320 from the back case 300 cannot be inserted, and a special tool can be inserted. As a result, only a worker with a dedicated tool can replace the board box 100 (main controller 110), and it is possible to prevent the board box 100 from being replaced with an unauthorized one.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a case where the engaging member 18310 forgets to engage the fixing member 18320 will be described. 164(a) is a schematic top view of the game board 13, and FIG. 164(b) is a schematic top view of the pachinko machine 10. Note that FIGS. 164(a) and 164(b) illustrate a state in which the engaging member 18310 has forgotten to engage with the engaged portion 18332. Further, FIGS. 164(a) and 164(b) illustrate a state in which an upper piece of the outer frame 11, which is formed in a frame shape when viewed from the front, is removed.

As described above, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the engaged portion 18332 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 can be caused to protrude to the outside of the back case 18300 due to gravity. In this case, the distance dimension LR1 from the end of the engaging member 18310 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the game board 13 to the right-hand side (arrow R direction side) end of the back case 18300 (FIG. 164(a) (see FIG. 164(b)) is set larger than the inner left-right dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164(b)) in the left-right direction of the outer frame 11 in which the game board 13 is arranged. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixed member 18320 are not engaged and the game board 13 is inserted inside the outer frame 11, the back side of the engaging member 18310 hits the front of the outer frame 11. can be brought into contact. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixed member 18320 are not engaged, the game board 13 is prevented from being disposed on the outer frame 11, and the engaging member 18310 and the fixed member 18320 are not engaged with each other. Forgetting can be suppressed.

Next, an engaging member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. In the 18th embodiment, the engagement member 18310 is arranged inside the outer frame 11 to prevent the engagement member 18310 from being tampered with, but in the 19th embodiment, the release direction of the engagement member 19310 is The rotation of the engagement member 18310 is restricted to prevent unauthorized manipulation of the engagement member 18310. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective front view of the engagement member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment. 166(a) is a front view of the rear case 18300, and FIG. 166(b) is a sectional view of the one-way 19350 taken along the line CLXVIb-CLXVIb in FIG. 165.

As shown in FIG. 165, the engagement member 19310 in the nineteenth embodiment is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a second piece 19312 having a rotation axis relative to the back case 19300, and a second piece 19312 having a rotation axis relative to the rear case 19300. 19312 and a first piece 18311 formed by bending from one end.

The second piece 19312 includes a fitting hole 19312b that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) at the end opposite to the side where the first piece 18311 is formed. The fitting hole 19312b is a hole into which a one-way 19350 described later is fitted, and is formed to have approximately the same inner diameter as the outer ring 19351 of the one-way 19350.

The one-way 19350 includes an inner ring 19352 having a cam surface formed on its outer peripheral surface, an outer ring 19351 formed in an annular shape surrounding the outside of the inner ring 19352, and a plurality of rings arranged between the outer ring 19351 and the inner ring 19352. It includes a spring 19353 and a roller 19354 (see FIG. 166(b)), and when the inner ring 19352 tries to rotate in one direction with respect to the outer ring 19351, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 19354 increases, creating resistance. This is a cam-type clutch that transmits power to the outer ring, and when the inner ring rotates in the other direction with respect to the outer ring 19351, the contact surface pressure between the cam surface and the roller 10354 decreases and slips, cutting off the power transmission. Note that a detailed explanation of the one-way 19350 will be given later.

Further, an operator 19360 is inserted into the center of the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350. The operator 19360 includes an operating section 19361 disposed on the back side (direction of arrow B) of the rear case 19300, and an insertion section 19362 protruding from the front side of the operating section 19361 (direction of arrow F). Prepare for the Lord.

The operation part 19361 is a part where the operator operates the operator 19360 from the back side of the back case 19300, and is formed in a circular shape, and its outer shape is larger than the opening into which the insertion part 19362 described later is inserted. . Thereby, when the operator 19360 is disposed from the back side of the back case 19300, the operating section 19361 can be prevented from slipping out to the front side of the back case 19300 (in the direction of arrow F).

The insertion portion 19362 is formed into a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operating portion 19361, and protrudes toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). In addition, the insertion portion 19362 includes a protruding wall 19362a that protrudes in the radial direction on its outer peripheral surface.

The protruding wall 19362a is an engagement portion that prevents the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 from idling with respect to the insertion portion 19362, and is inserted into a recess 19352a formed in the inner ring 19352. This can prevent the rotational force acting on the operator 19360 from not being transmitted to the inner ring 19352.

Further, a concave portion having a circular shape when viewed from the front is formed on the protruding distal end surface of the insertion portion 19362, and by screwing a screw into the concave portion from the front side toward the back side, the one-way 19350 A control element 19360 can be connected to.

Next, the arrangement of the rear case 19300 and the engaging member 19310 will be described with reference to FIG. 166. The back case 19300 includes a bottom wall portion 19301 that is generally rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands up from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 19301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open. In addition, the rear case 19300 has an engaging member 19310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 19301, and an engaging member 19310 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 19300. and a fixing member 18320 for fixing the board box 100 (main controller 110).

The bottom wall portion 19301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 19301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is said that In addition, the bottom wall portion 19301 has a first opening 18301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 18320, and a first opening 18301c located below the first opening 18301c (in the direction of arrow D) and opening in the front-rear direction and inside. and an opening (not shown) into which the insertion portion 19362 of the operator 19360 described above is inserted.

The above-mentioned engaging member 19310 is constructed by disposing the engaging member 19310 with the one-way 19350 inside the fitting hole 19312b on the front side of the bottom wall 10301, and then inserting the operator 19360 from the back side of the back case 19300. The insertion portion 19362 of the one-way 19350 is inserted into the inner ring 19352 of the one-way 19350 through the opening of the back case 19300, thereby disposing it on the bottom wall portion 19301.

Next, the operation of the one-way 19350 will be explained. As described above, the one-way 19350 is switched between allowing and blocking transmission of power to the outer ring 19351 in one direction and the other direction of rotation of the inner ring 19352.

First, a case will be described in which power from the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring. As shown in FIG. 166(b), when the inner ring 19352 is rotated in one direction (in the direction of arrow LK (see FIG. 166(b)), there is a gap between the cam surface of the inner ring 19352 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351. The roller 19354 is pinched, and the contact of the roller 19354 acts as resistance, so that the power of the inner ring 19352 is transmitted to the outer ring 19351. In this case, one rotational direction is set in a direction in which the engaging member 19310 is engaged with the fixed member 18320.

Next, a case where the power to the inner ring 19352 is cut off will be described. When the inner ring 19352 is rotated in the other direction (arrow RK direction (see FIG. 166(b)), the roller 19354 is displaced radially inward of the inner ring 19352 due to the resistance of contact with the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351. This reduces the contact surface pressure between the inner peripheral surface of the outer ring 19351 and the roller 19354, causing the roller 19354 to slide relative to the outer ring 19351, cutting off power transmission. In this case, the other direction of rotation is set in a direction in which the engagement member 19310 is disengaged from the fixed member 18320.

Thereby, with the engaging member 19310 disposed on the back case 19300, the operator 19360 can be rotated to engage the engaging member 19310 with the fixing member 18320. Furthermore, rotation of the operator 19360 to release the engagement between the engagement member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 from the engaged state of the engagement member 19310 and the fixing member 18320 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 18320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board due to unauthorized manipulation of the engaging member 19310 (operator 19360).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, an engaging member 20310 in the twentieth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the movement of the engagement member 310 is regulated by a screw inserted into the rear base 720 of the rotation unit 700. However, in the twentieth embodiment, the engagement member 20310 is When engaged with , movement of the engaging member 20310 is regulated by being engaged with an engaging portion 20724a formed on the back base 20720 of the rotation unit 20700. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the engagement member 20310 and rotation unit 20700 in the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168. FIG. 167 is an exploded perspective view of the back case 20300 and rotation unit 20700 in the twentieth embodiment. 168(a) is a front view of the engagement member 20310, and FIG. 168(b) is a rear view of the rotation unit 20700 and the engagement member 20310.

Note that, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 20300 in the 20th embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a wall extending from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. An opening 301a (see FIG. 5), which is rectangular in front view, is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible.

In addition, the rear case 20300 in the 20th embodiment has an engaging member 20310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 301, and the rear case 20300. It mainly includes a fixing member 320 that is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board box 100 (main controller 110). Further, in the rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment, a rotation unit 20700 is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the engagement member 20310 disposed on the front side (direction side of arrow F) of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 20300 in the twentieth embodiment has a crank-like shape when viewed from the front. The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 extend in directions parallel to each other, and the ends of the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are connected to the first piece 311 and the second piece 20312. 20312, and a third piece 313 connected in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of 20312.

The first piece 311 and the second piece 20312 are each formed with a sliding groove 314 which is an elongated hole that is long in the direction in which the engaging member 20310 extends. It is possible to slide in the extending direction (arrow LR direction).

Further, the second piece 20312 includes a recess 20312c recessed in a side surface parallel to the sliding direction of the engagement member 20310. The recess 20312c is a recess into which a tip of an engaging portion 20724a of a rear base 20720 of a rotation unit 20700, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the engaging portion 20724a.

To explain in detail, the recessed portion 20312c has a dimension SH1 (see FIG. 168(a)) from the connecting side of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313 to the end on the opposite side (arrow L direction side). It is set to be approximately the same as the dimension SH2 (see FIG. 168(b)) that allows the protruding portion 301b to slide inside the sliding groove 314 of 20310. Further, the recessed portion 20312c is recessed into a triangular shape with a right angle when viewed from the front, and the right-angled portion is set on the side where the second piece 20312 is connected to the third piece 313 (the side in the direction of arrow R).

The rotation unit 20700 has a rectangular rear base 20720 disposed on the right side (in the direction of arrow R) of the lower part of the opening 301a of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 20300, and a front surface of the rear base 20720. A rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) disposed on the side (in the direction of arrow F), and rotationally displacing the rotating body 800 via a light-transmissive center frame 86 disposed on the game board 13. can be visually recognized by the player.

The back base 20720 is a plate member that connects the back side of the ball holder 710 and the back side (arrow B direction side) of the decoration unit 750, and is arranged on the back side of the ball holder 710 and the decoration unit 750. Further, the back base 20720 includes an upright wall 20724 erected from the back.

The standing wall 20724 extends to surround the outer edge of the engagement member 20310 disposed on the back case 20300. Further, the standing wall 20724 includes an engaging portion 20724a that is formed at a position facing the recess 20312c of the engaging member 20310, and whose tip is inserted into the inside of the recess 20312c.

The engaging portion 20724a protrudes from the standing wall 20724 in the direction in which the engaging member 20310 is engaged with the fixed member 320 (the direction of the arrow R), and is provided in the standing manner in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction of the engaging member 20310. It is formed separated from the wall 20724 by a predetermined gap. This makes it possible to reduce the rigidity of the engaging portion 20724a and make it easier to elastically deform the engaging portion 20724a. Moreover, an area in which the engaging portion 20724a can be elastically deformed can be secured by the gap between the standing wall 20724 and the engaging portion 20724a.

Furthermore, the engaging portion 20724a includes a bent portion 20724a1 that is bent toward the engaging member 20310 at the protruding tip, and the bent portion 20724a1 has a triangular shape in front view that is approximately the same shape as the recessed portion 20312c described above. be done. As a result, before the engagement member 20310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the bent portion 20724a1 is arranged inside the recess 20312c of the engagement member 20310. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to slide the engaging member 20310 in its displacement direction (arrow LR direction) (see FIG. 168(b)).

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the engagement member 20310 from vibrating with respect to the back case 20300 due to force such as vibration or shaking, and moving in the direction of engagement with the fixing member 320 (arrow R direction). Therefore, before the fixing member 320 is disposed on the rear case 20300, the position of the engaging member 20310 is displaced, and when the fixing member 320 is disposed on the rear case 20300, the engaged portion of the fixing member 320 332 can be prevented from coming into contact with the engagement member 20310. In other words, when disposing the fixing member 320 on the back case 20300, the engaging member 20310 is located within the displacement region when the engaged portion 332 (see FIG. 167) of the fixing member 320 is disposed. can be suppressed. As a result, there is no need to operate the engaging member 20310 in the direction of disengaging the engaging member 20310 from the fixing member 320, so that workability when engaging the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 can be improved. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the engagement member 20310 and rotation unit 20700 in a state where the engagement member 20310 and the fixed member 320 are engaged will be described. 169(a) is a rear view of the rotation unit 20700 and the engaging member 20310, and FIG. 169(b) is a rear view of the rear case 20300. Note that FIGS. 169(a) and 169(b) illustrate a state in which the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 20320 are engaged. Further, in FIG. 169(b), the outlines of a part of the engaging member 20310 and the standing wall 20724 are illustrated with chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 169, when the operator 315 is operated from the back side of the back case 20300 (arrow B direction side), the engagement member 20310 is moved to the left side (arrow L in front view) with respect to the bottom wall 301 of the back case 20300. When the engagement member 20310 is disposed on the inside of the recess 20312c of the engagement member 20310, when the engagement member 20310 is displaced to the right (arrow R direction) with respect to the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 20300. The bent portion 20724a1 is pushed out into the recess 20312c by the inclined surface of the recess 20312c.

Here, as described above, the recess 20312c has a distance SH1 from the connecting side of the second piece 20312 with the third piece 313 to the end on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) (see FIG. 168(a)). is set to be approximately the same as the dimension SH2 (see FIG. 168(b)) in which the protruding portion 301b can slide inside the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 20310, so that the engaging member 20310 When the second piece 20312 of the engaging member 20310 is moved to the position where it engages with the third piece 313, the end of the second piece 20312 on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) connects the bent portion 20724a1 with the engaging member. It is arranged at a position adjacent to 20310 in the displacement direction (arrow LR direction). This can prevent the engaging member 20310 from being incorrectly displaced in the direction of disengaging the fixing member 320 (in the direction of arrow L).

Note that, similarly to the first embodiment, the engaging member 20310 is connected to the fixing member 320 of the engaging member 20310 by the engaging portion 316 catching (engaging) with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320. Displacement in the direction of releasing the engagement is restricted. However, since the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 is inserted through the first opening 301c of the back case 300, the engagement between the engaged portion 332 and the engaging portion 316 is through the first opening 301c. There was a risk that it would be illegally terminated.

On the other hand, in the twentieth embodiment, the displacement of the engagement member 20310 in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member 320 is opposite to the direction of the engagement portion 316 of the engagement member 20310 that engages with the fixed member 320. Since the side end can be brought into contact with the bent portion 20724a1 and restricted, an unauthorized object may be inserted through the first opening 301c and the engagement between the end of the engagement member 20310 and the bent portion 20724a1 is released. It is possible to prevent this from happening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 being replaced with an incorrect board. .

Note that the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 20310 are connected by removing the rotation unit 20700 disposed inside the back case 20300 (bottom wall portion 301) from the back case 20300, and then removing the end portion and the bent portion of the engaging member 20310. After disengaging from the engagement member 20724a1, the end of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 20310 is elastically deformed and the end of the engagement member 20310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, thereby separating both. The engagement can be released.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the rear case 20300, it is necessary to remove the rotation unit 20700 from the front side of the rear case 20300, so that the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 is not illegally released. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Furthermore, as described above, since the engaging member 20310 is bent into a crank shape when viewed from the front, an illegal object such as a wire or the like inserted from the first piece 311 side can be inserted into the second piece in a straight line. It is possible to restrict feeding to the end of the piece 20312. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal object inserted from the first piece 311 side from being accurately sent to the engagement portion between the second piece 20312 and the bent portion 20724a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 being replaced with an incorrect board. .

Next, the rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. In the first embodiment, the movement of the engagement member 310 is regulated by a screw inserted into the rear base 720 of the rotation unit 700, but in the twenty-first embodiment, the screw inserted into the rear base 21720 of the rotation unit 21700 The movement of the engagement member 310 is regulated by inserting the first piece 311 into the formed insertion portion 21724b. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the engagement member 310 and rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear case 300 and rotation unit 21700 in the twenty-first embodiment. 171(a) is a rear view of the rotation unit 21700 and the engagement member 310, and FIG. 171(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 21700 taken along the line CLXXIb-CLXXIb in FIG. 171(a).

Note that, like the back case 300 in the first embodiment, the back case 21300 in the 21st embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a wall extending from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. An opening 301a that is rectangular in front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible.

In addition, the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment has an engaging member 310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 301, and the rear case 21300. It mainly includes a fixing member 320 that is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board box 100 (main controller 110). Further, in the rear case 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment, a rotation unit 21700 is disposed in front of the bottom wall portion 301.

As shown in FIGS. 170 and 171, the rotation unit 21700 in the 21st embodiment is arranged on the right side (the side in the direction of arrow R) below the opening 301a (the side in the direction of arrow D) of the bottom wall 301 of the back case 300. ), and a rotating body 800 (see FIG. 93) disposed on the front side of the rear base 21720, and a light beam disposed on the game board 13. The player can visually recognize the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800 through the transparent center frame 86.

The back base 21720 is a plate member that connects the back side of the ball holder 710 and the back side of the decoration unit 750, and is arranged on the back side of the ball holder 710 and the decoration unit 750. Further, the back base 21720 includes an upright wall 21724 erected on the back thereof.

The standing wall 21724 extends to surround the outer edge of the engagement member 310 disposed on the back case 300. Further, the standing wall 21724 is arranged in a state in which the engagement member 310 is located at the left end (in the direction of arrow L) with respect to the rear case 300 (a state in which the engagement between the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 is released). ) includes an insertion portion 21724b that protrudes toward the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 (in the direction of arrow L).

The insertion portion 21724b extends from the standing wall 21724 in a direction parallel to the direction of displacement of the engagement member 310 (arrow LR direction), and is connected to the engagement member 310 in a state engaged with the fixing member 320. The dimensions are set to overlap in the direction of gravity (direction of arrow UB). Further, a bent portion 21724b1 that is bent toward the back side (toward the engaging member 310 side) is formed at the tip of the insertion portion 21724b, and the bent tip of the bent portion 21742b1 is bent in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 (arrow F- B direction), the length is set to overlap with the engaging member 310.

Furthermore, the width of the insertion portion 21742b in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD) is set to be smaller than the width of the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 in the vertical direction. Therefore, in the insertion portion 21724b, the bent portion 21724b1 is inserted into the recess 317 when the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixing member 320. This can suppress elastic deformation of the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 toward the inner side of the recess 317 from the state in which the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 being replaced with an incorrect board. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173, the operation of the insertion portion 21724b when engaging the engaging member 310 with the fixing member 320 will be described. 172(a) and 173(a) are rear views of the rotation unit 21700 and the engagement member 310. 172(b) and 173(b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the rear case 300 and the rotation unit 21700. Note that FIGS. 172(a) and 172(b) illustrate a state in which the engagement member 310 and the fixing member 320 are disengaged, and FIGS. 173(a) and 173(b) illustrate A state in which the mating member 310 is being engaged with the fixing member 320 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the engagement member 310 is in a state where the engagement with the fixed member 320 is released, and the end of the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 is connected to the fixed member 320. When inserted into the internal space of the portion 332 , the end portion of the first piece 311 is elastically deformed toward the inside of the recess 317 . As a result, the width of the recess 317 in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD) is made smaller than the width of the insertion portion 21724b in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, when the engaging part 316 is located in the internal space of the engaged part 332 (in the case of the position shown in FIG. 173(a)), the end of the first piece 311 touches the protruding tip of the insertion part 21724b. placed in a position that exceeds In other words, the length dimension of the engaging portion 316 in the left-right direction is set larger than the opposing dimension from the protruding tip of the insertion portion 21724b to the end of the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320.

Therefore, when the engaging part 316 is pushed out from the internal space of the engaged part 332, the end of the engaging member 310 on the first piece 311 side can be brought into contact with the bent part 21724b1 of the insertion part 21724b. . In this case, the tip of the insertion portion 21724b is pushed out toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) along the inclined surface of the bent portion 21724b1. Thereby, the engaging member 310 can be displaced to a position where it engages with the fixing member 320.

As shown in FIG. 171, when the engaging part 316 is pulled out of the internal space of the engaged part 332, as described above, the width of the recessed part 317 in the vertical direction of the first piece 311 Also, since the vertical width dimension of the insertion portion 21724b is increased, the bent portion 21724b1 is inserted inside the recessed portion 317.

Therefore, as described above, the first piece 311 of the engagement member 310 can be prevented from being elastically deformed to the inner side of the recess 317. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaging member 20310 and the fixing member 320 from being illegally released and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 being replaced with an incorrect board. .

The engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are constructed by removing the rotating unit 21700 disposed inside the back case 300 (bottom wall portion 301) from the back case 21300, and then attaching the end of the engaging member 310 and the back case. 20300, the end portion of the first piece 311 of the engaging member 310 is elastically deformed and the end portion of the engaging member 310 is pulled out from the internal space of the engaged portion 332, thereby separating both. The engagement can be released.

Therefore, when removing the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300, it is necessary to remove the rotation unit 21700 from the front side of the back case 21300. It is possible to prevent the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 320 from being illegally released from the back side and replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the engaging portion 316 of the engaging member 310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320, but in the 22nd embodiment, the engaging member 22310 is provided with a recess. A bent portion 22332a1 formed on the fixing member 22320 is engaged with the recessed portion 22311a. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The configurations of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in the twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176(a). FIG. 174 is a perspective front view of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. 175(a) and 175(b) are front views of the rear case 22300. FIG. 176(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the rear case 22300 taken along the line CLXXVIa-CLXXVIa in FIG. 175(b). Note that FIG. 175(a) shows a state before the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged, and FIG. 175(b) shows a state in which the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 are engaged. is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 174 to 176(a), the back case 22300 in the twenty-second embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is generally rectangular in front view, and a bottom wall portion 301 that extends from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is provided with an outer wall part 302 that stands upright, and is formed into a box shape with one side open by the respective wall parts 301 and 302. The rear case 22300 also includes an engaging member 22310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 301 and an engagement member 22310 disposed on the rear side of the bottom wall 301. A fixing member 22320 is provided to fix the board box 100 (main controller 110).

The engaging member 22310 has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and includes a first piece 22311 and a second piece 312 extending in parallel directions, and the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312. A third piece 313 connects the ends of the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction thereof.

Further, the first piece 22311 and the second piece 312 are each formed with a sliding groove 314 which is an elongated hole that is long in the direction in which the engaging member 22310 extends. The piece 312 is allowed to slide in the extending direction (arrow LR direction).

The first piece 22311 includes a recess 22311a that is recessed toward the back side (arrow B direction) on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the end opposite to the side to which the third piece 313 is connected. .

The recessed portion 22311a is a portion into which a bent portion 22332a1 formed on the fixing member 22320, which will be described later, is inserted to engage the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320. It is formed at a position opposite to 22332a of the fixing member 22320 when the end of the piece 22311 on one side (arrow R direction side) is accommodated in the internal space of the engaged portion 22332 of the fixing member 22320.

Further, the internal shape of the recessed portion 22311a is formed in a substantially right triangular cross section, and the right-angled portion is set on the end side (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 22311, and the recessed bottom surface is located on the It is formed as an inclined surface that becomes deeper toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B) toward the end side of one piece 22311.

The fixing member 22320 includes an intervening member 22330 that engages with the above-mentioned engaging member 22310, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the back side of the intervening member 22330.

The interposed member 22330 is formed in a box shape with an open front side (arrow F direction side), and has a locking part 331 protruding from one side (arrow R direction side) and the other side (arrow L direction side). An engaged portion 22332 formed in a frame shape and protruding from the side surface to the bottom wall portion 301 side (back side (arrow B direction side)) of the back case 22300, and a box-shaped bottom surface (side surface in the arrow B direction side) It mainly includes an insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39(b)) that opens in a circular shape, and a protrusion 334 that protrudes from the back surface.

The engaged portion 22332 is a portion into which the end of the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 on one side (arrow R direction side) is inserted into the enclosed internal space, and the inner edge shape is the first It is set slightly larger than the outer shape of the piece 22311. Further, the engaged portion 22332 is formed in a frame shape, and extends from one side of the front side (arrow F direction side) in the direction of insertion of the engaging member 22310 into the engaged portion 22332 (arrow R direction side). A protruding portion 22332a is provided.

The protrusion 22332a has a bent portion 22332a1 bent toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) at the end of the tip, and when the bent portion 22332a1 is inserted into the recessed portion 22311a of the engagement member 22310 described above, the protrusion 22332a is engaged. The mating member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be engaged. That is, the bent portion 22332a1 is formed at a position opposite to the recessed portion 22311a when the engaging member 22310 is inserted into the engaged portion 22332.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 176(a), the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is formed on the front side of the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 22300 with the engaging member 22310 interposed therebetween. be done. Therefore, since the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 can be separated from the first opening 301c formed in the bottom wall portion 301, unauthorized objects such as wires or the like can be separated from the first opening 301c. can be prevented from being inserted and the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 being illegally released.

Furthermore, since the first piece 22311 of the engaging member 22310 can be disposed between the bottom wall part 301 and the engaging parts of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, the first piece 22311 formed on the bottom wall part 301 It is possible to prevent wires, wires, etc. that have been illegally inserted through the openings such as the first opening 301c from reaching the engaging portions of the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 in a straight line. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized member (such as a wire or the like) from being inserted through the opening of the bottom wall portion 301 and illegally releasing the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the protrusion 22332a is provided to protrude in the insertion direction of the engagement member 22310 into the internal space of the engaged portion 22332. Therefore, the engaging portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is set on the front side of the fixing member 22320. As a result, when an unauthorized member such as a wire or the like is inserted from the first opening 301c of the bottom wall portion 301, the insertion direction of the unauthorized member reaching the engagement portion between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 is determined. It can be tilted obliquely to the front of the bottom wall portion 301. This can make it difficult for the force in the direction of disengaging the engagement portion between the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320 to be transmitted from the tip of the incorrect member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of an unauthorized member through the first opening 301c of the bottom wall portion 301 and the unauthorized release of the engagement between the engaging member 22310 and the fixing member 22320.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176(b), an engaging member 23310 and a fixing member 23320 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the protrusion 22332a that engages the engaging member 22310 is provided protrudingly in the insertion direction of the engaging member 22310 into the engaged portion 22332, but in the twenty-third embodiment, A protrusion 23332a is provided to protrude in a direction opposite to the insertion direction of the engaged portion 23332 of the engagement member 23310. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 176(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment. Note that the cross-sectional view in FIG. 176(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view in FIG. 176(a). Furthermore, as described above, the 23rd embodiment differs from the 22nd embodiment only in the engagement position of the engagement member 22310 and the fixing member 22320, so that the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 Since the other parts are the same as those of the twenty-second embodiment, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

The rear case 22300 in the 23rd embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 23301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that stands up from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 23301 toward the front. Each wall portion 23301, 302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open. An opening 301a (see FIG. 5), which is rectangular in front view, is formed in the center of the bottom wall 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is made visible.

In addition, the rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment has an engaging member 23310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 23301, and the rear case 23300. It mainly includes a fixing member 23320 that is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) and fixes the board box 100 (main controller 110).

As shown in FIG. 176(b), in the twenty-third embodiment, the protrusion direction of the protrusion 23332a protruding from the engaged portion 23332 as described above is different from that of the protrusion 22332a of the twenty-second embodiment (see FIG. 176(a). ) is set in the opposite direction (arrow L direction), and a bent portion 23332a1 that bends toward the back side (arrow B direction side) is formed at the protruding tip of the protrusion 23332a.

In the engagement member 23310, a rectangular opening 23310b larger than the outer shape of the bent portion 23332a1 is formed at a position facing the bent portion 23332a1. As a result, when the engaging member 23310 is inserted into the internal space of the engaged portion 23332 of the fixing member 23320, the bent portion 23332a1 is inserted inside the opening 23310b, and the engaging member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 are inserted. engaged.

Furthermore, a third opening 23301e is formed in the bottom wall portion 23301 of the rear case 23300 in the twenty-third embodiment at a position facing the fixing member 23320. This third opening 23301e allows the operator to release the engagement between the engagement member 23310 and the fixing member 23320 from the back side of the bottom wall 23301. As a result, the work of removing the fixing member 23320 from the back case 23300 can be simplified.

Next, a rear case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178. In the eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the engagement between the fixing member 18320 and the engagement member 18310 is released when the fixing member 18320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 18301. However, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the fixing member 24320 When removing the engaging member 24310 from the bottom wall portion 24301, the portion of the engaging member 24310 inserted into the fixing member 24320 is cut. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 177(a) is a front view of the back case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and FIG. 177(b) is a sectional view of the back case 24300 taken along the line CLXXVIIb-CLXXVIIb in FIG. 177(a). FIG. 178 is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 24300 taken along the line CLXXVIII-CLXXVIII in FIG. 177(b).

As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the rear case 24300 in the twenty-fourth embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 24301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and a bottom wall portion 24301 that stands upright from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 24301 toward the front. The outer wall portion 302 is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the respective wall portions 24301 and 302. The rear case 24300 also has an engaging member 24310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 24301 and an engagement member 24310 disposed on the back side of the bottom wall 24301. A fixing member 24320 is provided to fix the board box 100 (main controller 110).

The bottom wall portion 24301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 24301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible. In addition, the bottom wall portion 24301 has a first opening 24301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 24320, and a first opening 24301c that is located on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the first opening 24301c and that is located in the front-rear direction (arrow F- An opening (not shown) that opens in the B direction) and into which an insertion section 24362 of an operator 24360 (described later) is inserted.

The engagement member 24310 mainly includes a second piece 24312 formed in a T-shape when viewed from the front, and a first piece 24311 bent from the end of the second piece 24312 and extending in an arc shape. . The second piece 24312 is provided with a through hole 24312d that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a connecting part of two orthogonal extending parts, and the distance from the through hole 24312d to the outside of the extended part of the second piece 24312 is They are set to be approximately the same.

The through hole 24312d is a portion into which an insertion portion 24362 of an operator 24360, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed into a circular shape that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the insertion portion 24362. As a result, when the operator 24360 is rotated, the engagement member 24310 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 24312d.

The first piece 24311 is formed in an arc shape centered on the through hole 24312d, and protrudes from each end of the second piece 24312 in one direction of rotation (left rotation in front view). Furthermore, each first piece 24311 has an engaging portion 24316 that protrudes on both sides in the radial direction centering on the axis of the through hole 24312d at the protruding tip, and a connecting side with the second piece 24312 from the protruding tip surface. A recessed portion 24317 is provided.

The engaging portion 24316 is a portion to be engaged with a fixing member 24320, which will be described later, and the concave portion 24317 elastically deforms the protruding tip portion (the portion where the engaging portion 24316 is formed) of the first piece 24311 to engage the fixing member 24320. It can be engaged with the engaged portion 24332 formed in the. Note that a detailed description of the shapes of the engaging portion 24316 and the recessed portion 24317 will be given later.

The operator 24360 is an operating member that transmits an operation from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301 to the engagement member 24310 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 24301. The operating section 24361 has a cylindrical shape, and an insertion section 24362 protrudes coaxially with the operating section 24361. The operating portion 24361 is formed on the bottom wall portion 24301, and has an outer diameter set to be larger than the opening through which the insertion portion 24362 is inserted. Thereby, the entire operation element 24360 can be prevented from being displaced toward the front side of the bottom wall portion 24301.

The insertion portion 24362 is a portion inserted into the through hole 24312d of the engagement member 24310 as described above, and thereby the rotational force input from the operation portion 24361 can be transmitted to the engagement member 24310.

The fixing member 24320 includes an intervening member 24330 that engages with the above-described engaging member 24310, and a shaft support member 340 that is disposed on the back side of the intervening member 24330.

The intervening member 24330 is formed into a box shape whose front side (arrow F direction side) is open. Furthermore, the intervening member 24330 includes a housing portion 24335 that projects from the front and is formed in a box shape with an open lower side (arrow D direction side). The housing portion 24335 is a portion into which the engaging portion of the engaging member 24310 (the tip portion of the first piece 24311) is inserted, and the open portion on the lower side accommodates the displacement of the first piece 24311 of the engaging member 24310 described above. placed on the trajectory. Thereby, the end of the first piece 24311 of the engagement member 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 by rotating the engagement member 24310.

Further, the housing portion 24335 has an internal space larger than the engagement portion of the engagement member 24310 at one location. Thereby, when the engagement member 24310 is cut as will be described later, the cut portion of the engagement member 24310 can be accommodated in the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335. Note that in this embodiment, the size of the internal space of the accommodating portion 24335 is set to be approximately three times that of the engaging portion of the engaging member 24310 (the tip portion of the first piece 24311). At least three or more engaging members 24310 can be accommodated in the space.

As shown in FIG. 178, the accommodating portion 24335 is opened at the lower side, and a stepped portion 24335a protrudes from the opening portion in a step-like manner. The engaging portion 24316 of is engaged. Thereby, when the engaging member 24310 is rotated, the distal end portion of the first piece 24311 can be inserted into the inside of the accommodating portion 24335, and the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24320 can be engaged with each other.

Further, in this case, the recess depth SH3 (see FIG. 178) of the recess 24317 is the distance from the end of the first piece 24311 accommodated in and engaged with the accommodating portion 24335 to the lower end of the accommodating portion 24335. It is set smaller than the dimension SH4. Therefore, the recessed portion 24317 formed in the engaged first piece 24311 is housed inside the housing portion 24335. This can prevent the end portion of the first piece 24311 from being elastically deformed and the engagement between the engaging member 24310 and the fixing member 24320 being released.

Therefore, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the fixing member 24320 can be removed from the bottom wall part 24301 by cutting the first piece 24311 that is inserted inside the housing part 24335 and protrudes from the housing part 24335. can.

In this case, the distance dimension SH5 (see FIG. 178) from the upper inner edge of the accommodating portion 24335 to the tip of the first piece 24311 is set larger than the distance dimension SH4 described above. As a result, the cut portion of the first piece 24311 can be moved above the accommodating part 24335, and the other first piece 24311 is inserted from the open side of the accommodating part 24335 (the side in the direction of arrow F) to form the stepped part 24335a. can be engaged with.

Therefore, the number of times the fixing member 24320 is removed from the bottom wall portion 24301 is determined based on the number of remaining first pieces 24311 of the engagement member 24310 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the housing portion 24335. be able to. As a result, if the fixing member 24320 is illegally removed from the bottom wall 24301 and the board box 100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 24320 is replaced with an incorrect board, the engaging member 24310 The number of remaining first pieces 24311 or the number of cut first pieces 24311 accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335 allows the operator to recognize that the fixing member 24320 has been removed illegally.

In addition, as described above, the second piece 24312 of the engaging member 24310 is formed in a T-shape when viewed from the front, and by utilizing the region on the side where the first piece 24311 is not formed (the upper side of the T-shape), The first piece 24311 can be inserted into the fixing member 24320 by rotating the engaging member 24310. Further, when the first piece 24311 is cut, the engaging member 24310 can be rotated by using the cut area of the first piece 24311, and the next (other) first piece 24311 is attached to the fixing member 24320. can be inserted. Thereby, the order in which the first pieces 24311 are accommodated in the accommodating portion 24335 can be determined. Therefore, the operator can visually check the position of the uncut first piece 24311 and determine whether the fixing member 24320 has been illegally released. It is possible to prevent workers from overlooking traces of fraud compared to when workers count them.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the decorative member 154 of the general prize winning opening unit 150 is glued to the main body 151, but in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the decorative member 154 is glued to the front side of the base plate 60. be done. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 179(a) and 179(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. Moreover, in FIG. 179(b), a state in which the general winning a prize opening unit 25150 is disassembled from the base plate 60 is illustrated.

Note that the game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 25013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front; The center frame 86 is disposed in an opening formed in the center frame 86. In addition, the game board 25013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and in addition to many nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling the winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 25150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base plate 60.

As shown in FIG. 179, the general winning a prize unit 25150 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 25013 in the twenty-fifth embodiment is connected to the main body part 151 disposed along the front side of the base plate 60. , a first erected portion 152 erected from the end of the main body 151 , and a second erected portion erected from the front of the main body 141 and whose one end is connected to the first erected portion 152 . 153, a decorative member 25154 arranged on the back side of the main body part 151, and a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning holes 63 formed in the main body part 151.

The decorative member 25154 is formed into a plate shape from a light-transmitting material, and is decorated with a pattern or a letter (picture) that is connected to the decorative member 60c disposed on the front side of the base plate 60. Further, the outer edge of the decorative member 25154 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner edge of the recess 151b formed in the main body portion 151.

The decorative member 25154 also includes an adhesive tape 25154a attached to the front surface of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c) at the end of the back surface of the decorative member 25154. Thereby, the decorative member 25154 can be attached and disposed on the base plate 60. Therefore, when placing the decorative member 25154 on the base board 60, the operator can attach the decorative member 25154 to the front of the base board 60 while visually checking the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base board 60. Therefore, the decorative positions of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily aligned. As a result, the position of the decoration between the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is suppressed from shifting, and the player can use the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 as one decoration. It can be easily recognized.

Furthermore, since the decorative member 25154 is attached directly to the front of the base plate 60 (decorative member 60c), the front-rear direction of the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c is more The arrangement in the direction of the arrow FB can be made closer. As a result, when the player views the decorative member 25154 obliquely, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the decorations of the decorative members 25154 and 60c from increasing. As a result, the player can easily see the decorative member 25154 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 as one decoration.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the concave dimension X1 of the concave portion 151b of the main body portion 151 is set smaller than the width dimension X2 of the decorative member 25154 and the adhesive tape 25154a in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow F-B). be done. This prevents the front surface of the decorative member 25154 from coming into contact with the recessed bottom surface 151b2 of the recessed portion 151b when the main body portion 151 is disposed from the front side (arrow F direction side) of the decorative member 25154. can.

Therefore, the back surface portion 151d forming the back surface of the main body portion 151 excluding the recessed portion 151b can be brought into contact with the front surface of the base plate 60, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60. It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering between the back surface portion 151d and the base plate 60 and making it difficult for the decoration of the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 to be visually recognized.

Next, the game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 180. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body part 151 of the general winning opening unit 150, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body part 26151. The inclined surface 26151a is formed to have an arcuate cross section that bulges outward. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 180(a) and 180(b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 180(a) and 180(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. Furthermore, in FIG. 180(a), the game board 26013 is viewed from a higher position than usual (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity). The line of sight is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. 180(b), when the player views the game board 26013 from a normal position (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 26013 in the direction of gravity) The line of sight is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

Note that the game board 26013 in the 26th embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 26013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front; The center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening formed in the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the game board 26013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling the winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 26150 is disposed in the opening portion of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 180, the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 26013 in the twenty-sixth embodiment includes a plate-shaped main body part 26151 along the front side of the base plate 60, and A decorative member 154 is provided on the back side of the main body portion 26151.

The main body portion 26151 is made of a transparent resin material, and allows the player to view decorations such as patterns, letters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side. In addition, the main body part 26151 has an inclined surface 26151a whose end part in a front view is inclined toward the back side and which bulges out in an arcuate cross-section, and a recessed part which is recessed from the back surface of the main body part 26151 toward the front side. 151b.

In the inclined surface 26151a, the inclination angle θ1 of the imaginary line IL1 connecting the connecting point with the plane on the front side of the main body part 26151 and the end on the rear side with respect to the front side of the base plate 60 is set to be smaller than 45 degrees. be done. As a result, the incident angle when light traveling horizontally through the main body 26151 is incident on the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is made larger than when the inclination angle θ1 is set larger than 45 degrees. . Therefore, when light is emitted to the outside of the main body portion 26151, the traveling direction of the light can be easily bent upward. Therefore, when a player views the general winning a prize unit 26150 from a higher position than the normal position with respect to the game board 26013, it is possible to easily view the connecting portion of the decorative members 154, 60c from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the position of the connecting portions of the decorative members 154, 60c in the front and back direction, so that the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 are different from each other. Together, they can be easily recognized as a decoration. Note that in this embodiment, the angle θ1 is set to 40 degrees.

Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 26151a is formed in an arcuate cross-sectional shape that bulges outward, the closer to the center of the main body 26151 (lower side in FIG. 180(a)), the more the main body 26151 is horizontally The angle of incidence when the light traveling to the outside of the main body portion 26151 is incident from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. Therefore, as it goes toward the center of the main body 26151 (lower side in FIG. 180(a)), the angle of incidence of light traveling horizontally through the main body 26151 when it enters the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a becomes larger. Ru.

Therefore, the player can move via the inclined surface 26151a below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180(a)), which passes through the intermediate position between the connection point with the plane on the front side of the main body part 26151 and the end on the back side. When the side decoration is visually recognized, the angle of the line of sight of the player passing through the main body portion 26151 can be easily brought closer to the direction (horizontal direction) perpendicular to the front surface of the base plate 60.

Furthermore, the end of the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b is located on a horizontal line HR1 passing through an intermediate position between the connecting point with the front plane of the main body 26151 and the end on the back side. (See FIG. 180(a)) and is set on the back side of the inclined surface 26151a. As described above, when the player views the decoration below the horizontal line HR1 (see FIG. 180(a)) through the inclined surface 26151a, the angle of the player's line of sight passing through the main body portion 26151 can be easily moved closer to the front surface of the base plate 60 in a direction perpendicular to the front surface (horizontal direction).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 180(a), even when the player visually recognizes the general winning a prize unit 26150 and the base plate 60 on the game board 26013 from a higher position than usual, the base plate 60 can be seen through the inclined surface 26151a. The decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180(b), when the player views the general winning slot unit 26150 and the base plate 60 on the game board 26013 from the normal height, the bulging shape of the inclined surface 26151a causes the main body Since the incident angle when the light traveling horizontally through the section 26151 enters the outside of the main body section 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a approximates a right angle, the light emitted to the outside of the main body section 26151 can be made difficult to refract. Therefore, the direction of the player's line of sight is prevented from being bent when passing through the inclined surface 26151a, and the positional deviation in the front-rear direction between the decorative member 154 of the general prize winning port unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is prevented. can be made difficult for players to recognize. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 26150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.

Next, with reference to FIG. 181, a game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body part 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 has been described, but in the 27th embodiment, the linear inclined surface 151a is formed at the end of the main body part 26151. The inclined surface 27151a is formed to have an arcuate cross section that is recessed inside the main body portion 27151. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 181(a) and 181(b) are cross-sectional views of a game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. Note that FIGS. 181(a) and 181(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. Furthermore, in FIG. 181(a), the game board 27013 is viewed from a higher position than usual (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the upper end of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in the direction of gravity). The line of sight is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. 181(b), the player views the game board 27013 from a normal position (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the approximately midpoint position of the game board 27013 in the direction of gravity). The line of sight is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

Note that the game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 27013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front; The center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening formed in the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the game board 27013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling the winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, a general winning a prize opening unit 27150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 181, the general winning a prize opening unit 27150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 27013 in the twenty-seventh embodiment includes a plate-shaped main body part 27151 along the front side of the base plate 60; A decorative member 154 is provided on the back side of the main body portion 27151.

The main body portion 27151 is made of a transparent resin material, and allows the player to view decorations such as patterns, letters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side. In addition, the main body part 27151 has an inclined surface 27151a whose end part in a front view is inclined toward the back side, and which has an arcuate cross section and which is recessed toward the inside of the main body part 27151, and a sloped surface 27151a that extends from the back side of the main body part 27151 to the front side. It is formed mainly with a recessed portion 151b that is recessed toward the surface.

In the inclined surface 27151a, the inclination angle θ2 of the imaginary line IL2 connecting the connecting point with the plane on the front side of the main body part 27151 and the end on the rear side with respect to the front side of the base plate 60 is set to be larger than 45 degrees. be done. Thereby, the outward protrusion distance of the inclined surface 2751a can be reduced, and the external shape of the main body portion 27151 can be prevented from increasing.

Furthermore, as described above, since the inclined surface 27151a is recessed inside the main body portion 27151 and has an arcuate cross section, the player can visually recognize each decorative member 60c, 154 through the inclined surface 27151a. In this case, the recessed shape can widen the area in which the decorations of each decorative member 60c, 154 can be viewed through the inclined surface 27151a. That is, the arc-shaped cross section recessed toward the inside of the main body portion 27151 refracts the light incident on the inclined surface 27151a from each decorative member 60c, 154, and focuses the light toward the player's viewpoint. I can do it. As a result, the patterns and characters (pictures) visible through the inclined surface 27151a can be made smaller, making it difficult for the player to understand the connections between the decorative members 60c and 154. As a result, the displacement of each decorative member 60c, 154 can be made difficult for the player to notice, and the player's interest can be prevented from being lost.

Furthermore, the end of the decorative member 154 disposed inside the recess 151b is located on a horizontal line HR2 passing through an intermediate position between the connecting point with the front plane of the main body 27151 and the end on the back side. It is set higher than , and is set on the back side of the inclined surface 27151a.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 181(a), when the player visually recognizes the general winning a prize unit 27150 and the base plate 60 on the game board 26013 from a higher position than usual, the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 The angle of incidence when light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body 26151 on the front side of the connecting portion is incident on the outside of the main body 26151 from the inclined surface 26151a is increased. Therefore, light traveling in the horizontal direction through the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the decorative member 154 is easily refracted toward the player's viewpoint, so that the player can move from the normal position with respect to the game board 27013. When the general winning a prize opening unit 27150 is viewed from a high position, the connecting portion of the decorative members 154, 60c can be easily viewed from the front side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the difference in the position of the connecting portions of the decorative members 154, 60c in the front and rear direction, so that the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 are different from each other. Together, they can be easily recognized as a decoration.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 181(b), when the player views the general winning slot unit 27150 and the base plate 60 on the game board 27013 from the normal height, the concave shape of the inclined surface 27151a allows the player to see the decoration. When light traveling horizontally through the main body 27151 on the front side of the connecting portion with the member 154 enters the outside of the main body 27151 from the inclined surface 27151a, the incident angle approximates a right angle, so the light is emitted to the outside of the main body 27151. This makes it difficult for the light to be refracted. Therefore, the direction of the player's line of sight is suppressed from being bent when passing through the inclined surface 27151a, and the positional deviation in the front-rear direction between the decorative member 154 of the general winning opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 is prevented. can be made difficult for players to recognize. As a result, the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 27150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 can be easily recognized as one decoration.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182(a), a game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the inner surface of the end of the recess 151b recessed in the main body 151 of the general winning opening unit 150 is parallel to the thickness direction of the main body 151. The inner surface of the end of the recess 28151b in the embodiment is inclined inward toward the recessed bottom surface 151b2. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182(a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. Note that FIG. 182(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. In addition, in FIG. 182(a), the line of sight when the player views the game board 28013 from a normal position (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 28013 in the direction of gravity) is indicated by a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

Note that the game board 28013 in the 28th embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 28013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front; The center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening formed in the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the game board 28013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling the winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 28150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182(a), the general winning a prize opening unit 28150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 28013 in the twenty-eighth embodiment has a plate-shaped main body part 28151 along the front side of the base plate 60. and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 28151.

The main body portion 28151 is made of a transparent resin material, and allows the player to view decorations such as patterns, letters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side. Further, the main body portion 28151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back side, and a recessed portion 28151b recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 28151 toward the front side.

As described above, the inner surface 28151b3 of the recessed portion 28151b extends outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side) toward the end side of the main body portion 28151. It is formed sloping towards the top. In this case, the inclination angle θ3 of the inner surface 28151b3 in the cross section of the recessed portion 28151b with respect to the front of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 182(a)) is different from the inclination angle θ4 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body portion 151 with respect to the base plate 60 (see FIG. (see (a)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182(a), when a player visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the inclined surface 28151a of the main body part 28151, it bends as it passes through the main body part 28151 and is visually recognized by the player. The decorative position of the virtual image can be brought closer to the decorative position of the real image when the decorative member 60c is visually recognized without passing through the main body portion 28151. That is, the position of the decorative member 60c, which is refracted and visually recognized by the inclined surface 28151a of the main body portion 28151 and the inner surface 28151b3 of the recessed portion, can be positioned on the extension line of the player's line of sight. As a result, when the player views the decorative member 60c through the main body portion 28151, it is possible to suppress the positional shift of the decoration caused by the refraction of light, thereby preventing the player's interest from being lost.

Next, with reference to FIG. 182(b), a game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the inclination angle θ3 of the inner surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recess 29151b with respect to the front of the base plate 60 is set smaller than the inclination angle θ4 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the inclination angle θ5 of the inner surface 29151b3 with respect to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the cross section of the recessed portion 29151b is set to be larger than the inclination angle θ6 of the inclined surface 151a with respect to the base plate 60. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment. Note that FIG. 182(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. In addition, in FIG. 182(b), the line of sight when the player views the game board 29013 from a normal position (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 29013 in the direction of gravity) is indicated by a two-dot chain line. Illustrated.

Note that, like the game board 13 in the first embodiment, the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front; The center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening formed in the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the game board 29013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling the winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the 29th embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 29150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 182(b), the general winning opening unit 29150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 29013 in the twenty-ninth embodiment has a plate-shaped main body part 29151 along the front side of the base plate 60. and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 29151.

The main body part 29151 is made of a transparent resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize the decorations such as patterns, letters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side. Further, the main body portion 29151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back side, and a recessed portion 29151b recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 29151 toward the front side.

As described above, the inner surface 29151b3 of the recessed portion 29151b extends outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side) toward the end side of the main body portion 29151. It is formed sloping towards the top. In this case, the inclination angle θ5 of the inner surface 29151b3 in the cross section of the recessed portion 29151b with respect to the front of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 182(b)) is different from the inclination angle θ6 of the inclined surface 151a of the main body portion 151 with respect to the base plate 60 (see FIG. (see (b)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 182(b), when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 60c through the inclined surface 151a of the main body portion 29151, the player can see the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 through the inclined surface 151a. The light irradiated to the viewpoint can be light irradiated in a direction substantially perpendicular to the slope of the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b. Therefore, when the light enters the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b from the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154, it is possible to suppress the light from being refracted. As a result, when the light enters the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b, the light is refracted, so that the connecting portion of the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 can be suppressed from being viewed from above in the direction of gravity, and the decorative member 60c And the decorative member 154 can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

Furthermore, since a predetermined gap is provided between the inner surface 29151b3 of the recess 29151b and the end of the decorative member 154, the dimensional error that occurs when the decorative member 154 is formed can be absorbed by the gap.

Next, with reference to FIG. 183(a), the general winning a prize opening unit 30150 in the 30th embodiment will be explained. In the twenty-eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the inner surface 28151b3 of the recess 28151b is formed with an inclination, but in the thirtieth embodiment, the inner surface 30151b3 of the recess 30151b bulges inside the recess 28151b and has a circular cross section. It is curved into an arc. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Note that the game board 30013 in the 30th embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 30013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a substantially rectangular plate member when viewed from the front; The center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening formed in the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the game board 30013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling the winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the 30th embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 30150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

FIG. 183(a) is a sectional view of the general winning a prize opening unit 30150 in the 30th embodiment. Note that FIG. 183(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. In addition, in FIG. 183(a), when the player views the game board 30013 from a normal position (for example, from a viewpoint at the same height as the substantially middle position of the game board 30013 in the direction of gravity), the line of sight is the two-dot chain line. Illustrated in

As shown in FIG. 183(a), the general winning opening unit 30150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 30013 in the 30th embodiment has a plate-shaped main body part 30151 along the front side of the base plate 60. and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 30151.

The main body portion 30151 is made of a transparent resin material, and allows the player to view decorations such as patterns, letters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side. Further, the main body portion 30151 mainly includes an inclined surface 151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back side, and a recessed portion 30151b recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 30151 toward the front side.

The inner surface 30151b3 of the recessed portion 30151b is formed to be inclined outward from the recessed bottom surface 151b2 side toward the recessed opening side (from the arrow F direction side to the arrow B direction side) toward the end of the main body portion 30151. At the same time, the recess 30151b bulges inward to have an arcuate cross section. Thereby, the line of sight of the player viewing the decorative member 60c through the recessed portion 30151b can be easily directed in the direction (horizontal direction) perpendicular to the decorative surface of the decorative member 60c. As a result, when the decoration of the game board 30013 is visually recognized through the concave portion 30151b, the end of the decorative member 154 is suppressed from being seen, and the player can see the decorative member 60c and the decorative member 154 as one decoration. It can be easily recognized.

Next, the general winning a prize unit 31150 in the 31st embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 183(b). In the first embodiment, the slope 151a is formed as a linear surface in cross section, but the slope 31151a in the 31st embodiment includes a plurality of recesses 31151a1. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 183(b) is a sectional view of the general winning a prize opening unit 31150 in the 31st embodiment. Note that FIG. 183(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 14. Further, the game board 31013 in the 31st embodiment is similar to the game board 13 in the first embodiment, and the game board 31013 includes a base plate 60 formed from a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front; The center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided in the opening formed in the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). In addition, the game board 31013 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and in addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills for guiding balls, rails 76 and 77, a general prize opening 63, and a first It is constructed by assembling the winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display unit 80, etc. (see FIG. 2), and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It can be attached to the back side of the Furthermore, in the 31st embodiment, a general winning a prize unit 31150 is arranged in the opening part of the second opening 60b (see FIG. 11) of the base 60.

As shown in FIG. 183(b), the general winning a prize opening unit 31150 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 of the game board 31013 in the 31st embodiment has a plate-shaped main body part 31151 along the front side of the base plate 60. and a decorative member 154 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 31151.

The main body portion 31151 is made of a transparent resin material, and allows the player to view decorations such as patterns, letters, etc. (pictures) of the decorative member 154 disposed on the back side. Further, the main body portion 31151 mainly includes an inclined surface 31151a whose end portion is inclined toward the back side, and a recessed portion 151b recessed from the back surface of the main body portion 31151 toward the front side.

The inclined surface 31151a includes a plurality of recessed portions 31151a1 recessed in a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction. The plurality of recessed portions 31151a1 are arranged in parallel in the direction of inclination of the inclined surface 31151a, and extend along the end of the main body portion 31151 when viewed from the front. Thereby, it is possible to diffusely reflect the light that enters the inside of the main body 31151 and exits from the end (slanted surface 31151a) of the main body 31151. Therefore, the decoration visible through the inclined surface 31151a can be visible to the player in a blurred state.

Here, since the end portion of the decorative member 154 disposed on the main body portion 31151 is disposed on the back side of the inclined surface 31151a as in the first embodiment, the decoration of the decorative member 154 and the decoration of the decorative member 60c are The connected parts can be visually recognized by the player in a blurred state. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the connection of the decorative members, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the decoration of the decorative member 60c and the decoration of the decorative member 154 as one decoration.

<Adjustment means for changing the flow direction by adjusting the distance between opposing faces>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186, the special prize winning device 32550 in the 32nd embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the shim member SI is sandwiched between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570 to adjust the opposing distance between the first path member 13560 and the second path member 13570. As described above, in the 32nd embodiment, a case will be described in which the facing distance between the first path member 32560 and the second path member 32570 is adjusted by the fastening position of the screw. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the special prize winning device 32550 in the 32nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185. FIG. 184 is an exploded perspective front view of the special prize winning device 32550 in the 32nd embodiment. 185(a) is a front view of the special winning device 32550, FIG. 185(b) is a top view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG. 185(c) is CLXXXVc-CLXXXVc of FIG. 185(a). It is a sectional view of the special prize winning device 32550 along the line.

As shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, the special prize winning device 32550 in the 32nd embodiment includes a first path member 32560 disposed on the front side and a first path member 32560 disposed on the back side of the first path member 32560. 2-path member 32570.

The first path member 32560 is formed from a non-light transmitting material. In addition, the first path member 32560 includes a front plate 32564 formed in a plate shape and arranged on the front side of the gaming area, and a front plate 32564 that protrudes from the left and right ends of the front plate 32564 to the back side (base plate 60 side). and a first wall portion 32565.

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between opposing second path members 32570, which will be described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the special prize winning device 33550 can be made invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the downward direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

The first wall portion 32565 is a portion that is connected (fastened) with the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c that penetrates in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction) and the two first wall portions 32565 are opposed to each other. A plurality of protrusions 32565d on one side are arranged in parallel on the surface and protrude in a triangular cross-section, and two protrusions 32565d are provided on the opposite surface of the second wall 32566 from both upper and lower ends of the first wall 32565. It mainly includes an upright portion 32565e.

The through hole 32565c is a through hole through which a screw for fastening the first path member 32560 to the second path member 32570 is inserted, and is formed at one location in each first wall portion 32565.

The one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c of a second path member 32570, which will be described later, to position the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, and is a portion in the front-rear direction (arrow F -B direction) and extend in the vertical direction (arrow UD).

The upright portion 32565e is a portion that covers the one side protrusion 32565d to make the one side protrusion 32565d invisible to the player, and is set to be larger than the protrusion distance of the one side protrusion 32565d. This suppresses the position where the one-side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other-side recess 32573c from being visually recognized, and prevents the player from recognizing the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570. It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from deciding that they are at a disadvantage and not playing the pachinko machine 10.

The second path member 32570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 32571 that faces the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560, and a base plate 32571 that extends from the left and right (arrow LR direction) ends of the base plate 32571 to the first path member 32560. A fourth wall portion 32573 protruding from the front plate 32564 side is provided.

The base plate 32571 is a member that forms a throwing path for the game ball in the gap between the first path member 32560 and the front plate 32564, and the base plate 32571 is vertically moved in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) when viewed from the front. The size is made smaller than the front plate 32564. This can prevent the base plate 32571 from being viewed from the player side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the opposing distance between the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and determining whether the game is advantageous or disadvantageous.

Further, the base plate 32571 includes a fourth convex portion 32571b and a fifth convex portion 32571c that protrude toward the first path member 32560, and is located below the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c, and the front plate 32564 A sixth convex portion 32571d protruding from the side.

The fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c are protrusions for guiding the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 32550, and are from the outside in the left and right direction of the base plate 32571 (outside in the direction of arrows LR) to the base. It is formed to be inclined downward toward the center of the plate 32571. As a result, the game ball that flows down between the opposing sides of the base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and collides with the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c is prevented from colliding with the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c. It can be made easier to flow down in the direction of inclination.

The sixth convex portion 32571d is formed on the lower side of the fourth convex portion 32571b and the fifth convex portion 32571c described above, and is also formed at approximately the center position of the base plate 32571 in the left-right direction. Further, the sixth convex portion 32571d extends in the direction of gravity. As a result, game balls that flow down between the opposing base plate 32571 and the front plate 32564 and are guided to the fourth convex portion 32571b or the fifth convex portion 32571c can be distributed to either the left or right side of the sixth convex portion 32571d. .

The two opposing fourth wall portions 32573 have a plurality of other side recesses 32573c recessed toward the inner side in the opposing direction on the outer side surface in the opposing direction, and adjustment holes 32573b penetrating in the opposing direction. The housing section 32573d is formed inside the fourth wall section 32573 in the opposing direction and surrounds the adjustment hole 32573b.

A plurality of the other side recesses 32573c are arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) of the fourth wall 32573, and extend in the direction of gravity. Further, the other side concave portion 32573c is recessed and formed to have a substantially triangular cross section, and the cross sectional shape is set to be approximately the same as the one side protrusion 32565d. Thereby, the first path member 32560 can be positioned by inserting the protrusion 32565d on one side into the recess 32573c on the other side.

The adjustment hole 32573b is a portion through which the tip of the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 described above is inserted into the accommodation portion 32573d side. Further, the adjustment hole 32573b is formed into an elongated hole that is long in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), thereby allowing movement of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570.

The accommodating portion 32573d has a U-shaped cross section when viewed from the front, and both ends thereof are connected to the fourth wall portion 32573. Further, the housing portion 32573d extends from the front of the base plate 32571 to the front end of the fourth wall portion 32573. Thereby, the screw plate 32590 into which the screws inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b are screwed can be accommodated in the space surrounded by the housing portion 32573d.

The screw plywood board 32590 is set to a size that allows it to be inserted into the space formed by the accommodating part 32573d, and the width dimension in the front-back direction (arrow FB direction) is the same as the front-back dimension ( This is set smaller than the protruding dimension of the fourth wall portion 32573 toward the front side. Thereby, the screw plywood 32590 can be inserted inside the accommodating portion 32573d and can be moved in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the screw plate 32590 has a screw hole 32591 into which the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b is screwed, and two screw holes from both ends of the screw hole 32591 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). A guide protrusion 32592 is provided that protrudes toward the opposing surface of the fourth wall portion 32573.

The screw holes 32591 are formed in two places, and are formed side by side in the vertical direction. Further, the two screw holes 32591 are formed at positions where the distance of one screw hole 32591 from the upper end is the same as the distance of the other screw hole 32591 from the lower end. Thereby, when the screw groove of one of the screw holes 32591 is crushed, the screw can be fastened using the other screw hole 32591 by turning the screw plate 32590 upside down.

The guide protrusion 32592 projects a predetermined amount outwardly in the left-right direction from both front and rear end portions, and includes an inclined surface that slopes toward the screw hole 32591 side. Thereby, the tip of the screw inserted through the through hole 32565c and the adjustment hole 32573b can be guided to the screw hole 32591. In particular, in this embodiment, if the screw hole 32591 is damaged, a new screw hole 32591 can be used by turning it upside down. In this case, the position of the screw hole 32591 with respect to the tip of the screw is likely to be misaligned, so a configuration in which the tip of the screw is guided to the screw hole 32591 as in this embodiment is particularly effective.

The method of adjusting the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special prize winning device 32550 configured as described above is as follows: First, the first path member 32560 is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and is screwed into the screw plate 32590. Loosen the screws that fit together. This allows the first path member 32560 to move relative to the second path member 32570.

Next, by elastically deforming the first wall portion 32565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564, one side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 After pulling it out from the other side recess 32573c, the position in the front and back direction is adjusted, and at the adjusted position, the elastic deformation of the first wall part 32655 is restored, and the one side protrusion 32565d is inserted into the other side recess 32573c again. Thereby, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed (positioned) with respect to the second path member 32570.

Finally, the adjustment of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is completed by re-tightening the screw inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 32560 and screwed into the screw plate 32590. .

According to this, as described above, the one side protrusion 32565d and the other side recess 32573c are formed in corresponding shapes, so by tightening the screw after temporarily fixing, the one side protrusion 32565d can be moved to the other side. It can be pushed into the recess 32573c. Therefore, each position where the one-side protrusion 32565d can be inserted into the other-side recess 32573c can be adjusted so that it is always at the same position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of variations in the flow of game balls depending on the operator who makes the adjustment, and it is possible to simplify the adjustment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, position adjustment of the second path member 32570 of the first path member 32560 will be described. FIG. 186(a) is a sectional view of the special winning device 32550, and FIG. 186(b) is a sectional view of the special winning device 32550 along the line CLXXXVIb-CLXXXVIb in FIG. 186(a).

As shown in FIG. 186, when the first path member 32560 on the left side (arrow L direction side) is pulled out to the front side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the second path member 32570, as shown in FIG. In addition, the distance between the left front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 is made wider than that on the right side. In this case, the game ball flowing down between the opposing sides of the front plate 32564 and the base board 32571 is less likely to collide with the fourth convex portion 32571b on the left side, so that the game ball can flow down between the opposing sides on the left side more easily. . Thereby, the game balls flowing down between the opposing front plate 32564 and the base plate 32571 can be easily discharged from the lower left side.

Next, the special prize winning device 33550 in the 33rd embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 187. In the above 32nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the position of the second path member 32570 with respect to the second path member 32570 is adjusted in a state where the first wall portion 32565 of the first path member 32560 is elastically deformed. In this embodiment, the first wall portion 33565 is variably connected to the front plate 32564. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 187(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the first path member 33560 in the 33rd embodiment, and FIG. 187(b) is a sectional view of the special winning device 33550. Note that FIG. 187(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 186(c).

As shown in FIG. 187, the special prize winning device 33550 in the 33rd embodiment includes a first path member 33560 disposed on the front side and a second path member disposed on the back side of the first path member 33560. 32570.

The first path member 33560 includes a front plate 33564 formed in a plate shape and disposed on the front side of the game area, and a first wall portion 33565 pivoted on the left and right ends of the front plate 33564. .

The front plate 32564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between opposing second path members 32570, which will be described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the special prize winning device 33550 can be made invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the downward direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 33550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

The holding portion 33564e is a member that holds a rod RD that pivotally supports a first wall portion 33565, which will be described later, and is set to a size that allows the rod RD to be inserted into an annular inner portion. Further, the holding portions 33564e are formed at two locations separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axes of the annular portions of the holding portions 33564e are coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, of the two holding parts 33564e, the holding part 33564e formed on the lower side is formed at the lower end of the front plate 33564, and the lower end side is closed. Thereby, when the rod RD is inserted into the inside of the holding part 33564e from above the holding part 33564e, it is possible to suppress the rod RD from falling off (coming out) from the lower end of the holding part 33564e.

The first wall portion 33565 is a portion that is connected (fastened) with the second path member 32570, and has a through hole 32565c that penetrates in a circular shape in the left-right direction (plate thickness direction), and two portions of the first wall portion 32565. A plurality of side protrusions 32565d are arranged side by side on opposing surfaces and protrude in a triangular cross-section, and second wall parts 32566 are located two from both ends of the upper and lower ends (direction of arrows UD) of the first wall part 32565. It mainly includes an upright portion 32565e erected on the opposing surface side and a pivoted support 33565f protruding from the front plate 33564 side with an annular cross section.

The shafted support 33565f is a portion into which the rod RD that is inserted into the holding portion 33564e of the front plate 33564 described above is inserted, and the inner portion formed in an annular shape is set to a size that allows insertion of the rod RD. . Further, the pivoted supports 33565f are formed at two locations separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the axes of the annular portions of these supported supports 33565f are coaxial in the vertical direction. Further, between the two shafted supports 33565f, a holding portion 33564e formed above of the above-mentioned holding portions 33564e is disposed.

Thereby, the connection between the front plate 33564 and the first wall portion 33565 is achieved by arranging the holding portion 33564e and the pivoted support portion 33565f on the same axis, and from the upper side inside the holding portion 33564e and the supported support portion 33565f. By inserting the rod RD, the first wall portion 33565 is rotatably disposed on the front plate 33564.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 187(b), when the front plate 33564 of the first route member 33560 is disposed non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second route member 32570, the front plate 33564 On the other hand, the angle of the first wall portion 33565 can be changed and arranged.

That is, in the above-mentioned 32nd embodiment, when the front plate 32564 of the first path member 32560 is disposed non-parallel to the base plate 32571 of the second path member 32570, the first wall portion It is necessary to hold 33565 in an elastically deformed state. Further, when adjusting the position of the first path member 32560 with respect to the second path member 32570, the first wall portion 32565 is elastically deformed outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 32564, and the position of the second path member 32570 is adjusted. It is necessary to pull out the one side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 32560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c from the other side recess 32573c. Therefore, there was a possibility that the connecting portion between the front plate 32564 and the first wall portion 32565 would be damaged.

On the other hand, in the 33rd embodiment, since the first wall portion 33565 can be rotated with respect to the front plate 33564, there is no need to elastically deform the first path member 33560, and the front plate 33564 and the first wall Damage to the connecting portion with the portion 33565 can be suppressed.

The method of adjusting the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 of the special prize winning device 33550 configured as described above is as follows: First, the first path member 33560 is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560 and is screwed into the screw plate 32590. Loosen the screws that fit together. This allows the first path member 33560 to move relative to the second path member 32570.

Next, by rotating the first wall portion 33565 outward in the left-right direction with respect to the front plate 33564, the one side protrusion 32565d of the first path member 33560 inserted into the other side recess 32573c of the second path member 32570 is rotated. After being pulled out from the other side recess 32573c, the position in the front and rear direction is adjusted, and at the adjusted position, the rotation of the first wall 33565 is returned to insert the one side protrusion 32565d into the other side recess 32573c again. Thereby, the first path member 32560 can be temporarily fixed to the second path member 32570.

Finally, the adjustment of the first path member 33560 with respect to the second path member 32570 is completed by retightening the screw that is inserted into the through hole 32565c of the first path member 33560 and is screwed into the screw plate 32590. .

Next, the special prize winning device 34550 in the 34th embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 188 to 190. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, a case was explained in which the direction in which the game ball flows is adjusted by adjusting the facing interval between the plates before and after the special winning device 13550. However, in the thirty-fourth embodiment, the direction in which the game ball flows down is adjusted. By changing the position of the protrusion that protrudes toward the player, the direction in which the game ball flows can be adjusted. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the overall configuration of the special prize winning device 34550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 188 and 189. FIG. 188(a) is a front view of the game board 34013 in the 34th embodiment, and FIG. 188(b) is a sectional view of the game board 34013 taken along the line CLXXXVIIIb-CLXXXVIIIb in FIG. 188(a). FIG. 189 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 34013.

As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, the special winning device 34550 in the 34th embodiment is arranged above the first winning hole 64 provided on the game board 34013. In addition, the special winning device 34550 is arranged so that the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 34560 arranged on the front side is arranged in the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front. .

Further, the special winning device 34550 and the first winning hole 64 are arranged at positions separated by a diameter of the game ball in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Thereby, the game ball ejected from the special winning device 34550 can be visually recognized by the player.

The special winning device 34550 includes a first route member 34560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a second route member disposed on the back side of the first route member 34560 (arrow B direction side). 34570, and a fixture 34553 that is screwed onto the back side of the second path member 34570.

The first path member 34560 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between opposing second path members 34570, which will be described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the special prize winning device 34550 can be made invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the downward direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 34550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

The first path member 34560 is formed into a plate shape, and includes a front plate 34564 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the gaming area, and a front plate 34564 from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564 to the rear side (arrow A first wall portion 34565 erected on the B direction side).

The front plate 34564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of the downward flow path of the game ball formed between the opposite sides of the second path member 32570, which will be described later. The outer shape is also large when viewed from the front. Thereby, the second path member 34570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 34560 can be made difficult to see on the front plate 34564. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the second path member 34570 from being visible from the player side. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 34570 is changed, the change can be prevented from being recognized by the player.

The first wall portion 34565 is a portion fastened to the base plate 34060 of the game board 13, and is formed to have a substantially L-shaped cross section. The vertical dimension of the first wall portion 34565 on the back side is such that the opposing dimension X3 (see FIG. 188(b)) between the front plate 34564 and the fourth convex portion 34571b of the base plate 34571 (described later) is the diameter of the game ball. is set to a value slightly larger than .

In addition, the first wall portion 34565 has a bent portion 34565g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 34060 from the upright tip, and a through hole 34565g1 that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion 34565g. Ru. The through hole 34565g1 is a hole into which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 34560 can be fastened to the base plate 34060 by screwing the screw inserted into the through hole 34565g1 into the base plate 34060.

The second path member 34570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 34571 that faces the front plate 34564 of the first path member 34560, and a support portion 34579 that projects from the back side of the base plate 34571 in a cylindrical shape.

The base plate 34571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in the gap between the first path member 34560 and the front plate 34564, and is formed at a position spaced apart from the front plate 34564 by a predetermined distance. Furthermore, the base plate 34571 includes a fourth convex portion 34571b that protrudes toward the front plate 34564 side. Thereby, the direction in which the game ball flowing down between the opposing base plate 34571 and the front plate 34564 collides with the fourth convex portion 34571b can be changed.

The support portion 34579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 34570, and a cylindrical shaft is formed at a position coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571 (at the center of the base plate 34571). Further, a circular through hole 34060d is opened in the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013 at a position corresponding to the support part 34579, and the support part 34579 is inserted inside the through hole 34060d. Thereby, the second path member 34570 is pivotally supported by the base plate 34060.

The support portion 34579 has a fastening hole 34579a recessed at its protruding tip. The fastening hole 34579a is recessed coaxially with the axis of the support portion 34579, and has an internal thread machined on its inner peripheral surface. Thereby, the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 inserted into the through hole 34060d from the back side of the base plate 34060 can be screwed into the fastening hole 34579a.

The fixture 34553 is a fastening member for fastening the second path member 34570 described above to the base plate 34060 of the game board 34013, and includes an operating portion 34553a formed in a cylindrical shape and a projection on the front side of the operating portion 34553a. A threaded portion 34553b is provided.

The operating portion 34553a is a portion held by a worker who arranges the second path member 34570 on the base plate 34060, and is formed to have a larger external shape than the through hole 34060d formed in the base plate 34060. Further, the operating portion 34553a is set to have an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060.

As a result, when the screw portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a and the second path member 34570 is disposed on the base plate 34060, the fixture 34553 is inserted into the base plate 34060 through the through hole 34060d. It can prevent it from slipping out to the front side.

The threaded portion 34553b is formed into a cylindrical shape coaxial with the axis of the operating portion 34553a, and has a male thread formed on its outer peripheral surface. As described above, the threaded portion 34553b is a portion that is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570, is set to have an outer diameter smaller than the through hole 34060d of the base plate 34060, and is inserted through the through hole 34060d. and is screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570.

According to the special winning device 34550 configured as described above, when changing the ejection position of the game balls ejected from the special winning device 34550, the operator can 1. Insert your hand (arm) from the front side (direction of arrow F) of the game board 13 through the opening 60a (center frame 86) into the back side (direction of arrow B) of the base plate 34060, and insert the fixing tool 34553. access the operating section 34553a.

Next, the operating portion 34553a is rotated to loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed into the fastening hole 34579a of the second path member 34570. Thereby, the second path member 34570 is made rotatable about the support portion 34579, and the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b of the second path member 34570. When the position of the fourth convex part 34571b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 34550 collides with the fourth convex part 34571b is changed, so the game ball discharged from the special winning device 34550 The discharge position can be changed.

In this case, as described above, the base plate 34571 of the second path member 34570 is formed into a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the support portion 34579 is formed coaxially with the axis of the base plate 34571, so that the second path member 34570 cannot be rotated. In this case, it is possible to suppress changes in the arrangement of the second path member 34570 with respect to the base plate 34060 when viewed from the front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the second path member 34570 has been rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from deciding that they are at a disadvantage and not playing the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, a change in the discharge position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b (second path member 34570) is changed will be described. 190(a) to 190(d) are cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 34010 taken along the CXC-CXC line in FIG. 188.

As shown in FIG. 190, the fourth convex portion 34571b has a substantially V-shaped protrusion when viewed from the front. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 190(a), when the bent side of the V-shape is placed on the lower side, the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are thrown to the center part along the slope of the V-shape. It's easy to do. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for game balls to flow into the winning hole 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 190(b), when the bent side of the V-shape is placed on the upper side, the game balls flowing from above the special winning device 34550 are directed to both left and right ends along the slope of the V-shape. Makes it easier to throw the ball. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for game balls to flow into the winning hole 64 arranged below the special winning device 34550.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 190(c) and 190(b), when the bent side of the V-shape is placed at either the left or right end, the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 34550 are To easily throw a game ball along the slope of the upper side of the V, and to throw a game ball to the lower side of the V without colliding with the upper side of the V, along the slope of the lower side of the V. I can do it. Therefore, the direction in which the game ball is thrown can be changed by the difference in the areas where the game ball collides between the upper side of the V and the lower side of the V.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, it is also possible to arrange the bent portion of the fourth convex portion 34571b at a position other than the positions shown in FIGS. 190(a) to 190(d). For example, if the second path member 34570 is rotated 10 degrees to the right when viewed from the front from the position shown in FIG. The game ball can be easily ejected from a position slightly shifted to the left (in the direction of arrow L) from the upper side of the winning hole 64 disposed below the special winning device 34550.

Next, the special prize winning device 35550 in the 35th embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 191 to 193. In the above 34th embodiment, a case has been described in which the second path member 34570 is rotated to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b, but in the 35th embodiment, the second path member 35570 is slid to change the position of the fourth convex portion 34571b. The position of the portion 35571b is changed. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the special prize winning device 35550 in the 35th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 and 192. FIG. 191(a) is a front view of the game board 35013 in the thirty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. 191(b) is a sectional view of the game board 35013 taken along the line CXCIb-CXCIb in FIG. 191(a). FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the special prize winning device 35550.

As shown in FIGS. 191 and 192, the special winning device 35550 in the 35th embodiment is arranged above the first winning opening 64 (in the direction of arrow U) provided on the game board 35013. In addition, in the special winning device 35550, the center line in the left-right direction of the first path member 35560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) is the same straight line as the center line in the left-right direction of the first winning opening 64 when viewed from the front. It is arranged in a shape.

Further, the special winning device 35550 and the first winning hole 64 are arranged at positions separated by a diameter of the game ball in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Thereby, the game ball ejected from the special winning device 35550 can be visually recognized by the player.

The special winning device 34550 includes a first route member 35560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a second route member disposed on the back side of the first route member 35560 (arrow B direction side). 35570, and a fixture 34553 that is screwed onto the back side of the second path member 35570.

The first path member 35560 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side of a falling path of a game ball formed between opposing sides of a second path member 35570, which will be described later, and is formed from a non-light-transmitting material. Thereby, it is possible to make the downward direction of the game ball inside the special prize winning device 35550 invisible to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the downward direction of the game ball inside the special winning device 35550, and to prevent the player from quitting the game.

The first path member 35560 is formed in a plate shape and includes a front plate 34564 disposed on the front side of the game area, and a front plate 34564 that stands from the left and right ends of the front plate 34564 to the back side (arrow B direction side). A first wall portion 35565 provided therein.

The front plate 35564 is a plate member that becomes a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the falling path of the game ball formed between the opposite sides of the second path member 35570, which will be described later. The outer shape of the base plate 35570 in front view is larger than that of the base plate 35571 of the base plate 35570. Thereby, the second path member 35570 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first path member 35560 can be made difficult to see on the front plate 35564. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the second path member 35570 from being visible from the player side. Therefore, when the position of the second path member 35570 is changed, the change can be prevented from being recognized by the player.

The first wall portion 35565 is a portion fastened to the base plate 60 of the game board 35013, and the vertical dimension of the first wall portion 34565, which is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section, on the back side is the same as that of the front plate 35564. A dimension X4 (see FIG. 191(b)) between the base plate 35571 and the fourth convex portion 35571b, which will be described later, is set to a value slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball.

In addition, the first wall portion 35565 has a bent portion 35565g that is bent in a direction parallel to the front surface of the base plate 60 from the erected tip, and penetrates the bent portion 35565g in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). A through hole 35565g1 and a recessed portion 35565g2 recessed from the back surface of the bent portion 35565g toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) are formed.

The through hole 35565g1 is a hole into which a screw is inserted, and the first path member 35560 can be fastened to the base plate 60 by screwing the screw inserted into the through hole 35565g1 into the base plate 60.

The recessed portion 35565g2 is a portion that accommodates both left and right ends (arrow LR direction side) of a base plate 35571 of a second path member 35570, which will be described later, inside, and is recessed from the base end of the bent portion 35565g. , is recessed in the vertical center of the bent portion 35565g. Thereby, when both left and right ends of the base plate 35571 are accommodated inside the recessed portion 35565g2, both left and right ends of the base plate 35571 can be hidden by the bent portion 35365g. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the position of the base plate 35571. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from deciding that they are at a disadvantage and not playing the game.

Further, the concave dimension of the concave portion 35565g2 is set to a depth dimension larger than the plate thickness of the base plate 35571, and the separation distance X5 (see FIG. 191(b)) between the left and right ends of the bent portion 35565g is , is set larger than the horizontal width dimension X6 of the base plate 35571 (see FIG. 191(b)). Thereby, the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) can be displaced in the left-right direction. Note that a method for displacing the base plate 35571 (second path member 35570) will be described later.

The second path member 35570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 35571 facing the front plate 35564 of the first path member 35560, and a rectangular shape in rear view projecting from the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 35571. A support portion 35579 is provided.

The base plate 35571 is a member that forms a throwing path for a game ball in the gap between the first path member 35560 and the front plate 35564, and is formed at a position spaced apart from the front plate 35564 by a predetermined distance. Furthermore, the base plate 35571 includes a fourth convex portion 35571b that protrudes toward the front plate 35564 (in the direction of arrow F). Thereby, the direction in which the game ball flowing down between the opposing base plate 35571 and the front plate 35564 collides with the fourth convex portion 35571b can be changed.

The support portion 35579 is a portion that pivotally supports the second path member 35570, and a cylindrical shaft is formed at a position coaxial with the axis of the base plate 34571 (center of the base plate 34571). Furthermore, the base plate 60 of the game board 34013 has a sliding hole 35060e in the form of an elongated hole extending in the left-right direction at a position corresponding to the supporting part 35579, and the supporting part 35579 is inserted inside the sliding hole 35060e. Ru. Thereby, the second path member 35570 is supported by the base plate 60.

The width of the sliding hole 35060e in the transverse direction (in the direction of the arrow UD) is set to be approximately the same as the dimension in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrow UD) of the support part 35579, and The width dimension in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) is set larger than the direction dimension (arrow LR direction). Thereby, the support part 35579 inserted into the inside of the sliding hole 35060e can be slid in the longitudinal direction of the sliding hole 35060e.

Further, the support portion 35579 has a fastening hole 35579a recessed at its protruding tip. The fastening hole 35579a has a female thread on its inner peripheral surface, and the threaded portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 can be screwed into the fastening hole 35579a. Note that the protruding dimension of the support portion 34579 is set smaller than the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and by screwing the threaded portion 34553b of the fixture 34553 into the fastening hole 35579a, the second path member 35570 is attached to the base. It can be fixed to the plate 60.

According to the special winning device 35550 configured as described above, when changing the ejection position of the game balls ejected from the special winning device 35550, the operator can 1. Insert your hand (arm) from the front side (direction of arrow F) of the game board 35013 through the opening 60a (center frame 86) into the back side (direction of arrow B) of the base plate 60, and attach the fixing tool 34553. access the operating section 34553a.

Next, the operating portion 34553a is rotated to loosen the screw portion 34553b screwed into the fastening hole 35579a of the second path member 35570. This makes the second path member 35570 slidable in the left-right direction, and the second path member 35570 is slid to change the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b of the second path member 35570. When the position of the fourth convex part 35571b is changed, the position where the game ball flowing down inside the special winning device 35550 collides with the fourth convex part 35571b is changed, so the game ball discharged from the special winning device 35550 The discharge position can be changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, a change in the discharge position of the game ball when the position of the fourth convex portion 35571b (second path member 35570) is changed will be described. FIGS. 193(a) to 193(c) are cross-sectional views of the game board 35013 taken along the line CXCIII-CXCIII in FIG. 191(b). Note that in FIGS. 193(a) to 193(c), the position of the second path member 35570 in FIG. 193(b) is used as the reference position, and in FIG. 193(a), the second path member 35570 is A state in which the second path member 35570 is displaced to the left in the view is illustrated, and a state in which the second path member 35570 is displaced from the reference position to the right (in the direction of the arrow R) in the front view is illustrated in FIG. 193(c).

As shown in FIG. 193, the fourth convex portion 35571b has a substantially V-shaped protruding shape when viewed from the front, and the game balls flowing in from above the special winning device 35550 are centered along the slope of the V-shape. (V-shaped bent part).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 193(b), when the V-shaped bent portion of the fourth convex portion 35571b is disposed above the first winning opening 64, the special winning device 35550 is discharged from below. This makes it easier for game balls to flow into the first prize opening 64.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(c), when the second path member 35570 is moved from the reference position (the position shown in FIG. 193(b)), the V of the fourth convex portion 35571b Since the bent portion of the letter is placed at a position shifted to the left or right from the top of the first winning opening 64, the position is lower than the special winning device 35550 compared to when the second path member 35570 is placed at the reference position. Game balls discharged from the slot are made difficult to flow into the first prize opening 64.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, a special prize winning device 36550 in the 36th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 551 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60, and In the thirty-sixth embodiment, the first unit 36551 is held in a state where it is biased toward the rear surface of the base plate 60 due to the elastic recovery force of the fastening portion 36551b formed in the first unit 36551. Forced toward the side. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 194(a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board 36013 in the 36th embodiment, and FIG. 194(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 36013. Note that FIG. 194 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 36.

As shown in FIG. 194, the special prize winning device 36550 in the 36th embodiment is a first unit disposed on the base plate 60, which is slid from inside the first opening 60a where the center frame 86 is disposed. 36551.

The first unit 36551 has a space inside thereof in which a game ball can be thrown, and the space is arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 (in the direction of arrow F). Thereby, the game balls flowing down the front surface of the base plate 60 can be made to flow into the inside of the first unit 36551. The first unit 36551 also includes a fastening portion 36551b that protrudes from a side surface (back surface) adjacent to the front surface of the base plate 60 toward the back surface (in the direction of arrow B).

The fastening portion 36551b is a portion into which a screw for fastening the first unit 36551 to the base plate 60 is inserted, and is provided protruding toward the back side (direction of arrow B) and parallel to the back side of the base plate 60. The protruding tip is bent in the direction.

Furthermore, the fastening portion 36551b has a bulging portion 36551b2 that bulges toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) on the side surface on the bending side, and a bulging portion 36551b2 that bulges toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F), and a bulging portion 36551b2 that bulges toward the front side of the bending portion 36551b, and a plate thickness direction (arrow FB a through hole 36551b1 that penetrates in the direction).

In addition, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X7 from the base end (back surface of the first unit 36551) to the front of the bent portion when the first unit 36551 is not attached to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 194(b)). is set larger than the thickness of the base plate 60. Furthermore, the fastening portion 36551b has a distance dimension X8 (FIG. 194 (b)) is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the thickness of the base plate 60.

When a screw is fastened to the through hole 36551b1, the bulging portion 36551b2 generates a force that presses (energizes) the first unit 36551 against the back side of the base plate 60 (in the direction of arrow F). It is formed between the base end of the bent portion of the fastening portion 36551b and the through hole 36551b1.

As a result, when the screw inserted through the fastening portion 36551b is fastened to the back surface of the base plate 60, the bulging portion 36551b2 comes into contact with the back surface of the base plate 60, thereby reducing the gap between the bent portion and the base plate 60. , the force of pushing the bent end side into the base plate 60 side with the screw can be converted into the force of pulling out the base end side of the bent part toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B). Thereby, formation of a gap between the back surface of the first unit 36551 and the front surface of the base plate 60 can be suppressed.

As a result, there is no need to fasten the screws through which the first unit 36551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 36551 can be easily formed larger by the amount of fastening allowance. Further, in the 36th embodiment, the first unit 36551 is attached to the base plate 60 using the first opening 60a to which the center frame 86 is fastened, so the first unit 36551 is slid and displaced to attach the base plate 60. It can be easily attached to the first opening 60a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195, a special prize winning device 37550 in the 37th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the first unit 551 disposed on the front side of the base plate 60 is fastened to the second unit 552 disposed on the back side of the base plate 60, and In the thirty-seventh embodiment, the first unit 37551 is fastened with a screw inserted from the back side of the base plate 60, and the first unit 37551 is held in a state where it is urged toward It is held in a state where it is biased toward the side. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 195(a) is an exploded perspective front view schematically showing a game board 37013 in the 37th embodiment, and FIG. 195(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the game board 37013. Note that FIG. 195 (b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 36.

As shown in FIG. 195, a special prize winning device 37550 in the thirty-seventh embodiment is formed from a first unit 37551 disposed in front of the base plate 60.

The first unit 37551 has a space inside thereof in which a game ball can be thrown, and the space is arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 (in the direction of arrow F). Thereby, the game balls flowing down the front of the base plate 60 can be made to flow into the inside of the first unit 37551. Further, the first unit 37551 includes a plurality of annular convex portions 37551b that protrude in an annular shape on the back side (in the direction of arrow B).

The annular convex portion 37551b is a portion into which a screw inserted from the back side of the base plate 60 is screwed, and an internal thread is formed on the inner peripheral surface. In this embodiment, the annular convex portions 37551b are formed at four locations on the back surface of the first unit 37551.

Further, a circular concave portion 37060d is formed in the base plate 60 at a position facing the annular convex portion 37551b. The recess 37060d is a portion into which the annular protrusion 37551b is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 37551b. Further, the depth of the recess 37060d is set to be larger than the protrusion dimension of the annular projection 37551b.

Furthermore, a circular through hole 37060d1 coaxially with the recess 37060 is formed in the bottom surface of the recess 37060d. The through hole 37060d1 is a hole through which the tip of a screw screwed into the annular convex portion 37551b is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the recessed portion 37060d. Thereby, a screw can be fastened to the first unit 37551 disposed from the back side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of arrow B) to the front side of the base plate 60 (the side in the direction of arrow F).

In this case, as described above, the depth of the recess 37060d is set larger than the protrusion dimension of the annular projection 37551b, so by screwing the screw into the annular projection 37551b, The first unit 37551 can be disposed on the base plate 60 with the convex portion 37551b (first unit 37551) urged toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B). Thereby, formation of a gap between the back surface of the first unit 37551 and the front surface of the base plate 60 can be suppressed.

As a result, there is no need to fasten the screws through which the first unit 37551 is inserted from the front side to the base plate 60, and the first unit 37551 can be easily formed larger by the amount of fastening allowance. In addition, in the 37th embodiment, since the fastening portion of the first unit 37551 can be accommodated inside the recess 37060d of the base plate 60, the space for throwing the game ball formed in the first unit 37551 is correspondingly reduced. Can be made larger.

<Change the amount of light emitted to the front side using the game ball>
Next, a lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. In the eleventh embodiment, a case will be described in which a shadow is formed at the position of the game ball accommodated in the lower displacement member 11440 by light emitted from the control board 491, and the position of the game ball is recognized from the position of the shadow. However, the lower displacement member 11440 in the 38th embodiment reflects the light emitted from the control board 491 on the outer surface of the game ball, and allows the position of the game ball to be recognized at a position where the amount of light is increased. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 196 is an exploded perspective front view of the lower displacement member 38440 in the thirty-eighth embodiment. 197(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440, FIG. 197(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 taken along the line CXCVIIb-CXCVIIb of FIG. 197(a), and FIG. 197(c) is a front view of the lower displacement member 38440. is a sectional view of the lower displacement member 38440 taken along the line CXCVIIc-CXCVIIc in FIG. 197(a). In addition, in FIG. 197(a), a state in which the front side decorative member 38451 and the front case 38481 are removed is illustrated, and the LED 38483b disposed on the front case 38481 is illustrated with a two-dot chain line. Moreover, FIG. 197(b) and FIG. 197(c) illustrate a state in which the front side decorative portion 451 is attached.

As shown in FIGS. 196 and 197, the lower displacement member 38440 in the 38th embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to a front base 411 (see FIG. 46), and a base member 470 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB Direction) A case member 38480 that covers both sides, a transmission mechanism 460 that is displaceably disposed between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member 11450 that is formed to cover the front and back of the case member 38480. It is mainly formed by

The case member 38480 is a member that covers both sides of the base member 470 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and includes a front case 38481 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the base member 470, and a rear side. It mainly includes a back case 482 disposed on the side (the side in the direction of arrow B).

The front case 38481 is formed into a rectangular and horizontally long plate shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the front case 38481 has an opening 481a that extends in the left-right direction (in the direction of arrows LR) at a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrows UD) and a protruding opening 481a on the lower end surface on the back side (in the direction of arrow B). It mainly includes a bottom wall portion 481b, a shaft hole 481c extending through the lower end in the front-rear direction, and an LED board 38483 disposed on the back side.

The LED board 38483 is a member that causes the inside of the lower displacement member 38440 (front case 38481) to emit light, and includes a main body portion 38483a formed in a plate shape, and a plurality of LED boards disposed on the main body portion 38483a that emit light. It includes an LED38483b.

The main body portion 38483a is a base on which wiring for conducting electricity to the plurality of LEDs 38483b is laid, and extends in the direction of displacement of the ball receiving portion 467 (arrow LR direction). The plurality of LEDs 38483b are arranged at predetermined intervals in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the main body portion 38483a.

Further, each LED 38483b is set in a direction toward the center of the game ball when the game ball passes through the back side (arrow B direction side) of each LED 38483b. Thereby, when the game ball is located on the back side of each LED 38483b, the light of the LED can be reflected on the outer surface of the game ball and irradiated onto the front side decoration part 11451. Therefore, as described above, since the front decoration part 11451 includes the transmission part 11451b that can transmit light, the light reflected on the outer surface of the game ball and irradiated to the front decoration part 11451 is transmitted through the transmission part 11451b. The light can be emitted to the player side (in the direction of arrow F) through the light beam. Therefore, it is possible to make the amount of light visible from the player side through the transmitting portion 11451b greater in the portion reflected by the game ball than in the other portions. As a result, by increasing (changing) the amount of light, the player can recognize the position of the game ball thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 38440.

In addition, in this embodiment, the interval at which the plurality of LEDs 38483b are arranged is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, even if the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467 is displaced, at least a part of the game ball can be irradiated with the light emitted from the LED 38483b. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b can be constantly irradiated onto the game ball received in the ball receiving section 467.

Further, according to the thirty-eighth embodiment, the base member 470, the transmission mechanism 460, and the back case 482, which are arranged on the back side (in the direction of arrow B) of the LED 38483b, are preferably members with a high light absorption rate. For example, the outer surface of each member forms a black color scheme. According to this, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the LED 38483b from being reflected inside the case member 38480 (lower displacement member 38440) and emitted from the transparent portion 11451b of the front decoration portion 11451. As a result, it is possible to increase the difference in the amount of light emitted between the front where the game ball is placed and the other front, allowing the player to recognize the position of the game ball received inside the lower displacement member 39440. You can make it easier to do so.

Next, a lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the above 38th embodiment, a case has been described in which the player is made to recognize the position where the game ball is placed by reflecting light on the game ball, but in the 39th embodiment, the game ball is placed on the ball receiving part 39467. The position of the game ball is recognized by reflecting the light with the reflective member. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 198 is an exploded perspective rear view of the lower displacement member 39440 in the thirty-ninth embodiment. 199(a) is a front view of the lower displacement member 39440, and FIGS. 199(b) and 199(c) are sectional views of the lower displacement member 39440. Note that FIGS. 199(b) and 199(c) correspond to the cross section of FIG. 198(c).

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the lower displacement member 39440 in the 39th embodiment includes a base member 470 connected to the front base 411 (see FIG. 46), and a case member 38480 that covers the front and rear of the base member 470. , a transmission mechanism 39460 disposed displaceably between the case member 38480 and the base member 470, and a decorative member 11450 disposed so as to cover the front and rear of the case member 38480.

The transmission mechanism 39460 is a member disposed on the front side of the base member 470, and includes transmission gears 461, 462, 463, a drive motor KM2 whose shaft portion is connected to the transmission gear 461, and a transmission gear 463 and meshing. A movable rack 464 has a tooth surface and is disposed so as to be slidable on the front side of the base member 470, and the movable rack 464 is rotatably disposed on the movable rack 464 and meshed with a rack gear 476. A transmission gear 465, a rack 39466 having a tooth surface meshed with the transmission gear 465 and disposed so as to be slidable on the front side of the movable rack 464, and a rack 39466 rotatably disposed on one end side of the rack 39466. It is formed mainly of a ball receiving part 39467.

The rack 39466 is formed from a horizontally long rod-shaped body that is rectangular in front view, and includes a rack gear 466a engraved on the upper end surface, a shaft portion 39466b that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the other end toward the front side, and a shaft portion 39466b that protrudes toward the front side. It is formed mainly by two sliding plates 466c and a recessed part 466d recessed from one end to the other end on the back side.

The shaft portion 39466b is a projection inserted into a shaft hole 467b of a ball receiving portion 39467, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft hole 467b. Thereby, the ball receiving part 467 can be held rotatably.

The ball receiving portion 39467 includes a first piece 39467c bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, a second piece 39467d connected to the first piece 39467c, and a second piece 39467d connected to the second piece 39467d. A third piece 39467e is provided on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d.

The first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are parts that hold the game ball thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 39440 from the opening 451a (see FIG. 57), and the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are opposed to each other. When the game ball is thrown, the second piece 39467d is displaced in the direction of separating from the first piece 39467c, and a part of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d are arranged in a U-shape when viewed from the front. The game ball can be held inside the U-shape.

The first piece 39467c includes a receiving piece 39467c4 forming an L-shape when viewed from the front, forming one extending side, a leg portion 467a forming the other extending side, and the receiving piece 39467c4 and the leg portion 467a. An annular bent portion 39467c5 in which a shaft hole 467b penetrating in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is formed in the connecting portion (bent portion), and a connecting portion 39467c1 that protrudes to the opposite side with the bent portion 39467c5 in between. and.

The receiving piece 39467c4 is a part that forms the other side (the side in the direction of arrow R) formed by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a crescent shape in the front. , is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the second piece 39467d.

The connecting portion 39467c1 protrudes from two locations at a predetermined interval in the axial direction (arrow FB direction) of the bent portion 39467c5. The connecting portion 39467c1 is a portion that connects a second piece 39467d and a third piece 39467e, which will be described later, and extends along the axial direction of the shaft hole 467b and has a connecting hole 39467c2 that has a circular cross section. Be prepared.

The connecting hole 39467c2 is an opening into which a shaft portion 39467e3 protruding from a third piece 39467e, which will be described later, is inserted. A shaft portion 39467e3 inserted into an insertion hole 39467d3 formed in a second piece 39467d, which will be described later, is inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 from the front side (direction of arrow F). Further, the shaft portion 39467e3 is fastened with a screw inserted from the side opposite to the insertion side of the connecting hole 39467c2 (the side in the direction of arrow B). Thereby, the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e can be fastened to the first piece 39467c.

Further, the first piece 39467c includes a recessed portion 39467c3 that is recessed downward in the direction of gravity (in the direction of arrow D) on the protruding base end side of the connecting portion 39467c1. The concave bottom surface of the concave portion 39467c3 is formed at the lowest position (lowest part) of the side surfaces where the game ball is held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. Thereby, the game ball held by the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d is rolled inside the recessed part 39467c3. As a result, the second piece 39467d can be easily displaced with respect to the first piece 39467c due to the load of the game ball.

The second piece 39467d is a part that forms the other side (arrow L direction side) of the receiving piece 39467c4 of the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d that is formed into a U-shape when viewed from the front, and has a crescent shape when viewed from the front. It is formed in a curved shape that is concave in the direction away from the first piece 39467c. In addition, the second piece 39467d has an insertion hole 39467d3 that opens in a circular shape in the front-rear direction at the connecting portion of the first piece 39467c, and a circular insertion hole 39467d3 that opens from the front side (arrow F direction side) to the back side (arrow B direction side). It mainly includes a recessed part 39467d2 that is recessed in the shape.

In the second piece 39467d, the shaft portion 39467e3 of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the insertion hole 39467d3, and the connecting shaft 39467e4 of the third piece 39467e is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is displaced, the third piece 39467e is similarly displaced. Therefore, when the second piece 39567d is rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 39467c, the third piece 39567e is similarly rotationally displaced relative to the first piece 39467c.

Furthermore, the second piece 39467d is disposed between opposing connecting portions 39467c1 that protrude from two locations on the first piece 39467c, and is connected to the first piece 39467c. Thereby, when the second piece 39467d is twisted in the axial direction of the insertion hole 39467d3, it is possible to suppress the second piece 39467d from coming into contact with the opposite side surface of the connecting portion 39467c1 and breaking the shaft portion 39467e3.

The recessed portion 39467d2 is a hole into which a connecting shaft 39467e4 of a third piece 39467e to be described later is inserted, and is recessed in substantially the same shape as the connecting shaft 39467e4.

The third piece 39467e includes a reflecting plate 39467e1 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed from the front, a shaft portion 39467e3 protruding from the reflecting plate 39467e1 toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B), and a connecting shaft 39467e4. and.

The reflective plate 39467e1 is made of a resin material and has an outer surface coated with plating. Thereby, when the light emitted from the LED 38483b is irradiated onto the reflecting plate 39467e1, the light can be reflected on the outer surface of the reflecting plate 39467e1. Further, the entire reflecting plate 39467e1 is formed to be curved in an arc shape toward the front side (arrow F direction side). Thereby, when light emitted from the front side is reflected, the light can be focused on a predetermined portion. Note that the shielding of the light from the light emitter 11491a by the reflection plate 39467e1 will be described later.

The shaft portion 39467e3 is a cylindrical body inserted into the connection hole 39467c2 of the first piece 39467c and the insertion hole 39467d3 of the second piece 39467d, as described above. Further, a hole is formed in the protruding distal end surface of the shaft portion 39467e3, into which a screw inserted into the connecting hole 39467c2 from the side opposite to the insertion side of the shaft portion 39467e3 can be screwed. Therefore, with the shaft portion 39467e3 inserted into the connection hole 39467c2 and the insertion hole 39467d3, by fastening a screw to the insertion end surface of the shaft portion 39467e3, the first piece 39467c, the second piece 39467d, and the third piece 39467e are connected. At the same time, the third piece 39467e can be made rotatable relative to the first piece 39467c.

As described above, the connecting shaft 39467e4 is inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2 of the second piece 39467d. Thereby, when the second piece 39467d is rotationally displaced about the shaft portion 39467e3 with respect to the first piece 39467c, the connecting shaft 39467e4 can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 39467d. Therefore, the third piece 39467e can be displaced along with the displacement of the second piece 39467d.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 199, when a game ball is received between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d facing each other, the ball receiving part 39467 moves the received game ball between the first piece 39467c and the second piece 39467d. 39467d and is guided to the recess 39467c3 located at the lowest end of the receiving surface. Thereby, the second piece 39467d can be rotated around the shaft portion 39467e3 in a direction away from the first piece 39467c on the outer surface of the game ball. As a result, the third piece 39467e, which moves with the displacement of the second piece 39467d, can be displaced upward and placed above the light irradiation of the LED 38483b.

Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 38483b can be reflected toward the front side (direction of arrow F) of the lower displacement member 39440 by the reflection plate 39467e1 of the third piece 39467e, and can be emitted from the transmission section 11451b. Thereby, the amount of light emitted from the transmitting portion 11451b can be partially increased, allowing the player to recognize the position of the game ball thrown into the inside of the lower displacement member 39440.

Further, the second piece 39467d has the connecting shaft 39467e4 inserted into the recessed portion 39467d2, and the load of the third piece 39467e is always applied thereto. The center of gravity G of the third piece 39467e is set on the opposite side of the shaft portion 394673e from the connecting portion between the second piece 39567d and the third piece 39567e. As a result, when no force other than gravity is acting on the second piece 39467d and the third piece 39467e, the second piece 39467d can be rotated toward the first piece 39467c by the load of the third piece 39467e. .

Therefore, when the game ball is discharged (taken out) from the ball receiving portion 39467, the second piece 39467d can be displaced toward the receiving piece 39467c4 side of the first piece 39467c due to the load of the third piece 39467e. Therefore, only when the game ball is received in the ball receiving part 39467, the amount of light reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 and emitted from the transmitting part 11451b can be partially increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress light from being reflected by the reflecting plate 39467e1 due to the positioning operation of the ball receiving portion 39467, etc.

Furthermore, like the ball receiving part 467 in the first embodiment, the ball receiving part 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 39467b by the operation of slidingly displacing the inside of the lower displacement member 39440, so that the lower displacement member 39440 emits light. The game ball received through the opening 471 (see FIG. 66) is discharged to the outside.

Here, as a structure for discharging the game ball received in the ball receiving part 39467, a structure in which the ball receiving part 39467 is rotated around the shaft hole 467b as the ball receiving part 39467 slides, the ball receiving part 39467 The rotational speed of the ball receiving portion 39467 around the shaft hole 467b is changed by the sliding speed. Therefore, since the rotational speed depends only on the sliding speed of the ball receiving part 39467, there is a problem that the ejection speed of the game balls from the ball receiving part 39467 is not stable.

On the other hand, in the 39th embodiment, the direction in which the second piece 39467d rotates due to the load of the third piece 39467e and the direction in which the ball receiving part 39467 rotates around the shaft hole 467b when ejecting the game ball are different. Since they are set in substantially the same direction, it is possible to apply a driving force when the second piece 39467d is displaced to the game ball emitted from the emitting opening 471. Therefore, even if the force applied from the ball receiver 39467 to the game ball is reduced when displacing the ball receiver 39467 and ejecting the game ball from the exit opening 471, the speed of the ejected game ball can be maintained. can. As a result, the ejection speed of the game balls ejected from the ball receiver 39467 can be stabilized.

Next, the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 200. In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a malfunction is reported when a game ball gets stuck in the curved part 581a of the main path SK1, but in the 40th embodiment, a game ball of a size other than the specified size Fraud can be reported when passing SK1. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 200(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment, and FIG. 200(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 40551 along the CCb-CCb line of FIG. 200(a). be. Note that the cross-sectional view in FIG. 200(a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view in FIG. 25.

As shown in FIG. 200, the first unit 40551 in the fortieth embodiment includes a first path member 560 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a back side of the first path member 560 (arrow B direction side). It is formed mainly of a second path member 570 disposed on the second path member 570 (direction side) and a third path member 40580 disposed on the back side of the second path member 570.

The third path member 40580 includes a first covering member 40581 disposed on the back surface above the second path member 570 (in the direction of arrow U), and a first covering member 40581 disposed on the back surface of the second path member 570 on the bottom side (in the direction of arrow D). A second covering member 582 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back surface of the second covering member 582 (see FIG. 19), and a first drive unit 583 (see FIG. 19) disposed between the first covering member 40581 and the second covering member 582. and a second drive unit 584 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back surface of the second covering member 582.

The first covering member 40581 is a member that forms a throwing path for the game ball that curves in a substantially U-shape toward the back side (arrow B direction side), and is on the back side of the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d. It mainly includes a curved part 40581a that connects the curved parts 40581a, and a plate-shaped attachment part 40581b that continues below the curved part 40581a.

The curved portion 40581a is curved to have a U-shaped cross section with the first opening 571a and the fourth opening 571d (second path member 570) side open, and the first rolling portion 576 is arranged inside the curved portion 40581a. be done. In addition, the curved portion 40581a has a width dimension in the left-right direction (direction of arrows LR) that is formed smaller toward the back side (direction of arrow B), and a width dimension in the left-right direction of the curved portion having a U-shaped cross section. X10 (see FIG. 200(a)) is formed to have a size that is 1.1 times or less the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, when a game ball with a diameter of 1.1 times or more than a prescribed game ball is thrown, the game ball can be stopped inside the curved portion 40581a (main path SK1).

Further, the curved portion 40581a is arranged inside the recessed portion 86b2 (see FIG. 17) of the center frame 86, similar to the curved portion 581a in the first embodiment. Therefore, the game ball stopped inside the curved portion 40581a can be detected by the detection device 86b3 (see FIG. 17), and the pachinko machine 10 can be notified of an error (fraud).

Further, the curved portion 40581a includes an opening 40581a1 opening in the curved portion having a U-shaped cross section, and a housing portion 40581a2 projecting in a box shape from an end on the back side of the opening 40481a1 and opening upward.

The opening 40581a1 is an opening for discharging balls with a smaller diameter than the prescribed game ball diameter from the main path SK1, and the opening dimension X15 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) (see FIG. 200(a)) is It is formed to have a size larger than 0.9 times the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the opening 40581a1 is formed on the back side of the curved part 40581a, which is the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the first rolling part 576, and throws the game ball passing through the main path SK1 to the opening 40581a1. be able to. Thereby, when a game ball whose diameter is 0.90% or more smaller than a prescribed game ball is thrown, the game ball can be discharged from the opening 40581a1 to the outside of the main path SK1.

The accommodating part 40581a2 is a box that accommodates the game ball discharged from the opening 40581a1, and the inner space is formed to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game balls ejected from the opening 40581a1 can be stored in the storage section 40581a2, and the stored game balls can be detected by the detection device 86b3, and the pachinko machine 10 can be notified of an error (fraud). .

In addition, in the 40th embodiment, a case has been described in which the width dimension X10 and the opening dimension X11 are formed to be 0.1 times different in size from a game ball having a prescribed diameter (11 mm), but this is not necessarily the case. The size is not limited to , and the magnification of the size of the game ball may be changed.

Next, the first unit 41551 in the 41st embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 and 202. In the first embodiment, the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j formed in the main path SK2, the curved path WK1, and the main path SK3 are arranged vertically (arrow Although the case has been described in which the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j in the forty-first embodiment are formed substantially symmetrically in the U-D direction), the first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j are each formed in irregular shapes. The same parts as in the form are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

201(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 in the forty-first embodiment, and FIG. 201(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 along the CCIb-CCIb line of FIG. 201(a). be. 202(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first unit 41551 taken along the line CCIIa-CCIIa in FIG. 201(a), and FIG. 41551 is a schematic cross-sectional view.

As shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, the first unit 41551 in the forty-first embodiment includes a first path member 41560 disposed on the front side and a first path member 41560 disposed on the back side of the first path member 41560. It is formed mainly of a second path member 41570 and a third path member 580 (see FIG. 19) disposed on the back side of the second path member 41570.

The first path member 41560 includes a front plate 41564 that is formed in a plate shape along the front of the game area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), and a substantially U-shaped cross section that is open on the upper side (the side in the direction of arrow U). A first receiving part 561, a second receiving part 562, and a third receiving part 563 are formed in the front plate 41564 and protrude from the upper side (arrow U direction side) end to the back side (arrow B direction side). (See FIG. 21), is provided continuously and protrudes from the lower side (in the direction of arrow D) of the first receiving part 561, second receiving part 562, and third receiving part 563, and a part of the end of the front plate 41564. A first wall 41565 extends along the section, and two sets of second wall 566 and second wall 566 are formed below the first wall 565 and protrude from two locations separated by a predetermined distance. 3 wall portion 567 (see FIG. 21).

The front plate 41564 is a plate member that serves as a wall portion on the front side (arrow F direction side) of a falling path of a game ball formed between opposing second path members 41570 and third path members 580, which will be described later. It is formed from a transparent member. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball flowing down inside the first unit 551 via (through) the front plate 41564.

In addition, the front plate 564 has a first convex portion 41564b, a second convex portion 41564c, and a third convex portion 41564d protruding from positions facing a first concave portion 41571h, a second concave portion 41571i, and a third concave portion 41571j, which will be described later. be done.

The second path member 41570 includes a plate-shaped base plate 41571 facing the front plate 41564 of the first path member 41560, and a plate-shaped base plate 41571 that projects from the front side of the base plate 41571 (in the direction of arrow F) toward the first path member 41560. a fourth wall 573 (see FIG. 21), a fifth wall 574 (see FIG. 21) projecting downward from the fourth wall 573 at a predetermined distance apart; The sixth wall portion 575 (see FIG. 21) is formed so as to protrude downward from the portion 574 by a predetermined distance.

The base plate 41571 has a first recess 41571h, a second recess 41571i, and a second recess 41571h, which are recessed in the throwing path of the game ball (main path SK2, curved path WK1, and main path SK3) formed between facing the front plate 41564. 3 recesses 41571j.

The first recess 41571h, the second recess 41571i, and the third recess 41571j are formed in a curved shape toward the back side. Further, the opposing dimensions of the first recess 41571h and the first protrusion 41564b, the opposing dimensions of the second recess 41571i and the second protrusion 41564c, and the opposing dimensions of the third recess 41571j and the third protrusion 41564d are as follows: They are each set to the same opposing distance L19 (see FIG. 201(b)).

In addition, the opposing dimension L19 is set to a value larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is smaller than the opposing dimension L20 (see FIG. 201(b)) between the back of the front plate 41564 and the front of the base plate 571. is set to As a result, the game ball thrown between the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i, and the third concave portion 41571j and the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d is transferred to the first concave portion. 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i and the third concave portion 41571j, and the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d can be brought into contact to slow down the rolling (downward) speed of the game ball. can.

Furthermore, the protrusion dimensions of the first protrusion 41564b, the second protrusion 41564c, and the third protrusion 41564d toward the base plate 41571 are set to be the same. Further, the protruding tip surfaces of the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d face the front surface of the base plate 41571 excluding the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i, and the third concave portion 41571j. The distance dimension L21 (see FIG. 201(b)) between them is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball thrown between the first concave portion 41571h, the second concave portion 41571i, and the third concave portion 41571j and the first convex portion 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d is placed in the first convex portion. 41564b, the second convex portion 41564c, and the third convex portion 41564d. As a result, the rolling (downward) speed of the game ball can be slowed down.

The first recess 41571h is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK2, and is recessed long along the throwing direction of the game ball of the main path SK2. Thereby, when the game ball thrown inside the 1st recessed part 41571h is thrown inside the 1st recessed part 41571h, it can suppress that the frictional resistance with the 1st recessed part 41571h increases. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK2 can be prevented from stopping due to contact with the first recess 41571h.

The first convex portion 41564b protruding from the surface facing the first concave portion 41571h extends in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first concave portion 41571h. Thereby, when the game ball thrown along the main path SK2 comes into contact with the first convex portion 41564b, the game ball can be easily thrown inside the first recessed portion 41571h.

The second recess 41571i is formed in the base plate 41571 of the curved path WK1, and is recessed long along the gravity direction (arrow UD direction). The second recess 41571i has an elliptical shape in a front view that is elongated in the vertical direction, and the middle position of the ellipse in the left-right direction is set at the middle position in the left-right direction of the curved path WK1 extending in the vertical direction. Further, the center of curvature of the upper side (main path SK2 side) of the ellipse of the second recessed portion 41571i is arranged on the throwing trajectory of the center of the game ball thrown along the main path SK2. Therefore, since the second recessed portion 41571i is recessed above the trajectory of the game ball thrown from the main path SK2, even when the game ball is thrown at a relatively high speed along the main path SK2, the second recess 41571i The center of the game ball can be passed through the front side of the second recess 41571i. As a result, it is possible to easily slow down the speed of the game ball by throwing the game ball passing through the main path SK2 inside the second recess 41571i, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from going wild on the curved path WK1.

The second convex portion 41564c that protrudes from the surface facing the second concave portion 41571i is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. Further, the bent portion of the second convex portion 41564c is set on the front side of the center of curvature on the upper side of the ellipse of the second recessed portion 41571i when viewed from the front. Further, the bent portion on one side of the second convex portion 41564c extends in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1, and the bent portion on the other side extends in the direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK2. It extends in a direction perpendicular to that direction. As a result, the game ball thrown from the main path SK2 to the curved path WK1 comes into contact with the second convex part 41564c on the other side and is thrown inside the second concave part 41571i, and also to the second convex part 41564c on the one side. It is possible to easily reduce the throwing speed of the game ball thrown along the curved path WK11 by making contact with the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball thrown into the curved path WK1 from going wild and to smoothly throw the game ball.

The third recess 41571j is formed in the base plate 41571 of the main path SK3, and is recessed in an elongated elliptical shape in the throwing direction of the game ball of the main path SK3. Thereby, when the game ball thrown inside the 3rd recessed part 41571j is thrown inside the 3rd recessed part 41571j, it can suppress that the frictional resistance with the 3rd recessed part 41571j increases. As a result, the game ball flowing down the main path SK3 can be prevented from stopping due to contact with the third recess 41571j.

Further, the center of curvature of the upstream end of the throwing path of the game ball in the third recess 41571j is set below the center position in the left-right direction of the second recess 41571i. Thereby, the game ball flowing down inside the second recess 41571i of the curved path WK1 can be easily received into the second recess 41571i, and the game ball can be easily thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3.

The third convex portion 41564d protruding from the surface facing the third concave portion 415671j is bent into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front. Further, the bent portion of the third convex portion 41564d is set on the front side of the center of curvature of the upstream end of the third recessed portion 41571j when viewed from the front. The bent portion on one side of the third convex portion 41564d extends in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the main path SK3, and the bent portion on the other side is perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball on the curved path WK1. It extends in the direction. As a result, the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK3 is brought into contact with the third convex portion 41564d on the other side and thrown inside the third concave portion 41571j, and is also thrown into the third convex portion 41564d on the one side. It is possible to reduce the throwing speed of the game ball that is thrown along the main path SK3 by making contact with the ball. As a result, the game ball thrown from the curved path WK1 to the main path SK1 can be suppressed from going wild, and the game ball can be thrown smoothly.

Next, the game board 42013 in the 42nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 to 206. In the first embodiment, the other end side of the board box 100 (main controller 110) disposed in the back case 300 is fixed to the back case 300 by screws inserted from the back side of the board box 100. As described above, in the forty-second embodiment, a case will be described in which the second engaging member 42370 disposed on the back case 42300 is engaged with the board box 42100.

First, the overall configuration of the back case 42300 in the 42nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204. FIG. 203 is an exploded perspective front view of a rear case 42300 in the forty-second embodiment. 204(a) is a front view of the back case 42300, and FIG. 204(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 42300 taken along the line CCIVb-CCIVb in FIG. 204(a). Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 203 and 204, the rear case 42300 in the 42nd embodiment has a bottom wall portion 42301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 42301 toward the front. An outer wall portion 42302 is provided, and each wall portion 42301, 42302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open.

In addition, the rear case 42300 has an engaging member 310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction of arrow F)) of the bottom wall portion 42301, and an engaging member 310 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 42300. The board box 42100 has a fixing member 320 that fixes one end of the board box 42100, and a second engagement member 42370 that is disposed on the front side of the bottom wall 42301 and fixes the other end of the board box 42100.

The bottom wall portion 42301 has a rectangular opening 301a formed in the center thereof when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 42301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is considered possible. The bottom wall portion 42301 also includes a protruding portion 301b that protrudes from the front side in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the sliding groove 314 of the engaging member 310, and a first protruding portion 301b that is opened at a position opposing the fixing member 320. An opening 301c, a second opening 301d that opens at a position facing the engagement member 310, and a second engagement member that is provided in a cylindrical shape and protrudes from the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the bottom wall 42301, which will be described later. A second protruding portion 42301f inserted into the sliding groove 42372 of the member 42370, and a second protruding portion 42301f formed through the second protruding portion 42301f in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction) above the second protruding portion 42301f (in the direction of arrow U). 3 openings 42301g.

The second protruding portions 42301f are protrusions that define the displacement direction of the second engaging member 42370, and are formed in line at two locations in the direction of gravity. Further, the outer diameter of the second protrusion 42301f is set to be slightly smaller than the groove width in the lateral direction of a sliding groove 42372 of a second engaging member 42370, which will be described later. Furthermore, the distance between the centers of the two second protruding portions 42301f is set to be smaller than the groove width in the longitudinal direction of the sliding groove 42372. Thereby, the second protruding portions 42301f can be inserted and disposed at two locations inside the sliding groove 42372.

The third opening 42301g is an opening into which a protrusion 42118 of a substrate box 42100, which will be described later, is inserted, and has a size larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 42118 when viewed from the front. Further, the third opening 42301g allows the engagement member 310 to be released from the engagement with the fixation member 320 in the state where the engagement member 310 and the fixation member 320 are engaged (the state shown in FIG. 204(a)). are formed at positions adjacent to each other in the direction of arrow L (direction of arrow L). This makes it impossible to disengage the engagement member 310 from the fixing member 320 in a state where the protruding portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g. Note that a detailed description of the positional relationship between the protruding portion 42118 and the engaging member 310 will be given later.

The outer wall portion 42302 includes a second opening 42302b that opens in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow UD) on the side surface on the lower side (in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front. The second opening 42302b is an opening through which a lower end (in the direction of arrow D) of a second engagement member 42370, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed in a displacement region of the second engagement member 42370. Thereby, the second engagement member 42370 can be displaced.

The board box 42100 has a horizontally long rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the main controller 110 is disposed inside. Further, the board box 42100 has a bearing part 117 (see FIG. 206(a)) that protrudes from one end (arrow R direction side) and a protruding part that protrudes from one surface of the front side of the board box 42100. 42118.

As described above, the protruding portion 42118 is a portion inserted into the third opening 42301g of the back case 42300, and when the front of the board box 42100 and the back of the back case 42300 are parallel, the back case 42300 The length is set such that an opening 42118a, which will be described later, is arranged on the front side of the bottom wall 42301 of. Furthermore, the protruding portion 42118 includes an opening 42118a that opens in the direction of gravity, and a second engaging member 42370, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 42118a. This prevents the board box 42100 from rotating around the fixing member 320, and allows the board box 42100 to be disposed on the back side of the back case 42300 (in the direction of arrow B) in a non-displaceable state.

Further, the third opening 42301g into which the protruding portion 42118 is inserted is in the state where the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged as described above (the state shown in FIG. 204(a)). Since the member 310 is formed at a position adjacent to the fixing member 320 in the direction in which it is disengaged (arrow L direction), the protruding portion 42118 is arranged at a position adjacent to the engaging member 310. In addition, the insertion dimension Y6 (see FIG. 204(b)) of the protruding portion 42118 into the third opening 42301g is the separation distance Y7 (see FIG. 204(b)) between the front surface of the engaging member 310 and the front surface of the bottom wall portion 42301. )). As a result, as shown in FIG. 204(b), the engaging member 310 and the protruding portion 42118 are arranged at a position where they overlap in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

Therefore, when the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a of the protrusion 42118, the direction in which the engagement member 310 disengages from the fixed member 320 (the direction in which the protrusion 42118 is disposed) is direction) is regulated. As a result, with the second engagement member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 310 from being illegally disengaged from the fixed member 320, and the board box 42100 (main controller 110) can be prevented from being exchanged to an unauthorized base.

Further, the opening 42118a of the protrusion 42118 is opened in the direction of gravity, and the second engagement member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a is displaced in the direction of gravity and inserted. Therefore, since the direction of displacement of the second engagement member 42370 (gravitational direction) and the direction of displacement (horizontal direction) of the engagement member 310 are set perpendicular to each other, the engagement member 310 is forced to move due to fraud by the player. The second engaging member 42370 inserted into the opening 42118a can easily absorb the force caused by the operation. As a result, even if the engaging member 310 is forcibly operated by the player, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 310 from being disengaged from the fixing member 320.

The second engagement member 42370 includes a plate member 42371 formed in a plate shape having a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a second engagement member 42370 extending downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the upper end (direction of arrow U) of the plate member 42371. A recessed portion 42374 is recessed, a second engaging portion 42373 is recessed, and a second engaging portion 42373 is protruded horizontally outward (in the direction of arrows LR) from the upper end (in the direction of arrow U) of the plate member 42371. It mainly includes a sliding groove 42372 located below the installation part 42374 and opened in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

As described above, the sliding groove 42372 is an opening for movably disposing the second engaging member 42370, and is opened long in the direction of gravity (arrow UD direction). Furthermore, the width dimension of the sliding groove 42372 in the short direction (arrow LR direction) is set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the second protrusion 42301f disposed inside the sliding groove 42372. Therefore, when the second protrusion 42301f is inserted into the sliding groove 42372 as described above, the sliding direction of the second engaging member 42370 is defined in the longitudinal direction of the opening of the sliding groove 42372.

The recessed portion 42374 is an opening for making it easier to elastically deform the upper end of the plate member 42371, and is recessed downward and cut out in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the rigidity of the upper end of the plate member 42371 can be lowered, making it easier to elastically deform.

The second engaging portion 42373 is a portion that engages with the end of the opening 42118a of the above-mentioned protruding portion 42118, and is protruded from both side surfaces of the recessed portion 42374 in a direction perpendicular to the notch direction. The separation distance X12 (see FIG. 204(a)) between the ends of the protrusions on both sides is set to be larger than the opening dimension X13 (see FIG. 204(b)) in the left-right direction of the opening 42118a. As a result, when the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engagement part 42373 engages with the end of the opening 42118a, so that the second engagement part 42373 is inserted into the opening 42118a. You can prevent yourself from getting out of it.

Note that the second engaging portion 42373 is formed in a shape that projects horizontally outward from the upper side of the plate member 42371 toward the lower side. Thereby, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a, the second engaging portion 42373 is brought into contact with the inside of the opening 42118a, making it easier to elastically deform the upper side of the plate member 42371. be able to.

In addition, when the second engaging member 42370 is inserted into the opening 42118a (the engaging portion 42373 is engaged with the protruding portion 42118), the lower end portion of the second engaging member 42370 is connected to the second opening of the outer wall portion 42302. It is arranged inside the section 42302b. This can prevent the second engagement member 42370 from being operated from outside the back case 42300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the second engaging part 42373 and the protruding part 42118 from being illegally released and the board box 42100 (main controller 110) being replaced with an unauthorized board.

Next, a method for disposing the board box 42100 in the rear case 42300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205. 205(a) is a front view of the back case 42300, and FIG. 205(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the back case 42300 taken along the CCVb-CCVb line in FIG. 205(a). Note that FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b) illustrate the state after the board box 42100 is arranged in the back case 42300, and FIGS. 205(a) and 205(b) show the state after the back case 42300 is installed. The state before the board box 42100 is arranged is illustrated in FIG.

In the board box 42100 in the 42nd embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the fixing member 320 is first engaged with the engaging member 310, and one side is disposed on the back side of the back case 42300. .

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 205(a) and 205(b), before the engaging member 310 is engaged with the fixed member 320 (before being displaced), the tip of the second piece 312 of the engaging member 310 is , is arranged on the front side of the third opening 42301g. This can prevent the protruding portion 42118 of the board box 42100 from being inserted into the third opening 42301g before the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 are engaged. As a result, the board box 42100 can be prevented from being disposed in the back case 42300 only by engagement of the protruding portion 42118 and the second engaging member 42370.

Next, the other side of the board box 42100 is rotated around the connecting portion between the fixing member on one side and 320, and the protrusion 42118 is inserted inside the third opening 42301g of the back case 42300. Thereby, the protruding portion 42118 is placed in a position where it can engage with the second engaging member 42370.

Note that, before the second engagement member 42370 is inserted into the third opening 42301g, the lower side thereof is inserted into the second opening 42302b, and the second engagement member 42370 is disposed outside the back case 42300 (FIG. 205(a) reference). As a result, the operator who arranges the board box 42100 in the rear case 42300 operates the second engaging member 42370 from the outside of the rear case 42300, and the second engaging member 42370 is placed inside the third opening 42301g. can be inserted into the

In addition, since the displacement direction of the second engagement member 42370 is set in the direction of gravity, the second engagement member 42370 is disposed at the lower end due to the action of gravity before being inserted inside the third opening 42301g. . Thereby, when the protruding portion 42118 is inserted into the third opening 42301g of the back case 42300, it can be suppressed from colliding with the second engaging member 42370. As a result, the work efficiency of the worker can be improved.

In addition, if the second engaging member 42370 is forgotten to engage with the protruding portion 42118, the second engaging member 42370 can be placed outside the back case 42300, so that the operator will not be in a normal state. can be easily recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second engaging member 42370 from forgetting to engage with the protruding portion 42118.

Next, the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 will be described with reference to FIG. 206. FIG. 206(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 206(b) is a sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line CCVIb-CCVIb in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206, an upright member 4206Of is provided on the back surface of a base plate 42060 in the forty-second embodiment. The upright member 42060f is erected toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the base plate 42060, and its upright tip position is set on the same plane as the bottom wall portion 42301 of the back case 42300. . Further, the upright member 4206Of is arranged below the second engagement member 42370 and on the outside of the back case 42300. As a result, when the back case 42300 is disposed on the game board 42013 with the second engagement member 42370 and the protruding portion 42118 forgotten to be engaged, the upright member 4206Of is attached to the second engagement member 42370. It can be caused to collide with the lower side. As a result, when the second engaging member 42370 and the protruding portion 42118 are forgotten to be engaged, or when the board box 42100 is forgotten to be disposed on the rear case 42300, the rear case 42300 is disposed on the base plate 42060. It is possible to suppress the setting of

Note that in this embodiment, a light emitting board that illuminates the inside of the back case 42300 is disposed on the standing member 4206Of. Thereby, the upright member 42060f can be used both as a part that irradiates light and as a part that suppresses engagement between the back case 42300 and the base plate 42060 in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the external size of the base plate 42060 from increasing.

Next, a rear case 43300 according to the forty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 211. In the first embodiment, the engaged portion 332 is formed on the fixed member 320. However, the engaged portion 43101 in the 43rd embodiment is formed on the board box 43100 that is pivotally supported on the fixed member 43320. is formed. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the back case 43300 in the 43rd embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 211. FIG. 207 is an exploded perspective front view of a rear case 43300 in the forty-third embodiment. 208(a) is a front view of the rear case 43300, and FIG. 208(b) is a rear view of the rear case 43300. 209(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 43300 taken along the CCIXa-CCIXa line in FIG. 208(b), and FIG. 209(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rear case 43300 taken along the CCIXb-CCIXb line in FIG. It is a diagram. Note that FIGS. 208 and 209 illustrate a state in which the engaging member 18310 and the substrate box 43100 (engaged portion 43101) are engaged.

As shown in FIGS. 207 to 209, the rear case 43300 in the 43rd embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 43301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and is erected toward the front from the outer edges of the four pieces of the bottom wall portion 43301. An outer wall portion 18302 is provided, and each wall portion 43301, 18302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open. In addition, the rear case 43300 has an engaging member 18310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (arrow F direction side)) of the bottom wall portion 43301, and an engagement member 18310 disposed on the rear side of the rear case 43300. and a fixing member 43320 that fixes (spins) the board box 43100 (main controller 110).

The bottom wall portion 43301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 43301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is said that The bottom wall portion 43301 also includes a first opening 43301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 43320, and a protruding portion located below the first opening 43301c (in the direction of arrow D) and protruding toward the front side. 18301b.

The protrusion 18301b is a protrusion that pivotally supports the engagement member 18310, as in the eighteenth embodiment, and protrudes from the front of the bottom wall 43301 in a cylindrical shape. Further, a hole into which a screw is screwed is provided in the protruding end surface of the protruding portion 18301b. Thereby, by screwing the screw into the protrusion 18301b while the engagement member 18310 is disposed on the back case 18300, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 18310 from slipping out from the protrusion 18301b.

Note that the center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the back case 43300 is located closer to the opening 18302a of the outer wall 18302 than the protrusion 18301b of the back case 43300. As a result, in a state where no external force is applied, the engagement member 18310 is rotated by gravity in a direction in which the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 protrudes from the opening 18302a of the rear case 43300. It is affected by Therefore, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 43320 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 is made to protrude outside the back case 43300 and the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixation member 43320 is prevented. Forgetting can be prevented.

The first opening 43301c is an opening for inserting an engaged portion 43101 of a board box 43100, which will be described later, and is formed in a shape larger than the engaged portion 43101 when viewed from the front. This allows the engaged portion 43101 of the board box 43100 to be placed from the back side of the back case 43300 to the front side of the back case 43300 after the accessory device (rotation unit 700 is arranged inside the back case 43300). can.

Further, at the edge of the first opening 43301c, a projecting wall 43301c1 (see FIG. 209(a) ) and a second projecting wall 43301c2 (see FIG. 209(a)) for engaging a second locking portion 43336 formed on the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 43320, which will be described later. It is installed protrudingly.

The protruding tip portions of the protruding wall 43301c1 and the second protruding wall 43301c2 on the back side (arrow B direction side) are bent in opposite directions. Thereby, in a state where the fixing member 43320 described later is engaged with the protruding wall 43301c1 and the second protruding wall 43301c2, it is possible to suppress the fixing member 43320 from being swung and disengaging from the fixing member 43320.

As described in the eighteenth embodiment, the protruding portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports the engaging member 18310, and protrudes from the front of the bottom wall portion 43301 in a cylindrical shape. Therefore, the engagement member 18310 is disposed on the back case 43300 in a rotatable state about the center of the protrusion 18310b.

The fixing member 43320 includes an intervening member 43330 that engages with the bottom wall portion 43301 of the rear case 43300, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the intervening member 43330.

The intervening member 43330 is formed in a box shape with an open front side, and has a locking part 331 protruding from one side (the side in the direction of arrow R) and a locking part 331 provided on the bottom of the box shape (the side in the direction of arrow B). An insertion hole 333 (see FIG. 39(b)) that opens in a cylindrical shape, a protrusion 334 (see FIG. 39(b)) that protrudes from the back side, and one side from the inner surface of the other side (arrow L direction side). It mainly includes a second locking portion 43336 that projects toward the front.

The locking part 331 has an opening for engaging one side (arrow R direction side) of the fixing member 43320 with the bottom wall part 43301, and has an L-shaped cross section from the periphery of the first opening 43301c to the opening. A protruding wall 43301c1 that protrudes from is inserted. As a result, when installing the intervening member 43330 (fixing member 43320) on the back case 43300, the protruding wall 43301c1 is inserted through the locking portion 331 of the intervening member 43330, and one side of the intervening member 43330 (arrow R direction side) can be locked to the back case 43300.

The second locking portion 43336 is a projection for engaging the other side (arrow L direction side) of the fixing member 43320 with the second projecting wall 43301c2 formed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 43301, as described above, When viewed from the front, it is formed at a position overlapping the bent portion at the tip of the second projecting wall 43301c2. In addition, when the second locking portion 43336 is engaged with the second projecting wall 43301c2 (the state shown in FIG. 209(a)), the second locking portion 43336 is positioned closer to the front side than the bent portion at the tip of the second projecting wall 43301c2. be located. This can prevent the other side of the fixing member 43320 from moving toward the back side.

Furthermore, the front surface of the second locking portion 43336 is inclined toward the back side as it goes from the protruding base end side (the other side of the fixing member 43320) to the protruding tip side (one side of the fixing member 43320). Thereby, when the second locking portion 43336 is engaged with the second projecting wall 43301c2, the protruding tip of the second projecting wall 43301c2 can be easily slid along the front surface of the second locking portion 43301c2. Therefore, the fixing member 43320 can be engaged with the back side of the back case 43300 (bottom wall portion 43301).

Note that, after inserting the protruding wall 43301c1 of the bottom wall portion 43301 inside the opening of the locking portion 331 on one side, the fixing member 43320 inserts the second locking portion 43336 on the other side into the bottom wall portion 43301 side (front side). ) and elastically deforms the other side of the fixing member 43320 while moving the second locking part 43336 to the front side of the bent end of the second protruding wall 43301c2 of the bottom wall part 43301. It is arranged on the bottom wall part 43301).

The board box 43100 has a horizontally long rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the main controller 110 is disposed inside. Further, the board box 43100 includes a bearing part 117 protruding from one end (in the direction of arrow R) and an engaged part 43101 protruding from the front of the board box 43100.

The engaged portion 43101 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310 as described above, and is shown in FIGS. 208(a) and 208(b ), the protrusion dimension toward the rear case 43300 side (arrow F direction side) is set to a dimension exceeding the front surface of the engagement member 18310 disposed on the rear case 43300. Further, the engaged portion 43101 includes an opening portion 43101a that opens in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in a front view on the front side of the bottom wall portion 43301 of the rear case 43300.

Further, the engaged portion 43101 is in a state where the board box 43100 is disposed on the back side of the rear case 43300 (a state where the board box 43100 is engaged with the engaging member 18310 (a state shown in FIG. 209(a)) ) is formed at a position horizontally adjacent to the other side of the fixing member 43320. As a result, when the fixing member 43320 is forcibly pulled toward the back side due to fraud by the player, the other side of the fixing member 43320 moves in a direction that releases the engagement between the second locking portion 43336 and the second projecting wall 43301c2. Elastic deformation can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the board box 43100 is not disposed on the back side of the rear case 43300 (the state where the board box 43100 is not engaged with the engaging member 18310 (the state shown in FIG. 210(a)), the Since the engaging part 43101 can be placed at a position apart from the other side of the fixing member 43320, the fixing member 43320 can be easily engaged with the engaged part 43101 (or the fixed member 43320 can be easily engaged with the engaged part 43101). 43101).

The opening 43101a is formed at a position corresponding to the displacement area of the engagement member 18310 excluding the engagement portion 18316. Thereby, the engaging member 18310 can be inserted inside the opening 43101a and the engaged portion 43101 and the engaging member 18310 can be engaged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the substrate box 43100 will be described. 210(a) and 210(b) are cross-sectional views of the rear case 43300. 210(a) and 210(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 209(a), and in the order of FIG. 210(a), FIG. 210(b), and FIG. A transition state when engaging the mating member 18310 with the substrate box 43100 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 210(a), when engaging the engaging member 18310 and the board box 43100, first, the intervening member 43330 and the shaft supporting member 340 are fastened (integrated) as described above. The fixing member 43320 in the state (fixing member 43320 in the state shown in FIG. 207) is engaged with the back side of the back case 43300 (bottom wall portion 43301).

Next, as shown in FIG. 210(b), the other side of the board box 43100 opposite to the one side where the bearing part 117 is formed is pressed toward the back side of the back case 43300, and the board box 43100 is The board box 43100 is rotated relative to the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 43320) about a caulking fitting (not shown) that connects the shaft support member 340 as an axis. As a result, the front surface of the board box 43100 is placed in a position substantially parallel to the back surface of the rear case 43300, and the opening 43101a of the engaged portion 43101 is connected to the bottom wall portion 43301 through the first opening 43301c of the rear case 43300. The opening 43101a is arranged in the displacement region of the engagement member 18310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 209(a), by rotationally displacing the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 toward the opening 43101a, one side of the engaging member 18310 (the The end portion (181316 side) can be inserted into the opening 43101a while being elastically deformed, and placed in a position via the engaged portion 43101.

Finally, connect the other end of the board box 43100 opposite to the one side on which the bearing part 117 is formed, toward the bottom wall part 43301 of the back case 43300. ) and fixed with screws that are fastened to the rear case 43300. As a result, the board box 43100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 43300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state. Note that the work of fastening the other side of the board box 43100 to the back side of the back case 43300 with screws may be performed before engaging the engaging member 18310 with the engaged portion 43101.

According to the back case 43300 assembled as described above, the engaged portion 43101 that the engaging member 18300 engages is formed in the board box 43100, so the board box 43100 is attached to the shaft support member 340 (fixing member 43320). If it is not pivoted (forgetting to dispose the board box 43100), the engaging member 18300 will not be able to engage.

Further, as described above, when no external force is applied to the engaging member 18300, the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 projects in the direction in which it projects from the opening 18302a of the back case 18300 due to gravity. A rotating force is applied to the engagement member 18310. Therefore, if you forget to arrange the board box 43100, by positioning the engaging member 18310 outside the rear case 43300, the fixing member 43320 and the board box 43310 can be arranged on the bottom wall 43301 of the rear case 43300. This allows the operator to notice the abnormality (forgetting to place the board box 43100). Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to attach the board box 43100 (main controller 110) that controls the pachinko machine 10, so the board box 43100 is installed in the later stages of the assembly process (for example, when checking the operation). It makes it easier to discover things that aren't there. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being introduced into a store (for example, a pachinko parlor) in a defective state (with a part forgotten to be attached).

Furthermore, as in the eighteenth embodiment, if the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the engaged portion 43101 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 can be projected to the outside of the back case 18300. , distance dimension LR1 from the end of the engaging member 18310 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the game board 13 to the right-hand side (arrow R direction side) end of the back case 43300 (see FIG. 164(a)) is set larger than the inner left-right dimension LR2 (see FIG. 164(b)) in the left-right direction of the outer frame 11 on which the game board 13 is arranged. Thereby, when the engaging member 18310 and the fixing member 18320 are not engaged, it is possible to suppress the game board 13 from being disposed on the outer frame 11. As a result, before the pachinko machine 10 is assembled and the operation is checked, it can be noticed that the board box 43100 has been forgotten. This can prevent electricity from passing through. As a result, failure of other boards and electrical components due to forgetting to dispose the board box 43100 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, when the engagement member 18310 is in a disengaged state with the engaged portion 43101 due to factors such as resistance due to contact with the protruding portion 18301b serving as the rotation axis, the engagement member 18310 is in the disengaged state. A case will be described in which the mating member 18310 stops at the engagement position with the engaged portion 43101. 211(a) and 211(b) are cross-sectional views of the rear case 43300. Note that FIGS. 211(a) and 211(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 209(a). 211(a) and 211(b) illustrate the state before the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 43101 of the board box 43100 are engaged. A state in which the substrate box 43100 is displaced is illustrated in the order of (b).

As shown in FIG. 211(a), when the engagement member 18310 is in a disengaged state with the engaged portion 43101 due to factors such as resistance due to contact with the protruding portion 18301b serving as the rotation axis, When the mating member 18310 is stopped at the engagement position with the engaged portion 43101, the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 (the end on the side in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 211(a)) touches the engaged portion. 43109 on the side surface of the bearing portion 117 side, on the displacement locus of the protruding tip portion (imaginary line A shown in FIGS. 211(a) and 211(b)).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 211(b), when the board box 43100 is rotated with respect to the fixed member 43320, the side surface of the engaged portion 43109 on the bearing portion 117 side is moved to the first piece of the engaging member 18310. It can be brought into contact with the tip end surface of 18311.

In this case, the direction of displacement of the engaged portion 43109 and the direction of displacement when the engaging member 18310 is disengaged are set to be substantially the same. Thereby, the force of rotating the board box 43100 toward the bottom wall portion 43301 of the rear case 43300 can be used as a force for pushing back the engaging member 18310 via the engaged portion 43101.

Here, since the engaged part 43101 that engages with the engaging member 18310 is formed in the board box 43100 (an expensive part), it is necessary to replace the board box 43100 if the engaged part 43101 is damaged. , there was a risk that manufacturing costs would increase.

Further, when the engaging member 18310 is not engaged with the engaged portion 43101 due to factors such as resistance due to contact with the protruding portion 18301b serving as the rotation axis, the engaging member 18310 is not engaged with the engaged portion 43101. When the engaging member 18300 is stopped at the engagement position with the portion 43101, the engaging member 18300 is moved from the back side of the bottom wall portion 43301 of the rear case 43300 to the front side of the bottom wall portion 43302 in the displacement region of the engaged portion 43101. will be placed. Therefore, when the substrate box 43100 is displaced, the engaged portion 43101 may collide with the engaging member 18310, and the engaged portion 43101 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the 43rd embodiment, when disposing the fixing member 43320 on the bottom wall portion 43301 of the rear case 43300, the engaging member 18300 is arranged at a predetermined position (part of the engaging member 18310 is When the board box 43100 is not placed in the position protruding from the opening 18302a of the case 43300, the engagement member 18300 is moved to a predetermined position using the force that moves the board box 43100 to the back side of the bottom wall 43301 of the rear case 43300. It can be moved to any position. As a result, damage to the engaged portion 43101 of the board box 43100 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214, a rear case 44300 according to the 44th embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the movement of the engagement member 310 is regulated by a screw inserted into the rear base 720 of the rotation unit 700. However, in the forty-fourth embodiment, the engagement member 44310 is When engaged with the substrate box 44100, the movement of the engagement member 44310 is regulated by being engaged with a protrusion 44102 protruding from the board box 44100. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the rear case 44300 in the 44th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213. FIG. 212 is an exploded perspective front view of a rear case 44300 in the forty-fourth embodiment. 213(a) is a front view of the back case 44300, and FIG. 213(b) is a sectional view of the back case 44300 taken along the line CCXIIIb-CCXIIIb in FIG. 213(a). FIGS. 213(a) and 213(b) illustrate a state in which the engaging member 44310 and the board box 44100 (protruding portion 44102) are engaged.

As shown in FIGS. 212 and 213, the rear case 44300 in the 44th embodiment includes a bottom wall 301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and is erected from the outer edges of the four pieces of the bottom wall 301 toward the front. It is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 301 and 302. In addition, the back case 44300 includes an engaging member 44310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 301, and the back case 44300 (bottom wall 301). A fixing member 44320 that is disposed on the back side of the board box 44100 (main controller 110) and fixes (spins) the board box 44100 (main controller 110).

The engaging member 44310 has a crank-shaped outer shape when viewed from the front, and includes a first piece 44311 and a second piece 312 extending in parallel directions to each other, and the first piece 44311 and the second piece 312. The third piece 313 connects the ends of the first piece 44311 and the second piece 312 in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction thereof. Moreover, a sliding groove 314 is formed in each of the first piece 44311 and the second piece 312.

The first piece 44311 has an end on one side (arrow R direction side) opposite to the other side (arrow L direction side) to which the third piece 313 is connected, as an engaging portion with a fixing member 44320 to be described later. The engaging portion 316 is formed to protrude outward on both sides in the up and down direction (arrow UD direction), which is a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first piece 44311, and the engaging portion 316 at the two locations. A recess 44317 recessed in the extending direction of the first piece 311 (direction of arrow LR) from the approximately intermediate position and toward the bottom wall 301 side (back side (direction of arrow B)) of the back case 44300. A protruding operator 315 is provided.

The recess 44317 is formed by cutting out the first piece 44311 in the thickness direction (arrow FB direction), and extends from one end (arrow R direction side) of the first piece 44311 to the other side (arrow L direction side). ). Therefore, one side of the first piece 44311 is divided into two. Thereby, the rigidity of one side of the first piece 44311 can be made lower than that of the other side. As a result, one side of the first piece 44311 can be easily elastically deformed, and the engaging member 44310 can be easily engaged with the fixing member 44320. Note that the method of engaging the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 is the same as the method of engaging the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 in the first embodiment, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. .

Further, the recessed portion 44317 is provided on the recessed bottom surface recessed toward the other side (arrow L direction side) toward the third piece 313 side (arrow L direction side) toward the bottom wall portion 301 side (arrow B direction side). ) is provided.

The inclined surface 44317a is a surface for sliding the protruding portion 44102 when the protruding tip of the protruding portion 44102 of the substrate box 44100 which will be described later comes into contact with the inclined surface 44317a. An angle of 45 degrees or less in the direction opposite to the sliding direction when the engaging member 44310 is engaged with the fixed member 44320 with respect to the moving direction (direction of arrow FB) of the protrusion 44102 when disposed in the (acute angle). Thereby, when the tip of the protruding part 44102 of the board box 44100 abuts, the protruding part 44102 can be easily slid and displaced along the inclined surface 44317a.

The fixing member 44320 is composed of a separate member from the back case 44300. As a result, the board box 44100 can be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 44320, which has a smaller outer diameter than the rear case 44300. Easy to set up. As a result, the board box 44100 can be easily disposed in the rear case 44300 in a state where the board box 44100 is difficult to be removed from the fixing member 44320.

The fixing member 320 includes an intervening member 330 that engages with the above-described engaging member 44310, and a shaft support member 340 that is fastened to the intervening member 330. Thereby, the shaft supporting member 340 can be used as a second-use item having the same shape as the fixing member of another game machine. Further, the shaft support member 340 is caulked and fastened to a bearing portion 117 of a board box 44100 (main controller 110), which will be described later. Note that the board box 44100 is held in a rotatable state relative to the shaft support member 340 by fastening with caulking metal fittings.

The board box 44100 has a horizontally long rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the main controller 110 is disposed inside. Further, the board box 44100 includes a bearing part 117 protruding from one end (in the direction of arrow R) and a protruding part 44102 protruding from the front of the board box 44100. Note that the protruding portion 44102 of the board box 44100 is made of an elastically deformable resin material, and can be elastically deformed when brought into contact with the engagement member 44310 as described later.

The protruding portion 44102 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 44310 as described above, and is shown in FIGS. 213(a) and 213(b) The protrusion dimension toward the rear case 44300 side (in the direction of arrow F) is set to a dimension exceeding the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the engagement member 44310 disposed on the rear case 44300. A bent portion 44012a that is bent toward the third piece 313 side (arrow L direction side) of the engaging member 44310 is provided at the distal end portion of the engaging member 44310 that extends to the front side.

Furthermore, in a state where the board box 44100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 44300 and the engagement member 44310 is engaged with the fixing member 320, the protrusion part 44102 has a proximal end excluding the bent part 44102a. It is arranged inside the recess 44317 of the engagement member 44310 and at a position adjacent to the recessed bottom surface (slanted surface 44317a) of the recess 44317. Therefore, the bent portion 44102a can be placed at a position overlapping the engagement member 44310 when viewed from the front.

As a result, the board box 44100 is rotated around the caulking fitting (the part pivotally supported by the support part 342) with the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 engaged, and the board box 44100 (main controller 110 ) can be prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized board box.

Further, the width dimension of the protruding portion 44102 in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow UD) is set to be approximately the same as the width dimension in the vertical direction of the recessed portion 44317 of the engagement member 44310. This can prevent the first piece 44311 of the engaging member 44310 from being elastically deformed inside the recess 44317 from the state in which the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 from being illegally released and the board box 44100 (main controller 110) connected to the fixing member 44320 being replaced with an incorrect board. .

In the 44th embodiment, after the board box 44100 is arranged on the back side of the back case 44300 (the position shown in FIG. 213(b)), the operator 315 is inserted between the back case 44300 and the board box 44100. The engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged with each other by operation. Thereby, the bent portion 44102a can be placed on the front side of the engaging member 44310 without the protruding portion 44102 of the board box 44100 and the engaging member 44310 coming into contact with each other.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, a case will be described in which the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged with each other before the board box 44100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 44300.

FIGS. 214(a) to 214(c) are cross-sectional views of the back case 44300. Note that FIGS. 214(a) to 214(c) correspond to the cross-sectional views of the rear case 44300 in FIG. 213(b). Further, FIGS. 214(a) to 214(c) show transition states when the board box 44100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 44300 in a state where the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged. are illustrated in order.

As shown in FIG. 214(a), in a state before the engagement member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged (a state in which the engagement member 44310 is disposed in the direction of arrow L), the engagement member 44310 is attached to the board box. It is located outside the displacement area of the protruding portion 44102 of 44100. Therefore, when the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are not engaged, the board box 44100 rotates around the caulking fitting (the part pivotally supported by the support part 342) without coming into contact with the engaging member 44310. It can be arranged on the back side of the back case 44300.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 214(b), when the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are engaged (the engaging member 44310 is disposed in the direction of arrow R), the engaging member 44310 is It is set at a position that overlaps the displacement area of the protrusion 44102 of the board box 44100.

Here, the board box 44100 is a component that includes the main controller 110 and the like, and is more expensive than other components (for example, the fixing member 44320). Therefore, with the engaging member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 engaged, the board box 44100 rotates around the caulking fitting (the part that is pivotally supported by the support part 342) and is disposed on the back side of the back case 44300. When the board box 44100 is moved, the protruding portion 44102 may come into contact with the engaging member 44310 and the board box 44100 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the 44th embodiment, since the engaging member 44310 includes the inclined surface 44317a in the recessed portion 44317, the tip portion of the protruding portion 44102 comes into contact with the inclined surface 44317a, as shown in FIG. 214(c). can be done. As a result, the protruding portion 44102 is elastically tilted toward the front side of the inclined surface 44317a (in the direction of arrow R) by using the force with which the board box 44100 is pushed toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). It can be transformed. Therefore, the tip of the protrusion 44102 can be displaced toward the front along the inclined surface 44317a while elastically deforming the protrusion 44102. As a result, damage to the board box 44100 due to the protrusion 44102 coming into contact with the engagement member 44310 can be suppressed.

Further, when the protrusion part 44102 is slid along the inclined surface 44317a, a part of the elastic recovery force of the protrusion part 44102 is generated in the direction of disengaging the fixing member 44320 from the engagement member 44310 (direction of arrow L). Therefore, when the engagement between the engagement member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 is incomplete, the engagement between the engagement member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 can be released. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) from being assembled in a state where the engagement member 44310 and the fixing member 44320 are incompletely engaged.

Note that when the bent portion 44102a is displaced to a position exceeding the front side of the engaging member 44310, the protruding portion 44102 returns its elastic deformation and is disposed in the position shown in FIGS. 213(a) and 213(b). be done.

Next, a rear case 45300 according to the 45th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 217. In the 18th embodiment or the 43rd embodiment, a case has been described in which the engaging member 18310 is engaged with either the fixing member 18320 or the board box 43100, but the rear case 45300 in the 45th embodiment Engagement member 18310 is engaged with both fixing member 320 and substrate box 45100. Note that the same parts as in each of the above embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the back case 45300 in the 45th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216. FIG. 215 is an exploded perspective front view of a rear case 45300 in the forty-fifth embodiment. 216(a) is a front view of the rear case 45300, and FIG. 216(b) is a rear view of the rear case 45300. 217(a) is a front view of the rear case 45300, and FIG. 216(b) is a rear view of the rear case 45300. Note that FIGS. 216(a) and 216(b) illustrate a state in which the engaging member 18300 is engaged with the fixing member 320 and the board box 45100, and FIG. 217(a) and FIG. A state in which the mating member 18300 is engaged only with the fixing member 320 (not engaged with the substrate box 45100) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 215 to 217, the rear case 45300 in the 45th embodiment includes a bottom wall portion 45301 that is substantially rectangular in front view, and is erected toward the front from the outer edges of the four pieces of the bottom wall portion 45301. An outer wall portion 18302 is provided, and each wall portion 45301 and 18302 forms a box shape with one side (front side) open. In addition, the back case 45300 includes an engaging member 18310 disposed on the front side (box-shaped open side (direction side of arrow F)) of the bottom wall 45301, and a back case 45300 (bottom wall 45301). ), and a fixing member 320 that fixes (spins) the board box 45100 (main controller 110).

The bottom wall portion 45301 has an opening 301a formed in the center thereof in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 45301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. be done. The bottom wall portion 45301 also includes a first opening 45301c that opens at a position facing the fixing member 45320, and a protruding portion located below the first opening 45301c (in the direction of arrow D) and protruding toward the front side. 18301b.

The protrusion 18301b is a protrusion that pivotally supports the engagement member 18310, as in the eighteenth embodiment, and protrudes from the front of the bottom wall 45301 in a cylindrical shape. Further, a hole into which a screw is screwed is provided in the protruding end surface of the protruding portion 18301b. Thereby, by screwing the screw into the protrusion 18301b while the engagement member 18310 is disposed on the back case 18300, it is possible to prevent the engagement member 18310 from slipping out from the protrusion 18301b.

Note that the center of gravity of the engaging member 18310 pivotally supported by the back case 45300 is located closer to the opening 18302a of the outer wall 18302 than the protrusion 18301b of the back case 45300. As a result, when no external force is applied, a force that rotates the connecting portion between the first piece 18311 and the second piece 18312 in the direction protruding from the opening 18302a of the rear case 45300 due to gravity is applied to the engaging member 18310. It is affected by Therefore, when the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixing member 45320 is incomplete, the engagement member 18310 is made to protrude outside the back case 45300, and the engagement between the engagement member 18310 and the fixation member 45320 is It is possible to prevent forgetting.

The first opening 45301c is an opening for inserting the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 and the engaged portion 45101 of the board box 45100, which will be described later, and corresponds to the two engaged portions 332 and 45101. It has a long opening in the horizontal direction. This allows the engaged portion 45101 of the board box 45100 to be placed from the back side of the back case 45300 to the front side of the back case 45300 after the accessory device (rotation unit 700 is arranged inside the back case 45300). can.

Furthermore, a projecting wall 45301c1 for engaging a locking portion 331 formed on one side (arrow R direction side) of the fixing member 45320 is provided protrudingly from the edge of the first opening 45301c. The tip of the projecting wall 45301c1 is bent in the direction (direction of arrow R) opposite to the direction of displacement (direction of arrow L) when an engaging member 18310 (described later) is engaged with the engaged portion 45101. As a result, when the engaging member 18310 is engaged with the engaged portion 45101, the fixed member 45320 moves in the direction of displacement of the engaging member 18310 as the engaged portion 45101 is pressed by the engaging member 18310. , it is possible to suppress the projecting wall 45301c1 from slipping out from the opening of the locking portion 331. As a result, it is possible to suppress the engagement between one side (arrow R direction side) of the fixing member 45320 and the back case 45300 from being disengaged.

As described in the eighteenth embodiment, the protruding portion 18301b is a member that pivotally supports the engagement member 18310, and protrudes from the front of the bottom wall portion 45301 in a cylindrical shape. Therefore, the engaging member 18310 is arranged in the back case 45300 in a rotatable state about the center of the protrusion 18310b.

The board box 45100 has a horizontally long rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and the main controller 110 is disposed inside. Further, the board box 45100 includes a bearing part 117 protruding from one end (in the direction of arrow R) and an engaged part 45101 protruding from the front of the board box 45100.

The engaged portion 45101 is a portion that engages with the engaging member 18310 when the tip of one side is inserted inside the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320, and the substrate box 45100 is connected to the back case 45300 (bottom). In the state where the wall portion 45301) is disposed on the back side (the position shown in FIG. 216(a)), the protruding dimension toward the back case 45300 side (in the direction of arrow F) is the engagement disposed on the back case 45300. The dimension is set to exceed the front surface of member 18310. Further, the engaged portion 45101 includes an opening portion 45101a that opens in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in a front view on the front side of the bottom wall portion 45301 of the rear case 45300.

The opening 45101a is an opening into which the first piece 18311 of the engagement member 18310 is inserted, and is opened at a position corresponding to the displacement area of the first piece 18311 of the engagement member 18310 excluding the engagement member 18316. It is formed. Thereby, the engaging member 18310 can be inserted inside the opening 45101a, and the engaged portion 45101 and the engaging portion 45310 can be engaged.

Further, the engaged portion 45101 is spaced apart from the engaged portion 332 of the fixed member 320 by a predetermined distance and is arranged at a different position in the direction of displacement when the engaging member 18310 is engaged with the engaged portion 332. . Thereby, after the engaging member 18310 is engaged with the fixed member 320, the engaged portion 332 of the engaged portion 45101 and the engaging member 18310 can be engaged.

Note that the distance between the engaged portion 45101 and the engaged portion 332 of the fixed member 320 is set to be greater than or equal to the length of the engaging portion 18316 in the displacement direction of the engaging member 18310. Thereby, the engaging portion 18316 of the engaging member 18310 can be arranged between the two engaged portions 332 and 45101 in front view (see FIG. 217(a)). As a result, it is possible to engage the engagement member 18310 with the fixing member 320 and maintain a state in which it is not engaged with the substrate box 45100.

This makes it possible to engage the fixing member 320 and the engaging member 18310 and rotationally displace the board box 45100 with respect to the fixing member 320 with the fixing member 320 disposed on the back side of the rear case 45300. can.

According to the rear case 45300 configured as described above, when disposing the fixing member 320 and the board box 45100 on the rear case 45300 (bottom wall part 45301), first, as shown in FIG. 45100 connected with a caulking metal fitting is placed on the back side of the rear case 45300 (bottom wall portion 45301), and the engaging member 18310 is rotated to attach the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 to the fixing member 320. to be engaged with the engaged portion 332 of. Thereby, the substrate box 45100 can be supported by the fixing member 320 in a state in which the engaging member 18310 is not engaged with the board box 45100.

Therefore, the board box 45100 can be rotated around the caulking fitting (the part pivotally supported by the support part 342) at a position on the back side of the back case 45300 (bottom wall part 4531). Therefore, wiring can be easily connected to the board box 45100 (main controller 110).

Next, as shown in FIG. 217, after rotating the board box 45100 toward the rear case 45300 and placing the front of the board box 45100 in a position parallel to the back of the rear case 45300 (bottom wall portion 45301), , the engaging member 18100 is rotated toward the engaged portion 45101 side of the substrate box 45100 (in the direction of arrow L). Thereby, the tip of the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18100 can be inserted inside the opening 45101a of the engaged portion 45101. As a result, the board box 45100 can be fixed to the back side of the back case 45300.

Therefore, in the 45th embodiment, the engagement member 18300 can have the role of fixing the two members, the fixing member 320 and the board box 45100, to the back side of the back case 45300. As a result, the board box 45100 can be attached to the back side of the back case 45300 without fixing one side of the bearing part 117 side and the other side opposite to the side (arrow L direction side) to the back side of the back case 45300. can be fixed, reducing manufacturing costs.

In this case, the engaging portion (the engaging portion between the engaging member 18310 and the engaged portion 45101) for fixing the other side (arrow L direction side) of the back case 45300 to the back case 45300 The base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) can be disposed between the bottom wall portion 45301 of the base plate 60 and the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). As a result, it can be difficult to access the engaging portion of the board box 45100 from the outside of the rear case 45300 and the base plate 60. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board box 45100 from being illegally disengaged and replacing the board box 45100 (main controller 110) with an unauthorized main controller.

In addition, in order to remove the board box 45100 from the back case 45300 in the 45th embodiment, the base board 60 (see FIG. 2) and the back case 45300 are disassembled from the game board 13 (see FIG. 2), which are assembled together. After that, each accessory device (eg, rotation unit 700) disposed inside the back case 45300 (on the front side of the bottom wall portion 45301) is removed. As a result, the engagement portion between the engagement member 18310 and the substrate box 45100 can be accessed, and the first piece 18311 of the engagement member 18310 is elastically deformed to connect the substrate box 45100, the fixing member 320, and the engagement member 18310. The engagement can be released.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In the first embodiment, the ball receiving part 467 is retracted from the third position to the second position or the first position according to the drive of the drive motor KM2. The drive for retracting to the first position may be driven by a biasing spring. For example, a biasing spring is disposed between the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 and the base member 470, so that an elastic force is applied as the rack 466 or the movable rack 464 is displaced.

In this case, when the ball receiver 467 is displaced to the third position and performs the dispensing operation, by turning off the drive of the drive motor KM3, the ball receiver 467 is moved to the second position or the second position by the biasing force of the biasing spring. It can be displaced toward the 1st position.

Therefore, the ball receiving part 467 can be displaced by utilizing the time until the driving force of the drive motor KM2 is switched to the third position, so that the ejection when the game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467 can be avoided. It is possible to suppress wobbling of the lower displacement member 440 due to the reaction of the operation.

That is, when a game ball is ejected from the inside of the ball receiving part 467, the load on the lower displacement member 440 becomes lighter by the amount of the ejected game ball, and the lower displacement member 440 tends to be displaced upward due to the reaction. Immediately displacing the ball receiver 467 applies a force that displaces the base member 470 downward due to the reaction caused by the rotational displacement of the ball receiver 467, thereby canceling the reaction when the ball is ejected from the lower displacement member 440. be able to.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which two engaging protrusions 882 that restrict the rotation of the rotating body 800 are formed on the side surface of the rotating body 800 at a predetermined interval, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, a plurality of them may be arranged in a row on the side wall of the rotating body 800 at predetermined intervals. In this case, rotation of the rotating body 800 can be restricted at any position, and rotation of the rotating body 800 due to external force can be restricted when the lid member 770 is in the open state.

In the first embodiment, the opening 831 is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 800 and the game ball is thrown from the opening 831. may be formed on the side of the That is, openings may be formed on both sides of the rotating body 800 in the axial direction, one of which may be used as an inlet for the balls, and the other may be used as an outlet for the balls. In this case, since the ball throwing path can be formed inside the rotating body 800, the accessory (the rotating body 800) can be used as the ball throwing path, especially when there is no space for placing the ball on the back side of the game board 13. , it is possible to secure a throwing path without increasing the size of the game board 13.

In the first embodiment, the rotating body 800 has a cylindrical outer shape, but the outer shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be a polygon, an ellipse, or a combination thereof. In this case, since the shape of the rotating body 800 can be made complicated, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize that the effect has been switched due to the rotational displacement of the rotating body 800.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the outer circumferential surface of the rotary operation section 8654 is formed to be operable by the player, but a push-in button may be provided on the outer circumferential surface of the rotary operation section 8654. In this case, the player can not only apply rotational force to the rotational operation section 8654, but also press a push button, or perform a combination of rotational operation and push operation of the rotational operation section 8654. . As a result, it is possible to create a plurality of operation modes for the rotary operation section 8654, which can provide interest to the player.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 are in mesh with each other, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a torque limiter or the like may be interposed between the transmission gear 8651 and the transmission gear 8652 to interrupt the transmission of driving force when an overload is applied.

In this case, when the player stops the rotation of the rotary operation section 8654 in the rotating state, the transmission of the rotational driving force from the drive motor KM6 can be interrupted, and the rotation of the rotation operation section 8654 can be prevented from continuing. . As a result, when the player inputs rotation to the rotation operation section 8654 in the direction opposite to the rotation in the A direction, it is possible to prevent the rotation operation unit 8650 from breaking.

Further, when the player operates the rotation operation section 8654 and the player's finger or clothing gets caught between the rotation operation section 8654 and the upper tray 8017 on the rotation direction side, the rotation is stopped. It is possible to prevent the player's fingers or clothes from being further caught. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being pinched between the rotary operation section 8654 and the upper plate 8017 and being injured.

In the eighth embodiment, the rotational direction of the rotational operation section 8654 is set to the direction A, but the rotational direction is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 8654 may be set to the left and right with respect to the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the player can be made to perform actions accompanying the performance of the gaming machine, and the performance effect can be improved. For example, by operating the rotary operation unit 8654 by hitting it with the left hand so as to rotate it in the right direction, it is possible to perform an effect of hitting (slapping) a character or the like displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the board box 100 is disposed on the fixing member 320, and by engaging the fixing member 320 with the engaging member 310, the board box 100 is prevented from being replaced with an unauthorized board. Although the case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and other members (for example, the third pattern It may be a display device 81 or a detection device capable of detecting unauthorized input such as unauthorized radio waves or vibrations.

In the first embodiment, the first concave portion 571h, the second concave portion 571i, and the third concave portion 571j formed in the first unit 551, the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d are as follows. Although a case has been described in which they are formed at positions facing each other, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The first concave portion 571h is placed upstream of the second concave portion 571i and the third concave portion 571j, and after the flowing game ball is brought into contact with the first convex portion 564b, the second convex portion 564c, and the third convex portion 564d. , may be formed so as to be received in the second recess 571i and the third recess 571j.

In the first embodiment, the thickness of the decorative member 154 is smaller than the depth of the recess 151b of the main body 151, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative member 154 may be made of an elastically deformable material and may be formed to be thicker than the recess depth of the recess 151b of the main body portion 151. In this case, by compressing and elastically deforming the general winning a prize unit 150 when disposing it on the base plate 60, the main body part 151 can be disposed in a state in contact with the base plate 60.

In the first embodiment, when the cam member 422 is placed in the second displacement state, the forces PW1 and PW2 applied to the cam member 422 from the first link member 431 act in directions that cancel each other out. Although the case has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of the force input to the cam member 422 from the point where the end of the cam member 422 and the plate-shaped protrusion 431b come into contact may be set in the direction from that contact point toward the axis of the shaft portion 422a. . According to this, it is possible to suppress the force acting on the cam member 422 in the direction of rotation about the shaft portion 422a.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the other end of the board box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 using screws, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the other end of the board box 100 may be fixed by a seal that cannot be removed once it is engaged with the rear case 300. To explain in detail, a cylindrical sealing tool inserted through openings formed at a plurality of locations on the other end side of the back case 300 is inserted into an insertion portion recessed at a plurality of locations on the back side of the back case 300. By engaging the insertion portion and the sealing tool, the board box 100 is disposed on the back side of the back case 300 in a non-rotatable (operable) state.

Note that when removing the board box 100, the other end side of the board box 100 can be removed from the back case 300 by cutting the engagement portion between the insertion portion and the sealing tool. Moreover, when disposing the other end side of the board box 100 in the back case 300 again, insert a new sealing tool into the unused opening of the board box 100, and insert the new seal into the unused insertion part of the back case 300. By engaging with the board box 100, the other end side of the board box 100 can be disposed in the rear case 300.

In the first embodiment, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view is formed larger than the opening shape of the second opening 60b, and the end of the decorative member 154 overlaps the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction. Although a case has been described in which the device is arranged in a state in which the device is placed in the state, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the outer shape of the decorative member 154 when viewed from the front may be set to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b.

In this case, by forming the decorative member 154 of the general winning a prize opening unit 150 and the decorative member 60c of the base plate 60 from the same material, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c are formed from a single sheet, By cutting the decorative member 154 from the sheet, the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c can be formed. Therefore, since it is not necessary to form the decorative member 154 in a separate process, the yield when forming the decorative member 154 can be improved.

Note that when the outer shape of the decorative member 154 in front view is formed to be substantially the same as the opening shape of the second opening 60b, the decorative member 154 is arranged inside the second opening 60b, and the decorative member 154 and It is preferable that the front surface of the decorative member 60c be placed on the same plane. In this case, since the decorative surfaces of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c match in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, the player can recognize the decorations of the decorative member 154 and the decorative member 60c as one decoration.

In the first embodiment, the first recess 571h is provided on the inner surface of the front side (direction of arrow F) of the throwing path of the game ball of the first unit 551 to protrude toward the back side (direction of arrow B); A second convex portion 571i, a third convex portion 571k are formed, and a first concave portion 571h, a second concave portion 571i and Although the case where the third recess 571j is provided has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, even if the first recess 571h, the second recess 571i, and the third recess 571j and the first recess 571h, the second convex part 571i, and the third convex part 571k are formed on the inner surface of the opposite side in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. good.

Further, a recessed portion recessed toward the front image may be formed on the inner surface on the front side at a position facing the second recessed portion 571i. In this case, since the concave portion is provided in the ball throwing space of the curved path WK1, the ball throwing space can be enlarged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down too slowly on the curved path WK1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from staying on the curved path WK1.

In the ninth embodiment, a case has been described in which the inclined surface 9431b1 protrudes toward the front side toward the cam member 422, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined surface 9431b1 may be formed as an inclined surface whose protrusion amount toward the front side decreases as it approaches the cam member 422.

In this case, when the lower displacement unit 400 is in the second displacement state and the end of the cam member 422 comes into contact with the plate-like projection 9531a, the cam member 422 can be pressed against the curved wall portion 411e of the front base 411. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the cam member 422 from swinging back and forth, and it is possible to easily maintain the lower displacement member 440 in the second displacement state.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the light emitting body 11491a is formed at a position higher (in the direction of arrow U) than the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitter 11491a may be disposed at approximately the same height as the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467. In this case, it is preferable that the height position of the transparent part 11451b is formed from the center of the game ball received in the ball receiving part 467 to the upper side of the center.

According to this, when a part of the light emitted from the light emitter 11491a is blocked by the game ball, the shadow of the game ball formed in the transparent part 11451b is formed into a semicircular shape by the upper hemisphere of the game ball. can. This allows the roundness of the game ball to be formed in the shadow formed in the transparent portion 11451b, making it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball received in the ball receiving portion 467.

In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments described above, the case where the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are displaced by the load of the game ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a sensor is attached to the ball receiver 12467, 39467 to detect that a game ball has passed through the ball throwing path, and when the game ball is detected by the sensor, the third piece 12467e, 39467e may be displaced alone. According to this, there is no need to displace the second pieces 12467d, 39467d due to the load of the game ball, so the reliability of displacement of the ball receiving parts 12467, 39467 can be improved. In this case, a driving device that independently displaces the third pieces 12467e and 39467e is disposed in the ball receiving portions 12467 and 39467.

In the twelfth and thirty-ninth embodiments described above, a case has been described in which the rotation axes for the rotational displacement of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e are formed in the first pieces 12467c and 39467c, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shaft portions 12467e3, 39467e3 of the third pieces 12467e, 39467e may be inserted into openings formed in the rack 466, and the third pieces 12467e, 39467e may be rotationally displaced with respect to the rack 466. In this case, since it is possible to easily increase the distance between the rotating shaft and the connecting portion of the second pieces 12467d and 39467d, it is possible to easily increase the amount of displacement of the third pieces 12467e and 39467e relative to the amount of displacement of the second pieces 12467d and 39467d. . As a result, the shielding plate 12467e1 of the third piece 12467e can be easily arranged on the front side of the light emitter 11491a. In this case, the opening formed in the rack 466 is formed into an elongated hole in which the shaft portions 12467e3 and 39467e3 can slide.

In the thirteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the second path member 13570 is moved in the front-rear direction with respect to the first path member 13560, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. The two-path member 13570 may be moved in the front-back direction. In this case, the relative positional relationship between the second path member 13570 and the front of the base plate 60 (gaming board 13) prevents the player from grasping the distance between the opposing first and second members. can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the first, tenth, and twenty-fifth embodiments, the decorative members 154, 10154, and 25154 are attached using adhesive tapes 154a, 10154a, and 25154a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, An adhesive made of liquid may also be used.

In the thirteenth, thirty-second, thirty-third, thirty-fourth, and thirty-fifth embodiments, the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, and 35560 disposed on the front side are made of a non-light-transmitting material. Although a case has been described in which the facing space between the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member 13570, 32570, 34570 is made difficult to be recognized by the player, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a slit-like opening with a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball is formed in the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560. The game ball flowing down between the opposing second path members 13570, 32570, and 34570 may be visually recognized by the player through the opening. In this case, the distance between the plurality of slit-shaped openings to the adjacent opening is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Thereby, the game ball flowing down between the first path members 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path members 13570, 32570, 34570 can be recognized by the player through the opening.

In addition, a circular opening smaller than the diameter of the game ball is formed in the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560, and the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 The game ball flowing down between the opposing path members 13570, 32570, and 34570 may be visually recognized by the player through the opening. In this case, the adjacent width dimensions of the plurality of openings are formed to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the opening of the opening can be made smaller than when the opening is formed in a slit shape, the first path member 13560, 32560, 33560, 34560, 35560 and the second path member can be connected to each other through the opening. 13570, 32570, and 34570 from facing each other can be suppressed from being recognized by the player.

In the above-mentioned eighteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the portion to which the engaging member 18310 is engaged (the engaged portion 18332) is formed in the fixed member 18320, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaged portion 18332 to which the engaging member 18310 is engaged may be formed in the substrate box 100 that is caulked and fixed to the fixing member 18320.

In this case, when the board box 100 is not disposed in the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310 cannot be placed inside the rear case 18300, and the engaging member 18310 is pushed to the outside of the rear case 18300 due to its own weight. It can be in a prominent state.

As a result, if the board box 100 is forgotten to be attached to the rear case 18300, the engaging member 18310 is hooked onto the outer frame 11 when the game board 18013 is arranged on the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 164(b)). ), it is possible to remind the operator that he or she has forgotten to attach the board box 100.

In the twenty-first embodiment described above, the insertion portion 21724b of the rotation unit 21700 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 is inserted into the inside of the recess 317 of the engagement member 310. Although the case where the engagement between the engaging member 310 and the fixing member 320 is prevented from being illegally released has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an insertion portion 21724b inserted into the recess 317 of the engagement member 310 may be formed in the substrate box 100 disposed on the fixing member 320.

In this case, the insertion portion 21724b is provided on the front side of the bottom wall portion 301 through an opening formed in the fixing member 320. Further, the insertion portion 21724b is formed at a portion into which a shaft to be caulked and fixed to the fixing member 320 is inserted. As a result, even if the bearing portion 117 of the board box 100 is cut and illegally removed from the back case 21300, the insertion portion 21724b can be left behind inside the recess 317 of the engagement member 310. As a result, it may be difficult to remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300.

Therefore, when replacing the fixing member 320, it is necessary to correctly caulk the portion between the board box 100 and the fixing member 320 (cut the caulked portion). This makes it difficult to illegally remove the fixing member 320 from the back case 21300, thereby preventing the fixing member 320 from being removed and replaced with an unauthorized board box.

In the forty-second embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a light emitting board that irradiates light is disposed on the upright member 42060f, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a drive member disposed on the base plate 42060 It may also be formed as a control board for controlling the game ball or a passage for throwing game balls.

In the forty-third embodiment, the engaged part 43101 that the engaging member 18310 engages is formed on the bearing part 117 side of the board box 43100, and the other side opposite to the bearing part 117 side is attached to the back case with screws. Although the case where the arrangement is described has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaging member 18310 is arranged on the other front side of the board box 43100 (in the left-right direction (opposite side in the arrow LR direction) from the 43rd embodiment), and the engaged part 43101 is placed on the bearing of the board box 43100. It may be formed on the other side opposite to the portion 117 side.The fastening between the rear case 43300 and the board box 43100 using screws may be eliminated.

According to this, one side of the bearing part 117 side of the board box 43100 can be engaged with the projecting wall 43301c1 of the rear case 43300 and the locking part 331 of the fixing member 43320, and the bearing part 117 of the board box 43100 The other side opposite to the side can be engaged with the engagement member 18310 and the substrate box 43100. Therefore, there is no need to fasten one side of the substrate box 43100 on the bearing portion 117 side and the other side on the opposite side, so that the number of work steps can be reduced accordingly.

In the forty-fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the engaging member 18310 is engaged with both the fixing member 320 and the board box 45100, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engaging members 18310 may be provided at two locations on the front of the bottom wall portion 45301 of the rear case 45300, and each engaging member 18310 may be engaged with the fixing member 320 and the board box 45100.

In the forty-fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the first piece 18311 of the engaging member 18310 is inserted into the openings formed in the fixed member 320 and the engaged parts 332, 45101 of the board box 45100, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, a portion of the engaging member 18310 that is inserted into the opening of the engaged portion 332 and a portion that is inserted into the opening of the engaged portion 45101 may be formed separately.

According to this, the engaging member 18310 that engages with the fixing member 320 and the substrate box 45100 can be formed from one member, and the engagement position between the fixing member 320 and the substrate box 45100 can be given a degree of freedom. That is, it is no longer necessary to arrange the engaged portion 332 of the fixing member 320 and the engaged portion 45101 of the board box 45100 close to each other, and the degree of freedom in designing the fixing member 320 and the board box 45100 can be improved.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The changing display of the identification information is started, and the changing display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A displacement member formed to be displaceable from a reference position in a first direction and capable of moving a game ball as the game ball is displaced in the first direction, and a game from outside the trajectory area of the displacement member to the trajectory area of the displacement member. and a regulating means for regulating throwing of a ball, characterized in that the displacement member is formed to be displaceable from the reference position in a second direction opposite to the first direction. A gaming machine A1.

Here, a displacement member is formed to be displaceable from a reference position in a first direction, and is formed to be able to move a game ball as the game ball is displaced in the first direction, and A gaming machine is known that includes a regulating means for regulating the throwing of a game ball to a player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, by regulating the regulating means, it is possible to suppress more than a specified number of game balls from being thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the regulating means malfunctions due to sticking or wear, for example, there is a risk that more than the specified number of game balls will be thrown toward the orbital area of the displacement member. In this case, there is a problem that problems may occur due to the number of game balls exceeding the specified number. That is, for example, there was a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number would enter the drive mechanism of the displacement member and become caught in the movable part, causing damage. Alternatively, there was a risk that game balls exceeding the specified number would flow out of the game area (for example, to the back side of the game board).

On the other hand, according to gaming machine A1, the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable from the reference position in the second direction opposite to the first direction, so the trajectory area of the displacement member can be expanded accordingly. Therefore, for example, even if the regulating means malfunctions and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the expanded trajectory area of the displacement member prevents the game balls that exceed the specified number from being thrown into the orbital area. I can accept it. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number from entering the drive mechanism part of the displacement member or flowing out of the gaming area, and as a result, problems caused by game balls exceeding the specified number can be prevented. It can be made difficult to occur.

The gaming machine A1 includes a passage member formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass and whose downstream side is communicated with the orbital region of the displacement member, and the regulating means restricts passage of the game ball in the passage member. Characteristic gaming machine A2.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A1, the game machine A2 is provided with a passage member formed as a passage through which a game ball can pass and whose downstream side is communicated with the orbital region of the displacement member, and the regulating means prevents the game in the passage member. Since the passage of balls is restricted, for example, even if the regulating means malfunctions and more than the specified number of game balls are thrown, the game balls exceeding the specified number will be transferred to the displacement member through the passage member. The ball can be reliably thrown to the orbital area. As a result, problems caused by game balls exceeding the specified number can be made less likely to occur.

In gaming machine A2, the displacement member is formed to be able to receive and hold a prescribed number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and at least change the diameter of the game balls in a second direction from the reference position. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to be displaced by a distance exceeding .

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A2, the displacement member is formed to be able to receive and hold a prescribed number of game balls thrown from the passage member at the reference position, and also to Since it is formed so that it can be displaced by at least a distance exceeding the diameter of the game ball in the direction, after receiving the specified number of game balls at the reference position, by displacing the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction, the specified number can be received. It is possible to throw the game balls exceeding the amount to the orbital region of the displacement member (the region on the first direction side of the displacement member). Therefore, the game balls exceeding the specified number can be moved as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction.

In this case, the displacement member holds the specified number of game balls, and the game balls exceeding the specified number can be thrown to the orbit area, so these specified number of game balls and the game balls exceeding the specified number are separated. can do. Therefore, for example, by displacing the displacement member in the first direction, it is possible to maintain the state in which the displacement member holds a prescribed number of game balls, and to discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the orbital area. It becomes possible.

The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the displacement member is configured to be able to change its posture when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the displacement member is formed so that its posture can be changed when it is displaced in the first direction and reaches a predetermined position. While it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the displacement member holds the ball and prevent the game ball from falling from the displacement member, when it reaches a predetermined position, the change in the posture of the displacement member is used to release the game ball. can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

The gaming machine A4 includes a recess that is recessed in a trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and the displacement member is recessed in the recess when it is displaced in the first direction. A gaming machine A5 comprising a protrusion that is engaged and is formed so that its posture can be changed by engaging the protrusion with the recess.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A4, the displacement member is provided with a concave portion recessed in the orbit region when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction from the reference position, and the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. The structure includes a protrusion that is engaged with the recess when the displacement member is moved, and the attitude of the displacement member can be changed by engaging the protrusion with the recess. Therefore, the structure for changing the attitude of the displacement member can be simplified.

In the game machine A5, the protrusion is provided to protrude from the displacement member in the first direction, and the protrusion tip is in contact with the lower half of the game ball thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member. A gaming machine A6 characterized by being touched.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A5, the protrusion is provided to protrude from the displacement member in the first direction, and the tip of the protrusion can be used to prevent the game ball thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member. (In other words, it is formed so that it can come into contact with the lower half of the game balls exceeding the specified number), so when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball can be moved by touching the lower half of the game ball with the protrusion. You can move it while pressing it. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily ejected from the orbit area.

In addition, the protrusion is interposed between the specified number of game balls held by the displacement member and the game balls thrown to the orbital region of the displacement member (game balls exceeding the specified number), so that such protrusion is prevented. A distance can be secured between the specified number of game balls and the game balls exceeding the specified number by the protruding length of the part. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the orbital area.

Furthermore, since the protrusion serves both the role of changing the posture of the displacement member by engaging with the recess and the role of moving the game ball while pushing its lower half, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product can be improved. Cost reduction can be achieved.

A gaming machine A7 in gaming machine A5 or A6, wherein the size of the recess in the first direction is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A5 or A6, the size of the recessed portion in the first direction is made smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, so that the gaming ball thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member is (That is, game balls exceeding the specified number) can easily pass through the recessed portion when being moved as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. As a result, game balls exceeding the specified number can be easily ejected from the orbit area.

In any of gaming machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in a trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and is higher than the recess. The game ball includes a wall portion located on the first direction side, and when the game ball thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member is moved as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball is moved toward the wall portion. The game machine A8 is characterized in that a change in posture of the displacement member is regulated by contacting the displacement member with the displacement member.

According to the game machine A8, in any of the game machines A5 to A7, the displacement member is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball in the trajectory area when the displacement member is displaced from the reference position in the first direction, and has a recessed portion. When a game ball thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member is moved in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member in the first direction, the game ball is located on the first direction side of the wall. Since the displacement member is in contact with the displacement member, the posture change of the displacement member can be regulated, so while the displacement member maintains the state in which it holds the specified number of game balls, it only releases game balls that exceed the specified number. It can be easily ejected from the orbital area.

That is, since the wall part is erected at a height lower than the radius of the game ball, when the game ball is moved by being pushed by the protrusion as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the game ball By bringing the lower half of the ball into contact with the wall, the game ball can easily get over the wall. In this case, the game ball is brought into contact with the displacement member (that is, the game ball is interposed between the displacement member and the wall), and a reaction force can be applied from the game ball to the displacement member, so that the displacement member Changes in posture can be regulated, and falling of the prescribed number of game balls held by the displacement member can be suppressed. As a result, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls, only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number can be easily discharged from the orbital area.

On the other hand, if no game balls (that is, more than a specified number of game balls) are thrown into the orbital region of the displacement member, no game balls are interposed between the wall and the displacement member, so the protrusion is inserted into the recess. By being engaged, the attitude of the displacement member can be changed. As a result, by utilizing the change in the posture of the displacement member, it is possible to easily discharge the prescribed number of game balls (namely, the game balls held by the displacement member) from the displacement member.

A gaming machine A9 in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, wherein the regulating means is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the regulating means is formed to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the regulating means is configured to be operable in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member. Throwing of game balls to the orbital region of the member can be regulated or allowed. In other words, regulation or permission of throwing a game ball can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member. It is not necessary to control the driving means for driving the regulating means or each of these means, and accordingly, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability of the operation.

In the game machine A9, the regulating means allows the game ball to be thrown into the trajectory area of the displacement member in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position in the second direction. Characteristic gaming machine A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A9, the regulating means operates in conjunction with the displacement of the displacement member from the reference position to the second direction to prevent the game ball from moving into the trajectory area of the displacement member. Since the ball is allowed to be thrown, it is possible to reliably throw the game ball to the orbital region of the displacement member and the region on the first direction side of the displacement member.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A10, a base member on which the displacement member is disposed to be displaceable, and a base member disposed vertically below and vertically above the end of the base member on the first direction side; A gaming machine A11 is characterized in that it is equipped with a collecting member having an opening at the bottom.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A10, the displacing member is disposed vertically below the base member on which the displaceable member is displaceably disposed, and the end on the first direction side of the base member. and a collection member having an opening vertically upward, so that the game balls that are moved as the displacement member moves in the first direction and are ejected from the trajectory area of the displacement member (i.e., the number exceeding the specified number) are Game balls) can be received and collected through the opening of the collection member.

In the game machine A11, the base member is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and the opening of the collection member is formed at least in the first position in the base member displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position. A gaming machine A12 characterized in that it is formed in a size that is located vertically below the end on the direction side.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A11, the base member is formed to be movable between the retracted position and the displaced position, and the opening of the collection member can be displaced at least to the retracted position or the displaced position. Since the base member is formed in a size that is located vertically below the end on the first direction side of the base member, even if the base member is displaced to the retracted position or the displaced position, it will not be ejected from the orbital area of the displaced member. The game balls (that is, the game balls in excess of the specified number) can be received through the opening of the collection member and collected.

Game machine A13, characterized in that any one of game machines A5 to A8 includes an insertion member that is inserted into the recessed space of the recess to restrict engagement of the protrusion with the recess. .

According to the gaming machine A13, any one of the gaming machines A5 to A8 includes an insertion member that is inserted into the recessed space of the recess to prevent the protrusion from engaging with the recess. With the displacement in the first direction, it is possible to suppress the attitude of the displacement member from changing when ejecting game balls exceeding the specified number from the orbital region of the displacement member. Therefore, while maintaining the state in which the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls, it is possible to easily discharge only the game balls exceeding the prescribed number from the orbital area.

The gaming machine A13 includes a base member that is formed to be displaceable between a retracted position and a displaced position, and on which the displaceable member is disposed so as to be displaceable, and the insertion member is arranged such that the base member is displaced to the retracted position. The game machine A14 is characterized in that when the base member is moved to a displacement position, the base member is inserted into the recess space of the recess, and when the base member is displaced to a displacement position, it is separated from the recess space of the recess.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine A13, when the base member is displaced to the retracted position, the insertion member is inserted into the recessed space of the recess, so that the displacement member in the first direction is Accordingly, when the game balls exceeding the prescribed number are discharged from the orbital area of the displacement member, the posture of the displacement member is suppressed from being changed, and the displacement member holds the prescribed number of game balls. On the other hand, when the base member is displaced to the displacement position, the insertion member is separated from the recessed space of the recess, so that the protrusion engages with the recess as the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. By being combined, the attitude of the displacement member can be changed and a prescribed number of game balls can be easily discharged from the displacement member.

<About the concept of the invention using the distribution unit 500 as an example>
A downstream passage through which the game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downstream passage, and a game ball flowing down the downstream passage into one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine comprising a distributing means for distributing game balls, the displacing member being formed to be displaceable and receiving game balls from the first branch passage, the displacing member coming into contact with the distributing means and being displaced. The game machine B1 is characterized in that the distribution means is displaced to switch the distribution destination.

Here, there is a downstream passage through which the game ball flows, a first branch passage and a second branch passage that branch from the downstream passage, and a game ball that has flown down the downstream passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine equipped with an allocating means for allocating is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-223176). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game balls flowing down the flow passage are alternately distributed one ball at a time to the first branch passage and the second branch passage, so the game balls flowing down the flow passage are It is distributed equally (that is, half each) to the first branch passage and the second branch passage. That is, there was a problem in that the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage could not be changed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, it is provided with a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and receives the game balls from the first branch passage, and the displacement member comes into contact with the distribution means and is displaced, thereby distributing the game balls. Since the means is displaced and the distribution destination is switched, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage or the second branch passage can be changed according to the displacement of the displacement member. That is, the number of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be changed.

According to the game machine B1, the distributing means can be displaced using the displacement of the displacing member, so there is no need to separately provide a drive means or a transmission mechanism for displacing the distributing means. can. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and product costs can be reduced.

In addition, for example, in a structure in which the displacement of the sorting means is controlled using position detection by a sensor device or drive by a driving means, reliability of the sorting operation of the sorting means is reduced due to malfunction due to poor detection or control. However, according to the game machine B1, the allocation destination by the allocation means can be switched mechanically in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member, so that the reliability of the allocation operation can be improved.

In particular, since the displacement member is a member that receives game balls from the first branch passage, the distribution destination of the distribution means can be switched to the first branch passage in synchronization with the displacement of the displacement member. The game balls distributed to the passage can be surely received by the displacement member.

The gaming machine B1 includes a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the distributing means to maintain the distribution destination by the distributing means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the displacing member By displacing the distributing means in a direction opposing the direction of the biasing force, the distribution destination by the distributing means is switched to the other of the first branch passage or the second branch passage, and the biasing force A game machine B2 characterized in that the destination of distribution by the distribution means is returned to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage by the biasing force of the means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B1, a biasing force is applied to the distributing means to maintain the destination of the distributing device by the distributing means in either the first branch passage or the second branch passage. Since the distribution means is provided, it is possible to prevent the distribution destinations by the distribution means from being changed inadvertently. In this case, after the distribution means is displaced with the displacement of the displacement member and the distribution destination is switched, the return to the distribution destination before switching can be performed by the urging force of the urging means, so that the displacement It is not necessary for the member to be in contact with the distribution means. That is, the displacement member can be separated from the distribution means. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the movable range of the displacement member can be increased.

A gaming machine B3 in the gaming machine B2, wherein the biasing means applies a biasing force to the distributing means to maintain the destination of distribution by the distributing means in the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the biasing means applies a biasing force to the distributing means to maintain the destination of distribution by the distributing means in the second branch passage, so that the displacement member It is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch passage in a state where the game balls cannot be received by the distribution means.

The gaming machine B3 includes a base member that is formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position and on which the displacement member is disposed, and when the base member is disposed at the first position. , the displacement member is capable of receiving game balls from the first branch passage and is capable of contacting the distribution means, and when the base member is disposed at the second position, the displacement member A gaming machine B4 characterized in that the member cannot receive game balls from the first branch passage and cannot come into contact with the sorting means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, it is provided with a base member that is formed to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and the displacing member is disposed on the base member. , a mode in which the displacement member is displaced with the base member disposed in the first position, and a mode in which the displacement member is displaced in a state in which the base member is disposed in the second position can be formed. Therefore, the performance effect can be increased accordingly.

In this case, when the base member is placed in the second position, the displacement member cannot receive game balls from the first branch passage, and in such a state, the displacement member cannot come into contact with the distribution means. Therefore, in a state in which the displacement member cannot receive game balls (a state in which the base member is disposed at the second position), it is possible to prevent the distribution destination by the distribution means from being switched to the first branch path.

A gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the gaming machine B4 includes a second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distributing means is disposed on the second base member.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B4, it is provided with a second base member formed as a separate member from the base member, and the distributing means is disposed on the second base member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the base member from increasing in size.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be able to be displaced at least between a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, and the displacement member is displaced to the switching position. In the state in which the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and in the state in which the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member can receive game balls from the first branch passage. A game machine B6 characterized in that the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the displacement member is formed to be able to be displaced at least between a switching position and a receiving position set at a position different from the switching position, When the displacement member is displaced to the switching position, the distribution destination by the distribution means is switched to the first branch passage, and when the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position, the displacement member receives game balls from the first branch passage. Since the game balls can be received and the destination of distribution by the distribution means is switched to the second branch passage, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the prescribed number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage.

That is, when the switching position and the receiving position are set to the same position, the displacement member receives the game balls while the distribution destination by the distribution means is still switched to the first branch path, so the displacement member There is a possibility that game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received may be distributed to the first branch passage. If a means for regulating the inflow of game balls into the first branch passage is provided separately, the structure becomes complicated, reliability decreases, and product cost increases.

On the other hand, according to game machine B6, after the displacement member is displaced to the switching position and a prescribed number (or less than the prescribed number) of game balls are distributed to the first branch passage, the displacement member is displaced to the receiving position. When this happens, the distribution destination is switched to the second branch passage, so it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number from flowing down into the first branch passage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent game balls exceeding the specified number that can be received by the displacement member from being distributed to the first branch passage. Further, since there is no need to separately provide the above-mentioned means, it is possible to improve reliability and reduce product cost.

In gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on the inner wall surface thereof, and has a resistance that provides resistance to game balls passing through the first branch passage. A game machine B7 characterized by comprising means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B6, the first branch passage is formed as one or more protrusions or recesses protruding or recessed on the inner wall surface of the first branch passage, Since the game ball is provided with a resistance means that applies resistance to the game ball, it is possible to slow down the speed of the game ball passing through the first branch passage. Therefore, since the time required for the displacement member to be displaced from the switching position to the receiving position can be lengthened accordingly, the game ball can be reliably received by the displacement member. Further, since the displacement speed required for the displacement member can be reduced, the output of the driving means can be reduced, and product costs can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B6 or B7, the distributing means includes a first projecting part and a second projecting part that are formed to be able to move in and out of the first branch passage as the distributing means is displaced; The first protruding and retracting part is formed so as to be capable of distributing game balls flowing down the downstream passage to the second branching passage by protruding into the first branch passage, and the second protruding and retracting part is configured to be able to distribute game balls flowing down the downstream passage to the second branch passage. is located on the downstream side of the first branch passage, and is formed so as to be able to restrict the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage by protruding into the first branch passage, and these first protruding and retracting parts A gaming machine B8 is characterized in that when one of the second protruding and retracting parts protrudes into the first branch passage, the other part is retracted out of the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B6 or B7, the distributing means has a first projecting and retracting section that is formed to be retractable relative to the first branch passage as the distributing means is displaced; The first projecting part includes a second projecting part, and the first projecting part is formed to be capable of distributing game balls flowing down the downstream passage to the second branching passage by protruding into the first branching passage. The first projecting part is located downstream of the first branching passage and protrudes into the first branching passage to be able to restrict the flow of game balls distributed to the first branching passage. In the state where one of the second projecting and retracting parts protrudes into the first branch passage, the other is retracted outside the first branch passage, so that the distributing means can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member. Then, only the prescribed number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

That is, the first state in which the first protruding part protrudes and distributes the game balls flowing down the flow passage to the second branch passage, and the first state in which the first protrusion part retracts allows the game balls flowing down the flow passage to be distributed to the second branch passage. A second state in which the game balls are distributed to the first branch passage; a third state in which the second protruding portion protrudes to restrict the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage (storage of game balls); By retracting the second protruding and retracting part, a fourth state can be formed in which the game balls stored in the first branch passage are caused to flow down and are received by the displacement member, and by combining these states, the specified Only a certain number of game balls can be distributed to the first branch passage and received by the displacement member.

Furthermore, according to the game machine B8, since the distribution means includes the first protrusion and retrieval part and the second protrusion and retrieval part, that is, is formed as a single component, the structure of the distribution means (the first protrusion and retrieval part and the second protrusion and retrieval part) The structure for operating the systems and demonstrating their functions) can be simplified. Furthermore, when one of the first protruding and retracting parts protrudes into the first branch passage, the other is retracted out of the first branch passage. It is sufficient if the distributing means is also formed so as to be able to be displaced into two positions depending on the position (and receiving position). That is, by displacing the distribution means at two positions, the first to fourth states described above can be formed. Therefore, the structure of the distribution means and the structure for displacing the distribution means in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member can be simplified, and the reliability of the game ball distribution operation can be improved accordingly.

<About the concept of the invention using the distribution unit 500 as an example>
A downstream passage through which the game ball flows down, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downstream passage, and a game ball flowing down the downstream passage into one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine equipped with a distributing means for distributing game balls, characterized in that the game machine is provided with a flow state changing means located downstream of the distributing means and regulating or allowing the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. Gaming machine C1.

Here, there is a downstream passage through which the game ball flows, a first branch passage and a second branch passage branched from the downstream passage, and a game ball flowing down the downstream passage into one of the first branch passage or the second branch passage. A gaming machine equipped with an allocating means for allocating is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-223176). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the game balls flowing down the downstream passage are only distributed to one of the first branch passage and the second branch passage, so it is insufficient to provide players with interest. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, it is provided with a flow state changing means that is located downstream of the distribution means and that regulates or allows the flow of game balls in the first branch passage. can be given.

That is, by the operation of the flow state changing means, the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage is restricted and the game balls are stored in the first branch passage, and the game balls are allowed to flow down in the first branch passage. , the game balls stored in the first branch passage can be made to flow down (released). As a result, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the downstream passage into either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, there is also an operation of temporarily stopping (storing) the game balls distributed to the first branch passage. , and the action of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (release). As a result, it is possible to provide interest to the player.

The gaming machine C1 includes an integral member in which the distributing means and the flow state changing means are integrally formed, and when the destination of distribution by the distributing means is the first branch passage, the first branch passage The downward flow of game balls in the first branch passage is regulated by the downward flow state changing means, and when the destination of distribution by the allocating means is the second branch passage, the downward flow of the game balls in the first branch passage is regulated by the downward flow state change means. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that it is allowed.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, since the distributing means and the flowing state changing means are provided with an integral member formed integrally, the distributing means and the flowing state changing means are operated. The structure can be simplified and the reliability of operation can be improved. That is, when the distributing means and the flow state changing means are formed separately, they are two parts, which complicates the structure for operating these two parts and leads to a decrease in operational reliability. On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, the distribution means and the flow state changing means can be formed as a single component, so the structure can be simplified accordingly, reducing product costs and improving operational reliability. can be achieved.

Further, in this case, when the destination of distribution by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage due to the operation of the integrated member, the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, When the game balls are stored in the branch passage and the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the second branch passage, the flowing state changing means allows the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage, and the game balls are stored in the first branch passage. It is possible to make the game ball that was previously held flow down (release). That is, in addition to the operation of distributing the game balls flowing down the downstream passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the operation of temporarily stopping the flow of the game balls distributed to the first branch passage (storage); Not only can the motion of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (release) be formed, but also these motions of storing and releasing can be formed alternately in conjunction with the distribution motion.

In the game machine C2, the integral member is formed so as to be displaceable between a first state position and a second state position, and when the integral member is displaced to the first state position, the distributing means is displaceable between the first state position and the second state position. The integrated member is disposed at a position where the first branch passage is the distribution destination, and the flow state changing means is disposed at a position to restrict the flow of game balls in the first branch passage, and the integral member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, the sorting means is arranged at a position where the second branch passage is the sorting destination, and the flowing state changing means is arranged at a position which allows the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage. A gaming machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the integral member is formed to be able to be displaced between the first state position and the second state position, and when the integral member is displaced to the first state position, , the distributing means is disposed at a position where the first branch passage is the distribution destination, the flowing state changing means is disposed at a position regulating the downward flow of the game balls in the first branch passage, and the integral member is displaced to the second state position. In this state, the distributing means is disposed at a position where the second branch passage is the distributing destination, and the flowing state changing means is disposed at a position allowing the game balls to flow down in the first branch passage, so that the integrated member By displacing the ball in two positions (the first state position and the second state position), in addition to the action of distributing the game balls flowing down the downstream passage to either the first branch passage or the second branch passage, the game balls are moved to the first branch passage. It is possible to form an action of temporarily stopping the falling of the distributed game balls (storing) and an action of causing the stopped (stored) game balls to flow down (releasing), and also to perform these storing and releasing actions. , can be formed alternately in conjunction with the sorting operation. That is, by simplifying the structure, it is possible to reduce product costs and improve operational reliability.

In the gaming machine C3, the integral member is formed to be rotatable, and at least the flowing state changing means is formed to be able to move in and out of the first branch passage, and by protruding into the first branch passage, the game ball can be changed. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the gaming machine C4 is formed in a shape curved in an arc centered on the rotation axis of the integral member.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C3, the integral member is rotatably formed, and at least the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract from the first branch passage. The ball protrudes from the inner wall of the first branch passageway to prevent the game balls from flowing down, and because it is formed into an arcuate shape centered on the rotation axis of the integral member, the flow state changing means can be moved in and out of the inner wall of the first branch passage. The area of the hole opened can be reduced.

A gaming machine C5 in the gaming machine C4, wherein the flow state changing means is disposed in such a manner that the side facing the upstream side of the first branch passage is concave.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C4, the flow state changing means is arranged in such a manner that the side facing upstream of the first branch passage is concave, so that the flow state is changed to the first branch passage. In the initial state where the means starts to protrude (i.e., the state in which only the distal end side of the flow state changing means is protruded into the passageway), the shape of the distal end side of the flow state changing means can be adjusted so that it is easy to restrict the flow of the game ball. The game balls can be arranged in the same direction, and the flow of game balls distributed to the first branch passage can be easily regulated.

In addition, in a state where the flowing state changing means is maximally protruded into the first branch passage and regulating the flowing down of the game ball, the game ball can be held stably by the concave part of the flowing state changing means, so that the wild movement of the game ball can be suppressed. .

The gaming machine C4 or C5 includes a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the integrated member to bias the flow state changing means in a direction in which the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage, A gaming machine C6 characterized in that a distance to the rotation axis of the integral member is larger than a distance from the distribution means to the rotation axis of the integral member.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the gaming machine C6 includes a biasing device that applies a biasing force to the integral member to bias the flow state changing device in the direction of protruding into the first branch passage. Therefore, by using this biasing force, it is possible to easily maintain the integral member in a position in which the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage (ie, the first state position).

In this case, in the game machine C6, the distance from the flowing state changing means to the rotating shaft of the integral member is made larger than the distance from the distributing means to the rotating shaft of the integral member, so that the flowing game balls collide. Since the distance from the rotation axis is large, even when the same impact force is applied, the flow state changing means is likely to retract, and the biasing direction of the biasing means is such that the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage. By setting the flow state changing means in the direction of immersion, it is possible to suppress the flow state changing means from being retracted by the biasing force.

In the game machine C6, the integrated member is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the flow state changing means projects into the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the integral member is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage, so the integral member is The member can be easily maintained in a position in which the flow state changing means protrudes into the first branch passage (i.e., the first state position). Therefore, when the game ball collides, it is possible to further suppress the falling state changing means from being immersed by its own weight.

Furthermore, even if the biasing means falls off, the integral component is maintained in a posture in which the flowing state changing means protrudes into the first branching passage due to its own weight, thereby preventing the game ball from flowing down into the first branching passage. It can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, and the flow of game balls in the first branch passage is regulated by the flow state changing means, and the first branch passage is controlled by the flow state changing means. A game machine C8 characterized in that, in a state where a prescribed number of game balls are stored in the branch passage, the game balls flowing down the downstream passage can flow down to the second branch passage.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines C2 to C7, the distribution destination by the distribution means is set to the first branch passage, and the flowing down of the game ball in the first branch passage is changed by the flowing state changing means. When a specified number of game balls are stored in the first branch passage, the game balls flowing down the downstream passage are configured to be able to flow down to the second branch passage, so that more than the specified number of game balls can flow down. When flowing down the passage, game balls exceeding a specified number can be prevented from staying in the passage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the distribution means (the operation of assigning the distribution destination to the second branch passage) from being hindered by the game balls stuck in the downstream passage.

In the gaming machine C8, the inner wall of the downstream passage facing the second branch passage is configured to move the game balls flowing down the downstream passage to the end of the prescribed number of game balls stored in the first branch passage. A game machine C9 is formed so as to be able to be guided to the side surface of the game ball on the second branch passage side.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C8, the inner wall of the downstream passageway facing the second branching passage allows the game balls flowing down the downstream passageway to be controlled by the specified number of balls stored in the first branching passage. Since it is formed so that the last game ball among the game balls can be guided to the side surface on the second branch passage side, the game ball flowing down the flowing passage collides with the last game ball among the specified number of game balls. After that, it can be easily flowed down to the second branch passage.

Incidentally, the last game ball among the prescribed number of game balls means the game ball located on the upstream side (on the opposite side to the flow state changing means). Further, when the specified number is 1, the last game ball means the game ball itself stored in the first branch passage.

A gaming machine C10 in the gaming machine C8 or C9, wherein the downstream end of the downstream passage is formed in a different direction from the upstream end of the first branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C8 or C9, the downstream end of the downstream passage is formed in a different direction from the upstream end of the first branch passage, so that the downstream passage can be When a flowing game ball collides with the last game ball out of a specified number of game balls stored in the first branch passage, the direction of the repulsive force acting on the last game ball is determined by the first branch passage. The flow direction can be different from the flow direction at the upstream end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tail game ball from flying out from the upstream end of the first branch passage and flowing into the second branch passage due to the repulsive force upon collision.

In any one of gaming machines C2 to C10, the distribution means is formed to be able to appear and retract with respect to the downstream passage or the first branch passage, and the position of the distributing unit is located in the downstream end of the downstream passage in the downstream direction. A gaming machine C11 characterized in that the inner wall is an extension of the inner wall.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C2 to C10, the distributing means is formed so as to be able to appear and disappear with respect to the downstream passage or the first branch passage, and its appearing and retracting position is different from that of the downstream passage. Since it is an inner wall on the extension line of the downstream end of the passageway in the downstream direction, the distribution means can be made to protrude at a position close to the game balls flowing down from the downstream end of the downstream passageway. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from when the distributing means starts to protrude into the downstream passage or the first branch passage to when the game balls can be distributed. As a result, the allocation destination can be switched more reliably by the allocation means.

In the gaming machine C11, the sorting means is for projecting into the downstream passageway or the first branching passage to sort the game balls flowing down the downstream passageway to the second branching passage, and the distribution means A gaming machine C12 characterized in that the protruding direction of the means is set to point toward the upstream end of the second branch passage.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, the distributing means is protruded into the downstream passageway or the first branching passage to distribute the game balls flowing down the downstream passageway to the second branching passage. Since the protruding direction of the distributing means is set to point toward the upstream end of the second branch passage, when a game ball flowing down the downstream passage comes into contact with the distributing means during the protruding operation, The game ball can be pushed into the second branch passage with the protruding operation of the distribution means. As a result, distribution to the second branch passage can be performed more reliably.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed to be inclined downwardly toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed to be able to roll on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity, and the flowing down state A game machine C13 characterized in that the changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract into the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C1 to C12, the first branch passage is formed to be inclined downward toward the downstream, and the game ball is formed on the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. The flow state changing means is formed to be able to roll, and the flow state changing means is formed to be able to move in and out of the first branch passage from the inner wall on the lower side in the direction of gravity. It is possible to shorten the time required to reach a state where the flow of the ball can be regulated. As a result, when the distribution destination of the distribution means is switched from the second branch passage to the first branch passage and the game ball is distributed to the first branch passage, the flow state changing means is used to regulate the flow of the game ball. The protrusion can be easily fixed in time.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C13, the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to move in and out of the first branch passage, and at least in the state of maximally protruding into the first branch passage, the flow state changing means A game machine C14 characterized in that a force component is applied from the game ball to the flowing state changing means.

According to the game machine C14, in any of the game machines C1 to C13, the flow state changing means is formed so as to be able to appear and retract with respect to the first branch passage, and at least in the state of protruding to the maximum into the first branch passage, the flow state changing means does not protrude. Since a force component in the direction of the ball is applied from the game ball to the flow state changing means, when regulating the flow of the game ball distributed to the first branch passage, the impact of the game ball colliding with the ball causes the ball to flow downward. It is possible to prevent the state changing means from becoming immersed. Therefore, it is possible to easily control the flow of game balls.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, one side of which is disposed displaceably on the base member, and a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, the base member displaces when the displaceable member is displaced. A gaming machine D1 comprising a suppressing means for suppressing a reaction of a member.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a base member, a base member whose one side is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member (for example, , JP 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, in addition to the effect of displacing the base member between an extended position where the base member is extended into the gaming area and visible to the player and a retracted position where the base member is retreated from the gaming area, the base member is It is possible to perform an effect of displacing the displacement member in a state where it is placed in the extended position.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, one side of the base member is disposed on the base member so that it can be displaced, so when the displaceable member is displaced, the base member wobbles with respect to the base member using the one side as a fulcrum. There was a problem in that it was easy for this to occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since it is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the reaction of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member, the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member when the displacement member is displaced is suppressed. can do.

Note that the reaction force accompanying the displacement of the displacement member includes, for example, one generated due to a change in the center of gravity due to the displacement of the displacement member, and one generated due to the action of inertial force due to an increase or decrease in the displacement speed (change in acceleration) of the displacement member. Examples include those generated due to a reaction force when a displacement member is displaced and ejects a game ball.

In the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member displaceably disposed on the base member, the displacement member is formed to be able to hold and emit a game ball, and the arrangement member is configured to: A gaming machine D2 characterized in that the gaming machine D2 is formed to be able to be displaced when a game ball is ejected from the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the suppressing means includes an arrangement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displacing member is formed to be able to hold and eject the gaming ball. Since the arrangement member is formed to be able to be displaced when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling of the base member with respect to the base member. That is, when a game ball is launched from a displacement member, the center of gravity position of the base member is changed by the weight of the game ball, and for example, the center of gravity position of the base member is moved in a direction that offsets the change in the center of gravity position due to the launch of the game ball. When a configuration in which the installation member is displaced is adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of wobbling of the base member due to a change in the center of gravity position. In addition, when a game ball is fired from the displacement member, the base member receives a reaction due to the firing of the game ball. When adopted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of wobbling of the base member due to reaction.

A game machine D3, which is the game machine D1 or D2, and includes a reverse member that is displaced with at least a displacement component that is opposite to the displacement direction of the displacement member when the displacement member is displaced.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D1 or D2, when the displacement member is displaced, a reverse member is displaced with at least a displacement component in the opposite direction to the displacement direction of the displacement member. Therefore, the change in the center of gravity position of the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be reduced by the displacement of the opposite member. As a result, wobbling of the base member due to changes in the center of gravity can be suppressed.

Note that if the configuration is such that the displacement of the opposite member is started when the displacement of the displacement member is started, at least a portion of the inertial forces of both can be canceled out. As a result, wobbling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

The gaming machine D2 or D3 is characterized by comprising a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the disposed member or (and) the reverse member to displace the disposed member or (and) the reverse member. Game machine D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D2 or D3, there is a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement of the displacement member to the disposed member or (and) the reverse member to displace the disposed member or (and) the reverse member. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a driving means for displacing the disposed member and/or the reverse member. That is, the driving means for displacing the displacement member can also be used as the driving means for displacing the disposed member and/or the opposite member. Therefore, the weight of the base member can be reduced by that much, and its wobbling can be easily suppressed.

In addition, since it is possible to displace the disposed or (and) opposite member mechanically synchronized with the displacement of the displaceable member, for example, the position of the displaceable member can be detected by a sensor device, and the disposed or disposed member can be disposed in accordance with the detection result. Control for driving the member or (and) reverse member by a driving means is not required, which reduces product costs and improves the reliability of the displacement operation of the displacement member or (and) reverse member relative to the displacement member. can be secured.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member may start displacement from a second position, or start displacement from a first position closer to one side of the base member than the second position. A gaming machine D5, which is formed so as to be able to form, and starts displacement from the first position at least when the base member is placed at a predetermined position with respect to the base member.

Here, when the displacement member is displaced from a stopped state, the change in acceleration is maximum, so that the base member is likely to wobble due to the influence of inertial force.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement member starts displacing from the second position, and is located on one side of the base member from the second position. The base member is formed so as to be able to form a mode in which the displacement starts from a first position close to In the visible extended position), the displacement starts from the first position, so that shaking of the base member can be suppressed. That is, since the first position is closer to one side of the base member than the second position, by setting the first position as the starting position for displacement of the displacement member, the weight of the displacement member can be reduced from the base member. The member can be kept close to the fulcrum at which it wobbles with respect to the base member, and the effect of inertial force when the displacing member is displaced from a stopped state can be made less likely to act on the base member. As a result, wobbling of the base member can be easily suppressed.

A game machine D5 comprising a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member having a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear, and the displacement member is disposed on the rack member. Machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine D5, the game machine D6 includes a pinion gear disposed on the base member and a rack member in which a rack gear meshed with the pinion gear is formed, and the rack member is provided with a displacement member. is arranged, so when starting the displacement of the displacement member from the first position, not only the weight of the rack member but also the weight of the rack member is It can be kept close to the fulcrum (the fulcrum point when shaking). As a result, wobbling of the base member when the displacement member is displaced from the stopped state can be easily suppressed.

A gaming machine D7 in the gaming machine D6, wherein the displacement direction when the displacement member starts to be displaced from the first position is a direction in which it moves away from one side of the base member.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D6, the displacement direction when the displacement member starts displacement from the first position is a direction in which the displacement member moves away from one side of the base member. In the state where the rack member is disposed on the base member, the rack member can be brought closer to one side of the base member. That is, in order for the displacement member (rack member) to be displaced in the direction away from one side of the base member, the rack member must be based on the portion on the rack gear side where the pinion gear is engaged after the displacement of the displacement member is started. It will be directed towards one side of the member. Therefore, the weight of the rack member can be kept closer to one side of the base member (the fulcrum when the base member wobbles relative to the base member), and as a result, when the displaceable member is displaced from a stopped state, Shaking of the base member can be easily suppressed.

Any one of the game machines D1 to D7 includes a support structure that displaceably supports one side of the base member on the base member, and a drive mechanism that drives the base member supported by the support structure, The displacement member is formed to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism includes a regulating means that restricts the base member from being displaced in a direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. A gaming machine D8 comprising:

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines D1 to D7, there is a support structure that movably supports one side of the base member on the base member, and a base member that is supported by the support structure is driven. The displacement member is formed to be able to hold and eject the game ball, and the drive mechanism is configured to displace the base member in the direction of reaction when the game ball is ejected from the displacement member. Since the regulating means is provided, it is possible to suppress the base member from being displaced relative to the base member due to a reaction. As a result, the occurrence of wobbling of the base member can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
A gaming machine equipped with a rotating drum member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer circumferential surface is disposed so as to be visible to a player, further comprising a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating drum member. Characteristic gaming machine E1.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a drum member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so that it can be seen by the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). In this gaming machine, the spinning drum member is formed into a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface is made visible to the player while rotating the spinning drum member or by stopping the spinning drum member. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is only possible to form a performance mode that allows the player to visually recognize the display on the outer circumferential surface as the spinning drum member rotates or stops, so there is little change in the performance mode, and the performance effect is limited. The problem was that it was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the displacement member is disposed movably on the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, the display on the outer peripheral surface is displayed to the player as the drum member rotates or stops. In addition to the presentation mode that is visually recognized, it is possible to form a presentation mode that displaces the displacement member, so that the presentation mode can be changed accordingly, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the drum member taken along a plane perpendicular to its rotation axis does not necessarily have to be circular, and may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer circumferential surface of the drum member does not have to be a circumferential surface, and may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

In the gaming machine E1, the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between at least a first position and a second position, and in the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is formed by the displacement member. , A game machine E2 characterized in that, in the second position, at least a portion of the displacement member protrudes radially outward of the drum member.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E1, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, a part of the outer peripheral surface of the rotation drum member is formed by the displacement member. The outer shape can be made smaller, and the space required for the rotating drum member to rotate can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, at least a portion of the displacement member is projected outward in the radial direction of the rotation drum member, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the displacement of the displacement member, resulting in a dramatic effect. can be increased. Further, for example, by rotating the drum member with the displacement member placed in the first position and arranging (displacing) the displacement member in the second position when the rotation of the drum member is stopped, A portion (displacement member) that was visually recognized as the outer circumferential surface of the drum member can be formed to protrude outward in the radial direction of the drum member, thereby increasing interest.

The gaming machine E2 is provided with a light emitting means for emitting light, the drum member is formed with an internal space, the light emitting means is disposed in the internal space, and the displacement member is disposed in the second A game machine E3 characterized in that when the drum member is displaced to the position, the outer circumferential surface of the drum member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, it is provided with a light emitting means for emitting light, and the rotating drum member is formed with an internal space, and the light emitting means is disposed in the internal space. When the displacement member is moved to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the outside, so that the light emitted by the light emitting means can be emitted to the outside, and the displacement member By being displaced to the first position, the radiation to the outside can be blocked. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

A game machine E4, which is any one of the game machines E1 to E3, and includes a drive means that generates a driving force, and a transmission means that transmits the drive force of the drive means to the drum member and the displacement member. .

Here, in order to form the drum member to be rotatable and to arrange the displacement member in the drum member so that it can be displaced, a driving means is required for each of the drum member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. Bulk. Further, when a drive means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the drum member, the weight of the drum member increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop rotation of the drum member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a driving means for generating a driving force is provided, and the driving force of the driving means is applied to the drum member and the displacement member. Since the rotation drum member is provided with a transmission means for transmitting data, the rotation drum member can be rotated and the displacement member can be displaced by using one driving means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs. Furthermore, since there is no need to mount a driving means for displacing the displacement member on the rotating drum member, the weight of the rotating drum member can be reduced, and rotation of the rotating drum member can be smoothly started or stopped.

In the game machine E4, the driving means is formed to be able to generate a rotational driving force, and the transmission means includes a rotational side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the drum member, and a rotating side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the drum member; a displacement side transmission means for transmitting rotational driving force to the displacement member; and a displacement side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force to either the rotational side transmission means or the displacement side transmission means according to the rotational direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means; A game machine E5 characterized by comprising a one-way clutch mechanism that cuts off transmission to the other side.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E4, the driving means is formed to be able to generate rotational driving force, and the transmission means is a rotational side transmission that transmits the rotational driving force of the driving means to the drum member. means, a displacement side transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and a rotational driving force is transmitted to either the rotational side transmission means or the displacement side transmission means depending on the rotational direction of the rotational driving force of the driving means. Since it is provided with a one-way clutch mechanism that interrupts transmission to the other, simply by switching the rotational direction of the drive means, it is possible to switch the drive target (the drum member or the displacement member) driven by the rotational drive force. That is, depending on the rotational direction of the driving means, it is possible to switch between the rotation of the drum member and the stopping of the rotation, and the displacement of the displacement member and the stopping of the displacement. Can be simplified.

In the gaming machine E5, the rotation side transmission means includes a gear train forming part or all of a transmission path for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the drum member, and one gear of the gear train. A game machine E6 comprising a load gear that is meshed with each other.

Here, in a structure that uses a one-way clutch mechanism to switch the driven object (circle drum member or displacement member) according to the rotational direction of the drive means, when the transmission of the driving force from the drive means is cut off, The drive force allows rotation or displacement in the previously driven direction. Therefore, for example, when the drive target of the driving means is switched from the drum member to the displacement member and the transmission of the driving force is cut off, the drum member becomes rotatable and continues to rotate due to inertia (rotation). There is a risk that

On the other hand, according to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E5, the rotation side transmission means is a gear train that forms part or all of the transmission path that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive means to the drum member. and a load gear meshed with one of the gears in the gear train, so even if the transmission of rotational driving force from the drive means is cut off, the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear is reduced. ) can be used to prevent the rotation drum member from continuing to rotate.

A gaming machine E7 characterized in that the gaming machine E5 or E6 is provided with a reverse rotation regulating means for regulating the rotating drum member from being rotated in a direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. .

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E5 or E6, a reverse rotation regulating means is provided for regulating the rotating drum member from being rotated in a direction opposite to the direction in which it is rotated by the rotational driving force of the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the rotating drum member from being rotated in the opposite direction due to, for example, a deviation in the center of gravity of the rotating drum member or a collision with a game ball.

In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the drum member is formed with an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is opened and the internal space is opened. A gaming machine E8 is characterized in that a gaming machine E8 is connected to a gaming area.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2 or E3, the drum member is formed with an internal space, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the drum member is opened and the internal space is communicated with the gaming area, allowing game balls flowing down the gaming area to flow into the internal space of the spinning drum member, or allowing game balls in the internal space of the spinning drum member to flow out into the gaming area. can be done. Moreover, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the outer circumferential surface of the rotation drum member is closed, thereby blocking the inflow and outflow of game balls between the internal space and the game area. As a result, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine E8, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the other side opposite to the one side is rotated to the rotation drum member. A game machine E9 is characterized in that it extends into a region.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine E8, the displacement member is rotatably supported on one side by the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the displacement member is rotatably supported on the rotation drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, Since the other side extends to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the drum member by using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine E9, the gaming machine E10 is characterized in that, when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the upper surface thereof is tilted downward from the other side toward the one side.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E9, when the displacing member is displaced to the second position, its upper surface is tilted downward from the other side toward the one side, so that the gaming area can be After the game ball that has flown down is received on the upper surface of the displacement member, the received game ball can be guided (rolled) into the internal space of the rotation drum member along the downward slope of the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area can be easily made to flow into the internal space of the drum member by using the displacement member.

A gaming machine E11, which is the gaming machine E9 or E10, further comprising a displacement setting means for regulating or permitting displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotation drum member.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E9 or E10, it is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the drum member, so that the projected displacement member Interference with other members around the drum member can be suppressed.

Any one of the gaming machines E9 to E11 is provided with a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotation drum member, and the rotation regulating member is arranged so that the displacement member is displaced to the second position, and the other side of the displacement member is moved to the second position. A gaming machine E12 characterized in that rotation of the drum member is restricted when it is extended into a gaming area.

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines E9 to E11, a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotation drum member is provided, and the rotation regulating member is arranged such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position. When the other side of the displacement member is extended to the game area, the rotation of the rotation drum member is restricted, so that the rotation drum member is rotated with the displacement member extended and positioned on its rotation trajectory. Interference of the displacement member with other members can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to suppress rotation of the drum member due to the load that is applied when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

<About the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine equipped with a rotating drum member that is formed to be rotatable and whose outer circumferential surface is arranged so as to be visible to the player, the spinning drum member has an internal space formed inside the rotating drum member, and an internal space that is connected to the outside. A gaming machine F1, characterized in that it is provided with a communication port formed to allow game balls to pass through.

Here, a game machine is known that includes a drum member that is rotatably formed and whose outer peripheral surface is arranged so that it can be seen by the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-119140). According to this gaming machine, the spinning drum member is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the display (design) on the outer peripheral surface is made visible to the player while rotating the spinning drum member or by stopping the spinning drum member. be able to. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is a problem in that the rotation drum member is not fully utilized, as it is only used as a member to hold a display on the outer circumferential surface for the player to see. Ta. That is, since the rotation drum member needs to hold a display visible to the player, it is formed relatively large. Therefore, while the space occupied by the drum member increases, the portion other than the outer circumferential surface is not utilized.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the drum member includes an internal space formed inside the drum member, and a communication port that communicates the internal space with the outside and is formed so that the game ball can pass through. , the game balls flowing down the game area can be caused to flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port. Therefore, the internal space of the spinning drum member, which is a dead space, can be made to function as a storage space for game balls or a ball throwing path, and the spinning drum member can be utilized accordingly.

Note that the communication port may be formed at only one location on the drum member, or may be formed at two or more locations. When the communication port is formed at only one location, the communication port is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member. As a result, the position of the communication port can be moved up or down according to the rotational position of the spinning drum member, so that the game ball can flow into or out of the internal space through the communication port (the communication port faces upward). When the communication port faces downward, the game balls can flow into the internal space, and when the communication port faces downward, the game balls in the internal space can flow out.

Further, the cross-sectional shape of the rotating drum member taken along a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis does not necessarily have to be circular, and may be polygonal, elliptical, or a combination thereof. Therefore, the outer circumferential surface of the drum member does not have to be a circumferential surface, and may be a flat surface, a curved surface, or a combination thereof.

A gaming machine F2 in the gaming machine F1, wherein the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the communication port includes a first communication port and a second communication port formed at a position different from the first communication port, so that the first communication port is provided with the first communication port. One of the communication port or the second communication port is an inflow port that allows game balls to flow into the internal space from the outside, and the other of the first communication port or the second communication port is an outflow port that allows game balls to flow out from the internal space to the outside. It can be done. That is, even without rotating the spinning drum member (while maintaining it in a stopped state), the spinning drum member can be used as a ball throwing path for the game ball. Note that while the rotating drum member is being rotated, the rotating drum member may be utilized as a ball throwing path.

In the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member, and is formed as an inflow port through which game balls flowing down the gaming area flow into the internal space, and the second communication port is A gaming machine F3, characterized in that the gaming machine F3 is formed on an end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotational axis, and is formed as an outlet that allows game balls to flow out from the internal space to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the first communication port is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member and is formed as an inflow port through which the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area flow into the internal space. , the second communication port is formed on the end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotating shaft, and is formed as an outlet that allows the game balls to flow out from the internal space to the gaming area, so that the second communication port does not allow the game balls to flow into the internal space of the rotating drum member. In addition to making it easier for the player to visually recognize the inflow, the game ball can be ejected while the spinning drum member is maintained in a stopped state.

That is, the rotating drum member is arranged so that the outer circumferential surface is visible to the player, and the first communication port (inflow port) is formed on the outer circumferential surface, so that the inflow of game balls can be visually recognized by the player. You can easily do it. On the other hand, when a second communication port is formed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member, when the drum member is displaced to a rotational position where the communication port is upward, the game ball cannot flow out from the internal space. Since the second communication port (outflow port) is formed on the end face of the rotating drum member in the direction of the rotation axis, it is possible to create a state in which the game balls can flow out from the internal space regardless of the rotational position of the rotating drum member.

Any of the game machines F1 to F3 includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the outer circumferential surface of the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the communication port is moved to the first position. A gaming machine F4, wherein the communication port is shielded by a member and is opened when the displacement member is displaced to a second position.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F1 to F3, the game machine F4 includes a displacement member displaceably disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, and the displacement member is displaced to the first position. Then, the communication port is blocked by the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the communication port is opened, so that the inflow and outflow of game balls through the communication port is in a blocked state and a permitted state. Can be switched.

In the game machine F4, the communication port is formed in the outer peripheral surface of the drum member, one side of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the drum member, and the displacement member is in the second position. A gaming machine F5 characterized in that when the gaming machine F5 is displaced, the other side opposite to the one side projects out into the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the displacement member is rotatably supported on one side by the drum member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the second position, the displacement member rotates on the opposite side from the one side. Since the other side extends to the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received by the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when the communication port is formed as an inflow port, the game ball flowing down the game area can be made to easily flow into the internal space of the rotation drum member using the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F5, the gaming machine F6 is characterized in that one side of the displacement member is located further forward in the rotational direction of the drum member than the other side.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F5, since one side of the displacement member is located further forward in the rotating direction of the drum member than the other side, when the drum member is rotated, Even if the displacement member interferes with a member disposed around the drum member, the force generated by such interference can be applied in the direction of closing the displacement member (displacing it to the first position). That is, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from interfering with other members and being extended (displaced to the second position) when the drum member rotates. Further, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with another member and inhibiting the rotation of the drum member.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, there is provided a base member on which the drum member is rotatably disposed, and a base member supported by the base member and arranged in an internal space of the drum member, and A gaming machine F7 is characterized in that it is provided with a fixed member that does not rotate.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, there is provided a base member on which the spinning drum member is rotatably disposed, and an internal space of the spinning drum member that is supported by the base member. Since it is equipped with a fixed member that is disposed in the rotating drum member and does not rotate with respect to the spinning drum member, the game ball that has flowed into the internal space can be held on the fixed member or rolled on the fixed member toward the outlet. With the rotation of the rotation drum member, the game ball can be prevented from moving wildly in the internal space or being prevented from rolling and remaining in the internal space.

A game machine F8, which is any one of the game machines F4 to F6, and further includes a displacement setting means for regulating or permitting displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the rotation drum member.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F4 to F6, it is provided with a displacement setting means for regulating or allowing the displacement of the displacement member according to the rotational position of the drum member, so that the movement of the displacement member to the second position is provided. It is possible to suppress the displaced member from interfering with other members around the drum member.

The gaming machine F5 or F6 includes a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotation drum member, and the rotation regulating member is arranged such that the displacement member is displaced to the second position and the other side of the displacement member is directed to the gaming area. A game machine F9 characterized in that rotation of the drum member is restricted when it is extended.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F5 or F6, it is provided with a rotation regulating means for regulating the rotation of the rotation drum member, and the rotation regulating member is arranged so that the displacement member is displaced to the second position. Since the rotation of the drum member is restricted when the other side is extended to the gaming area, the drum member is rotated with the displacement member extended, and other members located on its rotation trajectory are restricted. It is possible to suppress the displacement member from interfering with the displacement member. Further, it is possible to suppress rotation of the drum member due to the load that is applied when the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member.

In the gaming machine F3, a light emitting means is formed to be able to emit light and is disposed in the internal space of the drum member, and the second communication port is formed on an end face of the drum member in the rotation axis direction. A gaming machine F10 comprising: an opening formed on an end surface opposite to the end surface where the light emitting means is exposed, and an electrical connection line of the light emitting means is wired through the opening.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine F3, an opening is formed on the end surface of the drum member in the direction of the rotation axis, which is opposite to the end surface where the second communication port is formed. Since the electrical connection line of the light emitting means is routed through the opening, it is possible to easily secure a space usable for each of the second communication port and the opening. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly flowed out through the second communication port, and the wiring work for electrical connection lines to the opening can be easily performed. Furthermore, since the second communication port and the opening can be separated to the maximum extent possible, interference between the game ball rolling through the internal space toward the second communication port and the electrical connection line can be easily suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
A first member and a second member are formed to be displaceable, and the first member has a covered position where at least a portion of the second member is hidden from view, and a state where the first member is disposed at the covered position. In the gaming machine, the first member is movable between a retracted position and a retracted position in which an area that invisibly covers the second member is reduced. A gaming machine G1 is formed to be able to regulate displacement of the gaming machine G1.

Here, the first member and the second member are displaceably formed, and the first member has a covering position where at least a part of the second member is hidden from view, and a state where the first member is disposed at the covering position. A gaming machine is known that is movable between a retracted position and a retracted position that reduces the area that covers the second member invisibly (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). According to this gaming machine, the second member is exposed by displacing the first member to the retracted position from a state in which the first member is placed in the covered position and the second member is made invisible to the player. It is possible to perform an effect that is visually recognized by the player.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the second member is formed to be displaceable, so when the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the second member is not displaced. There is a risk of Therefore, there was a problem in that the second member could not be seen in an appropriate state by the player, and the performance effect was reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the first member is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member when it is displaced to the retracted position. It can be made visible to the public, and the production effect can be ensured. That is, when performing an effect in which the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position, which must be performed for the purpose of the effect, is replaced by the displacement of the second member to the retracted position. Used as a means of regulating displacement. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide or control a mechanism for regulating the displacement of the second member, and the structure can be simplified accordingly.

In the gaming machine G1, the second member is formed to be rotatable, and the center of gravity thereof is eccentric from the center of rotation.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, the second member is formed to be rotatable and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so the degree of freedom in designing the second member is increased. can be increased. In other words, the second member does not need to have a shape in which its center of gravity is located at the center of rotation; for example, a shape that is asymmetrical with respect to the rotation axis can be adopted, so that the performance effect of the second member can be enhanced. . On the other hand, if the center of gravity of the second member is eccentric in this manner, there is a risk that the second member will rotate (rotate) around the rotation center due to its own weight. Therefore, a configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, and thereby the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure the production effect.

The gaming machine G1 or G2 includes a displacement member disposed displaceably on the second member, and the displacement member is formed to be displaceable at least when the first member is displaced to the retracted position. The game machine G3 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming machine G3 includes a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the second member, and the displacement member is configured such that at least the first member is displaced to the retracted position. Since it is formed so that it can be displaced in the state, when performing a performance in which the first member is displaced to the retracted position and the second member is exposed, the performance effect can be enhanced by further displacing the displacement member. I can do it. On the other hand, if the displacement member is displaced when the second member is exposed, the position of the center of gravity may move with the displacement, and the second member may rotate (rotate). Therefore, a configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, and thereby the second member can be visually recognized by the player in an appropriate state. It is possible to secure the production effect.

In gaming machine G3, the second member is arranged so that its outer peripheral surface is visible to the player, and the displacement member has one side rotatably supported by the outer peripheral surface of the second member, and the displacement member has one side rotatably supported by the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the other side, which is the opposite side, is formed so as to be able to extend into a gaming area.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the second member is arranged such that its outer circumferential surface is visible to the player, and the displacement member has one side rotatable to the outer circumferential surface of the second member. Since the other side opposite to one side is formed to be able to extend into the game area, the game ball flowing down the game area can be received on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, for example, when an inlet for game balls is formed in the second member, the game balls flowing down the game area can be made easier to flow into the inlet by using the displacement member. . In this case, if the displacement member receives the game ball flowing down the game area, there is a risk that the second member will be rotated due to the load acting at that time and the weight of the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the displacement member. Therefore, a configuration in which the first member displaced to the retracted position is formed so as to be able to regulate the displacement of the second member is particularly effective, and thereby the state in which the displacement member is extended to a predetermined position in the game area is particularly effective. can be easily maintained.

In the gaming machine G4, the first member is disposed in the gaming area while facing the outer circumferential surface of the second member in the covered position, and is placed outside the gaming area in the retracted position. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being arranged.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G4, the first member is disposed in the gaming area while facing the outer circumferential surface of the second member in the covered position, so that the gaming machine flowing down the gaming area cannot be played. It is possible to prevent the second member from rotating due to the ball colliding with the second member. In particular, when the rotational position of the second member is such that the displacement member is directed toward the gaming area, the game ball flowing down the gaming area collides with the displacement member, and the displacement member is released (tensioned). can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the first member is placed outside the gaming area in the retracted position, the displacement of the first member to the retracted position makes it possible to secure a space for the displacement member to protrude into the gaming area. . Therefore, the outer circumferential surface of the second member can be moved closer to the gaming area side (player side), making it easier for the player to visually recognize the displacement member.

In gaming machine G5, the first member is formed to be rotatable around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and is formed in a plate shape curved along the outer peripheral surface of the second member. A game machine G6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G5, the first member is formed to be rotatable around a rotation axis substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the second member, and the outer circumferential surface of the second member Since the cover is formed in a plate shape that curves along the curve, the space required when moving between the covered position and the retracted position can be reduced. Therefore, space for arranging other members can be secured accordingly. In addition, by forming the first member in a curved manner in this way, the game ball flowing down the game area is prevented from being stopped on the first member disposed at the covered position, and can be smoothly played. It can be flowed down.

A gaming machine G7, which is any one of the gaming machines G3 to G6, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second member and the displacement member. .

Here, in order to form the second member rotatably and displaceably displace the displacement member on the second member, a driving means is required for each of the second member and the displacement member, which increases the product cost. Bulk. Furthermore, if a drive means for displacing the displacement member is mounted on the second member, the weight of the second member increases, making it difficult to smoothly start or stop rotation of the second member.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines G3 to G6, a driving means for generating driving force is provided, and the driving force of the driving means is applied to the second member and the displacement member. Since the second member is provided with a transmission means for transmitting data, the first driving means can be used also to rotate the second member and displace the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product costs. Further, since there is no need to mount a driving means for displacing the displacement member on the second member, the weight of the second member can be reduced, and rotation of the second member can be smoothly started or stopped.

A gaming machine G8 characterized in that the gaming machine G7 is provided with a connecting means that connects the first member and the displacement member, and links the displacement of the first member to the displacement of the displacement member.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine G7, the first member and the displacement member are connected to each other, and since the game machine G8 is provided with a connecting means that links the displacement of the first member to the displacement of the displacement member, the displacement member can be displaced. The driving means for displacing the first displacement member can also be used as a driving means for displacing the first displacement member. In this case, when the displacement member and the first member are displaced by the driving force of separate drive means, there is a risk that the displacement member and the first member will interfere if poor control occurs. Since the two members can be mechanically connected to synchronize their displacements, interference between the displacement member and the first member can be reliably suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a driving means for generating a driving force, a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, the transmission means is , a first member, a second member located closer to the displacement member than the first member in the transmission path of the driving force, and an engagement member disposed between the first member and the second member. and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member, and the driving force is transmitted. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that, in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in advance in the one direction with respect to the first member.

Here, a game machine is known which includes a drive means that generates a driving force, a displacement member that is displaced by the drive force of the drive means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-029849). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the transmission state of the driving force by the transmission means from the driving means to the displacement member is always constant, so when the driving means is driven at a constant driving speed, the displacement member also remains constant. The displacement member is displaced at a displacement speed, and the displacement mode of the displacement member cannot be changed. Therefore, there was a problem in that the effect of the presentation accompanying the displacement of the displacement member was insufficient.

Note that the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed by increasing or decreasing the driving speed of the drive means, but if the displacement speed in a predetermined section of the displacement sections of the displacement member is different from the displacement speed in other sections, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed. In order to achieve this speed, it is necessary to install a sensor device that detects the position of the displacement member and control the output of the drive means to increase or decrease according to the detection result of the sensor device, which leads to an increase in product cost and control cost. . Furthermore, the structure and control become complicated, leading to a decrease in reliability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the transmission means includes a first member, a second member located closer to the displacement member than the first member in the driving force transmission path, and an engaging member disposed between the members, and when the first member is displaced in one direction with respect to the second member, the engaging member engages with the first member and the second member. At the same time, the driving force is transmitted and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted, and in a predetermined section of the displacement section of the displacement member, the second member is displaced in one direction in advance of the first member. Therefore, regardless of the driving state of the driving means, the displacement speed of the displacement member in the predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Therefore, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Furthermore, according to the game machine H1, the second member can be caused to advance in one direction relative to the first member regardless of the driving state of the driving means, so that, for example, in the entire displacement section of the displacement member, The driving means can be driven at a constant driving speed, and there is no need to increase or decrease the driving speed of the driving means during the displacement section of the displacement member (that is, depending on whether it is a predetermined section or another section). As a result, control can be simplified, control costs can be reduced, and operational reliability can be improved. Alternatively, the driving of the driving means can be stopped in a predetermined section, and in this case, it is possible to suppress energy consumption.

Furthermore, according to the game machine H1, in the driving state in which the first member is displaced in the other direction relative to the two members, the engagement of the engagement member is released and the transmission of the driving force is interrupted. The displacement member can be brought into a stopped state (non-driven state), and the driving force of the driving means in such a driven state can be used as a driving force for driving other members. That is, by switching the driving direction of the driving means, the two members, the displacement member and the other member, can be respectively displaced.

The transmission means is configured such that when the first member is displaced in the other direction with respect to the two members, the engagement of the engagement member is released and transmission of the driving force is interrupted. It may be something that is done.

In the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable, and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, and in the predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member moves the second member in the one direction. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to act in a direction of displacement.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable, and its center of gravity is eccentric from the center of rotation, so that in a predetermined section, the weight of the displacement member is Since it is formed to be able to act in a direction to displace the two members in one direction, the second member can be displaced in one direction in advance of the first member by utilizing the weight of the displacing member. . That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, when a displacement member is formed to be able to repeatedly rotate 360 degrees around its rotation axis, the displacement speed (rotation speed) of the displacement member in a predetermined section is different from that of the displacement member in other sections. A rotation mode in which the displacement speed (rotation speed) is higher than that, that is, a rotation mode in which the rotation speed is increased or decreased during one rotation, can be repeatedly performed.

In the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body that is rotationally driven by the second member, and a crank member that has a pin that projects from the main body and is located eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body. a sliding groove through which a pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed at one end side, and an arm member whose intermediate portion is rotatably supported; A gaming machine H3 characterized in that it is connected to a member.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H2, the transmission means includes a main body that is rotationally driven by the second member, a transmission means that projects from the main body, and is located eccentrically from the center of rotation of the main body. The crank member includes a crank member having a pin portion, and an arm member in which a sliding groove into which the pin portion of the crank member is slidably inserted is formed at one end side and whose intermediate portion is rotatably supported. By rotationally driving the crank member by the second member and sliding the pin member along the sliding groove, the other end side of the arm member can be reciprocated. In this case, since the other end of the arm member is connected to the displacement member, the displacement member can be reciprocated between the first position and the second position as the other end of the arm member reciprocates. . That is, the displacement direction of the displacement member can be changed without changing the driving direction of the driving means.

In the game machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between a first position and a second position in accordance with the reciprocating movement of the other end of the arm member, and is displaced from the first position to the second position. and during the displacement from the second position to the first position, the direction in which the weight of the displacement member is applied to the second member is such that the second member is displaced from the other position. A game machine H4 characterized in that the direction is changed from a direction in which the second member is displaced in the first direction to a direction in which the second member is displaced in the first direction.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine H3, the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position in accordance with the reciprocating movement of the other end of the arm member, and the displacement member is reciprocated between the first position and the second position. The direction in which the weight of the displacing member is applied to the second member during the displacement from the second position to the second position and from the second position to the first position is such that the second member The direction is changed from the direction of displacing the second member in the other direction to the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, so when the displacing member is reciprocated, when it is displaced in either direction, it starts from the middle of the displacement. The displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

For example, the displacement member is reciprocated between an extended position (first position), which is a position where the displacement member is extended so that it can be seen by the player, and a retracted position (second position), which is a position that is retracted from the extended position. When operating, when extending the displacement member from the retracted position to the extended position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed halfway, and then the displacement speed of the displacement member is increased from the middle to move the displacement member vigorously. In addition to being able to extend the displaceable member to the extended position, when retracting the displaceable member from the extended position to the extended position, the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed until halfway, and the displacement speed of the displaceable member is increased from halfway. As a result, the displacement member can be immediately retracted to the retracted position.

In the game machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be slidable, and in the predetermined section, it is tilted downward in the direction of the slide displacement, so that the weight of the displacement member is lowered by the second member. A gaming machine H5 characterized in that it is formed so as to be able to act in the direction of displacement in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, the displacement member is formed to be slidable and tilted downward in the direction of the sliding displacement in a predetermined section, thereby reducing the weight of the displacement member. Since the second member is formed to be able to act in a direction to displace the second member in one direction, the weight of the displacing member is used to displace the second member in advance of the first member in one direction. be able to. That is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

In any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, a gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed to be able to hold a gaming ball at least in the predetermined section.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines H2 to H5, the displacement member is formed to be able to hold the game ball at least in a predetermined section, so that the displacement member can hold the game ball. In this state, the weight of the displacement member as a whole can be increased by the weight of the game ball, and the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster. Furthermore, the weight of the displacement member as a whole is made to differ depending on whether the displacement member holds a game ball or not, or depending on the number of game balls held. be able to. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed in each case. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

In any of the game machines H2 to H6, the displacement member includes a receiving part that receives a game ball flowing down the gaming area, and at least in the predetermined section, when the receiving part receives the game ball, the game ball is A gaming machine H7 characterized in that a force applied to the displacement member from the above can be applied in a direction to displace the second member in the one direction.

According to the gaming machine H7, in any of the gaming machines H2 to H6, the displacement member is provided with a receiving section that receives the game ball flowing down the gaming area, and at least in a predetermined section, when the receiving section receives the gaming ball. Since the force that is applied from the game ball to the displacement member is configured to be able to act in the direction of displacing the second member in one direction, when the receiving part receives the game ball, the kinetic energy of the game ball is By utilizing this, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section can be made faster. In addition, the force applied to the displacement member is varied depending on whether the receiving part is receiving the game ball or not, or depending on the falling speed (magnitude of kinetic energy) of the game ball when receiving the game ball. be able to. Thereby, the displacement speed of the displacement member can be changed in each case. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the displacement member and enhance the performance effect of the performance accompanying the displacement of the displacement member.

Note that the game ball flowing down the game area is not limited to a game ball that moves along the front surface of the game board in the direction of gravity, but also includes a game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity. Examples of game balls that move in a direction different from the direction of gravity include game balls that collide with nails, tulips, objects, etc. and move in a direction different from the direction of gravity, and balls that roll on a stage and then jump off the stage. A game ball that moves in a direction different from the direction of gravity is exemplified.

In the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means includes a gear train forming part or all of the drive force transmission path, and a load gear meshed with one gear of the gear train. A game machine H8 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H6 or H7, the transmission means is configured to mesh with a gear train forming part or all of the driving force transmission path and one gear of the gear train. In a predetermined section, when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the game ball is received by the receiving part, the weight or kinetic energy of the game ball is used. and displacing the second member in advance of the first member in one direction (i.e., making the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections), If the displacement member does not hold the game ball or the receiving part does not receive the game ball, the second member will move against the first member using the load (resistance) when rotating the load gear. It is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced in one direction in advance (that is, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is increased).

That is, when the game ball is not held by the displacement member or the receiving part does not receive the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section becomes faster than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. Only when the game ball is held by the displacement member or the receiving part receives the game ball, the displacement speed of the displacement member in a predetermined section is set to be higher than the displacement speed of the displacement member in other sections. It is possible to easily form a mode of speeding up the process.

<About the concept of the invention using the back case 300 as an example>
A game board (base board 60), a back member (back case 300) arranged on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member (fixing member 320) arranged on the back side of the back member. In the game machine, the displacement member is disposed between the facing part from the game board to the back member, and is operable from the outside of the facing part from the game board to the back face side of the game board. (an engaging member 310), the fixed member includes a protrusion (an engaged portion 322), at least a portion of which is disposed on the front side of the back member, and which engages with the displacement member; A game machine I1 characterized in that the protruding portion and the displacement member engage with each other, and the fixing member is disposed on the back surface member.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a game board, a back member disposed on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member disposed on the back side of the back member (for example, a special Publication No. 2004-33603). According to this gaming machine, the fixing member is fastened to the back member by the screw inserted from the front side of the back member. This can prevent the fixing member from being removed from the back side of the game board.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the process of arranging the fixing member on the back member and the process of fastening the fixing member to the back member are performed from the back side of the back member and from the front side of the back member. The work will be done from the opposite direction. Therefore, when disposing the fixing member on the back member, the fixing member is placed on the back side of the back member and then wraps around to the front side of the back member, or the back member is reversed and the fixing member is placed on the front side of the back member. It is necessary to tighten the screws from the Therefore, there is a problem in that the number of work steps required to arrange the fixing member on the back member increases.

On the other hand, in the game machine I1, a displacement member is provided between the game board and the back member, and is operable from the outside of the space on the back side of the game board. The fixing member has at least a portion disposed on the front side of the back member and includes a protrusion that engages with the displacement member, and when the protrusion and the displacement member engage, the fixing member Since the fixing member is disposed on the back surface member, the fixing member can be disposed on the back surface member by a one-way operation from the back surface side of the back surface member. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the step of working from the back side and then going around to the front side or reversing the back member. As a result, the work steps for disposing the fixing member on the back member can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the engaging portion between the protruding portion and the fixed member is located on the front side of the back member, the engaging portion between the protruding portion and the fixing member can be accessed from the outside between the opposing sides of the game board and the back member. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized release of the engagement between the protrusion and the fixing member.

The gaming machine I1 includes a first member (rotation unit 700) disposed between the gaming board and the back surface member, and the displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first member. Characteristic gaming machine I2.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1, the gaming machine I2 includes a first member disposed between the gaming board and the back member facing each other, and the displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first member. Therefore, the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixed member can be arranged between the opposing members from the back member to the first member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixed member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the displacement member and the fixing member from being illegally released and the fixing member being tampered with (for example, being replaced with an incorrect fixing member).

Furthermore, in recent game machines, there is a tendency for the first member (accessory device, etc.) disposed between the game board and the back member to be larger. For this reason, in conventional game machines in which the fixed member is fastened with screws from the front side of the back member, when the enlarged first member is disposed in front of the fixed member or in a position close to the fixed member, The first member becomes an obstacle when fastening the fixing member with screws from the front side of the back member. Therefore, it has been difficult to arrange the fixing member on the back member by fastening the fixing member with a screw inserted from the front side of the back member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I2, the displacement member is disposed on the back side of the first member, so when the first member is disposed between the game board and the back member, it is possible to move the displacement member away from the game board. The displacement member and the fixed member can be engaged with each other by operating the displacement member from the outside between the facing parts up to the back member. Therefore, the fixed member can be disposed on the back member without being obstructed by the first member that is disposed between the displacing member and the opposing member from the game board to the back member.

A gaming machine I3 in the gaming machine I1 or I2, wherein the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the facing surface of the back member and the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I2, the displacement member is slid on a plane parallel to the opposing surface between the back member and the game board, so when the displacement member is displaced, the back The amount of displacement in the opposing direction between the member and the game board can be set to zero. Thereby, a space between the displacing member and the game board facing each other can be secured.

In any of gaming machines I1 to I3, the back surface member includes a bottom wall portion (bottom wall portion 301) facing the game board, and a side wall standing from an edge of the bottom wall toward the game board. (outer wall 302), an opening (second opening 301d) is formed in either the bottom wall or the side wall, and the displacement member A game machine I4 characterized in that it includes an operator (operator 315) that is inserted through the back member and protrudes from the inside of the back member to the outside.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the back member is provided with a bottom wall facing the gaming board and an edge of the bottom wall standing on the gaming board side. A box-shaped side wall portion is formed, and an opening is formed in either the bottom wall portion or the side wall portion, and the displacement member is inserted through the opening and protrudes from the inside of the back member to the outside. Since the controller is provided with an operator, the displacement member can be displaced by operating the operator from the outside of the back member (the outside between the opposing sides from the game board to the back member). Thereby, it is possible to easily displace the displacement member disposed between the facing part from the game board to the back member from the outside of the facing part from the game board to the back member. As a result, the efficiency of the work of engaging the displacement member with the fixed member can be improved.

The gaming machine I4 is characterized by comprising a biasing means for biasing the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member when the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged. A gaming machine I5.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine I4, in a state where the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is released, the displacement member is biased in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member. Since the biasing means is provided, if you forget to engage the displacement member and the fixed member, or if the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is incomplete, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from engaging with the fixed member. It can be displaced in the direction of release. Therefore, the operator can judge whether the displacement member and the fixed member are properly engaged based on the position where the operating element protruding to the outside of the back member is arranged. As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting of engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member.

Note that the biasing means may include a form in which a spring, rubber, etc. is disposed between the displacement member and the back member to bias the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member, or a form in which the displacement member is biased in the direction of disengaging from the fixed member. Examples include a form in which the displacement member acts in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member.

In gaming machines I1 to I5, the fixing member includes a supporting member (shaft supporting member 340) disposed on the back surface of the back member, and a substrate member (board board) connected to the supporting member and controlling the gaming machine. box 100), and the protruding portion is formed on the base member.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I1 to I5, the fixing member is connected to a supporting member disposed on the back surface of the back member, and is connected to the supporting member to allow the player to play a predetermined game. and a base member for performing a lottery for assigning value, and since the protrusion is formed on the base member, the displacement member can be tilted toward the fixed member when the base member is not connected to the support member. It disappears. Therefore, compared to the supporting member for connecting the back member and the board member, if you forget to arrange the board member that performs the control required for the game machine, the displacement member is more likely to be displaced and engaged. It can be suppressed. Thereby, when the operator who arranges the board member forgets to arrange the board member, the operator can be made aware of the forgetting to install the board member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the board member from being sent to a subsequent process of the gaming machine assembly process in a state where it has been forgotten to be attached.

In the gaming machine I6, the substrate member is rotatably connected to the support member, the protruding portions are disposed at different positions in the radial direction from the rotation axis of the substrate member, By rotating the member relative to the support member, the member can be displaced between a first position located on the front side of the back member and a second position located on the back side of the back member. , wherein the displacement member is configured to be slidable in a direction from the rotation axis of the substrate member toward the protrusion when the protrusion is placed at the i-first position. I7.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine I6, the base member is rotatably connected to the support member, and the protruding portions are arranged at different positions in the radial direction from the rotation axis of the base member. By rotating the substrate member with respect to the support member, the substrate member can be displaced between a first position located on the front side of the back member and a second position located on the back side of the back member. The displacement member is set to be slidable in a direction from the rotation axis of the substrate member toward the protrusion when the protrusion is placed in the first position, so that the substrate member rotates with respect to the support member. Displacing the protrusion from the second position side to the first position when the displacement member is displaced to a position where it engages with the protrusion before being displaced and disposing the protrusion in the first position. With this, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the displacement member.

In this case, since the displacement member is set to be slidable in the direction from the rotation axis of the substrate member toward the protrusion, the force applied by the protrusion is applied to release the engagement between the displacement member and the protrusion. direction can be applied to the displacement member. Therefore, when the protrusion comes into contact with the displacement member, the force of the abutment of the protrusion can displace the displacement member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixing member. Therefore, the displacement member can be displaced in the direction of releasing the engagement with the protrusion. As a result, the operator who arranges the fixed member on the back member can easily recognize that the displaceable member and the fixed member are engaged, and it is possible to prevent the displaceable member and the fixed member from being disengaged. can.

Furthermore, when the protrusion comes into contact with the displacement member, the displacement member is released in the direction of disengaging from the fixed member. Damage to the member can be suppressed.

Any one of the game machines I4 to I7 includes an outer frame (outer frame 11) formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the game board and the back member, and the inner shape of the outer frame is such that the inner shape of the outer frame accommodates the game board and the back member. When the displacement member and the fixed member are not engaged, the operator is disposed on the outer side between the opposing sides from the game board to the back member. A game machine I8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I4 to I7, it is provided with an outer frame formed in a frame shape capable of accommodating the gaming board and the back member, and the inner shape of the outer frame is the same as that of the gaming board. and the outer shape of the back member when viewed from the front, and when the displacement member and the fixed member are not engaged, the operator is arranged on the outside between the opposing sides from the game board to the back member. When the displacement member and the fixed member are disengaged and the game board and the back member are housed in the outer frame, the operator can be brought into contact with the outer frame. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game board and the back member from being housed in the outer frame. Therefore, if the fixing member is forgotten to be disposed on the back surface member, or if the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to be engaged, the operator can be made aware of the forgetting (abnormality). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board from being housed in the outer frame in a state where the fixing member is forgotten to be disposed on the back member or the displacement member and the fixing member are forgotten to engage.

A gaming machine I9 in any of the gaming machines I4 to I8, further comprising a suppressing means for suppressing the operator from being operated in a direction to release the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member. .

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I4 to I8, a suppressing means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member due to the operation of the operator. As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from disengaging from the fixed member using the operator.

Note that the suppressing means for suppressing the operation of the operator in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member may include a form in which the operator is pivotally supported so that it can idle in the direction of releasing the engagement. , a form in which the protruding tip of the operator is formed on an inclined surface protruding in the direction of releasing the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member, and a form in which the operator is disposed between the displacement member and the fixed member. etc. are exemplified.

In any one of gaming machines I1 to I9, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed and a first protrusion protruding from the elastic piece, and the fixed member is configured to control the displacement of the displacement member. an accommodating portion that is open to the region and recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member; the accommodating portion includes a second protrusion that protrudes into the displacement region of the first protrusion; When the displacement member is displaced in one direction, the protrusion comes into contact with the first protrusion and can displace the elastic piece, and when the displacement member is displaced in the other direction, the protrusion can displace the elastic piece. A game machine I10 characterized in that the displacement member and the fixed member can be engaged with each other by contacting one member.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines I1 to I9, the displacement member includes an elastic piece that can be elastically deformed, and a first protrusion that projects from the elastic piece, The fixing member includes a accommodating part that opens in the displacement region of the displacement member and is recessed in the displacement direction of the displacement member, and the accommodating part includes a second protrusion that protrudes in the displacement region of the first protrusion. The second protrusion is configured such that when the displacement member is displaced in one direction, the second protrusion comes into contact with the first protrusion and can displace the elastic piece, and when the displacement member is displaced in the other direction, the second protrusion can displace the elastic piece. Since the second protrusion makes it possible to engage the displacement member and the fixed member by contacting the member, the second protrusion can allow displacement of the displacement member in one direction and restrict displacement of the displacement member in the other direction. . This makes it possible to restrict the displacement of the displacement member in both the direction of engagement with the fixed member and the direction of detachment.

In the gaming machine I10, the accommodating part is set to a size that can accommodate the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, the elastic piece is placed in the accommodating part. A gaming machine I11 characterized in that a gaming machine I11 is accommodated therein.

According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I10, the accommodating portion is set to a size that can accommodate the elastic piece, and when the first protrusion and the second protrusion are engaged, Since the elastic piece is housed in the housing part, it can be made difficult to operate the elastic piece from outside the housing part when the displacement member and the fixing member are engaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic piece from being manipulated from the outside of the accommodating portion and being elastically deformed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member from being improperly released. In this case, the fixing member can be removed from the back member by cutting the displacement member (base end portion of the accommodated portion) located outside the accommodation portion.

In the game machine I11, the displacement member includes a plurality of the elastic pieces that can be stored in the storage portion, and the storage portion is set to a size that can accommodate the plurality of elastic pieces. Machine I12.

According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I11, the displacement member is provided with a plurality of elastic pieces that can be accommodated in the accommodating part, and the accommodating part is set in a space large enough to accommodate the plurality of elastic pieces. Therefore, when the fixed member is removed from the back member by cutting the displacement member (base end portion of the elastic piece) located outside the housing part, the cut displacement member (elastic piece) is placed inside the housing part. In this state, the uncut displacement member (elastic piece) can be stored inside the housing part. Therefore, the cut displacement members (elastic pieces) can be stored and left inside the storage part, so it is possible to compare the number of displacement members stored in the storage part and the number of cut elastic pieces of the displacement member. In this case, when the fixing member is illegally removed and replaced with an unauthorized fixing member, the difference in the number of the fixing members allows the operator to detect that the gaming machine has been tampered with.

In any of gaming machines I1 to I12, when the displacement member engages with the fixed member, the first member restricts displacement of the displacement member in a direction to release the engagement with the fixed member. A gaming machine I13 is characterized in that it is provided with a regulating means.

According to the gaming machine I13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I1 to I12, when the displacing member engages with the fixed member, there is a regulation that restricts the displacement of the displacing member in the direction of releasing the engagement with the fixed member. Since the means is provided, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the displacement member when a force is applied in a direction to release the engagement between the displacement member and the fixed member due to an unauthorized person. Therefore, when a force acts in a direction that causes the displacement member to disengage from the fixed member due to fraud, it is possible to prevent the force from concentrating on the engagement portion between the displacement member and the fixed member. It is possible to suppress damage to the displacement member or the fixed member due to the force inputted by.

Furthermore, since the first member includes the regulating means, when the fixed member is removed from the back member, the regulation of displacement of the displacement member by the regulating means can be released by removing the first member from the back member. In this case, by removing the first member, the engaging portion between the displacement member and the fixing member can be accessed, so that the work efficiency when removing the fixing member from the back member can be improved.

Examples of the regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacement member include a configuration in which a protrusion is arranged inside the engagement recess to regulate elastic deformation of the displacement member, and a configuration in which the protrusion is engaged with the displacement member.

<About the concept of the invention using the general winning slot unit 150 as an example>
a base member having a game area on the front side; a first decoration means forming a decoration on the front side of the base member; and a second decoration means forming a decoration continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means when viewed from the front; A gaming machine J1, characterized in that the first decoration means and the second decoration means are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front.

Conventionally, a base member having a play area on the front side, a first decoration means arranged on the front side of the base member and having decorations formed on the front surface, and a first decoration means arranged on the front side of the first decoration means are conventionally provided. A gaming machine is known that includes a first member and a second decoration means that is disposed in front of the first member and forms a decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the first decoration means when viewed from the front (for example, (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2007-000195). According to this gaming machine, the design of the base member can be ensured by allowing the player to visually recognize the decorations of the first decoration means and the second decoration means as one decoration.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the second decoration means is disposed in front of the first member, the second decoration means is separated from the first decoration means by the thickness of the first member. placed at a remote location. Therefore, depending on the position (direction of line of sight) from which the player views the base member, the decorations on the first decoration means and the decorations on the second decoration means may be seen to be shifted by the thickness of the first member, There was a problem that the design of the member deteriorated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the first decoration means and the second decoration means are arranged at positions adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, so that the first decoration means and the second decoration means are The distance between the front and rear can be reduced. Thereby, when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are viewed from an angle oblique to the front view of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means This can prevent the image from being visually recognized as being out of alignment. Therefore, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration, and the design of the base member can be improved.

Further, the first decoration means may be any type of decoration as long as it forms a decoration, for example, a sticker member having a decoration printed on a plate-shaped member is pasted on the front of the base member, or a decoration is formed on the front of the base member. It is intended to print.

In addition, when the second decoration means is pasted (glued) on the front of the first decoration means, the worker can affix (glue) the second decoration means while visually recognizing the decoration of the first decoration means. can. Therefore, the operator can easily attach the second decoration means to the first decoration means at a position where the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means are continuous. Therefore, the work efficiency of the worker who attaches the second decorative means to the first decorative means can be improved.

The gaming machine J1 includes a front member made of a light-transmitting material and having an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the second decoration means when viewed from the front, and disposed in front of the second decoration means, The member is provided with a recessed portion having a larger shape than the outer diameter of the second decorative means on a surface facing the second decorative means, and the recessed dimension of the recessed portion is larger than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means. The game machine J2 is characterized in that a large value is also set to a large value.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine J2 is made of a light-transmitting material, has an outer shape larger than the outer diameter of the second decorative means when viewed from the front, and is disposed in front of the second decorative means. The front member includes a recess formed in a face larger than the outer diameter of the second decoration means on a surface facing the second decoration means, and the recess dimension of the recess is larger than the outer diameter of the second decoration means. Since the thickness is set to a value larger than the thickness dimension, the front member can be disposed on the base member with the second decoration means accommodated in the recess. Thereby, the second decoration means can be prevented from falling off from between the base member and the front member.

Moreover, since the recessed dimension of the recessed portion is set to a larger value than the thickness dimension of the second decorative means, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the front member and the first decorative means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from being caught between the front member and the first decoration means, thereby making it difficult for the decoration of the first decoration means to be visually recognized.

The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that the inner surface of the recess is formed along the outer shape of the second decoration means, and the second decoration means is disposed by adhering to the bottom surface of the recess. Game machine J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J2, the inner surface of the recessed portion is formed along the outer shape of the second decorative means, and the second decorative means is disposed by being adhered to the bottom surface of the recessed portion of the recessed portion. Therefore, by arranging the second decoration means along the recessed portion of the front member, the second decoration means can be positioned and arranged with respect to the front member. Thereby, when the front member is disposed in front of the first decoration means, it is possible to suppress the second decoration means from being caught between the opposing edge of the front member and the first decoration means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the first decoration means and the front member, and the decoration of the first decoration means can be visually recognized due to dust or dirt being caught between the front member and the first decoration means. This can prevent it from becoming difficult.

In gaming machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the base member from a surface facing the base member, the base member includes an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the front member includes an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the front member is positioned with respect to the base member by being inserted into the opening.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine J3, the front member includes a protrusion that protrudes from the surface facing the base member toward the base member, and the base member has an opening that opens at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the front member is positioned relative to the base member by inserting the protrusion into the opening, it is possible to suppress the front member from shifting in position relative to the first decoration means. Further, the second decorative means is positioned relative to the front member by the recessed portion of the front member. Therefore, by positioning the front member with respect to the first decoration means, it is possible to suppress misalignment of the first decoration means and the second decoration means. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

In gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recess, the second decoration means has a through hole penetrating at a position corresponding to the protrusion, and the protrusion is inserted into the through hole. A gaming machine J5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J4, the protrusion is formed on the concave bottom surface of the recessed part, and the second decoration means is formed with a through hole that penetrates at a position corresponding to the protrusion. Since the projection is inserted into the hole, the second decoration means can be easily arranged on the front member. That is, simply disposing the second decorative means inside the concave portion of the front member requires the edge of the second decorative means to be disposed along the concave portion. By forming the through hole to be inserted, the arrangement of the second decorative means with respect to the front member can be determined simply by inserting the protrusion into the through hole. As a result, the arrangement of the second decoration means on the front member can be simplified.

Furthermore, since the projection for positioning the front member relative to the first decoration means is inserted into the through hole of the second decoration means, the second decoration means and the first decoration means can be positioned at the same part (protrusion). Therefore, the accuracy of positioning the decorative member and the first decorative means can be improved. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

In any one of gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined portion that is inclined toward the first decorative means toward the outer edge in front view, and an edge of the second decorative means is provided on the back side of the inclined portion. A game machine J6 characterized in that a section is provided.

Here, in order to make it easier for the player to visually recognize both the decorations of the first decoration means and the decorations of the second decoration means as one decoration, it is necessary to suppress the displacement of the two decorations. However, when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are overlapped in the front-back direction, the positions of the decorations on both sides are shifted in the front-rear direction by the thickness of the second decoration means. There has been a problem in that when the first decoration means and the second decoration means are viewed from an angle oblique to the front view of the second decoration means, there is a possibility that a positional shift between the front and back may be recognized.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, the front member includes an inclined part that is inclined toward the first decorative means side as it goes toward the outer edge in front view. Since the edge of the second decoration means is disposed on the back side of the front member, misalignment of the decoration due to the difference in the arrangement of the second decoration means and the first decoration means in the front-rear direction can be avoided by the inclined part of the front member. The refraction of light can make it difficult for players to recognize it.

To explain in detail, the light that is reflected by the decoration of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, passes through the inside of the front member, and is emitted from the inclined part, is caused by the slope of the light passing direction with respect to the front surface of the base member. When the angle is made smaller than the inclination angle in the direction perpendicular to the inclined surface of the inclined part with respect to the front of the base member, the inclination angle of the direction of light emission from the inclined part with respect to the front of the base member is The angle of inclination of the light passing direction with respect to the front of the member is made smaller. Therefore, the connecting portion between the first decorative means and the second decorative means is viewed from a direction having a smaller intersecting angle with respect to the front surface of the base member than the inclination angle in the direction orthogonal to the slope surface of the slope portion with respect to the front surface of the base member. The passing direction of the light that is visually recognized by the player can be brought closer to the direction in which the first decoration means and the second decoration means overlap. As a result, when the player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the positional shift between the front and back.

In gaming machine J6, the second decorative means includes an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member, and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member, and the slope portion and the second decorative means are at least A game machine J7 characterized in that the non-adhesive surfaces are provided at opposing positions.

Here, when the player visually recognizes the connecting part of the decoration between the first decoration means and the second decoration means from the direction perpendicular to the slope of the slope, the front and back of the first decoration means and the second decoration means are There is a possibility that the player will notice the misalignment of the decoration in the direction.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine J6, the second decoration means includes an adhesive surface that is adhered to the front member, and a non-adhesive surface that is not adhered to the front member, Since the non-adhesive surface is provided at least at a position where the slope part and the second decoration means face each other, a gap is formed between the second decoration means and the front member (slope part) facing each other on the non-adhesive surface, so that the front member Light passing through the non-adhesive surface can be totally reflected. This makes it possible to prevent the player from seeing the decoration at the end of the second decoration means when the player views the second decoration means through the slope from a direction perpendicular to the slope of the slope. . As a result, when a player visually recognizes the first decoration means and the second decoration means through the slope from a direction perpendicular to the slope of the slope, the decoration of the second decoration means is made difficult to see. , it is possible to suppress the player from perceiving the misalignment of the decorations in the front-rear direction between the first decoration means and the second decoration means.

In the gaming machine J6 or J7, the inclined portion is formed in an arc shape in which an outer edge of a cross section in a direction perpendicular to an extending direction of the outer edge of the front member when viewed from the front is curved convexly toward the outer edge of the front member. a gaming machine, wherein the end of the second decorative means is disposed closer to the center of the front member when viewed from the front than a substantially midway point of a straight line connecting the ends of the sloped portions. J8.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine J6 or J7, the sloping portion has an outer edge in a cross section perpendicular to the extending direction of the outer edge of the front member when viewed from the front that is convex toward the outer edge of the front member. The end portion of the second decorative means is arranged closer to the center of the front member when viewed from the front than the approximately midway point of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined portion. When the first decoration means and the second decoration means are viewed from an angle oblique to the front view of the first decoration means or the second decoration means, the center of the front member is refracted due to the curvature of the inclined portion. The direction of light passing through the side can be brought closer to the direction in which the first decoration means and the second decoration means overlap.

Moreover, since the end of the second decoration means is disposed closer to the center of the front member than the substantially midway position of the straight line connecting the ends of the inclined parts, the first decoration means and the second decoration means It is possible to prevent the player from perceiving a positional shift in the front-rear direction. As a result, the decoration of the first decoration means and the decoration of the second decoration means can be easily recognized by the player as one decoration.

In any of gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recess is formed with a second inclined part that is inclined outward in front view toward the first decorative means, and the second inclined part is A gaming machine J9 characterized in that the angle of inclination of the member with respect to the front is set smaller than the angle of inclination of the inclined portion with respect to the front of the base member.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines J2 to J8, the inner surface of the recessed portion is formed with a second inclined portion that is inclined outward in a front view toward the first decoration means side. Since the slope angle of the slope portion with respect to the front surface of the base member is set to be smaller than the slope angle of the slope portion with respect to the front surface of the base member, the decoration ( The position of the virtual image (virtual image) can be brought closer to the position of the decoration (real image) of the first decoration means that is visually recognized without going through the slope part and the second slope part. As a result, when the first decoration means is visually recognized through the front member, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the first decoration means from becoming difficult to see due to the refraction of light through the front member.

<About the concept of the invention using the special prize winning device 550 as an example>
A game machine comprising a game board having a game area on the front side, and a path unit disposed on the game board and having a path for guiding the throwing of a game ball flowing down the game area, the path unit comprising: A first path for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board when viewed from the front, and a first path for throwing the game ball from the first path to a horizontal direction in the opposite direction to the guiding direction of the first path. A second path for throwing the ball to the other side, and a third path connecting one side of the first path and the second path, and the third path is on the front side or the back side with respect to the game board. A game machine K1 characterized in that a guide means for throwing a game ball to at least one of the game boards is provided on at least one inner wall on the front side or the back side with respect to the game board.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a gaming board having a playing area on the front side, and a path unit disposed on the gaming board and having a path for guiding a thrown game ball flowing down the playing area. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, by guiding (rolling) the game ball that has flowed into the guide route formed in the route unit along the route of the guide route, the rolling (flowing down) of the game ball can be enjoyed. can have.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to ensure a predetermined throwing distance for the game ball inside the path unit, there is a first path for throwing the game ball to one side with respect to the game board, and a first path for throwing the game ball to one side with respect to the game board. When a second path is formed in which the game ball thrown from the first path is thrown to the other side of the game board, and a third path is formed that connects one side of the first path and the second path, the first path Since the speed of the game ball rolling is maximized at the portion communicating with the third path (the downstream end of the first path), the game ball is placed on the inner wall of the third path where the direction of the ball is changed. Collisions and bounces are more likely. Therefore, there was a risk that the game ball that collided with the inner wall of the third path would return to the first path, or swing (shake) inside the third path in the throwing direction of the first path (horizontal direction when viewed from the front). Therefore, since the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path swings in the third path, the player's line of sight cannot follow the game ball thrown to the third path in a fixed direction, There was a problem in that it was difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown along the route.

In this case, by making the third path longer, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown from the first path can be smoothly switched to the rolling direction of the second path, and the game ball passing through the third path can be However, since the third path is formed to be long, the overall size of the path unit increases accordingly, making it impossible to secure space for arranging the path unit on the game board.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, the path unit has a first path for throwing the game ball to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the game board when viewed from the front, and a path for throwing the game ball from the first path. A second path for throwing the ball to the other side in the horizontal direction in the direction opposite to the guiding direction of the first path, and a third path connecting one side of the first path and the second path, and the third path includes: Since the guide means for throwing the game ball to at least one of the front side and the back side with respect to the game board is provided on at least one of the inner walls on the front side and the back side of the game board, the game ball passing through the third path can be guided. It can be moved to the front side or the back side (the front-rear direction of the game board when viewed from the front). By this movement of the game ball on the front side or the back side, the game ball that rolled and accelerated on the first path can be slowed down on the third path, and the game ball that collided with the inner wall of the third path will be moved to the third path. It is possible to suppress the ball from returning to the first path or from swinging (shaking) in the throwing direction of the first path (horizontal direction when viewed from the front) on the third path. This allows the player's line of sight to follow the game ball thrown from the third path in a fixed direction. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown to the third path.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the game ball from shaking (shaking) in the horizontal direction (left and right direction when viewed from the front) with respect to the game board when viewed from the front, the third path that connects the first path and the second path can be There is no need to lengthen the route to suppress swinging of the game ball, and the third route can be shortened. As a result, the route unit can be accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the route unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

In addition, as a guide means for guiding the game ball, switching the rolling direction of the game ball using unevenness, or disposing a displacement member at the path switching part and guiding the game ball to the second path by displacing the displacement member. An example of how to do this is given below.

In the gaming machine K1, the guide means is composed of a recess provided in an inner wall on either the front side or the back side, and a protrusion provided protruding from the other inner wall on the front side or the back side. A gaming machine K2 characterized in that the recessed portion and the convex portion are formed at positions facing each other.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, the guiding means includes a recess provided in the inner wall on either the front side or the back side, and an inner wall on the other side of the front side or the back side. The concave part and the convex part are formed at positions facing each other, so that the game ball can be partially displaced in the middle of the third path, and the game ball can be can slow down the ball's throwing speed. Therefore, the third route can be shortened. As a result, the route unit can be easily accommodated within a predetermined area with respect to the game board, and a space for arranging the route unit with respect to the game board can be secured.

A gaming machine K3 in the gaming machine K2, wherein a horizontal distance from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K2, the horizontal distance from the protruding tip of the convex portion to one inner wall of the third path is set smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball. , the game ball that flows down the third path and is thrown to the guide means can be easily brought into contact with the convex portion of the guide means. Thereby, the game ball that flows down the first path and is thrown to the third path can be brought into contact with the convex portion, and its rolling speed can be easily slowed down. Therefore, the game ball that has collided with the inner wall of the third path can be prevented from returning to the first path or swinging in the third path in a direction different from the ball throwing direction of the third path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the third route.

A game machine K2 or K3, wherein the convex portion is formed on an inner wall on the front side with respect to the game board, and the recessed portion is formed on an inner wall on the back side with respect to the game board. Machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K2 or K3, the convex portion is formed on the inner wall on the front side with respect to the game board, and the recessed portion is formed on the inner wall on the back side with respect to the game board. Therefore, the plate thickness on the front side of the path unit can be made thinner. Therefore, the inside of the path unit can be easily seen by the player through the front of the path unit, and the game ball thrown inside the path unit can be easily seen by the player. Furthermore, by forming a recess in the inner wall on the front side of the route unit, it is possible to suppress the guide means from protruding to the front of the route unit, so that the route unit can be disposed on the player's side. It is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the path unit.

To explain in detail, when the recess is formed on the inner surface on the front side, the thickness of the front side of the path unit needs to be larger than the depth of the recess. Therefore, as the thickness of the front side of the path unit increases, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown on the back side thereof. In addition, when a recess is formed on the inner surface of the front side, it is possible to curve the front plate of the path unit along the shape of the recess, but in this case, the game A gap with the glass plate forming the front side of the area is required, and the entire game board needs to be placed on the back side. Therefore, the further away from the player the player is, the more difficult it becomes for the player to see the game ball thrown through the path unit.

Furthermore, when the recess is formed on the inner surface of the front side, it is also possible to open the part where the recess is formed, but in this case, the rigidity of the path unit decreases due to the opening, and the path The unit becomes easily damaged. Furthermore, if an opening is formed in the front of the path unit, there is a risk that unauthorized persons may pass through the opening.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine K4, the concave portion is formed on the back side of the path unit, and the convex portion is formed on the front side of the path unit, so that the thickness of the entire front side of the path unit is suppressed from increasing. In addition to making it easier to see the game balls passing through the inside of the path unit, the path unit is placed on the front side of the gaming machine by suppressing the partial protrusion toward the front side of the path unit. The game ball passing through can be easily recognized.

A game machine K5 in the game machine K3 or K4, wherein the convex portion and the concave portion have arc-shaped cross sections in the direction of gravity when viewed from the front, and the axes of the arcs are set coaxially.

According to the gaming machine K5, in the gaming machine K3 or K4, the convex part and the concave part have an arc-shaped cross section in the direction of gravity, and the axes of the arcs are set on the same axis, so that the convex part and the concave part are The separation distance can be kept constant. As a result, the distance between the convex portion and the concave portion can be prevented from becoming partially smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball passing through the inside of the path unit can be prevented from being caught between the convex portion and the inner wall. can.

In the gaming machine K5, the upper end of the recessed portion is formed at a position along an extension line of the rolling locus of the center of the gaming ball rolling on the first path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine K6, the upper end of the recess is formed at a position along the extension line of the rolling locus of the center of the game ball rolling on the first path when viewed from the front, so that the game ball rolling on the first path cannot be played. Even when the rolling speed of the ball is high, the center of the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path can be suppressed from being thrown above the upper end of the recess. As a result, the game ball thrown from the first path to the third path can be thrown inside the recess.

A gaming machine K7 in any one of gaming machines K2 to K6, characterized in that the recessed portion is formed at a position spaced apart from both horizontal side surfaces of the third path in a front view by more than the radial dimension of the gaming ball. .

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K2 to K6, the recessed portion is formed at a position that is spaced apart from both sides of the third path in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front by a radius dimension of the gaming ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball flowing down along the inner wall of the recess from colliding with both side surfaces of the path unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front and swinging inside the recess. As a result, the game ball thrown along the inside of the recess can be smoothly thrown to the second path.

In any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the recessed portion is recessed so that a cross section in the ball throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front has an arcuate cross section centered on a central portion in the horizontal direction of the third path; Game K8 is characterized in that the convex portion has a protruding rectangular cross section in the throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K3 to K7, the recessed portion has an arcuate cross section in the throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front, and the convex portion has an arcuate cross section in the throwing direction of the first path when viewed from the front. Since the cross section of the first path in the ball throwing direction in view is provided in a protruding rectangular shape, the distance between the opposing concave portions and the convex portions of the guide means is narrowed toward both ends of the first path in the ball throwing direction. Therefore, the game ball thrown inside the recess can be made difficult to swing in the throwing direction of the first path. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball thrown to the third path.

In the gaming machine K8, the convex portion extends in a downwardly inclined direction to one side in a direction opposite to the throwing direction of the game ball on the second path when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K8, the convex portion extends downwardly and inclines to one side in the direction opposite to the throwing direction of the game ball on the second path when viewed from the front. The game ball that comes into contact with the convex part while flowing down the three routes can be guided in the direction of the inclination of the convex part. Thereby, the game ball that has come into contact with the convex portion can be guided along the inner wall of the concave portion on the side away from the second path. As a result, the game balls flowing into the second path from the third path can be rolled in the throwing direction of the game balls in the second path, and the game balls can smoothly flow into the second path from the third path. can.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first path is provided with a second guide means at a connecting portion with the third path, and the second guide means guides the game ball thrown from the first path. A gaming machine K10 characterized in that it can be guided by the guiding means.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the first route is provided with a second guide means at the connection part with the third route, and the second guide means Since the game balls thrown from the route can be guided to the guide means, the game balls thrown from the first route to the third route can be easily thrown to the guide means for the third route. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly throw the game ball from the first route to the third route. Therefore, since the game balls thrown from the first route can be easily thrown to the guide means, the game balls can flow smoothly from the third route to the second route. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of game balls throughout the route unit.

In the gaming machine K10, the second guide means includes a second convex portion protruding from either the front side or the back side of the first path, and a second convex portion recessed at a position opposite to the second convex portion. 2 concave portions, and the second concave portion has a width dimension in a direction perpendicular to a downstream direction of the game ball that is set larger toward the upstream side of the first path when viewed from the front. K11.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K10, the second guide means includes a second protrusion protruding from either the front side or the back side of the first path; and a second recess recessed in an opposing position, and the second recess is set to have a large width in a direction perpendicular to the downward direction of the game ball toward the upstream side of the first path when viewed from the front. Therefore, the game ball thrown along the first path can be easily received in the second recess. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly throw the game ball from the first route to the third route. Therefore, since the game balls thrown from the first route can be easily thrown to the guide means, the game balls can flow smoothly from the third route to the second route. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the throwing of game balls throughout the route unit.

A gaming machine K12 in the gaming machine K10 or K11, characterized in that the second recessed portion is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball on the first route, such that the downstream end of the first route is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball on the first route. .

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K10 or K11, the downstream end of the first path of the second recess is located downstream of the rolling surface of the game ball on the first path. Therefore, the game balls flowing from the first path to the third path along the inner wall of the second recess can be caused to flow into the third path on the far side from the first path. As a result, the game balls flowing from the first path to the third path can be easily thrown inside the recess, and the game balls can easily flow from the third path to the second path.

<About the concept of the invention using the special prize winning device 550 as an example>
A game machine comprising a game board having a game area on the front side, and a flow direction changing means disposed in front of the game board for changing the flow direction of a game ball flowing down the game area, wherein the flow direction change means includes a first member disposed on the front side of the game board, a second member disposed on the front side of the first member at a predetermined interval, and at least one of the first member and the second member. an adjusting means for displacing one side, the adjusting means changes the interval between the facing first member and the second member, and the game ball flows down between the facing first member and the second member. A gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the direction of flow of the game machine L1 is adjustable.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a gaming board having a gaming area on the front side and nails driven into the front of the gaming board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197311). According to this game machine, it is possible to adjust the direction of the game ball flowing down the game area by adjusting the angle of the nail nailed to the game board (by bending the nail). However, when changing the angle of the nail to change the direction in which the game ball flows down, the angle of the nail is visible to the player, which puts the player at a disadvantage (the game ball is difficult to flow down into the flow path where it is advantageous). There is a problem in that when a player recognizes that the game machine is at a disadvantage (the angle of the nail), the player stops playing the game machine that he or she considers to be at a disadvantage, and the operating rate of the game machine decreases.

On the other hand, according to the game machine L1, the flow direction changing means includes a first member disposed in front of the game board, and a second member disposed at a predetermined interval on the front side of the first member. 2 members, and adjusting means for displacing at least one of the first member and the second member, the adjusting means changes the distance between the facing first member and the second member, and the first member and the second member are moved. Since the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down between the two opposing members can be adjusted, the flowing direction of the game ball can be changed (adjusted) by the distance in the front and back direction with respect to the front view of the game board. Therefore, when viewed from the front of the game board, compared to the nails that change the downward direction of the game ball by a distance in the horizontal direction, the player is prevented from visually recognizing the downward direction changing means and determining that it is disadvantageous or advantageous. can. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In the game machine L1, the second member is fixed to the game board, and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjustment means.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine L1, the second member is fixed to the game board and the position of the first member is displaced by the adjustment means, so that the second member disposed on the front side At least a portion of the first member disposed on the back side is hidden by the second member, thereby making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the position of the first member. Therefore, when the position of the first member is displaced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the displacement of the position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the distance between the opposing first and second members. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from not playing a game on the gaming machine because he/she judges that the spacing between the opposing first and second members is disadvantageous, thereby improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In the game machine L2, the game board includes a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and a fastening member that is inserted through the first opening from the back side of the game board is attached to the first member. A game machine L3 characterized in that the first member is disposed on the game board by being fastened to the game board.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine L2, the game board is provided with a first opening that opens at a position corresponding to the first member, and the first opening is inserted from the back side of the game board. By fastening the fastening member to the first member, the first member is disposed on the game board, so there is no need to form a fastening part for fastening the first member on the front side of the game board, and the front side The outer shape of the first member can be made smaller when viewed. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure space for arranging other members in front of the game board.

Further, since the fastening member is fastened from the back side of the game board, it is possible to make it difficult to access the fastening member from the front side of the game board when the flow direction changing means and the game board are assembled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening member from being illicitly manipulated and the position of the first member from being illicitly changed.

In the game machine L3, the first member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the game board and is inserted into the first opening, and the fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protrusion, so that the A game machine L4 characterized in that a first member is disposed on the game board.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine L3, the first member includes a protrusion that protrudes toward the game board and is inserted into the first opening, and a fastening member is fastened to the tip of the protrusion. By doing so, the first member is disposed on the game board, so that the fastening portion of the fastening member can be accommodated inside the first opening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fastening portion of the first member from protruding toward the front side of the fastening member, so that it is possible to secure a space between the first member and the second member facing each other.

In the game machine L4, the first member can be slid on a plane parallel to the front surface of the game board by the adjustment means, and the first opening has the same size as the displacement area of the protrusion. A gaming machine L5 is characterized in that it is opened in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L4, the first opening has the same size as the displacement area of the protrusion, so when displacing the position of the first member, the protrusion can be displaced along the first opening. Therefore, when displacing the position of the first member, it is possible to suppress the first member from being displaced in a direction other than the displacement direction (the direction in which it is displaced by the adjustment means). As a result, the operator can easily adjust the position of the first member.

In any of the gaming machines L3 to L5, the gaming machine L6 is characterized in that the gaming board includes a second opening that opens at a position different from the first opening.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines L3 to L5, the game board includes a second opening that opens at a position different from the first opening. A fastening member fastened to the back side of the game board can be operated. As a result, the work process when the operator operates the adjustment means can be simplified.

That is, since the accessory device and the case member that houses the accessory device are arranged on the back side of the game board, when the fastening member is operated from the back side of the game board, the accessory device and its case member are arranged. When it is necessary to remove the case member housing the accessory device from the game board, the second opening allows the operator to operate the fastening member from the front side of the game board. Since there is no need to remove the installed accessory device or the case member housing the accessory device, the work process for the worker can be simplified.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the adjustment means changes the position of the second member relative to the first member in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L1, the position of the second member relative to the first member is changed in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, so that the position of the second member relative to the first member is changed. Compared to the case where the position is changed in the horizontal or vertical direction in a front view, it is possible to suppress the position of the second member from being changed in a front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from determining that the change in the position of the second member as viewed from the front is advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed from a non-light-transmitting material, and is formed to have a larger outer shape in front view than the first member, and the first member is larger than the first member in front view. A gaming machine L8 characterized in that it is covered by a second member.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L2 to L7, the second member is formed from a non-light-transmitting material, has a larger external shape in front view than the first member, and Since the first member is covered by the second member when viewed from the front, the first member can be hidden by the second member when viewed from the front, making it difficult for the player to recognize the first member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the distance between the opposing first and second members, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is formed of a non-light-transmitting material, and at least one of the first member and the second member protrudes from the other of the first member and the second member. A gaming machine L9 is characterized in that it is provided with a protruding part.

According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L8, the second member is made of a non-light-transmitting material, and at least one of the first member and the second member is made of a non-light-transmitting material. Alternatively, since the second member has a protruding part that protrudes from the other side, the game ball thrown between the first member and the second member can be brought into contact with the protruding part and the direction of the ball thrown can be changed. can. Therefore, by recognizing the distance between the opposing first and second members, it is possible to prevent the player from making a judgment that the player is advantageous or disadvantageous. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means is configured to adjust the position of the other of the first member or the second member in stages, with respect to one of the first member or the second member. A gaming machine L10 characterized by comprising means.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L9, the adjusting means adjusts the position of the other of the first member or the second member with respect to one of the first member or the second member. Since the step adjustment means that can be adjusted in steps is provided, an operator who changes the position of the first member or the second member can adjust the change in the position in steps. As a result, it is possible to suppress errors in the adjusted position of the first member or the second member. Therefore, it is possible to easily adjust the position of the first member or the second member.

Note that the means for adjusting the positions of the first member and the second member in stages includes adjusting the position of the first member or the second member with respect to a plurality of grooves formed in one of the first member or the second member. By changing the insertion position of the protruding convex part, the position of the first member or the second member can be changed, or the first member can be inserted into a plurality of grooves recessed in one of the first member or the game board. An example is a mode in which the position of the first member is changed by changing the insertion position of a convex portion protruding from the other side of the member or the game board.

<About the concept of the invention using the special prize winning device 550 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a gaming area in which a game ball flows down, and a route unit disposed in the gaming area and having a plurality of guide routes for guiding the throwing of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. The unit includes a first guide route formed from a light-transmissible material and arranged on the front side of the game area, and a second guide route arranged on the back side of the first guide route. and, the first guide route includes a first winning opening into which a game ball can be inserted, and the second guiding route includes a second winning opening into which a gaming ball can enter. , a game machine M1 characterized in that a game ball that enters the first winning hole is given a higher gaming value than a game ball that enters the second winning hole.

Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that improves the player's interest by disposing a path unit in a gaming area that has a plurality of guide paths for letting game balls flow down, and allowing the player to visually see the game balls flowing down inside the unit. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-131046).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the layout of each guide route has tended to be complicated in order to increase the player's interest by allowing the player to see the game balls flowing down the guide route. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to judge which route among the respective guide routes the game ball is flowing down. Therefore, when the gaming values of game balls flowing down the guide route are different, the player can determine whether they are passing through an advantageous (higher gaming value is given) or unfavorable (lower gaming value is given) route. There is a problem in that it becomes difficult to judge, and the player's interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced by the game balls flowing down the path unit.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, the route unit includes a first guide route formed of a light-transmissible material and disposed on the front side of the gaming area, and a rear side of the first guide route. a second guide route disposed on the side, the first guide route includes a first prize opening into which a game ball can enter, and the second guide route has a first winning opening into which a game ball can enter. Since the game ball that enters the first winning hole is given a higher gaming value than the game ball that enters the second winning hole, the first guide route It is possible to make it easier for the player to watch the game ball flowing down. In addition, if the game balls are flown down the first and second guide routes at the same timing, the second guide route with the second winning opening with the lower gaming value will be placed on the back side of the first guide route. Since the game ball is formed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the first guide route that includes the first winning hole with high game value. As a result, it is possible for the player to visually recognize game balls that are given a high gaming value, thereby making it easier to increase the player's interest.

Note that the predetermined game value means, for example, a game ball that is paid out to the player as a benefit when the game ball enters the first or second prize opening.

In the gaming machine M1, the first guide route includes a first route for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and a game ball thrown from the first route to the game ball on the first route. a second path for throwing the game ball to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction; and a connection path that connects one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity, the connection The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that the path is curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M1, the first guide route includes a first route for throwing a game ball to one side in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and a ball being thrown from the first route. a second path in which the game ball is thrown to the other side in the horizontal direction opposite to the guiding direction of the game ball in the first path; and one side of the first path and the second path in the direction of gravity. and a connecting path that connects, and the connecting path is curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side of the gaming area, so that the first path and the second path are directly connected by the shortest distance. The throwing path can have more curves than in the case where the pitcher throws the ball. Thereby, the downward speed of the game ball can be slowed down in stages at the curved portion, and it is possible to suppress the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connection path and swinging (shaking) within the connection path. As a result, the game balls can flow smoothly from the first route to the second route, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the throwing of the game balls from the first route to the second route.

In addition, in order to prevent the game ball from colliding with the inner wall of the connecting path and shaking (shaking), the internal space of the connecting path is made larger in the throwing direction of the first path, so that the game ball repeatedly hits the inner wall of the connecting path. It is also possible to suppress the collision, but in this case, the internal space of the connecting path is enlarged in the throwing direction of the first path, so that the connecting path protrudes in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, since the path unit when viewed from the front is enlarged in the horizontal direction, it is difficult to keep the path unit within a predetermined range when viewed from the front.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine M2, since the connecting path is curved in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side, the external shape of the path unit when viewed from the front can be kept within a predetermined range. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the game ball flowing down the first guide route, the range that the player visually recognizes can be kept within a predetermined range (the outer shape of the route unit). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game balls flowing down the route unit.

In the gaming machine M2, the path unit is disposed on the other side of the gaming area in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and the connecting path is formed on one side of the path unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Characteristic gaming machine M3.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M2, the route unit is disposed on the other side of the gaming area in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and the connecting route is located on one side of the route unit in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Since it is formed on the side, the connection path can be formed at a position close to the player who is located in front of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the connection path. As a result, even if the game ball is thrown to the back side through the connection path, the game ball passing through the connection path can be easily seen by the player.

A gaming machine M4 characterized in that in the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning opening is disposed between the first route and the second route when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M2 or M3, the first winning opening is disposed between the first route and the second route when viewed from the front. By using the dead space formed between the two routes, the first prize opening can be formed on the first guide route. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the external size of the route unit when viewed from the front. As a result, the range in which the player visually recognizes the route unit can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the path unit.

In any of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the connecting route includes a third prize opening into which a gaming ball can be inserted into two places, a connecting part with the first route and the second route; a displacement member that can be moved to a position that closes or opens the winning hole, and the game ball that enters the third winning hole is the same as the game ball that enters the first winning hole. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that a gaming value is given.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M2 to M4, the connecting route has a third prize opening into which game balls can be inserted into two places, the first route and the connecting part with the second route. , and a displacement member that can be moved to a position that closes or opens the third winning hole, and the game ball that enters the third winning hole is different from the game ball that enters the first winning hole. Since the same gaming value is given, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball thrown from the first route to the connecting route to enter one of the two third winning holes, and the game ball is thrown down the connecting route. It is possible to easily give players interest by using game balls that play.

That is, between the third winning port on the upstream side formed at the connecting portion of the connecting path and the first path and the third winning hole on the downstream side formed at the connecting portion of the connecting path and the second path. Since the connecting path can be arranged in the position, when the displacement member is repeatedly operated at a predetermined timing to the position where the third winning opening is closed or released, the third winning opening is closed by the displacement member. At this time, the game balls thrown from the first route to the connecting route are allowed to flow down the connecting route that curves to the back side, thereby securing the time until the third prize opening is released, and You can make it flow into the winning opening. As a result, the game balls thrown into the connection path can easily flow into the third prize opening, so the game balls flowing down the connection path can easily entertain the players.

In addition, the two third winning openings are formed at the upstream and downstream ends of the connecting route (the connecting part between the first route and the second route), so the third winning opening can be inserted into the third winning opening. You can extend the time you can play the ball. Therefore, it is possible to extend the time for which the player is interested, and it is possible to easily increase the player's interest.

A gaming machine M6 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, a detection means for detecting passage of a gaming ball is disposed outside the connection path.

According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, a detection means for detecting passage of a game ball is provided in the connecting path, so that the game ball can be prevented from getting stuck in the connecting path. In this case, by continuing the detection by the detection means, it is possible to cause the gaming machine to detect the error. In addition, since the detection means is arranged outside the connection path, compared to the case where the detection means is arranged inside the connection path, it is possible to suppress the game ball from getting caught in the detection means, and the game can be improved accordingly. It is possible to prevent balls from clogging in the connection path.

Furthermore, since the detection means is disposed outside the connecting path where the rolling of the game balls is slowed down, it is easy to accurately detect the number of game balls passing through the connecting path. Therefore, when the number of balls detected by the detection means is greater than the number of balls that enter the first winning hole or the third winning hole, it is possible to make the gaming machine recognize that fraud is being committed. As a result, the continuation of fraud can be suppressed by notifying that fraud is being committed through an alarm sound, abnormal lighting, or the like.

In the gaming machine M6, the connecting path has a dimension between opposing inner walls when viewed from the front, which is set larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the connecting path has an opposing inner wall of the first path in a direction perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball. A game machine M7 characterized in that the size is set smaller than the distance between the two.

According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M6, the connecting path has a dimension between opposing inner walls when viewed from the front, which is set larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and is orthogonal to the throwing direction of the gaming ball. Since the dimension is set smaller than the dimension between the opposing inner walls of the first path in the direction, when a game ball with a diameter larger than a predetermined size (diameter larger than the regulation) is thrown, the game ball cannot be kept in the connecting path. It can be clogged. As a result, it is possible to prevent game balls having a diameter larger than the regulation from flowing down the path unit.

In addition, since a detection means for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided in the connection path, if a game ball with a diameter larger than the regulation remains (clogs) in the connection path, the detection means detects the passing of the game ball. can be used to detect errors.

In the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connecting path has an opening opening with a predetermined value smaller than the diameter of the game ball formed in a radially outer side wall of the path that curves in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side. A gaming machine M7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M6 or M7, the connecting path has a predetermined diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball on the radially outer side wall of the path that curves in a semicircular arc shape toward the back side. Since an opening is formed that opens at a value of Can be discharged. As a result, it is possible to suppress game balls having a smaller diameter than the regulation from flowing down the path unit.

The opening is formed on the radially outer side wall of the connection path, which serves as the rolling surface of the game balls flowing down the connection path, so if the game ball flowing down the connection path has a diameter smaller than the specified value, Makes it easier to eject game balls.

The gaming machine M8 includes a box-shaped accommodating part that projects from the outside in the radial direction of the connection path and communicates with the opening, and the accommodating part is set to a size that can accommodate game balls. , a gaming machine M9 formed in a detection range of the detection means.

According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M8, the gaming machine M9 includes a box-shaped accommodating part that protrudes from the outside in the radial direction of the connection path and communicates with the opening, and the accommodating part has a gaming machine inside. The ball is formed to a size that can accommodate the ball, and is formed within the detection range of the detection means, so that a game with a diameter less than a predetermined size (a diameter smaller than the regulation) is discharged from the opening of the opening to the outside of the connecting path. The balls can be stored inside the receptacle. Furthermore, since the storage section is formed within the detection range of the detection means, the detection means can detect game balls stored inside the storage section. As a result, when game balls are stored inside the storage section, the detection means can cause the gaming machine to detect an error.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M9, a position where a game ball inlet of the first guide route and a game ball inlet of the second guide route are adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. A gaming machine M10 characterized in that it is formed.

According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M1 to M9, the inflow port for game balls on the first guide route and the inflow port for game balls on the second guide route, Since they are formed at adjacent positions in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, the player cannot determine whether the game balls flowing down the game area of the game board will flow into the first guide route or the second guide route until just before the game balls flow into the game board. It can be made difficult to be grasped. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to keep an eye on the game ball that flows down the game area and is thrown to the path unit. As a result, it is possible to easily give players interest.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A base member having a game area on the front side, and a first member disposed on the front side of the base member and having a ball throwing path formed as a space in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown. In the gaming machine, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state where it is biased toward the back side of the base member by a fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. Game machine N1.

Conventionally, a base member has a game area on the front side, and a first member that is disposed on the front side of the base member and has a ball throwing path formed as a space where a game ball flowing down the game area can be thrown. There is a gaming machine equipped with (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-131046). According to this gaming machine, the first member includes an extending portion extending on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member on a side surface on the base member side (a portion in contact with the base member), and the extending portion extends on a plane parallel to the front surface of the base member. By screwing the screw inserted into the opening formed in the base member into the base member, the base member is disposed in close contact with the front surface of the base member.

However, in conventional gaming machines, in order to arrange the first member in close contact with the front side of the base member, it is essential to fasten the screw inserted from the front side of the first member to the base member. It is necessary to form an opening in the first member for the insertion thereof. Here, in order to form the opening in a position that does not interfere with the throwing of the game ball, it is necessary to form the opening outside the throwing space of the game ball, and the extension part where the opening is formed must be placed outside of the throwing space. need to be formed. Therefore, since the extending portion is formed on the outer edge of the first member, the area that can be used as a throwing path becomes smaller with respect to the outer shape of the first member, and the throwing path of the first member cannot be made sufficiently large. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, the first member is disposed on the base member in a state where it is biased toward the back side of the base member by the fixing means fastened from the back side of the base member. The first member and the base member can be disposed in close contact with each other due to the biasing force acting on the first member toward the back side. Furthermore, since the first member is disposed on the base member by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member, there is a fastening allowance (an opening through which the fixing means is inserted) for fastening the first member with the base member on the front side of the first member. This eliminates the need to form an extended portion (to be formed). Therefore, with respect to the outer shape of the first member when viewed from the front, the entire area can be used as a throwing path. As a result, the ball throwing path of the first member can be increased.

In addition, since the fastened portion between the base member and the first member is not exposed to the front side, it is possible to prevent the fastened portion between the base member and the first member from being removed by unauthorized persons, and the fastened portion is visible to the player. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

The gaming machine N1 includes a second member disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is inserted from the back side of the second member to the first member side. The game machine is fixed to the first member by the fixing means that is fixed to the first member, and is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the second member is provided on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is arranged on the back side of the second member. The first member is fixed to the first member by a fixing means that is inserted into the first member side and fixed to the first member, and is disposed on the base member with a predetermined gap from the first member. When fastening the first member to the second member, a force that urges the first member toward the back side can be applied to the first member by the amount of the predetermined gap. Moreover, since a force biased toward the front side can be applied to the second member, the base member can be held between the first member and the second member. Therefore, the first member and the second member are unlikely to be displaced from the base member due to the clamping force between the first member and the second member, so it is not necessary to fasten the first member or the second member to the base member. This makes it easier to fasten the second member.

Note that the predetermined gap between the first member and the second member is set to a value larger than 0 and smaller than the width dimension of the base member in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, when the first member and the second member are fastened together, a force that attracts each other can be applied to both the first member and the second member due to the gap.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member has a protrusion that projects inside the first opening. A gaming machine N3, characterized in that the first member is disposed on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the protrusion.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member has the first opening. Since the first member is disposed on the base member by fastening the fixing means to the tip of the protrusion, the fastening portion of the fixing means is attached to the inside of the first opening. It can be placed in Thereby, the fastening portion of the fixing means can be prevented from being disposed on the front side of the base member, and the fastening portion of the fixing means can be prevented from being formed in the ball throwing space of the first member. As a result, the size of the ball throwing space of the first member can be secured.

Furthermore, since the protruding portion can secure the fastening margin (insertion depth) of the fixing means, it is possible to suppress the fastening of the fixing means from coming off from the first member. As a result, it is possible to easily increase the biasing force acting on the first member toward the back side.

In the gaming machine N1, a second member disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member, and a third member disposed between the first member and the second member facing each other. , the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the third member has a front-rear dimension when viewed from the front of the base member. The first member is set to be smaller than the dimension in the front-rear direction and is disposed inside the first opening, the first member is disposed in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member is A game machine N4 characterized in that the base member is fastened to the back side of the third member with a predetermined gap therebetween by the fixing means inserted from the back side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the second member is disposed on the back side of the first member via the base member, and the second member is disposed between the opposing first and second members. a third member provided therein, the base member has a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the third member has a dimension in the front-rear direction of the base member when viewed from the front. The first member is set to be smaller than the dimension in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and is disposed inside the first opening, the first member is disposed in close contact with the front side of the third member, and the second member is disposed on the inside of the first opening. Since the fixing means inserted from the back side of the member is fastened to the back side of the third member with a predetermined gap between the third member and the third member, it is possible to attach the first member to the back side through the third member. Forces can be exerted. Therefore, the biasing force toward the back side that is applied when the second member and the third member are fastened together by the fixing means can also be applied to the third member. As a result, the biasing force acting on the portion of the first member that contacts the base member can be reduced, and damage to the first member can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by bringing the third member into close contact with the back side of the first member, the rigidity of the entire first member can be increased. Therefore, the entire first member is elastically deformed by the biasing force acting on the first member toward the back side, and it is possible to suppress deformation of the throwing path of the game ball formed in the first member. As a result, the game ball of the first member can be thrown stably.

In the game machine N4, the third member is a part of a frame-like member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening formed in the base member. Game machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N4, the third member is a part of a frame-shaped member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening opened in the base member. Therefore, the urging force acting on the third member can be used as a force for urging the frame member toward the back side. Therefore, the frame member can be easily disposed in close contact with the base member.

Furthermore, since the biasing force toward the back surface that is applied when the second member and the third member are fastened by the fixing means can be applied to the contact surface between the frame member and the base member, the first member The force acting on the contact portion with the base member can be reduced, and damage to the first member can be suppressed.

In the game machine N4 or N5, the first member includes a displacement member capable of displacing the throwing space of the game ball of the first member, and a drive disposed on the back side of the first member to drive the displacement member. means, the third member includes a third opening having a size that allows the driving means to be inserted therein, and the third member has a third opening having a size that allows the driving means to be inserted thereinto, and the third member has a third opening with the driving means inserted inside the third opening. A game machine characterized in that it is arranged on the back side of one member.

According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4 or N5, the first member includes a displacement member capable of displacing the throwing space of the game ball of the first member, and a displacement member disposed on the back side of the first member. and a driving means for driving the displacement member, the third member having a third opening having a size that allows insertion of the driving means, and inserting the driving means inside the third opening. Since it is disposed on the back side of the first member in this state, the driving means can be covered with the third member. Thereby, it is possible to prevent unauthorized objects such as wires and piano wires inserted from the outside of the gaming machine from accessing the drive means. As a result, it is possible to suppress tampering with the driving means.

In the game machine N6, the second member projects toward the first member, communicates with the ball throwing space of the first member, and transfers the game ball thrown into the ball throwing space of the first member to the second member. A gaming machine N7 comprising a communication section that allows ball throwing, and the communication section is arranged outside the third opening.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine N6, the second member is protruded toward the first member side, communicates with the ball throwing space of the first member, and allows a game in which the ball is thrown into the ball throwing space of the first member. The ball is provided with a communication part that can send the ball to the second member, and the communication part is disposed outside the third opening, so that the third member can be disposed between the communication part and the driving means. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the magnetic force generated by the driving of the driving means to act on the communication portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the speed of the game ball thrown into the communication section from slowing down or stopping at the communication section due to the influence of the magnetic force of the driving means, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from slowing down or stopping at the communication section due to the influence of the magnetic force of the driving means. Throwing of the game ball to the member can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member protrudes from at least two locations on the back side of the first member. The protrusion includes a first piece that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and is inserted through the first opening, and an end portion of the first piece that is bent to extend outside the first opening. a second piece extending toward the front side of the second piece, and a raised part raised toward the front side of the second piece that overlaps with the base member when viewed from the front; The protrusion dimension is set to a larger value than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the dimension of the protruding portion between facing the back surface of the first member is equal to or equal to the width dimension in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the base member. The bending tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means, so that the first member is biased toward the back side with respect to the base member. The gaming machine N8 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the base member includes a first opening formed at a position facing the first member, and the first member has a rear surface of the first member. The protrusion includes a first piece that protrudes from the back surface of the first member and is inserted through the first opening, and a first piece that is bent at the end of the first piece and extends from the first member. The first piece includes a second piece extending toward the outside of the opening, and a protuberance raised toward the front side of the second piece that overlaps with the base member in front view, and the first piece extends toward the outside of the base member when viewed from the front. The protrusion dimension is set to a larger value than the width dimension in the front-rear direction, and the dimension of the protruding portion between facing the back surface of the first member is set to be equal to or smaller than the width dimension in the front-rear direction when the base member is viewed from the front. The bent tip of the second piece is fastened to the base member by the fixing means, so that the first member is biased toward the back side of the base member. There is no need to provide a portion for fastening a fixing means (for example, a screw) on the side, and a throwing space for the game ball formed in the first member can be secured. As a result, since the ball throwing space can be enlarged, the throwing direction of the game ball thrown to the first member can be varied to make the ball throwing more interesting.

Further, since the screwing portion of the fixing means can be made into the base member, elastic deformation of the ball throwing space of the first member can be suppressed by applying a biasing force to the screwing portion of the fixing means. As a result, the first member is elastically deformed and the speed of the game ball thrown from the ball throwing path of the first member can be suppressed from slowing down.

In gaming machine N8, the base member includes a second opening formed in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and a frame-shaped member disposed on the front side of the base member along the second opening. A gaming machine N9 comprising: the first opening and the second opening communicating with each other.

According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine N8, the base member has a second opening formed in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, and a second opening on the front side of the base member along the second opening. Since the first opening and the second opening communicate with each other, the projecting part is arranged inside the first opening using the opening of the second opening. can be set. Therefore, the work of disposing the first unit on the base member can be simplified, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement unit 400 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven by displacement of the displacement member, in a driven direction of the driven member. the displacement member is displaced between a first position and a second position, and is moved from the first position to an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. a first displacement region for displacing the third position of the 1st position; and a second displacement region for displacing the second position from the third position; By being displaced to the second position, the first driven position is driven to the second driven position, and the third driven position, which is an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position, is displaced from the first driven position. a first driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a portion of the second driven region and the first driven region are the same. The gaming machine O1 is set in a second displacement area, and when the displacement member is displaced through a second displacement area, the regulating means restricts the swinging of the displacement member in a direction other than the displacement direction.

Conventionally, a base member, a displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and a driven member connected to the displacement member and driven by the displacement of the displacement member, the driven member being driven by the displacement of the displacement member. A gaming machine that displaces a member is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2015-029849). However, in conventional gaming machines, in order to restrict the displacement of the displacement member and the driven member and the rocking motion in directions other than the driven direction, a regulating means for regulating the rocking motion of both the displacement member and the driven member is formed. There was a problem in that it was necessary to form it in two places, which made the shape more complicated and increased the manufacturing cost.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine O1, the displacement member is provided with a regulating means for regulating the swinging of the driven member in a direction other than the driven direction, and the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position, The driven member has a first displacement region for displacing from the first position to a third position intermediate between the first position and the second position, and a second displacement region for displacing the second position from the third position. , the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, thereby being driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, and from the first driven position to an intermediate position between the first driven position and the second driven position. It has a first driven region that displaces the third driven position, and a second driven region that displaces the second driven position from the third driven position, and at least a portion of the second displacement region and the first driven region are When the displacement member is set in the same area and is displaced through the second displacement area, the restriction means restricts the movement of the displacement member in a direction other than the displacement direction, so the same part of the restriction means is used. It is possible to restrict the swinging of the driven member and the displacement member. Therefore, since the regulating means only needs to be formed at one location, the shape can be simplified and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In addition, since the swinging of the driven member and the displacement member can be restricted using the same part of the restriction means, there is no need to form the driven member, the displacement member, and the restriction part of one restriction means, respectively. Accordingly, the regulating means can be made smaller.

In the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall protruding from the base member toward the driven member, and the driven member is attached to the base at a position overlapping with at least a portion of the base member when viewed from the front. It is characterized in that it is capable of sliding displacement on a plane parallel to the member, and as it is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the area overlapping with the base member in front view is gradually reduced. Game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O1, the regulating means is configured as a wall portion protruding from the base member toward the driven member, and the driven member has at least one portion of the base member when viewed from the front. It is possible to slide and displace on a plane parallel to the base member at the position overlapping with the base member, and as the base member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the area overlapping with the base member is gradually reduced in front view. In the second driven position, the region in which the driven member projects outward from the base member when viewed from the front is made larger than in the first driven position. Therefore, since the driven member protrudes outward from the base member, it is difficult to restrict the swinging of the driven member using a restriction means provided on the base member. Therefore, the more the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the more easily it swings toward the base member, but by restricting the rocking of the displacement member connected to the driven member, the regulating means By increasing the number of restricted locations, it is possible to make it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the driven member from swinging when placed in the second driven region.

In the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape with one side long when viewed from the front, has a rotatable rotation shaft on one side in the longitudinal direction, is rotatably disposed on the base member, and is rotatably disposed on the base member. In the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is substantially parallel to the horizontal direction, and when driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates about the rotation axis. A gaming machine O3, wherein the other side of the driven member is arranged above the rotating shaft in the direction of gravity.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O2, the driven member is formed in a rectangular shape with one side long when viewed from the front, has a rotatable rotation axis on one side in the longitudinal direction, and has a rotary shaft attached to the base member. The driven member is rotatably arranged, and in the first driven position, the longitudinal direction of the driven member is approximately parallel to the horizontal direction, and when driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, the driven member rotates around the rotation axis. As the driven member rotates, the other side of the driven member is placed above the rotating shaft in the direction of gravity, so when the driven member is driven from the first driven position to the second driven position, it rotates and its longitudinal side stands up. Therefore, as the driven member stands up, the load of the driven member is more likely to act toward the rotating shaft, and the load is applied to the driven member in the swinging direction of the driven member, making it easier for the driven member to swing.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, by restricting the swinging of the displacement member connected to the driven member, the number of locations regulated by the restricting means can be increased, thereby making it difficult for the driven member to swing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the driven member from swinging when placed in the second driven region.

In addition, when the driven member follows the first driven region where a force to lift the other end side of the driven member is required, the displacement member is moved from the first position to the third position (first displacement region) where the restriction of the displacement member is released. When it is necessary to displace the displacement member, the restriction by the restriction means is released in the first displacement region, so that the movement of the displacement member can be prevented from being slowed down by the restriction means. Therefore, even when the displacement force of the driven member is required, the displacement force of the driven member can be ensured.

In the gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member includes a protrusion that protrudes from a position facing the wall, and the tip of the protrusion comes into contact with the wall to displace the driven member. is regulated, and the displacement member is set to be able to displace the space between the driven member and the wall in the second displacement region, and the displacement member The gaming machine O4 is characterized in that at least a portion of the driven member overlaps with the driven member.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O2 or O3, the driven member is provided with a protrusion that protrudes at a position facing the wall, and the tip of the protrusion touches the wall. The displacement member is set to be movable in the space between the driven member and the wall in the displacement region at the end, and the displacement of the driven member is regulated in the direction in which the driven member and the wall face each other. Since at least a portion of the displacement member overlaps with the driven member, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from tilting to the side opposite to the wall portion. As a result, displacement of the displacement member in both axial directions can be restricted by the driven member and the wall, and rocking can be suppressed when the displacement member is displaced.

A gaming machine O5 in the gaming machine O4, wherein a side surface of the displacement member is brought into contact with the protrusion of the driven member in the second driven position.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine O4, the side surface of the displacement member is brought into contact with the protrusion of the driven member in the second driven position, so that the displacement member is moved from the first driven position to the second driven position. When the displacement member is displaced to the position, the outer edge can be brought into contact with the protrusion of the displacement member and stopped. Therefore, the projecting portion can serve both of the role of regulating the displacement of the driven member by coming into contact with the wall portion, and the role of assisting the stopping operation of the displacement member. Therefore, a space in which the displacement member and the driven member can be displaced can be secured.

In the gaming machine O5, one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base member, and when the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the direction of displacement of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member is is set in a direction toward the axis of the displacement member O6.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine O5, when the driven member has one end pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is placed at the second driven position, the driven member is connected to the displacement member. Since the displacement direction of the portion is set toward the axis of the displacement member, when the load of the driven member acts on the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the displacement member due to the load of the driven member. That is, when the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the relationship between the driven member and the displacement member can be set to a dead center relationship, so that displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed. As a result, the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

In the gaming machine O5, one end of the driven member is pivotally supported by the base portion, and when the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the direction of displacement of the connecting portion of the driven member with the displacement member is , and a direction in which a reaction force acts due to contact between the protruding portion and the displacement member, and a direction in which a reaction force acts is set in a direction toward the axis of the displacement member.

According to the game machine O7, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine O5, when the driven member has one end pivotally supported by the base member and the displacement member is disposed at the second driven position, the displacement member of the driven member and the The combined direction of the displacement direction of the connecting part and the direction in which the reaction force acts due to the contact between the protruding part and the displacement member is set toward the axis of the displacement member, so that the load on the driven member is reduced. When acting on the displacement member, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the displacement member due to the load of the driven member. That is, when the displacement member is placed in the second driven position, by directing the direction of the force acting on the displacement member from the driven member toward the axis of the displacement member, the direction in which the displacement member rotates about the pivot portion is set. It is possible to suppress the generation of force. As a result, the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced by an external force other than the driving means at the second driven position.

In the gaming machines O1 to O7, the protruding portion is arranged with a predetermined gap from the wall, and is brought into contact with the wall when the displacement member comes into contact with it. Machine O8.

Here, if the protruding portion of the driven member and the wall portion are constantly in contact with each other, it may create resistance when the displacement member is displaced by the driving means, making it difficult to stably displace the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine O8, the protrusion is disposed with a predetermined gap from the wall, and when the displacement member comes into contact with the wall, the projection is brought into contact with the wall, so that the displacement member is moved to the second driven position. When the displacement member is displaced, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from swinging, and it is also possible to suppress the protrusion and the bulge from becoming resistance during the displacement.

<About the concept of the invention using the lower displacement member 440 as an example>
a decorative member formed of a light-transmitting material at least partially capable of transmitting light from the rear side when viewed from the front; and a decorative member disposed on the rear side of the decorative member in a state that it can be displaced on a plane parallel to the front side; a receiving part capable of receiving and holding a game ball, and a light emitting means disposed on the back side of the decorative member and capable of emitting light toward a displacement area of the receiving part; The means is disposed on the back side of the receiving section or between the decorative member and the receiving section, and is configured to emit light emitted from the light emitting means by the receiving section or a game ball received in the receiving section. A game machine P1 characterized in that the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is partially varied by blocking or reflecting the light.

Conventionally, a decorative member is made of a light-transmitting material that can transmit light from the back side at least in part when viewed from the front, and the decorative member is disposed on the back side of the decorative member in a state that it can be displaced on a plane parallel to the front side. A gaming machine is known that is equipped with a receiving section that can receive and hold game balls (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-166997). According to this gaming machine, by moving the receiving part after receiving and holding the game ball in the receiving part, it is possible to perform an effect in which the game ball is moved as the receiving part moves.

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the receiving section is disposed on the back side of the decorative member, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize the receiving section and the position of the game ball received in the receiving section. Therefore, if the receiving section moves after a game ball has been received (held) in the receiving section, the player cannot tell in which direction the receiving section and the game ball received (held) in the receiving section have moved. There was a problem in that it was difficult for the player to grasp the position of the game balls received in the receiving section.

On the other hand, the gaming machine P1 is provided with a light emitting means that is arranged on the back side of the decorative member and can emit light toward the displacement area of the receiving part, and the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the receiving part or The amount of light emitted from the decorative member is partially reduced by blocking or reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means by the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion, which is disposed between the member and the receiving portion. Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the receiving part or the decorative member located on the front side of the game ball received in the receiving part is different from the amount of light emitted from the decorative member located at other positions. By making the light intensity different, the player can be made aware that the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion where the light intensity differs.

To explain in detail, when the light emitting means is arranged on the back side of the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part, so that the receiving part or the receiving part The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received can be made darker than other parts of the decorative member. As a result, the player can be made aware that the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is small (dark).

On the other hand, when a light emitting means is disposed between the decorative member and the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part, so that the receiving part or The amount of light emitted from the decorative member on the front side of the game ball received in the receiving part can be made brighter than other parts of the decorative member. As a result, the player can be made aware that the receiving portion or the game ball received in the receiving portion is located on the back side of the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is large (bright).

In the game machine P1, the receiving portion is formed below the center of the game ball held in the receiving portion in the direction of gravity, and the light emitting means is approximately the same as the center of the game ball held in the receiving portion. A gaming machine P2 characterized in that a light emitting part is arranged at a height of , and a light transmitting part of the decorative member is formed at a higher position than the light emitting part of the light emitting means.

Here, in a structure in which the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the decorative member, and the light is reflected or blocked by the receiving part or the game ball received in the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the decorative member. Not only that, but also the receiving part is irradiated with light, which makes it easier for the receiving part to reflect or block the light. Therefore, the brightness and darkness of the light formed by the difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member is affected by the receiving part, and the shape of the brightness and darkness becomes different from the outer shape of the game ball, and the amount of light is There was a risk that it would be difficult to recognize that game balls are arranged on the back side of different parts of the player.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the receiving part is formed below the center of the game ball held in the receiving part in the direction of gravity, and the light emitting means is provided in the receiving part. The light emitting part is arranged at approximately the same height as the center of the game ball being held, and the light transmitting part of the decorative member is formed at a higher position than the light emitting part of the light emitting means. It is possible to suppress the brightness and darkness of the light, which is formed by being emitted and blocked or reflected by the receiving portion, from passing through the light-transmitting portion of the decorative member and being formed on the front side of the decorative member. Thereby, the shape of the brightness and darkness of the light that is formed by passing through the light-transmitting portion of the decorative member can be brought close to the outer shape (circular shape) of the game ball. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the game balls are placed in areas with different amounts of light.

A gaming machine P3 in the gaming machine P1 or P2, wherein the receiving section is made of a light-transmitting material.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, since the receiving part is formed of a light-transmitting material, the light emitted from the light emitting means is not reflected or blocked by the receiving part. It can be suppressed. Thereby, when no game ball is received in the receiving portion, it is possible to suppress the formation of portions with different amounts of light in the light-transmitting portion of the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received in the receiving section, the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving section can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from gazing at the decorative member during the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving section, and allow the player to focus only on the displacement operation of the receiving section when the player wants to watch the decorative member.

The gaming machine P2 or P3 includes a connecting member made of a non-light-transmitting material and connected to one side of the receiving section in the displacement direction, and the light emitting means is provided on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving section. The connecting member is set to have a dimension in the displacement direction of the receiving portion larger than the displacement distance of the receiving portion, and is disposed on the back side of the light-transmitting portion of the decorative member, and the connecting member Accordingly, the gaming machine P4 is characterized in that the light emitting means and the decorative member are protruded or retracted between the facing parts.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P2 or P3, the gaming machine P4 includes a connecting member made of a non-light-transmitting material and connected to one side of the receiving part in the displacement direction, and the light emitting means is connected to the receiving part. The connecting member is arranged on the back side of the light-transmitting part of the decorative member, and the connecting member is set to have a dimension larger in the displacement direction of the receiving part than the displacement distance of the receiving part, and is arranged on the back side of the light-transmitting part of the decorative member. As the light emitting means and the decorative member are displaced, the area of light emitted from the decorative member can be changed as the receiving portion is displaced. That is, the connecting member can block the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the decorative member, and the area that blocks the light can be changed in accordance with the displacement of the receiving part. As a result, the receiving portion and the connecting member are displaced so as to protrude between the light emitting means and the decorative member, thereby making it possible to reduce the emission area of light emitted from the decorative member. As a result, the light emitting surface of the decorative member is made smaller, making it easier for the player to recognize the portion where the amount of light emitted from the decorative member by the receiving portion or the game ball received by the receiving portion is small.

A gaming machine P5 in the gaming machine P4, wherein the connecting member is a part of a driving means for driving the receiving section.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P4, the connecting member is a part of the driving means that drives the receiving section, so it has the role of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the receiving section, and the light emitting means. The connecting member can also serve the role of blocking light emitted from the connecting member. As a result, a space for arranging the driving means for driving the receiving portion can be secured.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving section, and the receiving section includes a displacement member that can be displaced from a game ball received in the receiving section, and The member is made of a non-light transmitting material and is movable in a position where it protrudes or retreats between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member, and when the game ball is received in the receiving portion, the A gaming machine P6, characterized in that it protrudes between the light emitting means and the decorative member facing each other.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the back side of the displacement area of the receiving section, and the receiving section is configured to hold a game ball that is received in the receiving section. The displacement member is made of a non-light-transmitting material and can be displaced in a position where it protrudes or retreats between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the game ball is placed in the receiving part. When received, it protrudes between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member, so that only when the game ball is held in the receiving part, the light emitted from the light emitting means is blocked by the displacement member and the game ball. Therefore, the player can recognize the position of the game ball by the shadow (dark part) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received in the receiving section, the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving section can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, the player is prevented from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on playing the game.

In the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving section, and the receiving section includes a displacement member that can be displaced from a game ball received in the receiving section, and The member is made of a non-light transmitting material and is movable in a position where it protrudes or retreats between the opposing light emitting means and the decorative member, and when the game ball is received in the receiving portion, the A game machine P7 characterized by protruding between a light emitting means and a game ball facing each other.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, the light emitting means is disposed on the front side of the displacement area of the receiving part, and the receiving part is configured to hold a game ball that is received in the receiving part. The displacement member is made of a non-light-transmitting material and can be displaced in a position where it protrudes or retreats between the light emitting means and the decorative member, and the game ball is placed in the receiving part. When the light emitting means and the game ball are received, the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the displacement member and the game ball only when the game ball is held in the receiving part. Therefore, the player can recognize the position of the game ball from the bright part (the part where the amount of light is larger than other parts) formed on the decorative member. Therefore, when the game ball is not received in the receiving section, the positioning operation and return operation of the receiving section can be performed without being noticed by the player. As a result, the player is prevented from gazing at the decorative member at the wrong timing, and the player can concentrate on playing the game.

In this case, it is preferable that the displacement member is generally made of a metal material whose light reflectance is higher than that of a resin material, or that its outer surface is coated with metal. This makes it easier to reflect the light irradiated to the displacement member, makes it clear that there is a difference in the amount of light emitted from the decorative member, and makes it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball.

A gaming machine P8 in the gaming machine P7 is characterized in that the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape concave toward the back side.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P7, since the displacement member is formed in a concave curved shape concave toward the back side, the light irradiated from the light emitting means to the displacement member is reflected toward the decorative member side. When doing so, the reflected light can be made difficult to diffuse (light can be easily focused). Therefore, by collecting the light reflected by the displacement member and emitted from the decorative member, the difference in the amount of light can be clearly distinguished, making it easier for the player to recognize the position of the game ball.

In gaming machines P1 to P8, gaming machine P9 is characterized in that the decorative member is formed to bulge in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines P1 to P8, the decorative member is formed to bulge in a convex shape in the irradiation direction of the light emitting means, so that the light from the light emitting means transmitted from the decorative member is reduced. It can be spread easily. As a result, it is possible to magnify the areas where the amounts of light formed by the game balls received in the receiving section differ and make the player aware of them, so that the player can recognize the position of the game balls received in the receiving section. It's easy to do.

In gaming machines 01 to P9, gaming machine P10 is characterized in that the light emitting means is capable of emitting light of at least two or more colors.

According to the gaming machine P10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines P1 to P9, the light emitting means is capable of emitting at least two or more colors. can be changed.

For example, if the light emission is divided into a first area with a first emission color and a second area with a second emission color, and the receiving part is placed in the first area, the expectation of a jackpot will be increased. Make it expensive. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to watch the position of the game ball held in the receiving section.

In this case, the range of the first region and the range of the second region can be changed by simply changing the emitted light color, so by changing the emitted light range, multiple forms of presentation can be created. This makes it easier for players to enjoy the game.

Gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I13, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, Gaming machine Q1, wherein the gaming machine in any one of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P10 is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I13, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, A gaming machine Q2 characterized in that in any one of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

Gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B8, C1 to C14, D1 to D8, E1 to E12, F1 to F10, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, I1 to I13, J1 to J9, K1 to K12, L1 to L10, A gaming machine Q3 characterized in that in any one of M1 to M10, N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines are known that include a gaming board, a back member disposed on the back side of the gaming board, and a fixing member disposed on the back side of the back member. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-33603).
However, the gaming machine described above has a problem in that it requires a large number of work steps to arrange the fixing member on the back surface member.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the work process of arranging the fixing member on the back member.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the game machine according to technical idea 1 includes a game board, a back member disposed on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member disposed on the back side of the back member. , which is disposed between the opposing sides from the game board to the back surface member, and is operable from the outside of the opposing space between the game board and the back surface member on the back side of the game board. The fixing member includes a protrusion that is at least partially disposed on the front side of the back member and that engages with the displacement member, and the protrusion and the displacement member engage with each other. , the fixing member is disposed on the back member.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, and includes a first member disposed between the gaming board and the back surface member, and the first member has the above-mentioned structure on the back side of the first member. A displacement member is provided.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, in which the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to the facing surface of the back member and the game board.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the number of work steps for disposing the fixing member on the back member can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the fixing member can be disposed on the back member without being obstructed by the first member.
According to the game machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, it is possible to secure a space between the facing displacement member and the game board.
<Sign>
10 pachinko machines
11 outer frame
13, 25013 , 26013, 27013, 28013, 29013, 30013, 31013 game board
60, 34060, 42060 base board (gaming board)
60a first opening (second opening)
60b second opening
60c decorative member (first decorative means)
34060d recess (first opening)
35060e sliding hole (first opening)
63 General prize opening (inlet)
86 center frame (frame-shaped member)
86b protrusion (third member)
86b1 opening
86b3 detection device (detection means)
86b5 standing part (folding piece)
100, 42100 , 43100, 44100 board box
43101, 45101 engaged part (engaging part)
150 general winning opening unit (board member)
151 Main body (front member)
154, 10154, 25154 decorative member (second decorative means)
151a, 26151a, 27151a, 28151a, 31151a Slanted surface (slanted part)
151b, 28151b, 29151b, 30151b recess (recess)
151b2 recessed bottom
155 protrusions
300, 15300 , 15300, 16300, 17300, 18300, 19300, 20300, 21300, 22300, 23300, 24300, 42300, 43300, 44300 Rear case (back member)
301c first opening
301d second opening (opening)
310, 14310 , 15310, 16310, 18310, 19310, 20310, 22310, 23310, 24310 engaging member (displacement member)
311, 14311 , 15311, 16311, 18311, 22311, 24311 elastic piece (first piece)
315, 14315, 15315 controls
315a, 14315a slope (suppression means)
24316 Engagement part (first protrusion)
320, 18320, 20320, 22320, 23320, 24320 fixing member
322, 18322 , 22332, 23332, 24332 engaged part (engaging part)
24335 storage section
24335a Step part (second protrusion)
340 shaft support material (fixed member)
19360, 24360 controls
410 base member
411e Curved wall section (regulating means, wall section)
411f collection port (recovery member)
422 cam member (part of support structure, displacement member)
430 link member (part of support structure, driven member)
4441g Engagement wall (insertion member)
11450 Decorative parts
11451a transmission part
460 transmission mechanism
2464 Movable rack (reverse member)
465 transmission gear (pinion gear)
466 rack (rack member)
11466e shielding plate (connecting member)
467,12467 Ball receiving part (displacement member, receiving part)
12467c 1st piece (main body)
12467d 2nd piece (displacement part)
12467e 3rd piece (shielding part)
11491 control board (board member)
11491a light emitter (light emitting part)
3468 1st link member (reverse member)
470 base member (base member)
471a standing wall (wall part)
481b1 recess
491 control board (light emitting means)
492 displacement member (regulating means)
520 base plate (second base member)
525 rolling part (passage member)
525b protrusion (resistance means)
540 Sorting member (regulating means, sorting means, integrated member)
540a leg (protrusion)
541 regulation plate (first appearance part, distribution means)
542 storage plate (second appearance part, flow state changing means)
550, 13550 , 32550, 34550, 35550, 36550, 37550 Special prize device (route unit)
551 first unit (first guide route, first member)
552 second unit (second guide route, second member)
561 1st acceptance section (1st prize opening)
562 2nd acceptance section (2nd prize opening)
563 3rd acceptance section (3rd prize opening)
564, 13564 , 32564, 34564, 35564, 41564 Front plate (first member)
564a guide part (projection wall)
564c, 41564c second convex part (part of guide means, convex part)
564b, 41564b first convex part (part of second guide means, second convex part)
13564 Front plate (first member)
13564b First convex part (protrusion)
13564c Second convex part (protrusion)
571, 13571 , 32571, 34571, 35571, 41571 base plate (second member)
571i, 41571i second recess (part of guide means, recess)
571h, 41571h first recess (part of second guide means, second recess)
13571 Base plate (second member)
13571b Fourth convex part (protrusion)
13571c 5th convex part (protrusion)
574a first receiving recess (third prize opening)
574b second receiving recess (third prize opening)
34579, 35579 support part (projection part)
40581a1 opening
40581a2 storage section
583a first solenoid (driving means)
583b first variable plate (variable plate, plate member)
584a second solenoid (driving means)
584b second variable plate (variable plate, plate member)
615 1st communication path (branch path)
616 2nd communication path (branch path)
622 central opening (opening, insertion part)
634 Second central opening (opening, insertion part)
700 rotation unit (first member)
7710 displacement member
7713 Ball receiving member (receiving part)
7720 Transmission member (transmission means)
7721 rotating member (main body)
7722 drive pin (pin part)
7723 arm member
7723a Driven groove (sliding groove)
730 Left side transmission member (rotation side transmission means, second member)
731 transmission mechanism (one-way clutch mechanism)
731a transmission gear (part of gear train)
731b transmission gear (part of gear train)
731c transmission gear (part of gear train)
731d transmission gear (part of gear train)
731e, 7730 load gear (load gear)
740 Right side transmission member (displacement side transmission means, first member)
741 rotating member (crank member)
741a protrusion (pin part)
742 arm member
742b 1st sliding groove (sliding groove)
760 box parts (lid parts)
770 lid member (displacement member, first member)
780 rotation regulating member (displacement regulating means)
800 rotating body (rotating member, second member)
810 base plate (fixed member)
811b communication hole (opening)
812b communication hole (second communication port)
820 LED base (light emitting means)
831 opening (first communication port)
870 opening/closing member (displacement member)
871 protrusion (part of displacement setting means, part of connection means)
892 sliding groove (part of displacement setting means, part of connection means)
KR1 1st ball throwing route (downstream route)
KR2 second ball throwing path (second branch path)
KR3 3rd ball throwing path (1st branch path)
SP4 biasing spring (biasing means)
KM4 drive motor (drive means)
OW1 one-way clutch (engaging means)
SK1 main route (first route, part of the guide route)
SK2 main route (first route, second route, part of the guide route, upstream route)
SK3 main route (second route, part of the guide route, downstream route)
SK4 main route (part of the guide route, detour)
SK5 main route (part of the guide route)
SK6 main route (part of the guide route)
SK7 main route (part of the guide route)
HK1 secondary route (part of the guide route)
HK2 secondary route (part of the guide route)
HK3 subroute (part of the guide route)
WK1 curved route (third route, part of the guide route, changed route)
SI shim member (adjustment means)

10 Pachinko machine 11 Outer frame 13, 25013, 26013, 27013, 28013, 29013, 30013, 31013 Game board 60, 34060, 42060 Base board (gaming board)
60a First opening (second opening)
60b Second opening 60c Decorative member (first decorative means)
34060d Recess (first opening)
35060e Sliding hole (first opening)
63 General prize opening (inlet)
86 Center frame (frame-shaped member)
86b Projection part (third member)
86b1 Opening 86b3 Detection device (detection means)
86b5 Standing part (folding piece)
100, 42100, 43100, 44100 Board box 43101, 45101 Engaged part (engaging part)
150 General winning opening unit (board member)
151 Main body (front member)
154, 10154, 25154 Decorative member (second decorative means)
151a, 26151a, 27151a, 28151a, 31151a Slanted surface (slanted part)
151b, 28151b, 29151b, 30151b Recess (recess)
151b2 Recessed bottom surface 155 Protrusion 300, 15300, 15300, 16300, 17300, 18300, 19300, 20300, 21300, 22300, 23300, 24300, 42300, 43300, 44300 Back case (back member)
301c First opening 301d Second opening (opening)
310, 14310, 15310, 16310, 18310, 19310, 20310, 22310, 23310, 24310 Engagement member (displacement member)
311, 14311, 15311, 16311, 18311, 22311, 24311 Elastic piece (first piece)
315, 14315, 15315 Operator 315a, 14315a Inclined surface (suppression means)
24316 Engagement part (first protrusion)
320, 18320, 20320, 22320, 23320, 24320 Fixed member 322, 18322, 22332, 23332, 24332 Engaged part (engaged part)
24335 Accommodating part 24335a Step part (second protrusion)
340 Axial support material (fixed member)
19360, 24360 Operator 410 Base member 411e Curved wall portion (regulating means, wall portion)
411f Collection port (recovery member)
422 Cam member (part of support structure, displacement member)
430 Link member (part of support structure, driven member)
4441g Engagement wall (insertion member)
11450 Decorative member 11451a Transparent part 460 Transmission mechanism 2464 Movable rack (reverse member)
465 Transmission gear (pinion gear)
466 rack (rack member)
11466e Shielding plate (connecting member)
467,12467 Ball receiving part (displacement member, receiving part)
12467c 1st piece (main body)
12467d Second piece (displacement part)
12467e Third piece (shielding part)
11491 Control board (board member)
11491a Luminous body (light emitting part)
3468 First link member (reverse member)
470 Base member (base member)
471a Standing wall (wall part)
481b1 Recess 491 Control board (light emitting means)
492 Displacement member (regulating means)
520 Base plate (second base member)
525 Rolling part (passage member)
525b Protrusion (resistance means)
540 Distribution member (regulating means, distribution means, integral member)
540a Leg (protrusion)
541 Regulation plate (first appearance part, distribution means)
542 Storage plate (second appearance part, flow state changing means)
550, 13550, 32550, 34550, 35550, 36550, 37550 Special winning device (route unit)
551 First unit (first guide route, first member)
552 Second unit (second guide route, second member)
561 1st acceptance section (1st prize opening)
562 2nd acceptance section (2nd prize opening)
563 3rd acceptance section (3rd prize opening)
564, 13564, 32564, 34564, 35564, 41564 Front plate (first member)
564a Guide part (projection wall)
564c, 41564c Second convex part (part of guide means, convex part)
564b, 41564b First convex part (part of second guide means, second convex part)
13564 Front plate (first member)
13564b First convex part (protrusion)
13564c Second convex part (protrusion)
571, 13571, 32571, 34571, 35571, 41571 Base plate (second member)
571i, 41571i Second recess (part of guide means, recess)
571h, 41571h First recess (part of second guide means, second recess)
13571 Base plate (second member)
13571b Fourth convex part (protrusion)
13571c 5th convex part (protrusion)
574a First receiving recess (third prize opening)
574b Second receiving recess (third prize opening)
34579, 35579 Support part (projection part)
40581a1 Opening 40581a2 Accommodating portion 583a First solenoid (driving means)
583b First variable plate (variable plate, plate member)
584a Second solenoid (driving means)
584b Second variable plate (variable plate, plate member)
615 First communication path (branch path)
616 Second communication path (branch path)
622 Central opening (opening, insertion part)
634 Second central opening (opening, insertion part)
700 Rotating unit (first member)
7710 Displacement member 7713 Ball receiving member (receiving part)
7720 Transmission member (transmission means)
7721 Rotating member (main body)
7722 Drive pin (pin part)
7723 Arm member 7723a Driven groove (sliding groove)
730 Left side transmission member (rotation side transmission means, second member)
731 Transmission mechanism (one-way clutch mechanism)
731a Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731b Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731c Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731d Transmission gear (part of gear train)
731e, 7730 Load gear (load gear)
740 Right side transmission member (displacement side transmission means, first member)
741 Rotating member (crank member)
741a Protrusion (pin part)
742 Arm member 742b first sliding groove (sliding groove)
760 Box member (lid member)
770 Lid member (displacement member, first member)
780 Rotation regulating member (displacement regulating means)
800 Rotating body (rotating member, second member)
810 Base plate (fixed member)
811b Communication hole (opening)
812b Communication hole (second communication port)
820 LED base (light emitting means)
831 Opening (first communication port)
870 Opening/closing member (displacement member)
871 Projection (part of displacement setting means, part of connection means)
892 Sliding groove (part of displacement setting means, part of connection means)
KR1 1st ball throwing route (downstream route)
KR2 2nd ball throwing path (2nd branch path)
KR3 3rd ball throwing path (1st branch path)
SP4 Biasing spring (biasing means)
KM4 Drive motor (drive means)
OW1 One-way clutch (engaging means)
SK1 Main route (first route, part of the guide route)
SK2 Main route (first route, second route, part of the guide route, upstream route)
SK3 Main route (second route, part of guide route, downstream route)
SK4 Main route (part of the guide route, detour)
SK5 Main route (part of the guide route)
SK6 Main route (part of the guide route)
SK7 Main route (part of the guide route)
HK1 Secondary route (part of the guide route)
HK2 Subroute (part of the guide route)
HK3 Secondary route (part of the guide route)
WK1 Curved route (third route, part of the guide route, changed route)
SI shim member (adjustment means)

Claims (3)

A game machine comprising a game board, a back member disposed on the back side of the game board, and a fixing member disposed on the back side of the back member,
a displacement member disposed between the opposing sides from the game board to the back member, the displacement member being operable from the outside of the opposing space from the game board to the back member on the back side of the game board;
The fixing member has at least a portion disposed on the front side of the back member and includes a protrusion that engages with the displacement member, and the protrusion and the displacement member engage with each other so that the fixation member is arranged on the back member. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a first member disposed between the gaming board and the back surface member, and the displacement member is disposed on the back surface side of the first member. . 3. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the displacement member is slidably displaced on a plane parallel to a surface facing the back member and the game board.

Images